\9r^ 


^.  ^giL^ 


'^r^. 


■♦'■I'  »^ 


^^, 


*  ^ 


I-1? 
^■"i-; 


iw4 


a  ...i*^ 


(K 


GIFT  or 

Harold  Wheeler 


I  \ 


a.  u^  oOf- 


■;>5h_ 


c 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/firstbool<inspaniOOsalkrich 


EIEST  BOOK  IN  SPANISH; 


OB, 


A  PRACTICAL  INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  STUDY 


OP  WX>        >   »  J    5      ->,}'*] 


»    ♦ 


SPANISH  LANGUAGE: 


CONTAININO 

FULL   INSTRUCTIONS  IN  PRONUNCIATION,   A  GRAMMAR;   EXER 

CISES  ON  THE  OLLENDORFF   METHOD  OF  CONSTANT 

IMITATION  AND  REPETITION;    READING 

LESSONS,  AND  A  VOCABULARY. 

THE    WHOLE    ADAPTED    FOR    THE    USB    OF    PRIVATE   LEARNERS,   01      FOR 
CLASSES   UNDER  AN   INSTRUCTOR. 


BY   JOSEPH    SAIHEID,  A.M., 

Author  of  "  A  Compendiun^  of  Classical  Antiquities,"  etc. 


NE  W    y  ORK: 

HARPER    &    BROTHERS'    PUBLISHERS 
1865. 


RESERVATION 
OPY  ADDED 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  184^1,  by 

HARPER  &  BROTHERS, 

[n  the  Clerk's  OflBce  of  the  District  Court  for  the  Southern  District 

of  New  York. 


GIFT  OF 


PREFACE. 


The  Spanish  Language  has  never  been  so  extensively  taught  or  studi- 
ed in  our  country,  as  some  other  foreign  languages  :  this  lack  of  interest 
in  Spanish  cannot  be  occasioned  by  any  intrinsic  defect  in  the  language 
or  literature  itself;  for  whether  we  regard  its  metrical  or  prose  romances, 
its  ballads,  lyrics,  dramatic  poetry,  or  its  historical  works,  there  is  every 
inducement  to  become  acquainted  with  its  rich  Uterary  treasures. 

There  is  no  other  European  language  which  can  be  so  readily  acquired 
by  an  Anglo- American,  as  the  Spanish.  It  contains  but  one  sound  that 
has  not  almost,  if  not  quite,  its  exact  equivalent  in  English ;  and  this 
one  can  be  very  easily  learned.  UnHke  English  and  French,  it  is  not  en- 
cumbered with  silent  letters  (one  of  the  greatest  obstacles  in  acquiring 
the  right  pronunciation  of  those  languages) ;  nor  are  its  vowels  or  con- 
sonants liable  to  any  variation  in  the  quality  of  their  sound.  As  to  the 
proper  syllable  of  a  word  to  be  accented  in  pronunciation,  Spanish  pre- 
sents to  the  learner  no  diflficuity  whatever;  and  this  renders  it  far  more 
easy  of  acquirement  than  the  Itilian.  Indeed,  we  cm  hardly  conceive  of 
a  1  mguage  more  simple  and  philosophical  in  the  principles  of  its  orthoepy. 
In  the  departments  of  etymology  and  syntax,  no  modern  language  is 
more  regular.  The  exceptions  to  the  general  principles  are  few ;  and 
many  of  these  will  be  found  to  correspond  to  similar  exceptions  in  the 
grammar  of  our  own  language,  so  that  they  present,  of  course,  less  diffi- 
culty to  the  Engl  sh  learner. 

Perhaps  one  chief  reason  why  Spanish  has  not  received  as  much  atten- 
tion as  some  other  modern  tongues,  is  to  be  found  in  the  fact  that  there 
has  been  a  want  of  proper  inducements  in  the  shape  of  an  elementary 
instruction-book,  to  introduce,  as  it  were,  the  learner  to  the  language.  It 
has  hitherto  been  a  fault  of  most  English  Grammars  of  the  Spanish  lan- 
guage that  they  were  either  close  translations  of  French-Spanish  Gram- 
mars, and,  of  course,  not  adapted  to  the  wants  of  English  learners,  or 
written  by  Spanish  instructors,  who  however  well  acquainted  with  the 
principles  of  their  own  language,  have  not  understood  critically  the  pe- 
culiarities of  English  idioms  and  forms  of  construction.*  Grammar,  too, 
has  formerly  consisted  of  a  dry  set  of  etymological  forms  and  syntactical 

•  We  feel  bound  to  remark  here  that  most  of  these  Spanish  jjrammarians  do  not 
seem,  in  all  respects,  acquainted  with  their  own  language.  To  prove  this  assertion, 
we  need  only  refer  the  learned  inquirer  to  the  unauthorized  manner  in  which 
they  pronounce  the  particles  jwrywe,  atmque,  si'no  ;  and  To  the  practice  of  sooje  nf 
them  of  using  the  coujuoction  e  before  y  whea  a  cojisooaat  j  thus,  tUcya, 


968309 


IV.  PREFACl. 

rules,  a  tedious  detail  of  abstract  principles,  which  the  pupil  wa*  expected 
first  ol  all  to  commit  to  memory.  The  system,  now  known  as  the 
method  of  Professsor  Ollendorff,  in  which  the  language  is  taught  before 
the  grammatical  principles,  is  not  only  a  far  more  pleasant,  but  also  a 
far  more  thorough  method  of  acquiring  a  practical  knowledge  of  any 
foreign  tongue. 

We  think,  however,  that  Ollendorff  adheres  too  closely  to  this  latter 
method.  To  one  who  wishes  merely  to  learn  to  converse  in  a  foreign 
language,  "  Ollendorff's  New  Methods"  furnish  all  that  is  necessary  for 
this  end  ;  but  to  those  who  wish  to  acquire  the  knowledge  of  a  language 
both  for  practical  and  literary  purposes,  a  work  uniting  both  systems  will 
be  found  most  advantageous.*  And  such  a  work,  it  is  hoped,  will  be 
found  in  the  "  First  Book  in  Spanish,"  now  first  presented  to  the  pub- 
lic.    It  is  divided  into  six  parts : 

I. .  Orthoepy  and  Orthography  ;  containing,  in  a  very  few  pages, 
full  directions  for  the  right  pronunciation  and  syllabication  of  the  words 
of  the  language,  adapted  especially  to  those  who  are  their  own  instruct- 
ors. 

II.  General  Principles  of  Etymology  and  Syntax,  in  which  are 
taught  the  most  general  and  important  principles  of  the  language. 

III.  A  full  exposition  of  Etymology  and  Syntax,  in  which  the 
more  minute  rules  and  exceptions  are  clearly  explained.  To  Part  III. 
there  is  an  Appendix  which  treats  of  Spanish  Prosody;  Gender  of  Span- 
ish Nouns;  Idiomatic  Phrases;  Spanish  Abbreviations;  Money,  Weights 
and  Measures ;  Spanish  Proper  Names,  etc. 

IV.  Progressive  Exercises  in  translating  from  Spanish  into  Eng" 
lish,  and  from  English  into  Spanish  (according  to  the  Method  of  "  con- 
stant imitation  and  repetition"),  which  the  learner  commences  simulta- 
neously with  Part  II. ;  thus  he  gradually,  and  almost  imperceptibly, 
becomes  familiar  with  the  general  rules  of  Etymology  and  Syntax,  being 
able,  after  his  first  and  second  lessons,  to  form  sentences,  and  in  a  limited 
manner,  "  to  read,  write  and  speak"  in  the  Castilian  tongue 

V.  Reading  Lessons  in  Spanish^  beginning  with  very  simple  sen- 
tences and  progressively  introducing  the  peculiarities  of  the  idioms  and 
construction,  by  interesting  extracts  from  the  writings  of  Spaniards. 
The  marginal  notes  gradually  clear  away  all  difl&culties,  either  by  direct 
explanation,  or  by  reference  to  some  rule  or  remark  in  a  previous  part  of 
the  work. 

VI.  A  Vocabulary  of  words  used  in  the  Reading  Lessons,  alphabet! 
cilly  arranged,  properly  accented,  and  clearly  defined. 

It  will  thus  be  seen  that  this  single  volume  supplies  all  that  the  begin- 
ner needs :  a  treatise  on  pronunciation,  a  grammar,  exercises  for  transla 
tion  from  one  language  into  the  other,  a  reading-book,  and  dictionary. 


•  The  editors  of  the  American  edition  of  Ollendorff's  Method  seem  to  have  dig- 
oc^rered  this ;  as  two  of  them  have  appended  aSynopeis  of  Grammar  to  the  work. 


PREFACE.  V 

It  is  hoped,  therefore,  that  any  who  have  a  desire  to  become  acquainted 
with  Spanish  may  be  induced  to  enter  upon  the  study  of  this  delightful 
language,  especially  as  any  one  acquainted  with  English  Grammar,  by 
following  the  directions,  may,  in  a  comparatively  short  time,  be  able  to 
speak  and  read  Castilian,  without  any  other  instructor  than  this  "  First 
Book  in  Spanish."  After  having  carefully  studied  tnis  work,  he  will  be 
prepared,  with  the  aid  of  a  larger  dictionary,  to  enter  upon  the  perusal  of 
any  Spanish  writer. 

As  the  portion  of  our  volume  which  contains  the  Grammar  of  the  lan- 
guage may  seem  more  limited  in  size  than  works  on  grammar  in  general, 
we  deem  it  proper  to  state  that  not  a  single  established  rule  (or  exception 
to  a  rule)  of  Spanish  Etymology  or  Syntax  noticed  in  other  English- 
Spanish  Grammars,  is  here  omitted :  on  the  contrary,  much  will  be  found 
-n  the  present  work  that  is  not  contained  in  any  other  Spanish  Grammar. 
Let  any  one  compare  the  full  and  mmute  explanations  of  the  syntax  of 
the  verb,  (to  which  about  thirty  pages  are  devoted  in  Part  III.,)  with  what 
is  said  of  the  verb  in  any  other  grammar,  and  he  will  be  able  to  decide 
which  grammar  has  been  most  explicit.  The  manner  of  using  certain 
conjunctions  (pages  175 — 178),  observations  on  the  use  of  prepositions 
(pages  178 — 184),  the  distinction  between  the  verbs  ser  and  estar  (pages 
163 — 167),  and  the  summary  of  the  rules  of  gender  of  Spanish  nouns  with 
a  list  of  exceptions  (pages  191 — 198),  are  portions  of  the  work  which  will 
be  found  to  be  unusually  full,  and,  we  trust,  satisfactory.  The  rules  we  have 
adopted  for  distinguishing  the  gender  of  Spanish  nouns,  so  far  as  they 
regard  the  terminations  le,  umbre,  and  w,  have  never  before,  to  our  know- 
ledge, appeared  in  any  grammar  of  the  language.  In  our  readings  of 
Spanish  authors  we  long  since  noticed  that  nouns  terminating  in  vmbre 
and  ie  {except pie  and  its  compounds)  are  feminine;  and  from  an  actual 
examination  of  all  the  nouns  ending  in  w,  we  find  more  than  two-thirds  of 
these  are  also  feminine.  We  here  saw  (what  seems  to  have  been  overlook- 
ed by  others)  how  the  rules  for  distinguishing  gender  might  be  greatly 
simplified :  accordingly  we  have  stated  it  as  a  general  rule  (see  page  191) 
that  "  all  nouns  ending  in  a,  d,  ie,  umbre,  ion,  is,  or  cz,  (unless  they  may 
be  the  names  of  male  beings,)  are  feminine,"  and  that  all  that  do  not  thus 
terminate,  are  masculine.  Then  follows  a  complete  list  of  exceptions  to 
these  rules.  In  giving  this  fist  we  have  not  adopted  the  common  plan 
of  grammarians,  of  copying  such  exceptions  as  they  could  readily 
remember,  and  then  adding — '^and  many  others  which  the  pupil  will  learn 
by  noticing  the  usage  of  the  best  writers  ;^^  but  we  have  taken  the  toilsome 
course  of  examining  carefully  every  noun  in  the  "Diccionario  de  la 
AcADEMiA  EsPANOLA,"  and  placing  in  the  list  all  such  as  were  not  com- 
prehended in  the  general  rules.  If  any  other  similar  list  has  been  pub 
lished,  it  is  unknown  to  us. 

The  Reading  Lessons  are  chiefly  specimens  from  living  Spanish  wri- 
ters.   It  is  doubtless  better  th'  t  the  learner  should  at  first  thus  enter  upoii 

1* 


VI  PREFACE. 

the  reading  of  modem  Spanish,  leaving  the  older  Castilian  classical  wri« 
ters  for  a  more  advanced  stage  of  his  course.  Extracts  from  recent 
"  Manifiestos'^  of  General  Santa-Anna,  have  been  given,  as  specimens  of 
Mexican-Spanish.  In  order  that  the  learner  may  become  familiar  with 
the  different  methods  of  spelling  adopted  by  different  writers,  we  have  in 
general  followed  the  orthography  of  the  respective  authors  from  whom 
the  extracts  are  made. 

It  is  a  matter  of  regret  that  former  Grammars,  and  even  Scoane's  edition 
of  Neuman  and  Baretti's  Spanish  Dictionary,  have  approved  of  the  erro- 
neous practice  of  accenting  the  particles  jtJor9ue  (when  it  means  "  because"), 
aunque,  and  sino,  on  the  last  syllable.  This  practice  is  not  sanctioned  by 
any  respectable  Castilian  writer  of  prose  or  poetry,  nor  by  any  of  the  late 
editions  of  the  D  ictionary  of  the  Royal  Spanish  Academy.  Porgue  has  the 
last  syllable  long  only  when  it  is  used  as  an  interrogative  adverb  or  in  the 
sense  of  "  why ;"  thus :  iPorque  (pronounced  pore-kay')  no  bebe  V.  7 
Porque  (pronounced  pore-kay)  no  tengo  sed: — "  Why  do  you  not  drink  7 
Because  I  am  not  thirsty."  Aunque  and  sino  (whatever  Spanish  Gram- 
mars and  Spanish  instructors  may  say  to  the  contrary)  ought  never  to  be 
written  aunque  and  slno* 

The  present  work  has  been  submitted  to  the  examination  of  native 
Spanish  professors ;  and  it  may  not  be  improper  to  insert  here  the  opinion 
of  our  friend  Seiior  Molina,  for  many  years  an  instructor  in  Spanish. 

"  I  have  carefully  examined  the  MSS.  of  the  '  First  Book  in  Spanish' 
which  you  are  about  publishing,  and  it  has  afforded  me  extreme  pleasure 
to  find  that  the  Spanish  language  in  your  country  is  to  have  such  a  valu- 
able auxiliary.  I  can  with  truth  say  that  I  have  never  met  with  a  work 
professing  to  teach  any  foreign  language  which  combines  so  many  excel- 
lent qualities,  and  is  so  well  adapted  lor  all  classes  of  learners.  It  con- 
tains all  th.it  the  pupil  needs,  and  in  a  very  convenient  compass.  The 
judicious  arrangement  of  your  work  especially  pleases  me;  it  is  the  pre« 
cisd  manner  in  which  I  have  been  giving  instruction  to  classes  of  pupils 
in  English,  French,  and  Spanish  for  many  years  in  the  cities  of  Paris, 
London,  and  Madrid,  teaching  what  is  most  important  to  know,  both  of 
etymology  and  syntax,  first  (without  separating  these  departments  as  is 
commonly  done),  and  then  t  iking  up  the  more  particular  rules,  and  ex- 
ceptions to  general  rules,  afterwards.  Your  first  part,  on  Pronunciation, 
is  so  lacid  and  sim^ple,  that  even  a  private  learner,  by  following  your 
directions,  could  learn  to  speak  Castilian  with  more  elegance  than  one- 
hilf  dt't.'ie  natives  of  Spain.  Your  plan  of  placing  the  pupil  to  reading 
Spanish  as  he  progresses  with  the  grammar,  and  especially  your  mode 
of  constant  reference  ior  the  application  of  the  rules  of  grammar,  while  it 
is  all  tlie  more  agreeable  to  the  pupil,  will  be  the  means  of  thoroughly 
making  him  acqu  tinted  with  the  rules  of  Spanish  etymology  and  syntax, 
without  any  very  laborious  effort  on  his  part. 

"  Hitherto  there  has  been  but  little  done  in  your  country  to  promote 

*  We  are  glad  to  learn  that  Professor  Velasquez,  of  Columbia  College,  New  York, 
has  in  course  of  preparation  a  new  Dictionary  of  the  Spanish  Language.  From  his 
known  scholarship,  we  are  led  to  expect  a  dictionary  in  which  the  immense  num- 
her  of  errors  of  previous  lexicographers  will  be  corrected — a  dictionary  in  »M 
respects  worthy  of  this  noble  language. 


PREFACE.  Vll 

the  knowledge  of  the  Spanish  literature,  and  this  has,  without  doubt 
resulted  from  a  want  of  proper  books.  There  will  no  longer  be  any 
reason  for  such  an  excuse.  You  have  provided  a  book  which,  for  its 
simplicity,  distinctness,  and  completeness,  in  that  which  it  professes  to 
teach,  could  hardly  be  excelled.  You  deserve  and  will  receive  the  warm- 
est thanks  of  every  admirer  of  elegant  Castilian :  a  language,  in  the 
opinion  of  the  best  critics,  of  more  sweetness,  music,  elegance,  and  es 
pression  than  any  other  European  tongue." 

To  all  native  Spanish  gentlemen  who  have,  in  any  way,  encouraged  Ub 
in  our  work,  we  take  this  opportunity  of  making  our  grateful  acknow- 
ledgments. 

In  conclusion,  we  will  say  that  as  we  have  endeavored  to  perform  our 
task  f  tithfully,  we  trust  that  our  work  may  contribute  towards  increas- 
ing the  study  of  the  classic  language  of  Castile. 
July,  1848. 


TABLE    OF   CONIENTS, 


PART  I. 

ORTHOGRAPHY    AND    PRONUNCIATION.  Pag^ 

TTie  Spanish  Alphabet. — Sound  of  Simple  Vowels,         -           -  13 

Sound  of  the  Consonants,        -           -           -           -  13 — 16 

Different  Methods  of  Spelling  Spanish  Words,    -           -  17 

Sound  of  Diphthongs  and  Triphthongs,           -           -  -    18 

List  of  Diphthongs  and  Triphthongs,        -           -           -  19 

Syllabication,     -           -            -            -           -           -            -  -20 

Accentuation^          -------  21 — 23 

Punctuation,      -            -            -            -            -            -            -  -23 

Lessons  for  Pronunciation,            -           -           -           -  24 — 27 

Additional  remarks  on  the  Pronunciation  of  Spanish-Mexi- 
can— Manner  of  sounding  c,  z  and  U,            -           -  -    27 

PART  IL 

GENERAL    PRINCIPLES    OF    ETYMOLOGY    AND    SYNTAX. 
Parts  of  Speech. — Their  subdivisions  defined,     -  -  -    28—30 

Of  the  Article,  definite  and  indefinite. — Rules  for  their  use,  30 — 33 

Of  the  Noun. — Rules  for  distinguishing  the  gender  of  Nouns,    -  33 

Rules  for  forming  the  plural  number  of  Nouns,  -  -    34 

Cases  of  Nouns. — The  English  possessive  case,  hqw  ren- 
dered in  Spanish,         •■  -  -  -  -  -    35 

Of  the  Adjective. — Formation  of  the  plural  and  feminine  termina- 
tions,   -  -  -  -  -  -  -  -36 

Adjectives  used  as  Nouns,  -----  37 

Degrees  of  Comparison  of  Adjectives. — Rules  for  forming 
the  Comparative  and  Superlative,      .  -  .         38— 4C 

Of  the  Pronoun. — Personal  Pronouns. — Use  of  Usted  and  its  con- 
tractions,  v.,    Vjn.f  etc. — Direct   and  indirect  objective 
case  of  Personal  Pronouns,         -  -  -  _  40 

Declension  of  Persona)  Pronouns. — Rules  for  their  use,       41 — 44 
Possessive  Pronouns. — Their  declension,  -  -  -  -    44 

Rules  for  the  use  of  Possessive  Pronouns,  -  -    45 — 47 

Relative  Pronouns. — Their  declension,  -  -  -  -    47 

Rules  for  the  use  of  Relative  Pronouns,     -  -  -     48,  49 

Interrogative  Pronouns. — Rules  for  their  use,  -  -  -    49 

Demonstrative  Pronouns. — Their  declension. — Rules  for  their  use,  50—52 
Indefinite  Pronouns. — Manner  of  employing  them,         -  -    52 — 54 

Of  the    Verb. — Active-transitive,   Active-intransitive,   Reflective, 

Passive,  Neuter,  -  -  .-  -  -  -    55 

Mood?. —  Infinitive,  Indicative,  Imperative,  Subjunctive,  56 

'Tenses. — Present,  Imperfect,  Perfect- Definite,  Perfect-In- 


X  TABLE    OP   CONTENTS. 

Page 

definite,  First  and  Second  Pluperfect,  First  and  Second 
Future,      -------57 

Participles  and  Gerunds. — Conjugation. — Regular,  Irregu- 
lar, and  Auxiliary  Verbs,        -  -  -  -  -    58 

Conjugation  of  the  Auxiliary  Verb,  J^a6er,  -  -    59 — 62 

Conj  ugation  of  the        "  Verb,  <Ser,  -  -         62 — 65 

Conjugation  of  the        "         Verb,  Estar^  -  -    65 — 67 

Conjugation  of  the        "  Verb,  Tener,     -  -  67—70 

Conjugation  of  Regular  Verbs. — Tabular  View  of  Verb- 
endings,    -------    70—72 

Changes  in  tlie  Verb-ending. — Changes  in  Verb-root,  72,  73 

Paradigm  of  the  First,  Second  and  Third  Conjugations,      74 — 81 
Conjugation  of  Reflective  Verbs,  -  -  -  81 

Conjugation  of  Passive  Verbs,  -  -  -  -  82,  83 

Pronoun  se  used  instead  of  the  passive  voice,       -  -  84 

Verbs  conjugated  interrogatively  and  negatively,         -  -    85 

Irregular  Verbs,       ------  86 

Conjugation  of  Irregular  Verbs  Andar,  Contar^  etc.,  -        87 — 110 
Defective  Verbs. — Impersonal  Verbs,        -  -  -  111 

JToftcr  and  Aacer  used  impersonally,    -  -  -  112 

List  of  Irregular,  Defective  and  Impersonal  Verbs,  113—120 

List  of  Verbs  having  irregular  Past-Participles,        -  121 

Of  the  Adverb. —  Of  the  Conjunction^        -  -  -  -  122 

Of  the  Preposition. —  Of  the  Interjection^        -  -  -  123 

PART  III. 

ETYMOLOGY  AND  SYNTAX  MORE  FULLY  EXPLAINED. 

Of  the  Article.— "RxxXes  for  the  use  of  the  Definite  Article,  -  124,  125 
Omission  of  the  Definite  Article,         -        -  -  125,   126 

Omission  of  the  Indefinite  Article,  -  -  -    126 — 128 

Other  uses  and  omissions  of  Articles,  -  -  128 

Of  the  A^own.- Augmentatives,  Diminutives,  Titles  of  Respect,  129—131 

Of  the  Adjective. — Agreement  and  position  of  Adjectives,  -  131 — 133 
Rules  for  the  use  of  Comparatives,  Superlatives,  etc.,  133 — 135 
List  of  Numerals,  cardinal  and  ordinal,  -  -    135—137 

Rules  for  the  use  of  Numeral  Adjectives,    -  -  137,   138 

Of  the  Pro72/mn.— Personal  Pronouns  and  Rules  for  their  use,  138—142 
Peculiar  use  of  other  Pronouns,  -  -  -  -  142 

Of  the  Fer6.— Rules  for  the  agreement  of  the  Verb  with  its  sub- 
ject,   142—144 

Mood  and  Tenses  of  Verbs. — Rules  for  the  use  of  the  In- 
finitive, Gerund,  and  Participle,  -  -  -  144 — 146 
Tenses  of  the  Indicative  Mood.— Rules  for  their  use,  146— 150 
The  Imperative  Mood, — Rules  for  its  use,  -  -  150,  151 
The  Tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  Mood.— Rules  for  their  use,  151—157 
The  Passi'rR  Verb,  and  rules  for  its  use,  -          -          -    157,  15S 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS.  xi 

The  Regimen  of  Verbs. — Rules  for  the  Regimen  of  Verbs,  158 — 161 

Verbs  followed  by  certain  Prepositions,              -  -     161 — 163 

On  the  use  of  the  Verbs  ser  and  estary         -           -  163—166 

Idiomatic  use  of  certain  Verbs,    -           -           -  -    166 — 169 

Qfihe  Adverb. — Rules  for  the  use  of  Adverbs,      -           -  169 — 171 

List  and  explanation  of  certain  Adverbial  Phrases,  -    172,    173 

Classification  of  Adverbs,    -           -                        -  174 

Of  the  Conjunction. — Classification  of  Conjunctions,  -  -    174,    175 

Rules  for  the  use  of  certain  Conjunctions,             -  175 — 178 

Of  the  Preposition. — Observations  on  their  use,          -  -    l78 — 184 

Of  the  Interjection. — Observations  on  its  use,        -            -  184 

APPENDIX  TO  PART  III. 
Number  I.       Of  Prosody. — Pronunciation,    -  -  -  185 

Of  Diphthongs  and  Triphthongs,    -  -  186 

Of  Verse  and  Rhyme. — Examples  for  scanning,  187 — 190 
Number  II.     A  Summary  of  the  Rules  of  Gender  of  Spanish 

Nouns,  -----  191 

List  of  Exceptions  to  the  general  rules  of  Gender,  192—197 
Numher  III.   Idiomatic  use  of  certain  Adjectives  and  Verbs, 

with  Prepositions.— A  list  of  them,     -  198—203 

A  List  of  the  most  common  Idiomatic  Phrases,  204—218 
A  List  of  the  most  common  Abbreviations,  -  219 — 221 
Spanish  Money,  Weights  and  Measures,    -  222 — 224 

Spanish  Proper  Names. — Geographical  Names,  225 — 227 
Names  applied  to  persons  from  the  place  of 

nativity,       -----    227,   228 
Christian  Names  of  Men,  -  -  228—230 

Christian  Names  of  Women,  -  -  -  230 

PART   IV. 

SPANISH   AND    ENGLISH   EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION. 
Section  First  to  Section  Seventeenth,  with  Rules  and  Remarks 
to  illustrate  various  Idioms  and  peculiarities  of  construc- 
tion, -  -  -  -  .  .  .    231—301 


Number  IV. 
Number  V. 
Number  VI. 
Number  VII. 


PART   V. 

SPANISH   READING   LESSONS,  WITH   NOTES    IN   ENGLISH. 

First  Section. — Easy  Sentences,             -            -           -  -            302 

I.  Short  Sentences,          -           -           -            -  -      303 

II.  Spanish  and  English.— III.  The  Weather,  -           304 

IV.  The  Seasons.— V.  The  Country,        -           -  -      305 

VI.  A  Journey. — VII.  Miscellaneous  Sentences,  -           306 

Second  Section. — Short  and  Simple  Anecdotes,  etc.,          -  •      307 

VIIT.  Ga  ling  and  Lo6ihg.<->IX.  A  good  Reason  for 


X31  TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 

writing  a  long  Letter. — X.  Rewarding  a  dull 
writer.— XI.  Early  Rising,         -           -           -  308 
XII.  A  Singular  Edict.— XIII.  Periodicals  in  the  Uni- 
ted States.— XIV.  Sagacity  of  a  Dog,        -           -  309 
XV.  Thales'  Sage  Answers.— XVT.  Simplicity  of  a  Child,  310 
XVII.  The  Kings  of  Former  Times.— XVIII.  An  Irish- 
man's Conjecture,           -           -           -            -  311 

XIX   The  Force  of  Shame. — XX.  An  Accommodating 
Wife.  —  XXI.  An   Invention    of  questionable 

*         Utility,           -           -           -           -           -           -  212 

Third  Section. — Lessons  taken  from  "  Deberes  de  los  Hombres,"  313 

XXII.  Filial  Affection, 313 

'    XXIIl.  Respect  for  Old  Age,    An  Anecdote,  -           -           -  315 

XXIV.  Friendship.— XXV.  Reading  and  Study,            -  316 

XXVI.  Selecting  a  Profession,             -           -           -           -  317 
XXVII.  Ambition  to  be  Restrained.— XXVIII.  Repenting 

of  our  Faults, 318 

XXIX.  Gratitude,         -----.  319 

XXX.  Pardon  to  Enemies,           -           -           -           -  320 

Fourth  Section,          ---.---  321 

XXXI.  No  Hereditary  Titles  in  the  United  States,           -  321 

XXXII.  Increase  of  Population  of  the  United  States,           -  322 

XXXIII.  The  Magnetic  Telegraph  the  Invention  of  a  Spaniard,  323 

XXXIV.  The  First  Steamboat  (at  Barcelona,  A.  D.  1543),  324 
XXXV.  Washmgton.    By  E.  J.  Gomez,    -           -           -  324 

XXXVI.  Pedro  Lopez  de  Ayala.        By  M.  Galo  de  Cuendas,  326 

XXXVII.  Miguel  de  Cervantes.          By  M.  Galo  de  Cuendas,  326 

XXXVIII.  Epitome  of  the  History  of  Spain.  By  Jos4  de  Cadalso,  328 

XXXIX.  Critics.                                         By  Jos6  de  Cadalso,  331 

XL.  American  Independence.                  By  E.  J.  Gomez,  333 

XLL  A  Visit  to  the  Tomb  of  Washington.      «         "  335 

Fifth  Section,             -            -            -            -            -            -            -  337 

XLII.  The  Maiden  of  Narni.    A  Tale,    -           -           -  337 
XLIII.  Extracts  from  a  ^^  Manifiesto"  of  General  Santa- An- 
na (Sept.  16th,  1847),            .           -           -           -  341 
XLI V.  Extracts  from  another  "  Manifiesto"  of  Santa- Anna 

(Oct.  22d,  1847),  -           -           -           -           -  343 

XLV.  Ingratitude.    By  Teodoro  de  Almeyda,         -           -  346 
XL VI.  The  Bear,  Monkey,  and  Hog.— A  Poeti  c  Fable.  By 

T.  de  Iriarte, 347 

•     PART  VL 

VOCABULARY. 

Abbreviations  used  in  Vocabulary,  -           -          -          -           -  350 

Vocabulary  of  Words  used  in  the  Reading  Lessons,     -          -  351 


PART   L 

ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  PRONUNCIATION. 


THE   SPANISH  ALPHABET.     .  ;  ;  ; 

1.  The  Spanish  Alphabet  conLaiils  twenty-eight  charai> 
ters  or  letters ;  a,  b,  c,  cA,  d^  -e,/,  0y  h,  i^^j:  k^d^  IiyMt  n',  i5,.'f^ 

2.  Of  these  letters,  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  are  always  vowels ;  y  is 
also  a  vowel  when  it  ends  a  syllable  or  word,  or  when  it 
stands  alone :  the  other  letters  are  consonants,  as  also  y 
when  it  begins  a  syllable  or  word.  The  consonants  are 
divided  into  semi-vowels  and  mutes  ;  the  semi-vowels  being, 
/,  A,  Z,  II J  w,  71,  n,  r,  5,  X ;  and  the  mutes,  b,  c,  ck,  d,  g,  y,  ^', 
p,  q,  t,  V,  z. 

SOUND    OF    THE    SIMPLE    VOWELS. 

3.  A,  in  Spanish,  has  the  sound  of  a  in  the  English  word 

k  far. 

^^  This  sound  it  retains  in  every  position,  not  varying  as  in  the 
English  words,  fare,  fat,  Jar, Jail,  swallow,  many,  courage,  mustard,  in  no 
two  of  which  the  a  has  precisely  the  same  sound. 

4.  E,  has  the  sound  of  a  in  made  or  e  in  they. 

5.  I,  has  the  sound  of  ee  in  see  or  i  in  machine.     Y,  when 
vowel,  has  the  same  sound. 

6.  0,  has  the  sound  of  o  in  go. 

7.  U,  has  the  sound  of  oo  in  mood  or  u  in  ritde. 

SOUND    OF    THE    CONSONANTS. 

8.  B,  F,  K,  L,  M,  N,  P,  sound  as  in  English. 

9  C,  before  a,  o,  or  w,  or  before  a  consonant,  sounds  like 
k ;  that  is,  like  c,  in  the  English  word,  cart ;  as,  carne.  pooo, 
cuTia,  creo  ;  pronounced  kar'-ney.,  po-ko^  koo  nah.^  kray  o. 

2  •  (13) 


14  SPANISH   ALPHABET. 

10.  C,  before  g,  or  i,  sounds  like  th  in  the  English  word 
think ;  as,  cecina^  cima  ;  pronounced  thay-thee -nah^  thee'-mah. 

11.  CH,  is  considered  as  one  letter  in  Spanish,  and  is 
always  sounded  like  ch  in  the  English  word  church ;  as, 
noch^^  chapa ;  pronounced  nd-chay^  chah'-pah. 

12.  D,  has  not  exactly  the  same  sound  in  Spanish  that 

it  has  in  English.     In  the  latter,  it  is  formed  by  touching 

the  tongue  to  the  roof  of  the  mouth :  in  Spanish,  the  end 

of  the?  tongue  st^ik^s'  ti^e*  upper  teeth :  it  has  then  a  sound 

nearly  liie.  .<A  in  tjie  English  words  than^  though. 

|^**A  pe/sbRjcan  '^Eydly^faij  io  utter  the  Spanish  sound  of  the  d,  if  he 
pronounce  it  as  here  explained,  by  touching  the  tongue  to  the  lower  part 
of  the  upper  teeth,  instead  of  the  roof  of  the  mouth. 

13.  G,  before  a^  o,  u,  or  a  consonant,  sounds  hard,  as  in 
the  English  words  gate^  go,  goose,  grow ;  as,  goce,  greba, 
gula ;  i[iTono\xncedgo'-ihay,gray'-bahjgoO'lah.    (See  14.) 

14.  GU,  in  the  syllables  gice  and  gui,  unless  there  be  a 
diaeresis  (see  60)  over  the  u,  is  always  sounded  like  the 
simple  g  hard,  as  in  the  English  words  guest,  guilt ;  as, 
gueta,  guita,  pronounced  gay'-tah,  gee'-tah.  When  the  diae- 
resis is  over  the  u,  it  is  not  mute,  but  has  its  proper  sound  : 
as,  agiielo ;  pronounced  ah-goo-ail' -o,  or  ah-gway'-lo. 

15.  G,  before  e  or  z,  has  always  the  guttural  sound  of  the 
Spanish  y.    (See  17.) 

16.  H,  is  never  pronounced,  but  is  always  a  silent  letter ; 
as,  hace,  higo ;  pronounced  ah'-thay,  ee-go. 

17.  J,  has  always  a  guttural  sound,  somewhat  like  the 
English  h  in  alcohol,  strongly  aspirated.  But  this  is  not 
an  exact  equivalent  to  the  Spanish  sound  which  is  produced 
by  breathing  strongly  (as  when  one  would  give  additional 
force  to  the  h  in  host),  and,  by  an  effort  of  the  palate,  mak- 
ing the  air  gently  strike  the  roof  of  the  mouth. 

g."^"  It  is  the  guttural  sound  of  the  ck  in  the  German  words  nadit  and 
nicht^  and  of  the  ck  in  the  Scotch  words  loch^  clocks  and  can  therefore  be 
learned  from  any  German  or  Scotchman.  If  we  bend  the  tongue  so  as  to 
form  an  arch  which  presses  against  the  roof  of  the  mouth,  and  produce  a 


SPANISH   ALPHABET.  15 

Bound  by  breathing  and  lowering  the  tongue,  this  sound  will  be  that  of 
hard  g^  as  it  is  called  in  English.  If,  again,  we  press  the  tongue  against 
the  roof  of  the  mouth  in  the  same  way,  and  breathe  forcibly  without 
changing  ts  position,  we  produce  the  exact  guttural  sound  of  the  Span- 
ish J.  The  learner  must  keep  in  mind  that  the  sound  of  the  Spanish^ 
before  c,  or  t,  is  the  same  guttural  sound. 

1 8.  K,  is  not  used  in  Spanish,  being  found  only  in  for- 
eign words  when  it  is  sounded  like  the  same  letter  in 
English. 

19.  LL,  sounds  like  li  in  pavilion^  or  Hi  in  million  ;  as, 
silla^  lloro ;  pronounced  scel'-yah^  lyo'-ro. 

§^*  As  this  sound  seldom  occurs  in  English,  and  never  at  the  beginning 
of  words,  it  requires  some  practice,  for  one  accustomed  to  speak  English 
only,  to  pronounce  it  readily  in  such  Spanish  words  as  llagay  liana,  lleno, 
lloro. 

20.  N,  sounds  like  ni  in  the  English  words  union^  pinion  ; 
as,  Tiona^  nono ;  pronounced  non-yah^  nyon-yo, 

§^"  This  sound  requires  considerable  practice,  before  an  English 
learner  can  pronounce  it  readily  at  the  beginning  of  Spanish  words, 
such  as  noclos,  nono. 

21.  Q,  which  is  always  immediately  followed  by  w,  is 
sounded  as  in  English ;  as,  quanto^  quota ;  pronounced 
kwan'-to^  kwo'-tah.     (See  31.) 

22.  QU,  in  the  syllables  que  and  qui^  is  sounded  like  k 
(that  is,  the  u  is  silent) ;  as,  que^  quiso ;  pronounced  kay^ 
kee'-so.  If,  however,  a  diajresis  is  over  the  u,  the  u  has  its 
proper  Spanish  sound  ;  as,  questa  ;  pronounced  koo-ais-tah^ 
or  kwais'tah.     (See  31.) 

23.  R,  is  sometimes  sounded  smooth  as  in  English,  and 
sometimes  rough  or  trilling,  as  with  natives  of  Ireland. 
The  rough  sound  is  heard  in  Spanish  when  r  begins  a 
word ;  when  doubled  ;  and  when  it  comes  after  Z,  n^  or  s ;  as, 
rahoj  carrOj  alrota ;  pronounced  r-rah'-bo^  kar-r'-ro^  al-r-ro- 
tah.  In  every  other  position  it  has  the  English,  smooth 
sound. 

g^"  The  rough  sound  of  the  r  is  made  by  vibrating  the  end  of  the 
tongue  against  the  roof  of  the  mouth  near  the  fore- teeth ;  it  is  seldom  heard 
!n  English,  thoujjh  very  easily  acquired.  The  smooth  (common  English) 


16  SPANISH  ALPHABET. 

sound  is  caused  by  a  vibration  of  the  tongue  near  the  root,  against  t/ie 
inward  part  of  the  palate,  near  the  entrance  of  tlie  throat. 

24.  S,  is  always  sounded  as  in  the  English  words  soon, 
this ;  as,  sedes  ;  pronounced  say -dace. 

§^^  The  J  in  Spanish  never  has  the  sound  of  ;2r  as  in  English,  in  the 
words  has^  tubs. 

25.  T,  has  nearly  the  same  sound  as  in  English.  The  only 
diflference  between  the  two  languages,  in  pronouncing  the 
^,  is,  that  in  English  the  end  of  the  tongue  touches  the  roof 
of  the  mouth,  and  in  Spanish  it  touches  the  upper  teeth. 
In  Spanish,  therefore,  i  has  a  somewhat  softer  sound  than 
in  English. 

26.  V,  is  pronounced  as  in  English,  with  the  sole  excep- 
tion that  the  upper  teeth  are  not  pressed  so  strongly  to 
the  lower  lip  in  enouncing  this  letter  in  Spanish. 

§^*  It  is  a  great  mistake,  which  some  grammarians  have  made,  to  sup- 
pose that  the  Spanish  sounds  of  b  and  v  are  alike. 

27.  X,  has  the  sound  of  the  x  in  English,  in  the  word 

tax ;  as,  exito^  extremo^  exado ;  pronounced  aiks-ee-io,  aiks- 

tray'-mo,  aiks-ac'-to.     (See  32.) 

(a.)  X,  in  Spanish,  had  formerly  two  very  different  sounds :  the  one  the 
same  as  above  given ;  the  other  a  guttural  sound,  the  same  exactly  as  the 
Spanish  J.  (See  17.)  To  distinguish  these  sounds,  the  vowel  following 
the  X,  when  not  guttural,  had  a  circumflex  accent  over  it ;  as,  exdcto,  e.vito. 
The  guttural  sound  of  the  x  is  not  at  present  used,  or  at  least  very  Sel- 
dom, in  Spanish,  as  the  letters  J  (before  any  vowel)  and  g  (before  e  and  i) 
have  the  same  sound,  and  are  now  employed  instead  of  the  guttural  x. 
Thus,  the  words  Mexico, .  MejicOy  or  Megico^  would,  in  Spanish,  all  be 
pronounced  alike ;  though  Mcjico  is  the  common  spelling.  It  is  of  course 
nn  longer  necessary  to  put  a  circumflex  accent  over  the  vowel  following 
the  X,  when  the  letter  has  the  English  sound  of  ks^  as  it  now  has  nearly 
always  in  recent  Spanish  writings. 

28.  Y,  when  a  consonant,  has  the  same  sound  in  Spanish 

that  it  has  in  English  in  such  words  as  youngs  year. 

1^*  Y,  when  it  stands  alone,  used  as  a  copulative  (meaning  and),  is 
pronounced  like  ee  in  see. 

29.  Z,  has  always  the  sound  of  th  in  the  English  word 
ihink^  as  zuzo ;  pronounced  thor-tho,     (See  32,  ^.) 


DIFFERENT    METHODS    OF    SPELLING    WORDS.  17 

Hemark.— There  will  be  no  diflaculty  on  the  part  ot  the  learner  who  is  - 
his  own  instructor,  in  acquiring  the  sounds  of  the  Spanish  vowels  and  con- 
''onants,  except  the  guttural  sound  of  the  J  (which  is  also  the  sound  ofg 
before  e  or  i) ;  and  this  sound  can  be  learned  from  any  German,  by  hear- 
ing hiiri  pronounce  ch  in  the  words  nacht  and  nicht ;  from  an  Irishman 
by  noticing  the  sound  he  gives  ch  in  the  word  oich,  or  from  a  Scotchman, 
in  the  wore*  hch. 


DIFFERENT   METHODS   OF   SPELLING. 

30.  By  the  best  Spanish  writers,  i  is  used  instead  of  y 
when  this  last  letter  is  a  vowel,  and  not  at  the  end  of  a 
word.  Thus  reyno^  reyna^  arraygar^  are  now  spelled  reino. 
reiyia^  arraigar. 

31.  Q  is  now  used,  by  the  best  writers,  only  in  the  sylla- 
bles que  and  qui  ;  as,  queja^  quince.  The  syllables  qua^  qiie^ 
qiiij  and  quo^  are  to  be  spelled  with  c.  Thus  quaiido^  queslo, 
quota,  are  now  spelled  cuando,  cuesto,  cuota. 

32.  X  is,  by  many  of  the  best  writers,  never  used  before 
a  consonant,  its  place  being  supplied  by  the  letter  s.  Thus 
exlenso,  ezperto,  are  now  often  found  spelled  estenso.  csperto. 

(a.)  In  addition  to  the  above  remarks,  it  is  proper  to  state  that,  by 
the  best  writers,  z  is  never  employed  before  e  or  i,  its  place  being  sup- 
plied with  c :  thus  cero  and  citico,  for  zero  and  zinco.  X,  too,  is,  by  some 
few  writers,  always  changed  into  C5,  when  it  comes  before  a  vowel ;  thus 
secso^  for  sexo.  The  guttural  sound  of  x^  as  has  been  already  mentioned, 
is  now  seldom  used ;  g  orj  (see  27,  a)  being  substituted  for  it. 

Remark. — It  is  necessary  to  remember  that  the  above  variations  in  spel- 
ling produce  no  variations  in  pronunciation,  except  only  when  x  before  a 
consonant  is  changed  into  5,  in  which  case  s  has  its  own  regular  sound  : 
thus,  estenso  is  pronounced  ais-ten'-so. 

A  very  little  attention  to  the  above  directions  will  remove  every  diffi- 
cultyVhich  might  otherwise  occur  in  reading  Spanish  authors  who  do 
not  adopt  the  same  method  of  spelling.  Thus,  if  the  learner  meet  with 
such  words  as  celo,  jeneros,  rejistro,  cuando,  jabon,  esceso,  ecsactor,  reina^ 
buitre,  etc.,  and  can  not  find  them  in  his  dictionary,  he  must  look  for  thsm 
under  the  other  form  :  zelo^  generos,  registro,  quando^  xahony  exccsOy  eX" 
vctoTf  reynay  buytre. 


18      SOUND  OP  DIPHTHONGS  AND  TRIPHTHONGS. 


SOUND  OF  DIPHTHONGS  AND  TRIPHTHONGS. 

83.  The  diphthongs  and  triphthongs  in  Spanish  never 
contain  any  vowel  sound  different  from  those  we  have  already 
given.  When  two  or  three  vowels  come  together,  they 
may  be  pronounced  by  a  single  effort  or  emission  of  the 
voice ;  but  each  vowel  in  Spanish  continues  to  retain  al- 
ways its  own  particular  sound,  though  the  sounds  glide  into 
each  other  by  being  pronounced  in  the  time  of  a  single 
vowel.  In  the  word  rejoice,  in  English,  the  diphthong  oi 
contains  the  sound  of  each  of  the  letters  (o  like  o  in  7iot, 
and  i  like  i  in  miss)^  yet,  these  being  pronounced  rapidly 
and  with  a  single  impulse  of  voice,  the  two  vowel  sounds 
glide  into  each  other.  It  is  thus  that  the  Spanish  diph- 
thongs and  triphthongs  are  sounded.  Two  vowels  are 
never  mingled  into  one  and  made  to  represent  a  sound 
foreign  to  each  of  them,  as  ou  in  the  English  wovd  found ; 
or  a  sound  in  which  only  one  is  heard,  as  oa  in  boat.  The 
di'phthong  ua  in  the  English  word  suavity,  retains  the  . 
sound  of  both  vowels,  being  pronounced  as  if  written 
sooa-vi-ty.  The  learner  can  judge  from  this  example  and 
the  last  syllable  of  the  word  rejoice,  what  is  meant  by  each 
vowel  retaining  its  own  particular  sound  in  diphthongs  and 
triphthongs,  though  such  a  combination  forms,  of  course, 
but  one  syllable.  Thus  in  the  Spanish  word  causa,  the 
letters  cau  compose  but  one  syllable,  and  the  diphthong  au 
is  pronounced  like  a  in  bar  and  u  in  rude  (the  regular 
Spanish  sounds  of  a  and  u) ;  and  being  uttered  quickly, 
by  a  single  impulse  of  the  voice,  the  sound  of  au  is  similar 
to  that  of  ow  in  the  English  word  how,  though  not  exactly 
the  same. 

Remark. — In  order  that  the  learner  who  has  no  instructor  to  teach 
him  the  sounds  of  the  Spanish  diphthongs,  may  not  fail  to  acquire  tlie 
right  pronunciation,  we  again  state  that  all  the  vowels  of  a  diphthong  or 
triphthongs  in  Spanish,  must  be  pronounced  with  the  regular  sound  of 
each^  without  any  perceptible  space  between  the  different  sounds  which 


LIST  OF   DIPHTHONGS   AND   TRIPHTHONGS.  19 

compose  such  diphthong  or  triphthong.  Thus,  in  the  diphthon^j  of  ea,  the 
learner  has  already  been  taught  that  the  sound  of  c  is  like  that  of  c  in 
the  English  word  they,  and  the  sound  of  a,  like  a  in  are;  all,  therefore, 
that  he  has  to  do  to  form  the  diphthongal  sound,  is  to  unite  these  two 
sounds  into  one  breathing  or  emission  of  voice.  This  he  can  learn  to 
do  by  pronouncing  quickly  the  words  they-are  so  as  to  form  only  one 
syllable,  and  the  ey-a  will  be  the  exact  sounil  of  the  Spanish  diphthong 
ea.  The  letters  ai  or  ay  are  to  be  pronounced  together,  as  a  in  far  and 
e  in  me;  that  is,  as  ay  in  bay  would  sound  if  the  a  had  the  sound  of  a  in 
bar,  and  the  y  the  sound  of  y  in  toy  (not  the  mute  y  as  in  hay).  And  so 
with  all  the  diphthongs  and  triphthongs. 

LIST   OF   DIPHTHONGS. 

34.  diy  or  ay,  has  the  sound  of  a  In  bar^     and  ee  in  eel :      a-i. 

35.  du  "  "  a  in  6ar,     and  oo  in  mao<i ;  a-u, 

36.  ea  *'  "  c   in  they ^    and  a  in  6ar;      e-a. 

37.  ei,  or  ey  "  "  c   in  they,    andccinceZ;       e-i. 

38.  eo  "  "  e   in  they,    and  o   in  go :       e-o. 

39.  eu  "  "  c   in  they,    and  oo  in  mood :  e-u. 

40.  '/a  "  "  e   in  /le,       and  a  in  6ar :      i-a. 

41.  le  "  '*  e   inhe^       and  e   in  they :    i-e. 

42.  ?o  "  "  c   in  he,       and  o   ing^o;       i-o. 

43.  ill  "  "  e   in  he,       and  oo  in  mood :  i-u. 

44.  oe  "  "  o  in  ^o,       and  e   in  /Aey ;    o-c. 

45.  dy  or  oy  "  "  o  in  ^o,       and  ce  in  ee/ ;       o-i. 

46.  wa  "  "  00  in  mood,  and  a  in  bar :     u-a, 

47.  ti^  "  "  00  in  mood,  and  e   in  they :    u-e. 

48.  ui,  or  My  "  "  oo  in  mood,  and  ee  in  eel :       wi. 

49.  «<o  "  "  00  in  mood,  and  o   in  ^o  ;       u-o. 

TRIPHTHONGS. 

50.  iai  has  the  sonnd  of  ee  in  eel,  a  in  bar^  and  e  in  /le :  i-o-i. 
Bl.  iei  "  "  ee  in  eeZ,  e  in  /Aey,  and  e  in  he  :  i-e-i. 
52.  uai  "  "  00  in  mood,  a  in  6ar,  and  e  in  he:  u-a-i, 
BS.^uH,  or  wey  "      oo  in  ?nood,  e  in  they,  and  e  in  he:  u-e-i. 

Remark.— Some  of  the  diphthongs  ending  in  i,  will  be  found  in  some 
Spanish  writings  ending  in  y,  as  reina,  reyna;  buitre,  huytre.  The  pro- 
nunciation in  both  cases  is  the  same,  and  we  have  not  increased  the  list 
by  distinguishing  those  ending  in  i  from  those  ending  in  y. 

^^  Two  vowels,  when  they  come  together,  do  not  always  form  one 
syllable  (a  diphthong).  Thus  the  word  idea,  in  Spanish  and  English, 
forms  three  syllables.    In  Spanish  it  is  pronounced  ec  ddy-ah. 


20  SYLLABICATION 


SYLLABICATION. 

54.  The  rules  of  Spanish  syllabication  are  very  simple. 
They  are  the  following : 

(a.)  When  a  consonant  comes  between  two  vowels,  it  is 
articulated  with  the  vowel  which  comes  after  it;  as/6-50, 
d-no,  md-yoy  hu-md-no^  si-llon ;  except  x ;  as,  ex-em-plo. 

(Z>.)  When  twr  consonants  come  between  two  vowels,  the 
former  is  spelled  with  the  preceding  vowel,  and  the  latter 
with  the  succeeling  vowel;  as,  por-tdl^  cuer-po^  es-te,  in- 
vier-no.     This  rule  is  subject  to  the  following  exception  : 

(c.)  If  the  first  of  two  consonants  coming  between  two 
vowels  be  /,  or  any  one  of  the  mutes  (see  2),  and  the 
second  I  or  r,  then  both  consonants  are  joined  to  the  vowel 
by  which  they  are  succeeded ;  as,  si-glo,  sue-gro,  co-bre^  vi- 
drie-ro. 

{d.)  When  two  vowels  of  the  same  name  come  together, 
or  two  which  do  not  form  a  diphthong,  they  are  to  be  divid- 
ed ;  as,  le-er^  co-or-di-ndr,  ca-no-a. 

(e.)  Compound  words  are  to  be  divided  into  their  deriva- 
tives ;  as,  pre-po-ner^  ad-jun-io,  con-flic-to. 

(f.)  When  any  one  of  the  letters  b,  Z,  w,  71,  or  r,  is  fol- 
lowed by  s  and  another  consonant,  or  when  s  is  preceded 
by  any  consonant,  and  succeeded  by  one  or  more,  in  com- 
pound words,  the  s  is  to  be  connected  with  the  consonant 
which  comes  before  it ;  as,  Covs-tdn-za,  cons-tre-nir,  ins-pi- 
rdr. 

{g.)  In  Spanish  there  are  as  many  syllables  in  a  word 
as  there  are  vowels  or  diphthongs ;  as,  quin-ce^  nor-ie^  pa- 
rien-te. 

1^*  In  English,  the  word  quince  forms  only  one  syllable;  in  Spanish, 
it  is  pronounced  keen^-thay.  Hom-bre  is  pronounced  om'-brey,  and  not 
vm-hur^  as  it  would  be  in  English.  Every  letter  in  Spanish  is  pro* 
nounced  except  the  A,  and  the  u  in  the  syllables  gue,  gui,  and  que,  qui 
(see  14  and  22).  There  are  no  silent  vowels  or  consonants,  as  in  the 
Enfiflish  words  thumbs  ii  rone,  psalm. 


ACCENT.  2  J 

ACCENT. 

55.  In  Spanish,  the  voice  never  rests  or  prolongs  itself 

on  any  other  letter  of  a  syllable  than  a  vowel.     When  we 

speak  of  an  accented  syllable^  we  always  mean  thereby  the 

vowel-sound  of  that  syllable.     In  the  case  of  diphthongs  and 

triphthongs,  when  in  accented  syllables,  the  accent  or  stress 

of  voice  is  generally  placed  on  that  vowel  which  we  have 

marked  in  the  list  of  diphthongs  and  triphthongs.     Thus, 

tie-ne^  having  the  accent  on  the  first  syllable,  has  the  stress 

of  the  voice  on  the  e  of  the  diphthong,  though  the  accent  is 

not  written  over  the  vowel. 

^^*  In  words  ending  in  cion,  the  accent  is  ou  the  o  and  not  on  the  f 
ol  the  diphthong,  as  marked  in  the  list ;  as,  re-sur-rec-cion. 

56.  The  rules  of  Spanish  accentuation  are  few  and  sim- 
ple, and  as  follows : 

(a.)  Words  that  end  in  a  consonant  are  accented  on  the 
last  syllable,  without  any  marked  accent  over  it ;  as,  caliz^ 
cup  ;  capaZj  able  ;  virtud,  virtue  ;  jardin,  garden  ;  saber,  to 
know  ;  comer,  to  eat ;  amoi;  to  love  ;  rigor,  rigor ;  facilidad, 
facility.  These  are  accented  as  if  written  ca-liz.  vir-tud, 
cc-mer,  fa-ci-li-ddd,  etc. 

{b.)  Words  that  end  in  a  vowel  are  accented  on  the  syl- 
lable next  to  the  last,  without  any  marked  accent  over  it ; 
as,  r astro,  track  ;  hoja,  leaf ;  buitre,  vulture ;  temper amento, 
temperature ;  ente,  being ;  accented  as  if  written  rds-tro, 
bui-tre,  iem-pe-ra-men-to,  en-te,  etc. 

Remark. — Words  that  end  in  two  vowels,  whether  their  vowels  form 
a  diphthong  or  two  separate  syllables,  come  under  the  above  rule ;  as, 
estudio,  study ;  odio,  hatred  ;  optdencia^  opulence ;  canoa^  canoe ;  idea^ 
idea ;  accented  as  if  written  6-dio,  o-pu-len-cia,  ca-n6-a,  i-de-a. 

ic.)  Words  that  end  in  a  consonant  and  are  accented  on 
any  other  syllable  than  the  last,  or  that  end  in  a  vowel  (or 
diphthong),  and  are  accented  on  any  other  than  the  syllable 
next  to  the  last,  have  the  accent  marked  to  show  the  excep- 
tion from  the  general  rules  {a  and  b  above) ;  as,  cdrcel, 


22  ACCENT. 

prison  ;  car  deter  ^  character  ;  viernes,  Friday  ;  virgen^  vir- 
gin ;  or  cafe^  coffee ;  Idstima,  pity ;  solido,  solid :  mate' 
mdtico,  mathematician ;  clausula,  clause  ;  accented  on  the 
syllable  marked. 

Remark. — Words  that  end  in  two  vowels,  which  are  commonly  known 
as  di'.  hlhongs,  usually  have  the  accent  marked  if  it  falls  on  one  of  these 
vowels  ;  as,  fantasia,  poesla,  senorw,  minue.  Words  which  end  with  y 
jave  the  accent  on  the  1  .st  syllable,  without  being  marked. 

'%j^  In  compound  words  there  area  few  exceptions  to  the  above  gene- 
ral rules.  In  adverbs  of  quality  or  manner  endng  in  mente,  some  follow 
the  regular  rule  (56,  6),  and  others  retain  the  accent  on  the  first  part  of 
the  word,  on  the  same  syllable  on  which  it  would  be  if  mente  were  not 
affixed  ;  as,  su-cin-ta-men-te,  succinctly  ;  li-be-ral-men'te,  liberally  ;  bas- 
tdn-te-men-te,  sufficiently  ;  cier-ta-men-te,  certainly. 

(d.)  The  plurals  of  words  retain  the  accent  on  the  same 
syllable  (whether  marked  or  not)  as  in  the  singular  ;  as, 
jardin,  jardines ;  caliz,  calices  ;  virgen,  virgenes  ;  clausula^ 
clausulas.  There  are  two  exceptions  to  this  remark,  car  de- 
ter and  regimen ;  their  plurals  being  accented  caracteres 
and  regimenes. 

57.  The  above  rules  are  applicable  to  all  parts  of  speech 
except  the  persons  of  verbs ;  these  are  accented  according 
to  the  following  rules: 

(a.)  The  persons  of  verbs,  whether  they  end  in  a  conso- 
nant or  a  vowel,  whether  they  are  singular  or  plural,  or  to 
whatever  mood  or  tense  they  belong,  are  accented  on  the 
syllable  next  to  the  last,  without  being  marked  ;  as,  hablo^ 
I  speak ;  beben.  they  drink ;  hiciera,  he  would  make,  In- 
finitives, having  no  person,  are  not  included  in  this  rule, 
but  are  always  accented  on  the  last  syllable.  (See  56,  a.) 
b.)  In  the  case  of  the  persons  of  verj)s,  whenever  the 
accent  does  not  fall  on  the  syllable  next  to  the  last  (as 
^  mentioned  in  the  preceding  rule),  it  is  marked ;  as,  estd,  he 
is ;  hablare,  I  shall  speak ;  hablardn.  they  shall  speak ; 
ame.  I  loved  ;  habldbamos^  we  were  spoaking  ;  hablariamos^ 
we  would  speak.  The  only  exception  to  this  rule  is  the 
aecoud  person  plural  of  the  imperative  mood,  and  words 


PUNCTUATION.  23 

ending  in  ay  or  oy,  which  are  always  accented  on  the  last 
63'llable,  without  the  accent  in  general  being  marked  ;  as, 
hablad^  speak  ye ;  haced^  make  ye ;  estoy,  I  am.  Some 
writers,  however,  place  the  accent  over  the  last  syllable,  as, 
habldd^  haced. 

58.  The  accent 'is  by  many  writers  marked  on  certain 
monosyllables,  to  distinguish  them  from  others  of  similar 
orthography  and  pronunciation  but  of  different  meaning  ; 
as,  e/,  the,  and  eZ,  he ;  se^  himself,  and  5e,  I  know,  and  sq,  be 
thou ;  5i,  if,  and  si.  to  himself.  The  letters  a.  to  ;  e,  and  ; 
6,  or ;  -w,  or  ;  are  also  generally  used  with  a  marked  accent, 
though  some  writers  omit  it. 

1^"  Throughout  this  work,  every  word  which  does  not  come  under 
the  three  general  rules  of  accentuation  (see  56,  a ;  56,  6 ;  and  57,  a),  will 
have  the  accent  marked  over  the  vowel  upon  which  the  stress  of  voice 
is  to  be  laid.  The  learner  must  therefore  keep  in  mind  that  every  word 
which  has  not  a  marked  accent  over  some  vowel  in  it,  is  to  be  accented 
in  pronouncing  it,  if  it  end  in  a  consonant,  on  the  last  syllable ;  if  it 
end  in  a  vowel,  on  the  syllable  next  the  last.  If  the  word  be  a  verb,  it  is 
to  be  accented  on  the  syllable  next  to  the  last,  whether  it  end  in  a  conso- 
nant or  a  vowel,  except  when  it  has  a  written  accent  over  it,  is  in  the 
infinitive  mood,  or  in  the  second  person  plural  of  the  imperative,  or  ends 
my* 

PUNCTUATION. 

59.  The  comma,  semicolon,  colon,  period,  etc.,  are  the 
same,  and  are  employed  in  the  same  manner  as  those  in 
English.  The  marks  of  interrogation  and  exclamation  are 
placed  in  Spanish  both  before  and  after  interrogative  and 
ejaculatory  phrases  or  sentences  ;t  as,  i  Este  canape  no  es 
nuevo  ?  Is  not  this  sofa  new  ?  /  Que  ceguedad  !  /  Fobre 
Espana  !     What  blindness  !     Poor  Spain  ! 

60.  The  diaeresis  ••  is  used  over  the  u  in  the  syllable's 


*  The  learner  will  now  be  able  to  pronounce  the  names  of  the  Spanish 
letters  of  the  alphabet,  giving  to  each  letter  its  true  Spanish  sound, 
according  to  the  preceding  directions  : — »,  6e,  ce,  che^  de^  c,  efe,  ge,  ache,  £, 
Jota^  ka,  eZe,  elU^  eme^  cnCy  ene^  o,  pe,  cu,  crre^  ese^  te^  w,  re,  equis^  igriega^ 
zda 

i  The  intenQgation  or  exclamation  mark  coming  first,  being  inverted. 


24  LESSONS    x>Ort    PIiO^'UNCIAT:ON. 

gioe,  gui^  qtce  and  qui  (see  3 1),  when  the  u  is  to  be  sou/ided 
as  agiiero ;  and  also  over  the  last  of  two  vowels,  which 
usually  form  a  diphthong,  to  show  that  they  are  to  be  divid- 
ed into  two  syllables  ;  as  heroicidad^  pronounced  e-ro-ee-tkce' 
dad. 

61.  The  tilde  "  is  used  over  the  7i  when  this  letter  haa 
fhe  sound  of  ni  in  union ;  as,  dano. 

62.  The  acute  accent  '  is  placed  over  vowels,  not  to  alter 
their  sound,  but  to  indicate  the  syllable  on  which  the  stress 
of  voice  is  laid  in  pronouncing  certain  words  ;  as,  orden, 

63.  The  circumflex  accent  "  was  formerly  used  over  a 
vowel  following  a;,  when  this  letter  had  not  its  guttural 
sound  ;  as,  sexo  ;  and  over  a  vowel  following  r^,  when  the 
latter  was  pronounced  as  k ;  as,  cMlo.  But  the  alterations 
in  orthography  no  longer  require  this  mark. 

LESSONS  FOR  PRONUNCIATION. 

Remark. — The  learner  should  thoroughly  examine  the  preceding  direc- 
tions in  orthography  and  orthot'py,  before  attempting  to  read  the  follow- 
ing lessons.  He  must  not  forget  to  pronounce  every  letter  except  li* 
and  also  u,  in  certain  cases  (see  14  and  22).  Every  vowel  especially 
must  be  sounded  distinctly,  even  more  so  than  the  consonants,  if  any 
difference  be  made.  Monosyllables,  such  as  Ze,  me,  mi,  si,  se,  que,  are 
not  to  be  hurried  over,  like  the,  to,  me,  etc.,  are  in  English ;  but  they 
must  be  pronounced  fully  and  clearly. 

Such  words  as  the  learner  will  be  most  liable  to  mispronounce,  are,  in 
the  first  of  the  following  reading  lessons,  followed  by  the  number  of  the 
paragraph  which  will  be  found  to  contain  the  proper  directions  for  their 
right  pronunciation. 

I.    Words  of  one  sellable : 

Me  (4);  mi  (5);  la  (3) ;  no;  el;  su  (7);  ha  (16);  mas 
(24) ;  qui  (22) ;  que  (22) ;  yo ;  cruz  (7,  29) ;  luz  ;  cal  un 
(7);  ce  (10,  4);  bol;  fil  (5);  ci  (10,  5);  cha  (11);  por ; 
gran;  va  (26);  muy  (48);  rey  (23,  37);  ten  (25);  voy 
(45) ;  ved  (12) ;  de ;  los  (6) ;  fin  (5) ;  mes  (24) ;  srin  .  buey 

*  Ck,  it  must  be  kspt  in  mird,  is  in  Spanish  a  single  1  tter.     (S  e  11.  • 


LESSONS   FOR    PRONUNCIATION.  25 

(53) ;  de  ;  se  ;  soy ;  ser  ;  vez  (29) ;  es  ;  en  ;  con  ;  f e  ;  tu  ; 
ley ;  son  ;  te ;  tres ;  mil ;  hay  (34) ;  tal ;  he  ( 1 6) ;  ir ;  van ; 
ve;  id;  di ;  ven  ;  pon ;  haz;  doy;  hoy;  sad. 

II.  Words  accented  on  the  syllable  next  to  the  last : 
Man-to  ;    ma-fia   (20) ;.  a-ro-ma  ;    ar-ma  ;  tem-plo  ;  jo-ya 

(17);  ta-bla;  jun-ta  (17,  7) ;  yu-go  ;  su-yo  ;  hi-jo  (16,  17) ; 
gen-te  (15) ;  cor-to ;  co-sa  ;  ca-lle  (19) ;  bol-sa  ;  bo-llo  (19) ; 
su-je-to;  za-pa-to  (29);  lla-ma  (19);  la-go;  lla-nu-ra ;  no- 
ble; sobre  ;*  fa-ti-ga  ;  in-vier-no  (41) ;  hue-so  (47)  ;  do-lo  ; 
don-de;  don-ce-Ua  (19);  no-che  (11);  o-bra ;  cuo-ta  (49) ; 
len-gua  (46) ;  ma-yo  ;  e-le-va-do  ;  fuer-za  ;  pre-sen-tado ; 
pe-cho ;  j6-ven  ;  fer-til ;  fa-cil ;  6r-den  ;  ar-bol ;  es-te-ril ; 
mar-gen  ;  vir-gen  ;  es-car-la-ta ;  ig-no-ran-cia  (40) ;  mu-da ; 
mo-zo  ;  ca-ba-Ue-ro  ;  ci-vi-li-za-do  ;  en-sor-de-ci-do  ;  cer-ni- 
mien-to  ;  pun-to  ;  en-e-mi-go  ;  mu-cho  ;  na-tu-ra-lis-ta  ;  bri- 
Ua;  mo-men-to;  tra-ba-jo;  her-ma-no. 

III.  Words  accented  on  the  last  syllable :  € 
Yer-dad  ;  fru-tal ;  vul-gar  (7) ;  ar-dor ;    tro-pel ;  to-tal ; 

ba-jar ;  ga-chon  ;  si-llon  ;  ho-nor  ;  ja-mon  ;  sa-lud  ;  man- 
tel ;  se-nal ;  bal-con ;  ra-zon ;  mo-ral ;  que-ru-bin  (22) ;  se- 
ra-fin; te-me-ri-dad  ;  ne-ce-si-dad ;  es-cla-vi-tud ;  mo-de-rar; 
mag-na-ni-mi-dad  ;  in-ca-paz ;  vo-lun-tad ;  me-di-tar ;  de-bi- 
li-dad ;  co-ra-zon  ;  hu-ma-ni-dad ;  as-pi-rar ;  ven-cer ;  va-lor ; 
vir-tud  ;  juz-gar  ;  a-qui  (22) ;  ca-fe  ;  ca-na-pe  ;  per-do-na- 
re ;  e-jer-ce-ra  ;  ri-di-cu-li-za-ra ;  ma-yor  ;  a-si. 

IV.  Words  accented  on  the  syllable  marked : 
Las-ti-ma  ;    es-pi-ri-tu  ;    nu-me-ro ;    ca-ma-ra  ;    ul-ti-mo  ; 

in-va-li-do  ;  ge-ne-ra-li-si-mo  (15);  bar-ba-ro  ;  pu-ri-si-ma  ; 
ge-ne-ro  (15);  ter-mi-no ;  cre-di-to  ;  ma-le-vo-lo ;  re-pii-bli- 
ca ;  re-gi-men  (15);  en-er-gi-co  (15);  di-fi-ci-li-si-ma ;  me- 
ta-fi-si-co ;  ma-te-ma-ti-co  ;  fi-16-so-fo  ;  16-gi-ca  ;  ri-di-cu-la  ; 
cri-ti-co  ;  a-na-li-sis ;  do-mes-ti-ca ;  obs-ta-cu-lo. 


*  Noble  and  sohre  are  pronounced  no-bley^  so-hrey^  and  not  no-bul^ 
ro-huTy  as  in  English. 

3 


26  LESSONS    FOR    PRONUNCIATION. 

5^*  Wc  must  again  remind  the  learner  to  give  the  vowels  and  conso- 
nants their  true  Spanish  sounds,  and  not  those  he  has  been  accustomed 
to  give  in  English  words,  except  in  those  sounds  which  are  the  same  in 
both  languages.  Thus,  vulgar  in  Spanish  is  pronounced  vool-gdr;  es^ 
^is ;  tres,  trace  ;  siUon^  seel-yon ;  nona,  non-yah ;  cizalla^  thee-thdl-yah. 

V.  All  the  sounds  of  Spanish  letters : 

^^  We  give,  in  the  following  few  words,  all  the  sounds  known  in 
pronouncing  Spanish :  the  learner  who  is  able  to  pronounce  them,  will 
therefore  be  able  to  utter  every  consonant,  vowel,  diphthongal  or  triph- 
thongal  sound  which  he  will  find  in  the  Spanish  language  : 

Gente  ;   iiorio  ;    cholla  ;    dijo  ;    buey  ;  voy  ;  muy  ;  hay  ; 

cuota  ;    Imea  ;  julio  ;    reo  ;  ciudad  ;    social ;    zuzo  ;    yugo  ; 

gueta  ;    aguelo  ;    qiiesto  ;    sex 6  ;  fixa  ;    qui ;  que  ;  cuanto  ; 

heroe;  puerto  ;    deuda  ;    causais  ;  varieis  ;  preciais ;  santi- 

guais  ;  bien ;  rey. 

VI.  Lesson  for  reading  :* 

El  hijo  sabio  es  la  doctrina  del  padre  :  el  que  es  burlador^ 
no  o^e  cuando  le  corrigen. 

El  nombre  se  saciard  de  bieiies,  fruto  de  su  boca ;  mas 
el  alma  de  los  pre varicad ores  es  inicua. 

Quien  guarda  su  boca,  guarda  su  alma :  mas  el  que  e& 
inconsiderado  para  hablar  sentird  males. 

Quiere  y  no  quiere  el  perezoso :  mas  el  alma  de  los  labo- 
riosos  sera  engrosada. 

El  jus  to  detesiard  la  palabra  de  mentira  ;  mas  el  impio 
avergiienza^  y  serd  avergonzado. 

La  justicia  guarda  el  camino  del  inocente  :  mas  la  impi 
edad  echa  por  tierra  al  pecador. 

Hay  quien  parece  rico,  no  teniendo  nada ;  y  hay  quien 
parece  pobre,  teniendo  muchas  riquezas. 

El  rescate  de  la  vida  del  hombre  so7i  sus  riquezas  ;  mas 
el  que  es  pobre,  no  aguanta  la  amenaza. 

La  luz  de  los  justos  da  alegria :  mas  la  lampara  de  los 
ipapios  se  a/pagard, 

*  Prom  Proverbs,  xiii.  1 — 13.  The  verbs  are  in  italice.  The  plurals 
have  the  marked  accent. 


LESSONS   FOR    PRONUNCIATION.  27 

Entre  los  soberbios  siempre  hay  contiendas :  mas  los  que 
todas  las  cosas  hacen  con  consejo,  se  rigen  per  la  sabiduria. 

La  riqueza  hecha  de  prisa  se  menoscabard :  mas  la  que 
se  recoge  poco  a  poco  con  la  mano,  se  aumentard. 

La  esperanza,  que  se  retarda,  ^fflig^  al  alma :  arbol  de 
vida  el  deseo,  que  se  cumple. 


ADDITIONAL  REMARKS    ON    THE    PRONUNCIATION  OF  SPANISH. 

Each  of  the  Spanish  vowels  is  invariable  in  the  quality  of  its  sound, 
there  being  no  other  variation  than  that  of  quantity^  or  length  of  time 
required  in  pronouncing  it. 

In  Spanish,  the  vowel  of  that  syllable  of  a  word  on  which  the  accent 
falls,  is  called  long ;  the  other  vowels  of  the  w%rd,  short :  thus  in  the 
word  vices,  the  former  e  is  long,  as  it  requires  the  stress  of  voice  or 
accent,  and  the  latter  e  is  short,  as  it  is  pronounced  more  rapidly.  In 
the  English  words  essence  and  present,  the  first  and  second  e  of  each 
word  have  the  same  sound,  but  the  first  being  accented,  requires  more 
time  for  pronouncing  it ;  and  in  Spanish  the  e  of  the  first  syllable  of  these 
words  would  be  called  long,  and  the  second  e  short,  ^^  The  above 
observations  will  serve  to  explain  why  e  in  Spanish  often  sounds  like  e 
in  the  English  word  men ;  i  like  i  in  the  English  word  pin;  and  a  more 
open,  nearly  like  u  in  up. 

The  sound  of  d  (see  12)  is  so  nearly  like  the  English  sound  of  the 
same  letter,  that  it  is  hardly  worth  while  for  the  private  learner  to  make 
any  effort  to  give  any  different  sound  to  this  letter  from  that  which  he 
has  been  accustomed  to  give  it.  The  same  may  be  said  of  the  letters  t 
(see  25)  and  v  (see  26).  All  the  consonants  are  pronounced  a  little  more 
softly  in  Spanish  than  in  English — so  that  h  seems  to  sound  almost  like 
V ;  and  y  (when  a  consonant)  almost  like  j,  as  this  letter  is  pronounced 
in  English. 

Sy  In  certain  provinces  of  Spain,  the  c  before  e  and  i,  and  the  z  are 
sounded  Uke  s  and  z  in  English ;  and  in  the  Spanish  States  of  America 
(originally  colonized  from  those  provinces),  the  same  peculiarity  of  pro- 
nunciation is  quite  common.  In  Mexico,  the  liquid  sound  of  II  is,  by  the 
great  mass  of  the  people,  pronounced  like  the  modern  French  sound  of 
the  same  liquid :  thus,  Saltillo  would  be  pronounced  by  a  Castiliar 
Scd'teeV-yo;  by  a  Mexican,  Sal-tee'-yo.  Pure  Castilian,  however,  re 
quires  the  c,  z,  and  U  to  be  sounded  as  we  have  directed. 


PART  IL 

GENEEAL   PKINCIPLES   OF 
ETYMOLOGY    AND    SYNTAX. 


PAETS    OF   SPEECH. 

64.  There  are  in  the  Spanish  language  nine  dijffereni 
Parts  of  Speech,  viz.,  the  Article,  Noun,  Adjective,  Pro- 
noun, Verb,  Adve^j  Preposition,  Conjunction,  and  Inter- 
jection. 

[J^^  The  names  of  these  Parts  of  Speech  in  Spanish  are  Arl7culo, 
Nombre,  Adjetivo,  Pronombre,  Verba,  Adverbio,  Preposicion,  Conjuncion^ 
Interjeccion. 

65.  The  Article  is  placed  before  a  noun  to  enlarge  or 

limit  the  extent  of  its  signification  ;  as,  cl  hombre,  the  man  ; 

la  muger,  the  woman ;  las  casas,  the  houses  ;  un  hijo,  a  son  ; 

una  hija,  a  daughter. 

(a.)  The  Article  is  generally  divided  into  the  definite  and  indefinite 
kinds :  the  word  the  (and  its  corresponding  words  in  other  languages) 
being  called  the  definite;  and  the  word  a  ox  an  (and  its  corresponding 
words  in  other  languages)  being  called  the  indefinite. 

66.  The  Noun  is  the  name  of  a  thing  ;  as,  homhrc^  man  ; 
muger,  woman  ;  casa,  house  ;  Jua7i,  John  ;  Londrcs,  Lon 
don. 

(a.)  Nouns  are  of  two  kinds,  common  and  proper.  A  common  noun 
is  the  name  of  a  whole  class  of  objects :  as,  drbol,  tree  ;  perro,  dog.  A 
proper  noun  is  the  individual  name  applied  to  a  particular  person  or 
thing ;  as,  Juan,  John  ;  Inglaterra,  England. 

(6.)  Nouns  have  two  numbers,  the  singular  and  the  plural.  The  sin- 
gular number  denotes  but  one  object;  as,  sombrero,  hat.  The  plural 
signifies  more  objects  than  one ;  as,  sombreros,  hats. 

(c.)  In  Spanish  nouns  have  two  genders,  the  masculine  and  i\\e  femin- 
ine. The  masculine  includes  all  nouns  that  belong  to  the  male  kind,  and 
all  that  take  the  masculine  article  before  them:  as,  hombre,  man;  hijo, 

(28) 


PARTS    OF    SPEECH.  29 

son  ;  el  sombrero^  the  hat ;  un  libro,  a  book.  The  feminine  inchides  all 
nouns  of  the  female  kind,  and  all  that  take  the  feminine  article  before 
them;  as,  muger,  woman;  hija,  daughter;  lasilla,  the  chait;  una  casa- 
**«,  a  coat. 

g^*  The  distinctions  of  gender  have,  tliroiigh  imitation,  been  extended 
to  all  nouns  in  Spanish ;  that  is,  all  nouns  are  considered  either  mascu- 
hne  or  feminine  in  gender.  Thus,  as  may  be  seen  above,  libro,  a  book, 
is  masculine,  and  silla,  a  chair,  is  feminine. 

((/.)  The  cases  of  nouns  express  the  different  relations  of  one  thing  to 
another.  The  nomuiative  case  is  the  word  which  is  the  subject  of  the 
verb;  as,  el  dgua  hierve,  the  water  boils;  el  Frances  habla,  the  french- 
man talks.  The  objective  case  is  the  word  which  is  the  object  of  an  action 
expressed  by  a  verb,  or  of  a  relation  expressed  by  a  preposition ;  as,  el 
muchacho  ama  la  verdad,  the  boy  loves  the  truth ;  nadie  esta  sin  pecado, 
nobody  is  without  sin. 

67.  The  Adjective  is  a  word  that  expresses  the  quality 
of  a  noun,  or  determines  its  number  or  signification  ;  as, 
buen  hombre,  good  man  ;  mucJios  h ombres,  many  men  ;  dos 
duros,  two  dollars. 

g;^*  In  Spanish,  the  adjective  takes  the  gender  and  number  of  the 
noun  to  which  it  relates. 

68.  The  Pronoun  is  a  word  used  instead  of  a  noun  to 
avoid  the  too  frequent  repetition  of  the  latter ;  as,  Juan 
esta  en  casa,  ei  esta  bueno ;  John  is  at  home,  he  is  well. 

(a..)  Personal  pronouns  are  used  for  the  names  of  persons  or  things ; 
as,  cZ,  ella,  ello  ;  he,  she,  it. 

^^^  There  are  three  persons  for  nouns  and  pronouns :  the  Jirst  person 
denoting  the  person  speaking;  as,  yo,  I:  the  second,  the  person  or  thing 
spoken  to ;  as,  ta,  thou  :  the  third,  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of;  as,  el, 
he. 

{b.)  Possessive  pronouns  show  the  possession  of  the  persons  or  things 
which  they  represent.  Some  relate  to  one  person,  others  to  more  than 
one ;  as,  mi  libro,  mij  book ;  nuestra  casa,  our  house. 

(c.)  Relative  pronouns  are  those  which  relate  to  a  preceding  noun  or 
pronoun,  called  the  antecedent ;  as,  el  hombre  que  enseila,  the  man  who 
teaches.     Here  hombre  is  the  antecedent  to  the  relative  pronoun  que. 

{d.)  Interrogative  pronouns  are  relative  pronouns  used  in  asking  ques- 
tions ;  they  have  no  antecedent,  but  relate  to  the  answer  of  the  question 
for  their  subsequent ;  as,  iQuien  est^  alll7  Pedro ;  Who  is  there  1  Peter. 
Here  quien  is  the  interrogative  pronoun,  and  the  answer,  Pedro^  the  sub' 
sequent. 

ie.)  Demonstrative  pronouns  are  those  that  point  out,  in  a  definite 
3* 


30  OF   THE   ARTICLE. 

manner,  the  persons  or  things  which  they  represent  or  to  which  they 
belong ;  as,  este  hombre,  this  man ;  aquella  mesa,  that  table. 

{/.)  Indefinite  pronouns  are  those  that  express,  in  an  indefinite  or 
general  manner,  the  persons  or  things  which  they  represent ;  as,  algunos 
de  nosutros,  some  of  us. 

69.  The  Verb  is  a  word  that  expresses  an  affirmation  of 
the  subject ;  as,  el  hombre  es  sabio,  the  man  is  wise ;  ella 
habla,  she  speaks, 

1^*  The  different  kinds  of  verbs,  their  moods,  tenses,  numbers,  per- 
ssons,  participles,  and  gerunds,  will  be  found  explained  in  a  subsequent 
part  of  this  work.    (See  135—156.) 

70.  The  Adverb  modifies  the  meaning  of  a  verb,  adjec- 
tive, or  other  adverb  ;  as,  Pedro  escribe  bien^  Peter  writes 
well ;  Maria  es  mui/  amabie,  Mary  is  verT/  amiable ;  Juan 
lee  mui/  bien^  John  reads  ver^  well. 

71.  The  Preposition  serves  to  express  the  relation  of 
things ;  as,  el  hermano  de  Diego,  the  brother  of  James ; 
viajo  po7'  Espana,  he  traveled  through  Spain. 

72.  The  Conjunction  connects  words  and  sentences ;  as, 
Jose  y  Maria  seran  felices,  pero  no  seran  ricos,  Joseph 
and  Mary  will  be  happy,  but  they  will  not  be  rich. 

73.  The  Interjection  expresses  passion  or  emotion ;  as, 
/  O  hombre  !   O  man ! 

74.  The  injlection  of  a  word  means  the  changes  which  it  undergoes  to 
express  different  numbers,  persons,  cases,  moods,  tenses,  etc. 

75.  The  inflection  of  articles,  nouns,  adjectives,  and  pronouns,  is 
called  declension  ;  as,  caballoj  horse ;  cahallos^  horses. 

76.  The  inflection  of  verbs  is  called  conjugation ;  as,  yo  amo,  I  love ; 
tii  amas,  thou  lovest;  el  ama,  he  loves. 

77.  Of  the  parts  of  speech,  the  article,  noun,  adjective,  pronoun  and 
verb  are  inflected ;  and  the  adverb,  preposition,  conjunction,  and  inter- 
jection, not  inflected. 

78.  The  participle  is  not  regarded  as  a  distinct  part  of  speech  in  Span- 
ish, but  as  belonging  to  the  verb  and  partaking  oi  the  nature  of  the. 
adjective.    It  is  often  inflected  like  the  latter. 


OF   THE  ARTICLE. 

79.  The  definite  article,  which  in  English  is  always  the^ 
is  rendered  in  Spanish  by  difierent  words,  according  to 


OF   THE    AR77CLE.  3 1 

the  gender  and  number  of  the  nouns  before  which  it  is 
used. 

80.  Before  a  noun  masculine  of  the  singular  number, 

el  is  used ;  as, 

El  hombre,  the  man.  I  El  hijo,  the  son. 

El  rey,  the  king.  |  El  plato,  the  plate.* 

81.  Before  a  noun  feminine  of  the  singular  number,  la 

is  used ;  as. 

La  muger,  the  woman.  I  La  hija,  the  daughter. 

La  reina,  the  queen.  \  La  cuchara,  the  spoon. 

82.  Before  a  noun  masculine  of  the  plural  number,  los 
u  used ;  as, 

Los  reyes,  the  kings.  \  Los  platos,  the  plates. 

83.  Before  a  noun  feminine  of  the  plural  number,  Z^s  is 
used;  as, 

Las  reinas,  the  queens.  \  Las  cucharas,  the  spoons. 

84.  Before  an  adjective  used  as  a  noun  of  the  singular 
number,  lo  is  employed  when  it  has  the  meaning  of  that 
which  is ;  as. 


Lo  justo,  that  which  is  just. 
Lo  rojo,  the  red,  or,  that  whi-ch  is 
red. 


Lo  bueno,  the  good,  or,  that  which 

is  good. 
Lo  pasado,  the  vast,  or,  that  which 

is  past. 

^^  Lo  has  no  plural.    It  is  called  the  neuter  article. 

85.  The  Spanish  indefinite  article  corresponding  to  a  or 
an  in  English  is  una  (always  contracted  into  un),  before  a 
noun  masculine  ;  as, 

Un  medico,  a  physician.  j  Un  sombrero,  a  hat. 

86.  Before  a  noun  feminine,  una  is  used ;  as, 

Una  hermana,  a  sister.  |  Una  silla,  a  chair. 

(a.)  When  the  plural  form  of  uno  and  una  is  used,  these  words  are 
indefinite  pronouns;  as,  unos  hombres  or  unas  mugeres,  some  men  or 
some  women. 

87.  The  masculine  articles  el  and  un  are  always  used 
before  feminine  singular  nouns  when  they  begin  with  a  or 

*  In  Spanish,  all  nouns  are  either  masculine  or  feminine..  (See  91.) 


32  OF    THE    ARTICLK 

ha^  accented  on  the  first  syllable*  (whether  the  accent  u 
marked  or  not)  ;  as^ 

El  ama,  the  mistress.  j  El  hambre,  the  hunger 

Un  area,  a  chest.  \  El  agua,  the  water. 

(a.)  In  the  plural,  such  nouns  take  the  regular  feminine  article ;  as, 
Las  areas,  the  chests.  j  Las  aguas,  the  waters. 

{b.)  If  an  adjective  intervene  between  the  article  and  feminine  noun 
(even  though  the  adjective  begin  with  a  or  ha  accented),  the  feminine 
article  is  always  used ;  as, 

La  ancha  area,  the  broad  chest.  \  Una  buena  ama,  a  good  mistress. 

Remark. — There  are  very  few  feminine  nouns  in  Spanish  which  begin 
with  a  or  ha  accented ;  so  that  the  exceptions  to  the  general  use  of  la 
and  una  (see  87)  are  very  few. 

88.  When  the  preposition  d  (to)  or  de  (of)  comes  imme- 
diately before  the  masculine  article  d^  a  contraction  takes 
place,  and  both  words  are  united.  Thus,  instead  of  a  el 
and  de  el  {to  the  and  of  the).,  at  and  del  are  used ;  as, 

Al  padre,  to  the  father.  I  Del  muchacho,  of  the  boy. 

Al  ama,  to  the  mistress.  J  Del  hambre,  of  the  hunger. 

(a.)  Before  the  other  articles,  /a,  los,  las,  lo^  un,  and  una,  the  preposi 
tions  d  and  de,  as  well  as  the  articles,  remain  unchanged  ;  as, 

De  los  hombres,  of  the  men. 


De  lo  futuro,  of  the  future. 
De  una  noche,  of  a  night. 


A'  la  muger,  to  the  woman. 
A'  las  hermanas,  to  the  sisters. 
De  un  dia,  of  the  day. 

(6.)  De  el  is  sometimes  used  before  the  surnames  of  persons ;  as, 
De  d  C^sar,  |  Of  the  Caesar. 

89.  The  Spanish  articles  should  not  always  be  translated 
into  English  :  and  sometimes  they  are  not  expressed  in 
Spanish  when  they  would  be  in  English  ;  as, 


La  humilidad  y  la  mansedumbre 

brillan  menos  que  el  orgullo. 
La  vida  no  es  un  sueno. 
Con  todos  los  hombres  ten  paz. 
El  capitan  Smith  tiene  memCria. 
Ella  tiene  marido. 


Humility  and  meekness  glitter  less 

than  pride. 
Life  is  not  a  dream. 
With  all  men  have  peace. 
Captain  Smith  has  a  memory. 
She  has  a  husband. 


*  Before  feminine  nouns  singular  beginning  with  a  or  ha,  not  accented 
on  the  first  svllable,  this  rule  does  not  apply ;  and,  of  course,  la  or  una  is 
used. 


OF    THE    NOUN.  33 

90.  Sometimes  the  Spanish  definite  article  should  be 
rendered  by  the  indefinite  in  English  ;  as, 


El  paiio  se  pueda  comprar  a  tres 

duros  la  vara. 
La  harina  se  vende  a  seis  duros  el 

barril. 


The  cloth  can  be  bought  for  three 

dollars  a  yard. 
Flour  is  sold  at  six  dollars  a  bar 

rel. 


'  The  learner  must  now  turn  to  Part  IV.,  and  translate  and  write 
the  Exercises  in  Section  First. 


OF  THE   NOUN. 

Nouns  are  divided  into  proper  and  common,  as  in  Eng- 
lish ;  and  to  them  belong  gender,  number,  person,  and 
case. 

GENDER. 

91.  In  Spanish  Grammar,  every  noun  is  considered  as 
either  masculine  or  feminine,  whether  it  really  has  any 
gender  or  not ;  thus,  pan^  bread ;  sombrero^  hat ;  plaio^ 
plate ;  papel^  paper ;  azucar^  sugar ;  are  masculine ;  while 
casaca^  coat ;  manteca^  butter  ;  dgua^  water  ;  mesa^  table ; 
are  feminine. 

92.  The  following  are  the  rules  for  distinguishing  the 
gender : 

[a.)  Nouns  which  are  the  names  of  males,  as  well  as 
those  which  denote  the  ranks,  offices,  professions  or  em- 
ployments of  males,  are  masculine  ;  as,  homhre^  man  ;  perro^ 
dog  ;  o'ey^  king ;  cura^  rector  ;  pintor^  painter ;  zapatero^ 
shoemaker. 

[b.)  Nouns  which  are  the  names  of  females,  as  well  as 
those  which  denote  the  nanks,  offices,  professions  or  em- 
ployments of  females,  are  feminine  ;  as,  muger^  woman  ; 
vaca^  cow ;  reina^  queen  ;  costurera^  seamstress  ;  zapatera^ 
shoemaker's-wife. 

(c.)  Nouns  which  end  in  a^  </,  ion^  is,  and  ez  (unless  com- 
prehended in  rule  92,  a)^  are  feminine  ;  as,  marca^  mark  ; 
locura.  folly ;  soledadj  solitude  ;  rcligioii^  religion  ;  hipotesis, 
hypothesis  ;  timidez,  timidity.    (See  421.) 


34  "^  OF   THE   NOUN. 

(d.)  Nouns  which  do  not  end  in  a,  d,  ioii^  is,  and  ez 
(unless  comprehended  in  rule  92,  b),  are  masculine  ;  as. 
zapatOy  shoe;  honor,  honor;  te,  tea  ;  jabon,  soap. (See  422.) 

(c.)  Nouns  used  only  in  the  plural  are  of  the  gender  to  which  they 
would  belong,  from  their  termination,  if  they  had  a  singular  form.  Thus, 
calzonesj  breeches,  is  masculine,  and  grevas,  greaves,  is  feminine,  because 
calzon  and  grcxia  would  be  of  these  respective  genders,  from  their  termi- 
nation. Lldres,  fasces,  and  fauces,  are  exceptions  to  this  rule,  they  being 
feminine. 

Remark. — There  are  some  few  masculine  nouns  having  feminine  end- 
ings ;  and  some  few  feminine  nouns  which  end  otherwise  than  in  a,  d, 
ion,  is,  and  ez.    A  list  of  these  will  be  found  in  the  Appendix  to  Part  III. 

^^  The  gender  of  the  noun  can  always  be  distinguished  by  the  arti- 
cle used  before  it,  except  in  the  case  of  feminine  nouns  singular,  begin- 
ning with  a  or  ha,  accented  on  the  first  syllable  (see  87).  These, 
however,  are  very  few  in  number. 


93.  The  plural  number  is  formed  from  the  singular  by 
adding  es  to  all  nouns  ending  with  a  consonant,  with  the 
letter  y,  or  with  any  accented  vowel ;  as, 


Muger,  woman. 
Rey,  king. 
Aleli,  gUlyfUjwer. 


Mugeres,  women. 
Reyes,  kings. 
Alelies,  gillyfowers. 


94.  Nouns  ending  with  a  vowel  not  accented,  form  their 

plural  by  adding  s  to  the  singular  ;  as, 

Villa,  town.  I         Villas,  towns. 

Amigo,  friend.  \         Arnigos,  friends. 

95.  There  are  a  few  exceptions  to  the  above  general  rules 
for  the  formation  of  the  plural  of  nouns  ;  they  are  as  fol- 
lows : 

(a.)  If  the  noun  end  with  z,  this  letter  is  changed  into 
ces  to  form  the  plural ;  as, 

Juez,  jiudge.  |         Jueces,  judges. 

(b.)  If  the  noun  end  with  e  accented,  the  plural  is 
formed  by  adding  s ;  as, 

Puntapi^,  kick.  j         Puntapi^s,  kicks. 

(c.)  If  the  noun  end  with  s  immediately  preceded  by  a 

m 


OF   THE    NOUN.  35 

vowel  not  accented,  no  change  takes  place  to  form  the 
plural;  as, 

Hipotesis,  hypothesis.  |  Hipotesis,  hypotheses, 

{d.)  The  following  nouns  are  irregular  in  the  formation  of  the  plural ; 
Bofdj  sofa;  papd,  pope,  father;  inamd.  mamma;  dux^  duke;  their  plu- 
rals being  sofds^  papdsy  mamdsj  duces, 

CASE. 

96.  In  Spanish,  nouns  have  but  two  cases,  the  nomina- 
tive and  objective,  the  former  being  the  agent  or  subject  of 
the  verb  ;  the  latter  the  object  of  an  action  expressed  by 
the  verb,  or  of  a  relation  expressed  by  a  preposition. 

97.  There  is  no  possessive  case  in  Spanish :  property  or 
possession  is  expressed  by  means  of  the  preposition  de ;  as, 


El  hijo  de  Juan. 
La  casa  de  la  muger. 

La  conciencia  del  hombre. 

El  libro  es  de  Maria. 

La  pluma  es  del  escribiente. 


The  son  of  John,  i.  e.  John's  son. 
The  house  of  the  woman,  i.  e.  the 

woman's  house. 
The  conscience  of  the  man,  i.  c. 

the  man's  conscience. 
The  book  is  of  Mary,  i.  e.  the  book 

is  Mary's. 
The  pen  is  of  the  clerk,  i.  e.  the 

pen  is  the  clerk's. 

{a.)  One  noun  can  not  serve  as  an  adjective  for  another 
noun,  as  in  English ;  thus,  such  phrases  as,  the  Neiv-  York 
road  ;  a  faper  hat ;  an  ivory  spoon ;  are  in  Spanish  to  be 
rendered  el  camino  de  Nueva-  York ;  un  sombrero  de  papel ; 
una  cuchara  de  marjil ;  i.  e.  the  road  of  (to  or  from)  New- 
York  ;  a  hat  of  paper  ;  a  spoon  of  ivory.  In  Spanish,  the 
sentence  "  he  went  to  his  brother's,"  would  be  fully  ex- 
pressed thus  :  '•^fue  a  casa  de  su  hermano^''  he  went  to  (the) 
house  of  his  brother. 

S^*  The  learner  must  now  translate  the  Exercises  in  Part  IV..  Sec- 
tion Second,  as  th  )re  directed. 


36 


OF   THE   ADJECTIVE. 


OF   THE   ADJECTIVE. 

98.  Adjectives  in  Spanish  have  both  a  singular  and 
a  plural  form,  according  as  they  are  used  with  singular  or 
plural  nouns ;  as, 

Grande  hombre,  large  man.  J  Grandes  hombres,  large  men. 

99.  The  rules  for  the  formation  of  the  plural  of  adjec- 
tives are  the  same  as  those  for  forming  the  plural  of  nouns. 
(See93,  94,  and95.) 

100.  Adjectives  which  end  with  an^  on^  or  o,  and  such 
as  are  derived  from  the  names  of  nations,  change  not  only 
from  the  singular  to  the  plural,  but  also  from  the  mascu- 
line to  the  feminine,  to  agree  with  the  noun  (expressed  or 
understood)  to  which  they  belong  ;  as, 

Hombre  generoso. 
Muger  generosa. 
Olgazan.     Olgazana. 
Farifarron.     Fanfarraria. 


Espanol.     Espanola. 
Ingles.    Inglesa. 


Generous  man. 
Generous  woman. 
Idle  (man).     Idle  (woman). 
Bragging  (man).     Bragging  (wo- 
man). 
Spanish  (man).   Spanish  (woman). 
English  {man).   English  {womdni). 


{a.)  From  the  examples  just  given,  it  will  be  seen  that 
adjectives  ending  with  o,  change  o  into  a  to  form  the  femi- 
nine ;  and  that  those  ending  with  a7i  or  071^  as  well  as  those 
derived  from  the  names  of  nations,  form  their  feminine  by 
adding  a  to  the  masculine. 

(h.)  In  forming  the  plural  of  adjectives  which  are  modi- 
fied by  gender,  the  gender  must  be  taken  into  considera- 
tion first,  and  then  the  plural  ending  added  ;  as. 


EI  manso  caballo. 
Los  mansos  caballos. 
La  timida  vaca. 
Las  timidas  vacas. 
El  Ingles.     La  Inglesa. 

Los  Ingleses.    Las  Inglesas. 


The  tame  horse. 
The  tame  horses. 
The  timid  cow. 
The  timid  cows. 
The  English  (man). 

(woman). 
The  English  (men). 

(women). 


The  English 
The  English 


(c.)  Adjectives  in  Spanish  are  generally  placed  after  the 
nouns  which  they  qualify  ;  though  some  generally  come 


OF    THE    ADJECTIVE.  37 

before  the  noun  ;  and  «5ome  can  precede  or  succeed  the  noun, 

according  to  the  taste  of  the  writer  or  speaker.     Thus, 

Un  hombre  respetable.  A  respectable  man. 

Una  felicidad  aparente.  An  apparent  felicity. 

Malas  obraSj  (or)  obras  malas.  Bad  works. 

Remark. — In  English,  an  adjective  sometimes  is  allowed  to  come 
after  the  noun;  as  when  we  say  "  a  verb  neuter i^  "a  noun  fenninine ;" 
"an  account  current;"  "life  eternal."  But  the  rule  is  a  far  more  gen- 
eral one  in  Spanish. 

S^*  Some  directions  for  the  proper  position  of  adjectives  will  be  given 
in  Part  III. 

101.  Some  adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns  drop  the 

final  0  in  the  masculine  singular  (but  not  in  the  plural), 

when  they  are  placed  before  the  noun,  but  never  when  they 

are  placed  after  it.     These  are  nno^  a  (or  one) ;  alguno^ 

some  ;  ninguno^  none  ;  primero^  first ;  postrero,  last ;  tcrcero^ 

third  ;  bueno^  good ;  malo^  bad  ;  as, 

Algun  fruto.  Some  fruit. 

Un  buen  gobierno.  A  good  government. 

Un  buen  hombre,  (or)  un  hombre  A  good  man. 
bueno. 

(o.)  Santo,  Saint,  when  prefixed  to  the  name  of  a  male  person,  drops 
its  last  syllable;  as,  San  Pablo,  Saint  Paul;  San  Pedro,  St.  Peter. 
Ciento,  hundred,  when  it  immediately  precedes  a  noun,  masculine  oi 
feminine,  drops  its  final  syllable;  as,  den  drboles,  hundred  trees;  but 
ciento  y  dos  drboles,  hundred  and  two  trees.  Grande,  great,  large,  gene- 
rally loses  its  final  syllable  when  the  noun  to  which  it  is  prefixed  begins 
with  a  consonant ;  as,  gran  poder,  great  power.  When  grande  does  not 
mean  size  or  magnitude,  but  good  qualities  gran  is  used  if  the  noun 
follow  it.  Thus,  gran  hombre,  means  a  "  great  man,"  and  grande  hom- 
bre, a  "large  man." 

102.  Adjectives  are   often  used  without  the  noun  (the 

latter  being  understood)  ;  as. 

The  poor  (man).    The  poor  (wo- 
man). 


El  pobre.     La  pobre. 
Los  pobres.    J^as  pobres. 


La  derecha.* 
Un  ignorante. 


The  poor  (men).    The  poor  (wo« 

men). 
The  right  (hand). 
An  ignorant  (man). 


*  Mano,  "  hand  "  (feminine)  is  here  understood. 
4 


^8  OF   THE   ADJECTIVE. 

I^^The  gender  can  be  known  by  the  article  which  precedes  the 
adjective. 

(a.)  If  the  adjective  refer  to  something  to  which  we  do  not  ^ply  a 
gender,  the  neuter  article  lo  is  used ;  as,  lo  poco,  lo  mucho,  the  little,  the 
much,  or  "  that  which  is  little,"  "  that  which  is  much."    (See  84.) 

1^"  The  learner  can  now  translate  the  Exercises  in  Part  IV.,  Section 
Third. 

DEGREES    OF    COMPARISON. 

103.  When  two  things  are  compared,  the  one  is  equal, 
inferior,  or  superior  to  the  other ;  hence  there  are  three 
sorts  of  comparison  ;  that  of  eqicalitj/,  inferiority,  and  supe- 
riority.  Thus  we  may  say,  John  is  as  happy  as  James ; 
John  is  less  happy  than  James  ;  or  John  is  more  happy  than 
James.  These  adjectives  are  all  properly  in  the  compara- 
tive degree. 

104.  The  comparative  of  equality  is  formed  by  placing 
Ian  {as,  so)  before  the  adjective,  and  como  (as)  after  it ;  as, 

El  Judlo  es  tan  rico  como  el  Fran-  I  The  Jew  is  as  rich  as  the  French- 
ces.  I     man. 

(a.)  Sometimes  tan  is  omitted,  and  corno  only  used ;  as, 

Juan  esfuerte  como  un  leon.  |  John  is  strong  as  a  lion. 

(6.)  Cual  {quaJ)  is  sometimes  found  instead  of  como.  Tan  used  be- 
fore an  adjective  without  como,  means  so ;  as,  tan  grande,  so  great. 

105.  The  comparative  of  inferiority  is  formed  by  placing 
menm  (less)  before,  and  qloe  (than)  after  the  adjective  ;  as, 

El  Judlo  es  tfienos  rico  que  el  Fran-  i  The  JewisZcssT-ic/i  than  theFrench- 
ces.  I      man. 

ID6.  The  comparative  of  superiority  is  formed  by  placing 
mas  (more)  before,  and  que  (than)  after  the  adjective ;  as. 

Mi  madre  es  mas  rica  que  el  reina.    I  My  mother  is  more  rich   (richer) 

I      ilian  the  queen. 

(a.)  Mayor,  greater ;  mejor,  better ;  and  menor,  less,  are  already  in  the 
comparative  degree,  and  do  not  require  mas  before  them ;  as, 

Las  reyes  son  mayor  es  que  los  lores.  |  The  kings  are  greater  than  the  lords. 
107.  The  superlative  degree  of  the  adjective  expresses 


OF  THE  ADJECTIVE.  39 

the  quality  in  a  very  high  or  very  low^  or  in  the  highest  or 
lowest  state  :  hence  there  are  two  sorts  of  superlatives,  the 
absolute  and  the  relative.  Thus  we  may  say.  New  York  is 
a  very  large'  city,  or,  New  York  is  the  largest  city  in 
America. 

108.  The  superlative  absolute  is  formed  either  by  placing 
muy  {very)  before  the  adjective,  or  by  affixing  the  letters 
isimo  to  the  simple  form  of  the  adjective  ;  as, 

U'tU,  useful.  I  Muy  litil,  or  utilisimo,  very  useful^ 

I      or  most  useful. 

(a.)  If  the  adjective  end  with  a  vowel,  this  vowel  is  dropped  when  tsimo 
is  affixed;  as,  grande,  great;  grandtsimo  or  muy  grande,  nery  great; 
aUo^  high ;  aUisimo  or  muy  alto. 

(6.)  Adjectives  that  end  with  6Ze,  co,  go,  and  z,  change  these  letters 
respectively  into  6iZ,  qu,  gu,  and  c,  before  the  suffix  tsimo;  as,  nohle, 
noble ;  nobiltsimo,  very  noble ;  seco,  dry ;  sequisimo,  very  dry ;  largo, 
large ;  largutsimo,  very  large ;  feraz,  fruitful ;  feracisimx),  very  fruitful ; 
or  muy  noble,  muy  seco,  muy  largo,  muyferaz. 

(c.)  Most  adjectives  can  have  their  superlatives  formed  by  muy  pre- 
fixed, or  by  the  ending  tsimo.  There  are  a  few,  however,  such  as  those 
ending  with  ial  and  antepenuUs  (i.  e.  those  accented  on  the  last  syllable 
but  two)  ending  with  co,  go,  lo,  which  form  their  superlative  absolute 
always  with  muy  ;  as,  social,  social,  muy  social,  and  not  sociaUsimo ;  mag- 
nifico,  magnificent ;  muy  Tnagnifico,  very  magnificent ;  prodigo,  prodigal ; 
muy  prodigo,  very  prodigal ;  gdrrulo,  garrulous  ;  muy  gdrruio,  very  gar- 
rulous. As  a  general  rule,  adjectives  of  many  syllables  form  the  superla- 
tive absolute  by  muy  and  not  with  tsimo.  The  superlative  of  unucho, 
much,  is  always  muchtsimo. 

109.  The  superlative  relative  is  formed  by  placing  the 
definite  article  before  mas  (more)  or  menos  (less),  and  put- 
ting these  before  the  adjective  ;  as, 

El  Judlo  es  el  mas  rico  de  todos. 


The  Jew  is  the  inost  rich  {the  rich- 
est) of  all. 
The  mother  of  the  Frenchman  is 

the  most  rich  of  all  the  women. 
My  daughters  are  the  least  learned 
of  all  the  maidens. 
Remark. — Some  adjectives  have,  besides  the  regular  superlative  abso- 
lute, also  an  irregular  one,  derived  from  some  ancient  form  of  the  adjec- 
tive ;  as,  fdeltsimo,  very  faithful ;   bontsimo,  very  good.     The  regular 
superlative  of  those  adjectives  is  Jietisimo  and  buentsimo,  from  fid,  faith- 


La  madre  del  Frances  es^  mas  rica 

de  todas  las  mugeres. 
Mis  hijas  son  las  menos  doctas  de 

todas  las  doncellas. 


40  OP   THE   PRONOUJT. 

ful,  and  bueno,  good.  The  irregular  forms  in  general  use  are  few,  and  ard 
all  to  be  found  in  Spanish  dictionaries ;  therefore  they  offer  no  impedi- 
ment to  the  student. 

The  cardinal  and  ordinal  numbers  will  be  found  in  Part  III. 

g^"  The  Exercises  in  Part  IV.,  Section  Fourth,  must  now  be  trans- 
lated. 


OF  THE   PRONOUN. 

There  are  six  sorts  of  pronouns :  personal,  possessive^ 
relative,  interrogative,  demonstrative,  and  indefinite.  Posses- 
sive, demonstrative,  and  indefinite  pronouns  are  a  species  of 
defining^djectives. 

PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

110.  The  personal  pronouns  are  yo,  I;  tu,  thou ;  usted, 
you  ;  el,  ella,  ello,  he,  she,  it ;  nosotros  (masculine),  nosotras 
(feminine),  we  ;  vosotros  (masc),  vosotros  (fem.),  ye  ;  ustedes, 
you  ;  ellos  (masc),  ellas  (fem.),  they;  se,  himself 

(a.)  Nos  is  sometimes  used  in  the  nominative  for  nosotros,  but  only 
when  a  nation  or  body  of  men  issue  some  proclamation  or  law;  as,  "we 
{nos)  the  representatives  of  Mexico." 

(b.)  Vos  was  anciently  used  in  the  nominative  for  vosotros,  but  it  is 
-now  used  only  in  addressing  the  Deity  and  celestial  beings,  or  persons 
of  very  superior  rank. 

(c.)  Usted  is  the  only  word  with  which  persons  address  and  are  ad- 
dressed in  ordinary  conversation  in  Spanish.  It  is  a  contraction  of  vues- 
tra  mcrced  (your  worship) ;  and  though  it  is  always  to  be  translated  by 
the  second  person  (you)  in  English,  it  is  of  course  of  the  third  person, 
and  requires  its  corresponding  possessive  pronoun  and  the  verb  to  which 
it  may  be  the  nominative,  to  be  in  the  third  person.  In  writing,  2isted  is 
nearly  always  abbreviated  into  v.,  vm.,  vmd.,  vd.,  F.,  Vm.^VM.,  Vira.,  or 
Md,;  and  the  plural  (ustedes)  into  vs.,  vms.,  vmds.,  VV.,  Vms.,  Vmds.  ;* 
as,  iComo  estd  vmd.  7  iComo  va  su  salud ?  literally.  How  is  your  worship  ? 
how  goes  his  health?  or  as  we  should  render  it  in  English,  How  are 
you  7  how  is  your  health  7 

111.  The  personal  pronouns  have  two  forms  of  the 
objective  case,  the  direct  and  the  indirect ;  the  first  govern- 

*  These  contractions  are  always  pronounced  usted  and  ustedes,  just  as 
in  English  the  contractions  Mr.  and  Messrs.  are  pronounced  as  if  writ- 
ten in  full. 


OF    THE    PP^ONOUN. 


41 


ed  by  the  verb  or  the  preposition  to^  understood,  and  the 
second  always  governed  by  a  preposition   before  it,  ex- 

pressed;  as, 

First.     Juan  me  dio  un  libro.  I  John  (to)  me  gave  a  book. 

Second.  Juan  vino  por  ml.  I  John  came  for  me. 

1 12.  The  personal  pronouns  are  declined  as  exhibited  in 

the  annexed  paradigms  :* 


FIRST    PERSON.         SEC. PERSON 


THIRD    PERSON. 


Nomina. 
First  Obj. 

Sec.  Obj. 

Nomina. 

First  Obj. 

Sec.  Obj. 


Yo,I. 

me,  me,  to  me, 

a  mi,  to  me. 

nosotros-as,  we. 

nos,  uSj  to  us. 

a  nosotros-as,  to 
us. 


Tu,  thou. 

te,  thee, to  thee. 

d  ti,  to  thee. 

vosotros-as,  ye 

or  you. 
OS,  yoUjto  you. 

dvosotros-as,iQ 
you. 


Masculine. 
El,  he. 
le,    him,     to 

him. 
d  el,  to  him. 

ellos,  they. 

los,  les,  them, 
to  them. 

(i  ellos,  to 
them. 


Feminine. 
Ella,  she. 
la,  le,  her,  to 

her. 
d     ella,     to 

her. 
ellas,  they. 

las,  les,  them, 
to  them. 

d  ellas,  to 
them. 


II. 


THIRD  PERSON. 


THIRD  PERSON. 


THIRD    PERSON. 


Nomina. 
First  Obj. 
Sec.  Obj. 
Nomina. 
First  Obj. 
Sec.  Obj. 


Ello,  it. 

la,  it. 

d  ello,  to  it. 

wanting 
in  the 

plural. 


Vmd.,Yom:  worship, 
you. 

le,  your  worship,  to 
you. 

d  vmd.,  to  your  wor- 
ship, to  you. 

vmds.,  your  wor- 
ships, you. 

les,  your  worships, 
you. 

d  vmds., to  your  wor- 
ships, to  you. 


v:  anting. 

se,   himself,  herself, 

itself. 
d  si,  to  himself,  to 

herself,  to  itself. 
wanting. 

se,  themselves. 

d  SI,  to  themselves. 


113.  A  pronoun  of  the  first  objective  case  is  placed  be- 
fore the  verb  which  governs  it,  except  before  infinitives, 
imperatives,  and  gerunds  ;  as, 


El  hombre  me  dijo. 
La  muger  le  hallo. 
Los  perros  los  siguieron. 
El  medico  les  dijo. 


The  man  said  to  me. 
The  woman  found  him. 
The  dogs  followed  them. 
The  doctor  said  to  them. 


*  In  these  paradigms,  we  have  used  only  the  preposition  a  before  the 
indirect  or  second  objective,  though  any  other  preposition  would  require 
the  same  case  ;  as,  de  el;  por  ellos;  para  mi. 

4* 


Pablo  me  mando. 

La  criada  me  trajo  un  panuelo. 

Juan  te  dio  un  libro. 

El  sastre  nos  vio. 

Los  pastores  nos  hablaron. 


42  OF   THE   PRONOUN. 

{a.)  If  the  sentence  begin  with  a  verb,  the  pronoun  is 
allowed  to  come  after  it ;  in  other  words,  a  pronoun  of  the 
first-objective  case  may  or  may  not  begin  a  sentence.  When 
the  pronoun  comes  after  the  verb,  it  is  joined  to  it,  and 
both  form  one  word  ;  as, 
T^egole^  el  cielo  este  gozo.  |  Benled-them  heaven  this  pleasure.* 

114.  The  first-objective  case  is  employed  in  Spanish, 
when  in  English  either  the  verb  or  the  preposition  to^  ex- 
pressed or  understood,  governs  the  personal  pronouns ;  as, 

Paul  commanded  me. 

The  maid-servant  brought  (to)  me 

a  handkerchief. 
John  gave  {to)  thee  a  book. 
The  tailor  saw  us. 
The  shepherds  spoke  {to)  us. 

{a.)  When  in  English  the  personal  pronouns  of  the  third 
person  are  governed  by  the  verb,  in  Spanish  le  and  los,  for 
the  masculine,  and  la,  las,  for  the  feminine,  are  used ;  as, 

La  muger  le  vio.  I  The  woman  saw  him. 

El  viajante  los  hallo.  I  The  traveler  found  them. 

(b.)  When  in  English  the  personal  pronouns  of  the  third 
person  are  governed  by  the  preposition  to,  expressed  or 
understood,  in  Spanish,  le  and  les  are  used  for  both  gen- 
ders ;  as, 

El  juez  le  dijo.  I  The  judge  said  to-him  (or  to-her). 

Los  hbreros  les  dieron  libros.  I  The  booksellers  gave  them  books. 

115.  A  personal  pronoun  of  the  second-objective  case  is 
placed  after  a  preposition  ;  as, 

Fear  fell  upon  him. 

Fear  came  upon  all  the  neighbors 
oj"  them. 

The  painter  made  it^br  rne. 

I  will  accept  the  favor  of  your  wor- 
ship.f 


Cayo  temor  sobre  el. 

Vino  temor  sobre  todos  los  vecinos 

de  ellos. 
El  pintor  lo  hizo  para  ml. 
Yo  aceptar^  el  favor  de  vmd. 


*  That  is,  as  it  would  be  properly  expressed  in  English,  heaven  denied 
them  this  pleasure. 

t  That  is,  /  wUl  accept  your  favor. 


OF   THE   PRONOUN,  43 

{a.)  If  in  English  two  objective  cases  of  personal  pro- 
nouns are  in  the  same  sentence,  one  of  them  governed  by 
the  preposition  to,  understood,  and  the  other  by  a  verb,  the 
one  governed  by  the  preposition  is  placed  first ;  as, 

llaria  me  lo  dio.  Mary  (to)  me  it  gave  (or,  Mary  gave 

it  to  me). 
Pedro  se  la  llevo.  Peter  (to)   them  her  brought  (or, 

brought  her  to  them). 

(b.)  If  the  pronoun  be  reflective,  that  is,  if  the  nomina- 
tive and  objective  cases  each  refer  to  the  same  person,  the 
reflective  pronoun  must  come  before  the  other,  if  another 
be  used  in  the  same  sentence  ;  as, 
El  cura  se  me  dirigio.  1  The  rector  addressed  himself  to  me. 

(c.)  When  in  the  second-objective  case,  any  one  of  the 

pronouns  mi,   ti,   si,  is  preceded  by  the  preposition  con 

[with),  this  preposition  is  prefixed  to  the  pronoun,  and  the 

syllable  go  affixed,  the  whole  forming  one  word  ;  as, 

Juan  vino  conmigo.  I  John  came  with-me. 

Ella  vino  consigo.  I  She  came  with-him. 

116.   The  first-objective  case  of  the  personal  pronouns 

comes  after   infinitives^  imperatives,  and  gerunds*  of  the 

verb,  forming  one  word  with  the  verb ;  as. 

The  lad  came  to  see-them. 


El  muchacho  vino  por  werlos. 
TraedmeZe. 
Danos  dinero. 

Hagame  vmd.t  una  casaca. 
Entunces  Pedro  tomandoZe  apartCj 
comenzo  a  reiiirZe. 


Bring-ine-him,  i.  e.  bring  him  io-me. 
Give-ics  money. 

Make-me,  your  worship,  a  coat. 
Then  Peter,  taking-/iim  apart,  be 
gan  to  chide-him. 


(a.)  When  one  verb  governs  another  in  the  infinitive,  the  objective 
pronoun  may  come  before  the  first  or  after  the  second  verb ;  as, 

El  Aleman  la  va  d  ver,  or  1  The  German  her  goes  to  see,  or^ 

El  Aleman  va  a  verZa.  I  The  German  goes  to  see-her. 

(6.)  The  first  or  second  person  plural  of  the  imperative  drops  its  final 
)etter  when  nos  or  os  is  joined  to  it ;  as. 


*  A  gerund  is  used  in  Spanish  as  the  present  participle  in  English ; 
as,  amando,  loving. 

t  Vnid.,  though  always  used  in  such  cases,  is  not  to  be  rendered  in 
English ;  thus  the  above  means,  make  me  a  coat. 


44 


OF   THE   PRONOUN. 


Sentdmonos^  and  not  sentdmosnos. 
Guarddos,  and  not  guardddos. 


I  Let-us-seat-ourselves. 
I  Guard-yourselves. 


117.  Ello^  and  its  objective  case  /o,  are  properly  used  foi 
a  noun  to  which  we  can  not  assign  any  gender ;  thus  if  we 
should  tell  a  man  ^'  I  am  ill,"  and  he  should  reply,  "  I  am 
sorry  for  i^,"  we  perceive  that  the  word  it  can  not  be  con- 
sidered masculine  or  feminine,  and  in  such  a  case  in  Span- 
ish lo  (not  le  nor  la)  would  be  used.  Though  not  strictly 
correct,  the  practice  is  allowed  of  using  lo  for  the  mascu- 
line hj  if  this  pronoun  be  directly  governed  by  a  verb. 

Remark. — We  will  here,  once  for  all,  say  to  the  learner  that  he  must 
not  allow  himself  to  become  discouraged  on  account  of  the  apparent 
difficulty  arising  from  some  words  in  Spanish  being  spelled  alike,  and 
yet  having  different  significations  and  belonging  to  different  parts  of 
speech ;  for  a  little  attention  on  his  part  will  teach  him  how  to  distin- 
guish these  words.  Thus,  eZ,  Za,  lo^  los,  las,  are  used  as  articles  and  as 
personal  pronouns,  but  the  article  never  comes  immediately  before  nor  is 
affixed  to  the  persons  of  verbs,  while  the  objective  pronouns  always  are 
thus  placed.  The  el  as  an  article  is  generally  followed  by  an  adjective  or 
noun,  and  can  not  stand  by  itself  like  the  pronoun  el.  Many  writers  use 
the  accent  over  el  when  a  pronoun ;  but  there  is  no  necessity  for  this,  as 
the  sense  and  position  of  the  word  will  readily  show  its  office  of  article 
or  pronoun.  The  accent  will  serve  to  distinguish  some  words  spelled 
alike,  and  the  student  should  be  careful  to  notice  it ;  thus,  se,  itself,  se,  \ 
know,  and  se,  be  thou ;  esta,  this  (feminine),  and  estd,  is ;  de^  of,  and  de, 
let  him  give;  te,  thee,  and  te,  tea;  si,  if,  and  si,  himself;  porque,  because, 
and  porque,  why ;  como,  as,  and  como,  how ;  etc. 

1^"  The  learner  can  now  translate  the  Exercises  in  Part  IV.,  Section 
Fifth. 

POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS. 

118.  The  possessive  pronouns  are  mio,  mj  ]  iuyo^  i\\y] 
suyo^  his,  her,  its,  or  their ;  nuestro^  our  ;  vuestro^  your. 
They  are  declined  as  in  the  following  paradigm : 


GENDER. 

MASC.        1 

FEM. 

MASC. 

1        FEM.          MASC.       1       FEM. 

Singidar. 
Plural. 

Mio. 
Mios. 

Mia. 
Mias. 

Tuyo. 
Tuyos. 

Tuya.      Suyo.        Suya. 
Tuyas.     Suyos.       Suyas. 

GENDER. 

MASC. 

1           FEM. 

MASC.                 1              FEM.          j 

Singular. 
Plural. 

Nuestro. 
Nuestros. 

Nuestra. 
Nucstras. 

Vuestro.               Vuestra.    | 
Vuestros.             Vucstras.  | 

OF    THE    PRONOUN.  45 

1 19.  The  possessive  pronouns  mio^  tuyo^  and  suyo^  with 
their  feminines,  drop  their  last  syllable  when  they  precede 
the  noun  to  which  they  belong  ;  as, 


Mi  padre,  mi  madre. 
Tu  hijo,  tu  hija. 
Su  hermano,  su  hermana. 
Mis  tios,  mis  tias. 
Sus  caballos. 


My  father,  my  mother. 
Thy  son,  thy  daughter. 
His  brother,  his  sister. 
My  uncles,  my  aunts. 
His  (her  or  their)  horses. 


(a,)  If  mio^  tuyOj  or  suyo  come  after  the  noun  to  which 
they  belong,  the  last  syllable  is  retained  ;  as, 


I  Padre  mio !  \  madre  mia ! 
Este  libro  es  suj/o. 
Esta  gallina  es  suya. 
Estos  libros  son  suyos. 


My  father!  my  mother! 
This  book  is  his  (or  hers,  or  theirs). 
This  hen  is  his  (or  hers,  or  theirs). 
These  books  are  his  (hers,  or  theirs). 


120.  The  possessive  pronouns  agree  in  gender  and  num- 
ber with  the  object  possessed,  and  not  with  the  person  or 
thing  possessing.  Thus  su  libro  may  mean  his  bookj  her 
book  J  or  their  book ;  sus  libros  may  mean  his  books,  her  books, 
or  their  books.  If  we  are  speaking  of  a  woman,  and  wish 
to  say,  "  this  hen  is  hers,"  it  would  be  in  Spanish,  esta  gal- 
lina es  swya ;  if  we  wish  to  say,  "  this  horse  is  hers,"  it 
would  be,  este  caballo  es  suyo  ;  if  we  wish  to  say,  "  these 
houses  are  hers,"  it  would  be,  estas  casas  son  suyas ;  and 
"  these  oxen  are  hers,"  would  be,  estos  bueyes  son  suyos. 
Instead  of  "  Aer5,"  the  possessive  pronoun  in  each  of  these 
sentences,  without  any  alteration,  might  be  rendered  "  his  " 
if  we  were  speaking  of  a  male  person.  This  is  a  very  im- 
portant rule,  and  should  be  remembered,  since  it  is  so  unlike 
the  English  rule  for  the  agreement  of  possessive  pronouns. 

{a.)  The  context  will  generally  show  whether  suyo 
should  be  rendered  his,  her,  or  their ;  otherwise,  to  prevent 
ambiguity,  de  el,  of  him  ;  de  ella,  of  her ;  de  ellos,  of  them 
(masculine),  de  ellas,  of  them  (feminine),  etc.,  is  added ;  as, 


Este  libro  es  suyo  de  el. 
Este  libro  es  suyo  de  eUa. 
Estos  libros  son  suyos  de  tmd. 
Estos  libros  son  suyos  de  ellas. 


This  book  is  his. 

This  book  is  hers. 

These  books  are  yoiirfi. 

These  books  are  theirs  (feminine). 


46  OF    THE    PRONOUN. 

121.  The  absolute  possessive  pronouns,  minej  thine^  his 
own,  her  own,  its  own,  ours,  yours,  theirs,  are  formed  by 
placing  the  deifinite  article  before  the  possessive  pronouns  ; 
thus,  el  mio,  la  mia,  los  mios,  las  mias,  mine  ;  el  nuestro,  la 
nuestra,  los  nuestros,  las  nuestras,  ours  ;  as, 


Su  hermano  y  el  mio. 
Tu  madre  y  la  mia. 
Vueslras  hermanas  y  las  mias. 
Sus  cabellos  y  los  nuestros. 


His  brother  and  mine. 
Thy  mother  and  mine. 
Your  sisters  and  mine. 
His  (her  or  their)  horses  and  ours. 


(a.)  If  a  verb  which  indicates  possession  come  before 
the  pronoun,  the  article  (see  120)  is  omitted  ;  as, 

Este  hombre  es  sobrino  mio  y  suyo  I  This  man  is  my  nephew  and  hers, 
de  ella. 

{().)  When  in  English  the  preposition  of  comes  before 
the  absolute  possessive  pronoun,  as  in  such  phrases  as,  "  a 
horse  of  ours,^^  "  a  dog  of  mine,"  etc.,  the  preposition  is  not 
used  in  Spanish  ;  as, 

Un  hijo  mio  es  capitan.  I  A  son  of  mine  (or,  one  of  my  sons) 

1      is  captain. 

122.  Instead  of  the  personal  pronouns,  the  definite  arti- 
cle is  used  in  Spanish  when  any  member  or  part  of  the 
human  body  is  described  as  being  acted  upon,  or  as  being 
in  a  certain  state,  in  such  a  manner  as  to  make  it  evident 
that  it  refers  to  the  person  himself  to  whom  the  member 
or  part  belongs  ;  as, 


El  la  tomo  por  la  mano. 

Ella  levanto  los  ojos. 

El  publican©  heria  d  pecho. 


He  took  her  by  her  {the)  hand. 
She  raised  her  {the)  eyes. 
The  publican  was-smiting  his  {the) 
breast. 


(a.)  If,  however,  any  member  or  part  of  the  human  body, 
or  parts  of  dress,  be  described  as  acting,  or  the  object  of 
an  action,  and  the  article  alone  would  not  leave  it  evident 
to  whom  such  member  or  part  belongs,  then  (instead  of  a 
possessive  pronoun)  a  personal  pronoun  and  the  definite 
article  are  both  used  ;  as, 


OF   THE   PRONOUN. 


47 


El  U  toco  la  mano.  He  touched  the  hand  to-him. 

La  mano  le  tiembla.  The  hand  to-him  trembles. 

El  te  tomo  las  botas.  He  to-thee  took  the  boots. 

I^"  In  these  examples  the  learner  will  perceive  that  in  English  the 
possessive  pronoun  alone  would  have  been  used;  thus,  "  He  touched  hu 
hand ;"  " His  hand  trembles ;"  "He  took  thy  boots." 

123.  It  has  already  been  mentioned  that  in  ordinary 
conversation  vrnd.  (usted)  and  vmds.  (ustedes)  are  used  in 
stead  of  the  second  person  tu  and  vosotros ;  and  that  vmd. 
being  of  the  third  person,  requires  its  possessive  pronouns 
to  be  of  the  third  person  also,  though  rendered  in  English 
by  the  second  person  (see  110,  c) ;  as, 

|,Esta  VTKid.  bueno7  j^como  va  su 
salud7 


I  Est^  vmd.  buena  1  i  como  va  su 

salud7 
Yo  iba  i.  su  casa  para  hacerZe  una 

visita. 


*AYe  you  well  1  how  is  your  health  ? 
Are  you  well  1  how  is  your  health  1 


I  was  going  to  your  house  to  make 
you  a  visit. 
'  These  examples,  rendered  into  English  literally,  would  be,  "Is 
your  worship  well?  how  is  his  health?" — "Is  your  (her)  worship  well? 
how  is  her  health?" — "  I  was  going  to  his  (or  her)  house  to  make  him 
(or  her)  a  visit." 

(a.)  To  prevent  ambiguity,  vmd.  or  vmds.  {your  worship  or  your  wor- 
ships) is  ofte^n  used  in  addition  to  the  possessive  pronoun,  or  the  definite 
article ;  as,  "  yo  le  doy  i.  vmd.  muchas  gracias,"  "  I  to  him  give  to  your 
worship  many  thanks ;"  that  is,  "  I  give  you  many  thanks ;"  "  su^  or  los 
hijos  de  vmd.^  seiior,  son  amables;"  "/lisor  the  sons  of  your  worship, 
sir,  are  amiable,"  that  is,  "your  sons,  sir,  are  amiable;"  "mis  hijas  y  las 
suyas  de  vmd.  son  juvenes,"  "my  daughters  and  yours  {his  of  your  wor- 
ship) are  young." 

I^*  The  Exercises  in  Part  IV.,  Section  Sixth,  must  now  be  trans- 
lated. 

RELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

124.  The  relative  pronouns  are  g?u€7i^  who ;  el  cual,  who, 
which,  that ;  que^  who,  which,  that ;  cuyo.  whose,  or,  of 
which.     They  are  thus  declined  : 


MAS.,  FEM. 


MASC.       I  FEM. 


MAS.,  FEM. 


Singular. 
Plural. 


Q,uien. 
Ciuienes. 


El  cual.*     La  cual. 
Los  cuales.Las  cuales, 


Que. 
Q,ue. 


Cuyo.    Cuya. 
Cuyos.  Cuyas. 


*  Lo  rual  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  d  cual.    (See  1 17.) 


48  OF    THE    PRONOUN. 

(a.)  Quien  always  relates  to  personSj  and  agrees  with  its 
antecedent  in  gender  and  number ;  as, 


El  general  es  quien  los  vio. 
Las  reinas  son  quienes  le  maldi- 
jeron. 


The  general  is  {he)  icho  saw  them. 
The  queens  are  (they)  who  reviled 
him. 


(b.)  When  quien  (or  quienes)  is  governed  by  a  verb,  it  is 
always  preceded  by  the  preposition  a ;  as. 
La  dama  a  quien  vmd.  teme.  |  The  lady  ichom  you  fear. 

(c.)  El  dial  and  que,  like  the  relative  pronoun  that  in 
English,  relate  both  to  persons  and  things,  agreeing  with 
their  antecedent  in  gender  and  number.  El  cual  is  gener- 
ally to  be  used  to  prevent  the  repetition  of  quien  or 
qioe;  as. 

La  vaca  que  vio,  y  de  la  cual  habia,  i  The  cow  which  he  saw,  and  of  which 
es  timida.  I      he  speaks,  is  timid. 

[d.)  Cuyo  is  the  possessive  relative  pronoun,  answering 
to  whose^  tohich^  or  of  which^  in  English,  and  agrees  with 
the  noun  which  comes  after  it ;  as. 


El  hombre  cuya  madre  es  buena. 
La  casa  cuyos  cuartos  son  espaci- 

osos. 
El  centurion  los  envio  a  Joppe,  en 

cuya  ciudad  moraba  Simon. 


The  man  whose  mother  is  good. 
The  house  of  which  the  rooms  are 

spacious.  • 

The  centurion  sent  them  to  Joppa, 

mwhich  city  was-dwelling  Simon. 


125.  When  the  relative  pronoun  refers  to  persons,  que  is 
generally  used  for  quieii^  in  the  nominative  case  ;  but  in 
the  objective  case,  a  quien  (see  124,  b)  or  que  is  used  (gen- 
erally the  former) ;  as. 

El  hombre  que  habla. 

Yo  que  hablo. 

La  muger  a  quien  Juan  vio.  ^ 

La  muger  que  Juan  vio.        J 


The  man  who  speaks. 
I  who  speak. 

The  woman  whom  John  saw. 


{a.)  If  a  preposition  come  before  whom^  quien  is  always 
used  in  Spanish  ;  as. 

El  muchacho  para  quien  ^I  lo  hizo.  I  The  boy^r  whmn  he  did  it. 
Un  hombre  en  quien  el  rey  tiene    A  man  in  whmn  the  king  has  nmch 
mucha  confianza.  I      confidence. 


Lo  que  i,  algunos  gusta  i.  otros  dis- 

gusta. 
El  dijo,  yo  no  s6  que. 
Yo  no  s^  que  libros  leer ;      •\ 


OF   THE   PRONOUN.  49 

{b.)  What,  when  it  means  thai  which^  is,  in  Spanish,  lo 

que  ;  when  it  means  what  things  it  is  que ;  and  when  used 

before  a  noun,  what  or  which  is  que  or  cual ;  as. 

What  to  some  is-pleasant,  to  others 

is-disgusting. 
He  said,  I  know  not  uhat. 

I  know  not  what  (or  which)  books 

«  to  read. 

Yo  no  s6  cuales  libros  leer,  j 

(c.)  He  who  J  or  he  that,  is  in  Spanish  el  que  ;  she  who^  la 
que;  they  or  those  who^  los  que  (masculine),  las  que  (femi- 
nine).    There  is  also  the  neuter  form,  lo  que. 

126.  In  Spanish,  a  preposition  is  always  placed  before 
the  relative  pronoun  which  it  governs  ;  as, 

La  ciudad  tn  que  yo  moro.  |  The  city  in  which  I  dwell. 

^^  We  can  not  say,  "the  city  which  I  dwell  in,"  in  Spanish,  for  this 
would  be  worse  grammar  than  it  is  in  English. 

(a.)  The  relative  pronoun  can  never  be  suppressed  in  Spanish  as  in 
English;  thus,  ^^the  man  I  saw^*  would  be  expressed  in  full,  "the  man 
whom  I  saw." 

^^  The  Exercises  in  Part  IV.,  Section  Seventh,  can  be  translated. 

INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

127.  The  interrogative  pronouns  are  the  same  as  the 
relative,  except  cual  is  used  without  being  preceded  by  the 
article.  They  are  not  used  in  precisely  the  same  manner ; 
for  in  interrogations,  quien  always  means  who ;  cual^  which ; 
que^  what ;  cuyo^  whose ;  as. 


iQuien*  tiene  hambre7t 
iQuienes  tienen  sedl 
iCual  de  los  hijos  est^  alii  7 
iQue  dijo  el  medico  7 
iQue  sombrero  tiene  vmd.  1 
iCuyos  libros  son  estos  1 
iDe  quien  son  estos  libros? 


Who  is  hungry  1 
Who  are  thirsty  7 
Which  of  the  sons  is  there  7 
What  said  the  doctor  7 
What  hat  have  you  7 
Whose  books  are  these7 
Of  whom    (or   whose)  are    these 
books  7 


*  Quien  and  quiy  when  interrogative,  generally  have  the  marked 
accent. 

t  Literally  this  is,  "who  has  hunger?"  In  Spanish,  in  interrogations 
and  exclamations,  the  interrogation  and  exclamation  marks  are  placed 
at  the  beginning  (inverted)  as  well  as  jit  the  end  of  the  phrase  prsentf^nce. 

5 


50  iOF  THE   PRONOUN. 

(a.)  When  the  interrogative  pronoun  is  governed  by  a  preposition,  the 
answer  to  the  question  must  always  be  preceded  by  the  same  preposi- 
tion ;  as, 
iDe  quien  son  aquellas  niiios7    De     Whose  are  those  children?   JohrCs. 

Juan. 
iPara  quien  lo  hizo  7    Para  el  mu- 

ger, 

(6.)  When  what  is  used  in  ejaculatory  inteiTogations,  as  "  whai  a  fine 
day !"  "  what  a  man  !"  the  indefinite  article  is  omitted  in  Spanish ;  as, 
\  Que  hermosa  manana !  What  a  fine  morning ! 

i  Q,u^  desgr^cia ! 
i  Q,ue  modrego ! 

g^"  The  Exercises  in  Part  IV.,  Section  Eighth,  can  now  be  trans- 
lated. 

DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

128^  The   demonstrative  pronouns  are   este^  this ;    ise^ 
that ;  aqudj  that.     They  are  thus  declined : 


For  whom  did-he-do  it  7    For  the 
woman. 


What  a  disgrace ! 
What  a  blockhead ! 


MASC.       FEM. 


MAS.       FEM. 


Sing. 
Plu. 


Este,    Esta,    this. 
Estos,  Estas,  these. 


Ese,    Esa,    that.    Aquel,       Aquella,    that. 
Esos,  Esas,  those.  Aquellos,  Aquellas,  those. 


(a,)  There  is  also,  in  the  singular  number  of  each  of 
these  demonstrative  pronouns,  a  neuter  form,  used  when 
we  can  not  ascribe  a  gender  to  it ;  esto^  eso^  aquello  (see  84). 
In  such  a  sentence  as,  "  he  ought  to  be  honest,  for  this  is 
the  duty  of  every  man,"  it  is  evident  that  no  gender  can 
properly  be  applied  to  the  demonstrative  this^  and  in  such 
a  case  esto  would  be  used  in  Spanish. 

{b.)  Este  is  used  with  what  is  near  at  hand  ;  as,  este  horn- 
bre,  this  man  (here) :  ese,  with  what  is  somewhat  distant ; 
as,  ese  hombre,  that  man  (there) :  and  aquel,  with  what  is 
still  more  distant ;  as,  aqiiel  homhre,  that  man  (off  there, 
yonder).  When  relating  to  time,  este  is  used  with  time 
present ;  ese,  with  the  past ;  and  aqitel,  with  time  still  more 
distant ;  as,  "  this  (este)  book  which  I  now  have  ;  that  (ese) 
book  which  I  had  last  week  ;  and  that  (aquel)  book  which 
I  had  last  summer,  are  valuable." 

(c.)  Este  refers  to  the  last  mentioned  of  two  things,  and 
ese  (or  aqud)  to  the  first ;  as, 


OP   THE   PRONOUN.  51 

fil  general  y  el  capitan  vinieron;  I  The  general  and  the  captain  came ; 
ese  (or  aquel)  es  prudente,  este  es  |  the-former  is  prudent,  the-latter  is 
fdtuo.  stupid. 

{d.)  When  estc  or  ese  comes  before  the  indefinite  pronoun  otro  (other) 
the  former  drops  its  final  letter,  and  the  two  are  joined,  forming  one 
word ;  as,  estotro  or  estotra,  this  other ;  estotros  or  estotras^  these  others ; 
esotro  or  esotra,  that  other ;  esotros  or  esotras,  those  others, 

129.  If  the  objective  case  of  the  relative  pronoun  quien 
(whom)  is  used  in  such  phrases  as  he  v^hom^  she  whom^  him 
whom^  etc.,  aquel  must  come  before  it ;  as.  aquel  a  quien* 
he  whom  ;  aquella  a  quien^  she  whom  ;  aqu^ellos  or  aquellas 
a  quienes,  they  whom  ;  as, 

Aquellos  contra  quienes  pelearon.       |  Those  against  whom  they-fought. 

(a.)  When  the  relative  pronoun  of  the  objective  case  is 
not  preceded  by  a  preposition,  the  definite  article  is  gener- 
ally used  instead  of  aquel,  and  is  followed  by  the  relative 
pronoun  que  (see  1 25,  c) ;  as,  el  que,  he  whom  ;  la  que,  she 
whom  ;  los  or  las  que,  they  whom.  Thus  it  will  be  perceiv- 
ed that  he  whom  may  be  rendered  either  aquel  a  quien,  or  el 
que ;  she  whom,  by  either  aquella  a  quien,  or  la  que ;  they 
whom  or  those  whom,  by  either  aquellos  or  aquellas  d  quienes, 
or  los  or  las  que.  The  latter  mode  is  most  generally  em- 
ployed. 

(6.)  When  the  objective  case  of  the  personal  pronouns 
him,  her,  or  them,  precedes  the  nominative  of  the  relative 
who,  either  aquel  or  the  definite  article  may  be  used  ;  as, 

Juan  di6  pan  ^  aqaeUn  que  ^^^^^\z6\,^^^y^^^^^^^^UeT  who\^\.^m^ 

hambre;  or,  >  ° 

Juan  dio  pan  i.  la  que  tiene  hambre.  J 

(c.)  When  in  English  the  demonstrative  pronoun  that  is 
followed  by  the  preposition  of,  and  refers  to  a  noun  already 
expressed,  the  definite  article  is  employed  in  Spanish  ;  as, 


*  It  may  be  proper  to  mention  again,  that  quien  (whom)  is  never  em- 
ployed in  the  objective  case,  even  if  governed  by  a  verb,  without  being 
preceded  by  a  preposition. 


52  OF    THE    PRONOUN. 

Por  su  prud^ncia  y  por  la  del  juez.  I  Through  his  prudence  and  through 

1      that  qf-ihe  judge. 

£3^  The  Exercises  in  Part  IV.,  Section  Ninth,  can  now  be  trans- 
lated. 

INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS. 

The  indefinite  pronouns,  or  more  properly,  the  indefinite 
adjective  pronouns,  are  cada,  each ;  uno,  one ;  todo,  every 
one,  all ;  nddie^  nobody ;  alguien^  somebody ;  ninguno, 
none ;  alguno^  some ;  algo^  something ,  nada^  nothing ; 
otro^  other ;  tal^  such  ;  dmbos,  both  ;  e7itrdmbos,  both. 

130.  Of  these,  uno*  todo,  ninguno*  alguno*  otrOj  and 
talj  are  declined  like  adjectives,  both  in  the  masculine  and 
feminine.  Cada^  nddie,  alguien^  olgo^  nada^  are  used  only 
in  the  singular,  and  do  not  change.  Ambos  and  entrambos 
are  already  in  the  plural,  but  have  their  feminine,  ambas 
and  entrambas. 

(a.)  There  are  also  some  indefinite  relative  pronouns, 
quienquiera,  cualquiera^  cualesquiera^  whoever,  whosoever, 
whichever,  whichsoever. 


'  We  subjoin  a  list  of  these  indefinite  pronouns,  simple  and  com- 
bined, with  examples  of  the  manner  in  which  they  are  employed  in 
Spanish. 

131.  The  following  are  always  used  as  nouns,  that  is, 
are  never  joined  to  a  noun : 

'  Los  cuatro  animales,  coda  uno  de  ellos  tenia 

seis  alas. 
The  four  animals,  each  one  of  them  had  six 

wings. 
Todos  ser^n  premiados  cada  cual  segun  sus 

obras. 
All  will-be  rewarded,  each  one  according-to  his 
.     deeds. 
r  Juan  y  Diego  se  aman  uno  d  otro. 
Uno  otro,  each  other.  <  John  and  James  love  each  other  (love  themselves 
I     one  to  the-other). 


*  The  learner  must  remember  (see  101)  that  uno,  aJguno,  and  ninguno^ 
drop  the  final  o  when  they  precede  a  masculine  noun. 


Cada  uno,  C  every  one.^ 
Cada  cual,  (  each  one    ^ 


OP   THE   PRONOUN.  53 

, ,  .  *u      (  Orad  los  unos  por  los  otros. 

Unos  oiros,  one  another.  5  „       ^  .l      /^i.  ^    ^t     ^l     x 

(  Pray  for  one  another  {the  some  for  the  others), 

5  '^o^^^y-  J  ^'  nddie  ama  el  avaro. 

'  c  no  one.  (  The  miser  loves  nobody  (to  nobody  loves  the  miser). 

.       .       c  somebody,  f  j,  Le  ha  vis  to  alguien  ? 

°        '  (  any  body.  (  Has  any  body  seen  him  1 

c  one  and  the  other,  c  Uno  y  otro  son  amables. 

^        *  \  both.  \  Both  of  them  are  amiable. 

.        c  something,  c  Yo  tengo  algo  que  comer. 

^  *  )  anything.    (  I  have  something  which  to  eat. 

--         c  nothing.  c  Ni 

'  (  not  anything.  ( I  have  nothing  with  which  to  maintain  myself. 

.r] 

Todo  lo  que.-^  everything.      <  This- woman  cast-in  all  that  (or  every 


^  nothing.  c  Nadu  tengo  con  que  mantenerme. 

t  anything.  ( I  have  nothing  with  which  to  main 

{all  that  which,  r  Esta  echo  todo  lo  que  tenia, 
everything.      <  This-woman  cast- 
whatever.  I.     thing)  she-had. 

,  f  Quienquiera  que  el  sea. 

Quienquiera  que,     whoever.       I  f^^^^^  ^^  may-be. 

■^  whosoever  s 
Cualquiera  que,      (  whichever*   I  ^^"^^^iera  ^we  se  humillare. 
^  *    L  Whoever  may-humble  himself. 

132,  The  following  are  never  used  alone,  but  always  with 


^  (  each.   C  Coda  vez.     Each  time. 

I  every,  c  Cada  palabra.    Every  word. 
Gualquier,     J     v,  *  5  Cualquier  criatura.     Whatever  creature. 

Cualesquier.  \  '  (  Cualesquier  criaturas.      Whatever  creatures. 

133.  These  following  may  be  used  alone  as  nouns,  or 
joined  to  nouns  as  adjectives  : 

r  everything,  f  En  todo  dad  gracias.     Todos  tienen  temor. 

Todo,  J  all.  J  In  everything  give  thanks.     All  were  afraid 

Todos.  j  everybody,    j  Todo  ^rbol.     Tocfos  los  hombres. 

L  every.  [  jE^uery  tree.    All  men. 

'  Tengo  libros :  ^tiene  vmd.  algunos? 

I-have  books :  have  you  any  7 

["  any,  anybody.  Alguno  me  ha  tocado. 

. ,  J  x.  ^      ,  Somebody  has  touched  me. 

.4.Z^7W.<  some,  somebody.  <^   ^,        ^^ 

'  ^  Algun  fnito.     Algunas  cosas. 


f/7W.j 


jSome  fruit.     iSome  things. 
Creyeron  algunos  de  ellos. 
jSome  of  them  believed. 
Un  dia.     C/ha  de  las  hermanas. 


one.  '  One  day.     One  of  the  sisters, 

a  person.  |  No  sabe  uno  que  hacer. 

[  One  (or  a  persmi)  knows  not  what  to  do, 
5* 


Unos. 


)  some. 

i  certain  ones. 


Dio 


Ningum 


OF   THE   PRONOUN. 

Unos  hombres. 

Some  certain  men. 

j,Di6  libros  d  algunos   de   estos  nifios? 

libros  a  unos. 

Gave-he  books  to  any  of  these  children  1    He 

gave  books  to  some. 

Ninguno  le  vio.    A  ninguno  di&  libros. 

Nobody    saw    him.      To    no-one   gave-hu 

books. 

Ninguna  persona.     Ningunos  de  los  hijos. 

^  No  person.     None  of  the  sons. 

Una  cosa  es  prometer  y  otro  cumplir. 

One  thing  it-is  to  promise  and  another  to  pei- 

form. 

Al  fin  las  otras  mugeres  vinieron. 

^  At  length  the  other  women  came. 

c  De  los  tales  es  el  estado.    En  tal  tiempo. 

'  ^^^  *  \  Of  such  is  the  state.    In  such  a  time. 

f  Ambos  me  gustan  bien.    Ambos  sexos. 

Ambos.         ^  ,    .u    i  t^oth  please  me  well.     Both  sexes. 
<  both.  ^ 


{nobody, 
not  any  one. 
none,  not  any. 
no  one. 


Otro. 
Otros, 


'  other,  another. 
[  others,  other. 


Entrambos. 


.  Entrambos  caen  en  el  hoyo. 
[  Both  fall  into  the  pit. 


134.  Alguien  and  nadie  can  not  be  followed  by  the  pre- 
position dcj  of ;  but  alguno  and  ninguno  must  be  used  ;  as, 


I  Some-one  of  the  boys. 
I  No-one  of  the  daughters. 


Alguno  de  los  muchachos. 
Ninguna  de  las  hijas. 

(a.)  Alguno  is  never  placed  after  the  noun,  except  in  negative  sen- 
tences, and  then  it  has  the  same  meaning  as  ninguno  placed  before  the 
noun ;  thus  we  can  say,  Yo  no  hallo  en  el  ninguno  causa;  or,  Yo  no  hallo 
en  el  causa  alguna,  I  find  no  fault*  in  him. 

(b.)  Algo  and  nada  can  admit  of  an  adjective  joined  to  them,  or  the 
preposition  de  may  come  between ;  thus,  it  can  be  said,  algo  nuevo, 
or,  algo  de  nuevo,  something  new ;  nada  de  natural,  nothing  natural. 

(c.)  When  by  another's  we  mean  the  opposite  of  one^s  own,  it  is 
expressed  in  Spanish,  not  by  otro,  but  by  ageno  (or  ajeno) ;  aS;  lo  ageno, 
that  which  is  another's,  or  that  which  is  the  property  of  another ;  los 
bienes  agenos,  another's  goods  or  wealth. 

1^*  The  Exercises  in  Part  IV.,  Section  Tenth,  may  now  be  trans- 
lated. 


*  Or  rather,  "  cause  of  accusation ' 
tives  strengthen  the  negation. 


in  him      In  Spanish,  two  nega- 


OP   THE   VERB.  55 

OF   THE  VERB. 

Verbs  are  classed,  as  in  English,  into  active,  passive, 
and  neuter ;  active-transitive,  active-intransitive,  reflective, 
regular,  irregular,  impersonal,  and  defective.  They  are 
also  varied  by  person  and  number,  mood  and  tense. 

135.  An  active  verb  expresses  an  action  affirmed  of  the 
agent  or  nominative ;  as 

Claudio  escribe.  \         Claudius  writes. 

{a.)  When  the  action  is  affirmed  of  the  agent  as  being 
transmitted  to  a  direct  object,  the  verb  is  called  active- 
transitive  ;  as, 

Claudio  escribe  una  carta.  |  Claudius  writes  a  letter. 

(h.)  When  the  verb  expresses  action,  but  has  no  direct 
object,  it  is  called  active-intransitive ;  as. 

El  esclamo.  \  He  exclaimed. 

El  mocito  salts,  \         The  lad  jumped. 

136.  A  reflective  verb  is  one  which  affirms  that  the  actidli 
is  conveyed  to  the  same  person  or  thing  which  is  the 
agent ;  as, 

Tu  te  cenes.  \  Thou  girdest  thyself. 

iVosotros  nos  alabamos.  We  commend  ourselves. 

El  se  tiene  por  hombre  grande.  1  He  holds  hUnself  for  a  great  man. 

137.  A  passive  verb  affirms  that  an  action*  has  been 
received  or  suffered  by  the  agent ;  as, 

Eilosfueron  postrados.  \  They  were  overthrown. 

138.  A  neuter  verb  affirms  merely  the  condition  or  state 
of  existence  of  its  agent,  without  any  reference  to  a  direct 
object ;  as, 

El  hombre  existe.  \         The  man  exists. 

Yo  vivo.  I  I  live. 

139.  Verbs  have  three  persons  and  two  numbers,  as  in 
English  ;  that  is,  they  vary  their  endings  to  agree  with 
the  person  and  number  of  their  nominative ;  as. 


56 


OF   THE   VERB. 


■I 


Nosotros  hablamos,  we  speak 
Vosotros  hablais,  you  speak. 
Ellos  hablan,  they  speak. 


First  Person.      Yo     hahlo,     I 

speak. 
Second  Person.  TH  hablas^Xhow. 

speakest. 
Third  Person.     El    habla,    he 

speaks. 

(a.)  In  Spanish,  it  is  not  necessary  to  use  the  personal  pronouns  of  the 
j  nominative  case  with  the  verb  (unless  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  or  pers- 
j  picuity),  as  the  ending  of  the  verb  indicates  the  person  of  its  nomina 
1  tive.     Thus,  hablo  means  I-speak;  hahlas,  thou-speakest ;  habla,   he- 
speaks  or  she-speaks ;  hablamos,  we-speak,  etc. 

MOODS. 

Mood  is  the  form  which  the  verb  takes  to  show  in  what 
manner  the  action  or  being  is  represented.  In  Spanish 
there  are  four  moods ;  the  infinitive,  the  indicative,  the 
imperative,  and  the  subjunctive. 

140.  The  infinitive  mood  expresses  action  or  being  in  an 
indefinite  manner,  without  reference  to  person  or  time ;  as, 

Hablar,  to  speak.  ^         Coiner,  to  eat. 

141.  The  indicative  mood  represents  the  affirmation  in 
a  positive  manner  ;  as, 

Hablamos,  we-speak.  |  Comere,  I-shall-eat. 

142.  The  imperative  mood  expresses  an  order,  entreaty, 

or  command ;  as, 

Uahldd,  speak  ye.  i  Coman,  let-them-eat,  or,  raay-they- 

eat. 

143.  The  subjunctive  mood  represents  the  affirmation  in 
a  conditional  manner ;  as, 

Aunque  hahlen,  though  they-may-  I  Yo  comeria,  I  would-eat. 
speak.  I 

TENSES. 

Tense  is  the  form  which  the  verb  takes  to  show  the  time 
of  the  action,  being,  or  passion  which  is  affirmed.  There 
are  properly  three  tenses,  the  past,  the  present,  and  the 
future.  These  are  subdivided  into  eight  tenses,  one  for 
the  present,  five  for  the  past,  and  two  for  the  future  :  the 
present ;  imperfect,  perfect-definite,  perfect-indefinite,^  the 


OP   THE    VERB.  57 

first-pluperfect,   second-pluperfect;    the    first-future,   and 
future-perfect  or  second-future. 

144.  The  present  tense  represents  whatever  is  affirmed 
as  taking  place  at  the  present  time  ;  as, 

Hablauy  they-speak.  |  Estdn  comiendoy  they-are  eating. 

145.  The  imperfect  tense  represents  as  relatively  present 
something  which  is  affirmed  as  past,  though,  for  all  we 
know  to  the  contrary,  not  yet  completed ;  as, 

Hablaban  cuando  los  vio.  I  They  were-speaking  when  he-saw 

I      them. 

146.  The  perfect-definite  tense  represents  what  is  affirmed 
as  being  completely  past  and  finished  ;  as, 

Les  hablo  ayer.  |  Ke-spoke  to  them  yesterday. 

147.  The  perfect-indefinite  tense  represents  what  is  affirm- 
ed ^s  having  taken  place  during  a  time  not  entirely 
elapsed  ;  as, 

Les  he  hablado  hoy.  |  I-have  spoken  to  them  to-day. 

148.  The  first-pluperfect  tense  expresses  what  is  past  and 
was  finished  before  another  action,  also  past,  took  place : 
that  is,  an  event  which  occurred  prior  to  some  other  past 
event;  as, 

Habm  hablado  cuando  Wego.  \  1-had  spoken  when  he-arrived. 

149.  The  second-pluperfect  expresses  that  what  is  affirmed 
had  taken  place  immediately  before  a  time  which  is  past , 
and  is  always  employed  after  adverbs  of  time ;  as, 

Cuando  les  hvho  hablado^  se  mar-  I  When  he-had  spoken  to-them,  they- 
charon.  I     went  away. 

150.  The  first-future  tense  refers  to  some  action  or  event 
which  is  yet  to  take  place  ;  as, 

Hablard  esta  noche.  |  He-will-speak  to-night. 

151.  The  second-future  or  future-perfect  tense  refers  to 
some  future  action  or  event  that  will  have  taken  place  at 
or  before  some  certain  future  time ;  as, 

HabrS  acabado  d  las  ocho.  |  l-shall-havejinished  at  eigh*  o'clcfck. 


58  OF  THE  VERB. 


PARTICIPLES  AND  GERUNDS. 


152.  Verbs  in  Spanish  have  two  participles,  the  f  resent 
and  the  fast.  There  are,  however,  but  few  present  partici- 
ples in  use,  and  these  few  are,  almost  without  exception, 
employed  only  as  adjectives  or  nouns  ;  as,  semejante,  simi- 
lar ;  obedientey  obedient ;  viajante^  traveler.  The  ending 
of  the  present  participle  of  verbs  that  have  their  infinitive 
in  «r,  is  ante  ;  of  those  that  have  their  infinitive  in  er  or 
ir,  it  is  iente. 

153.  The  past-participle  denotes  action  or  being  perfected 
or  finished,  and  when  derived  from  a  regular  verb,  is  gen- 
erally formed  by  changing  the  final  letters  of  the  infinitive 
ar  into  ado,  and  er  or  ir  into  ido  ;  as, 

Hablado,  spoken.  j  Comido,  eaten. 

154.  The  gerund  in  Spanish  is  equivalent  to  the  present 
participle  in  English  ;  and  is  formed  by  changing  the  final 
letters  of  the  infinitive  ar  into  ando,  and  er  and  ir  into 
iendo  ;  as, 

HablandOf  speaking.  j         ComiendOf  eating. 

CONJUGATION. 

155.  In  Spanish,  the  infinitive  mood  of  all  Verbs  ends 
in  ar,  er,  or  ir,  and  these  terminations  serve  to  distinguish 
the  three  conjugations  ;  the  first  conjugation  comprehend- 
ing all  verbs  ending  in  ar  ;  the  second,  those  ending  in  er  ; 
and  the  third,  those  ending  in  ir. 

(a.)  Regular  verbs  are  those  which  are  conjugated  through  all  the 
moods  and  tenses  without  deviating  in  their  orthography  from  the  cor- 
responding orthography  of  the  model  verbs. 

(6.)  Irregular  verbs  are  those  which  do  not  conform  in  every  respect 
to  the  regular  standard  or  model  verbs. 

(c.)  Auxiliary  or  helping  verbs  are  those  by  the  aid  of  which  others 
are  conjugated  in  the  compound  tenses  and  in  the  passive  voice.  Th^ 
auxiliary  verbs  are  haber^  to  have ;  ser^  to  be ;  and  estar^  to  be.  Those 
tenses  of  the  active  voice  in  which  an  auxiliary  verb  is  used,  are  called 
compound  tenses. 


OF   THE   VERB. 


59 


Remark. — ^The  learaer  must  keep  in  mind  the  rules  for  accenting  the 
verb  in  all  its  varieties  of  termination  (see  57,  a,  and  b) ;  and  he  will  thus 
know  that  all  persons  of  the  verbs  (of  whatever  mood  or  tense)  which 
have  no  accent  over  some  syllable  are  to  be  accented  on  the  syllable 
next  to  the  last.*  In  some  of  the  first  conjugations  following,  the  ac- 
cent is  placed  over  all  the  words,  in  order  to  aid  the  learner  in  pro- 
nouncing them, 

1^*  As  the  auxiliary  verbs  are  required  to  form  the  compound  tenses 
of  every  other  verb,  we  first  give  the  conjugation  of  them. 

156.  Conjugation  of  the  auxiliary  verb,  haber. 


SIMPLE   TENSES.         INFINITIVE   MOOD.      COMPOUND   TENSES. 

Haber,   To  have. 

PAST-PARTICIPLE. 

PAST-INFINITIVE. 

Habido,                 Had. 

Hab^r  habido,         To  have  had. 

GERUND    OF   THE    PRESENT. 

GERUND    OF   THE    PAST. 

Habi^ndo,             Having. 

Habiendo  habido,  Having  had. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

PERFECT-INDEFINITE. 

Yo  he,                .  I  have. 

Yo  he  habido,      /Aare  had. 

Tii  has,                  Thou  hasst. 

Tu  has  habido,     TViou  hast  had. 

El  ha.                    He  has. 

El  ha  h  ibldo,       He  has  had. 

Nosutros  h^mos.  We  have. 

Nosutros    hemos 

habido.               We  have  had. 

Vosutros  hab^is,  Ye  have. 

Vosutros    habeis 

habido,               Ye  have  had. 

Ellos  han,              They  have. 

Ellos  han  habido,  They  have  had. 

IMPERFECT. 

FIRST-PLUPERFECT. 

Yohabia,              I  had. 

Yo  habla  hBhido,  I  had  had. 

Tii  habias,            Thau  hadst. 

Tii  habias  habido,  Thou  hadst  had. 

El  habla.               He  had. 

El  habla  habido.  He  had  had. 

Nosutros   habla- 

Nosutros    habla- 

mos,                   We  had. 

mos  habido.       We  had  had. 

Vosutros  hablais.  Ye  had. 

Vosutros  hablais 

habido,               Ye  had  had. 

Ellos  habian,        1  ^hey  had. 

Ellos  habian  ha- 

bido,                  They  had  had. 

*  Except  the  second  person  plural  of  the  imperative  mood. 


60 


OF  THE   VERB. 


1                             INDICATIVE  MOOD—ConHnued.                            [ 

PERFECT-DEFINITE. 

SECOND-PLUPERFECT. 

YoMbe,              I  had. 

Yo  hiibe  habido,  I  had  had. 

Tii  hubiste,           Thou  hadst. 

Tu  hubiste  habi- 

do,                     Thou  hadst  had. 

El  hiibo,                He  had. 

El  hiibo  habido,  He  had  had. 

Nosotros    hubi- 

Nosotros     hubl- 

mos,                   We  had. 

mos  habido,       We  had  had. 

jVosotros  hubls- 

Vosotros   hubis- 

teis,                    You  had. 

teis  habido,        You  had  had. 

Ellos  hubieron,     They  had. 

Ellos     hubieron 

habido,               They  had  had. 

FIRST-FUTURE. 

SECOND-FUTURE. 

Yo  habr^,             I    shall   or    will 

Yo  habre  habido,/  s^iaZZ  or  will  have 

have. 

had.                     1 

Tii  habras,            Thau,  shall  or  wilt 

Tii  habras  habi-  Thm  shall  ox  wilt 

have. 

do,                         have  had. 

Eihabr^              He  shaU  or  wUl 

El  habra  habido.  He  shaU  or  wiU 

have. 

have  had. 

Nosotros  habrd-  We  shall  or  will 

Nosotros  habr^-  We  shall  or  will 

mos,                      have. 

mos  habido,         have  had. 

Vosotros  habr^is,  Y(m  shall  or  will 

Vosotros  habr^is  You  shall  or  will 

have. 

habido,                  have  had. 

Ellos  habr^n,        They  shaU  or  wUl 

Ellos  habr^n  ha-  They  shall  or  vMl 

have. 

bido,                       have  had.           || 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


H^ya  yo,*  Let  me  have^  or,  Tnay  I  have. 

Ha  tii.  Have  thou. 

Hdya  el.  Let  him  have,  or,  m^y  he  have. 

Hayamos  nosotros,  Let  us  have^  or,  may  we  have. 

Hab^d  vosotros.        Have  you. 

H^yan  ellos.  Let  them  have,  or,  may  they  have. 


*  The  first  person  singular  of  the  imperative  mood  is  not  in  use  in 
Spanish,  and  is  inserted  here  only  to  exhibit  the  full  form  of  the  conju- 
gation. 


OF   THE   VERB. 


61 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

PERFECT-INDEFINITE. 

Yo  haya,              /  inay  have. 

Tii  hdyas,              Tfiou  mayest  have 

El  h^ya,               He  may  have. 
Nosotros    haya- 

moSj                   We  may  have. 
Vosotros  hayais,  You  may  have. 

EIlos  h^yan,          They  may  have. 

Yo  hdya  habido,  /  may  have  had. 
Tii  h^yas  habido,  Thou  mayest  have 

had. 
El  h^ya  habido,  He  may  have  had. 
Nosotros    haya- 

mos  habido,       We  may  have  had. 
Vosotros  hayais  You     may    have 

habido,                  had. 
Ellos  hayan  ha-  They   may   have 

bldo,                      had. 

IMPERFECT.* 

PLUPERFECT. 

Yo  hubiera,  ha-  /  would,  should, 
bria,or  hubiese,     or  might  have. 

Tii  hubieras,  ha-  Thou      wouldst, 
brias,  or  habie-     shouldst,     or 
ses,                        mightst  have. 

El  hubiera,   ha-  He  would,  shmdd, 
bria, or  hubiese,     or  might  have. 

Nosotros  hubi^r-  We  would,  should, 

amos,    habria-     ox  might  have. 

mos,  or  hubie- 

semos, 
Vosotros  hubi4-    You    would, 

rais,    habriais,     should,  or  might 

or  hubieseis,         have. 

Ellos    hubi^ran,  They    would, 
habrlan,  or  hu-    should,or might, 
bi^sen,                  have. 

Yo  hubiera,  ha-/  wouhi,   should, 
bria,  or   hubi-     or   might   have 
6se  habido,           hcd. 

Tu  hubieras,  ha-  Thou       wouldst, 
brias,  or  hubie-     shouldst,    or 
ses  habido,          mightst havehad. 

El  hubiera,    ha-  He  would,  should, 
bria,  or  hubiese     or   might  have 
habido,            ^      had.                    ! 

Nosotros  hubier-  We  would,  should, ! 
amos,    habria-     or  might   hare  \ 
mos,  or  hubie-     had. 
semos  habido, 

Vosotros  hubie-    You          would, 
rais,    habriais,     should,  or  might 
or      hubieseis      have  had. 
habido, 

Ellos    hubi^ran,    TYiey    would, 
habrlan,  or  hu-     should,  or  migh  t 
bi^sen  habido,      have  had. 

FIRST-FUTURE. 

SECOND-FUTURE. 

Si  yo  hubi^re,      If  J  should  have. 

Si  tii  hubi^res,     If  thmi   shauldst 
have. 

Si  yo  hubiere  ha-  If  I  should  have 

bido,                     had. 
Si    tii    hubi^res/^r  thou   shouldst 

habido,                  have  had. 

*  The  three  forms  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive  (ending  in  ra,  ria,  and 
ae),  will  be  explained  in  Part  III.     (See  313—317.) 

6 


62 


OF    THE    VERB. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD— Continued. 


FIRST-FUTURE. 


SECOND-FUTURE. 


Si  61  hubi^re,       If  he  should  have. 

Si  nosotros  hu- If  we  should  have. 

bi^remos, 
Si  vosotros  hubi-  If    you      should 

ereis,  have. 

Si  6II0S  hubi^ieUflf    they     should 
have. 


Si  el  hubi^re  ha-  If  he  should  have 

bido,  had. 

Si  nosotros  hubi-  If  we  should  have 

^remos  habido,  Jiad. 
Si  vosotros  hu-  If  you  should  have 

biereis  habido,  had. 
Si    ellos    huhi6- If    they     should 

ren  habido,  have  had. 


157.  By  examining  the  above  conjugation,  it  will  be 
seen  that,  after  having  learned  the  simple  tenses,  the  com- 
pound ones  are  also  known,  as  these  latter  are  always 
formed  by  placing  the  past  participle  after  the  persons  of 
the  simple  tenses  of  the  auxiliary  verb.* 

(a.)  The  personal  pronouns  of  the  nominative  case  are  seldom  used 
with  the  verb  (see  139,  a),  as  the  ending  of  the  person  of  each  tense  gen- 
erally indicates  the  person  and  number  of  its  nominative.  Thus,  the 
first  person  plural  of  every  tense  has  its  ending  in  mos :  when,  therefore, 
the  learner  sees  any  tense  of  a  verb  having  for  its  final  letters  mos,  he 
may  know  that  its  nominative  is  to  be  rendered  in  English  by  the  pro- 
noun we.  In  the  conjugations  which  follow,  the  pronouns  will  be 
omitted  in  Spanish. 


'  The  distinctions  between  some  of  the  tenses  (distinctions  not 
known  in  Enghsh  Grammar)  will  be  explained  in  Part  III. 

158.  Conjugation  of  the  verb  ser. 


SIMPLE    TENSES.            INFINITIVE     MOOD.          COMPOUND    TENSES. 

Ser,   To  be. 



PAST-PARTICIPLE. 

PAST-INFINITIVE. 

Sido,  "                   Been. 

Hab^r  sido.           To  have  been. 

GERUND    OF  THE    PRESENT. 

GERUND    OF   THE    PAST. 

Si^ndo,                  Being. 

Habidndo  sido,     Having  been. 

*  Perhaps  one  of  the  easiest  methods  of  learning  the  conjugations  of 
the  verbs  is  to  copy  and  re-copy  each  tense  till  it  can  be  done  without 
referring  to  the  Grammar. 


OF  THE  VERB. 


68 


INDICATIVE  MOOD.                                      | 

PRESENT. 

PERFECT- 

INDEFINITE. 

Soy, 

lam. 

He  sido. 

/  have  been. 

E'res, 

T/iou  art. 

Has  sido, 

Thou  hast  been. 

Es, 

He  is. 

Ha  sido. 

He  has  been. 

Soraos, 

We  are. 

H^mos  sido, 

We  have  been. 

S6is, 

You  are. 

Habeis  sido. 

You  have  been. 

Son, 

They  are. 

Han  sido, 

They  have  been. 

IMPERFECT. 

FIRST-PLUPERFECT.                      | 

E'ra, 

I  was. 

Habia  sido, 

I  had  been. 

E'ras, 

Thou  wast. 

Hablas  sido, 

Tliou  hadst  been. 

E'ra, 

He  was. 

Habia  sido. 

He  had  been. 

E'ramos, 

We  were. 

Habiamos  sido. 

We  had  been. 

E'rais, 

You  were. 

Habiais  sido. 

You  had  been. 

E'ran, 

They  were. 

Habian  sido. 

They  Jiad  been. 

PERFECT-DEFINITE. 

SECOND-PLUPERFECT.                  j 

Ful, 

I  was. 

Hiibe  sido, 

I  had  been. 

Puiste, 

Thou  wast. 

Hubiste  sido, 

Thou  hadst  been. 

,Fu^, 

He  was. 

Hiibo  sido. 

He  had  been. 

]  Fuimos, 

We  were. 

Hubimos  sido, 

We  had  been. 

Fulsteis, 

You  were. 

Hubisteis  sido. 

You  had  been. 

Fu6ron, 

They  were. 

Hubi^ron  sido, 

They  had  been. 

FIRST-FUTURE. 

SECOND-FUTURE. 

Ser6, 

I  shall  ox  will  he. 

Habr6  sido, 

I  shall  ox  will  have 
been. 

Seris, 

Thou  shalt  or  wUt 

Habr^s  sido. 

ThoushaUoxwUt 

be. 

have  been. 

Ser^ 

HeshaUmvnllbe. 

Habrd  sido, 

He  shall  or  will 
have  been. 

Ser^mos, 

We  shall  or  iciU 

Habr^mos  sido, 

We  shall  or  vnll 

be. 

have  been. 

Serais, 

You  shall  or  will 

Habr^is  sido. 

You  shall  or  will 

be. 

have  been. 

Serdn, 

They  shall  or  will 

Habr^n  sido. 

They  shaU  ox  wiU 

be. 

1    ..,'                       ! 

have  been. 

64 


OF  THE  VERB. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

1                              S4a, 

Let  me  5e,  or 

may  I  be. 

S6, 

Be  thou. 

Sea, 

Let  him  be,  or,  may  he  be.                               || 

Sedmos 

Let  tis  bey  or, 

may  we  be. 

Sed, 

Be  you. 

Sean, 

Let  them  be, 

or,  may  they  be. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

PERFECT-INDEFINITE. 

S^a,                       I  may  be. 

Haya  sido,            /  Ttiay  have  been. 

S^as,                     Thou  mayest  be. 

Hdyas  sido.           Thou  mayest  have 

been.' 

Sea,                       He  may  be. 

Haya  'sido,            He  may  have  been. 

Se^mos,                 We  may  be. 

H^yamos  sido,     We     may     have 

been. 

Seals,                    You  may  be. 

Hdyais  sido.         You    may    have 

been. 

S4an,                     They  may  be. 

Hdyan  sido.          They   may   have 

been. 

IMPERFECT. 

PLUPERFECT. 

Fu^ra,      seria,    Iwauld,  should,  or 

Hubiera,  habria,  /  would,    should, 

or  fu^se,               might  be. 

or  hubi^se  si-     or  might  have 

do,                         been. 

Fu^ras,     serlas,    Thou    wouMst, 

Hubidras,  habri-  Thou     wouldst, 

or  fusses,                 shovldst,    or 

as,  or  hubi^ses     shouldst,    or 

mightst  be. 

sido,                       mightst       have 

been. 

Fu^ra,       seria.    He  would,  should, 

Hubiera,  habria.  He  would,  should, 

or  fusses,              or  might  be. 

or    hubi^se      or  might  have 

sido,                   been. 

Fu^ramos,  seria-  We  would,  should, 

Hubi^raraos,  ha-  We  would,  should, 

mos,  or  fu^se-     or  might  be. 

briamos,    or     or    might  have 

mos, 

hubi^semos      been.        « 

sido. 

Fu^rais,   serials,    You     would. 

Hubi^rais,      ha-  You     would, 

or  fu^seis,             should,  or  might 

briais,  or  hubi-     shouLd,ox  might 

be. 

6seis  sido,             have  been. 

Fu^ran,    serian,  They     would, 

Hubi^ran,  habri-   They    would. 

or  fu^sen,             should,  or  might 

an,   or  hubi^-     should,  or  might 

be. 

sen  sido,               have  been. 

OF   THE   VERB. 


65 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD— Continued, 

FIRST-FUTURE. 

SECOND-FUTURE. 

Si  fu^re, 

Jf  I  should  be. 

Si  hubiere  sido,  If  I  should  have 
been. 

Si  fu^res, 

If  thou   shouldst 

Si  hubi^res  sido,  If  thou   shouldst 

he. 

have  been. 

Si  fu^re, 

If  he  should  he. 

Si  hubiere  sido,  If  he  should  have 
been. 

Si  fu^remos, 

If  we  should  he. 

Si    hubieremos  If  we  should  have 
sido.                      been. 

Si  fu^reis, 

If  you  should  he. 

Si  hubi^reis  sido,  If  you  should  have 
been. 

Si  fu^ren, 

If  they  should  he. 

Si  hubieren  sido.  If  they  should 
have  been. 

iated. 


The  Exercises  in  Part  IV.,  Section  Eleventh,  can  now  be  trans 


159.  Conjugation  of  the  verb  esiar. 


-, 

SIMPLE   TENSES.         INFINITIVE    MOOD.      COMPOUND    TENSES. 

Estar,  To  be. 

PAST   PARTICIPLE. 

PAST   INFINITIVE. 

Estddo,                  Been. 

Haber  estado,        To  have  been. 

GERUND    OF   THE   PRESENT. 

GERUND    OF   THE    PAST. 

Estando,               Being. 

Habi^ndo  estado,  Having  been. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

PERFECT-INDEFINITE. 

Estoy, 

I  am. 

He  > 

I  have         1 
Thou  hast  ^been. 

Est^s, 

Thou  art. 

Has  >est^do, 

Est^, 

He  is. 

Ha  J 

He  has        J 

Est^mos, 

We  are. 

H^mos-i 
Hab^is  Ust^do, 
Han      J 

We  have     > 

Estdis, 

You  are. 

You  have    >been. 

Est^n, 

They  are. 

They  have  J 

66 


OP  THE   VERB. 


1 

INDICATIVE  MOOD— Continued. 

'  -  ■) 

IMPERFECT. 

FIRST-PLUPERFECT.                       ' 

Estdba, 

I  was. 

Habla 

I  had 

Estdbas, 

Thou  wast. 

Habias 

Thou  hadst 

Estdba, 
Estdbamos, 

He  was. 
We  were. 

Habia 
Habiamos 

[l 

He  had 
We  had 

1 

Est^bais, 

You  were. 

Habiais 

You  had 

Est^ban, 

They  were. 

Habian 

They  Jmd       . 

PERFECT-DEFINITE.* 

SECOND-PLUPERFECT. 

Estiive, 

I  was. 

Hiibe          1 

Ihad 

Estuviste, 

Thou  wast. 

Hubiste 

Thou  hadst 

Estiivo, 

He  was. 

Hiibo 

O 

He  had 

'1 

Estuvimos, 

We  were. 

Hubimos 

2? 

We  had 

Estuvisteis, 

You  were. 

Hubisteis 

Qi 

You  had 

Estuvieroh, 

They  were. 

Hubieron   J 

They  had       J 

FIRST-FUTURE. 

SECOND-FUTURE. 

Estard. 

I  shall  or  wiU  be. 

Habr^         ] 

I  shall  or  wUr 

Estar^s, 

Thou  shalt  ox  wilt 

he. 
He  shaU  or  will  he. 

Habr^s 

Thou  wilt 

Estar^j 

Habrd 

O 

HewUl 

s 

Estar^mos, 

We  shall  or  wiUhe. 

Habremos 

>^ 

We  shall 

>^ 

Estar^is, 

You  shall  or  tmll 

he 
They  shall  or  wiU 

Habr^is 

You  will 

& 

4 

Estar^n, 

Habran 

They  will 

he.                                          J 

J 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


Este,  Let  me  be,  or  may  I  he.i 

Esta,  Be  thou. 

Est^,  Let  him,  be,  or  may  he  be. 

Estemos,  Let  vs  be,  or  may  we  be. 

Est^d,       Be  you. 

Est^n,       Let  them  he,  or  may  they  be. 


*  The  persons  o.f  the  perfect-definite  and  those  of  the  imperfect  of  the 
indicative  mood,  in  Spanish,  are  both  rendered  by  the  English  imperfect 
tense,  but  they  can  not  be  used  indiscriminately  in  Spanish.  The 
proper  manner  of  employing  them  will  be  found  in  Part  III.  (See 
302-304.)  ^    J    ^  \ 

t  See  the  remark  in  the  margin,  at  page  60. 


OF   THE    VERB. 


67 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 


PERFECT-INDEFINITE. 


Este, 

Estes, 

Este, 

Estemos, 

Esteis, 

Esten, 


/  may  be. 
Thmi  mayest  be. 
He  may  be. 
We  may  be. 
You  may  be.     • 
They  may  be. 


Haya 

Hayas 

Haya 

Hayamoa 

Hayais 

HjCyan 


o 
-a 

>'2 


I  may 

Thou  mayest 
He  may 
We  may 
You  may 
They  Tnay 


IMPERFECT. 


Estuvi^ra,  estaria,  estuviese, 
Estuvi^ras,  estarias,  estuvieses, 
Estuvi^ra,  estaria,  estuviese, 
Estuvi^ramos,  estariamos,  estuvi- 

^semos, 
Estuvi^rais,  estarias,  estuvi^seis, 
Estuvi^ran,  estarian,  estuvi^sen. 


/  would,  sJwuldy  might  be. 
Thou  wouldst,  shouldst,  mightst  be. 
He  would,  should,  might  be. 
We  would,  should,  might  be. 

You  would,  should,  might  be. 
They  would,  should,  might  be. 


PLUPERFECT. 


Hubiera,  habria,  hubiese 
Hubi^ras,  habrlas,  hubi^ses 
Hubiera,  habria,  hubiese 
Hubieramos,  habrlamos,  hubi- 

esemos 
Hubierais,  habrlais,  hubi^seis 
Hubieran,  habrian,  hubiesen 


I  would,  should,  might 
Thou  wouldst,  shouldst,  might 
'  He  would,  should,  might 
>"§    We  would,  should,  might    • 

You  would,  should,  might 
They  would,  should,  might 


FIRST-FUTURE. 


SECOND-FUTURE. 


Si  estuvi^re,         If  I  should  be. 
Si  estuvi^res,       J f  thou  shouldst  be. 
Si  estuvi^re,         If  he  should  be. 
Si  estuvi^remos.  If  we  should  be. 
Si  estuvi^reis,      If  you  should  be. 
Si  estuvi^ren,       If  they  should  be. 


Si  hubiere 
Si  hubieres 
Si  hubiere 
Sihubieremos 
Si  hubi^reis 
Si  hubi^ren 


If  I  should    1 
If  thou  shouldst 
^  If  he  should    !  ^ 
'^If  we  should  j 
'"  If  you  should]  > 

If  they  should  J 


The  learner  will  now  translate  the  Exercises  in  Part  IV.,  Section 
Twelfth. 

160.  Conjugation  of  the  verb  ten^r.* 


*  Tener  is  seldom  used  as  an  auxiliary  verb,  and  haber  seldom  used 
as  a  transitive  verb.  Thus,  "I  have  money,"  would  be,  Tengo  dinero: 
and,  "  I  ha'ye  spoken,"  He  hablado. 


68 


OP  THE   VERB. 


SIMPLE    TENSES.        INFINITIVE    MOOD.       COMPOUND    TENSES. 


Ten^r,  To  have. 


PAST   PARTICIPLE. 


PAST   INFINITIVE. 


Tenido, 


Had. 


Hab^r  tenido,       To  have  had. 


GERUND  OF  THE  PRESENT. 


GERUND  OF  THE  PAST. 


Teni^ndo, 


Having. 


Habiendo  tenido,  Having  had. 


1                                      INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

PERFECT-INDEFINITE. 

T^ngo, 

I  have. 

He               1          I  have 

Ti^nes, 

Thou  hast. 

Has 

Thm  hast 

Ti^ne, 
Ten^mos, 

He  has. 
We  have. 

Ha 

H^mos 

1     He  has 
^  g      We  have 

^1 

Tenuis, 

You  have. 

Hab^is 

"^      You  have 

Ti^nen, 

They  have. 

Han 

They  have 

IMPERFECT. 

FIRST-PLUPERFECT. 

Tenia, 

I  had. 

Habia         ■] 

I  had 

Tenias,  • 

Thau  hadst. 

Habias 

Thou  hadst 

Tenia, 

ffeliad. 

Habia 

4     He  had 

t^ 

Teniamos, 

We  had. 

Habiamos 

fa      We  had 

Teniais, 

You  had. 

Habiais 

^      You  had 

Tenian, 

They  had. 

Habian 

They  had       J 

PERFECT-DEFINITE. 

SECOND-PLUPERFECT. 

Tiive, 

I  had. 

Hiibe          ^ 

Ihad              -] 

Tuviste, 

Thou  hadst. 

Hubiste 

Thmi  hadst 

Tiivo, 

He  had. 

Hidbo 

o     He  had 

'^* 

Tuvlmos, 

We  had. 

Hubimos 

f' g      We  had 

^-^ 

Tuvisteis, 

You  had. 

Hubiste 

^      You  had 

Tuvi^ron, 

They  had. 

Hubi^ron 

They  had       J 

FIRST-FUTURE. 

SECOND-FUTURE. 

Tendr^, 

IshaUorwillhave. 

Habr6        "| 

/  shall  or  wHl  ^ 

Tendr^s, 

Uiou  vnlt  have. 

Habr^s 

Thou  wilt 

"?f' 

Tendr^, 

He  win  have. 

Habr^ 

o     He  will 
^  c.     We  shall 

Tendr^mos, 

We  shall  have. 

Habr^mos 

?- 

Tendrils,     . 

You  will  have. 

Habr^is 

^      You  will 

-^ 

Tendr^n, 

They  will  have. 

Habr^n      J 

TheywiU       J 

OF   THE    VERB. 


69 


IMPERATIVE 

MOOD. 

T^nga, 

Let  me  have,  or  may  I  have.                                \ 

Ten, 

Have  thou. 

Tenga, 

Let  him  have, 

or  may  he  have. 

Tengamos,  Let  us  have,  or 

may  we  have. 

Tened, 

Have  you. 

Tengan, 

Let  them  have, 

or  may  they  have. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

PERFECT-INDEFINITE. 

Tenga,                  I  may  have. 
Tengas,                TTiou  may  est  have. 
Tenga,                 He  may  have. 
Tengamos,           We  mxiy  have. 
Teng^is,               You  may  have. 
Tengan,                They  may  have. 

Hdya 

Hayas 

Hiya 

Hdyamos 

Hayais 

H^yan 

I  may 

TViou  mayest 
-§     He  may 
g      We  may 

You  may 

TheyTnay 

>  ^ 

IMPERFECT. 

Tuviera,  tendria,  tuviese,                   I  would,  should,  might  have. 
Tuvieras,  tendrias,  tuvi^ses,             Thouwouldst,shouldst,mightsthave. 
Tuviera,  tendria,  tuviese.                 He  would,  should,  might  have. 
Tuvi^ramos,  tendriamos,  tuvifese-  We  would,  should,  might  have. 

Tuvierais,  tendriais,  tuvi^seis.          You  would,  should,  might  have. 
Tuvieran,  tendrian,  tuviesen,            They  would,  should,  might  have. 

PLUPERFECT. 

Hubiera,  habrla,  hubi^se           ^ 
Hubieras,  habrias,  hubi^ses 
Hubiera,  habrla,  hubi^se 
Hubi^ramos,  habriamos,  hubi- 

^semos 
Hubi^rais,  habriais,  hubieseis 
Hubi^ran,  habrlan,  hubi^sen    - 

I  would,  should,  might               n 
Thouwouldst,  shouldst,  mightst 
Q-  He  would,  should,  might 
>S   We  would,  should,  might 

You  would,  should,  might 
They  would,  should,  might 

>  ^ 

FIRST-FUTURE. 

SECOND-FUTURE. 

Si  tuvi^re.         If  I  should  have. 
Si  tuvieres,       Ifthou  shouldst  have. 
Si  tuvi^re.         If  he  should  have. 
Si  tuvi^remos.  If  we  should  have. 
Si  tuvi^reis,      ][f  you  should  have. 
j  Si  tuvi^ren,      If  fhey  should  have. 

Si  hubiere 
Si  hubi^res 
Sf  hubiere 
Si  hubi^remos 
Si  hubi^reis 
Si  hubi^ren 

If  I  should    ^ 
Ifthou  shouldst 
4 If  he  should 
^Ifwe  should 
**  If  you  should 

If  they  should^ 

1 

70  OF   THE   VERB. 

161.  In  ordinary  conversation,  instead  of  the  second 
person  singular  and  plural,  vmd.  with  the  third  person  sin- 
gular, and  vmds.  with  the  third  person  plural  of  the  verb, 
are  used  (see  110,  c  ;  123) ;  as, 

Vmd.  es,  You  are.  i  Vmd.  ha  tenido,       You  have  had. 

Vmds.  son,  Y&ii  are.  \  Vmds.  han  tenido,  You  nave  had. 

[a.)  The  pronoun  you  in  English  is  used  in  both  num- 
bers and  both  genders  *  without  any  change :  in  Spanish, 
vmd.  (listed)  has  its  plural  vmds.  (ustedes),  but  does  not 
undergo  any  change  to  distinguish  the  gender  to  which  it 
may  be  applied.  Thus,  "  what  say  you,  sir  ?"  /  que  dice 
vmd.,  senor  ?  "what  say  you,  madam?"  j^-we  dice  vmd., 
senora  ?  "  what  say  you.,  sirs  ?"  i  que  dicen  vmds.,  senor  es  ? 
"  what  say  you,  ladies  ?"  i  que  dicen  vmds.,  senor  as  1 

i^*  The  Exercises  in  Part  IV.,   Section  Thirteenth,  can  now  be 
translated. 

OF  THE  CONJUGATION  OF  REGULAR  VERBS. 

162.  It  has  been  already  mentioned  that  there  are  in 
Spanish  three  conjugations  :  the  first  comprehending  verbs 
whose  infinitive  ends  in  ar ;  the  second,  those  ending  in 
er ;  and  the  third,  those  ending  in  ir. 

163.  Every  verb  consists  of  two  parts — the  root  and  the 
termination,  or  the  verb-root  and  the  verb-ending.  The  verb- 
root  consists  of  those  letters  which  are  not  changed  by 
inflection ;  as,  am  in  am-dr,  am-o,  am-aba,  am-e,  am-are. 
Those  letters,  which  may  be  changed  by  inflection,  to  show 
the  different  moods,  tenses,  persons,  and  numbers,  consti 
tute  the  verb-endings.  Thus,  in  the  preceding  examples, 
the  letters  dr,  o,  aba,  e,  are,  are  the  verb-endings. 

164.  The  following  is  a  tabular  view  of  the  verb-endings 
of  all  the  conjugations.  The  figures  1,2,  3.  denote  the 
first,  second,  and  third  conjugations  respectively. 


CONJUGATION. 

INFINITIVE   MOOlf. 

PAST   PARTICIPLE. 

GERUND.                1 

1. 

-^r. 

-^do. 

-ando. 

2. 

-6r. 

-Ido. 

-i^ndo. 

'■ 

-Ir. 

-ido. 

-i^ndo. 

OF   THE   VERB. 


71 


1 

INDICATIVE  MOOD.* 

PRESENT. 

CONJUGA- 
TION. 

Singvlar. 

Plural. 

A 

First  Per.  Sec.Per.  Third  Per. 

First  Per. 

Sec.Per.  Third  Per. 

1. 

2. 
3. 

-0, 
-0, 

-0, 

-as, 
-es, 
-es. 

-a, 
-e, 
-e, 

-dmos, 
-^mos, 
-imos, 

-^is, 
-eis, 
-is. 

-an. 
-en. 
-en. 

IMPERFECT. 

1. 
2. 
3. 

-^ba, 

-la, 

-ia, 

-abas, 

-ias, 

-las, 

-aba, 

-ia, 

-ia, 

-abamos, 

-iamos, 

-iamos. 

-^bais, 

-iais, 

-iais. 

-aban. 

-ian. 

-ian. 

PERFECT-DEFINITE. 

1. 

2. 
3. 

-1. 

-1, 

-aste, 
-iste, 
-iste. 

-6, 
-i6, 
-iu. 

-amos, 
-imos, 
-imos. 

-^steis, 
-isteis, 
-isteis. 

-^ron. 
-ieron. 
-ieron. 

FIRST-FUTURE. 

1. 
2. 

3. 

-ar^, 
-ere, 
-ire, 

-ar^s, 
-eras, 
-ir^s. 

-ar^, 
-er^, 
-ira. 

-aremos, 
-eremos, 
-iremos. 

-areis, 
-er^is, 
-ireis, 

-ar^n. 
-eran. 
-ir^n. 

...  . 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

1. 
2. 
3. 

-e, 
-a, 
-a, 

-a, 
-e, 

-e, 
-a, 
-a, 

-6mos, 
-amos, 
-^mos. 

-id, 

-en. 
-an. 
-an. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

1. 

2. 
3. 

' ;. 

-a, 

-a, 

-es, 
-as, 
-as, 

-a, 

-a, 

-^mos, 
-amos, 
-amos, 

-^is, 
-^is, 

-en. 
-an. 
-an. 

♦  The  compound  tenses,  being  always  formed  by  the  various  persons 
of  the  tenses  of  the  verb  haber  (see  156)  and  the  past-participle,  are  noi 
of  course  to  be  included  in  this  tabular  view  of  the  verb-endings. 


72 


OF  THE  VERB. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOB— Continued. 

IMPERFECT.                                                                           1 

CONJUGA- 
TION. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

First  Per.  Sec.Per.  Third  Per. 

First  Per. 

Sec.Per.  Third  Per. 

f 

-^ra, 

-dras. 

-^ra, 

-aramos. 

-arais. 

-aran. 

''\ 

-aria, 

-arias, 

-aria, 

-ariamos, 

-ariais. 

-arian. 

I 

-^se, 

-ases, 

-dse, 

-asemos. 

-aseis. 

-asen. 

f 

-iera, 

-ieras. 

-i^ra. 

-ieramos. 

-ierais, 

-ieran. 

^'\ 

-eria, 

-erias, 

-eria. 

-eriamos. 

-eriais, 

erian. 

I 

-iese, 

-ieses, 

-iese. 

-iesemos, 

-ieseis. 

-iesen. 

r 

-iera, 

-ieras, 

-i^ra. 

-ieramos. 

-ierais, 

-ieran. 

3J 

-iria, 

-irias. 

-iria. 

-iriamos. 

-iriais, 

-irian. 

I 

-iese, 

-ieses, 

-iese, 

-iesemos, 

-ieseis. 

-iesen. 

FIRST-FUTURE. 

1. 

-^re, 

-ares, 

-are, 

-aremos, 

-dreis. 

-aren. 

2. 

-iere. 

-ieres. 

-i^re. 

-ieremos. 

-iereis. 

-ieren. 

3. 

-iere, 

-ieres, 

-iere. 

-ieremos, 

-i^reis. 

-ieren. 

CHANGES  IN  THE  VERB-ENDING. 

165.  A  change  takes  place  in  the  first  letter  of  the  verb- 
ending  in  the  gerund,  third  person  singular  and  plural  of 
the  perfect-definite  in  the  indicative,  and  in  all  the  persons 
of  the  first  and  third  forms  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive, 
and  in  the  first-future  of  the  same  mood,  in  the  second  or 
third  conjugation,  when  the  verb-root  ends  in  ^,  g,  or  u. 
This  change  is  merely  the  substitution  of  y  for  i  ;  as,  ca-cr^ 
ca-yendo.^  ca-yo^  ca-yeron^  ca-yere^  ca-yese^  etc. ;  cre-er^  ere- 
yendo,  cre-yo,  cre-yeron^  cre-yere,  cre-yeres,  etc.  ;  argu-ir^ 
argu-yendo^  argu-yo^  etc. 

(a.)  If  the  last  letter  of  the  verb-root  be  a  silent  u  (see  14  and  21)  the 
change  in  the  verb-ending  does  not  take  place ;  as,  persegu-tr^  persigu- 
iendo,  etc.,  and  not  persigu-yendo. 

CHANGES    IN    THE    VERB-ROOT. 

166.  In  order  that  the  last  letter  of  the  verb-root  may 
retain,  in  all  the  tenses,  the  same  sound  which  it  has  in  the 
infinitive,  a  change  of  letters  is  sometimes  required.    This 


<5P  THE  VERB.  71 

change  can  only  take  place  when  the  verb-root  ends  in  c, 
g.  gu,  or  qu. 

(a.)  In  such  cases,  there  is  changed,  in  the  first  conjugation^ 

c  of  the  verb-root  into  qu  before  e  of  the  verb-ending;  as,  ioc-dr; 
ioqu-e. 

g  of  the  verb-root  into  gu  before  e  of  the  verb-ending;  &Sjpdg-ari 
pdgu-es. 

{b,)  In  the  second  conjugation, 

c  of  the  verb-root  into  z  before  a  or  o;  as,  venc-er;  vinz-as^  venz-o. 

g  into  J  before  a  or  o;  as,  converg-er;  converj-a,  converj-o. 

(c.)  In  the  third  conjugation, 

c  of  the  verb-root  into  z  before  a  or  o :  as,  unc-tr;  Unz-as,  {inz-o. 
g  "  '•'  j      "      a  or  0 ;  as,  ung-tr ;  <inj-a^  Unj-o, 

gu  into  g  before  a  or  o;  as,  consegu-tr;  consig-an^  constg-o. 
qu  into  c  before  a  or  o;  as,  delinqu-zr;  deltnc-as^  delinc-o, 

(d.)  The  reason  for  these  changes  will  at  once  be  per- 
ceived by  the  learner  by  referring  to  "  Sound  of  the  Con- 
sonants "  (see  Part  I.,  9 — 29) :  thus  c  is  sounded  like  h 
before  a  or  u,  and  like  th  before  e  or  i;  while  qu  before  e  or 
i  has  the  sound  of  L  If,  then,  in  conjugating  tocdr  (in 
the  present  tense  of  the  subjunctive  mood,  for  example), 
we  retain  the  c  of  the  verb-root,  the  pronunciation  would 
be  altered  from  the  sound  of  k  to  that  of  th  ;  thus,  io-cdr, 
pronounced  to-kdr,  and  to-ce  pronounced  to-thai/.  But  by 
changing  c  into  qu,  the  hard  sound  of  c  is  retained :  thus, 
t6-qu£,  pronounced  to-kay.  And  so  before  a  or  <?,  by  chang- 
ing c,  g,  gu,  and  qu  of  the  verb-root  of  the  second  and 
third  conjugations  into  %,  j,  g,  and  c  respectively :  and  g 
of  the  first  conjugation  into  gu  before  e  of  the  verb-ending. 

167.  The  compound  tenses  are  always  formed  by  the 
different  persons  of  the  tenses  of  the  verb  haher  (see  156) 
and  the  past-participle  of  the  verb  to  be  conjugated. 


The  compound  tenses  are  the  past-infinitive,  the  gerund  of  the 
past,  the  perfect-indefinite,  the  first-pluperfect,  the  second-pluperfect,  and 
second-future  of  the  indicative;  the  perfect-indefinite,  pluperfect,  and 
second-future  of  the  subjunctive.  If  the  learner  has  committed  to 
memory  the  simple  tenses  of  the  verb  haJbcr^  he  is  able  to  conjugate  the 
compound  tenses  of  any  verb  in  Spanish. 


74 


OP   THE   VERB. 


1 

■S 

o 


o 


•5" 
o 


P4 


CO     g 


^ 

s== 

■8 

•s 

M 

(i;^ 

.fi 

H 

::3 

1 

1 

^ 

J 

^ 

s 

o 

^ 

•J 

^ 

•^ 

^ 

Q 

« 

O 

tJ 

g 

o- 

•>: 

-'-N 

3 

f" 

> 

o 

V 

> 

*> 

> 

Li 

1 

1 
> 

a 

§ 
o 

i 

^ 

K 

H 
> 

1 
1 

^ 

1 

w 

u 

o 

■^ 

<i 

pq 

5 

g 

^ 

i 

S 

(0 

2 

o 

g 

s 

o 

O 

;?; 

R 

& 

rT 

S 

c 

w 

»-< 

1 

O 

s 

o 
O 

8 

1 

g 

I 

o 

i 

. 

H 

J 

J 

i 

■s 

^ 

S 

1 

4 

^ 

o 

i 

>S 

w7 

E 

1 

< 

IJ 

•s*         ,2 


s^. 


;i 

s 

(U 

cS 

tf 

QJ 

03 

tn 

<L» 

S 

m 

4ii 

t- 

o> 

> 

^ 

<u 

KJ 

o 

^ 

?r> 

p. 

^ 

s  > 


G 
o 

o. 

o 

.2 

^ 

fl 

^ 

V 

pc: 

1? 

«« 

vi 

M 

1 

s 

03 

V 

> 

^ 

2 

E 

1 

fn 

p« 

a> 

C3 
l-t 

g 

OP   THE   VERB. 


75 


^ 

« 

;| 

'^ 

:§ 

1 

:i 

•N 

•*-! 

N 

oT 

§"   . 

-    s-^'^g 

o 

■«-  §"  d-  1  -s  g" 

x-r  1  rB  1  1  1 

O     <U     CJ    .S   ^     QJ 

^^^"p^'g 

^>  '>  '>  *>  ^>  *> 

>>>>:>:? 

>>>>;>>: 

>:>:>:?>:>: 

1 

Q 

« 

8 

1 

1 

e 

i 

^ 

•^ 

H 

N 

S 

•*^ 

W 

g 

5 

PS 

> 

(0 

Q 

t-^ 

H 

u 

H 

H 

a 

du 

U 

< 

ou 

g 

g 

o 
3 

of 

P4 

•>  09  \o    s    m    Qi 

O     (U     V     0    ^     <D 

>^    ^^    v^    VH    0^    >^ 

vT  .a  ;;5  .~  \-H  .S 

HH 

s  s  s  a  a  a 

o   o   o    o    o   o 
O  O  O  O  O  O 

s  a  s  s  s  s 

o    o    o   o    o   o 
O  O  O  OOO 

a  a  a  a  a  a 

O     O     O     O     O     O     i 

O  O  O  O  O  O    ! 

^        .'    ^^ 

j 

I  love, 
thou  lovest, 
he  loves, 
we  love, 
you  love, 
they  love. 

^    ^    «    «    §    ^ 

loved. 

ou  lovedst. 

1  loved. 

>u  loved, 
ey  loved. 

S^-^    8    i.^ 

i 

O    c3    eU    es  *ca    c3 

ste, 

mos, 
steis, 
ron, 

rt    cd    cJ  Nrf  \tJ    ca 

ND     CS    \0      O    Vrf      «      1 

s  a  a  a  s  a 

a  a  a  a  a  s 

a  a  a  a  a  a 

<i  ^<i  <  <  < 

<1    <1    <5i    <1    -11    <1 

<j  <t  <ii  <j  <i.<i 

»  = 

-I  ■  ;>»  cvb~^'  ~fr4 '  "^*^ 

— 

"^"  'C^*~r^  "r4"cT  oo 

"^  r>}   r^  ^— I  o^  CT!* 

76 


OF   THE   VERB. 


Q 
O 
O 

o 

Q 


12  '2    ~ 

O  -o    O   '^  .!h  "O 
t3  -g  "O    >    >  -g 

!S  •>:  S  o  -2  •>: 

to    '^    S  x>    fl 
O    etf    B3     03     c3    S 

WWWWJUW 


o'B  s. 


e-a 


{^  lij  ;^  t^  ;z;  ^ 


1     '^'^'S 


-r  o  ^  c  e  o 

0  -o  o  c  S  -a 

i  S  c  »  <»  £ 

1  rt  B  o  ;-  «a 

*  ao  *  S  S  c 

V  03  e)  (u  e^  S 

ffi  ffi  ffi  ffi  tl^  ffi 

^  c<  CO  i-<  e-j  CO 


o"  -5  o"  -E  3  '2 

rs  *>  s  >  > 

.>:  I  .>:  §  >  V 

>  a>  >  B3  G 

Cl3  C5  cS  ^  C3  cd 

IS  S  S  2  S  S 

CO  c3  cd  cd  cd  A 

(3^  S  iU  n  A  K 


I  is 


^  ^  jD  ^  .Q  ja 
c<j    cd    ct}    cd    A     A 

;zj  !ij  ffi  !ij  p:^  Uj 


g 

tt 

H 

^4^ 

(l4 

8  s 

s 

P. 

00    c 

O 

n 

o    «J 

« 

o 

S  .2 

C3     .Cd 

.«3 

Hi 

I  '§*  "S 1 1 


2  2  2 
g  g  £ 


^  2  « 

*^  S  PS 

O  "  CO 

S  .2  c 

CO  cO  cC 

ij  jb  i>  jS  2  S 

cO    03    n    CO  cO  si 

UJ  S  S  ffi  ffi  UJ 

t-H  ccf  er?  .-?  c^'  CO 


'  '^  12  *^  >  *> 


o  .S  O  .S  r'iS  .2:^ 

^  ^  ^  XI  rO  ^ 

3  3  S3  3  SJ  3 

s  s  ;ij  Dh  ffl  n 


6  :2 
8  s 


2  s 


«n  .! 


8  2  *S  2 

o  .2   o  .S  v2  .2S 

^   ^   ^  U3   XJ  .o 

p    ;3    si  ?3    1:1  3 

K  ffi  K  ffi  ffi  ffi 


'«*  -^  "§  1  i  I 
J  "I  •§  -^  ?-§ 

•«  -<  ^  1  ^  -^i 

-^  If!  i  ^ 


rri  ra  CO  CO 

O"!  0~   S  S  S 

Ta    g  'O  eO  eO  CO 

fi    «*  e  m  .2  C 

S     03  =  O  3>  O 

CO   ■J-i  eo  e  ♦^  »-i 

dj  .2  o  .5  n2  .2i 

X>    ^  ^  X>  J3  JD 

S3     S  3  S3  3  S3 

Ph  M  Pk  M  M  HH 

^  cj  po  -H  cj  CO 


OF   THE   VERB. 


77 


■s 

•^ 

V 

» 

i 

^ 

:§ 

1 

1 

S 

•*^ 

o 

i  S 

.  «-    .  1  .2"  c 

vivid 
8  vivi 

vivid 
mos  V 
is  vivi 
n  vivi 

§1  § 

<««  ve  vd   5  ^  vj 

NU    Va    ^5J      CD    ^(D      rt 

^  -^  ^  a  ^  c 

ca    03    ca    §  3    § 
>>>>>> 

*>  '>  *>  *>  *?^  *> 

Xi   Xi   X>   Xi   Xi   .J=i 

a    d    a    a    a    d 

Hi  !ij  S  ffi  S  ffi 

, 

•S 

"3 

1 

1 

i 

1 

Q 
O 

o 

1 

1 

Q 

§ 

1 

^ 

§ 

O 
O 

53 

N 

CO 

> 

"^ 

> 

EH 

m 

§ 

s 

o 
o-'S   o-l  Jl 

3  •§  2  s  a  a 

5 

Pi 

1.- 

§  1  » 

Q 

^  "m  "^S  2  '^  IS 

QJ      <U      QJ      a>      0)      05 

ill  §S8 
«  «)  «  a  .2  d 

va  >cd  vd    <u  M)  vd 

1— I 

ca    Qj    ca    ca  M)    ca 

^ 

s  a  a  a  s  s 

^  ^  ^  ^  ^  ^ 

a  a  a  a  a  a 

i-H 

o    o    o    o    o    o 
O  O  O  O  O  O 

03      Co      Co      CO      Co      CS 

HI  ffi  ffi  ffl  W  ffi 

o   o   o   o    o    o 
O  O  OOO  O 

. 

.'^*    .-^-^-g 

? 

^ 

I  shall  or  will 
thou  wilt  love, 
he  will  love, 
we  shall  love, 
you  will  love, 
they  will  love. 

do,      I  shall  have  lo 
ado,    thou  wilt  have 
do,      he  will  have  lo 
mado,t/?e  shall  have 
lado,   yoM  will  have 
ado,    </iey  mZZ  have 

let  me  love  (or,  may 
love  thou, 
let  him  love. 

86tY03,let  us  love. 

tros,     love  you. 

let  them  love. 

.^-         .i;f      O^ 

«a    d    «^    ra    g    S 

i  !  i  1 .2  ^ 

''g  ve  v«  2J  "^  ^ 

^^  ^  S  3  c 

ca    eS    rt    ca    eg    Kj 

d     cd    cS    r-j     cd    ca 

03    cd    o    o  Vd    <D 

s  s  a  s  s  s 

a  a  a  a  a  a 
<5  <j  <i  <i  *ti  <j 



1-3  .(><    CO    ^    (M*    CO 

.-I    (>»    CO    -^*    Ci    CO 

— 4  c^  c<  »-i  c^  CO 

78 


OF   THE   VERB. 


Q 
O 
O 

> 


cd  cd  03  cd  Vlj  !d 

s  s  s  s  s  s 

o  o  o  o  o  o 

O  O  O  O  O  O 


*^  j3  »  «  i  5* 
•-s  ^  ^  8  i,^ 


o  ^ 

^  cD^    ^  S  .2  c 

©     «J     ©      O)  *0      QJ 

S  £  S  S  £  S 

<-  <5  <j  <5  <j  <j 

— ^   ^N    CO    ^  CJ    CVJ 


2^8 


,^«    CD*    OQ*    of 


o   o   o 
~  S   i   £  .2  . 


©    ^     O    VP 


©>-i     ©     ©i»     ©     ©M     ©^^i-*©K>»-i*© 

•^  •>  •>  •>  '^  •>:  •>  '^  •>  •>  •>  *>  •>  •>  •> 


o  o  o  „ 

£  £  £  .2  2  .2 

cj  c3  ©  *3  'rt  'o 

„  >-■  \-H  en  >-  \-<  M3 

©  ■»©  ^^  *©  VI)  »- 


2  ©  2^  .2^  ©  .2i  .S  "©  J  ^  ^©  rs  rss  ©  :2 

£££££££££££££££ 
ooooooooooooooo 
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 


^^; 


£  £  £  £ 

<<  <^  ^  <-  ■ 


£  £  £ 
^  <1  -^ 


£  £ 


III 
^  I  £ 


'3  -^ 


!  <1  <1  <1  <1 


OP   THE   VERB. 


79 


I 

Q 
O 
O 

> 
c 

PQ 


1: 


s  s  s 

o    o    o 

o  o  o 


Iff 

s  i  i 


o  4"  o  I  I  I 

-g  'g  ^3     >  >  '^ 

"  S  !>  S  .2  e 

cS    ca    cd    cd  c3  cj 

>>>.>,  t»^  >.  >> 

c3    c3    e3  Nk!  \d  cd 

Ph  Mh  W  W  W  W 


§  §  §  S  8  g 

o  o  o  o  '-'  o 

"  03  "^  S  .2  c 

cd  cd  cd  ed  cd  CO 

cd  cd  cd  ^cd  \d  cd 

rc  ffi  hi}  til  ffi  hi^ 


J  '^  "^ 
ill 


-2    ^ 


>.  g 


§  2  -^  -< 
>.  ^  1^  § 


s  g 


§  ^ 
i>^ 


o  -a  o  S  ^  -a 

-g  ed  'O  cd  2  2 

fl  S  g  2  I  S 

S  Cd  S  O  '^  Cd 

^  03  =3  S  .S2  fl 

ed  cd  cd  cd  cd  cd 

>,  5>>  >^  >.  >.  >> 

cd  cd  cd  ^cd  m:3  cd 

ffi  ffi  tU  ffl  ffi  W 


»— I    C<t    CO    ^-^    (>?    CO 


2  -S  d^-S 


•S:  I  .^  I  t  I  -^  I  -^ 

>-icdoa^cd°3>-'cdOQ 
.2  "'>^  .2h  .S  ^'^  .2^  .2  ^  .2h 
^  X!  3  3  ^"  3  S  ^  3 

?5cd?33cd:33ed3 


lcd!=i3ed3;3cdS 

I  M  ffi  ffi  ffi  ffi  ffi  ffi  ffi 


•ppao/      'p9ao]      'p9aoj 
9avti        gavy        gavy 


o     «  o  -5   o  "5 

s  g  s  I  s  ^ 


Cd  -a 
S  2 
Cd    B 


Cd    ^    03 .  cd    02    <u    cd    '« 
i-'cdo2>-icd'»»-'E5 

^jd33^33^ 

3cd3s3cd33rt 


w  ' 


80 


OF   THE    VERB. 


I 

Q 
O 
O 

> 

E- 
O 
"^ 
P 

m 
u 


'^  .>; 


|3  o'l^'o^ 
^  >  :2  >  -s:  2  '^ 
§  >  >. 
S  .2  ^ 


<3  1^  c 

I  -s  >s  I  -s  s  <s  § 
•sll-sll-ll 


Jt^ 


„  or   „  S  .2^  c 

03    O)    o    <u  a>    <u 

g3     03     QJ    >Q  *o      O) 

>  *>  *>  'g  *g  *> 

P  V  '>  '>  '>  "> 

xri  m  m  xn  m  in 


w  ffi  33  Dh  w 


"pddoi      'pdooi      -pdaoi 
9avy       davy       9avy 


O  O  O  gi  g^  QJ 

03  O)  03  >Ci  ^O  03 

s  B  s  a  s  s 

o  o  o  o  o  o 

o  o  o  o  o  u 

?»  j»  CO  j»  ;»  ^ 


g  o  g  o  o;  o 

cd  ed  c3  >«3  vd  ee 

S  §  S  S  S  E 

cd  ca  cB  cd  cS  cc 

OT  J»  J^  ro  M  i» 

>-4  c^'  ro  .-4  (TJ  CO 


5  t3 

3  ^ 


o  -c  o  -c:  3  'o 

^  -  ^  ^  >:  > 

,^  O  >  > 

^  S  .2  c 

03  <1J  <U  03 

03  ^  NJ3  03 

?J     PJ     P!  ?3  f3  S3 

^  ^  .c:  x:  ^  X 


m  m  xfi  ui  ui  m 


:t^ 


03     o) 


rT  S  :«  : 


s  n 


03  a»  O  P  O  03 

03  OJ  CJ  VU  ■'CJ  03 

s  IS  ;s  3  2  2 

;3  ;i  ?3  ;3  J3  ;=i 

^  ^  ^  X!  ^  ^ 


m  Tfi  ui  m  ui  m 


«  <o  » 


■a  "S  "§ 


-*i  ^  ^ 


^     ^    ^ 

^   ^   ^ 

-^  ^  ^ 


"2  - 

■g  ^  -^    «  g  to 

c3  c  ed    03  C  £ 

§  ^  S    o  ^  § 

03  a>  Qi    ?^  ?^  <y 

03  fc  ^  rs  rs  .^ 

3  3  2  ''^  ^  3 

^  X  u3  x:  ^  X 

M  35  j»  w  w  M 

^  evt  00  >-<'  (N  CO 


OF   THE   VERB 


81 


'  The  learner  must  now  translate  the  Exercises  in  Part  IV.,  Section 
Fourteenth. 

REFLECTIVE   VERBS. 

169.  Those  verbs  are  called  reflective  or  reciprocal  which 
reflect  the  action  they  express,  on  their  nominative  (see 
136);  as,  Yo  me  desmodo,  or  me  desnudo,^'!  undress  my- 
self;"  El  se  ahorcoj  or  se  ahorco,  "  he  hung  himself;"  nosotros 
nos  amamosj  "  we  love  ourselves,"  "  or  "  we  love  each  other." 

(a.)  The  reflective  verbs  are  inflected  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  the  verb  would  be  conjugated  if  it  were  employed 
without  the  reflective  pronouns.  The  verb  ahorcar  is 
thus  conjugated  reflectively : 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Ahorcdrse,  to  hang  one^s  self. 

PAST-PARTICIPLE. 

PAST-INFINITIVE. 

Ahorcado,             hung  one's  self. 

Haberse  ahorca-  to  have  hung  one^s 
do,                        self. 

GERUND   OF  THE   PRESENT. 

GERUND    OF  THE   PAST. 

Ahorcdndose,       hanging  oner's  self. 

Habi^ndose  ahor-  having  hung  one's 
cado,                     self. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

PERFECT-INDEFINITE. 

1 .  Me  ahorco,       /  hang  myself. 

Me  he  ahorcado,  I  have  hung  my- 

self. 

2.  Te  ahorcas,      thou  hangest  thy- 

Te has  ahorcado,  thou    hast    hung 

self. 

thyself. 

3.  Se  ahorca,        he  hangs  himself. 

Se  ha  ahorcado,  he  has  hung  him- 

self. 

1 .  Nos     ahorca-  we  hang  ourselves. 

Nos  hemos  ahor-  we  have  hung  our- 

mos, 

cado,                      selves. 

2.  Os  ahorciis,     j  ow    hang   your- 

Os hab^is  ahor- you     have    hung 

selves. 

cado,                     yourselves. 

3.  Se  ahorcan,      they  hang  them- 

Se  han  ahorcado, <^ey    have    hung 

11                                  selves. 

themselves. 

1                     And  thus  through  all  the  moods  and  tenses.                      i 

82 


OF   THE   VERB. 


(6.)  It  must  not  be  forgotten  that  the  reflective  pronouns  are  always 
in  the  objective  case,  and  governed  by  the  verb  which  comes  after  them 
or  to  which  they  are  joined  (for  they  are  always  joined  to  infinitives, 
gerunds,  and  imperatives.  See  116;  IIG,  a;  116,  bj  also  113,  a.)  The 
nominative  personal  pronouns  are  not  generally  used. 

OF    THE    PASSIVE    VERB. 

170.  A  passive  verb  is  conjugated   by   adding  to  the 

auxiliary  verb  ser,  through  all  its  moods  and  tenses  (see 

158),  the  past  participle  of  the  verb  to  be  conjugated.     The 

participle  in  such  a  case  is  inflected  by  gender  and  number 

like  an  adjective  ;  thus  to  say  "  he  is  loved ;"  "  she  is  loved ;" 

"  the^  are  loved  "  (masc.) ;  ''  they  are  loved^^  (fern.) ;  would  be, 

El  es  amado.  j  EUos  son  amados. 

Ella  es  amada.  1  Ellas  son  amados. 

(a.)  The  passive  verb  formed  by  ser  is  used  in  Spanish 
in  the  present  and  imperfect  tenses  of  the  indicative 
mood  only  when  a  mental  act  or  state  of  the  emotions 
is  spoken  of :  thus  we  can  say  ella  es  amada^  "  she  is  loved," 
but  we  can  not  say  ella  es  hallada^  "  she  is  found,"  since  in 
the  latter  case  no  state  of  the  mind  or  feelings  is  described, 
and  the  perfect-indefinite  tense  must  be  employed  ;  *  thus, 
ella  ha  sido  hallada,  "  she  has  been  found."  For  the  im- 
perfect tense  of  the  indicative,  when  no  state  or  act  of  the 
mind  is  spoken  of,  the  perfect-definite  must  be  used,  as 
la  casa  fue  (not  era)  quemada^  "  the  house  was  burnt." 

171.  Conjugation  of  the  passive  verb,  ser  hallado: 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Ser  hallado,  to  he  found. 

PAST   PARTICIPLE. 

PAST   INFINITIVE. 

Sido  hallado,*      been  found. 

Haber  sido  halla-      to     have     been 
do,                            found. 

GERUND    OF   THE    PRESENT. 

GERUND    OF   THE    PAST.     ., 

Siendo  hallado,    being  found. 

Habiendo      sido     having     been 
hallado,                    found. 

*  Hallado  means  "  been  founds"  as  well  as  ^^found,^^  so  that  sido  is 
not  used  in  forming  the  passive  past  participle.     (See  300,  c.) 


OF   THE   VERB. 


83 


'  o 

I  o 


!    > 

,   Eh 
< 

o 

Q 


L 


S 
U 


O   =3 

s  1 


3     <U     3 

c;  CO  vh 


2    t»    <n 

"e  ;§  ■§ 

w 

■o  ^C  %o 

0) 

3    o     p 

C^      CQ    Ch 

^. 

rt    10 

S3     O 

s  s  s 

3     <U     3 

t;:;   CO  tc 


d    03   c? 


1^' 


St4     «)     fe 


•3 


84  OP   THE   VERB. 

172.  The  compound  tenses  of  the  passive  verb  are 
formed  by  the  several  simple  tenses  of  haber^  and  the  pas- 
sive past  participle  of  the  verb  to  be  conjugated  ;  as, 


He  sido  hallado, 
Habia  sido  hallado, 
Habre  sido  hallado, 
Si  hubiere  sido  hallado. 


/  have  been  found. 

I  had  been  found. 

I  shall  have  been  found. 

If  I  should  have  been  found. 


ly*  The  Exercises  in  Part  IV.,  Section  Fifteen,  can  now  be  trans- 
lated. 

173.  Instead  of  employing  the  auxiliary  verb  ser^  to  be, 
and  the  participle  of  the  verb  agreeing  with  its  nomina- 
tive, the  personal  reflective  pronoun  se  is  often  used  in  the 
third  person  singular  and  plural  with  the  proper  tense  of 
the  active  verb.  Thus,  we  can  say,  el  lihro  ha  sido  hallado^ 
or  el  lihro  se  ha  hallado*  and  both  forms  are  to  be  rendered 
in  English,  "  the  book  has  been  found."  This  is  a  very 
important  rule  of  Spanish  Grammar,  and  must  be  kept  in 
mind  by  the  learner.  The  following  will  serve  as  exam- 
ples of  this  method  of  placing  se  before  the  verb,  which  in 
such  a  case  corresponds  to  the  same  tense  conjugated  pas- 
sively. 


EI  libro  se  ha  hallado, 

El  libro  se  abre, 

El  se  Uamaba  Caifas, 

La  voz  se  repitio. 

Las  ^guas  se  tornaron  amargas, 

Su  gloria  se  ver^. 

La  casa  se  quem6, 

Aqul  se  habla  Espanol, 

Se  dice, 

Se  publico, 


The  book  has  been  found. 

The  book  is  opened. 

He  was  called  Caiaphas. 

The  voice  was  repeated. 

The  waters  were  turned  bitter. 

His  glory  shall  be  seen. 

The  house  was  burnt. 

Spanish  is  spoken  here. 

It  is  said. 

It  was  published. 


(a.)  The  above  examples  rendered  literally  mean,  "  the  book  has  found 
itself;"  "the  book  opens  itself;"  "he  called  himself  Caiaphas ;"  "the 
voice  repeated  itself;"  "the  waters  turned  themselves  bitter;"  "his 
glory  shall  see  itself;"  "  here  speaks  itself  Spanish ;"  "  the  house  burnt 
itself;"  "  it  says  itself;"  "  it  published  itself."  We  can  say  in  English, 
"  the  voice  prolongs  itself,"  or,  "  the  voice  is  prolonged ;"  "  the  man 

*  Literally,  "  the  book  has  found  itself." 


OF    THE   VERB.  85 

deceives  himself"  or,  "  the  man  is  deceived ;"  so  that  the  only  difference 
between  the  Spanish  and  English  syntax  in  this  matter  is,  that  the  rule  is 
applied  far  more  extensively  in  Spanish  than  in  English.  Thus  we  can 
say  in  both  languages,  "  the  voice  repeats  itself,"  "  la  voz  se  repite" 
meaning,  "  the  voice  is  repeated ;"  but  we  can  not  say  in  English,  "  the"^ 
sound  hears  itself,"  for  the  "  sound  is  heard."  In  Spanish,  however, 
we  can  say,  la  voz  se  oyS^  or,  la  vozfue  oida^  "  the  voice  was  heard." 


'  The  Exercises  in  Part  IV.,  Section  Sixteenth,  can  now  be  trans- 
lated. 

174.  The  passive  verb  is  sometimes  formed  by  the  auxil- 
iary verb  estar^  instead  of  ser ;  as  el  caballo  estd  lastimado, 
"  the  horse  is  injured  ;''  la  casa  estd  mal  construida,  "  the 
house  is  badly  constructed." 

^^  Rules  for  the  use  of  ser  and  estar  will  be  found  in  Part  III.* 

175.  Verbs  are  conjugated  interrogatively  by  placing  the 
pronoun  after  the  verb  ;  and  negatively,  by  placing  the  ad- 
verb no  before  the  verb  ;  as. 


I  Amo  yo  7 

I  Come  ^1 1 

i  Escribirian  ellos  1 

Yo  no  amo. 

El  no  come, 

Ellos  no  escribirian, 

I  No  aprenderds  tii  7 


Love  17  or  do  I  love  1 
Does  he  eat  7 
Would  they  write  7 
I  do  not  love. 
He  does  not  eat. 
They  would  not  write. 
Wilt  thou  not  learn  7 


{a.)  If  an  objective  pronoun  come  before  the  verb,  the  negative  tw  is 
then  placed  immediately  before  such  pronoun ;  as, 

I  No  lo  habeis  oido  7  .  I  Have  ye  not  heard  it  7 

Yo  no  Ze  vi,  I  I  saw  him  not. 

(6.)  It  is  not  the  general  practice  to  use  the  nominative  personal  pro- 
nouns in  asking  questions :  thus  i  Amo  ?  i  tome  7  mean  the  same  as 
lavrw  yo?  icome  tH?  Nor  is  it  absolutely  necessary  to  place  the  nomi- 
native pronoun  or  noun  after  the  verb,  as  the  interrogation-mark  shows 
the  sentence  to  be  interrogatory :  thus,  i  Yo  amo  ?  i amo  yo  ?  or  lamo? 
each  means,  "  do  I  love  7" 

g^"  The  learner  may  now  translate  the  Exercises  in  Part  IV.,  Sec 
tion  Seventeenth. 

Q  *  See  333—336. 


^6  OF  THE  VERB, 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

1 7Q.  The  irregular  verbs  in  Spanish  are  such  as  do  not 
conform  exactly  in  their  manner  of  conjugation  to  the 
model-verbs  {amar^  corner^  vivir).  The  deviations  of  each 
irregular  verb  are  in  most  cases  but  slight,  yet  important 
to  be  known,  as  most  of  the  irregular  verbs  are  in  general 
use. 

(a.)  There  are  thirty-nine  of  the  different  irregular  verbs :  seven  of  the 
first  conjugation,  seventeen  of  the  second,  and  fifteen  of  the  third.    Many  , 
of  these  differ  but  very  slightly  from  each  other.    All  the  irregular  verbs 
are  conjugated  like  some  one  of  these  thirty-nine  forms.    Four  of  these, 
habevj  ser^  estar,  and  tcner^  have  already  been  conjugated. 

(b.)  Those  verbs  which  undergo  slight  changes  in  the  verb-roots  or 
verb-endings  of  certain  tenses  or  persons  of  tenses  (see  165 ;  166 ;  and 
166,  a,  b,  c),  are  not  on  that  account  deemed  irregular,  since  these 
changes  take  place  solely  to  preserve  regularity  and  uniformity  of  sound, 
which  would  be  dissimilar  in  some  cases  if  these  changes  did  not  take 
place.  Thus,  as  before  mentioned,  buscar,  pronounced  boos-kdr,  would, 
in  the  present  tense  of  the  subjunctive  mood,  if  no  change  of  letters 
should  occur,  be  busce,  pronounced  boos'-thay  (c  before  c  and  i  being 
sounded  like  th  in  thin)^  and  to  preserve  the  hard  sound  of  c,  this  latter 
is  changed  into  qu  (see  22) ;  thus,  busque,  pronounced  bo6s'-kay.  Both 
regular  and  irregular  verbs  undergo  such  changes  when  required  by  the 
rules  of  pronunciation. 

gy  The  learner,  while  gradually  committinjf  to  memory  the  irregular 
verbs,  can  also  begin  to  translate  the  Reading  Lessons  in  Part  V.,  as 
there  directed;  and  also  review  the  first  seventeen  Sections  of  Part 
IV. 

Remark. — In  the  following  conjugations  of  the  irregular  verbs,  those 
persons  of  the  moods  and  tenses  only  which  deviate  from  the  regular  con- 
jugation are  given.  Thus,  in  the  first  verb,  andar^  no  tense  of  the  indi- 
cative mood  except  the  perfect-definite  is  given,  because  this  verb  is  con- 
jugated regularly  in  the  other  tenses  of  this  mood.  In  the  second  verb, 
contar^  the  first  and  second  persons  plural  of  the  present  indicative  are 
not  given*  because  these  persons  are  regular.  The  learner  is  therefore  to 
remember  that  all  moods,  tenses,  and  persons,  not  included  in  the  con- 
jugation are  regular.  We  have,  however,  in  all  cases  given  the  participle 
and  gerund,  whether  formed  regularly  or  not. 


OP   THE   VERB. 


87 


o 

(3 

■*s 

Q 

c8 

t»o 

J3 

« 

1-^ 

U) 

a 

o 

o    ,. 

to 

O 

O 


q  a 


H 

O 
O 


J3 

1 

1 

<1» 

f» 

t~> 

r 

"~* 

03 

Si 

x: 

(u 

d 

w 

«4-l 

c 

CQ 

5=1 

^0 

fl) 

O 

c 

-4-3 

S3 

•»— » 

Q 

> 

> 

o 

OS 

CJ 

xi 

2 

c 

d 

c 

cd 

^ 

1 

a 

o 

p 

w 

U 

o 

— 



— 

6 

'O 

1 

fl 

o 

O 

Q 

sz; 

u 

« 

O 

g 

1  '   : 

Pi 

r 

> 

pj 
1 

>' 

— 

1 

- 

t- 

w 

H 

PU 

O 

S 

g 

t-H 

H- ( 

p 

Q 

•-» 

^ 

n 

^ 

qT 

gif 

••-> 

"5 

fl 

c 

a> 

(D 

0) 

4 

^ 

:3 

« 

u 

o 

a 

iz 

c 

O 

O 

H 

^ 

tk 

O 

H 
PS 

4f 

1" 

■oj 

"S 

F3 

P4 

o 

<o   1 

=) 

S3. 

fe 

o 

o 

o 

Cfl 

< 

P4 

cT 

oT 

qT 

■•-> 

••-> 

■JS 

c 

C! 

c; 

QJ. 

(D 

0) 

la 

3 

d    1 

o_ 



o 

O 

88 


OP  THE   VERB. 


•Si 


1) 


0 
O 

O 


i 
=1 

II 

'o  -3 

"^ 

— 

— 

o 

TS 

s: 

eS 

Q 

S 

■«-» 

^      CO 

^ 

OQ 

^o  ^o 

>o 

o 

'-B'-B 

i 

g 

1 

00^ 

O 
S 

T 

II 

W — 

> 

i 

-3 

> 

p 

'S  'o 

5 

1 

03 

o 

cS 

D 

h 

hH 

►-* 

Q 

PQ 

^ 

P 

i-t 

>2' 

W 

d 

'd 

X)  'O 

^ 

Q 

pT 

•-) 

P4 

u 

H 

s. 
^ 

_ 

^ 

si" 

o 

s 

2 

OQ 

^ 

:sg 

-S 

^ 

if  ^ 

2^ 

o 

^P^ 

CD      <U 

S 

Q 



Q^ 

aS 

S 

^  s 

■-»    a 
o    o 


03  O 

d 

o 

—    •43  ^ 


0     > 

O       OQ 

o  :a 

o 

00 


^ 

tf 

P 

g 

t 

1 

1^' 

Eh 

1— I 

> 

Pi 

r1 

g 

^ 

H-l 

U) 

Q 

5 

r/J 

§> 

^ 

1 

OF   THE   VERB. 


89 


5s^     (3 


H 

QQ 

^; 

(U 

w 

JH 

H 

^ 

c 

*^ 

o 

O 

k 

2 

g 

-s 

<x> 

;3 

> 

&0 

OJ 

o 

^ 

d 

•»» 

.2 

1 

ctf 

B 

tlf) 

s 

f! 

•^ 

<i> 

fl 

j^ 

o 

03 

O 

^ 

H 

g 

d 

f 

-2 

c< 

a 

ja 

•S 

•s 

~~" 

— 

— 

6 

13 

C 

cs 

■*-» 

a 

(U 

H 

cT 

§ 

M 

H 

O 

. 

g 

N 

QQ 

H 

P4 

W 

T 

1 

W 

— 

< 



>-  

}> 

^ 

1 

P 

5 

qT 

M    oT 

■1^ 

t^ 

d 

S 

CI 

C! 

xJ 

2i 

QJ 

<o 

iS 

•hS 

•*3 

*+3 

fl 

§ 

^ 

n 

•^ 

(U 

3 

H 

C< 

2 

1 

1 

a 

a 

& 

a3 

o 

< 

•13 

+3 

•43 

P4 

o" 

qT 

■ST 

d 

fl 

c 

o 

O) 

o 

■=3*- 

_£_ 



E^ 

&^ 

i 

== 

— — 



— ^ 

=:=: 

1 

=i 

d 

d 

5^ 

.S 

g 

H 

S 

V 

<u 

■g 

>t 

>> 

^ 

— 

^ 

d 

c> 

<u 

2 

^ 

frt 

H 

(4-1 

o 

ft^ 

V 

^ 

£ 

S 

1 

,£1 

>> 

03 

O) 

1 

H 

» 

§ 

03 

c 

W 

Pi 

Pk 

^ 

*}* 

^ 

1 

yj 

•S 

1 

Eh 

w 

. 

w 



<J 



k  — 

C3 

> 

tf 

►ri 

03 

CO 

t— I 

t3 

S 

S 

^ 

1 
1 

d 

>> 

>. 

m  ^ 
^ 

^ 

s 

c3 

§ 

pT 

W 

<J 

w" 

p^ 

O 
^ 

.J 
P4 

Ph 

H 

.s 

o 

^ 

i 

s 

bT 

oT 

•<J 

cT 

d 

1 

p2 

^ 

t: 

j:; 

.2 

^ 
5 

^ 

^ 

^ 

ei 

:<j 

SO 

.2 

PU 

*5* 

1 

o 

> 

O 

2  -• 

g4 

^. 

cT 

of 

00 

fea 

OJ 

o 

S 

'"'s 

, 



>!. 

^^ 

>L 

=^ 

8* 


90 


OF   THE   VERB. 


o 
o 

d 
o 
o 


^ 

^ 


Pi 

O 


0 
O 

o 

CO 
00 


d    .  d 

d 

S3 
0 

1 

cr 

1 

P    rt   :3 
000 

0 

•0 

A 

0> 

2 

A 

I   ^ 

f 

or 

■•s 

Oh 

111 

« 

P* 

OJ 

E.^  p< 

'S, 

H 

53 

rt 

0 

S    rt    S 

:i 

0 

0 

0 

0* 

000 

0 

CO 

S 

S' 

0 

OQ 

i 

0    oT  0 

1 

1 

i 

2 

w 
>• 

1 

P4 

1 

» 

1 

Ek 

Oi 

^ 

H- 1 

5i 

1 

H     0,^    a. 

i 

cu 

1 

H 

s 

KJ 

H 

^ 

1 

R       S3     eS     P3 

s 

w 

Q 

0 

0 

5 

cr- 

w 

o* 

W      0    0     0 

u 

>-  ■" 

h 

pti 

> 

—^ 

pj    

u< 

§ 

M 

i 

Eh 
0 

g 

CO 

0 

Q 

S 

s 

^ 
5 

b 

^ 

cq 

HH 

3 

1 

.2  \H  .2h 

;3    ea    ;3 

3 

1 

0 

0 

o* 

0* 

000 

0 

3 

ea 

0 

h" 

0 

2 

.2 

i 

of- 

Iff 

0  VH   a> 

of 

o« 

Xi 

oT 

'q,S  'B. 

"S, 

53 

ei 

:3 

s  g  § 

P 

V 

0 

0* 

0 

P4 

bT 

^  'S-i 

cT 

cx, 

oT 

^ 

a 

Ci4 

.2  T3  '2 

.S 

a, 

^ 

'S,^  'S, 

*o. 

3 

3 

Id 

3 

3     «J     P 

p 

!l 

Of 



0 

___ 

0 

Of 

(^ 

u  0  0 



0     1 

OF   THE   VERB. 


91 


cu 

-s 

2 


a 


.S  .> 


o 

(i1 

s 

Oi 

?n 

^ 

a 

t«H 

•53 

o 

CQ      O 


^ 


(D 


■5  S 


o     2    ""^ 


J3    ^3 


00     L*^ 


c 

s> 

i) 

1 

§ 



— 

— 

6 

>* 

as 

0 

Q 

£ 

^ 

v3 

t3 

bO 

s 

0 

1 

h 

g 

^ 

H 

»  «- 

03 

9   0 

W  S 

S  s 

P4 
1 

>;  S) 

LI 

_ 

^1 

H-l 

1 

1— ( 

t3 

t3 

CO      ^ 

s 

S) 

6 

# 

*3 
0 

1 

0 

pf 

•J 

pj 

5 

H 

S 

bT 

^ 

ed 

^ 

fcfl 

S 

1 

S 

d 

cT 

cs" 

.5? 

.SP 

,hp 

*3 

'c3 

*3 

0 

0 

0 

c    2  *^  


-§ 


a 

o 

*■§ 
•5* 

o 
00 


g 

c 

d 

^ 

^ 

S) 

« 

2 

rf: 

^ 

— 

— 

— 

— 

6 

-« 

*o 

w 

oT 

cT 

•s 

m 

Sq 

•*s 

•S 

^ 

1 

0 

2 

rf: 

g 

s 
^ 

« 

^ 

H    mT 

0 

.s 

II 

§1 

>i 

1 

fa  .2^ 

Q    

M 

%l 

{> 

I 

P<4 

(^ 

i 

(6 

Q 

P4 

g 

1 

1 

f 

d 

2 

X 

,c 

^ 

0 

Q) 

HJ 

pf 

•J 

04 

i  3 

S 

M 

^ 

oo' 

< 

(D 

\ri 

P4 
CO 

1 

.a 

1 

2 

a 

oT 

iT 

g 

C3 

eS 

a 

ffl 

S 

a 

ffi 

92 


OP  THE  VERB, 


^      .    fl 

g 

2  c  S 

p 

1 

hicie 
harfa 
hicie 

'B 

oT        w 

4" 

^0)    CS  -su 

.2h 

K) 

S 

!§  s  :s 

:« 

^ 

AAA 

A 

, 

ro          tn 

m 

1 

§" 

If! 

o 

s 

2  g  " 

Eh 
(3 

> 

— 

Pi 

Eq 

— 

t-l 

H 

5 

§ 

|3 

5 

13 

cT        qT 

« 

^ 

QQ 

1 

hicier 
harfa, 
hicies 

1 

5S 

•c* 

"^ 

55 

T 

ii 

xS          m 

oT 

^ 

hiciera 
harias, 
hiciese 

A 

o 

fl 

o 

"i 

bo 

0 

? 

E= 

2"  _^  S 

£ 

6 

Hicie 
Harfa 

Hicie 

= 

•i 

•3 

to 


^ 

A 

^' 

«T> 

1 

C3 

A 

^ 

s 

1 

^ 

2 

t«H 

0> 

O 

0}  . 

Q 

2 

^ 

a 

C! 

>- 

n 

S 

a 

^ 

'a" 

D. 

M 

<!■) 

'd 

s 

fe 

s 

^ 

k^ 

t«-i 

ea    toe's 


'^<^     00 


I  ^  I 


d 

s 

c 

<u 

cd 

cd 

> 

> 

<a 

QJ 

P 

P 

s 

s 

S 

-^ 

— 

___ 

o 

^3 

C 

.Sh 

'> 

o 

^H 

S 

d 

a 

H 

O 

g 

1 

CO 

H 

§ 

K  ■ 

Pi 

? 

> 

1 

1. 

S 

w 

M 
>  — 

s 

<1 

- 

<1 
o 

l-H 

S 

P 

•^  2^ 

cf 

02    ef 

Kt 

> 

> 

a 

O) 

a> 

S 

s 

:3 

n3 

;       S 

s 

S 

V 

o 

§ 

w" 

•-) 

tu 

u 

H 

QQ 

OD 

s 

<U 

< 

55 

^ 

> 

(^ 

s 

3 

H 

CO 

S 

s 

s 

<< 

s 

o 

bT 

ci 

> 

> 

<u 

G) 

s 

?3      , 

— : 

i^ 

S 

_S.  ' 

OE   THE   VERB. 


93 


o 


-a 

^ : 

I   a 

O  "5 
§   a 


fl      > 

O       OQ 

.  Eh 


o 


w 


;3 


2|o 


"  o  <u 

4J  OQ  to 

U  0}  09 

•g  8-3 

^    ^  o  o 

-  ^  g  s 

S    .5  2  I 


g 


w.  -TS    oo    C 


J3    "rt 


5a  ' 


a' 

<»  «  s  § 

:'.L_1> >    9t 


f 


E-<  ft 
Pi 


w   o 


W  ft 

I— I 
Eh 

o 
p 

s. 

CO    g 

ft 


8       g 


94 


OP   THE   VERB. 


;s 

o 

a< 

ei 

§ 

u 
1-1 
0« 

o 

p. 

H 

Cf-I 

« 

O 

< 

a 

o 

g 

-i^ 

«< 

ci 

fii 

bO 

P 

•^ 

a 

o 

O 

Ci 

00 

a  .  fl 

c«  C    o 

*^  ed    CQ 

.2  ^  .S 

^  -O  ^ 

P  O    3 
P.  O.  O. 


.s 

•I 

ft* 


m" 

rrT 

2 

•S 

vu 

^ 

^ 

-13 

T> 

TJ 

S 

O 

3 

A 

P, 

D. 

1=3 


fa    


w 

t> 

1 

H- ( 

H 

w 

<1   _ 

_  t> 

^ 

tr< 

O 

f^ 

I?; 

►H 

P 

•-4 

n 

t3 

cf    02 

O     oq"   O 

s  §  s 

2  I  S 

3  ^  rs 

-3  -a  ^ 


.2  ^  .2 
-S  -a  -3 


S 


S 


f      4f 


a 

I 

P4 

.a 


3 


3 
PL, 


»-•    0}    n 
.2  \2  .^ 

'•B  -a  ^ 

3     O     3 
fi.   Pk   Pl. 


s 

3 


OP   THE   VERB. 


95 


s  ^ 

^ 

^ 

*S 

s   o 

3 

p 

o*  o. 

a. 

o* 

O 

1-4 

Q 

12; 


*2  I  *§ 
^  ^  ^ 

3     O     !3 

p<  p<  04 


o   2   2 

s  §  s 


g 


mT 


i 


O 


d 
o 


o 
O 

o 


2 

OB 

PL4 


.S  "S  .2 

PJ     o     3 
Q.   O.   CU 


^      f 


11  §        f 


1 


I 


12 


2^2  S 


96 


OF  THE  VEEB. 


•3 


•53 

5 

•5J 

P3 

^ 

•3 

O" 

& 

o^ 

i 


O 

3 


^a>  VJ  ^      pq 


■l 


if 


a    CO 


P4 


o 
O 


•3 


I 


t 


Gf 


•3 
Gf 


•3 
Of 


etf    S2    <i* 

!5  S  !" 


.2  ^  , 


(^  c^  of 


OP   THE   VERB. 


97 


d 

fl 

e3  a 

l-i     cS 

.'^  V. 

.'^ 

s--^ 

u. 

bT         oq^ 

oT 

■§  -S  1 

&2    & 

P    rt    3 

OQ 

QQ      OQ      CQ 

5  .1 


o 

I— I 
Q 


g 
•^ 


.2 

1° 


C^ 

o 


—   ^ 

DQ 


I 


I— I 


> 
I— I 

Eh 

o 

a 

QQ 


o 

rn* 

s 

g 

O 

H 

a> 

n 

.n 

a. 

«r  -r  s*" 


I     I" 


2    cs"  « 


cT 

cT 

S  ^    0 

0 

cu 

S,^  & 

o< 

gT 

3     cJ    S 

s 

CO 

CO  CO'WJ* 

y> 

98 


OF   THE   VERB. 


•^ 


^ 
S 


o 

p 

CO 
Ci 


a       c 

«        a 

nd         T3 

'a 

C          C 

c 

.2         .§ 

S 

.— 1 

•t^ 

— 

— 

d 

-a 

c 

OJ 

^ 

a 

03 

H 

Q 

^ 

O 

Pi 

» 

:   o 

— 

1 

1 

1    w 

g      > 

P4 

f^           hH 

1 

H 

1 

> 

5     S 

o     5 

p 

5 

1:2 

i-i  qT        oT 

T3      '■a 

02 'O 

c       55 

(D            O) 

a> 

1 

•-     -a 

•^ 

^ 

fi 

0) 

H 

W~ 

»4 

0, 

5 

< 

ro 

no" 

o        a> 

73        'a 

a      a 

Pk 

a>        o 

V 

H 

**3       *^ 

OQ 

•<! 

04 

O"        ef 

«r 

na       TJ 

►a 

C3         fl 

a>        o 

1 

P    P 

E^ 

^ 


^ 


•5" 

O 


2      I      ^      g^'g*     £ 

4-  +j  tJ  -H*     t-  ♦* 


^ 

J5 

E^ 

^ 

«r  w    - 

t«r  oT 

bT 

m    CO  so 

o   o 

Pi 
1 

H 
^ 

gamo 

—PRE 

gamo 

H 

11 

> 

SI 

Q  — 

1 

1  trai 
UNCTIVE.- 

1  trai 

O 

1 1 

O 
Q 

a 

^ 

P) 

;?^ 

Pk 

*-i 

HH 

pq 

O 

&"S 

Eg" 

2 

1' 

1  1 

■e"E" 

*£* 

s 

CD 

t 


oT       S)       S       o    o        «S 


e 
p 


Li:! H 


OF   THE    VERB. 


99 


'O  tUD  tJJD 


^ 


> 

s 


c  o    w    o 

-   "  S  I  W  "^ 


Eh 
O 


> 


a 
o 

WD 

0 
O 

O 

Ci 


bo 


100 


OP   THE   VERB. 


a 
.2 

'•+3 

o 
O 


-£3 


o 
O 


S 
^  or 


o 


d 
.2 

e3 

S3 

O 

O 

00 


■5 

.s 

o 

OS 


^■1 


>        ed        P" 


Eh 

o 

Q 


OP   THE   VERB. 


10, 


c» 

n 

c^ 

c 

Pi 

o 

rt 

H 

;3 

fl 

fcin 

s 

m 

m 

«+-( 

o 

o 

0 

•a 

o 

3 

n^ 

o 

t>0 

PJ 
•""> 

•b 

fl 

o 

3 

O 

^ 

C^ 

* 

05 

h 

;,^ 

\  i  '". 

,> 

d 

» 

'''^^^S 

>\^->c-/^ 

'3 

1 

•T3 

■' 

-3 

J. 

'2 

c 

C 

s:] 

J3 

c  c: 

fi 

cu 

<D 

CJ 

S?    2i 

SJ 

^ 

^ 

Xi 

^ 

-£3   -O 

^ 

4 

— 

— 

— 

— 

a 

<o 

'§ 

i 

•g 

oT 

m"  oT 

»  i 

a> 

Da 

j 

el 

2 

i 

:S» 

'O 

'3  "o 

T3 

C    fi 

C 

O      Q) 

03 

i 

,jQ 

^ 

Xi  ^ 

-^ 

— 

"~~ 

"" 

oT  oT 

m 

g 

•  ^ 

f 

o 

o   o 

B   B 

o 
S 

H 

h 

o 

Cfi 

S 

1 

a   <D 

p     ' 

H 

t 

s 

Pi 
1 

•    'S  ^ 
•tea 

J          (DO) 
^       Xi   Xi 

« 

a* 

-4 

i! 

1 

W 

o 

l-H 

— 

e 

Pi 

^ 

1— 1 

X5 

> 

o 
^ 

I- 

Pi 

j 

Q 

l-H 

i 

.o 

i 

.1 

it 

2 

^ 

'O 

'§ 

'a  T3 

'2 

Ei: 

c 

fl 

J=!    C 

c 

o 

v 

o 

03      CD 

03 

-a 

.Q 

^ 

^ 

^ 

^  -Q 

^ 

'3 

(U 

ta 

Cl 

<D 

CQ 

o 

.2 

1 

.f 

1 

••^  •.S> 

•.ST-       ' 

c; 

'O 

-o  -a 

'O        ! 

••(J 

c 

C    G 

ou 

03 

03 

03      03 

pO 

pO 

^ 

^ 

Xi  XI 

»Q 

H 

•< 

Pk 

1 

•sC 

1 

. 

03      03 

2"    , 

_Q3 

na 

^ 

T3 

TS    tJ 

"O 

c 

c 

C 

C 

c   c 

« 

o 

a» 

(D 

<D 

03      03 

a      : 

I 

CQ 

M 

eg 

CQ 

pa  pQ 

pa     ! 

102 


OP  THE  VERB. 


.2 
■5* 

O 

O 

o 

o 

CI 


•'• 

,,■■    . 

! 

1 1 ; 

r 

2 

i 

dijeran. 
dirian. 
dijesen. 

X5 

^ 

] 

wH 

Q 

H 

•f 

.2" 

1 

% 

''B 

.2    oT-Sf 

-a  T^  13 

H 

g 

CQ 

T 

1 

of 
o 

a 

i 

i 

1 

1 

1 

o 

1 

g 
S 

Pl4 

§  or  § 
S  2  S 
2  1  ^ 

^  'd  'S 

Eh 

& 

b 

CO 

1 

'3 

t— 1 

H 

W 

^ 

(A 

H 

CO 

ew 

o 

s 

^ 

[^ 
tf 
? 

^ 
p 

Q 

PU 

5 

d 

1 

1 

CZi 

1 

dijera, 

dirla, 

dijese, 

'3 

Xi 

1  o 

'S 

w" 

^ 

Pj 

3 

H 

tf 

„ 

"    oT  S*" 

of 

< 
P< 

f 

.2 

.| 

vT 

Cfl 

^ 

^ 

-a 

^3 

'3  -o  -3 

•XJ 

P4 

i 

f 

€ 

g 

2^  cf  sT 

.24  ^C  .2i, 

Q 



Q 

Q 

5 

5 

5  Q  Q 

o 

OF  THE  VERB. 


103 


a 

°'  s 

■ 

i 

s 

d 

g 

g 

*s 

i 

1 

•g  *g 

'i 

t^         >H 

:3 

s 

S         a 

TS 

73 

13 

t3 

73  ^3 

TS 

Q 

.2 

§ 

00*  oT 

bT 

Q 

«n* 

"SI 

•g 

Q* 

v3 

>a)  ^o 

:§ 

s  s 

g 

M      S 

0$ 

a 

s  s 

s 

(4 

•a 

T3    73 

73 

o 

^ 

m    m 

«* 

H 

2   o 

O 

» 

2" 

of 

B  B 

g 

o 

o 

ri    q3 

a' 

e4 

i 

1 

^  >s 

vX> 

C  — 

> 
P3 

3 

,T3 

P4 
1 

1 

13 

ERFECT. 

durm 
dunn 

§1 
1 

1 

e 

Eh 

g 

S 
b 

PL4 

H-l 

qT 

vcT 

cT 

t3 

CO* 

C3     qT 

.2h 

?ii 

o 

S 

1 

s 

CQ 

s 

1    1 

1 

§ 

a> 

Si 

^ 

d 

C3 

?j 

S  3 

s 

•^ 

TS 

-a 

T3 

•o 

73   73 

73 

c> 

o 

"*^ 

o 

^ 
§ 

3 

o 

3 

oT  oT 

m 

g 

2 
fe 

f 

qT 

a> 

1 1 

'b 

C3 

S 

3 

3 

3   s 

3 

.2 

<5 

T3 

73 

73 

73    -a 

73 

pu 

■^ 

to 

P5 

"— » 

a 

o 

C? 

O 

« 

ef 

ff 

O 
O 

o 

g 

s 

1     g 

O) 

QJ 

c<? 

S3 

Q 

3 

Q 

=3    ;3 
Q  Q 

a 

C3 

o 

2      fl 

& 

•1    & 

5d      2 

s 

.^      2 

o 

73 

c 

o 

'B 

to 

HH 

ft 

S5 

P 

Pt 

H 

i    ^ 

I 

H 

^ 

H 

CO 

M           .  oT 

r-DEFINIT] 

RATIVE. 

1  irgamo 

i 

1 

f> 

1— • 

i*» 

S     *"• 

8 

s 

fe 
1 

gar 

1  i 

^ 

•S 

^i     s^ 

v» 

1 

^ 

.t;     3 

Q> 

B 

t<» 

'  ^ 

pT 

•m 

g 

Is- 

P4 

:    0* 

o 

1 

fl 

P< 

o 

.2^ 

o 

fc 

2 

■fi 

%J 

cc 

c3 

P4 

5P 

o" 

rt 

d 

bo 

t>0 

••~» 

^ 

§ 

1 

I 

^ 

O 

S 

^'^ 

o 

g 

i 

CM 

o 

<u 



s 

s 

104 


OP   THE   VERB. 


'B'B 


•  s 


TO    to  m 

o    o  o 

•2  §^     .  S 


PS    fa    — 


S, 


of  of 


O 
pi 
W 


O 

c3 

to 

O 


I  bli  to 


Ct              t^     09  >-< 

Sb        .2^  .2i  .2 

•^          bD  bo  ^ 

Ph HH    I— I  I— I 


a   c 
S         2  2^ 

03  O)     <D 


p2        5        ^  ,2       ^ 


^       5  .2 


S    ^  S 


DO    ai 

O     O 


> 

3 

1— 1 

H 

C3 

_<J 

P-* 

w 

e^ 

S 

I  ^  ^.  B  2,    «  ^ 

'.    o  ^     O     O      t>     o 

W  .S  S  .5  .S    g  .S 

>  —  Pi h  — 

P 

s 

^    K        „  CO     o 

^             ,5              ,5  !=!     =*               S 

2         2          y  "o  13        "^ 

.S        .S         .S  ^    ^ 


^ 


OP   THE   VERB. 


105 


^ 


a 


-f 


•S3 


I 

> 
i-i 

o 

I— I 


i 


i 

i-i 

§ 

(4 

T 

s 

a 

1 

eiT 

02 

>• 

^ 

b 

►. 

Q         %^      NO)  t>         Nfl) 


«sa       .2 


§D 


a      I 


c3 

"a" 

O 

O 

o 


I 


80* 


c 


0)     (U 


fcj^ 


o 

c 

JO 

s 


106 


OF   THE    VERB. 


B           S 

cd           ^ 

s       « 

N              N 

3           ^ 



o 

T3 

a 

S 

*o 

;3 

8 

i 

— 

§  1  f 

g 

W 

s  «  s 

r 

1  luzca 
IVE.—] 

1  luzca 

o 

» 

^ 

Pn 

O 

S 

^ 

1—4 

& 

Q 

^ 

S 

1 

s 

luzc 
luzc 

•f^ 

•rs 

«c 

o 

o 

1-3 

a 

H 

13 

O 

Pi 

S 

5 

■   2^ 

o 

t 

.2 

1 

'■*s 

< 

— » 

— —          — 

ei 

9k 

bO 

P3 

••— » 

P 

O 

»o 

^. 

rT          cb" 

o 

<N 

= 

2  g 
o   o 


«r 

«r 

•1^ 

•s 

03 

XQ 

>» 

>> 

Dd  >ri  M  ' 


w 

wT 

H 

wT 

H 

H 
> 

o 

P4 

o 

1 

. 

HH 

bn 

>  - 

o 

H-l 

o 

5 

o 

1 

& 

>-< 

CQ 

s  s 


r:        fcH        03 

goo 


o   o 


oq'  m 

CO 

<ir 

1 

2  S 

>« 

>>  >> 

>> 

o 

o 

o   o 

o 

bo  bD 


o  o 


OP   THE   VERB. 


107 


1 


o 

p 
o 


si 

o 
O 

o 


p= 





— 





1 

• 

1 

d 

g. 

c 

c  S 

(         P 

1* 

1 

2  1 

•| 

•a 

^3 

73  -a 

t3 

2 

2 

2  2 

2 

p* 

o< 

&< 

P,   Q. 

ft 

o 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

•3 

:3 

f 

i" 

2  g 

f 

>©  *a> 

r* 

Q* 

■S" 

'- 

cj 

•5* '5* 

'5* 

S 

1 

ft  ft 

1 

a 

— 

i 

i 

g' 

o 

1 

^ 

1 

ii 

"5**5* 

1 

S 

'S 

73 

H      'O  TJ 

«      13 

^ 

M 

o 

H-l 

1. 

0 

u      00 

tj        0 

1 

> 

— 

H 

(X 

1 

- 

i 

S. 

g     ft  ft 

H 

^ 

« 

g 

12; 

•^ 

S          ' 

o 

H 

HH 

t3 

•— 1 

CU 

»-» 

Q 

o 

s 

g 

f 

fi 

a> 

i-< 

1* 

GQ 

S3 
73 

■§■¥ 

•5* 

73 

6 

o 

0 

0    0 

0 

ij 

1-, 

M    v^ 

^4 

3 

cu 

&i 

P* 

ft  ft 

ft 

o 

3 

•a 

2 

• 

Oh 

1 

s" 

i 

.a 

1 

ff 

l\ 

H 

•g» 

9 

•l-l 

'5*    1 

0. 

1 

I 

11 

ft  ft 

H 

— 

— 

^_ 

— 

•< 

j 

e« 

3 

.. 

^ 

•s'-s* 

73 

TS 

"O 

13 

-a  -a 

•a     ' 

O 

o 

o 

0 

0   0 

0 

>-• 

b.   ii 

>-• 



fl. 

£ 

_a^ 

£ 

fl.  0. 

0^        ! 

108 


OP   THE   VERB. 


^     2 


"•♦3 

'5* 

O 

O 


4 


m 


d 

d 

^ 

i 

i      ^ 

5lD                   -Tl 

"S 

1 

1  1 

— 

— 

— ■ 

^ 

§ 

^ 

CQ 

9i 

..-  f 

salgaj 
saldri 

~ 

^ 

i 

CO 

•  1 

p4| 

PRESE 

mos, 
amos, 

1 

IVE.- 

1  saiga 

ERFECT. 

1  saldri 

i 

OS 

UNCT 

IMP] 

»-t 

Q 

J3 

pq 

t3 

1 

^ 

\^     1 

6 

s 

g 

1      1 

"2 

;d 

cd 

02 

K 

>A 

P4 

M 

o 

H 

tn" 

1 

t 

< 

fii 

1 

f 

1 

alga, 
aldrfa. 

Wy= 

■     {» 

CQ 

t» 

W          OQ  il 

O       g 
Q 


\2       >o       ^ 


•^ 


6 

o 


OF   THE   VERB. 


109 


_ 

^ 

d 

.2  .2 

.2 

•»-»  —> 

o 

a   c 

a 

•cJ 

..^  .p^M 

CQ 

OQ      OQ 

'm 

m    m 

aT 

oT 

g    g 

*§ 

v3 

:2:2 

:2 

♦J  •«-» 

■j2 

1 

•i  -i 

•i 

~ 

m    m 

m" 

^    § 

o 

«  S 

g    g 

•  2 

rt  s 

3  ^ 

w>S 

^i3 

tH* 

tf-^ 

ti 

O 

s  .s 

g  CJ 

1  — H 

H 

wJl 

i 

*m  '53 

> 

H 

Pi 

P 

U* 
g 

o 

e: 

12; 

P 

►-» 

pq 

"1 

2"S" 

.2  .2 

^ 

*5q  'oq 

•S3 

— 

— 

,5$ 

1 

1 

ar 

fi" 

•g- 

a  a 

.s 

<fi 

*5q 

•E3  -53 

*0Q 

Ci_l 

O 

fl 

o 

*-l3 

c« 

t>0 

1 

0 

? 

fl 

••§ 

O 

1 

s  s 

d 

j» 



M  M 

W 

•B  b 
Pi 
.2 

¥ 

O 

o 


C    13 

§      .2  .2 


I      I  *S      I 


S   S 


w 

H 

£ 

> 

S 

1  [ 

t-H 

'C 

'. 

H 

*53 

w  • 

S 

E3^ 

H 

£  i  fe  e  £ 


w"2 


I      II 


10 


no 


DF   THE   VERB. 


S   c 


^ 


««r 

od" 

? 

2  r, 

TO 

3  •S 

>  >• 

>• 

•? 

«3    G 


.2 
to 

3 


1 

:il 

>■ 

>  ► 

> 

>^ 


if -^8 

sf 

<u  -a   o 

C3 

Sec 

C 

>  >  > 

> 

OP  THE  VERB.  Ill 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


212.  Defective  verbs  are  those  which  are  not  employed 
in  all  the  tenses  or  persons. 

213.  SoLER,  to  be  accustomed^  is  irregular,  and  seldom  used  except  in 
the  following  tenses : 


INDICATIVE.— PRESENT. 

Suelo,         I  sueles,        ]  suele,         j  solemos,     1  soleis,        |  suelen. 

IMPERFECT. 

Sella,  I  solias,         |  solla,  |  soliamos,   |  soliais,       |  solian. 


214.  Yacer,  to  lie^  is  not  often  used  in  any  other  persons  than  the 
third  persons  singular  and  plural  of  the  present  indicative,  chiefly  at  the 
beginning  of  epitaphs. 


INDICATIVE.— PRESENT. 

Yags,         I  I  yace,  ]  |  |  yacen. 


215.  PoDRiR,  to  rotj  is  seldom  used  except  in  the  following  tenses  and 
persons : 


IMPERATIVE. 

I  I  [podrid.       I 

SUBJUNCTIVE.— IMPERFECT. 

I  podriria.      j  |  | 


(a.)  When  podrir  is  figuratively  used  in  any  other  moods  or  tenses, 
It  is  to  be  conjugated  irregularly  in  the  same  tenses  and  persons  as  servir 
(see  210),  by  changing  o  of  the  verb-root  into  u  ;  as,  pudriendOy  rotting. 

IMPERSONAL    VERBS. 

216.  Impersonal  verbs  (or  unipersonal  verbs)  are  those 
which  are  employed  only  in  the  third  person  singular,  and 
having  no  subject,  take  it  or  there  with  them  in  English  ; 
as,  lliieve,  it  rains ;  tronard,  it  will  thunder ;  nieve,  let  it 
snow ;  ha7/j  tl.ere  is,  or  there  are ;  habrd,  there  will  be. 


112 


OP  THE   VERB. 


217.  Llover,  to  rain,  is  thus  conjugated  impersonally. 


PAST  PARTICIPLE,  Llovido. 

GERUND,  Lloviendo. 

INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT, 

Uueve, 

it  rains. 

IMPERFECT, 

llovla. 

it  was  raining. 

PERFECT-DEFINITE, 

Ilovio, 

it  rained. 

FIRST-FUTURE, 

llover^, 
IMPERATIVE. 

it  loill  rain. 

llueva, 

let  it  rain. 

SUBJUNCTIVE.                                        1! 

PRESENT, 

Uueva, 

it  may  rain. 

r  lloviera, 

C  would  rain. 

IMPERFECT, 

<  lloveria, 

it}  should  rain. 

t  Uoviese, 

I  miglit  rain. 

FIRST-FUTURE, 

si  lloviere, 

if  it  should  rain. 

(a.)  All  the  impersonal  verbs  are  conjugated  like  some  of  the  verbs 
whose  conjugation  has  been  already  given :  thus,  Uover^  it  will  be  seen,  is 
irregular,  and  is  conjugated  like  mover  (see  186)  in  the  third  person  singu- 
lar of  each  tense. 

218.  Haher  and  hacer  are  often  used  as  impersonal  verbs,  and  are,  in 
such  cases,  to  be  rendered  in  English  by  the  tenses  of  the  verb  to  he ; 
as,  hay^  there  is,  or  there  are ;  hace^  it  is. 

(a.)  Conjugation  of  haber,  to  6e,  as  used  impersonally. 


PAST   PARTICIPLE, 

Habido.        gerund. 

Habiendo,  there  being. 

INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT, 

hay,  or,  ha, 

there  is,  or  there  are. 

IMPERFECT, 

habia. 

there  was,  or  there  were. 

PERFECT-DEFINITE, 

hubo. 

there  was,  or  there  were. 

FIRST-FUTURE, 

habr^ 
IMPERATIVE. 

there  wUl  be. 

haya, 

let  there  be. 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

PRESENT, 

haya, 

there  may  be. 

r  hubiera. 

r  would  be. 

IMPERFECT, 

<  habria,               there'l  should  be.                      || 

L  hubiese, 

I  might  be. 

FIRST-FUTURE, 

si  hubiere. 

if  there  should  be. 

(6.)  Hay,  habia,  and  hubo  are  rendered  in  English  sometimes  in  the 
uingular  and  sometimes  in  the  plural,  according  a%  a  singular  or  plural 


OF   THE   VERB.  113 

noun  follows ;  thus,  hay  una  muger  que  ttene  ccdentura^  there  is  a  woman 
who  has  a  fever ;  hay  mugeres  que  no  la  tienen,  there  are  women  who 
have  it  not. 

(c.)  Hacer,  when  employed  impersonally,  is  to  be  rendered  in  English 
by  the  verb  to  be  ;  as,  hace^  it  is ;  hacta^  it  was ;  hizo,  it  was ;  hard,  it  will 
be ;  haga,  it  may  be,  etc. ;  thus,  hace  Jrto,  it  is  cold ;  hace  mucho  aire, 
there  is  much  wind ;  hace  luna,  there  is  a  moon ;  hace  buen  iiempo,  it  is 
good  weather;  Jiace  diez  meses  que  ella  murio,  it  is  ten  months  since  she 
died. 

219.  Placer,  to  please,  is  used  impersonally  in  the  following  tenses  only : 


INDICATIVE. 

1 

PHESENT, 

place, 

it  pleases. 

IMPERFECT, 

placia. 

it  was  pleasing. 

PERFECT-INDEFINITE 

,    plugo, 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

it  pleased. 

PRESENT, 

plegue, 

it  may  please. 

c  plugiera, 

it  would  please. 

IMPERFECT, 

(  plugiese, 

it  might  please. 

FIRST-FUTURE, 

si  plugiere, 

if  it  should  please. 

{a.)  The  persons  of  placer  in  the  subjunctive,  are  used  only  in  these  ex 
pressions — plegue,  plugiere,  or  plugiese  d  Dwsj  may  it,  should  it,  or 
might  it  please  God ;  si  me  plugiere,  if  it  should  please  me. 

220.  There  are  some  verbs  that  can  be  used  in  all  the  persons  of  the 
tenses,  and  also,  at  times,  impersonally ;  as,  es  muy  tarde,  it  is  very  late ; 
es  preciso,  it  is  necessary;  es  Tnenester,  there  is  necessity;  parece,  it 
seems ;  conviene,  it  suits ;  basta,  it  is  suflScient. 

LIST    OF    IRREGULAR,    DEFECTIVE,    AND     IMPERSONAL     VERBS. 

221.  The  following  list  contains  all  the  irregular  verbs  in  the  Spanish 
language.  Each  verb  is  to  be  conjugated  in  its  irregular  tenses  like  the 
verb  to  which  reference  is  made  in  the  last  column ;  that  is,  each  one  is  ' 
irregular  in  the  same  tenses  and  persons,  and  in  the  same  manner,  as  the 
verb  which  is  opposite  to  it.  In  the  tenses  and  persons  which  are  not  ir- 
regular, each  verb  is  to  be  conjugated  like  the  regular  verb  of  the  same 
conjugation ;  those  ending  in  ar  like  amar  (168,  a),  those  in  er  like  co- 
mer (168,  b),  and  those  in  ir  like  vivir  (168,  c).  The  figures  indicate  the 
number  of  the  paragraph  in  which  either  the  verb  itself  or  a  verb  similar 
in  its  irregularities  is  conjugated.  The  verbs  marked  §  are  impersonal, 
and,  of  course,  to  be\ised  only  in  the  third  person  singular  of  each  mood 
and  tense. 

g^*  Every  verb  not  included  in  this  list  is  regular  and  must  be  conju- 
gated like  the  model- verbs  amar,  comer,  or  vivir,  accord*«ig  as  it  ends  in 
ar,  rr,  or  ir. 

10* 


114 

(a.)    A. 
Acertar, 
Acordar, 
Acostar, 
Acrecentar, 
Adestrar, 
Agorar, 
Alentar, 
Almorzar, 
Amolar, 
Andar, 
Apacentar, 
Aporcar, 
Aportar, 
Apostar,    . 
Apretar, 
Aprobar, 
Arrendar, 
Asentar, 
Aserrar, 
Asestar, 
Asolar, 
Asoldar, 
Asonar, 
Atentar, 
Aterrar, 
Atestar,* 
Atravesar, 
Atronar, 
Aventar, 


OP   THE   VERB. 


(First  Conjugation.) 

like  teniarj 

"  contary 

"  contary 

"  tentary 

"  tenfary 

"  contary 

"  tentary 

"  contary 

"  contar, 

"  tentary 

"  contary 

"  contary 

"  contary 

"  tentary 

"  contar, 

"  tentary 

"  tentary 

"  tentary 

"  tentary 

"  contary 

"  contary 

"  contar, 

"  tentary 

"  tentary 

"  tentary 

"  tentary 

"  contary 

"  tentary 


Avergonzarse,   "      contar, 
A.  (Second  Conjugation.) 


"^Abastecer, 
Aborrecer, 
Absolver, 
Abstraer, 
Acaecer, 
Acontecer, 
A-doIecer, 
Adormecerse, 
Agradecer, 
Amanecer, 


ZiA:e  parecer, 

"  parecer  y 

"  mover, 

"  parecery 

"  parecer, 

"  parecer, 

"  parecer, 

"  parecer, 

"  parecery 


94 


88 


138 

IBS 
190 
196 
188 
188 
193 
193 
160 
194 


Amortecerse,  Zifce  pcrrecer, 

Anochecer,  '•'  parecer, 

Anteponer,  "  poner, 

Antever,  "  rer, 

Aparecer,  "  parecer, 

Apetecer,  "  parecer, 

Ascender,  *'  tender, 

Atender,  "  tender, 

Atenerse,  "  ^ener, 

Atraer,  "  ^racr, 

A.  (Third  Conjugation.) 
Adherir,  /iA:e  sentir,  209 
Adquerir,  "  senfir,  209 
Adquirir,  "  197 
Advertir,  "  sentir,  209 
Apercibir,  "  serviry  210 
Arguir,  "  incluiry  203 
Arrecirse,  "  serviry  210 
Arrepentirse,  "  sentir,  209 
Asentir,  "  sentir,  209 
Asir,  "  198 
Aterirse,  *'  sentir,  209 
Atribuir,  "  incluir,  210 
Avenirse,  "  renir,  211 

B.  (First  Conjugation.) 
Bregar,  like    tentar,  181 

B.  (Second  Conjugation.) 
Bermejecer       like    parecer,       183 

B.  (Third  Conjugation.) 
Bendecir,  like 

C.  (First  Conjugation.) 
like    tentar, 


199 


Calentar, 

Cegar, 

Cerrar, 

Cimentar, 

Colar, 

Colgar, 

Comenzar, 

Comprobar, 

Concertar, 


^( 


tentar, 
tentar, 
tentar, 
contar, 
contar, 
tentar, 
contar, 
tentar. 


181 
181 

181 
181 
178 
178 
181 
178 
181 


*  Whor  atestar  means  tofUl,  to  cram,  it  is  irregular ;  when  to  attest,  it 
i9  •i'/r*^ 


OF  THE   VERB. 


115 


Concordar, 

Confesar, 

Consolar, 

Consonar, 

Constar,§ 

Contar, 

Costar, 


liJce  contaVj 
"  tentar^ 
"  contar  J 
"  contar f 
"     amar, 

contar, 


Caber, 

Caer, 

Canecer, 

Carecer, 

Cerner, 

Cocer, 


C.  (Second  Conjugation.) 
er,  like 


178 
181 
178 
178 
168,  a 
178 
178 


parecer, 

parecer, 

tender, 

Tnover, 

parecer, 


Compadecerse,  "     parecer, 

Comparecer,       "     parecer, 

Complacer,         "     parecer, 

Componer, 

Condescender, 

Condoler, 

Conmover^ 

Conocer, 

Contender, 

Contener, 

Contraer, 

Contrahacer, 

Convalecer, 

Crecer, 


parecer^ 

"  poner, 

"  tender, 

"  mover, 

"  mover, 

"  parecer, 

"  tender, 

"  tener, 

"  traer, 

"  hacer, 

"  parecer, 

..,  "  parecer, 

C.  (Third  Conjugation.) 
<•  like    servir, 

"  servir, 
"  servir, 
'•  servir, 
"  servir, 
vivir, 


Cenir, 

Colegir, 

Oomedirse, 

Competir, 

Concebir, 

Concernir,§ 

Concluir, 

Conducir, 

Conferir, 

Conseguir,. 

Consentir, 

Constituir, 

Constreiiir, 

Construir, 

Contradecir, 

Contravenir, 


183 

184 
188 
188 
193 
186 
188 
188 
188 
190 
193 
186 
186 
188 
193 
160 
194 
185 
188 
188 

210 
210 
210 
210 
210 


168, 

"  incluir,        2Cij 

"  producir,     207 

"  sentir,  '^^^ 

"  sermr, 

"  sentir, 

"  incluir , 

"  seTnnr, 

"  incluir 

"  decir, 

''  venir, 


209 
210 
209 
203 
210 
203 
200,  a 
211 


Contribuir, 

like 

incluir, 

2(13 

Controvertir, 

C( 

sentir. 

209 

Corregir, 

" 

servir. 

210 

D.  (First  Conjugation.) 

Dar, 

like 

179 

Decentar, 

cc 

tentar, 

181 

Decimentar, 

(( 

tentar. 

181 

Degollar, 

(C 

contar, 

178 

Demostrar, 

(C 

contar, 

178 

Denegar, 

i( 

tentar, 

181 

Denostar, 

c< 

contar, 

178 

Derrengar, 

(C 

tentar. 

181 

Desacertar, 

(( 

tentar. 

181 

Desacordar, 

c< 

contar, 

178 

Desalentar, 

(( 

tentar, 

181 

Desapretar, 

(C 

tentar. 

181 

Desaprobar, 

C( 

contar. 

178 

Desasosegar, 

(( 

tentar, 

181 

Desatentar, 

(C 

tentar, 

181 

Descolgar, 

(( 

contar, 

178 

Descollar, 

(( 

contar. 

178 

Desconcertar, 

(( 

tentar, 

181 

Desconsolar, 

" 

contar, 

178 

Descontar, 

(( 

contar. 

178 

Desempedrar, 

(( 

tentar. 

181 

Desencerrar, 

(( 

tentar, 

181 

Desengrosar, 

(( 

contar. 

178 

Desenterrar, 

(C 

tentar. 

181 

Desflocar, 

(( 

contar. 

178 

Desforgarse, 

" 

contar. 

178 

Deshelar, 

(( 

tentar. 

181 

Desherrar, 

(( 

tentar, 

181 

Desmembrar, 

(( 

tentar. 

181 

De  solar. 

(C 

contar, 

178 

DesoUar, 

(( 

contar. 

178 

Desovar, 

(( 

contar, 

178 

Despedrar, 

(( 

tentar, 

181 

Despernar, 

(( 

tentar, 

181 

Despertar, 

u 

tentar, 

181 

Desplegar, 

(( 

tentar. 

181 

Despoblar, 

C( 

contar. 

178 

Desterrar, 

« 

tentar, 

181 

Destrocar, 

cc 

contar, 

178 

Desvergonzarse," 

contar, 

178 

Dezmar, 

cc 

tentar, 

181 

116 


OF   THE   VERB. 


D,  (Second  Conjugation.) 
Decae/',  like  caer,  184 

Defender,  "      tender,         193 

Demoler,  "     mover,         186 

Deponer,  "     poner,  190 

'^      '  "     parecer,       188 

"     parecer,       188 
"     parecer, 
"      tender, 
"      traer. 


Desabastecer, 
Desadormecer, 
Desaparecer, 
Desa  tender, 
Desatraer, 

Descaecer,  "  parecer, 

Descender,  "  tender, 

Deseomponer,  "  poner, 

Desconocer,  "  parecer, 

Desentenderse,  "  tender, 

Desentorpecer,  "  parecer, 

Desenvolver,  "  mover, 

Desfallecer,  "  parecer, 

Desflaquecerse,  "  parecer, 

Desguarnecer,  "  parecer, 

Deshacer,  "  hacer, 

Desobedecer,  "  parecer, 

Desplacer,  "  parecer, 

Destorcer,  "  mover, 

Desvanecerse,  "  parecer, 

Detener,  "  tener, 

Detraer,  "  traer, 

Devolver,  "  mover, 

Disolver,  "  mover, 

Disponer,  "  poner, 

Distraer,  "  traer, 

Doler,  "  mover, 

D.  (Third  Conjugation.) 
^                 like 


188 
193 
194 
188 
193 
190 
188 
193 
188 
186 
188 
188 
188 
185 
188 
188 
186 
188 
160 
194 
186 
186 
190 
194 
186 


Decir, 

Deducir, 

Deferir, 

Derretir, 

Desavenir, 

Desceiiir, 


,iKe  200 

"  producir,    207 

"  seniir,         *''^° 

"  servir, 

"  venir, 

"  servir. 


Descomedirse,  "  servir, 

Desconsentir,  "  sentir, 

Desdecirse,  "  decir, 

Deservir,  "  servir, 

Desleir,  "  servir, 

Deslucir,  "  Ittdr, 


209 
210 
211 
210 


210 
209 
200,  a 
210 
210 
205 


D(;smentir, 

Despedir, 

Desteiiir, 

Destruir, 

Diferir, 

Digerir, 

Disminuir, 

Distribuir, 

Diverter, 

Dormir, 


like  sentir, 

"  servir, 

"  servir, 

"  incluir, 

"  sentir, 

"  sentir, 

"  incluir, 

"  incluir, 

"  sentir. 


209 
210 
210 
203 
209 
209 
203 
203 
209 
201 


E.  (First  Conjugation.) 

Emendar,  like  tentar,  181 

Empedrar,  "  tentar,  181 

Empezar,  "  tentar,  181 

Emporcar,  "  contar,  178 

Encensar,  "  tentar,  181 

Encerrar,  "  tentar,  181 

Encomendar,  "  tentar,  181 

Encontrar,  '•  contar,  178 

Encordar,  "  contar,  178 

Encubertar,  "  tentar,  181 

Engrosar,  "  contar,  178 

Enrodar,  "  contar,  178 

Ensangrentar,  "  tentar,  181 

Enterrar,  "  tentar,  181 

Errar,  "  182 

Escalentar,  "  tentar,  181 

Escarchar,§  "  amar,      168,  a 

Escarmentar,  "  tentar,  181 

Esforzarse,  "  contar,  178 

Espresar,  "  tentar,  181 

Estar,  "  159 

Estercolar,  "  contar,  178 

Estregar,  "  tentar,  181 

E.  (Second  Conjugation.) 

Embebecerse,  like  parecer,  188 

Embravecerse,  "  parecer,  188 

Embrutecerse,  "  parecer,  188 

Emplumecer,  "  parecer,  188 

Empobrecer,  "  parecer,  ISS 

Encabellecer,  "  parecer,  ItS 

Encalvecer,  "  parecer,  188 

Encallecer,  "  parecer,  188 

Encanecer,  "  parecer,  188 

Encarecer,  "  parecer,  138 


OP  THE   VEEB. 


Encender,  like  tender^ 

Encrudecerse,  "  parecer^ 

Encruelecer,  **  parecer, 

Endentecer,  "  parecer^ 

Endurecer,  "  pareccr, 

Enflaquecer,  "  parecer^ 

Enfurecerse,  "  parecer^ 

Engrandecer,  "  parcccr, 

Enloquecer,  "  pareccr, 

Enmocecer,  "  pareccr ^ 

Enmohecerse,  "  parecer, 

Enmudecer,  "  parec&r, 

Ennegrecer,  "  pareccr^ 

Ennoblecer,  "  parecer, 

Enrarecer,  "  parecer, 

Enriquecer,  "  parecer^ 

Ensoberbecerse,"  parccer^ 

Entallecer,  "  parecer^ 

Entender,  "  tender^ 

Enternecer,  "  parecer^ 

Entomecer,  "  pareccr^ 

Entontecerse,  "  parecer^ 

Entorpecerse,  "  parecer, 

Entretener,  "  tenerf 

Entristecerse,  "  parecer^ 

EntuUecer,  "  parecer^ 

Entumecer,  "  parccer^ 

Envejecer,  "  parecer^ 

Enverdecer,  "  parecer, 

Envolver,  "  movers 

Equivaler,  "  vcder, 

Escamecer,  *  "  parccer, 

Esclarecer,  "  parecer^ 

Escocer,  "  mover^ 

Espavorecer,  "  pareccr^ 

Esponer,  "  poner^ 

Establecer,  "  parecer^ 

Estender,  "  tender^ 

Estraer,  "  traer^ 

Estremecerse,  "  parecer^ 

E.  (Third  Conjugation. 

Elegir,  like  servir^ 

Ertibestir,  "  scrvir^ 

Engreirse,  **  seroir^ 

Knlucir,  "  &tt»r, 


193 

188 
188 
188 
188 
188 
188 
188 
188 
188 
188 
188 
188 
188. 
188 
188 
188 
188 
193 
188 
188 
188 
188 
160 
188 
188 
188 
188 
188 
186 
195 
188 
188 
186 
188 
190 
188 
193 
194 
188 

210 

210 

'210 

205 


117 

Entrelucir,  \iJce  Iticir,  205 

Entreoir,  "  oir,  206 

Envestir,  "  sentirj  209 

Erguir,  "  202 

Estrenir,  "  servir,  210 

Escluir,  "  incluir^  203 

Espedir,  "  servir^  210 

F.  (First  Conjugation.) 
Forzar,  like  contar^ 

Fregar,  "    tentar^ 

Frezar,  "    tentary 

F.  (Second  Conjugation.) 
Fallecer,  like  parecer^ 

Favorecer,  "    parecer^ 

Fenecer,  "    parecer, 

Fortalecer,  "    parecer^ 


178 
181 
181 


188 
188 
188 


F.  (Third  Conjugation.) 

Fluir,                like  incluir^ 

203 

Freir,                   "    servir^ 

210 

G.  (First  Conjugation.) 

Gobernar,         like  tentar^ 

181 

Granizarj§           "    aTnar,       158,  a 

G.  (Second  Conjugation,) 

Guarnecer,        like  parecer, 

188 

G.  (Third  Conjugation.) 

Gemir,              like  servir, 

210 

H.  (First  Conjugation.) 

Helar,                like  temtar, 

181 

Herrar,                "    tentar, 

181 

Holgar,                "    contar, 

178 

Hollar,                "    contar, 

178 

H.  (Second  Conjugation. 

Haber,              like 

156 

Hacer, 

185 

Heder,                 "    tender, 

193 

Render,               "    tender, 

193 

Humedecer,        "    parecer. 

188 

H.  (Third  Conjugation.) 

Herir,  ike  sentir,  209 

Hervir,  "    sentir,  209 

Huir,  "    indvir,  203 


118 


or    THE    VERB. 


I.  (First  Conjugation.) 
lmportar,§        like  amar,       163,  a 

Infernar,             "    tentar^  181 

Insertar,              "    tentar^  181 

Invemar,             "    tentar^  181 

I.  (Second  Conjugation.) 

Imponer,           like  ponery  190 

Indisponer,         "    porter,  190 

I.  (Third  Conjugation.) 

Imbuir,             like  incluir,  203 

Impedir,              "    servir,  210 

Inadvertir,          "    sentir,  209 

Incluir,               "  203 

Inducir,               "    producir,  207 

Inferir,                "    sentir,  209 

Ingerir,               "    sentir,  209 

Instituir,             "    incluir ,  203 

Instruir,              "    incluir ,  203 

Intervenir,          "    venir,  211 

Introducir,          "    producir,  207 

Invertir,              "    sentlr,  209 

Investir,              "    sentir,  209 

Ir,                        "  204 

J.  (First  Conjugation.) 

Jugar,  180 

L.  (Third  Conjugation.) 

Lucir,               like  lucir,  205 

Luir,                    "    incluir y  203 

LL.  (First  Conjugation.) 
Lloviznar,§       like  amar,       168,  a 

LL.  (Second  Conjugation.) 

Llover,§  217 

M.  (First  Conjugation.) 

Manifestar,       like  tentar,  181 

Mentar,               "    tentar,  181 

Merendar,           "    tentar,  181 

Mostrar,              "    contar,  178 

M.  (Second  Conjugation.) 

Magrecer,         like  parecer,  188 

Mantener,          "    tener,  160 


Mecer,  like  parecer^ 
Merecer,  "    parecer, 

Mohecerse,         ^[    parecer, 
Molar,  "    mover y 

Mollecer,  "    parecer, 

Morder,  "    mover, 

Mover,  " 

M.  (Third  Conjugation.) 

Maldecir,  like  hendecir, 


.86 
.88 
[86 
86 


servir, 
"    sentir, 
"     dormir, 
"    incluir, 


199 
210 
209 
201 
203 


Medir, 
Mentir, 
Morir, 
Muir, 

N.  (First  Conjugation.) 
Negar,  like  tentar,  181 

Nevar,§  "    tentar,  181 

N.  (Second  Conjugation.) 
Nacer,  like  parecer,        188 

Negrecer,  "    parecer,        188 

O.  (Second  Conjugation.) 
Obedecer,  like  parecer,        188 

"    parecer, 
"    tener, 
"    parecer. 


Obscurecer, 

Obtener, 

Ofrecer, 

Oler, 

Oponer, 


188 
160 
188 
187 
190 


"    poner, 
O.  (Third  Conjugation.) 

Obstruir,            like  incluir,  20i> 

Oir,                      ''  206 

P.  (First  Conjugation.) 

Pensar,             like  tentar,  181 

Pemiquebrar,      "    tentar,  181 

Plegar,                "    tmtar,  181 

Poblar,                '*    contar,  178 

Probar,                "    contar,  178 

P.  (Second  Conjugation.) 

Pacer,                 like  parecer,  188 

Padecer,              "    parecer,  138 

Parecer,              "  188 

Perder,                "    tender,  193 

Perecer,              "   parecer,  '83 


4 

OF   THE   VERB. 

119 

Pertenecer, 

like 

parecer, 

188 

Resollar, 

like 

contar. 

179 

Placer, 

u 

219 

Resonar, 

« 

contar. 

179 

Poder, 

(( 

189 

Retemblar, 

(( 

tentar. 

181 

Poner, 

C( 

190 

Retentar, 

(( 

tentar, 

181 

Preponer, 

{( 

poneTy 

190 

Reventar, 

tentar. 

181 

Presuponer, 

u 

poner^ 

190 

Revolar, 

(( 

contar. 

179 

Prevalecer, 

(( 

parecery 

188 

Revolcarse, 

(( 

contar. 

179 

Prever, 

(( 

very 

196 

Rodar, 

" 

contar. 

179 

Promover, 

" 

mover, 

186 

Rogar, 

C( 

contar, 

179 

Proponer, 

(( 

poner, 

190 

R.  (Second  Conjugation.) 

P.  (Third  Conjugation 

.) 

Recaer, 

like 

caer. 

184 

Pedir, 

like 

servir. 

210 

Recocer, 

(( 

mover. 

186 

Perseguir, 

(( 

servir, 

210 

Reconocer, 

(( 

parecer. 

188 

Pervertir, 

(C 

sentir. 

209 

Reconvalecer, 

t( 

parecer. 

188 

Podrir, 

ti 

215 

Recrecer, 

« 

parecer. 

188 

Predecir, 

a 

decir. 

200,  a 

Reflorecer, 

« 

parecer. 

188 

Preferir, 

(( 

sentir, 

209 

Rehacer, 

(( 

hacer. 

185 

Presentir, 

(( 

sentir, 

209 

Remanecer, 

(( 

parecer. 

188 

Prevenir, 

(( 

renir. 

211 

Remecer, 

(( 

parecer, 

188 

Producir, 

(C 

207 

Rem  order, 

C( 

mx/ver. 

186 

Proferir, 

(( 

sentir. 

209 

Remover, 

(( 

mover, 

186 

Proseguir, 

{( 

servir, 

210 

Renacer, 

(( 

parecer. 

188 

Prostituir, 

(( 

incluir. 

203 

Reponer, 

(( 

poner. 

190 

Provenir, 

( 

venir. 

211 

Resolver, 

C( 

mover. 

186 

a.  (First  Conjugation 

) 

Restablecer, 
Retener, 

(( 

parecer, 
tener, 

188 
160 

Q,uebrar, 

like 

tentar. 

181 

Retorcer, 

(( 

mover. 

186 

Q,.  (Second  Conjugation.) 

Retraer, 

(( 

traer. 

194 

Ctuerer, 

191 

Retrotraer, 

" 

traer, 

194 

R.  (First  Conjugation 

) 

Rever, 
Reverdecer,^ 

(( 

(C 

ver, 
parecer. 

196 

188 

Recomendar, 

like 

tentar. 

181 

Reverter, 

(( 

tender. 

193 

Recordar, 

contar. 

178 

Revolver, 

(( 

mover, 

186 

Recostar, 

contar. 

178 

Reforzar, 

contar. 

178 

R.  (Third  Conjugation.) 

Regar, 

tentar. 

181 

Recluir, 

like 

incluir, 

203 

Regoldar, 

contar. 

178 

Reducir, 

" 

producir. 

207 

Relampaguear§  " 

amar. 

168,  a 

Referir, 

" 

sentir. 

209 

Remendar, 

(( 

tentar. 

181 

Regir, 

(( 

servir, 

210 

Renegar, 

" 

tentar. 

181 

Reir, 

(( 

servir, 

210 

Renovar, 

«^ 

contar. 

178 

Relucir, 

(( 

luar, 

205 

Replegar, 

(( 

tentar. 

181 

Rendir, 

(( 

servir. 

210 

Reprobar, 

(( 

contar. 

178 

Renir, 

(( 

servir. 

210 

Requebrar, 

u 

tentar. 

181 

Repetir, 

" 

servir, 

210 

^scontrar, 

c< 

coTnJtar, 

179 

Requerir, 

tc 

sentir. 

209 

120 


OP   THE   VERB. 


Resentirse,  like  sentir^  209 

Restituir,  "  induir^  203 

Retenir,              "      sermr^  210 

Retribuir,           "  incluir^  203 

Revenir,  "  venir,  211 

Revestir,            "  servir,  210 

S.  (First  Conjugation.) 

Segar,  like    tentar,  181 

Sembrar,  "  tentar,  181 

Sentarse,  "  tentaVf  181 

Serrar,  «  tentar,  181 

Solar,  "  coniar,  178 

Soldar,  «  contar,  178 

Soltar,  "  contar,  178 

Sonar,  "  contar,  178 

Sonar,  "  contar,  178 

Sosegarse,  "  ^en^ar,  181 

Soterrar,  "  tentar,  181 

S.  (Second  Conjugation.) 

Saber,  like  192 

Satisfacer,  "  hacer,      185,  a 

Ser,  «  158 

Sobreponer,  "  poner,  190 

Soler,  «  213 

Solver,  "  mover,  186 

Sostener,  *'  tener,  160 

Sustraer,  "  traer,  194 

Suponer,  "  poner,  190 

S.  (Third  Conjugation.) 

Salir,  like  208 

Seducir,  "  producir,  207 

Seguir,  "  servir,  210 

Sentir,  «  209 

Servir,  «'  210 

Sobresalir,  "  «aZir,  208 

Sobrevenir,  "  v'enir,  211 

Sonreirse,  "  servir,  210 

Sustituir,  "  incluir,  203 

Sugcrir,  "  sentir,  209 


T.  (First  Conjugation.) 

Temblar,  like    tentar,  181 

Tentar,  "  181 

Tostar,  "       contor,  178 

Trascolar,  "       contar,  178 

Trascordarse,    "       contar,  178 

Trasegar,  "       tentar,  181 

Trasoiiar,  "      contar,  178 

Trocar,  "      contar,  178 

Tronar,  "      contar,  178 

Tropezar,  "       tentar,  181 

T.  (Second  Conjugation.) 

Tender,  ZiAre  193 

Tener,  "  160 

Torcer,  "      mover,  186 

Traer,  "  194 

Trascender,       "       tender,  193 

Trasponer,        *'      poner,  190 

T.  (Third  Conjugation.) 

Teiiir,  like    servir,  210 

Traducir,  "      producir,  207 

V.  (First  Conjugation.) 

Volar,  like    contar,  178 

Volcar,  "      contar,  178 

V.  (Second  Conjugation.) 

Valer,  like  195 


Ver, 

(C 

196 

Verter, 

(( 

tender, 

193 

Volver, 

C( 

mover, 

186 

V.  (Third  Conjugation.) 
Venir,  like  211 

Vestir,  "      servir,         210 

Y.  (Second  Conjugation.) 
Yacer,  214 

Z.  (Third  Conjugation.) 
Zaherir,  like    sentir,         209 


OF   THE   VERB. 


121 


LIST   OF   VERBS   WITH   IRREGULAR   PAST-PARTICIPLES. 

222.  Some  verbs  of  those  in  the  preceding  list  of  irregular  verbs,  and 
some  which  are  otherwise  regular,  have  the  past  participle  irregularly 
-formed.  The  following  list  contains  all  these  verbs  with  the  irregular 
participle. "  Those  marked  R  have  also  their  past  participle  regularly 
formed.    Thus  ingerir,  has  both  ingerto  and  ingerido. 


(a.) 
Abrir, 

ahierto. 

Ingerir,  R. 

ingerto. 

Absolver, 

absuelto. 

Morir, 

muerto. 

Anteponer, 

antepuesto. 

Oprimir,  R. 

opreso. 

Antever, 

antevisto. 

Poner, 

puesto. 

Componer, 

compuesto. 

Predecir, 

predicho. 

Contradecir, 

contradicho. 

PrenderrR. 

preso. 

Contrahacer, 

contrahecho. 

Preponer, 

prepuesto. 

Cubrir, 

cubierto. 

Presuponer 

presupuesto. 

Decir, 

dicho. 

Prever, 

previsto. 

Deponer, 

depuesto. 

Proponer, 

propuesto. 

Descomponer, 

descompuesto. 

Proscribir, 

proscrito. 

Descubrir, 

descubierto. 

Proveer,  R. 

provisto. 

Desdecirse, 

desdicho. 

Rehacer, 

rehecho. 

Desenvolver, 

desenvuelto. 

Reponer, 

repuesto. 

Deshacer, 

deshecho. 

Resolver, 

Tesuelto. 

Disolver, 

disuelto. 

Rever, 

revisto. 

Disponer, 

dispuesto. 

Revolver, 

revuelto. 

Elegir, 

eligido. 

Romper,  R. 

roto. 

Encubrir, 

encubierto. 

Satisfacer, 

satisfecho. 

Envolver, 

envuelto. 

Sobreponer, 

sobrepuesto. 

Escribir, 

escrito. 

Suponer, 

supuesto. 

Esponer, 

espuesto. 

Suprimir,  R. 

supreso. 

Hacer, 

hecho. 

Trasponer, 

traspuesto. 

Imponer, 

impuesto. 

Ver, 

visto. 

Imprimer, 

impreso. 

Volver, 

vuelto. 

Indisponer, 

indispuesto. 

223.  Some  participles  are  used  sometimes  as  verbal  adjectives ;  thus 
mirado  means,  as  a  participle,  beheld^  and  as  an  adjectiye,  considerate  ; 
leido  means,  as  a  participle,  read,  and  as  an  adjective,  book-learned; 
partido  means  divided,  and  liber cd  ;  sabido  means  known,  and  well-inform- 
ed. In  all  such  cases,  the  learner  will  find  the  word  in  his  Spanish  dic- 
tionary, defined  as  an  adjective.  He  will  be  able,  from  the  sense  of  the 
context,  to  determine  whether  to  employ  it  as  a  participle  or  adjective, 
just  as  in  English  he  would  know  which  is  the  adjective  and  which  the 
participle  in  the  sentences  "  a  known  event,"  and  "  a  person  whom  he 
has  known.^^ 

11 


122        OF  THE  ADVERB THE  CONJUNCTION. 

224.  Some  changes  have  taken  place  in  the  verb-ending  of  the  second 
person  plural  in  all  the  tenses  and  conjugations.  This  anciently  had  its 
termination  in  des ;  as,  amades^  amdbades,  amdstedes,  amaredcs^  amedes, 
etc.,  for  amais,  amdbais.  amdsteis,  amareis,  ameis. 

(a.)  Soy,  doy,  voy,  sois,  caigOy  oigo,  valgo,  cupo,  hubo,  jmso^  etc.,  were 
formerly  so,  do,  vo,  sodes,  cayo,  oyo,  valo,  copo,  ovo,  poso. 

(6.)  With  all  modem  Spanish  writers  the  guttural  x  is  changed  into 
j ;  as,  dijo,  dijeron,  dijera,  produjo,  produjeron,  instead  of  dixo,  dixeron, 
dixera,  produxo,  produxeron.  The  pronunciation  is  the  same  in  both 
cases. 

More  specific  rules  concerning  the  verb  will  be  found  in  Part  III. 


OF   THE   ADYERB. 

225.  Adverbs  are  either  primitive  or  derivative:  the 
primitive  being  those  which  are  simple  or  uncompounded 
of  any  other  word,  such  as  no,  not ;  ya,  already ;  hoy,  to- 
day ;  alia,  yonder ;  and  the  derivative,  those  that  are  form- 
ed from  other  words  (chiefly  adjectives,  participles,  or  other 
adverbs)  by  the  addition  of  mente  ;  as,  hreveme?ite,  confusa- 
mente,  ciertamente, 

(a.)  The  Spanish  language,  like  the  English,  contains  numerous 
terms  composed  of  more  than  one  word,  and  used  adverbially,  hence 
called  adverbial  phrases ;  as,  par  cierto,  for  certain ;  por  lo  comun,  in 
general ;  de  un  mode,  in  such  manner. 

^^  A  list  of  some  of  the  different  classes  of  adverbs  will  be  found 
in  Part  III. 


OF  THE   CONJUNCTION. 

226.  Conjunctions  are  simple ;  as,  y,  and ;  6,  or ;  qy£^ 
that ;  si,  if ;  ni,  nor  ;  jporque,  because  ;  como,  as  ;  mas,  but ; 
pero,  but :  or  conjunctive  phrases ;  as,  con  tal  de  que,  provided 
that ;  pues  que,  since  ;  para  que,  in  order  that ;  djin  de  que, 
to  the  end  that. 

(a.)  The  conjunction  y  is  changed  into  ^  when  it  comes  before  a  word 
beginning  with  i  or  hi;  as,  las  leiiguas  Espanola  i  Inglesa,  the  Sparish 
and  English  languages :  madre  S  hija,  mother  and  daughter. 


OP   THE   INTERJECTION. 


123 


(6.)  The  conjunction  6  is  changed  into  <i  when  it  comes  befoie  a  word 
beginning  with  o    as,  lacrt  <i  ohlea^  sealing-wax  or  wafer. 

g^"  See  the  different  kinds  of  conjunctions,  in  Part  III. 


OF  THE  PREPOSITION. 

227.  Prepositions  are  simple  ;  as,  con^  with ;  de^  of ;  and 
compound ;  as.  a  pesar  de,  in  spite  of ;  cosa  de,  about,  the 
matter  of ;  para  con,  as  to ;  por  entre,  through. 

(a.)  The  following  list  comprehends  the  principal  simple  prepositions 
in  Spanish : 


A',  to,  at,  for. 

Ante,      in  presence  of,  before. 

A'ntes,  before^  beforehand  of 

Con,       with. 

Contra,  against,  opposite  to. 

De,         of,  from.. 

Desde,  from. 

Detras,  behind. 

En,         in,  into,  on. 


Entre,  between,  among. 

Hacia,  towards. 

Hasta,  wnto,  till. 
Para,     for. 

Por,  by,  through,  for. 
Segun,  according  to. 

Sin,  without. 

Sobre,  upon,  over. 

Tras,  behind. 


(6.)  Prepositions  do  not  always  correspond  in  Spanish  and  in  Eng 
ish ;  that  is,  de  is  not  always  to  be  translated  ofoxdhy  to,  etc.  ;  as, 

Los  valles  abundan  de  trigo,  I  The  valleys  abound  with  wheat. 

Ella  pide  perdon  d  Dios,  I  She  asks  pardon /ro77i  God. 


OF   THE   INTERJECTION. 

228.  The  interjections  are  simple  and  compound  ;  as,  afi 
oh  ;  ;  chito  !  hush  ;  and  /  pohre  de  mi  madre  !  0  my  poor 
mother ! 

(a.)  The  following  list  comprehends  the  principal  simple  interjec- 
tions : 


Ah,       ah! 

Ay,       ah!  alas! 

Ce,        here  !  go  on ! 

Chiton,  ^^^'^•"'^^^- 
Ea,       hah  !  go  on  !  good  ! 
Ete,       see!  behold!  to! 


Fu,       pshaw!  fe!  tush! 

Ha,       ah!  oh! 

He,       eh!  hist!  hirk! 

Hola,    halloo,  ho  tl  ere ! 

O, 

Ta, 

Tate, 


oh!  ho! 
^  >  take  care  !  atop  ! 


PART  m. 

ETYMOLOGY  AND  SYNTAX  MORE  FULLY  EXPLAINED. 


OF   THE  ARTICLE. 


229.  The  articles  are  not  always  employed  in  Spanish  in 
the  same  manner  as  they  are  in  English.  The  following 
rules  will  illustrate  this  observation. 

USE    OF   THE   DEFINITE   ARTICLE. 

230.  The  definite  article  is  to  be  used  before  all  common 
nouns  taken  in  a  general  sense,  and  in  the  whole  extent  of 
their  signification ;  as, 


El  odio  levanta  rencillas. 
La  caridad  es  paciente. 
Los  hombres  son  mortales. 


Hatred  excites  strifes. 
Charity  is  patient. 
Men  are  mortal. 

'  Here  odio,  caridad,  and  hombres  are  taken  in  a  general  sense, 
meaning  all  hatred,  all  charity,  all  men. 

(a.)  If  the  nounJ)e  not  taken  in  a  general  sense,  that  is,  if  the  whole 
of  it  be  not  meant,  the  article  is  not  used ;  as, 

Hace  buen  tiempo.  I  It-is  good  weather. 

Tiene  envidia.  '  He-has  envy. 


*  Here  tiempo  and  envtdia  are  designed  to  express  only  some  portion 
of  weather  and  envy,  meaning  some  good  weather,  some  envy.     (Sec  264.) 

231.  The  definite  article  is  used  before  proper  names 
of  countries,  states,  and  days  of  the  week ;  as, 

La  Frdncia  es  un  hermoso  pais.       I  France  is  a  beautiful  country. 
Juan  volverd  el  M^rtes.  I  John  will-return  Tuesday. 

(a.)  If  the  name  of  the  country,  state,  or  region  be  preceded  by  a  pre- 
position, or  take  its  name  from  its  capital  city,  the  article  Is  generally 
omitted;  as, 

Venecia  daba  leyes  i,  los  monarcae  (  Venice  gave  laws  to  the  monarchs 
de  Europa.  I      of  Europe. 


OF    THE   ARTICLE. 


125 


232.  The  definite  article  is  to  be  used  before  numerals 
indicating  the  day  of  the  month  or  the  hour  of  the 
day;  as, 

Tlie  sixth  (six)  of  January. 
At  three  o'clock  in  (of)  the  after- 
noon. 

233.  The  definite  article  is  used  before  nouns  indicating 
the  rank,  office,  profession,  or  titles  of  persons  when  they 
are  spoken  of  (but  not  when  they  are  addressed)  ;  as, 


El  seis  de  Enero. 
A'  las  tres  de  la  tarde. 


El  General  Taylor  es  valiente. 

El  Senor  De  Forest  tiene  dos  hijas. 

La  Sefiora  Tranor  no  es  prudente. 


General  Taylor  is  brave. 

Mr.  De  Forest  has  two  daughters. 

Mrs.  Tranor  is  not  prudent. 


234.  The  definite  article  (and  not  the  indefinite,  as  in 
English)  is  used  before  nouns  signifying  a  certain  weight, 
measure,  size,  quantity  or  number,  when  preceded  by  the 
price ;  as, 


A  tres  duros  la  libra. 
A  dos  pesos  la  vara. 
A  razon  de  diez  duros  el  mes. 

A  siete  pesos  el  tomo. 
A  tres  reales  la  pieza. 
A  cuatro  pesos  el  par. 


At  three  dollars  a  (the)  pound. 

At  two  dollars  a  (the)  yard. 

At  {the)  rate  of  ten  dollars  a  (the) 

month. 
At  seven  dollars  a  (the)  volume. 
At  three  reals  a  (the)  piece. 
At  four  dollars  a  (the)  pair. 

(a.)  Instead  of  the  definite  article,  the  preposition  par  may  be  used 
after  the  price  ;  thus  we  can  say,  d  tres  duros  la  libra,  "  at  three  dollars 
the  yard,"  or  d  tres  duros  por  libra,  "  at  three  dollars  per  yard." 


OMISSION    OF    THE    DEFINITE    ARTICLE. 

235.  The  definite  article  is  omitted  sometimes  in  Spanish 
where  it  would  not  be  omitted  in  English,  as  in  the  follow- 
ing cases. 

236.  The  definite  article  is  not  used  before  a  noun  which 
denotes  relationship  or  kindred  of  another  noun,  when  a 
verb  comes  between  them  ;  as, 


Maria  es  hermana  de  Juana. 
Pablo  es  hijo  del  juez. 


11* 


I  Mary  is  the  sister  Of  Jane. 
I  Paul  is  the  son  of-the  judge. 


126  OP   THE   ARTICLE. 

237.  The  definite  article  is  not  used  before  nouns  in 
apposition ;  as, 


Pablo,  apostol  de  los  Gentiles. 
EUos  pecaron  al  Seiior,  esperanza 
de  sus  padres. 


Paul,  the  apostle  of  the  Gentiles. 
They  sinned  against-the  Lord,  the 
hope  of  their  fathers. 


(a.)  Sometimes  the  article  is  used  before  nouns  in  apposition,  when 
employed  in  a  definite  or  determinative  sense ;  as, 


En  tiempo  de  Herodes  el  rey. 

El    autor    del   "  Espiritu    de    las 

Leyes,"  el  celebre  Montesquieu, 

dice. 


In  time  of  Herod  the  king. 

The  author  of  the  "Spirit  of 
Laws,"  the  celebrated  Montes- 
quieu, says. 

238.  The  definite  article  is  not  used  before  numerical 

adjectives  when  they  denote  order  or  succession ;  as, 

Tomo  segundo,  p^gina  sexto.  I  Volume  the  second,  page  the  sixth. 

Enrique  octavo.  |  Henry  the  Eighth. 

(a.)  The  cardinal  numbers  (and  not  the  ordinal)  are  generally  used 
when  the  number  expressing  the  order  or  succession  exceeds  nine  ;  thus, 
Carlos  doce,  "Charles  the  Tenth"  (literally  "Charles  Ten''),  and  not 
Carlos  diwdedmo;  tomo  trece,  "volume  thirteen,"  and  not  tomo  decimo- 
tercio,  "  volume  thirteenth." 

239.  The  titles  of  books,  essays,  chapters  or  extracts, 
and  the  names  of  periodicals^  do  not  generally  take  the 
definite  article  before  them  (except  when  spoken  of ) ;  as, 
Historia  de  Espana.  1  The  History  of  Spain. 

Gaceta  de  Londres.  |  The  London  Gazette. 

240.  The  definite  article  is  not  used  before  the  word  casa  (house)  when 
it  means  home,  nor  before  nouns  or  adjectives  employed  adverbially  ;  as, 
Estd  en  casa.  I  He  is  at  home  (or  in  the  house). 

En  verdad.    En  oculto.  |  Truly.     Secretly. 

OMISSION    OF    THE    INDEFINITE    ARTICLE. 

241.  The  indefinite  article  is  omitted  in  some  cases  in 
Spanish  in  which  it  would  not  be  in  English,  as  in  the  fol- 
lowing cases. 

242.  When  some  portion  of  a  thing  only  is  meant,  and 
when  the  adverb  no  is  used  in  the  sense  of  "  not  a  "  (that 
is,  "  not  any^^^  or  "  no  "),  the  indefinite  article  is  not  gener- 
ally used ;  as, 


OF   THE   ARTICLE. 


127 


Tiene  calentura. 
£lla  tiene  id^a  de  comer. 
Juan  hace  mido. 
El  es  de  g^nio  benigno. 
Ella  no  tiene  marido. 
Jorge  no  tiene  flauto. 
No  tenemos  cochero. 
No  tengo  piano. 


He  has  a  fever.  \ 

She  has  an  idea  of  eating  (to  eat). 
John  makes  a  noise. 
He  is  of  a  benign  disposition, 
She  has  not  a  husband. 
George  has  not  a  flute. 
We-have  not  a  coachman. 
I-have  not  a  (tio)  piano. 

'  In  these  cases  is  meant  some  fever,  some  idea,  some  noise,  and 
some  portion  of  a.  benign  disposition  ;  and  the  article  is  not  used  in  Span- 
ish. 

243.  The  indefinite  article  is  not  used  before  two  nouns, 
one  of  which,  being  connected  by  a  verb  to  the  other, 
shows  the  nation,  relationship,  rank,  office,  profession  or 
vocation  of  the  latter  ;  as, 


Juan  es  Frances. 
Senor  Kent  es  juez. 
Carlos  ee  impresor. 
Hallo  en  ^1  padre  y  madre. 


John  is  a  Frenchman. 
Mr.  Kent  is  a  judge. 
Charles  is  a  printer. 
He-found  in  him  a  father  and  a 
mother. 

244.  The  indefinite  article  is  not  used  before  a  noun  in 
apposition  with  another  ;  as, 

Esteban,  hombre  Ueno  de  fe.  '  |  Stephen,  a  man  full  of  faith. 

245.  The  indefinite  article  is  not  used  in  the  title  of  a 
book,  chapter,  or  essay ;  as, 

Coleccion  de  los  mejores  Autores  I  A  Selection  of  the  best  Spanish 
Espaiioles.  I      Authors. 

246.  The  indefinite  article  is  not  used  before  a  noun  in 
an  ejaculatory  phrase  ;  as, 

\  Que  idea !     i  Q,ue  desgrdcia !  |  What  an  idea !   What  a  misfortune ! 

247.  The  indefinite  article  is  not  used  between  an  ad.- , 
jective  and  its  noun  ;  as. 


Medio  peso. 
Tan  hermosa  hija. 
En  tal  tiempo. 


Half  a  dollar. 

So  beautiful  a  daughter. 

In  such  a  time. 


248.  The  indefinite  article  is  not  used  before  the  words  medio,  a  half; 
rt*^  or  ciento,  a  hundred ;  and  mil,  a  thousand ;  as, 


(28  OF    THE    ARTICLE. 


Tres  tiios  y  m^dio. 
Cien  hombres. 
Dia  y  m^dio. 


Three  years  and  a  half. 
A  hundred  men. 
A  day  and  a  half. 


249.  The  indefinite  article  is  not  used  after  algo,  something,  or  nada^ 
nothing,  followed  by  the  preposition  de ;  as, 

Pedro  tiene  algo  de  poeta.  |  Peter  is  something  of  a  poet. 

OTHER    USES    AND    OMISSIONS    OF    ARTICLES. 

250.  The  indefinite  article  can  be  used  before  (but  not  after)  tal^ 
'•'  such ;"  aSj 

Tenemoswn  tal  Pontifice.  |  We-have  a  such  High-Priest. 

25L  The  infinitive  mood,  being  used  in  Spanish  as  a  noun  or  with  a 
preposition  before  it,  in  the  same  manner  that  the  present  participle  is  in 
English,  can  take  the  masculine  definite  article  before  it ;  as, 

El  murmurar  de  las  fuentes,  I  The  murmuring  of  the  fountains. 

Al  ver  el  arbol.  I  On  seeing  the  tree. 

252.  The  definite  article  is  used  before  the  adverbs  Tnas^  "  more," 
and  menos,  "less,"  to  express  the  superlative  degree  of  comparison 
(see  109) ;  as, 

Maria  es  la  mas  hermosa  de  las  I  Mary  is  the  most  beautiful  of  the 
mugeres.  I      women. 

253.  The  article  is  generally  to  be  repeated  before  nouns  which  imme- 
diately follow  each  other,  especially  if  they  do  not  agree  in  gender ;  as, 

La  prud^ncia  y  el  valor  del  rey.         I  The  prudence  and  the  valor  of-the 

I  king, 
(a.)  The  learner  will  find  many  exceptions  to  the  above  rule  in  the 
best  Spanish  writers.  The  article  must  always  be  repeated  in  such 
cases  when  each  noun  is  designed  to  be  emphatic.  When  the  word 
todo,  "  all,"  sums  up  the  several  nouns,  the  article  is  not  generally  used 
before  any  of  the  nouns ;  as,  Espanoles,  Franceses,  Ingleses,  y  America- 
ncs^  todos  son  mortales^  "  Spaniards,  Frenchmen,  Englishmen,  and 
Americans,  all  are  mortal." 

254.  The  article  is  omitted  in  Spanish,  as  in  English,  before  nouns 
taken  in  a  partitive  sense ;  as. 

El  carpintero  tiene  dinero.  j  The  carpenter  has  money. 

(a.)  In  the  above  example,  it  is  meant  that  "  the  carpenter  has  a  por- 
tion of  money,"  or  some  money.  When  the  word  some  is  to  be  expressed, 
alguno  in  the  singular,  and  cdgunos  or  unos  in  the  plural,  is  use«i ;  as, 
algun  idia.  "  some  idea ;"  alguna  caverna,  "  some  cavern ;"  algunos 
libros,  "  some  books ;"  unos  senoras,  "  some  ladies." 


OF   THE   NOUN.  l^J 

(6.)  Before  a  singular  noun,  denoting  something  to  eat  or  drink,  the 
word  some  is  expressed  in  Spanish  by  un  poco  de,  "a  little  of;"  as,  dime 
unpoco  de  leche^  "give  me  some  milk." 

(c.)  When  in  English  some  or  any  is  used  before  a  singular  noun  in  an 
interrogative  or  negative  sentence,  in  Spanish  it  is  usually  omitted, 
especially  before  nouns  meaning  something  to  eat  or  drink ;  as,  i  toma 
vmd.  aziicar?  "  do  you  take  any  sugar?  itiene  vmd.  iazasi  "have  you 
any  cups  7"  i  time  vmd.  algunos  platillos  ?  "  have  you  any  saucers  ?"  no 
iengo  JlaiUat  "I-havenot  any  flute;"  no  iiene  hacha^  "he-has  not  any 
axe." 


OF  THE   NOUN. 

AUGMENT  ATI  VES,     DIMINUTIVES,     AND     COMMON     TITLES     OP 
RESPECT. 

255.  Augmentative  nouns  are  such  as  are  increased,  in 
the  extent  of  their  signification,  by  the  terminations  on, 
ona,  azo^  aza^  ote ;  thus  the  words  daga^  dagger ;  cuchara^ 
spoon  ;  fraile^  friar  ;  gato^  cat ;  manga^  sleeve  ;  muger^  wo- 
man ;  frente^  forehead ;  can  be  rendered  augmentative ; 
as,  dagon^  large  dagger ;  cucharon^  large  spoon,  i,  e.  a  ladle  ; 
frailorij  large  friar ;  gatazo^  large  cat ;  mangote^  large 
sleeve  ;  mugerona^  large  woman  ;  frentaza^  broad  forehead. 

256.  Diminutive  nouns  are  such  as  are  decreased,  in  the 
signification  of  their  primitives,  by  the  terminations  ico. 
ica^  ejo,  eja,  ito,  ita,  eto,  eta^  illo,  illa^  uelo,  uela  ;  thus,  fraile^ 
friar ;  capillaj  chapel ;  cuchara,  spoon ;  batel,  boat ;  can  be 
rendered  diminutive  ;  a.s,  frailecico,  frailecito^  frailezuelo,  a 
little  friar ;  capilleja,  capillila^  capiUeta^  small  chapel ;  cu- 
charica,  cucharita,  cuchareta,  cucharillo,  small  spoon  ;  bateli- 
CO,  batelejoj  hatelito,  hatelillo,  little  boat.  The  terminations 
uelo  generally,  and  illo  also  sometimes,  express  contempt ; 
as  hombre,  man ;  hombrezuelo  or  hombrecillo^  an  insignificant 
or  contemptible  little  fellow. 

(a.)  Adjectives  are  also  frequently  found  used  in  a  diminutive  sense ; 
as,  poco^  little ;  poquUlo,  poquitico,  poquito,  very  little. 

257.  There  is  also  a  kind  of  nouns  composed  of  the  name  of  some 
Instrument  or  object,  and  one  of  the  terminations  ojzo,  aza,  ada^  the 


130  OF   THE   NOUN. 

compound  word  including  in  its  meaning  both  the  instrument  and  some 
effect  produced  by  it ;  as,  dardo,  a  dart ;  dardada,  a  blow  given  with  a 
dart ;  cuchara,  a  spoon,  cucharazo,  a  blow  with  a  spoon ;  pluma,  a  pen, 
plumada,  a  dash  or  stroke  with  a  pen ;  mano,  the  hand,  manotazo  or 
majiotada,  a  blow  with  the  hand ;  aldaba,  a  knocker,  aldabada,  a  rap 
with  the  knocker,  and  alddbazo,  a  violent  rap  with  the  knocker. 

258.  When  a  noun  with  a  singular  termination  denotes 

several  persons  or  things,  it  is  called  a  collective  noun,  or 

noun  of  multitude ;  as,  turba,  a  crowd ;  vacada,  a  drove 

of  cows. 

259.  The  ordinary  titles  of  respect  con-esponding  to  Mr.  or  Esq.  in 
English,  are  in  Spanish  Senor  and  Don ;  and  those  corresponding  to 
Madam  and  Mrs.^  are  Senora  and  Dona;  and  Miss^  Senorita.  Don  and 
Dona  never  take  the  article  before  them,  and  can  be  used  before  Chris- 
tian names  only.  Senor  and  Don  are  often  used  together  before  the 
Christian  name.  The  following  examples  will  show  the  manner  in 
which  these  words  are  used  : 


El  Senor  Blake  es  Americano. 
Don  Diego  Ticknor,  me  alegro  mu- 

cho  de  verle. 
El  Senor  Ray.     La  Senora  Ray. 
El  Senor  Carlos  Mason. 
La  Senorita  Mason. 
Al  Seiior  Don  Diego  Harper. 
Al  Senor  Juan  Harper. 
Los  Senores  Don  Juan  Millon  y 

Don  Pablo  Surret. 
Los  Senores  Riggs  y  Tiggs. 
Da  una  silla  i.  Dona  Sara  Ray. 


Mr.  Blake  is  an  American. 

Mr.  James  Ticknor,  I  am  very  glad 
to  see  you. 

Mr.  Ray.    Mrs.  Ray. 

Master  Charles  Mason. 

Miss  Mason. 

To  James  Harper,  Esq. 

To  Mr.  John  Harper. 

Messrs.  John  Millon  and  Paul  Sur- 
ret. 

Messrs.  Riggs  and  Tiggs. 

Give  a  chair  to  Mrs.  Sarah  Ray. 


(a.)  The  article  is  never  used  before  these  titles  except  when  the  per- 
sons are  spoken  of;  of  course,  when  persons  are  addressed,  the  proper 
title  only  is  used ;  as, 
Buenas  tardes  tenga  vmd.,  Senorita  |  I  wish  you  a  good  evening,  Miss 

Wilson.  I     Wilson. 

(6.)  Senor,  senora,  senorita,  senores,  senoras,  senoritas,  also  are  used 
for  sir,  madam,  miss,  gentlemen,  ladies,  young  ladies,  respectively ;  as, 
Buenos  dias,  seiior.  I  Good  morning,  sir. 

Buenas  noches,  senores.  I  Good  night,  gentlemen. 

(c.)  Senor  and  senora  are  used  as  an  additional  mark  of  respect  before 
the  name  of  a  relative  in  such  cases  as  the  following : 
I  Como  est^  su  senor  hermano  1       I  How  is  your  brother  ? 
I  C6mo  esti  su  senora  madre  ?  I  How  is  your  mother  ? 


OF   THE    ADJECTIVE.  131 

'  A  list  of  nouns  which  form  an  exception  to  the  general  rules  of 
gender  will  be  found  in  the  Appendix,  Number  II. 


The  wise  man. 
The  wise  woman. 
The  wise  men. 
The  wise  women. 


The  deluded  king. 

The  deluded  queen. 

The  deluded  female-servants. 


OF  THE- ADJECTIVE. 

AGREEMENT    AND    POSITION    OF    ADJECTIVES. 

260.  The  adjective  always  must  agree  in  gender  and 
number  with  the  noun  to  which  it  belongs  ;  as, 

El  hombre  s^bio. 
La  muger  sabia. 
Los  hombres  sibios. 
Las  mugeres  s^bias. 

(a.)  Participles  used  as  adjectives  agree  in  gender  and  number  with 
the  noun  to  which  they  belong ;  as, 

El  enganado  rey. 
La  engaiiada  reina. 
Las  enganadas  criadas. 

(6.)  An  adjective  does  not  agree  with  the  gender  of  the  title  of  a  per 
son,  but  with  the  gender  of  the  person  to  whom  it  is  applied ;  as, 

Su  majestad  est^  enfermo.  |  His  majesty  is  ill. 

Su  majestad  estd  eriferma.  1  Her  majesty  is  ill. 

(c.)  Nada,  "  nothing,"  requires  a  masculine  adjective ;  as, 

Nada  hay  llmpio.  1  There-is  nothing  pure. 

{d.)  Two  or  more  nouns  in  the  singular  require  the  adjective  which 
belongs  to  them  to  be  in  the  plural,  and  if  the  nouns  are  of  different 
genders,  the  adjective  must  be  in  the  masculine ;  as, 

Juana  y  Maria  est^n  calladas.  |  Jane  and  Mary  are  silent. 

Lucia  y  Carlos  est^n  cansados.         I  Lucy  and  Charles  are  tired. 

(e.)  When  an  adjective  comes  before  or  after  two  or  more  plural  nouns 
of  different  genders,  it  must  agree  in  gender  with  the  noun  nearest  to 
it;  as, 

Buenos  diccionirios  y  gram^ticas.    I  Good  dictionaries  and  grammars. 
Diccionarios  y  gramaticas  buenas.    1  Good  dictionaries  and  grammars. 

g^"  The  Spanish  Academy  recommends  that,  in  cases  in  which  an 
adjective  is  to  be  used  with  two  or  more  nouns  differing  in  gender  and 
number,  it  would  be  better  to  use  a  different  adjective  of  similar  mean- 
ing for  every  noun,  or  an  adjective  which  does  not  clange  its  ending  to 
form  its  feminine  (see  100)  for  the  plural. 


132  OF   THE   ADJECTIVE. 

261.  The  material  of  which  a  thing  is  made,  as  well  as 
the  country  in  which  it  is  made  or  produced,  are  seldom 
used  as  adjectives,  but  as  a  noun  preceded  by  the  preposi- 
tion de ;  thus. 


Hoja  de  plata. 
Paiio  de  laiia. 
Cueros  de  M^jico. 
Cerveza  de  L6ndres. 


Silver  leaf. 
Woolen  cloth. 
Mexican  hides. 
London  beer. 


262.  The  profession  or  dignity  of  a  person  may  be 
qualified  by  an  adjective  derived  from  the  name  of  a 
nation,  or  by  the  name  of  the  nation  preceded  by  the  pre- 
position, as  above ;  thus, 

General  Mejicano.  I  Mexican  General. 

General  de  Espaiia.  I  Spanish  General  (general  of  Spain). 

(a.)  The  title  of  the  chief  ruler  of  a  country  is  not  qualified  by  an  ad- 
jective expressing  the  nation,  but  by  the  name  of  the  country,  preceded 
by  the  preposition  j  as, 

El  rey  de  Espafia.  The  king  of  Spain. 

La  reina  de  Inglaterra.  The  queen  of  England. 

El  presidente  de  los  Estados-Unidos.    The  president  of  the  United  States. 

263.  Adjectives  of  both  numbers  and  genders  are  often 
used  as  nouns,  being  in  such  cases  preceded  by  the  arti- 
cle ;  as. 


Un  rico.    Una  rica. 
Los  ricos.    Las  ricas. 
Los  doctos. 


A  rich  (man).    A  rich  (woman). 
This  rich  (men).  The  rich  (women). 
The  learned. 


(a.)  The  neuter  article  (as  it  is  called)  Zo,  precedes  adjec- 
tives in  the  singular  number,  used  as  nouns,  when  taken 
in  a  general  sense,  without  reference  to  either  gender  ;  as, 

Lo  escrito.  The  written,  i.  e.   that  which  is 

written. 

Lo  malo.  The  bad,  i.  e,  that  which  is  bad. 

Lo  siguente.  The  following,  i.  e.  that  which  fol- 

lows. 

264,  Adjectives   and   participial    adjectives   are   much 

oftener  placed  after  the  noun  to  which  they  belong  than 

before  it ;  as, 


OF   THE   ADJECTIVE.  133 

Hombre  s^bio.  A  wise  man. 

Furor  portico.       "  Poetical  fury. 

Gu^rdia  avanzada.  Advanced  guard. 

(a.)  In  many  cases  it  is  left  entirely  to  the  taste  of  the  writer  to  place 
the  adjective  before  or  after  the  noun  to  which  it  belongs.  But  cardinal 
numbers,  adjectives  expressing  some  inherent  or  peculiar  quality,  habit, 
or  practice  of  the  noun  to  which  they  belong,  and  adjectives  employed 
as  particular  epithets  with  a  proper  name,  are  generally  placed  before  the 
noun :  so  likewise  adjectives  accented  on  the  antepenult ;  as, 

A  pleasant  coolness. 
Crystaline  water. 
The  white  snow. 
The  timid  sheep. 
The  ambitious  Jefferson. 


Una  dulce  frescura. 
Cristalina  ^gua. 
La  blanca  nieve. 
La  tlmida  oveja. 
El  ambicioso  Jefferson. 


^p*  The  above  rule  is  liable  to  many  exceptions.  Indeed,  no  certain 
rules  can  be  given  for  the  position  of  adjectives.  Attention  on  the  part 
of  the  pupil  to  the  practice  of  the  best  Castilian  writers  will  prove  the 
best  means  of  teaching  him  the  most  proper  arrangement  for  adjec- 
tives.* 

(6.)  Tanio^  as  much;  cuanto,  so  much;  mucho,  much;  todOj  all;  pocOy 
little ;  are  always  placed  before  the  noun. 

(c.)  In  some  few  cases  the  same  adjective  has  a  different  meaning, 
according  as  it  is  placed  before  or  after  the  noun ;  as, 

Cierta  seiiora.  I  A  certain  lady. 

Cuenta  cit^ta.  1  A  true  (certain)  narrative. 

COMPARATIVES    AND    SUPERLATIVES,  ETC. 

265.  There  are  some  irregular  comparatives ;  as,  mayor^  greatei , 
mejorj  better ;  tnenor,  smaller ;  peor^  worse. 

(a.)  As  the  superlative-relative  is  formed  by  placing  the  article  before 
the  comparative,  of  course  el  mayor  means  "  the  greatest ;"  el  mejor, 
"  the  best ;"  el  menor,  "  the  least ;"  elpeor,  '•  the  worst." 

266.  There  are  some  irregular  superlatives;  as,  mdximo,  greatest; 
Optimo,  best ;  minima,  least ;  pesimo,  worst ;  injimo,  lowest. 

(a.)  There  are  some  superlatives  in  tsimo  not  regularly  formed ;  as, 
hontsimo,  very  good ;  7iocisimx>,  very  new ;  fortisimo,  very  strong ;  Jidel~ 
tsimo,  very  faithful ;  sapienttsimo,  very  wise ;  these  being  the  superlatives 
of  the  adjectives  6i4cno,  nuevo,fuerte,Jlel,  sdbio. 

(b.)  There  are  a  few  superlatives  otherwise  irregular ;  as,  pauperrimo, 

*  The  adjective  is  sometimes  used  after  the  noun  in  English ;  as,  an 
account  current;  the  tie  matrimonial;  life  everlasting;  a  noun  common  • 
a  verb  active  ;  page  thirtieth. 

12 


134  OF    THE   ADJECTIVE. 

very  poor;  miserrimo,  very  miserable;  integerrimo,  very  honest;  cele- 
berrimOy  very  celebrated;  saluberrimo,  very  salubrious;  liberrimo,  very 
free. 

(c.)  The  superlative  of  the  above  adjectives  can  also  be  formed  with 
muy ;  as,  muy  grande,  very  great ;  muy  pobre^  very  poor ;  muy  bueno, 
very  good,  etc.  And  such  as  do  not  already  end  in  tsimo  or  errimo,  can 
have  their  regular  form  in  tsimo ;  as,  maltsimoy  very  bad ;  poqmsimOy 
very  small,  etc. 

267.  With  poLtical  or  other  titles  of  dignity,  muy  before  an  adjective 
expresses  somewhat  less  than  the  termination  zsiTTw  affixed  to  it ;  thus, 
muy  ilustrey  very  illustrious,  is  less  than  ilustrisimo^  most  illustrious. 

268.  When  a  superlative  relative  follows  the  noun  to  which  it  refers 
It  is  sufficient  that  the  article  be  used  before  the  noun,  and  not  repeated 
before  the  superlative ;  as, 

Los  Catalanes  son  los  pueblos  mas  I  The    Catalanians    are    the   people 
industriosos  de  Espana.  I     most  industrious  of  Spain. 

1^*  In  English  we  should  render  the  latter  clause  of  the  above  exam- 
ple, "the  most  industrious  people  in  Spain." 

269.  One  noun  can  be  compared  with  another  in  the  same  manner  as 
adjectives;  as, 

Juan  es  mas  niiio  que  su  nieto.         I  John  is  more  {of  a)  child  than  his 

I      grandson. 

270.  In  forming  a  comparison,  in  affirmative  sentences,  de  is  used 
instead  of  que  before  an  adjective  of  quantity  or  number,  or  before  the 
pronouns  what  or  that  whichy  expressed  or  understood ;  as. 

Mi  hijo  tiene  mas  de  seis  anos.  I  My  son  is  more  than  six  years  old. 
Juan  tiene  mas  de  lo  que  necesita.    I  John  has  more  than  what  he  needs. 

1^*  These  sentences  rendered  literally  would  be,  "  my  son  has  more 
of  six  years ;"  and  "John  has  more  of  what  he  needs." 

(a.)  If  the  sentence  be  negative,  de  or  que  may  either  of  them  be  used 
before  an  adjective  of  quantity  or  number,  or  the  pronouns  what  or  that 
which;  as. 
Mi  hijo  no  tiene  ma&  que  (or  de)  \  My  son  is  not  more  than  six  years 

seis  anos.  I      old. 

271.  When  the  adjective  is  placed  after  a  proper  name,  as  a  distin- 
guishing epithet,  such  as  " Tarquin  the  Proud"  the  article  precedes  it 
in  Spanish  as  in  English ;  as, 

Alexandro  el  Magno.  I  Alexander  the  Great. 

Guzman  el  Bueno.  I  Guzman  the  Good. 

(a.)  Numeral  adjectives  of  order  form  an  exception  to  the  above 
rule;  as, 

Carlos  Doce.  |  Charles  the  twelfth. 

Francisco  Primero.  I  Francis  the  first 


OP   THE    ADJECTIVE. 


135 


*272.  The  preposition  de  is  generally  used  after  an  adjective  or  partici- 
ple which  is  followed  by  a  noun  expressive  of  the  cause,  manner,  means, 
or  instrument,  and  also  after  adjectives  denoting  distance ;  as. 


Agudo  de  ingenio. 

Apurado  de  medios. 

Ageno  de  verdad.    Bajo  de  cuerpo. 

Boto  de  punto. 

Curtido  del  sol. 

Dotado  de  ci^ncia. 

Escaso  de  medios. 

Impelido  de  la  necessidad. 

Molido  de  andar. 

Sordo  de  un  oido.    Palido  de  miedo. 

Defectos  comunes  de  su  juventud. 

Ancho  de  boca. 

Angosto  de  manga. 

Blanco  de  cutis. 

Palido  de  semblante. 
Aprobado  de  cirujano. 


Sharp  in  intellect. 

Exhausted  in  means. 

Foreign  to  truth.    Low  in  stature. 

Blunt  at  the  point. 

Tanned  hy  the  sun. 

Endowed  with  learning. 

Limited  in  means. 

Impelled  hy  necessity. 

Fatigued  with  walking. 

Deaf  with  one  ear.    Pale  with  fear. 

Faults  common  to  his  youth. 

Wide  in  the  mouth  (wide-mouthed). 

Narrow  in  the  sleeve  (narrow- 
sleeved). 

White  in  skin  (white-complexion- 
ed). 

Pale  in  the  face  (pale-faced). 

Approved  as  a  surgeon. 


(a.)  The  preposition  in  after  a  superlative  is  to  be  rendered  into  Span- 
ish by  de  /  as, 

Los  mas  s^bios  hombres  del  mun-  J  The  wisest  men  in  the  world, 
do.  I 

273.  TantOf  and  not  tan^  is  used  before  a  noun  in  comparisons  of 
equality  (see  104)  j  as, 

Maria  tiene  tanta  prud^ncia  como  I  Mary  has  as  much   prudence  as 
Juana.  Jane. 

1^"  For  the  idiomatic  use  of  some  prepositions  after  certain  adjec 
tives,  see  Appendix,  Number  III. 


LIST    OF   NUMERALS. 

274.  The  numeral  adjectives  are  divided  into  cardinal 
and  ordinal.  The  cardinal  numerals  express  numbers ; 
as,  one  J  two^  three ;  and  the  ordinal  numerals  express  order 
or  rank  ;  SiS^  first,  second,  third. 

(a.)  There  are  also  some  numeral  nouns,  such  as  the  collective  nuin 
bers,  una  docena,  a  dozen ;  una  veintena^  a  score ;  and  the  fractional 
numbers,  la  mitadj  the  half;  un  cuartoy  a  fourth. 


136 


OP  THE   ADJECTIVE. 


275.  The  following  is  a  list  of  the  cardinal  and  ordinal 
numeral  adjectives  : 


CARDINAL   NUMBERS. 

ORDINAL  NUMBERS. 

Uno,  una, 

One. 

Primero,                 First. 

Dos, 

Two. 

Segundo,                Second. 

Tres, 

Three. 

Tercero,                  Third. 

Cuatro, 

Four. 

Cuarto,                   Fourth. 

Cinco, 

mve. 

auinto.                   Fifth. 

Seis, 

Six. 

Sexto,  or,  sesto,     Sixth. 

Siete, 

Seven. 

Septimo,                Seventh. 

jOcho, 

Eight. 

Octavo,                   Eighth. 

.Nueve, 

Nine. 

Noveno,  or,  Nono^Ninth.                  ' 

Diez, 

Ten. 

D^cimo,                  Tenth.                  \ 

Once, 

Eleven. 

Undecimo,             Eleventh. 

Doce, 

Twelve. 

Duodecimo,            Twelfth. 

Trece, 

Thirteen. 

Decimo  t^rcio.       Thirteenth. 

Catorce, 

Fourteen. 

Decimo  cuarto.      Fourteenth.           1 

Gluince, 

Fifteen. 

Decimo  quinto.      Fifteenth. 

Diez  y  seis. 

Sixteen. 

Decimo  sesto,        Sixteenth. 

It  Diez  y  siete, 

Seventeen. 

Decimo  septimo.  Seventeenth.          | 

Diez  y  ocho, 

Eighteen. 

Decimo  octavo.     Eighteenth.          J 

Diez  y  nueve, 

Nineteen. 

Decimo  nono.        Nineteenth. 

Veinte, 

Twenty. 

Vig^simo,               Twentieth.           ij 

Veinte  y  uno,.* 

Twenty-one. 

Vig^simo  primo,    Tweniy-first.       i' 

Veinte  y  dos. 

Twenty-two. 

Vig^simo  segundo  Twenty- second. 

Veinte  y  tres. 

Twenty-three. 

Vigesimo  t^rcio.    Twenty-third. 

Veinte  y  cuatro 

,  Twenty-four. 

Vig^simo  cuarto.   Twenty-fourth.    . 

Veinte  y  cinco. 

Twenty-Jive. 

Vigesimo  quinto,  Twenty-fifth. 

Veinte  y  seis. 

Twenty-six. 

Vigesimo  sesto,      Twenty-sixth.       ; 

Veinte  y  siete, 

Twenty-seven. 

Vigesimo  septimo  Twenty-seventh. 

Veinte  y  ocho. 

Twenty-eight. 

Vigesimo  octavo,   Twenty-eighth. 

Veinte  y  nueve, 

Twenty-nine. 

Vigesimo  nono.     Twenty-ninth. 

Treinta, 

Thirty. 

Trigesimo,              Thirtieth. 

Cuarenta, 

Forty. 

Cuadrag^simo,      Fortieth.              i 

Cincuenta, 

Fifty. 

Q,uincuagesimo,     Fiftieth. 

Sesenta, 

Sixty. 

Sexagesimo,          Sixtieth. 

Setenta, 

Seventy. 

Septuagesimo,       Seventieth. 

Ochenta, 

Eighty. 

Octogesimo,           Eightieth.              \ 

Noventa, 

Ninety. 

Nonagesimo,         Ninetieth.              'i 

Ciento, 

===== 

A  hundred. 

Cent^simo,          .  Hundredth.          || 

♦  Sometimes  found  written  as  one  word,  as  veintiuno^  veintidos,  etc. 


OF   THE   ADJECTHE. 


137 


p                                —                  : 

CARD^^fAL   NUMBERS. 

ORDINAL   NUMBERS. 

Docientos, 

Two  hundred. 

Docent^simo,         Tiro  hundredth. 

Trecientos, 

Three  hundred. 

Trecentesimo,        Three  hundredth 

Cuatrocientos, 

Four  hundred. 

Cuadrag^ntesimo, i^oitr  hundredth. 

Q.uinientos, 

Five  hundred. 

Quingentesimo,     Five  hundredth. 

!  Seiscientos, 

Six  hundred. 

Sexentesimo,         Six  hundredth. 

Setecientos, 

Seven  hundred. 

Septengentesimo,  Seven  hundredth. 

Ochocientos, 

Eight  hundred. 

Octogentesimo,      Eight  hundredth. 

Novecientos, 

Nine  hundred. 

Nonagentesimo,    Nine  hundredth. 

Mil, 

A  Thousand. 

Milesimo,                Thousandth. 

276.  The  cardinal  numbers  for  eleven  hundred,  twelve  hundred,  two 
thousand,  three  thousand,  etc.,  are  mil  y  ciento,  mil  y  docientos^  dos  mil^ 
tres  mil;  for  a  hundred  thousand,  two  hundred  thousand,  etc.,  den  mil, 
docientos  mil;  for  a  million,  two  millions,  etc.,  un  millon,  dos  millones. 
Millon  is  not  an  adjective,  but  a  noun. 

277.  Una  is  declinable,  changing  the  final  o  into  a  whenever  it  refers 
to  a  feminine  noun.  All  of  the  cardinal  numbers  ending  in  ientos  form 
their  feminine  in  as ;  as,  docientas  mugeres,  two  hundred  women.  The 
rest  are  undeclinable. 

(a.)  All  the  ordinal  numbers  change  the  last  o  into  a  to  form  their 
feminine. 

(6.)  Uno  drops  the  last  letter  when  it  comes  before  a  noun.    (See  101.) 

(c.)  Ciento  drops  its  last  syllable  when  it  comes  immediately  before  a 
noun  (see  101,  a),  but  not  when  any  other  word  comes  between  it  and 
the  noun ;  thus,  cien  soldados,  a  hundred  soldiers  ;  and  ciento  y  tres  sol- 
dados,  a  hundred  and  three  soldiers. 

(d.)  Primero  and  tercero,  among  the  ordinals,  drop  the  final  o  before  a 
noun.    (See  101.) 

278.  The  cardinal  numbers  (and  not  the  ordinal)  are  generally  used  in 
Spanish  to  express  order  or  rank,  when  the  number  exceeds  nine ;  when 
under  nine,  the  ordinals  are  employed ;  thus. 


Enrique  Octavo. 
Carlos  Doce. 
Tomo  diez  y  ocho. 
P^gina  septima. 


Henry  Eighth  (the  Eighth). 
Charles  Twelve  (the  Twelfth). 
Volume  eighteen  (the  eighteenth). 
Page  seventh  (the  seventh). 


279.  In  mentioning  the  days  of  the  month,  the  Spanish  use  the  cardi- 
nal adjectives  and  not  the  ordinal,  as  in  English,  except  in  the  first  day, 
in  which  primero  and  not  un  is  used ;  thus. 


El  primero  de  Enero. 
El  dos  de  Febrero. 
El  tres  de  Marzo. 
El  diez  y  seis  de  Mayo. 


12 


The  first  of  January. 
The  two  (second)  of  February. 
The  three  (third)  of  March. 
The  sixteen  (sixteenth)  of  May 


OF    THE    PRONOUN. 


(a.)  In  dates  where  figures  are  used,  the  article  is  omitted,  and  except 
the  first  day  of  a  month,  the  cardinal  numbers  are  used ;  as, 

Madrid,  June  1st,  1845. 


Madrid,  1°  de  Jiinio  de  1845. 
Paris,  4  de  Julio  de  1846. 
L6ndi\3s,  27  de  Agosto  de  1847. 


Paris,  July  4th,  1846. 
London,  August  27th,  1847. 


280.  The  hour  of  the  day  is  expressed  by  the  ordinal  numbers  preced- 
ed by  the  definite  article,  which  must  in  such  a  case  agree  with  horas^ 
hours,  understood  (unless  the  hour  be  one,  when  it  agrees  with  the  sin- 
gular hora)  ;  thus, 


What  o'clock  is  it  7 

It  is  one  o'clock. 

It  is  two  o'clock. 

It  is  ten. 

It  is  ten  minutes  before  three. 

It  is  twenty  minutes  after  eight. 
1^"  Literally,  the  above  expressions  mean,  "  What  hour  is  it 7"     "It 
is  the  one" — "  they  are  the  two "—"  they  are  the  ten" — "they  are  the 
three  less  ten  minutes" — "  they  are  the  eight  and  twenty  minutes." 

281.  In  speaking  of  the  age  of  persons  or  things,  the  verb  tener  is  em- 
ployed in  Spanish ;  as, 


I  Q,ue  hora  es  1 

Es  la  una. 

Son  las  dos. 

Son  las  diez. 

Son  las  tres  menos  diez  minutos. 

Son  las  ocho  y  veinte  minutos. 


Charles  is  twelve  years  old. 

Mr.  Tournay  is  not  fifty  years  of 


Carlos  tiene  doce  anos. 

El  Seiior  Tournay  no  tiene  cin- 

cuenta  anos. 

1^*  Literally,  "Charles  has  twelve  years,"  and  "Mr.  Tournay  has 
not  fifty  years." 

282.  In  Spanish  it  is  not  said,  in  expressing  measurement,  "  twenty 
feet  high,"   or   "  ten  feet  long ;"  but  "  twenty  feet  of  high,"  or   "  of 
height,"  "  ten  feet  of  long,"  or  "  of  length ;"  as. 
La  casa   tenia   sesenta   codos  de  i  The  house  was  (had)  sixty  cubits 

largo,  y  veinte  codos  de  ancho,  y        long,  and  twenty  cubits  wide,  and 

treinta  codos  de  altura.  1     thirty  cubits  in  height. 

(a.)  In  comparative  sentences,  to  express  difference,  in  English  it  may 
be  said,  "she  is  taller  than  her  sister  hy  the  whole  head."  In  Spanish, 
this  sentence  would  be,  "  ella  es  mas  alta  que  su  hermana  de  toda  la  ca- 
beza"  i.  e.  "  she  is  more  tall  than  her  sister  of  all  tha  head." 


OF  THE  PRONOUN. 

PERSONAL    PRONOUNS. 


283.    The    personal  pronouns  of  the  nominative    case, 
when  used,  may  come  either  before   or  after  the  verb, 


OF    THE    PRONOUN.  139 

except  the  latter  be  in  the  imperative  mood,  or  the  sen- 
tence be  interrogative,  in  which  cases  the  nominative  gen- 
erally follows  the  verb  ;  as,  viva  ella,  "  may  she  live ;"  iha 
hablado  el  ?  "  has  he  spoken  ?" 

(a.)  As  the  verb-ending  generally  indicates  of  itself  the  person  and 
number  that  its  nominative  must  be,  the  nominative  personal  pronouns 
are  seldom  expressed  in  Spanish,  unless  when  necessary  to  distinguish 
the  persons  or  genders,  or  to  be  emphatic,  or  when  a  relative  pronoun  is 
to  follow ;  as. 


El  y  ella  son  prudentes. 

Nosotros  seramos  castigados,  y  no 

vosotros. 
El  que  tiene  dinero,  tiene  cuidados. 


He  and  she  are  prudent. 

We    shall-be    punished,    and    not 

you. 
He  who  has  money,  has  cares. 


284.  The  pronoun  se  "  oneself,"  is  sometimes  used  with  a  reflective  or 
reciprocal  verb  (see  136  and  169),  and  then  it  is  to  be  rendered  in  English 
by  himself,  herself,  itself,  themselves,  or  one  another,  as  the  sense  may 
require;  as, 

Ellas  se  aman.  I  They  love  themselves  (or,  they  love 

I      one  another). 
(a.)  The  first  objective  case  of  all  the  personal  pronouns  is  also  em- 
ployed with  reflective  or  reciprocal  verbs ;  as. 


Nosotros  nos  aman. 

Yo  me  alabo. 

Yo  no  quero  alabarme. 


We  love  ourselves  (or,  each  other), 

I  praise  myself 

I  wish  not  to-praise  myself. 


(b.)  The  pronoun  se  is  also  frequently  used  with  a  verb  in  the  active 
voice,  of  the  third  person  singular  or  plural,  to  express  the  passive  voice 
(see  173) ;  as, 

La  casa  se  quemo.  I  The  house  was  burned  (the  house 

I      burnt  itself). 

(c.)  The  first- objective  case  of  all  the  personal  pronouns  is  sometimes 
used  with  a  reflective  verb  in  a  passive  sense ;  as, 

Yo  me  admiro.  I  am  surprised  (I  surprise  myself). 

Vosotros  OS  alegrais.  You  are  rejoiced  (you  rejoice  your' 

selves). 

(d.)  Strictly  speaking,  se  can  not  be  used  in  the  nominative  case,  and 
should  therefore  always  be  considered  as  governed  by  a  verb.  Thus,  in 
such  sentences  as  se  dice,  se  cree,  sepiensa,  the  literal  rendering  is,  "it- 
says  itself,"  " it-beli'='ves  itself,"  "it-thinks  itself"  or  (see  284,  b)  "it  is 
said,"  "it  is  believed,"  "it  is  thought."  Still,  in  translating,  it  is  often 
more  conv  'niert  to  imagine  se  as  an  indefinite  pronoun  of  rii    nomina* 


140  OF   THE   PRONOUN, 

live  case,  used  in  the  sense  of  they  ;  as,  se  dice,  "  they  say,"  that  is,  ^*peo 
pie  say;"  sejnensa,  "they  think." 

(c.)  Se  and  other  pronouns  of  the  first-objective  case  are  often  used  in 
opanish  with  neuter  and  active-intransitive  verbs  reflectively,  and  in 
.juch  cases  seem  redundant  in  English  ;  as, 

Thence  he-passed  {himself)  to  the 
city. 


De  alii  se  paso  i  la  ciudad. 

Yo  me  arrepiento.     Se  arrepiente. 


I  repent  (myself).  He-repents  {him- 
self). 

{/,)  Se  is  sometimes  used  in  the  sense  of  to-him,  to-her,  to-them,  to-you 
{L  c.  to  your  worship).  This  use  of  se  takes  place  only  when  another 
personal  pronoun  of  the  objective  case  and  of  the  third  person  immedi- 
ately follows  it ;  as, 

Tengo  una  cuchara ;  6-eladar^.*       I  I-have  a  spoon;   I-will-give  it  to- 

I      him. 
{g.)  When,  in  cases  coming  under  the  above  rule,  the  pronoun  se  does 
not  denote  with  clearness  the  number  or  gender  of  the  noun  for  which 
it  is  employed,  the  second-objective  is  also  used ;  as. 


Se  lo  dare  d  ella,  d  ellos,  d  vmd. 
Se  la  mando  dar  d  ellos. 


I-will-give  it  to-her,  to-them,  to-you. 
He-commanded  it  to-be-given  to- 
them,. 

285.  The  first-objective  case  of  the   Spanish  personal 

pronouns  is  very  often  to  be  rendered  in  English  by  the 

preposition  '•'  to  "  and  the  pronoun  ;  as,  to-me,  to-you,  lo-him, 

to-her,  to-them,  etc.  (see    114,  and    114,  Z>),  and  it  is  then 

equivalent  to  the  second-objective,  a  mi,  a  vosotros,  a  el,  a 

ella,  a  ellos,  etc.  ;  and  in  some  cases  some  other  preposition 

than  "^o"  is  used  in   rendering  the  first-objective  into 

English  ;  as, 

John  said  to-me. 

I-ask  it  of 'thee  {or,  from-thee). 


Juan  me  dijo. 
Te  lo  pido. 
Se  lo  agradezco. 
Nos  lo  suplica. 


I-thank  him  for-it. 
He-beseeches  us  for-it. 


(a.)  The  second-objective  with  the  preposition  d  is  not  used,  except 
when  the  same  verb  governs  two  or  more  pronouns  in  the  objective 
case,  or  when  it  is  designed  to  be  distinct  or  particularly  emphatic ;  as, 


Juan  di6  dinero  d  ^1,  d  ella,  y  ^  ti. 

Yo  vl  ^  vosotros  y  i,  ellos. 
Juan  viva,  dijeron  ellos  i.  ella. 


John  gave  money  to  him,  to  her 

and  to  thee. 
I  saw  you  and  them. 
John  lives,  said  they  to  her. 


*  We  can  not  say  le  Ic  darS,  "  I-will-give  it  to-him,"  but  se  la  dari. 


OF   THE   PRONOUN.  141 

(6.)  To  add  more  clearness  or  strength  to  a  sentence,  both  objective 
cases  of  pronouns  are  often  employed ;  the  second-objective  case  then 
being  placed  either  before  the  first-objective  or  else  after  the  verb,  except 
the  first  objective  comes  after  the  verb  (as  in  the  case  of  infinitives, 
gerunds,  and  imperatives;  see  116),  when  the  second-objective  must 
come  after  the  first ;  as. 


A  mi  me  dijeron,  > 
I  a  tni.  5 


They  told  me. 


Me  dijeron  i 

Decirme  d  mt.  To-tell  me. 

Diciendole  d  eUa,  Telling  her. 

Dime  d  mi.  Tell  me. 

(c.)  When  the  sentence  may  contain  a  noun  in  the  objective  case  gov- 
erned by  the  preposition  ^,  a  pronoun  of  the  second-objective  case  is 
often  used  in  Spanish,  and  is  not  to  be  translated  in  English ;  as, 

A  Dios  n^die  U  vio  jamas.  I  God  no-man  saw  Qiim)  ever ;  i.  e. 

I     po-one  ever  saw  God. 

286.  MismOj  meaning  same  or  self,  is  often  used  with  the 
nominative  personal  pronouns  ;  thus,  yo  mismOy  I  myself ; 
nosotros  mismosy  we  ourselves,  etc. ;  and  also  with  the 
second-objective  ;  and  must  always  agree  in  gender  and 
number  with  the  noun  to  which  the  pronoun  refers ;  as, 

I  Q,ue  dices  de  tl  mismo  7  I  What  sayest-thou  of  thyself  7 

La  muger  hablara  por  si  misma.      I  The  woman  will  speak  for  herself. 

(a.)  Mismo  is  often  used  with  nouns  also ;  as,  la  misma  Maria,  "  Mary 
herself;"  los  mismos  soldados,  "the  very  soldiers,"  or,  "the  soldiers 
themselves." 

287.  When  by  the  pronoun  it  is  meant  any  thing  to 
which  we  can  not  apply  a  gender,  ello  is  used.  Its  first- 
objective  lo  is  employed  by  the  same  rule ;  thus  if  it  be 
said,  "he  has  been  told  to  love  his  enemies,  and  he  does 
itj^  the  pronoun  it  refers  to  the  clause  of  the  sentence,  " to 
love  his  encmieSj^  and  of  course  has  no  gender.  In  such  a 
case,  lo  (not  lc  nor  la)  would  be  used. 

(a.)  Lo  is  tised  in  Spanish  for  so  in  English,  when  the  latter  means 
U;  as, 


Vmd.  piensa  que  elld  es  rica,  pero 

no  lo  es. 
Si  h  eg). 
Diego  lo  hace. 


You  think  that  she  is  rich,  but  she- 
is  not  so. 
If  it-be  so. 
James  docs  so* 


142  OF    THE    VERB. 

(6.)  Lio  is  often  used  for  Ze  when  the  latter  refers  to  a  masculine  noun 
and  is  immediately  governed  by  a  verb  (though  this  use  of  lo  is  not 
grammatically  correct) ;  as, 

Espero  que  lo  v^o  en  pcrfecta  salud.  I  I  hope  that  I  see  him  in  perfect 

I     health. 

THE  PECULIAR  USE  OF  OTHER  PRONOUNS. 

288.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  este  and  aqvA  are 
often  used  without  any  noun,  and  in  such  a  case  they  have 
the  sense  of  "  this-onCj^  and  '^ ihat-one^'^  or  " the-one ;"  as, 

r  This-one  is  the-one  of  whom  I 
Este  es  aquel  de  quien  yo  dije.  <      said ;  or, 

I  This  is  he  of  whom  I  said, 
(a.)   Todo  aquel  jue  is  used  in  the  sense  of  ^^ every  one  who;"  as, 
Todo  aquel  que  bebe  de  esta  agua.    [  Every  one  who  drinks  of  this  water 

289.  Quien  often  means  he-who,  she-who  one-who ;  and 
quienes,  they-who ;  as, 


Quien  calla  otorga. 
Maria  fue  quien  lo  dijo. 
Porque  los  ensenaba,  como  quien 
tiene  aiitoridad. 


He-who  is  silent,  consents. 
Mary  was  she-who  said  it. 
For  he-taught  them  as  one-who  has 
authority. 


290.  Such  expressions  as,  "i^  is/,"  "i7  is  thoUj"  "it  is  he,"  "it  is 
she"  "it  is  we"  etc.,  are  rendered  in  Spanish  by  "/  am"  "thou  art" 
"he  is"  "she  is"  "we  are"  etc.;  as, 

Yo  soy.    Ella  es.  I  It  is  I.    It  is  she. 

Ellos  son.    I  Es  vmd.  1  I  It  is  they.    Is  it  you  7 

291.  De  el,  de  eUa^  de  eUo,  de  este,  etc.,  were  anciently  written  del^  deUa^ 
dello,  deste. 

(a.)  De  and  el,  and  d  and  il,  are  contracted  into  del  and  al  when  serv- 
ing as  the  antecedent  of  the  relative  pronoun  que  ;  as, 


Del  que  sigue. 

Pedro  di6  el  libro  al  que  vimos. 


Of-that  which  follows. 
Peter  gave  the  book  to-him  whom 
we  saw. 


OF  THE  VEKB. 

AGREEMENT    OF   THE   VERB   WITH   ITS    SUBJECT. 

292.  The  verb  agrees,  in  number  and  person,  with  its 
subject  or  nominativ  b,  expressed  or  understood  ;  as, 


OF   THE   VERB.  143 


Sol/  general. 

Ella  ama  la  verdad. 

Los  Americanos  aman  las  riquezas. 


I-am  a  general. 

She  loves  the  truth. 

The  Americans  love  riches. 


293.  When  a  verb  has  two  or  more  subjects,  eact  in  the 
singular,  it  is  put  in  the  plural ;  as, 

Mi  padre  y  mi  madre  me  aman.       1  My  father  and  my  mother  love  me. 
Pedro  6  Diego  vendran.*  I  Peter  or  James  will-come. 

294.  When  a  verb  has  two  or  more  subjects  of  different 
persons,  it  is  put  in  the  plural,  and  agrees  with  the  first 
person  in  preference  to  the  other  two  ;  as, 

Mi  hermano  y  yo  estamos  malos.       I  My  brother  and  I  {i.  e.  we)  are  ill. 
Tii  y  yo  estamos  buenos.  I  Thou  and  I  (i.  e.  we)  are  well. 

(a.)  If  the  second  person  should  be  used  with  the  third,  without  any 
first  person,  the  verb  must  be  in  the  second  person  plural ;  as, 

Td  y  ella  estais  buenas.  |  Thou  and  she  (i.  e.  you)  are  well. 

295.  When  a  relative  pronoun  is  the  subject  of  the  verb, 
the  latter  must  agree,  in  person  and  number,  with  the 
noun  or  pronoun  to  which  the  relative  relates  ;  as, 

Yo  soy  que  hablo  contigo.  I  It  is  I  who  speak  with- thee. 

Vosotros  que  sois  s^bios.  I  Ye  who  arc  wise. 

296.  A  collective  noun,  taken  in  a  general  sense,  that 
is,  a  noun  representing  the  whole  of  the  persons  or  things 
mentioned,  requires  the  verb  to  be  of  the  singular  num- 
ber ;  as. 

El  ejercito  de  los  Caldeos  pcr^^id  1  The  army  of  the  Chaldeans  pi/rswerf 
al  rey.  I      the  king. 

(a.)  A  subject  which  is  a  collective  noun,  taken  in  a  par- 
titive sense,  that  is,  representing  a  part  of  the  whole  of  the 
collective  noun,  and  conveying  plurality  of  idea,  requires 
the  verb  to  be  in  the  plural ;  as, 

Parte  creian  lo  que  las  decla,  y  parte  I  Part  belie^edwhat  he-told  them,  and 
no  lo  Cretan.  I      part  believed  it  not. 

*  This  is  different,  as  will  be  perceived,  from  the  ru/fe  in  English  syn 
tax,  which  requires  two  singular  nouns  connected  by  a  disjunctive  con 
junction,  to  have  the  verb  agree  with  them  in  the  s/ngalar  form. 


144  OF   THE    VERB. 

'  This  last  rule  is  not  always  followed  even  by  the  best  Spanish 


authors. 

'     297.  In  cases  in  which  a  verb  appears  to  have  two  subjects,  it  must 
agree  with  that  noun  to  which  it  seems  more  particularly  to  belong ;  as, 

Los  gages  del  pecado  son  muerte.     |  The  wages  of  sin  are  (is)  death. 

USE  OF  THE  MOODS   AND   TENSES   OF  VERBS. 
OF    THE    INFINITIVE,  GERUND,  AND    PARTICIPLE 

298.  The  present  tense  of  the  infinitive  expresses  affir- 
mation in  an  indefinite  manner,  without  reference  to 
number  or  person  ;  as,  decir,  to  say ;  dar,  to  give. 

(a.)  The  infinitive  is  used  in  Spanish  when  in  English 
the  present  participle,  preceded  by  a  preposition,  is  used  ; 
as, 


Vengo  de  comer. 

En  derramar  torrentes  de  sangre. 

Trabaja  sin  cesar. 


I-come  from  dining  (to-dine)  i.  e. 

from  dinner. 
In   spilling   (to-spill)    torrents    of 

blood. 
He-labors    without     ceasing    (to- 

cease). 

(b.)  The  infinitive  is  frequently  used  as  a  verbal  noun 
or  present  participle,  by  placing  the  masculine  definite 
article  before  it  (see  25 1 )  ;  as. 

The  murmuring  (the  to-murmur) 
of  the  fountains. 

At-the  fall  (at-the    to-fall)   of-the 
day. 
El  leer  me  gusta.  '     Reading  (the  to-read)  pleases  me. 

(c.)  The  infinitive  is  often  rendered  in  English  by  the  present  partici- 
ple, when  in  Spanish  it  is  governed  by  another  verb ;  as, 

La  oimos  cantar.  I  We-heard  her  singing  (to- sing). 

Le  vi  correr.  I  1-saw  him  run,  or  running  (to-run). 

299.  In .  Spanish,  the  gerund  is  employed  in  the  sense 
of  the  present  participle  in  English  ;  as, 

Estando  enfermo  el  presidente.  The  president  being  sick. 

Habicndo  conspirado  unos  caballe-    Some  cavaliers  hxvoing  conspired, 
ros. 


El  murTnurar  de  las  fuentes. 
Al  caer  del  dia. 


OP   THE   VERB. 


145 


Queriendo  seguir  dispensdndolos^*    Desiring  to-continue   dispensing- 

planto  ^rboles  frutales.  them,  he-planted  fruitful  trees. 

Maria  esti.  hablando.  Mary  is  speaking. 

(a.)  In  sentences  such  as,  "  charity  is  increased  by  cultivating  it,"  it 
is  aUowed  in  Spanish  to  use  either  the  gerund  without  the  preposition, 
or  the  infinitive  mood  preceded  by  the  preposition  conj  as, 

Nuestros  deberes  se  hacen  agrada-  > 

bles  cumpliendolos ;  or,  1  Our  duties  are  rendered  agreeable 

Nuestros  deberes  se  hacen  agrada-  [     by  performing  them. 

bles  con  cumplirlos.f  J 

(6.)  Instead  of  the  gerund  of  the  past,  the  gerund  of  the  present  is 
sometimes  employed,  preceded  by  the  preposition  en;  as, 
En  oycTido  esto,  sali6  para  Boston.     On  hearing  this,  he  set-out  for  Bos- 

(Or)  ton. 

Habiendo  oido  esto,  sali6  para  B6s-    Having  heard  this,  he  set-out  for 

ton.  Boston. 

(c.)  The  gerund  in  Spanish  is  often  employed  in  a  manner  that  requires 
the  adverb  while  to  be  used  in  translating  it  into  English ;  as, 

El  que  vive  en  deleites,  viviendo  I  He  who  lives  in  pleasures,  while 
est^  muerte.  1      living  is  dead. 

300.  The  past  participle  is  indeclinable  when  used  to 

form  the  compound  tenses  (see  167)  with  the  auxiliary 

verb  haber  ;  as, 

Ella  ha  hablado,  1  She  has  spoken. 

Las  mugeres  han  hablado.  I  The  women  have  spoken, 

(a.)  When  the  past  participle  is  used  with  any  other 
verb  than  haber,  it  is  declinable  ;  as, 


Ella  ha  sido  seducida. 

Mis  caballos  estan  lastimados. 

Mis  hijas  se  hallan  molestadas. 

Mis  hermanas  quedan  satisfechas. 

Ellas  van  saiisfechas. 

Ella  SLuda.  pasmada  de  mis  p^abras. 

Tiene  eseritas  tres  cartas. 
Lleva  eseritas  tres  cartas. 


She  has  been  deceived. 

My  horses  are  injured. 

My  daughters  find  themselves  mo- 
lested. 

My  sisters  remain  satisjied. 

They  go  satisfied. 

She  Wjalks  enraptured  with  my 
words. 

He-has  three  letters  vrritten. 

He-carries  written  three  letters. 

(6.)  These  last  two  examples,  it  will  be  perceived,  require  the  partici- 


'*  See  116. 


13 


t  See  116. 


146  OF   THE    VERB. 

pie  to  agree  with  the  noun  governed  (cartas).  Tener  and  lltvaroxe^  ae 
above,  sometimes  used  as  a  kind  of  auxiliary  verbs,  and  can  always  be 
rendered  by  "have;"  thus  each  of  these  examples  may  be  translated 
"  he-has  written  three  letters." 

(c.)  The  past  participle  is  in  Spanish  used  with  a  noun  or  pronoun  in 
the  case  absolute  ;  thus,  hallado  means  "found"  and  absolutely,  "  being 
found;"  enviado  means  "sent"  and  absolutely,  "being  sent;"  recibido 
means  "received"  and  "being  received."  In  general  the  participle  is 
placed  before  the  noun  of  the  case  absolute,  with  which  it  agrees 
(though  the  rules  of  Spanish  construction  admit  of  its  being  placed 
after  the  noun) ;  as, 

Toniada    Vera-Cruz,    el    General  I  Vera  Cruz    being   taken,   General 
Scott  saliu  para  Jalapa.  I      Scott  set-out  for  Jalapa. 

OF    THE    TENSES    OF    THE    INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

301.  The  present  tense  expresses  an  existing  state  or 
an  action  occurring  at  the  time  in  which  we  are  speaking ; 

as, 

Mi  hermano  escribe.  I  My  brother  writes. 

Estas  doncellas  son  amadas.  I  These  maidens  are  beloved. 

(a.)  The  verb  estar  can  be  used  with  the  gerund  in  Spanish,  as  In 
English  the  verb  to  be  with  the  present  participle ;  as, 

Juan  estd  leyendo.  |  John  is  reading. 

Ellos  estdn  cantando,  I  They  are  singing. 

(6.)  The  verbs  ir  (to  go)  and  venir  (to  come)  do  not  admit  of  the  verb 
tatar  coming  before  their  gerund  as  in  the  above  rule.  Thus  we  can  not 
say  in  Spanish  yo  estoy  yendo  and  yo  estoy  tdniendo,  but  yo  voy  and  yo 
vengo  {"I go"  and  "I come"),  "I  am-going"  and  "I  am-coming." 

302.  The  imperfect  tense  is  used  to  express  what  is 
past,  and,  at  the  same  time,  present,  with  regard  to  some- 
thing else  which  is  past ;  that  is,  it  is  a  past  tense  which 
was  still  present  at  the  time  spokeii  of.  It  may  always  be 
employed  in  Spanish  when  in  English  the  word  "  was " 
can  be  used  with  the  present  participle,  or  "  used  to "  can 
be  employed  with  the  verb,  or  when  we  speak  of  habitual 
actions ;  as. 


Ella  escribta  entonces. 
Seneca  razonaba  bien. 
Cervintes  era  un  escritor  elegante. 


She  was-writiig  then. 
Seneca  reasoricd  well. 
Cervantes  vjos  an  elegant  writer. 


OP   THE    VERB. 


147 


Neron  era  un  lirano. 

Cuando    ful    niiio,   hablaba    como 

niiio. 
Ellos    marchaban    por    las    calles 

cuando  los  vimos. 


Nero  teas  a  tyrant. 

When  I-was  a  child,  l-spokt  as  a 

child. 
They  were-marching  through  the 

streets  when  we-saw  them. 


'  It  is  evident  that  "  Seneca  reasoned  well"  means  "  Seneca  used 
to  reason  (or  was  accustomed  to  reason)  well."  So  "  they  walked  rapidly 
while  she  looked,"  means  "  they  were-walking  rapidly  while  she  icas- 
looking"  and  of  course,  with  this  meaning,  walked  and  lookea  would  be 
put  in  the  imperfect  tense  in  Spanish.  So  "  I  went  to  the  opera  three 
times  a  week  last  summer;  i.  e.  ^^Iwas  in  the  habit  of  going,"  etc. 

303.  The  perfect-definite  tense  shows  the  action  or 
being  affirmed  by  the  verb,  to  be  completed^  at  a  time  of 
which  nothing  more  remains,  often  specified  by  an  ad- 
verb or  some  other  circumstance  expressed  or  under- 
stood ;  as, 

EscribiS  una  carta  ayer. 

Recibio  dos  cartas  la  semana  pasa- 

da. 
El  presidente  no  le  perdono. 
Diego  vivia  cuando  le  vi. 
Luego  que  Juan  se  lo  dijo^  llora- 

ron. 


He-wrote  a  letter  yesterday. 
He-received  two  letters  last  week. 

The  president  pardoned  him  not. 
James  was-living  when  I-saw  him. 
As  soon  as  John  told  it  to-them, 
they  xcept. 

(a.)  As  both  the  imperfect  and  perfect-definite  in  Spanish  are  included 
in  English  in  what  is  called  the  imperfect  tense,  it  is  important  that  the 
learner  should  be  able  to  distinguish  the  use  of  each  in  Spanish.  When 
an  action  or  event  is  entirely  past  and  finished,  the  perfect-definite  is 
used ;  but  when  it  is  meant  to  say  that  the  action  or  event  was  taking 
place  at  a  certain  time,  and  that  it  is  or  may  be  still  continued,  the  im- 
perfect must  be  used.  Thus,  "Zos  soldados  marchaban  porlaciudad" 
means  "  the  soldiers  were-marching  through  the  city,"  and  so  far  as  the 
word  marchaban  is  concerned,  they  may  be  marching  still;  but  "  los  sol- 
dados  marcharon  por  la  dudad  "  means  "  the  soldiers  marched  through 
the  city,"  and  from  the  tense  employed  are  marching  no  longer.  (See^ 
also  302.) 

304.  The  perfect-indefinite  is  used  to  express  an  action 
or  event,  which,  though  entirely  past,  has  taken  place  dur- 
ing a  period  of  time  (expressed  or  understood)  of  which 
the  present  forms  a  part,  or  at  a  time  designated  in  an 
indeterminate  manner ;  as, 


148  OF   THE   VERB. 


Hi  hablado  a  Rodrigo  esta  semana. 

Han  coinido  pan  hoy. 

Vmd.  ha  estado  muy  enfermo. 


I-have  spoken  to  Roderick  this  wecfc 
They-^re  eaten  bread  to-day. 
You  have  been  very  sick 


(a.)  The  past  actions  of  persons  or  things  still  in  existence,  if  no  par- 
ticular time  be  mentioned,  are  expressed  in  this  tense ;  as, 

El  General  ha  tornado  varias  ciuda-  1  The    General    has    taken    several 
des.  1      cities. 

(b.)  The  only  cases  in  which  the  English  perfect  tense  and  the  Spanish 
perfect-indefinite  do  not  correspond  are  such  as  the  following :  "ItAoa 
been  snowing  these  three  hours ;"  "  he  has  been  in  Mexico  for  these  ten 
years;"  which  in  Spanish  would  be,  " hace  tres  haras  que  nieva"  (see 
218,  c) ;  "  hace  diez  anos  que  estoy  en  Mejico"  which  mean  literally  "  it- 
is  (see  218)  three  hours  that  (since)  it-snows;"  "it-is  ten  years  that 
(since)  I-am  in  Mexico."  If  the  sentence  be  negative,  the  perfect-inde- 
finite is  employed;  as,  ^' hace  ocho  dias  que  no  la  hemos  visto,"  "it-is 
eight  days  that  we-have  not  seen  her,"  that  is,  "  we  have  not  seen  her 
for  eight  days."  If  the  action  or  event  be  completed,  the  perfect-definite 
must  be  used ;  as,  "hace  diez  anas  que  el  rey  le  perdono,"  "  it-is  ten  years 
that  (since)  the  king  pardoned  him." 

(c.)  Hay  (or  ha)  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  hace  in  cases  like  the 
examples  in  the  last  paragraph ;  as  "  hay  pocos  dias  que  entrc  en  el  cuarto 
de  mi  amigo"  "it  has  few  days  that  (since)  I-entered  into  the  room  of 
my  friend,"  that  is,  "  a  few  days  ago,  I-entered  ray  friend's  room."  Hay 
is  used  at  the  beginning  and  ha  at  the  end  of  a  phrase;  as,  "  hay  pocos 
dias,"  or,  "pocas  dias  ha" 

{d.)  In  some  instances  we  may,  both  in  Spanish  and  English,  use 
either  the  perfect-indefinite,  or  if  we  are  sure  that  the  action  is  com- 
pleted, the  perfect-definite ;  &s,  comz  pan  hoy,  "  I-ate  bread  to-day,"  or 
he  comidopan  hoy,  "  I  have  eaten  bread  to-day." 

305.  The  first-pluperfect  is  used  to  express  an  affirma- 
tion of  what  is  past  and  took  place  before  some  other  past 
action  or  event  or  time,  expressed  or  understood  ;  as, 

Juan  ya  habta  comido  cuando  llego  I  John  already  had  dined  when  Rich- 
Ricardo.  I     ard  arrived. 

(a.)  Whenever  the  former  action  or  event  is  mentioned  as  still  con- 
tinuing when  the  latter  occurred,  the  imperfect  tense  is  employed  in 
Spanish  to  denote  the  former ;  as, 

Habia  (218)  tres  horas  que  ella  es-  \  It-was  three  hours  that  she  was 
taba  pintando  cuando  UegG  Pedro.  I     painting  when  Peter  arrived. 

B^*  This  last  example  means  in  English  "  she  had  been  paintmg 
three  hours  when  Peter  arrived ;"  and  the  use  of  the  imperfect  tense 


OF   THE  VERB.  149 

shows  that  she  was  employed  in  painting  (that  is,  had  not  finished)  at 
the  lime  of  Peter's  arrival. 

306.  The  second-pluperfect  is  used  to  express  a  past 
action  or  event  that  took  place  immediately  before  another 
action  or  event  also  past.  It  is  never  used  except  after 
some  of  the  adverbs  of  time;  cuando,  "when;"  asi  que, 
"  as  soon  as ;"  no  bien,  "  no  sooner,"  "  but  just ;"  apenas, 
"  scarcely  ;"  luego  que,  "  immediately  after  ;"  despues  qtie, 
"  soon  after ;"  as, 


Cuando  hube  visto  al  muger,  dije. 

Apenas  hubo  salido  cuando  se  cayo 

la  casa. 
No  bicn  lo  hubimos  hallado,  cuando 

loperdimos. 


When  I-had  seen   the  woman,   I 

said. 
Scarcely  had-he  gone-out  when  the 

house  fell. 
No  sooner  had-we  found  it,  when 

(than)  we-lost  it. 

307.  The  first-future  tense  affirms  what  is  yet  to  be  or 
to  take  place  at  a  future  time  (mentioned  or  not)  ;  as, 

Sere  presidente.  I  I-shall-be  president. 

Lucia  vendrd  manana.  I  Lucy  will-come  to-morrow. 

308.  The  second-future  tense  affirms  something  future 
that  will  have  taken  place  before  or  at  the  time  of  some 
other  future  action  or  event,  or  determinate  time ;  as, 


Hahre  esorito  esta  carta  antes  que 

Juan  llegue. 
Habrd  acabado  i.  las  tres. 


I  shall-have  written  this  letter  before 
John  may-arrive. 

He-wUl-have  finished  at  three 
o'clock. 

{a.)  Sometimes  in  Spanish  the  first-future  is  used  instead  of  the  pre- 
sent, and  the  second-future  instead  of  the  perfect-indefinite,  when  some- 
thing present  or  past  is  mentioned  of  which  the  speaker  is  not  entirely 
certain ;  as,  "  ahara  nos  dir^  lo  que  habr^  visto,"  "  now  he-will-tell  us 
that  which  he-shall-have  seen"  meaning  "  now  he  perhaps  tells  us  what 
he  perhaps  has  seen."  When,  however,  the  speaker  is  certain,  then  he 
would  express  himself  thus :  ^^ahora  nos  dice  lo  que  ha  visto,"  "  now  he- 
tells  us  what  he-has-seen." 

(6.)  The  second-future  in  English  is  sometimes  rendered  in  Spanish 
by  the  present  tense  in  a  sentence  like  the  following :  "  manana  hard 
diez  anos  que  vivo  en  Nueva-York,"  "to-morrow  it-will-be  ten  years 
that  1-live  in  New  York,"  meaning  "  I  shall  have  lived  in  New  York  ten 
years  to-morrow. 

13* 


150  OF  THE  VERB. 

OF  THE  IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

309.  The   imperative   is  that   mood  which  commands, 
exhorts,  or  entreats  ;  as, 

HacedXo  (116). 
VeamosXos. 
Trdigameios  vmd. 


Do-it. 

Let-US- see-them. 

Bring-i\ieva-\.o-me. 


(a.)  The  imperative  mood  is  not  used  in  the  first  person 
singular ;  nor  is  it  used  in  Spanish  for  forbidding^  that  is, 
it  is  not  employed  with  a  negative  adverb^  but  the  persons 
of  the  present  subjunctive  are  used  when  a  negative  com- 
mand or  a  prohibition  is  expressed  ;  as, 

No  temas.  Fear  not   {i.  e.   mayest  thou  not 

fear). 
No  temais.  Fear  not  {i.  e.  may  ye  not  fear). 

(6.)  The  s  of  the  first  person  plural  and  the  d  of  the  second  are  sup- 
pressed before  nos  and  os;  as, 

Congratidemonos.  I  Let  us  congratulate  ourselves. 

Ccmgratuldos.  I  Congratulate  yourselves. 

(c.)  The  s  of  the  first  person  plural  of  the  tenses  of  the  indicative 
mood  is  suppressed  when  the  reflective  pronoun  comes  after  it  (see  113, 
a) ;  as, 

Atnamonos.  \  We-love  ourselves. 

{d.)  When  the  imperative  is  negative  in  English,  as  the  subjunctive 
is  employed  in  Spanish,  the  pronouns  of  the  first-objective  case  (see  116) 
are  not  joined  to  it,  but  come  before  it ;  as, 


Do  (thou)  it  not. 
Bring  (ye)  it  not  to-me. 
Let  her  not  do  it. 


No  lo  hagas 

No  me  lo  traigais. 

No  lo  ha^a  ella. 

(c.)  Que  is  sometimes  used  before  the  persons  of  the  imperative 
mood;  as. 

Que  uno  de  nosotros  vaya.  1  Let  one  of  us  go  (that  one  of  us 

I      may -go), 

(/.)  The  persons  of  the  imperative,  except  the  second  persons,  singu- 
lar and  plural,  are  to  be  rendered  into  English  by  "may"  or  "let;"  as, 
"bendiganos  el  Senar,"  "may  the  Lord  bless  us;"  "  vaya  Juan,"  ''let 
John  go."  But  vmd.j  with  its  objective  cases,  although  of  the  third 
person,  is  to  be  rendered  as  t  le  second  person  ;  as,  "  venga  vmd.  conmu 


OF   THE   VERB.  151 

^0,"   "  come   with-me "   {let   your- worship   come  with-me)  5    "  alibese 
vmd.y"  "praise  yourself"  {let  your- worship  praise  himself).* 

OF   THE   TENSES   OF   THE    SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

310.  The  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  mood  differ  in  signi- 
fioation  from  those  of  the  indicative  only  in  expressing 
what  they  affirm  in  a  conditional  or  doubtful  manner,  while 
the  tenses  of  the  indicative  express  certainty.  Whenever, 
therefore,  there  is  no  doubt  about  what  we  affirm,  we  must 
use  the  tenses  of  the  indicative.  Thus,  if  we  say  "  aunque 
Roderigo  habla,"  " though  Roderick  speaks"  by  using  the 
indicative  mood  we  show  that  there  is  no  uncertainty  about 
Roderick's  speaking.  But  if  we  say  ^^  aunque  Roderigo 
hable,"  "  though  Roderick  may-speak^"  we  show,  by  using 
the  subjunctive  mood,  that  it  is  not  certain  that  Roderick 
will  speak. 

311.  The  present  tense  of  the  subjunctive  affirms  some 
doubtful  action  or  event  that  may  take  place,  and  is  gener- 
ally preceded  by  some  conjunction  or  conjunctive  phrase ;  as. 

Though  it-may-be  so. 

Remain  there  until  I  may-tell  it  to 

thee. 
Do  this  m  order  that  they -may-see 

your  good  works. 
Whether  we-may-live    or    whethei 

we-may-die,  we  are  the  Lord's. 


Aunque  sea  asi. 

Estate  alii  hasta  que  yo  te  lo  diga. 

Haced  esto  para  que  vean  vuestras 

buenas  obras. 
Que  vivamos  6  que  muramos,  del 

Seiior  somos. 

(a.)  As  futurity  is  implied  in  the  present  tense  of  the  subjunctive,  the 
first-future  of  the  subjunctive  may  be  used  in  its  place ;  thus  we  may 
say,  ^^  aunque  lloremos,''  "though  we-may-weep ;^^  or  ^^ aunque  llorare- 
mos"  "though  we-should-weep.^'  The  present  may,  therefore,  be  used 
instead  of  the  future,  and  the  future  instead  of  the  present,  unless  the 
conjunction  si  (if)  be  employed,  in  which  case  the  present  subjunctive 
can  not  be  used. 

(6.)  The  relative  pronouns  are  generally  followed  by  the  present  or 
some  other  tense  of  the  subjunctive,  when  the  sentence  is  interrogative 
or  negative,   or  expresses  a  doubt,  icish,  or  condition  ;  as, 

*  In  both  Spanish  and  English  the  future  is  sometimes  used  as  a  com- 
mand ;  as,  1  0  mafards,  "  thou  shalt  not  kill,"  i.  e.  "  do  not  kill,"  or  "  do 
not  commit    lurder." 


152 


OP    THE    VERB. 


No  conozco  una  sola  muger,  cuya 
alma  sea  mas  sensible  que  la  de 
la  Seiiora  Loader. 


I-know  not  a  single  woman  whose 
soul  {is)  may-be  more  sensible 
than  that  of  Mrs.  Loader. 


(c.)  Words  which  in  English  are  compounds  of  ever,  such  as  ^ien- 
quiera,  "whoever;"  cualquiera,  "whosoever,"  "whichsoever;"  siempre 
que,  "whenever;"  por  masque,  "however;"  par  mucJio  que,  "what- 
ever ;"  in  Spanish  generally  require  the  present  or  some  of  the  tenses  of 
the  subjunctive ;  as, 


Cualquier  cosa  que  vea  vmd. 
Por  grande  que  sea  tu  merito. 


Whatever  thing  that  you  may-see. 
However  great  that  thy  merit  may- 
be. 


3 1 2.  The  imperfect  tense  of  the  subjunctive  affirms  an 
action  or  event  of  a  doubtful  or  contingent  kind  as  having 
to  be,  or  to  be  done,  or  as  conceived  by  the  mind  as  having 
taken  place  at  some  time  under  certain  conditions;  as, 

Juan  leeria,  si  tuviera  libros,  or,  >       John  would-read,  if-he-should-have 
Juan  leerta,  si  iuviese  libros.         5  (if  he  had)  books. 

Quisiera  que  mi  madre  lo  comiese.      I-would-like  (I-wish)  that  my  mo- 
ther would-eat-it. 

313.  There  are  in  Spanish  three  forms  of  the  imperfect 
subjunctive,  one  ending  with  ra  (in  the  first  person  singu- 
lar), another  with  Ha,  and  the  third  with  se.  Each  of 
these  forms  is  generally  to  be  rendered  in  English  by  some 
one  of  the  auxiliaries  should,  would,  might  or  could,  as  the 
sense  may  require.  These  forms  of  the  imperfect  are 
thus  used : 

314.  The  form  ending  with  se  is  employed  only  when  a 
conditional  conjunction,  or  an  ejaculatofy  expression  of 
desire,  or  a  verb  of  command  or  permission  (see  also  3 1 4, 
b),  comes  before  it ;  as. 

If   I  should-have  books,  I-would 

read. 
0-that  he-woidd-risk  not  thus  his 

life! 
It-was  necessary  that  1-should-ex- 

plain  my  reasons. 
I-told  him  that  he-might-ta^e  those 

books. 


Si  yo  tuviese  libros,  leeria. 

J  Ojald  no  arriesgase  asi  su  vida ! 

Era  preciso  que  espitsiese  mis  ra- 

zones. 
Le  dije  que  tomase  esos  libros. 


OP    THE    VERB.  153 

(a.)  Sometimes  the  conjunction  que  is  not  expressed,  but  understood ; 
as, 
^ncargo  le  enviasen  mayor  canti-  I  He  ordered  (that)  ihey'shcvld-send 

dad.  I      him  a  greater  quantity. 

(6.)  The  form  ending  with  se  can  be  employed  after  the  relative  pro- 
nouns, and  after  cuanto,  "  as  much  as,"  cuantos,  "  as  many  as,"  when 
they  are  preceded  by  a  verb  expressive  of  an  action  which  the  other  part 
of  the  sentence  shows  to  depend  on  choice  or  mere  contingency ;  as. 


Prometio  que  me  darla  todo  lo  que 
le  pidiese. 


He-promised  me  that  he-would- 
give  me  everything  which  I- 
might-ask  of-him. 

315.  The  form  ending  with  ria  is  employed  (generally 
to  express  a  wish  or  condition,  or  what  would  be  or  might  be 
done)  when  no  conditional  conjunction  comes  immediately 
before  the  imperfect  tense ;  as, 


Which  of  the  two  would  you  pre- 
fer? 
If  she  should  come,  they-woidd-go. 


I  Cual  de  los  dos  preferirm  vmd.  1 

Si  ella  viniese  (314),  irian. 

(a.)  This  form  can  likewise  be  used  when  the  imperfect  is  preceded 
by  a  verb  that  expresses  a  beliefs  trust,  or  promise;  and  also  when  the 
conjunction  si  (if)  is  used  in  the  sense  of  "  whether;"  as. 

He-promised    that    he-would-givc 

me  two  books. 
He-asked  him  if  (whether)  his  son 


Prometio  que  me  darm  dos  libros. 
Le  pregunto  si  su  hijo  irta  alM. 


would-go  there. 

316.  The  form  of  the  imperfect  ending  with  ra  may  in 
general  be  used  for  either  the  form  in  se  or  that  in  ria  ; 
and  is  especially  to  be  preferred  to  the  form  in  ria,  when 
interrogative  pronouns  come  before  the  imperfect ;  as. 


If  I  should-havc  (if  I  had)  money, 

I- would  buy  books. 
0-that  I-could-Jind  myself  with  her. 
I-should-like  that  they  would-come. 
Who  wouM'believe  it  7 


Si^o  tuviera  dinero,  comprarfa  li- 
bros (314). 
Ojala  me  haUara  con  ella  (314). 
*  Yo  quisiera  que  viniesen  (315). 
I  Q,uien  lo  creyera  ? 

(a.)  It  will  be  seen  from  the  foregoing  rules  that  the  form  in  ra  can 
generally  be  used  instead  of  the  forms  in  se  and  rta,  for  we  can  say,  si  yo 
amara,  or,  si  yo  amase,  "  if  I  shouJd-love ;"  and  we  can  say,  el  amara,  or, 
el  amaria,  "  I  woidd-love"  But  we  can  not  use  the  form  in  ria  and  that 
in  se,  the  one  for  the  other. 


154 


OF   THE    VERB. 


{b.)  In  English  there  are  various  forms  of  speaking  of  a  contingent 
action  or  event ;  thus  we  can  say,  ^^  if  she  were  to  see  it" — "  were  she  to 
seeity" — ^'should  she  see  it" — ^*  if  she  see  it" — "could  she  see  it  " — "if 
she  should  see  it;"  but  in  Spanish  these  forms  must  all  be  rendered  as 
the  last  example,  "if  she  should  see  it ;"  thus,  "  si  ella  lo  viese."  And  so 
with  all  the  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  mood. 

(c.)  Sometimes  the  English  auxiliaries  could^  might,  should,  and  would, 
are  expressed  in  Spanish  by  a  separate  verb,  followed  by  the  infinitive  ; 


No  podia  ver.  He-could  not  see  {was  not  able  to- 

see). 
Debta  hacerlo.  He-should  do-it  {ought  to-do-it). 

No  querza  entrar.  He-would  not  enter  {was  not  willing 

to-enter). 

317.  The  perfect-indefinite  tense  of  the  subjunctive 
mentions  a  doubtful  or  contingent  action  or  event  as  being 
completed,  or  that  it  would  have  been  done  in  past  time 
under  certain  conditions  ;  as, 


I-am-surprised    that    he-may   not 

have  arrived. 
Fearest-thou  that  he-may  not  hxive 

won  in  fair  play  ? 
It-concerns  me  little  whether  he- 

may-have-heard  it  spoken  or  not. 


Me  admiro  que  no  haya  llegado. 

[,Temes  que  no  haya  ganado  en 

juego  limpio  7 
Poco  me  importa  que  lo  haya  oido 

decir  6  no. 

318.  The  pluperfect  tense  of  the  subjunctive  mentions 
a  doubtful  or  contingent  action  or  event  that  would  or 
might  have  been  completed  under  certain  conditions ;  and 
is  also  used  in  Spanish  whenever  in  English  a  conditional 
conjunction  or  expression  of  fear,  doubt,  or  wish,  precedes 
the  pluperfect  indicative  ;  as, 

Ella  habrta  ido  ayer  a  la  catedral, 

si  hubiese  estado  buena. 
I  Ojala  hubiese  yo  sido  estudioso  ! 
No  era  creible  que  hubiese  vmd. 

abandonado  a  unos  amigos  an- 

tiguos  como  nosotros. 


She  would-have  gone  yesterday  to 
the  cathedral,  if  she-^arf  been  well. 

0-that  I  had  been  studious  ! 

It- was  not  credible  that  you  would- 
have  abandoned  such  old  friends 
as  we. 

(a.)  This  compound  tense  of  the  subjunctive  is  used  with  the  endings 
in  ra,  rta^  and  se  of  the  auxiliary  verb  haher  {hubiera,  habria,  and  hubi- 
ese), under  the  same  conditions  and  in  the  same  manner  as  these  end- 
ligs  are  employed  in  the  imperfect  tense ;  (see  314,  315,  316) ;  os, 


OF   THE   VERB. 


155 


If  he-shauld  not  have  (if  he-had  not) 
paid  thee,  I  would-have  lent  thee 
money. 


iSi  nG   e  huhiera  pagado,  yo  te  ha- 

hrtu  prestado  dinero :  or, 
Si  no  ve  hubiese  pagado^  yo  te  ha- 

bria  prestado  dinero  ;  or^ 
Si  no  te  hubiese  pagado,  yo  te  hu- 

biera  prestado  dinero  :  or, 
Si  no  te  huhiera  pagado,  yo  te  hu- 

biera  prestado  dinero. 

ly  The  form  of  the  last  example,  though  permitted,  is  not  to  be 
recommended,  since  the  ending  ra  occurs  in  the  conditional  preposition 
(si  no  te  huhiera  pagado),  and  also  in  the  principal  preposition  (yo  te  hu- 
hiera prestado  dinero).  Nor  could  we  change  in  any  case  the  principal 
proposition  of  the  sentence,  by  substituting  "  hubiese  prestado,"  since 
the  form  in  se  can  be  employed  only  with  conditional  conjunctions  or 
exclamations,  etc.  (see  314  ;  314,  h). 

(6.)  There  is  in  Spanish  a  peculiar  method  sometimes  employed  for 
expressing  such  a  contingency  of  an  action  as  is  implied  in  the  pluperfect 
tense  :  this  consists  in  prefixing  the  preposition  d  before  the  infinitive 
haher,  and  afl&xing  the  past  participle  of  the  verb  to  be  used  ;  thus,  "  d 
haber  venido"  is  to  be  rendered  the  same  as  "si  huhiera  (or  hubiese)  veni- 
do,"  "if  he-shotdd-have  come,"  or,  as  it  is  generally  expressed  in  Eng- 
lish, "if  he-7iad  come,"  or  "Aad-he  come."  So  "^  haber  hablado"  is 
to  be  rendered  the  same  as  "si  hubiese  hahlado"  "if  he-had  spoken." 

319.  The  first-future  tense  of  the  subjunctive  mentions 
a  doubtful  or  contingent  action  or  event  as  to  take  place 
at  a  future  time  ;  as, 


Si  asl  fuere,  mis  deseos  quedardn 

satisfechos. 
Si  yo  hahlare  lenguas  de  hombres 

y  de  Angeles,  y  no  tuviera  cari- 

dad,  nada  soy. 


If  thus  it-should-he,  my  desires  will- 
remain  satisfied. 

If  I  should-speak  languages  of  men 
and  of  angels,  and  should  not 
have  charity,  I-am  nothing. 


(a.)  The  imperfect  and  first-future  of  the  subjunctive  can  not  be  used 
indiscriminately  for  each  other.  The  contingency  implied  in  the  imper- 
fect refers  to  time  past ;  and  that  implied  in  the  first-future  refers  to 
future  time,  reckoning  from  the  moment  in  which  it  is  said.  Thus  if  we 
say,  "  John  said  that  the  boys  should  remain  at  home,"  there  is  contin- 
gency and  even  futurity  denoted,  but  it  does  not  necessarily  go  beyond 
the  present  moment,  for  the  boys  ma)''  have  already  complied  with  John's 
request.  In  such  a  case  the  imperfect  must  be  used.  But  if  we  say, 
"  John  says  that  if  the  boys  should  (or  shall)  not  remain  at  home,  he 
will  not  reward  them,"  then  it  is  evident  that  the  event  of  staying  at 
home  is  not  yet  supposed  to  have  taken  place,  and  of  course  the  first- 
ftiture  subjunctive  is  used.     So,  "  if  I  have  (i.  e.  shaU  have)  money,  they 


156  OF   THE   VERB. 

will-rob  me  of  it,"  would  be  expressed  by  the  first-future,  and  "  if  I  had 
{should  have)  money,  I  would  be  generous,"  would  be  expressed  by  the 
imperfect.     (See  311,  a). 

320.  The  second-future  of  the  subjunctive  mentions  a 
doubtful  or  contingent  action  or  event  as  having  taken 
place  at  a  future  time  at  or  before  some  other  future  action 
or  event  shall  occur ;  as, 


Si  Pedro  no  hubiere  llegado  ^ntes 
de  amanecer,  le  escribir^  una 
carta. 


If  Peter  shall  not  have  arrived  be- 
fore daybreak,  I-shall-write  him 
a  letter. 


321.  A  verb  is  not  necessarily  in  the  subjunctive  mood 
because  a  conjunction  may  precede  it;  for  an  action  or 
event,  which  is  known  to  be  certain^  requires  the  verb  to 
be  in  the  indicative  mood,  even  though  a  conjunction  pre- 
cede it ;  as,  "  though  John  was-speaking  low,  I  heard  him 
distinctly,"  "  aunque  Juan  hahlaha^^^  etc.  If,  however,  there 
is  uncertainty  or  doubt  expressed,  the  subjunctive  mood  is 
required ;  as,  "  though  John  were-speakingj  I  would  not  lis- 
ten," "  aunqtce  Juan  hablara"  etc. 


'  On  account  of  the  irregular  and  elliptical  manner  of  using  tne 
tenses  in  English,  it  is  sometimes  diflBcult  for  the  learner  to  know  which 
to  use  in  Spanish.  But  he  must  learn  to  distinguish  the  meaning  of  the 
English  tense,  whether  certainty  or  uncertainty  is  expressed  (see  310 ; 
311,  6;  311,  c;  316,  6). 

{a,)  After  the  relative  pronouns  or  the  adjective  cuanto,  "  how  much," 
or  the  adverb  cuando,  "  when,"  if  these  pronouns  or  this  adjective  or 
adverb  are  themselves  preceded  by  a  verb  expressive  of  an  action  which 
the  other  part  of  the  sentence  shows  to  depend  on  mere  choice  or  con- 
tingency, the  subjunctive  mood  is  used  (though  in  English  in  such  cases 
the  indicative  is  generally  employed) ;  as. 

Choose,  then,  from  these  oranges 


Elige,  pues,  de  estas  naranjas  la 
que  mas  te  agrade  (or  agradare  ; 
see  311,  a). 

Ser6  rico,  cuando  quiera  (or  quisi- 
ere^  la.fortuna  (see  311,  a). 


Prometio  darme  el  dinero  que  yo 
necesUara  (see  314,  b). 


that  which    most   pleases   thee 

{may-please  or  sJiall-please  thee). 
I-shall-be  rich  when  fortune  wUls, 

(t.  e.  when  fortune  may-will  or 

shaU-wiU). 
He-promised  to-give  me  the  money 

that  I'toanted  {Tnight'Vxmt). 

(6.)  Verbs  expressing  iritt,  desire^  command^  permission^  promise^  fear^ 


OF   THE   VERB.  157 

doubtf  probability,  Jitness,  or  necessity,  followed  by  the  conjunction  que 
(or  any  other  conditional  conjunction),  generally  require  the  verb  which 
follows  the  conjunction  to  be  in  the  subjunctive  mood  (and  not  in  the 
indicative,  as  in  English) ;  as, 


Dudo  que  tengas  aciete. 
No  creo  que  tenga  peras. 
Temo  cue  no  tengan  dinero. 
Es  posible  que  tengan  uvas. 
Es  precise  que  me  vaya. 


1-doubt  whether  thon-hast  {mayest- 
have)  oil. 

I-do  not  think  that  Yie-lms  {may- 
have)  pears. 

I-fear  that  they-icill  not  have  {may 
not  h^ve)  money. 

It-is  possible  that  they-^re  {may- 
have)  grapes. 

It-is  necessary  that  I-go  {may-go). 

(c.)  There  are  some  conjunctive  phrases,  which,  as  they  imply  a  con- 
dition or  doubt  in  themselves,  are  always  followed  by  the  subjunctive 
mood :  these  are,  para  que,  "  in  order  that ;"  dado  que,  "  granted  that ;" 
no  sea  que,  "lest;"  d  menos  que,  "unless;"  djinde  que,  "  to  the  end 
that ;"  con  tal  que,  "  provided  that ;"  dntes  que,  "  before  that ;"  supuesto 
que,  "suppose  that;"  en  caso  de  que,  *'in  case  that;"  bien  que,  "al- 
though ;"  sin  que,  "without  or  unless  that ;"  como  quiera que,  " notwith- 
standing that;"  por  mas  que,  "however;"  siempre  que,  "whenever 
that;"  ojald,  "would  that,"  or,  "would  to  God  that;"  as,  hablo  para 
que  puedas  juzcar,  "I-speak  in  order  that  thou-mayest  be  able  to 
judge." 

{d.)  The  conjunction  ought  always  to  be  expressed  in  Spanish ;  as, 
"he promised  us  [that]  he  would-come,"  nos  promeiio  que  vendrta.* 

OF    THE    PASSIVE    VERB. 

322.  The  passive  verb  is  generally  rendered  in  Spanish 
by  ser  (see  170),  and  always  when  the  subject  of  the  verb 
is  acted  upon  by  an  agent,  that  is,  when  in  English  it  would 
be  accompanied  with  the  preposition  by  ;  as, 

Este  discurso^we  escrito  por  Diego.  I  This    discourse    was    written    by 

1      James. 

(a.)  The  passive  verb  must  be  rendered  in  Spanish  by 
estar  (see  174)  when  the  past  participle  is  used  adjectively, 
that  is,  when  the  subject  of  the  verb  does  not  seem  so 

*  The  verb  prometir  is  generally  followed  by  the  infinitive  in  such  a 
case;  thras,  jyrometi6  darme  el  dinero,  "he«promi6ed  to-give  me  the 
money.* 

U 


158  OF   THE   VERB. 

much  to  be  acted  upon  by  an  agent  as  to  have  its  state  or 
condition  described ;  as, 

El  discurso  estuvo  bien  escrito.  I  The  discourse  was  well  written. 

El  libro  estd  correjido.  I  The  book  is  corrected. 

323.  The  passive  verb  formed  by  ser  is  used  in  Spanish 
in  the  present  and  imperfect  of  the  indicative  mood,  only 
when  it  is  designed  to  express  a  mental  act  or  a  state  of  the 
emotions;  as, 

Maria  es  amada  de  Carlos.  |  Mary  is  loved  by  Charles. 

(a.)  When  a  mental  act  or  a  state  of  the  emotions  is  not  expressed, 
the  passive  verb,  if  it  be  used,  must  not  be  in  the  present  or  imperfect 
of  the  indicative  mood :  thus  we  can  not  say,  "  el  libro  es  escrito  por  un 
Espanol"  "  the  book  is  written  by  a  Spaniard,"  but  el  libro  ha  sido  escrito 
"por  un  Espanol,  "  the  book  has  been  written  by  a  Spaniard." 

(6.)  When  a  mental  act  or  state  of  the  emotions  is  expressed,  the  pre- 
positions de  or  por  may  be  used  after  the  passive  verb  before  the  agent ; 
but  when  a  mental  act  or  state  of  the  emotions  is  not  expressed,  por 
only  can  be  used ;  as, 


Maria  es  amada  de  {or  por)  Carlos. 
Todas  las  cosas  fueron  hechas  por 
Dios. 


Mary  is  beloved  br/  Charles. 
All  things  were  made  by  God. 


(c.)  The  reflective  pronoun  se  is  often  used  with  verbs  of  the  active 
voice,  which  are  required  to  be  rendered  in  English  by  the  passive.  (See 
173.) 

OF    THE    REGIMEN    OF    VERBS.  ' 

324.  The  object  or  regimen  of  the  verb  is  either  direct 
or  indirect.  The  direct  regimen  is  that  on  which  the 
action  immediately  falls  without  the  aid  of  any  preposi- 
tion ;  as, 

Doy  un&  pluma,  \  I  give  a  pen. 

(a.)  The  indirect  regimen  is  that  on  which  the  action  of  the  verb  can 
not  fall  without  the  aid  of  a  preposition ;  as, 

Dijo  d  la  muger.  \  He-said  to  the  woman. 

(b.)  Sometimes  both  regimens  are  required  after  the  verb ;  as, 
Pio  una  pluria  i.  la  muger.  \  He-gave  a  pen  to  thi^  woman, 

325.  When  the  object  of  an  active  verb  is  a  person  or 


OP  THE   VERB.  159 

inanimate  tiling  personified,  it  must  be  preceded  by  the 
prepostion  a  ;*  as, 

James  saw  the  mother  of  John. 

God  will-reward  the  good. 

The  woman  whom  we  saw  is  not 


Diego  viC»  d  la  madre  de  Juan. 
Dios  reconipensara  d  los  buenos. 
La  muger  d  quien  vimos  no  es  rica. 


Vio  d  la  que  me  dio  dinero. 
El  sol  alumbra  d  la  tierra. 


rich. 
He-saw  her  who  gave  me  money. 
The  sun  enlightens  the  earth. 


(a.)  Sometimes  the-^harmony  of  the  sentence  requires  the  d  to  be  sup- 
pressed, especially  after  the  persons  of  the  verb  tencr,  "  to  have,"  or  "  to 
possess ;"  as, 

Teiigo  un  hijo  y  tres  hijas.  |  I-have  one  son  and  three  daughters. 

326.  One  verb  governs  another  in  the  infinitive  mood ;  as, 

Q,uieren  imitarle.  \  They- want  to-imitate  him. 

(a.)  Some  verbs,  as  a  general  rule,  require  the  preposition  a  before  the 
infinitive  which  they  govern;  such  are  those  which  mean  to  attempt^  to 
come,  to  gOj  to  begin,  to  devote,  to  offer,  to  dare,  to  serve,  to  invite,  to  learn, 
to  teach,  to  urge,  to  assist,  to  call,  to  advise,  to  submit,  to  prepare,  to  compel, 
to  decide,  to  remain,  and  to  accustom  one's  self;  as, 

Probu  d  levantarse.  1  He-attempted  to  raise  himself. 

Voy  d  rerla.  I  I-am-going  to  see  her. 

(6.)  Some  verbs  generally  require  the  preposition  de  before  the  infini- 
tive which  they  govern ;  such  as  those  which  mean  to  cease,  to  be  glad, 
to  be  ashamed,  to  resolve,  to  deprive,  to  Jail,  to  finish,  to  abstain,  to  pity ;  as, 

Dejo  de  estudiar.  I  He-ceased  to-siudy. 

No  faltare  de  hacerlo.  I  I-will-fail  not  to  do  it. 

(c.)  When  the  preposition  to  in  English  is  used  before  the  infinitive  in 
the  sense  "in  order  to"  (as,  "he  labors  to  acquire  fame,"  meaning  "he 
labors  in  order  to  acquire  fame  "),  the  preposition  para  is  used  in  Spanish 
before  the  iafinitive :  as, 

El  hombre  fue  criado  j)ara  aspirar  I  Man  was  created  in-order-to  aspire 
i.  la  felicidad.  I      to  felicity. 

{d.)  When  the  preposition  to  in  English  is  used  in  the  sense  "/or  the 
sake  of,"  the  preposition  por  is  used  in  Spanish  before  the  infinitive ;  as, 

Juan  lo  dice,  par  decirlo.  I  John  says  it  for-the-sake-of  saying 

I      it. 


*  See  No.  670,  Part  IV.     TVis  is  a  very  important  rule  of  Spanish 


160  OF   THE   VERB. 

{e.)  Sometimes  que  precedes  the  infinitive  instead  of  par  or  para  /  as, 

Tiene  algo  que  decirte.  I  He-has  something  (which)  tc-tell 

1      thee. 

{f.)  The  infinitive  is  often  used  without  any  preposition  before  it, 
especially  when  it  is  governed  by  verbs  which  mean  to  be  able,  to  permit, 
to  wish,  to  endeavor,  to  make,  to  feign,  to  owe,  to  seem,  to  be  wont,  to  know, 
to  avail,  to  see,  to  hear,  to  succeed,  to  hope,  to  be  necessary,  to  think,  to  be- 
lieve, to  promise,  to  deign,  to  be  the  duty,  to  pretend,  to  judge,  to  prescribe, 
to  require,  to  suffice  ;  as,  ^ 

No  puede  hacerio.  I  He-is  not  able  to-do  it. 

Deseo  aprender.  I  I-wish  to-leam. 

327.  The  infinitive  in  Spanish,  when  used  as  a  present 
participle  in  English,  may  take  any  preposition  before  it 
(see  298,  a) ;  as. 


Sintio  la  necesidad  de  ponerle  en 

manos  de  la  juventud. 
Es  constante  en  amarla. 


He-felt  the  necessity  of-placing  it 

in  the  hands  of  the  youth. 
He-is  constant  in-loving  her. 


(a.)  The  verbs  to  sec  and  to  hear  never  govern  the  gerund  in  Span 
ish,  but  always  the  infinitive ;  thus  we  can  not  say,  le  vio  viendo,  "  I-saw 
him  coming,"  but  le  vio  venir,  "I  saw  him  come." 

(6.)  *'  To  know  how  "  is  expressed  in  Spanish  by  "  to  know  ;"  as, 

Yd  no  se  nadar.  |  I  know  not  {how)  to  swim. 

(c.)  The  infinitive,  when  governed  by  another  verb  in  Spanish,  is 
sometimes  required  to  be  rendered  by  another  mood  in  English ;  as, 

He-thinks  to-die  (that  he  will  die) 
of  joy. 


Piensa  morir  de  alegria. 

Creo  ver  d  mi  padre. 

Sabe  deber  su  m^rito  d  Dios  solo. 


I-believe  to-see  (that  I  see)  my  fa- 
ther. 

He-knows  to-owe  his  merit  (that 
his  merit  is  owing)  to  God  alone. 

{d.)  When  in  English  a  reflective  verb,  or  a  verb  implying  command, 
governs  an  infinitive  in  the  passive  voice,  in  Spanish  this  infinitive  must 
be  in  the  active  voice ;  as, 

The  king  ordered  it  to-be-given  to- 

him. 
Suffer  not  thyself  to-be-overcome  of 

evil. 

0^"  The  above  examples  literally  would  be  rendered,  "  the  king  to- 
him  it  ordered  forgive,"  and  "  not  thyself  suffer  to  wercome  of  that  which 
is  evil." 


El  rey  se  lo  mand6  dar. 

No  te  dejes  verwer  de  lo  malo. 


OP  THE   VERB.  161 

328.  When  a  verb  is  governed  by  another  in  Engheh,  and  can  be  ren- 
dered In  another  mood  by  using  the  conjunction  that^  this  latter  mood 
should  be  employed  in  Spanish ;  thus,  instead  of  saying  "  I  think  him 
10  be  learned,"  we  can  say,  "  I  think  that  he  is  (or  may  be)  learned ;" 
and  instead  of  "I  requested  him  to  go,"  we  can  say,  "I  requested  thai 
he  should  go ;"  which  latter  form  of  construction  should  generally  be 
adopted  in  Spanish ;  as, 

Espei^>  que  tendre  el  gusto  de  verle  I  I-hope  to  have  (that  I-shall-have)  the 
en  breve.  1     pleasure  of  seeing  him  soon. 

OF   VERBS   FOLLOW^ED   BY    CERTAIN   PREPOSITIONS. 

829.  Verbs  which  signify  to  compare,  to  give,  to  yield,  to 
resist,  to  concern,  to  belong,  to  refuse,  to  ask,  generally  require 
the  preposition  a  before  the  noun  to  which  the  action  of 
the  verb  passes  over  ;  as, 

Ell».  se  parece  d  su  madre.  I  She  resembles  her  mother. 

Demanda  sabiduria  al  Senor.  I  He  asks  wisdom/rom  (to-the)  Lord. 

( 1.)  Sometimes  verbs  having  the  sense  to  remace  or  to  take  away,  re- 
quire the  preposition  d  before  the  noun  to  which  the  action  of  the  verb 
passes  over ;  as, 


Cortaron  la  cabeza  d  Saul. 
Cain  quito  la  vida  d  su  herniano 
Abel. 


They-cut-off  the  head  of  {to)  Saul. 
Cain  took-away  the  life  of  (to)  hia 
brother  Abel. 


330.  Verbs  denoting  to  be  abundant,  to  lack,  to  be  aston- 
ished, to  blame,  to  repent,  to  pity,  to  make  use,  to  absolve,  tc 
make  sport,  to  remember,  to  forget,  indirectly  govern  a  noun 
by  means  of  the  preposition  de  ;  as, 


Los  valles  abundan  de  trigo. 

Llenaron  la  casa  de  perros. 

Los  discipulos  se  asombraron  de 
sus  palabras. 


The    valleys    abound    with    {of) 

wheat. 
They-filled    the    house  with   {of) 

dogs. 
The  disciples  were  astonished  at 

{of)  his  words. 

(a.)  Olvidar^  to  forget,  is  followed  by  de  only  when  it  is  used  as  a  re- 
flective verb ;  as, 

Olvidarse  de  lo  pasado,*  or,  I  To-forget  the  past. 

Olvidar  su  nombre.  I  To  forget  his  name. 

*  Literally,  '*  to-forget  oneself  of  the  past." 
14* 


162  OF   THE    VERB. 

(6.)  The  verb  ser,  when  used  to  imply  property  or  possession,  requires 
the  noun  denoting  the  possessor  to  be  preceded  by  the  preposition  de ; 
as, 

El  libro  es  de  mi  padre.  I  The  book  belongs  to  (is  of)  my  fa- 

I      ther. 

(c.)  De  generally  precedes  nouns  which  denote  the  causes  of  which 
the  verb  explains  the  effect ;  as, 

Tiembla  de  miedo.  He-trembles  with  (from)  fear. 

Tirita  de  frio.  He- shivers  with  (of)  cold. 

Sus  ojos  se  banaron  de  Mgrimas.        His  eyes  were  wet  with  (of)  tears. 

331.  When  a  noun  refers  to  the  instrument  with  which 
the  action  of  the  verb  is  effected,  it  requires  the  preposi- 
tion con  before  it ;  when  the  noun  is  the  name  of  the  blow 
and  the  object  with  which  it  is  effected  (see  257),  it  requires 
the  preposition  de  or  con  before  it,  when  it  is  employed  in 
the  singular  number,  and  the  preposition  a  when  employed 
in  the  plural  ;  as, 


Los  soldados  le  mataron  con  un 

dardo. 
Kilos  le  mataron  de  (or  con)  una 

dardada. 
Le  mataron  d  dardadas. 


The  soldiers  killed  him  with  a  dart. 


They  slew  him  with  a  blow-of-a- 

dart. 
They  slew  him  by  blows-of-a-dart. 

(a.)  Sometimes  the  preposition  d  is  found  preceding  the  name  of  the 
instrument  in  the  singular ;  as, 

Q,uien    d   hierro    mata,    d   hierro  I  He-who  with  steel*  kills,  by  steel 
muere.  I     dies. 

(6.)  When  the  reflective  verb  meterse  is  used  to  signify  to  meddle,  to 
interfere,  it  requires  the  preposition  con  before  the  noun  to  which  it 
refers  as  its  object,  if  such  noun  be  the  name  of  a  person,  and  en  if  it  be 
the  name  of  any  thing  inanimate :  as, 

No  te  metas  con  estas  detractores. 


No  te  metas  en  los  negocios  age- 
nos. 


Meddle  not  thyself  with  those  slan- 
derers. 

Meddle  not  thyself  in  the  affairs  of- 
others. 


332.  The  preposition  d  (to)  should  not  be  used  in  Spanish  when  we 
speak  of  motion  merely  directed  towards  a  place,  but  hdcia  and 
para;  as, 

...I  ..^  .11  — — — ,-,_. 

♦  Literally,  iron,  meaning  the  sword. 


OF   THE   VERB.  163 

Esta  caminanio  hdcia  Tolosa.  !  He-is  journeying  towards  Tolosa. 

Mi  padre  salio  para  Madrid.  1  My  fatlier  set-outybr  Madrid. 

(a.)  Gerunds  require  the  same  prepositions  as  the  verbs  from  which 
they  are  derived ;  as, 

Acord^ndose  de  (330)  sus  oJbras.       |  Remembering  his  works. 


'  The  idiomatic  use  of  many  verbs  followed  by  certain  preposi- 
tions will  be  found  in  the  Appendix,  Number  III. 

OF    THE    USE    OF    THE    VERBS    SER    AND    ESTAR. 

333.  The  different  parts  of  the  verbs  ser  and  estar  are 
generally  to  be  rendered  in  English  alike  ;  but  in  Spanish 
these  verbs  are  not  used  indiscriminately  for  each  other. 
Euch  predicates  the  existence  of  some  property  or  quality 
in  an  object ;  but  ser  predicates  absolute,  and  estar  a  rela- 
tive existence.  When  the  property  or  quality  is  essential, 
natural,  or  inherent  in  the  object,  ser  is  to  be  used.  When 
the  quality  is  not  natural  (that  is,  not  produced  by  nature), 
or  when  it  is  expressive  of  a  transient  state,  estar  is  to  be 
used.  Ser,  then,  is  used  to  affirm  what  a  thing  is  naturally 
or  by  nature,  or  to  express  any  permanent  state  or  charac- 
teristic quality  or  property  of  an  object ;  while  estar  is  used 
to  affirm  how  a  thing  exists  at  any  period  of  time,  or  where 
any  thing  is  or  exists.  Ser  affirms  what  a  thing  is ;  estar 
expresses  how  or  where  a  thing  is.  Thus,  el  cuarto  es  ^5;?^- 
cioso,  "  the  room  is  spacious  ;"  with  ser,  because  it  tells  what 
the  room  is ;  and  el  cuarto  esta  limpio,  "  the  room  is  clean  ;" 
with  estar,  because  it  tells  how  the  room  is.  Juan  esta  en 
el  campo,  "  John  is  in  the  country  ;"  with  estar,  because  it 
tells  where  John  is.  ''  Mary  is  beautiful,"  affirms  what 
Mary  is  ;  '*  Mary  is  glad,"  affirms  how  Mary  is  :  and  of 
course  es  would  be  used  in  the  former  sentence,  and  esta 
in  the  latter.  "  Peter  is  sick,"  affirms  hoiv  or  in  what  state 
Peter  exists  at  a  certain  period  of  time,  and  estar  must  be 
used  ;  thus,  Pedro  esta  enfermd ;  but  "  Peter  is  sickly," 
expresses  what  Peter  is,  namely,  of  a  sickly  or  unhealthy 


A  64  or  THE  VERB, 

constitution,  and  ser  must  be  used  ;  thus,  Pedro  es  enfer 
mizo. 

(a.)  In  Spanish  it  may  be  said,  Cdrlos  es  ciego,  or  Cdrlos  esta  dcgo^ 
and  each  sentence  would  be  rendered  in  English,  "  Charles  is  blind." 
But  in  Spanish,  the  former  would  mean  that  Charles  is  blind  by  nature, 
or  permanently  hMndi'i  and  the  latter  that  Charles  is  in  a  state  of  blind- 
ness for  the  time  being  only,  which  might  be  the  case  from  temporary 
illness,  or  from  dust  thrown  into  his  eyes.  Esta  muger  es  loca,  means 
"  this  woman  is  insane,"  that  is,  permanently  destitute  of  reason ;  and 
esta  muger  esta  loca,  means  "  this  woman  is  frantic ;"  that  is,  in  a  tem- 
porary fit  or  phrenzy,  acting  like  a  madman.  In  this  latter  case,  cstd 
might  be  rendered  ^^  seems"  or  "appears"  as,  "this  woman  seevis  (or 
acts  like  one)  mad."  So  of  a  man  of  a  generous  disposition,  it  would 
be  said,  "he  is  (es)  generous;"  but  of  a  notorious  miser,  who  might 
happen  on  a  certain  occasion  to  exhibit  a  little  generosity,  it  would  be 
said,  "he  is  {esta)  generous ;"  that  is,  he  shows  himself  generous  for 
the  time  being,  though  generosity  is  no  real  trait  in  his  character.  Marm 
esjoveUy  means  "  Mary  is  young,"  that  is,  "Mary  is  a  young  woonan;" 
youthfulness  being  at  her  period  of  life  a  natural  (though  not  permanent) 
state.  We  can  also  say,  el  viejo  est^  j6ven,  "  the  old-man  is  young," 
that  is,  "  the  old-man  seems  young,"  "  has  a  youthful  appearance,"  or 
*'  acts  like  a  youth  ;"  estar  being  used  because  youthfulness  is  not  natu- 
ral to  his  years. 

1^*  The  right  manner  of  using  the  verbs  ser  and  estar  being  of  great 
importance,  and  yet  attended  with  some  difficulty  to  learners,  we  will 
give  a  few  more  explicit  rules,  the  substance  of  all,  however,  being  con- 
tained in  the  foregoing  remarks. 

334.  Ser  is  used  to  affirm  the  existence  of  essential, 
natural,  permanent,  or  characteristic  states  or  qualities  of 
the  mind,  persons  or  things,  and  to  affirm  what,  or  of  what 
a  person  or  thing  is,  was,  or  will  be ;  as. 


El  yelo  es  frio. 

El  plomo  es  pesado. 

Juan  es  bueno  y  sdbio. 

Soy  soberbio. 

Lundres  no  es  pequena. 

La  miel  es  dulce. 

El  hombre  es  polvo. 

Vmd.  es  rico.    Es  tarde. 

Perdonar  las  injiirias  es  obrar  como 

Cristianos.  « 

Pedro  era  capitan,  ahora  es  mayor, 

y  serd  coronel. 


Ice  is  cold. 

Lead  is  heavy. 

John  is  good  and  wise. 

1-am  proud. 

London  is  not  small. 

Honey  is  sweet. 

Man  is  dust. 

You  are  rich.     It  is  late. 

To-forgive  injuries  is  to  act  like 

Christians. 
Peter  was  captain,  now  is  majoi, 

and  will-be  colonel. 


OP   THE  VERB. 


165 


(a.)  The  natural  beauties  of  the  body,  and  its  defects  when  regarded  as 
permanent,  are  affirmed  with  ser;  as, 
Lucia  €s  hermosa.  I  Lucy  is  beautiful. 

Ella  es  corcobada  y  ciega.*  I  She  is  hump-backed  and  blind. 

(6.)  The  materials  of  whicK  any  thing  is  made  are  affirmed  by  ser ; 
also  the  possession  or  destination  of  any  thing ;  as, 


La  taza  es  de  oro. 
La  mesa  es  de  cedro. 
La  corona  es  de  la  reina. 
El  libro  es  mio. 
Cervantes  es  de  Alcala. 
Este  vino  es  de  Espafia. 
Esta  flor  es  para  Maria. 
La  carta  era  para  ^I. 
Es  de  dia.    Es  de  noche. 


The  cup  is  of  gold. 
The  table  is  of  cedar. 
The  crown  is  the  queen's. 
The  book  is  mine. 
Cervantes  is  from  Alcala. 
This  wine  is  from  Spain. 
This  flower  is  for  Mary. 
The  letter  was  for  him. 
It-is  day.    It-is  night. 


335.  Estar  is  used  to  affirm  the  temporary,  non-natural, 
accidental,  or  contingent  condition  or  location  of  persons 
or  things,  transient  emotions  of  the  mind ;  that  is,  to 
affirm  how  or  where  a  thing  exists,  existed,  or  will  exist,  at 
any  period  of  time  ;  as. 


Estoy  alegre. 

Estd  enfadado.    Yo  estdba  ciego.t 

El  tiempo  esfard  nublado. 

El  mar  estd  airado. 


I-am  merry. 

He- is  angry.    1-was  blind. 
V  The  weather  will-be  cloudy. 
The  sea  is  raging. 


(a.)  The  physical  changes,  and  state  of  the  health  of  the  animal  body, 
as  also  the  chemical  and  mechanical  changes  of  substances,  are  affirmed 
by  estar  ;  as. 


Ella  estd  enferma. 

Estojf  bueno.    Yo  estaba  cojo. 

La  leche  estd  dgria. 

El  agua  estd  caliente. 

Vmd.  estd  despierto. 

La  came  estaba  asada. 


She  is  unwell. 

I-am  well,    l-was  lame. 

The  milk  is  sour. 

The  water  is  hot. 

You  are  awake. 

The  meat  was  roasted. 


(6.)  In  affirming  any  manner,  situation,  position,  or  location  of  per- 
sons or  things,  estar  is  used ;  as. 


Juan  estd  de  moda. 
Estd  de  rodillas. 
Estoy  de  prisa. 
Estoy  de  tu  parecer. 


John  is  in  the  fashion. 
He-is  on  (his)  knees. 
I-am  in  haste. 
I-am  of  thy  opinion. 


•  That  is,  "  permaneHtly  Wine?."        f  That  is,  "  transiently  blind." 


166 


OF    THE   VERB. 


Clara  estd  en  la  igl^sia 

Estaba  en  la  calle. 

Estan  i.  la  puerta. 

La  comida  estd  en  la  mesa. 

I  Donde  estd  mi  padre  7 

Estd  en  la  cama. 

Estos  quisantes  ya  estdn  en  flor. 

Estd  entre  -dos  soldados. 

Estaba  en  Paris. 


Clara  is  in  the  church 

lUe-was  in  the  street. 

They-are  at  the  door. 

The  dinner  is  on  the  ta.  ile. 

Where  is  my  father  7 

He-i5  in  bed. 

These  peas  are  already  in  blossom. 

He-i5  between  two  soldiers. 

Hq-wos  in  Paris. 


(c.)  Estar  (and  not  ser)  is  always  employed  before  the  gerund,  since 
this  serves  to  show  the  manner  of  being  occupied  ;  as, 


Jorge  estd  silbando. 
Ella  estard  reganando. 
EIlos  estdn  leyendo. 
Estoy  escribiendo. 


George  is  whittling. 
She  will-be  scolding. 
They  are  reading. 
1-am  writing. 


id.)  Estar  is  sometimes  used  with  a  preposition  to  form  a  particular 
idiomatic  phrase ;  thus  estar  sin  means  "  to  be  destitute  of;"  estar  d^ 
"to  understand ;"  estar  en,  "  to  be  resolved  on,"  "  to  know."     (See  338 
388,  a.) 

(c.)  Ser  and  estar  may  sometimes  be  used  with  the  same  adjective,  but 
in  such  cases  the  meaning  of  the  adjective  can  not  remain  the  same, 
since  ser  affirms  what  a  person  or  thing  is,  and  estar  affirms  how  it  is  for 
the  time  being ;  as. 


Es  bueno.    Estd  bueno. 
Es  malo.    Estd  malo. 
Es  callado.    Estd  callado. 
Es  cansado.     Estd  cansado. 
Es  vivo.    Estd  vivo. 
Esta  naranja  es  ^gria. 
Esta  naranja  estd  ^gria. 


He-is  good.    He-is  well. 

He-is  wicked.    He-is  ill. 

He-is  tacituTm.    He-is  silent. 

He-is  tiresome.    He-is  tired. 

He-is  lively.    He-is  alive. 

This  orange  is  sour  {of  a  sour  kincS). 

This  orange  is  sour  {unripe). 


g^p*  The  manner  of  using  ser  and  estar  in  forming  the  passive  voice, 
has  already  been  explained  (see  322  and  322,  a). 


IDIOMATIC    USE    OF    CERTAIN   VERBS. 

336.  Volver  d,  "to  return,"  "to  repeat,"  is  used  before  an  infinitive 
when  it  is  required  to  repeat  the  action  denoted  by  the  infinitive,  in 
which  case  the  adverb  *' again  ^'  would  be  used  in  English,  and  the 
infinitive  be  rendered  in  the  same  tense  as  volver;  as, 


VoM  d  verle. 


I-saw    him  again    (literally,   I-re 
turned  to  see  him). 


OF    THE    VERB.  167 

Volvio  d  escribir  la  carta.*  I  He-re-tDrotc  (oi   tarote  again)  the 

I      letter. 

337.  Acaber  de,  "  to  finish  from,"  is  used  before  an  infinitive  in  the 
sense  of  "  to  have  jttst"  and  the  infinitive  is  rendered  in  English  as  a 
past  participle ;  as, 

Juan  acaba  de  Uegar.  I  John  has  just  arrived. 

Acabo  de  verle.  I  1-havejust  seen  him. 

338.  Estar  para,  *'  to  be  towards,"  is  used  before  an  infinitive  in  the 
sense  of  *'fo  be  ready"  or,  "to  be  about  to ;"  as, 

Estaban  para  acabar  sus  estiidios.    I  They-tcere   about    to   finish    their 

I      studies. 

(a.)  Estar  por,  "  to  be  for,"  is  used  before  an  infinitive  to  show  that 
the  action  implied  in  this  infinitive  is  not  yet  performed,  but  that  there 
is  a  disposition  to  accomplish  it ;  that  is,  in  the  sense  of  "  to  be  not  yet," 
or,  "  to  have  a  mind  to;"  as, 

La  casa  estd  por  acabar.  The  house  is  to  finish,  i.   e.   the 

house  is  not  yet  finished. 

Estoy  por  ir  i.  verle.  l-amfor  going  (or  have  a  mind  to 

go)  to  see  him. 

(6.)  Quedarpor,  "  to  remam  tor,"  is  used  before  an  infinitive  in  the 
same  manner  as  estar  por,  in  the  sense  of  "  to  remain  yet;"  as, 

La  carta  quedapor  escribir.  I  The  letter  reTtiains  yet  to  write  (rc- 

1      mains  to  be  written). 

339.  Hdber  de,  "  to  have  of,"  is  used  before  an  infinitive  in  the  sense 
of  *'  to  be  to"  or  **must;"  as, 


No  han  de  hacer  uso  de  ellos. 
He  de  trabajar. 


They-are  not  to  {must  not)  make 

use  of  them. 
I  am  to  (I  mitst)  work  (or,  I  have 

to  work). 

340.  Tener  que,  "  to  have  what,"  is  used  before  an  infin  dve  in  the 
sense  of  '*/o  have  to,"  or  *•*  must;"  as, 

Tiene  que  levantarse  al  romper  del  I  Tie-has  to  rise  by  break  t "  day. 
dia.  nit   ' 

341.  Llegar  d,  "  to  arrive  at,"  is  used  before  an  infinitive  in  the  sense 
of  "  /o  com,e  to,"  or  "  to  succeed  in  ;"  as, 


♦  Literally,  "  he  returned  (or  repeated)  to  write  the  letter."  It  must 
be  kept  in  mind  that  this  is  the  usual  mode  in  Spanish  for  expressing 
the  repetition  of  an  action,  instead  of  using  a  word  corresponding  to 
"oj^at/i"  in  Eno^lish. 


168 


OP   THE   VERB. 


Cuando  el  hombre  Uega  d  gustar 
los  encantos  de  la  virtud,  la  pre- 
fiere  al  Ticio. 


When  man  cjmes  to  taste  the  de- 
lights of  virtue,  he-prefers  it  to 
vice. 


(a.)  Veiir  d,  "  to  come  to,"  is  used  as  Uegar  d,  in  the  sense  of  **  to 
zome  to;^'  as, 

Los  dones  vienen  d  ser  perjuiciales.  |  Gifts  come  to  be  injurious. 

342.  Tener  is  used  with  the  noun  in  such  expressions  as  to  be  hot^ 
told,  hungry,  thirsty,  afraid^  ashamed ;  thus,  to  have  heat,  to  have  hunger, 
to  have  fear,  etc. ;  which  in  English  must  be  rendered  by  the  verb  to  be 
and  the  corresponding  adjectives ;  as, 

7\*ene  hambre.     TVenc  temor.  \  He-is  hungry.    He-is  afraid. 

(a.)  Hacer  is  used  impersonally  before  nouns  referring  to  the  weatner, 
and  is  to  be  rendered  by  the  verb  to  be,  and  sometimes  with  the  adjec- 
tive; as, 
Hace  calor.     Hace  buen  tiempo.        )  It-is  hot.     It-is  fair  weather. 

343.  Tener  is  used  in  the  sense  of  "  to  6e,"  before  nouns  of  measure 
ment,  with  the  preposition  de  in  the  sense  of  "  in;^'  as, 

Goliath  tenia  de  altura  seis  codos  |  Goliath  was  in  height  six  cubits 
y  un  palmo.  !      and  a  span. 

344.  Gustar,  when  it  is  to  be  rendered  in  English  by  "  to  like,^'  has  for 
Its  nominative  case  in  Spanish  what  is  the  objective  in  English,  and  its 
objective  in  Spanish  is  the  nominative  in  English,  preceded  by  the  pre- 
position d,  the  sentence  generally  containing  what  in  English  would  be 
regarded  as  a  redundant  pronoun  (see  285,  b ;  285,  c) ;  as, 

I  he  gustan  i.  vmd.  patatas  7  I  Do  you  like  potatoes  ? 

Ella  me  gusta  i.  mi.  I  I  like  her. 

1^*  These  sentences,  rendered  more  literally,  mean,  **  do  potatoea 
Tplea^e  (or  suit)  youl"  "  she  pleases  me." 

345.  FaUar,  when  it  is  to  be  rendered  in  English  by  "  to  want,"  or 
"to  have  need  qf,"  requires  the  same  idiomatic  construction  of  the  sen- 
tence as  gustar  (see  344) ;  as, 

hefaltan  tres  vasos.  |  He  wants  (or  needs)  three  tumblers. 

A  Pedro  no  \ejalta  dinero.  I  l^ter  wants  (or  rueds)  not  money. 

g^F*  Rendered  more  literally,  these  examples  mean,  "  three  tumblers 
are  wanting  to  (or  needed  by)  him ;"  "  to  Peter  money  is  not  wanting." 

(a.)  Hacer  falta,  "  to  make  need,"  is  used  in  the  sanie  manner  as  gus- 
tar and  faltar  (see  344,  345),  in  the  sense  of  "  to  have  need  of,"  "  to  stand 
in  need  of;"  as, 

Me  hace  mucha  falta  el  consq'o  de  |  I  stand  in  much  need  of  your  ud- 
vmd.  I     vice. 


OP   THE    ADVERB.  169 

More  literally  rendered,  this  example  would  be,  "  the  advice  of 
your-ivorship  makes  much  need  to  {is  much  needed  by)  me." 

346.  PesaVy  when  it  is  to  be  rendered  in  English  by  "  to  repent  of" 
"  to  be  sorry  for"  is  subject  to  the  same  pecuharity  of  construction  as 
gustar  and/altar  (see  344,  345),  except  that  it  is  used  before  an  infini- 
tive with  the  preposition  de,  which  infinitive  would  in  English  be  used 
as  a  participle ;  as, 

A  Dies  le  pesa  de  haber  hecho  rey  I  God  repents  of  having  made  Saul 
i,  Saul.  I     king. 

E^"  "  It-repents  God  for  having  made  Saul  a  king,"  would  be  a  more 
literal  rendering  of  this  last  example. 


OF   THE  ADVEKB. 

347.  Adverbs  are  either  derivative  (or  primitive),  or  ad- 
verbial phrases.     (See  225  ;  225,  a.) 

348.  The  simple  adverb,  when  it  qualifies  a.  verb,  gener- 
ally comes  after  the  verb ;  as, 

La  religion  exprcsa  aitblimemenU  I  Religion  expresses  this  truth  sub 
esta  verdad.  I      limely. 

(a.)  There  can  be  no  regular  rules  given  for  the  position  of  the  adverb ; 
in  most  instances  it  may  vary  according  to  the  taste  of  the  writer 
Some  adverbs  generally  precede  the  verb;  such  are,  cuandOy  when; 
luego,  immediately ;  apenaSy  scarcely ;  cuanto,  as  much ;  donde,  where ; 
and  negative  and  interrogative  adverbs. 

349.  The  adverb,  when  it  qualifies  an  adjective  or  another  adverb 
generally  comes  before  the  word  it  qualifies ;  as, 

Ella  es  muy  ignorante.  I  She  is  very  ignorant. 

He  obrado  muy  neciamente.  I  I-have  acted  very  foolishly. 

350.  Adverbs,  like  adjectives,  admit  of  comparison ;  as, 

They-praise   more   the  dead  than 

the  living. 
They-receive    more    gladly    than 

they-give. 

(a.)  The  adverb  Ho  is  sometimes  used  in  comparisons  in  a  manner 
that  does  not  imply  a  negation,  in  which  case  it  would  be  re<lundant  in 
English,  and  might  h6  properly  omitted  in  Spanish ;  as, 

Mcjor  es  ci^  buen  nombre  que  no  I  Better  is  the  good  name  than  tha 
las  riquezas.  i     richra.       ;.••-: 

15 


Alaban  mas  i.  los  muertos  que  i.  los 

vivos. 
Reciben  mas  alegremente  que  dan. 


i70  OP   THE   ADVERB. 

351.  ik/uy,  '  very,"  "very  much,"  is  used  to  qualify  adjectives,  parti- 
ciples, and  other  adverbs,  but  is  never  used  to  modify  verbs.  Jkfuc/io, 
"much,"  "very  much,"  is  used  to  qualify  verbs  and  sometimes  adverbs 
of  comparison ;  as, 


Ella  es  muy  rica. 

Lucia  lee  Tnuy  bien. 

Para  amar  mucho  al  hombre,  pre- 

ciso  es  estimarle  mucho. 
Te  has  hecho  mucko  mas  poderoso 

que  nosotros. 


She  is  very  rich. 

Lucy  reads  very  well. 

In-order  to-love  a  man  miichj  it-is 

necessary  to  esteem  him  much. 
Thou-hast  made  thyself  much  more 

mighty  than  we. 


{a.)  Muy  sometimes  is  employed  to  qualify  nouns,  especially  at  the 
beginning  of  a  note  or  letter  addressed  to  any  person ;  as, 

Very  much  my  friend  {dear  friend). 


Muy  amigo  mio. 
Muy  caballero. 
Muy  seiior  mio. 

Muy  seiiora  mia. 


Very  much  a  gentleman  {dear  sir). 
Very  much  my  gentleman    {dear 

sir). 
Very  much  my  kdy  {dear  madam). 

(6.)  JBien,  joined  to  adjectives  or  adverbs,  is  equivalent  to  very ;  as, 
bien  rico^  "  very  rich;''^  and  to  verbs,  much ;  as,  el  behio  Men,  "he  drank 
mu£h." 

352.  Negative  adverbs  and  all  negations  generally  pre- 
cede the  verb ;  as, 

No  puede  escribir.  I  He-can  not  write. 

A  ninguno  diu  el  libro.  I  To  no-one  gave-he  the  book. 

(a.)  If  a  word  implying  negation  come  after  the  verb,  the  adverb  rto 
must  precede  the  verb ;  as. 

No  diu  el  libro  d  ninguno.  I  He-gave  the  book  to  no-one. 

No  tiene  nada.  I  He-has  nothing. 

{b.)  From  the  last  two  rules  it  will  be  seen  that,  in  Spanish,  it  can  be 
said,  nada  tiene,  or  no  tiene  nada,  "he-has  nothing;"  d  ninguno  hnbW, 
or  710  hablo  &  ninguno,  "he-spoke  to  nobody;"  ella  nunca  ha  hablado,  or 
ella  710  ha  hablado  nunca,  *'  she  has  never  spoken." 

(c.)  Nunca,  "never,"  and  jama*,  "never,"  are  sometimes  both  used 
in  a  sentence  to  give  additional  force  to  the  negation ;  as, 

Nunca  jamas  tendra  sed.  j  Never,  never  will-he- be  thirsty. 

{d.)  Jamas,  "never,"  is  used  with  siempre,  "always,"  in  the  sense  of 
"  ever  and  ever  ;"  as, 
Dios  reina  por  siempre  jamas.  \  God  reigns  for  ever  and  ever. 

(tf.)  Iji  interrogative  sentences,  jamas  is  rendered  by  ever  ip  -'iJnglish 
as,  I  hajamaa  hablado  t  "  has  he  ever  spoken  7" 


Yo  no  s4  nadar,  y  Juan  si. 


OP   THE    ADVERB.  171 

353.  Sif  "yes,"  and  no,  "no,"  when  used  after  verbs  in  such  sentences 
as,  "  he  replied  no,"  '* they  answered  yes"  " I  believe  not"  take  que  be- 
fore them  in  Spanish ;  as, 

Me  dijeron  que  no.  I  They-told  me  no. 

RespondiG  que  si.    Creo  que  no.       I  He  replied  yes.    I-think  not. 

(a.)  Si,  "  5'es,"  and  no,  "  no,"  serve  to  afl&rm  or  deny  what  is  predi 
cated  in  a  preceding  verb  without  repeating  the  verb ;  as, 

I  know  not  how  to  swim  and  John 
does  (yes). 
Ella  pueda  cantar,  pero  yo  no.  She  can  sing  but  I  can  not  {no). 

354.  Derivative  adverbs  are  nearly  all  formed  from 
adjectives,  by  suffixing  mentCy  which  in  Spanish  corres- 
ponds to  ly  added  to  adjectives  in  English ;  as, 

Cierto  ;  ciertamente.  i  Certain ;  certainly. 

Bastante  ;  bastdntemente.  I  Sufficient ;  sufficiently, 

(a.)  When  more  adverbs  than  one  ending  with  menfc  qualify  the  same 
verb,  the  suffix  mente,  for  the  purpose  of  preventing  a  disagreeable  repe- 
tition of  sound,  is  placed  to  the  last  adverb  only ;  as, 

Mi  dnimo  es  explicar  lisa  y  liana-  I  My  intention  is  to  explain  clearly 
mente.  I      and  plainly. 

g^"  It  would  not  be  more  correct  to  say  in  Spanish  explicar  lisa- 
mente  y  llanamente,  than  it  would  to  say  in  English  (what  the  Spanish 
idiom  literally  requires),  "  to  explain  char  and  plainly." 

355.  Two  or  more  words  used  in  connection  to  qualify  a 
verb  or  adjective,  are  called  an  adverbial  fhrase  or  adverbial 
locution  :  such  are  por  cierto^  "  for  certain ;"  a  lo  menos^  "  at 
least ;"  por  lo  comun,  ^'  in  general." 

Remark. — In  all  languages  there  are  certain  phrases  used  adverbially, 
the  words  of  which,  taken  collectively,  have  an  idiomatic  meaning,  but 
taken  separately,  would  make  no  sense.  Thus  in  English  the  adverbial 
locutions  "  by  and  by,"  "  at  least,"  ^^none  at  all,"  would  signify  nothing 
intelligible  if  taken  literally,  word  by  word ;  but  as  adverbial  phrases, 
they  are  very  expressive.  It  is  often  thus  in  Spanish :  a  mere  literal 
translation  of  the  words  will  do  little  or  nothing  toward  assisting  us  to 
comprehend  the  meaning.  Such  phrases  will  generally  be  found  explain- 
ed in  their  adverbial  sense  in  dictionaries.  Some  of  the  most  common 
are  given  in  the  list  on  the  next  two  pages. 


172 


OF   THE    ADVERB. 


356.  Explanation  of  certain  Adverbial  Phrases : 


ADVERBIAL  LOCU- 

MEANING  IN 

ADVERBIAL  LOCU-        MEANING   IN 

TIONS. 

ENGLISH. 

TIONS. 

ENGLISH. 

A  conciencia,       conscientiously. 

A  saltos  y  cOrco- 

A  la  verdad,          trvly. 

vos,                    by  fits  and  starts. 

A  vista  de  ojos,    evidently  ;    at    a 

A  la  corta  u  d  la 

glance. 

larga,                 sooner  or  later. 

A  sabiendas,        knowingly. 

A  ojos  cerrados,   without  reflcctum  ; 

Al  seguro,             securely. 

rashly. 

A'  buen  seguro,   certainly. 

Al  ojo,                  ai  sight. 

Antes  con  ^ntes,  as  soon  as  possible. 

Al  punto,              instantly. 

Ahora,  ahora,      just  now. 

A  tientas,              in  a  groping  man- 

A cuestas,             on  one's  shoulder 

ner. 

or  back. 

A  mas  tirar,          to  the  utmost. 

A  porfia,              emulously. 

A  tuerto  0  a  dere- r^/ii  or  wrong; 

A  gatas,                on  all.  fours. 

cho,                        hit  or  miss.       ^ 
A    secas    y  sin  without  prepara- 

A  coces,                by  dint  of  kicking; 

by  kicks. 

Hover,                    tion  or  advice. 

A  mas  correr,       ic^ith   the    utmost 

A  solas,                by  one's  self;  in 

speed. 

private. 

A  mas  tardar,       after  great  delay. 

A  buena  luz,         carefully  ;      with  \ 

A  la  improvista,  unexpectedly. 

dv^  examination.. 

A  trechos,            at  intervals. 

A  dos  luces,          ambiguously. 

A  una,                   together;  in  com- 

A trompa  y  tale-  helter-skelter;  con-\ 

pany. 

ga,                        fusedly.              \ 

A  la  continua,      continually. 

Baxo  mano,          in  an  underhand- 

A hecho,               indiscriminately. 

ed  manner.        \ 

Al  paso  que,         in  proportion  as. 

Bien  como,         just  as.                 \ 

A  pi^,                   on  foot. 

Casi  casi,              very  nearly.           A 

A  buen  hora,        early;  seasonably. 

Cuanto  intes,      as  soon  as  possible.  , 

A  la  hora,            at  the  nick  of  time. 

Cuanto  tiempo,    how  long. 

Algun      tiempo 

Cuando  m^nos,   at  least. 

hace,                 some  time  since. 

Cuando  mucho,   at  most. 

Alrev^s,              wrong   side   out- 

De contado,         readily  ;  immedi-  , 

wards;  on  the 

ately.                   \ 

contrary  way. 

De  seguro,            of  course.              '| 

A  mas  no  pode^  leith     all     one's 

De    cuando    en  from  time  to  time ;  \ 

might. 

cuando,                now  and  then,     j 

A  la  sordina,        noiselessly;  slyly. 

De  improvlso,      unexpectedly  ;  on  \ 

A  escondidas,    >  secretly. 
A  escondidillas,  J  stealthily. 

a  sudden. 

De  aqul  para  alii,  to  and  fro;  here 

Albuenpunto,    pointedly ;  oppor- 

and there. 

tunely. 

De  dntes,             of  old ;  of  yore. 

OP   THE   ADVERB. 


175 


Iadverbial  locu- 

MEANING  IN 

ADVERBIAL  LOCU- 

MEANING  IN 

1               TIONS. 

1 

ENGLISH. 

TIONS. 

ENGLISH.            1 

_De  continue,        conHnitallt/. 

La  semana  pasada,  last  week.           | 

De  intento,           purposely/. 

La  aemana  que 

• 

De  proposito,       on  purpose. 

viene,                next  week. 

jDe  hecho,             in  fact;  actually. 

Mucho  tiempo  ha,/on£^  time  ago.      \ 

JDe  noche,             by  night. 

Manana     a     la 

i 

IDe  dia,                 by  day. 

noche, 

to-morrow  night. 

j  D  e  salto,               suddenly. 

No  bien,              no  sooner;  scarcely,  \ 

De  por  si,            by  one's  self;  apart. 

No  mucho  ha,     5 

not  long  since  ;  a 

De  silla  d  silla,    face  to  face. 

short  time  ago.  I 

De  tropel,             in  corifusion  ;  pell- 

Por  atras,             \ 

behind.                   \ 

mell. 

Poco  ha. 

of  late;  lately. 

De  lance,               cheaply ;    second- 

Poco i.  poco, 

by  degrees. 

hand. 

Por  el  tanto,         < 

on   that  ground; 

De  repente,          suddenly. 

for  the  reason. 

De  rodillas,          on  one's  knees. 

Por  entonces,       < 

it  that  time.           j 

De  consiguiente,  consequently. 

Por  supuesto,       of  course.              | 

De  veras ;  de  verdad,  tridy. 

Por  puntos,         from  one  moment\ 

En  conciencia,    in  good  earnest. 

to  another.         ' 

En  especial,         especially. 

Por  salto,              on  a  sudden.         \\ 

En  seguida,          afterward. 

Por  lo  largo. 

along.                      i 

En  tanto,       >      in  the  mean  time  ; 
Entre  tanto,  )          whilst. 

Por  razon,            consequently. 

Por  fin,                finally. 

En  alguna  parte,  somewhere. 

Por  instantes,      incessantly. 

!En  ninguna  parte,noic/ierc. 

Por  poco,              but  little  ;  nearly. 

lEn  otra  parte,      elsewhere. 

Poraca6poralM,/j,ere  or  there. 

'En  alguna  otra  parte,somczc/iere  else. 

Por  encima. 

superficially.          il 

En  ninguna  otra 

Pocas  veces. 

ieldom.                   ! 

parte,                nowhere  else. 

Rara  vez,              not  often  ;  seldom.  \ 

En  cualquiera  parte,  any  where. 

Rato  ha, 

9hort  time  ago.      \\ 

En  adelante,        forward ;   in    the 

Sin  suelo,             without    bounds  ;\ 

future. 

to  excess.             , 

En  lo  sucesivo,    afterward  ;  here- 

Sobre seguro,       confidently :      se-j 

after. 

curely.                Ij 

El  afio  que  viene,nea:^  year. 

Sin  ton  y  sin  son,tri//Km/  rhyme  or\\ 

En  derechura,5y  the  most  direct  way. 

reason.                j 

En  piernas,           bare-legged. 

Sobre  manera,      excessively.            || 

En  resumen,        in  short;  briefly. 

Sobre  si,                separately;      «cZ-j| 

Hasta  no  mas,    to  the  highest  pitch. 

fishly. 

Hasta  que,            as  far  as. 

Tal  vez,                perhaps  ;  once  at  | 

^^y^\       I       now-a-days. 
Hoy  en  dia,  ) 

a  time.                1 

Una  vez,               < 

jnce.                      • 

iHoy  por  hoy,        i 

^his  very  day.       \ 

Ya  ha  rato,           some  time  ago.      \. 

174  OF   THE   CONJUNCTION. 


^^  Very  few  adverbial  phrases  can  be  literally  translated  ironi  one 
language  to  another  so  as  to  give  a  correct  idea  of  their  meaning :  thusu 
of  those  in  the  above  list,  d  mas  correr  literally  means,  *'  to  more  to 
run ;"  algun  tiempo  hace^  '*  some  time  it  makes ;"  d  mas  no  poder^  "  to 
more  not  to  be  able ;"  de  cuando  en  cuando,  "of  when  in  when;"  en  lo 
mcesivOf  "  in  that  which  is  successive."  Occasionally  such  a  phrase 
may  be  found  of  which  a  literal  translation  will  furnish  a  suflBcient  expla- 
nation of  its  meaning;  as,  en  ulguna  otra  partem  "in  some  other  part;" 
en  ningtma  parte^  "  in  no  part ;"  la  semana  pasada,  "  the  week  past ;"  la 
semana  que  viene^  "  the  week  which  comes;"  pocas  veces,  "few  times." 

357.  Adverbs  are  variously  classified  according  to  their 
signification,  as  follows : 

I.  Adverbs  of  time  ;  present,  past,  future,  and  indefinite, 
(a.)  Adverbs  of  time  present ;  as,  ahora,  now ;  hoy,  to-day. 
(6.)  Adverbs  of  time  past ;  as,  ayer,  yesterday ;  entonces,  then, 
(c.)  Adverbs  of  time  future ;  as,  manana,  to-morrow. 

{d.)  Adverbs  of  time  indefinite ;  as,  cuando,  when ;  siempre,  always ; 
lemprano,  early. 

II.  Adverbs  of  place ;  in  a  place,  to  a  place,  toward  a  place,  and  from 
ji  place. 

(a.)  In  a  place;  as,  donde,  where;  aqui,  here;  alld,  yonder;  dent? a, 
witliin. 
(6.)  To  a  place;  as,  ladonde?  whither?  acd,  hither, 
(c.)  Toward  a  place ;  as,  i  hacia  donde  ?  whitherward  7 
(d.)  From  a  place ;  as,  de  alii,  thence ;  de  donde,  whence. 

III.  Adverbs  of  order ;  as,  primero,  first;  fnalmente,  finally. 

IV.  Adverbs  of  quality ;  as,  confvsamente,  confusedly ;  bien,  well. 
V.  Adverbs  of  quantity;  as,  poco,  little;  bastdntemente,  sufficiently. 

VI.  Adverbs  of  affirmation  and  certainty;  as,  si,  yes;  ciertamente, 
certainly. 

VII.  Adverbs  of  negation  and  uncertainty ;  as,  no,  no ;  dudosamente, 
doubtfully ;  acaso,  quizd,  perhaps. 


OF   THE   CONJUNCTION. 

358.  Conjunctions  are  simple,  that  is,  such  as  consist  of  a 
single  word,  or  conjimctive  phrases,  such  as  consist  of  more 
than  one  word.  They  may  be  divided  according  to  their 
meaning  into  the  following  classes : 

I.  Copulative,  which  simply  unite  words  or  sentences  together;  as, 
y,  and  (see  226,  a) ;  iambien,  also. 


OP  THE   CONJUNCTION.  175 


II.  Disjunctive,  which  connect  words  or  sentences  at  the  same  time 
that  they  disjoin  the  sense ;  as,  6,  or  (see  226,  b). 

III.  Adversative,  which  express  opposition  of  meaning  while  they  con- 

nect ;  as,  mas,  but ;  pero,  but ;  sin  embargo,  notwithstanding. 

IV.  Comparative,  which  serve  to  compare  words  or  propositions ;  as, 

coma,  as ;  ast,  so  ;  como  si,  as  if. 
V.  Conditional,  which  express  a  condition  j  as,  si,  if;  con  tal  que, 

provided  that. 
VI.  Concessive,  which  serve  to  express  something  g^ran^ed;  as,  aunque^ 

even  if;  dado  que,  granted  that. 
VII.  Conclusive,  which  express  a.  conclusion  or  inference;  as,  de'aqui, 

hence ;  por  esto,  therefore. 
VIII.  Casual,  which  express  a  cause  or  reason  /  as,  porque,  because ; 
pucs  que,  since. 
IX.  Temporal,  which  serve  to  express  a  relation  of  time ;  -as,  dntea 

que,  before ;  despues  que,  after. 
X.  Final,  which  express  an  end  or  purpose;  as,  para  que,  that,  in 
order  that ;  dfn  de  que,  to  the  end  that. 

MANNER    OF   USING   CERTAIN    CONJUNCTIONS. 

359.  Sino,  meaning  "but,"  is  used  after  a  negative,  unless  the  verb  be 
repeated ;  and  pero  or  mas,  also  meaning  "  but,"  is  used  when  no  nega- 
tive  precedes  ;  as. 


El  reino  de  Dios  no  esta  en  pala- 

bras,  sino  en  virtud. 
Ella  es  hermosa,  pero  (or  mas)  no 

es  prudente. 


The  kingdom  of   God  is  not   in 

words,  but  in  power. 
She  is  beautiful,  but  she  is  not  pru 

dent. 


(a.)  If  after  a  negative  the  verb  be  repeated,  pero  or  mas  is  to  be  used 
instead  of  sino  ;  as, 
Ella  nolo  dijo  i.  Juan, pero  (or mas)  I  She  did  not  tell  it  to  John,  bui  she 

lo  dijo  a  Pedro.  I      told  it  to  Peter. 

360.  Sino,  meaning  "  except,"  is  used  after  an  interrogation  or  after  a 
negative ;  and  menos,  also  meaning  "  except,"  is  used  when  no  interro- 
gation or  negative  precedes ;  both  words  being  rendered  in  English  by 
"6w//"  as. 

Who  did  it  but  the  carpenter  7 
There-is  no    one  good,  but    God 
alone. 


I  Q,uien  lo  hizo  sino  el  carpintero  1 
Ninguno    hay  bueno,    sino    solo 

Dios. 
Vinieron  todos  menos  el  juez. 


They  all  came  but  the  judge. 


361.  The  conjunction  "but"  is  used  in  English  with  such  a  variety 
of  meanings  that  it  is  necessary,  before  rendering  it  into  Spanish,  to  find 
what  other  word  or  words  it  really  represents,  as  this  latter  word  or 
phrase  is  generally  tha  which  is  used  to  represent  it  in  Spanish ;  thus, 


176 


OF   THE  CONJUNCTION. 


(a.)  I  am-distant  from  death  but 

[only]  one  step. 
{b.)  We  have  but  [no  more  than"] 

five  loaves  and  two  fishes, 
(c.)  He-arrived  but  [not  till]  yester- 
day. 
(/^.)  I  can  not  but  [do  less  than]  go. 
^e.)  He  has  but  [done  no  more  than] 

gone  (i.  e.  he  has  but  just  gone). 
(./.)  But  [if  it  were  not]  for  me,  he- 

woiild-perish. 
{g.)  There-is  no-one  of  them  but 

[who  is  not]  is  a  general. 
{h.)  He- went  no  day  to-the  village 

but  [that  not]  he-returned  drunk. 


Un  solo  paso  disto  yo  de  la  muerte. 

No  tenemos  mas  de  (270,  a)  cinco 

panes  y  dos  peces. 
No  UegO  hasta  ayer. 

Yo  no  puedo  minos  de  ir. 
El  no  ha  hecho  mas  que  irse. 

Si  nofuese  por  ml,  ^1  perecerla. 

No  hay  ninguno  de  ellos  que  no  sea 

general. 
Ningun  dia  fue  al  lugar  que  no  vol- 

vi6  borracho. 

'  It  will  at  once  be  perceived  that  the  irregularity  in  the  use  of  the 

word  "  but "  is  chargeable  to  the  English,  not  the  Spanish  language.    In 

the  latter,  "but"  is  not  used  with  ten  different  meanings  as  in  English. 

362.  The  conjunction  "unless"  is  to  be  rendered  in  Spanish  hy  d 

menos  de  que,  or  by  the  word  or  words  which  it  really  represents ;  as, 

Nada  har^  d  menos  de  que  vmd.  le 

hable 
Ninguno  puede  hacer  estos  mila 


gros,  si  Dios  no  estuviqre  con  ^1. 


(a.)  He- will-do  nothing  unless  you 

speak  (may-speak)  to  him. 
{b.)  No-one  can  do  these  miracles 

unless  [if  not]  Gred  be  (should-be) 

with  him. 

363.  The  conjunction  "except,"  when  it  means  the  same  as  "unless," 
is  rendered  in  Spanish  in  the  same  manner  (362) ;  and  when  it  means 
privation,  as,  for  instance,  in  the  sentence,  "I  bought  all  his  books 
except  the  histories,"  it  is  rendered  hy  menos,  "less,"  "minus."  (See 
360.) 

364.  The  conjunction  "  whether  "  is  to  be  rendered  in  Spanish  by  si  or 
que,  and  sometimes  by  the  subjunctive  of  the  verb  ser :  as, 

(a.)  I  doubt  whether  [that]  thou- 

hast  any  oil. 
{b.)  I  asked  him  whether  [if]  his 


Dudo  que  tengas  aceite. 

Le  pregunte  si  su.  madre  vendria 


mother  would  come, 
(c.)  Whether  he-may  have  grapes 

or  not,  is  nothing  to  me. 
id.)   Whether  it  rains,  or  whether  it 

rains  not. 
(c.)   Whether  or  not  we-may-be  {let 

us  be  or  not)  worthy  of  such  an 

honor. 

365.  The  conjunction  "as"  is  rendered  by  "eomoy"  when  used  by  way 


Que  tenga  uvas  6  no,  nada  me  im- 

porta. 
Que  llueva  u  que  no  llueva. 

Seamos  6  no  dignos  de  tal  honra. 


OP   THE  CONJUNCTION. 


177 


of  comparison ;  by  asi  como^  when  followed  by  "  w ;"  by  cuando^  when 
it  means  "  when;"  and  after  mismo  by  que ;  as, 


(a.)  John  is  as*  strong  as  a  lion. 

(6.)  As  modesty  attracts,  so  disso- 
luteness repels. 

(c.)  He-saw  her  cw  [wheri]  he-was- 
going  home. 

(rf.)  It-is  not  the  same  to-promise 
as  to-fulfil. 


Juan  es  tan  fuerte  como  un  leon. 
Asi  como  la   modestia  atrae,  asi 

huye  la  disolucion. 
La  viu  cuando  iba  i  casa. 


No  es  lo  mismo  prometer  que  cum- 
plir. 

366.  The  conjunction  "  neither^"  followed  by  "  iior,"  is  rendered  in 
Spanish  by  ni;  and  "  nor"  also  by  the  same  word ;  as, 

Swear  not,  neither  by  heaven,  nor  I  No  jureis,  ni  por  el  cielo,  ni  por  la 
by  the  earth,  nor  any  other  oath.  I     tierra,  ni  otro  juramento  alguno. 

(a.)  At  the  end  of  a  sentence,  ^^  neither"  and  also  ^'either"  if  preceded 
by  a  negative,  are  rendered  by  tampoco;  as. 

She  will  not  do  it,  nor  he  either  (or  I  Ella  no  quiero  hacerlo,  ni  ^1  tam- 
neither).  1     poco. 

367.  The  conjunction  "  either"  followed  by  ^'or^"  is  rendered  in  both 
cases  by  6  (see  226,  b) ;  as, 

Either  he-is  a  knave  or  he-is  a  fool.  |  O'  es  picaro  6  es  tonto. 

368.  The  conjunction  " both"  followed  by  '* and"  is  rendered  by  asi 
or  tonfo,  and  the  "  and"  by  como;  as. 


(a.)  Both  John  and  James  will-be 

here. 
(6.)  Both  in  time  of  peace  and  in 

time  of  war. 


Asi  Juan  como  Diego  estaran  aqul. 

Tanto  en  tiempo  de  paz,  coTno  en 
tiempo  de  guerra. 

'  These  examples  might  be  rendered  by  "  as  well  as;"  thus,  "John 
as  well  as  James  will  be  here ;"  "in  time  of  peace  as  well  as  in  time  of 
war." 

369.  The  conjunction  ^Hest"  when  it  means  ^^ for  fear  that"  is  ren- 
dered by  710  ser  que;  when  it  means  *'  in  order  that  not"  by  para  que  no; 
and  when  it  means  simply  "that  not"  by  que  no;  as, 

(a.)  Thou  wilt-accompany  him  to 
Jiis  house  directly,  lest  any  acci- 
dent may-happen  to-him. 

yb.)  Love  not  sleep,  lest  want  may- 
oppress  thee. 

(c.)  We  were-careful  lest  you  should 
awake. 


Til  le  acompaiiar^s  a  su  casa  aJ 

instante,   no  sea   que  le  suceda 

algun  fracaso. 
No  ames  el  sueiio,  para  que  no  te 

oprima  la  indig^ncia. 
Cuiddbamos  de  que  nt  se  desper- 

tase  vmd. 


*  The  first  "as"  is  here  an  adverb,  qualifying  the  adjective  ' atrong.** 


178  OP   THE    PREPOSITION. 

370.  The  conjunction  "  rather"  when  used  in  the  sense  of  "  6u^,"  is 
rendered  by  drdes  or  drites  bien  /  as, 

I  do  not  owe  him  «inything ;  rather  I  Yo  no  le  debe  nada,  dntes  bien  41 
he  owes  me  something.  I      me  debe  algo. 

^^^  The  manner  of  using  other  conjunctions  will  be  found  in  other 
'  ins  of  the  work. 


OF  THE  PREPOSITION. 

371.  The  prepositions  are  employed  in  such  a  variety 
of  ways  in  Spanish  and  in  English,  especially  in  the  latter 
language,  that  each  one  is  not  always  to  be  rendered  from 
one  language  to  the  other  by  the  same  word.  Thus  de  is 
not  always  to  be  translated  into  English  by  of;  nor  of  into 
Spanish  always  by  de.  The  following  observations  will 
gerve  to  show  the  manner  in  which  the  prepositions  are  to 
be  used. 

372.  About,  when  it  means  "  through,"  is  rendered  by  por ;  when  it 
means  "on,"  by  sobre;  when  it  means  "within,"  by  en;  when  it  means 
"  of,"  by  de ;  as, 

Ella  iba  cantando  par  el  lugar. 


Locke  escribio  sobre  el   Cristian- 

ismo. 
EUos  estdn  en  el  pal^cio. 
No  habla  de  politica  en  piiblico. 


(a.)  She  went  singing  about  the 
village. 

(6.)  Locke  wrote  about  Christian- 
ity. • 

(c.)  They  are  about  the  palace. 

{d.)  He  does  not  talk  about  poli- 
tics in  public. 

373.  Above  is  rendered  by  soh':;  as. 

The  bird  flies  above  the  earth.  |  El  ave  vuela  sobre  la  tierra. 

374.  Against,  meaning  "in  opposition  to,"  or  ^^ contrary  to,"  is  render- 
ed by  contra;  as, 

(a.)  They  fought  against  the  Mexi-    Ellos  pelearon  coTdra  los  Mejicanos. 

cans. 
(b.)  Against  the  law.  Contra  la  ley. 

375.  After,  meaning  "  later  in  time,"  is  rendered  by  despues  de  ;  when 
it  means  "  according  to,"  by  d,  or  segun  ;  and  when  it  means  "  immedi- 
ately behind,"  \>y  tras  ;  ^s, 

(a.)  After  six  o'clock.  |  Despues  de  las  seis. 


OF   THE   PREPOSITION. 


179 


{b.)  After  the  French  fashion.  A^  la  moda  francesa. 

(c.)  After  this  manner.  Segun  este  modo. 

{d.)  He  throws  the  rope  after  the  Echa  la  soga  tras  el  caldero. 
bucket. 

376.  According  to    is  ytiidered   hy^segun^  and  sometimes   by  -para 
ton;  as, 
(a.)  According  to  the  ordera  of  your- 

worship. 
(6.)  According  to  him   it-is- worth 
nothing. 

377.  Among,  when  it  means  "  of  the  number  of"  is  rendered  by  entre 
or  T^ara  entre;  when  it  moans  "m  the  midst  of"  by  c?i  medio  de;  and 
when  it  means  "i/i,"  by  en  ;  as, 


Segun  los  ordenes  de  vmd. 
Para  con  ^1  no  vale  nada. 


(a.)  Among  the  men  tneje-is  not 
one  that  is  upright. 

[b.)  Among  friends  compliments 
are  unnecessary. 

(c.)  I  send  70  u  as  iambs  among 
wolves. 

{d.)  Among  many  inations  there- 
was  not  a  king  like  him. 


Entre  los  hombres  no  hay  uno, 

que  sea  recto. 
Para  entre  amigos  los  cumplimien- 

tos  son  escusados. 
Yo   OS  envio    como    corderos    en 

medio  de  lobos. 
En  muchas  naciones  no  habla  rey 

seraejante  i.  ^l. 


?J8.  Aty  when  it  denotes  "in"  or  ^^on"  is  rendered  by  en;  when  it 
denotes  proximity,  precedes  the  price  of  any  thing  or  the  time  of  day,  or 
means  "in  readiness  for  "  it  is  rendered  by  d;  as, 


(a.)  They  are  at  home. 

They  are  at  peace. 
(6.)  John  is  at  Rome, 
(c.)  They  are  at  sea. 
{d.)  At  the  bridge.     At  hand, 
(c.)  At  six  dollars  a  bushel. 

At  four  o'clock. 
if.)  He-is  at  my  command. 

At  work. 


EUos  estin  en  casa. 
Ellos  estan  en  paz. 
Juan  esta  en  Roma. 
Ellos  est^n  en  la  mar. 
At  puente.    A  la  mano 
A  seis  pesos  la  fanega. 
A  las  cuatro. 
Esti  <J  mi  mando. 
At  trabajo. 


379.  Before,  meaning  "  in  the  presence  of"  is  rendered  by  ante ;  mean- 
ing ^^  in  front  of"  or  the  opposite  of  behind,  by  delante  de;  meaning 
^precedence  in  rank,  or  previous  in  time  (that  is,  the  opposite  of  qfler),  by 
dntes  de ;  as. 


(a.)  The  cause  will-be  brought  be- 
fore the  judges. 
(6.)  He- went  before  them  to  point- 
out  the  way. 
(# .)  Prostrated  on  the  earth  before- 
the  ark  of-the  Lord. 


La  causa  se  Uevari  ante  los  jueces. 

Iba  delante  de  ellos  para  monstrar 

el  camino. 
Prostrado  en  tierra  delante  del  area 

del  Seiior. 


180 


OP   THE   PREPOSITION. 


A'ntts  de  los  Marqueses  van  lo8 

Duques. 
A^ntes  desmochecer,  A^ntes  del  disi. 


(d.)  The  Dukes  take-rank  be/are 

the  Marquises, 
(e.)  Before  night-fall.     Before  day. 

380.  Behind  is  rendered  by  tras^  or  detras  de;  as, 

Behind  the  door.    Behind  them.      |  TVas  la  puerta.    Detras  de  ellos. 

381.  Below  is  rendered  by  debajo  de;  as, 

Below  the  lip.  |  Debajo  del  libio. . 

382.  Between  is  rendered  by  en/re;  as, 

To-discern  between  the  good  and  I  Discernir  entre  lo  bueno  y  lo  malo. 
the  evil.  I 

383.  i?y,  meaning  "ai"  or  "in,"  is  rendered  by  c?«  (see  also  299,  a; 
323 ;  323,  b ;  331) ;  meaning  future  time  when^  by  para ;  meaning 
"close  to"  or  '*  along  side  of"  by  junto  d;  and  meaning  "through"  by 
por;  as, 


(a.)  By  day.    By  night. 

ip.)  I  shall-need  it  all  6y  Saturday. 

(c.)  Please  to  seat  yourself  by  the 

window. 
{d.)  He-has  made  himself  rich  by 

wicked  means. 


De  dia.    De  noche. 

Yo  lo  necesitar^  todo  para  el  sdbado. 

Sirvase  vmd.  sentarse  junto  d  la 
ventana. 

Se  ha  hecho  rico  por  males  me- 
dics. 


384.  ,Concemingj  meaning  "  about"  or  "in  regard  to"  is  rendered  by 
acerca  de  or  tocante  d  ;  as, 


(a.)    Concerning   that  which  we- 

have  spoken. 
(6.)  Concerning  (or  touching)  this 

affair. 


Acerca  de  lo  que  hemes  hablado. 
Tocante  d  esta  pend^ncia. 


385.  jPor,  meaning  "during;"  "on  account  of "  "for  the  sake  of"  or 
"in  behalf  of ;"  ^Hn  exchange  for ;"  "for  the  purpose  of  getting ;" 
*  as ;"  "  by"  (per)  ;  is  rendered  by  por  ;  and  when  it  means  "far  the  use 
of"  or  "  with  the  intention  of  going  to"  it  is  rendered  by  para ;  as, 


{a.)  Can  you  give  me  a  room /or 
this  night  7 

(b.)  They-think  that  for  much 
speaking  they-will  be  heard. 

(c.)  They-died/or  their  country. 

{d.)  I  will  give  him  my  flute/or  his 
violin. 

(e.)  To-go^  money. 

if.)  She  received  him  for  a  hus- 
band. 


i,Puede  vmd.  darme  un  cuarto  por 

esta  noche  7 
Piensan  que  por  mucho  hablar  «e« 

r^n  oidos. 
Murieron  por  su  pitria. 
Le  dar6  mi  flauta  por  su  violin 

Ir;?or  dinero. 

Ella  le  recibi6  por  esposo. 


OF   THE    PREPOSITION. 


181 


^  For  a  beginner  he  has  done  it 
well, 
(g-.)  How  vaMchfor  a  day  1 
{Ji.)  I-have-bought  it  for  my  wife, 
(i.)  He  set  out^br  Spa^. 


Para  un  principiante  lo  ha  hecho 

bien. 
i,Cu^nto/;or  dia7 
Lo  he  comprado  para  mi  muger. 
Salio  para  Espaiia. 


0*.)  For  is  sometimes  used  in  English  when  it  would  not  be  in  Span- 
ish ;  thus,  "  I  want  to  alight  for  a  moment,"  necesito  bajar  un  momento* 
Par  is  sometimes  used  in  Spanish  when  it  would  be  redundant  in  Eng- 
lish ;  as,  uno  vale  por  muchos,  "  one  is-worth  many." 

386.  From,  when  it  means  ^^ since"  or  "from  the  time  q/","  and  "q/* 
distance  from"  is  generally  rendered  by  desde  ;  in  other  cases,  by  de ;  as, 


(a.)  From  childhood  thou-hast- 
known  the  holy  Scriptures. 

(6.)  It-is  fifty  miles  from  Vera 
Cruz  to  Jalapa. 

(c.)  When  did  you  return  ^aTn-the 
country  1 

387.  /n,  meaning  "in  the  time  of 


Desde  la  ninez  aprendiste  las  sagra- 

das  letras. 
Hay  cincuenta  millas  desde  Vera- 

Cruz  a  Jalapa. 
I  Cuando  ha  vuelto  vmd.  del  cam- 

po7 

"  " within,"  and  " into"  is  rendered 


by  en;  when  it  means  "through  the  course  of"  or  "during"  by  por; 
and  when,  after  superlatives  or  other  adjectives,  it  means  "of,"  by 
de;  as, 


(a.)  In  the  winter.    In  Spain. 

(6.)  In  the  morning. 

(c.)  This  ward  is  one  of  the  best  in 

the  city. 
{d.)  Austere  in  disposition. 


En  el  invierno.    En  Espana. 

Por  la  manana. 

Este  barrio  es  de  los  mejores  de  la 

ciudad. 
Acre  de  genio. 


388.  Instead  of  is  rendered  by  por;  and  by  en  lugar  de,  when  it  means 
"  in  the  place  of;"  as. 

Vino  61  por  su  padre. 


(a.)  He-came  instead  of  his  father. 

(6.)  Archelaus  was-reigning  in  Ju- 

dea  instead  of  Herod  his  father. 


Arqueltis  reinaba  en  Jud^a  en  lugar 
de  Herodes  su  padre. 


389.  Into,  when  it  comes  after  the  verb  "  enter,"  and  when  it  means 
"inside  of,"  is  rendered  by  en;  but  after  all  verbs  of  motion  (to  ente-^ 
excepted)  it  is  rendered  by  d;  as. 


•a.)  Let-US-enter  into  this  grove. 
0.)  Pour  oil  into  the  lamp, 
(c.)  Let-US-go     into-the     dining- 
room. 

390.  Of  is  rendered  by  de;  as, 

A  friend  of  the  king. 


Entremos  en  este  bosque. 
Eche  vmd.  aciete  en  la  Mmpara. 
Vamos  al  comedor. 


1  Un  amigo  del  rey. 


391.  On  or  upon,  meaning  "along,"  is  rendered  by  en;  meaning 
16 


182 


OF   THE    PREPOSITION. 


^^thrmighy"  hypor;  meaning  "6y,"  it  is  rendered  hyde;  and  meaning 
"in  contact  w:-th  the  upper  surface  of  any  thing"  by  sohre;  as, 

(a.)  le-there  danger  on  (or  upon)    i  Hay  peligro  en  el  camino  1 

the  road  1 
(6.)  Nothing  ought  to  be  affirmed 

upon  mere  probability, 
(c.)  Man  lives  not  on  bread  alone. 
{d.)  It  is  wi  (or  upon)  the  chair. 


Nada  debe  afirmarse  por  una  mera 

probabilidad. 
El  hombre  no  vive  de  solo  pan. 
Estd  so6re  la  silla. 


(e.)  Sometimes  on.  is  rendered  by  d;  as,  d  caballo,  "on  horseback;"  ^ 
pie,  "  on  foot ;"  a  bordo,  "  on  board."  Upon^  after  the  verbs,  to  county  rely, 
etc.,  is  rendered  by  con;  as,  conto  con  la  amistad  de  Diego,  "  I  rely  upon 
the  friendship  of  James." 

(/.)  When  on  in  English  is  used  before  the  days  of  the  week  or  month. 
It  is  not  rendered  in  Spanish ;  thus,  ella  llego  aUi  el  sdbado,  "  she  arrived 
there  on  Saturday." 

392.  Ovi  of,  meaning  "  removed  from,"  "beyond,"  and  "outside  of," 
is  rendered  by  fuera  de ;  meaning  "  on  account  of"  by  por ;  meaning 
"from,"  by  de  ;  as, 


(a.)  Oi^/ of  danger. 

(6.)  Out  of  my  power. 

(c.)  I  have  beans  that  are  out  of  the 

ground. 
{d)  Ow^  of  friendship, 
(e.)  He-drinks  out  of  a  tumbler. 


Fuera  de  peligro. 

Fhiera  de  mis  alcances. 

Tengo  habas  que  est^n  fuera  de 

tierra. 
Por  amistad. 
Bebe  de  un  vaso. 


393.  Over  is  rendered  by  encima  de  when  it  means  "above;"  and 
otherwise  by  sobre  ;  as, 

(a.)  Over  the  window.  I  Encimu  de  la  ventana. 

(6.)  He- wept  over  the  city.  I  Lloro  sobre  la  ciudad. 

394.  Through,  meaning  "from  one  end  or  side  to  another,"  or  "o/i 
account  of,"  is  rendered  by  por;  when  it  means  "6y  reason  of,"  by 
c?e;  as. 


(a.)  He-traveled  through  Spain. 
(6.)  Through  the  fear  of  death  they 

were  in  bondage  all  their  life, 
(c.)  She  trembles  through  fear. 


Viajo  por  Espana. 

Por  el  temor  de  la  muerte  estaban 

en  servidumbre  toda  la  vida. 
Ella  tiembla  de  temor. 


395.  TV/Z  is  rendered  by  hasta;  as. 

The  office  is  open  till  ten  o'clock  at  I  La  oficina  estil  abierta  hasta  las 
night.  '      diez  de  la  noche. 

396.  To,  when  preceded  by  ^om,  in  such  phrases  as  "from  bad  to 
worse,"  "from  time  to  time,"  is  rendered  by  en;  when  it  means  "of," 
by  fie ;  and  in  other  cases  generally  by  d  ;  as. 


OP   THE   PREPOSITION.  183 


De  dia  en  dia. 

Un  amigo  de  su  pitria. 

Un  tio  de  Juan. 

Dio  el  tintero  d  Maria. 


(a.)  From  day  to  day. 

(6.)  A  friend  to  his  country. 

An  uncle  to  John. 
(» )  He-gave  the  inkstand  to  Mary. 

397.  Totcards  is  rendered  by  A^cia ;  as, 

Here  comes  towards  us  the  lady  of  I  Aqul  viene  hdcia  nosotros  la  sefiora 
the  house.  I     de  la  casa. 

398.  Under  is  rendered  by  debajo  de  or  bajo  ;  as, 

Under  the  bridge.    Under  the  table.  |  Pebajo  del  puente.    Bajo  la  mesa, 

(a.)  Under  is  rendered  by  so  in  the  following  phrases,  so  capa  de, 
*' under  cover  of;"  so  color  de,  ^^  under  color  of,"  so  pena  de^  '^  under 
penalty  of;"  so  pretexto  de,  "under  pretext  of." 

399.  With,  when  meaning  "of"  or  "from"  or  "by,"  is  rendered  by 
de  /  in  most  other  cases  by  con ;  as, 

(a.)  We-are  covered  with  dust. 

(6.)  We  are-dying  with  cold. 

(c.)  John  killed  him  with  a  sabre- 
stroke. 

(d.)  With  permission  of  the  cap- 
tain. 

400.  Within  is  rendered  by  dentro  de  ;  as, 

1-shall-need  it  within  three  days.       |  Lo  necesitar^  dentro  de  tres  dias. 

401.  Without,  meaning  "destitute  of,"  "with  exemption  from,"  is  ren- 
dered by  sin  ;  and  when  it  means  "  outside  of"  or  "  beyond,"  hyfuera 
de;  as, 

(a.)  Treat  me  without  ceremony. 

(6.)  To-buy  without  money. 

(c.)  They-cast  him  without  the  city. 


Estamos  cubiertos  de  polvo. 
Nos  morimos  de  Mo. 
Juan  le  mato  de  un  sablazo. 

Con  permiso  del  capitan. 


Trateme  vmd.  sin  ceremonia. 

Comprar  sin  dinero. 

Le  echaron  jTaera  de  la  ciudad. 


{d.)  Sin  in  Spanish  is  regarded  as  a  negative  preposition,  and  is  there- 
fore often  followed  by  a  negative  conjunction ;  as, 
Sin  otro  fin  ni  motivo.  I  Without  another  end  or  (nor)  mo 

I      tive. 

402.  There  are  other  prepositions  in  Spanish,  which,  as  they  can  be 
rendered  in  most  cases  by  the  corresponding  English  preposition,  offer  no 
difficulty  to  the  learner.  Such  are  para  con,  "  in  respect  to ;"  ademds 
de,  "besides;"  a  pesar  de,  "in  spite  of,"  "notwithstanding;"  cerca  de, 
"  near  to  i"  frente  d,  or  en  frente  de,  "opposite;"  en  orden  d,  "with 
regard  to '"  junto  a,  "adjoining;"  por  el  medio  de,  "across;"  durante, 
"  during." 

403.  The  preposition  entre,  "  between,"  when  it  comes  befort*  personal 
pronouns,  does  not  govern  them  in  the  objective  case  in  Spanish,  but  is 


184  OF   THE   INTERJECTION. 

followed  by  them  in  the  nominative ;  as,  "  entre  td,  y  yo"  (and  not  entrt 
ti  y  mt),  "  between  thee  and  me." 

404.  Prepositions,  as  in  English,  are  placed  before  the  word  which 
they  govern. 

(a.)  Care  must  be  taken  to  distinguish  the  use  of  the  same  word  in 
English,  whether  employed  as  a  preposition  or  an  adverb  or  conjunction. 
Thus  in  the  phrases  "after  breakfast,"  *^ before  dinner,"  the  words 
"  after  "  and  "  before  "  are  prepositions,  and  are  to  be  rendered  by  des- 
puesde  and  dntes  de,  respectively;  while  in  the  phrases,  "after  I  had 
departed,"  "before  I  had  dined,"  the  words  "after"  and  "6e^re"  are 
adverbs,  and  are  to  be  rendered  by  despues  que  and  dntes  que. 

{b.)  SeguUi  when  used  before  a  verb  in  Spanish,  is  not  a  preposition, 
but  an  adverb,  meaning  "according  cw;"  as,  segun  creo^  "according  as 
I-believe ;"  segun  paredo,  "  according  as  it-appeared." 

1^*  The  idiomatic  use  of  certain  prepositions  connected  with  verbs 
or  other  parts  of  speech  will  be  found  in  the  Appendix,  Number  III. 


OF  THE  INTERJECTION. 

405.  The  position  of  the  interjection  in  a  sentence  is 
determined  by  no  fixed  rules,  but  is  allowed  to  vary,  as  in 
English,  according  as  harmony  and  propriety  may  require. 

406.  The  interjection  ete^  "  lo,"  "  behold,"  is  used  with  the  first  objec- 
tive case  of  the  personal  pronouns  only,  being  joined  to  them  and  form- 
ing one  word ;  as, 
;^/cme!    lEteleX    iEtelal 


jEtelos  que  vienen 


Behold  me !    Behold  him !    Behold 

her! 
LOf  they  come 


(a.)  The  interjection  ^tf,  "see,"  "behold,"  is  prefixed  to  the  first  objec- 
tive case  of  personal  pronouns,  and  precedes  adverbs,  such  as  aqut, 
"  here,"  allt,  "  there ;"  as, 

/flcle  aqui !  jHela.  aqui !  I  Here  he  is !    Here  she  is ! 

/flelos  alll !  I  There  they  are  ! 

1^"  More  literally  these  exclamations  might  be  rendered,  "see  him 
hereP*  "  see  her  here  P'  "  behold  them  there  P^ 

407.  When  adjectives  are  employed  as  interjections,  they  are  followed 
by  the  preposition  c?e,  if  a  noun  or  pronoun  come  after ;  as, 
i  Desgraciado  deraV.  I  Unlucky  me !  (or.  Unfortunate  that 

I      I  am !) 

(a.)  The  interjection  ay  is  followed  by  de  when  used  before  a  noun  op 
pronoun;  as, 
t  Ay  de  me  (  |  Alas  for  me !  (or,  Wo  to  me !) 


APPENDIX  TO  PART  III. 

NUMBER  I. 


OF    PROSODY. 

408.  Prosody  properly  includes  the  principles  which 
pertain  to  the  sounds  of  a  language,  the  rules  of  syllabica- 
tion, accentuation,  quantity  of  the  syllables,  punctuation, 
and  versification. 

g^*  The  general  rules  of  pronunciation,  syllabication,  and  accentua- 
tion have  been  given  in  Part  I.  A  few  additional  remarks  on  these 
subjects  will  be  made  here. 

PRONUNCIATION. 

409.  In  Spanish  prosody,  words  are  classed  according 
to  their  accentuation,  into  agudas^  lianas^  and  esdrujulas : 
those  are  called  agudas  which  are  accented  on  the  last 
(ultimate)  vowel;  as^amar^Jiel,  amo^salio:  those  are  called 
lianas  which  are  accented  on  the  vowel  next  to  the  last 
(the  penultimate)  ;  as,  amo^  corre^  comia^  comiendo^  fortifica- 
ron^  orden :  those  are  called  esdrujulas  which  are  accented 
on  the  second  vowel  from  the  last  (the  antepenultimate) ; 
as,  logicOj  medicOj  gramdtica^  amdbamos. 

410.  The  accented  vowel  of  any  word  is  to  be  pronounced  with  a 
greater  stress  of  voice  and  longer  duration  of  sound  than  the  other 
vowels  of  the  same  word. 

(a.)  When  a  word  ends  with  an  unaccented  vowel,  this  final  vowel  is 
to  be  accented  rather  softly ;  as  came^  pronounced  in  ordinary  conversa- 
tion as  it  would  be  in  English  if  viTitten  cdr-ny. 

411.  In  ordinary  conversation,  as  well  as  in  reading  prose  or  scanning 
poetry,  two  vowels  of  the  same  name  coming  together,  the  one  being  at 
the  end  of  a  word  and  the  other  at  the  beginning  of  the  word  following, 
ere  made  to  glide  into  one  sound,  somewhat  prolonged ;  as,  La  amiga  . 

16* 


186  OF   PROSODY. 

ha*  venido,  proii>unced  la-amiga-a  venido;  Santa-Anna^   pronounced 
SanV-Anna. 

OF   VOWELS   FORMING   OR   NOT   FORMING   DIPHTHONGS    OR 
TRIPHTHONGS. 

412.  When  two  or  three  vowels  come  together  in  the 
Bame  word,  sometimes  thej  form  a  diphthong  (that  is,  a 
single  syllable),  and  at  other  times  two  syllables. 

413.  The  diphthongs  and  triphthongs  in  Spanish  are  di 
(or  dy)^  du,  ea,  ei  (or  e^/),  eo,  eu,  ia,  ie,  io,  iu,  oe,  6i  (or  6y), 
(?w.,t  ^^j  ^^,  ui  (or  ui/)y  uo  ;  idi,  iei,  udi  (or  udy)^  uei  (or 
uey).  Some  of  these  are  always,  and  others  not  always 
diphthongs,  as  will  be  seen  from  the  following  rules : 

(a.)  ule,  ao,  and  oa  are  never  diphthongs,  but  always  form  two  sylla- 
bles ;  as,  aecho^  nao,  canoa,  pronounced  a-e-cho,  nd-o,  ca-no-a. 

{p.)  Au,  ay,  ew,  cy,  iu,  ou,  oy,  uy,X  are  always  to  be  considered  as  diph- 
thongs ;  so  also  uay  and  uey  as  triphthongs.  Thus,  pdu-sa,  cam-brdy, 
deu-da,  vi-rey,  mu-da,  triun-fo,  es-toy,  Pa-ra-gudy.% 

(c.)  Aif  eiy  oiy  and  ia,  ie,  io  are  diphthongs  in  all  cases  except  when  the 
i  is  accented;  thus,  es-tdis,  rei-na,  sois,  no-tt-da,  tie-ne,  ne-ce-sd-rio^ 
When  the  i  is  accented  (whether  marked  or  not)  these  vowels  do  not 
form  a  diphthong ;  thus,  tra-z-do,  o-t-do,  por-fi-a,  na-vi-o,  fri-o.  If  io 
terminate  a  verb,  and  either  letter  have  the  marked  accent  over  it,  a 
diphthong  is  not  formed ;  thus,  co-mi-6,  te-mi-6. 

{d.)  Ea,  eoj  oe,  when  they  are  the  final  letters  of  a  word,  and  the 
accent  (whether  marked  or  not)  is  upon  the  preceding  syllable,  form  a 
diphthong;  but  in  all  other  cases,  two  syllables;  thus,  Bo-reas,  vir-gi- 
neo,  he-roe  i  and  se-a,  a-fe-dr,  i-de-a,  tro-Je-o,  po-e-ta. 

(e.)  Ua,  ue,  ui,  ilo,  uie  are  diphthongs  when  the  accent  is  not  on  the 
u;  as,  Ic-gua,  hue-vo,  rut-do,  rwC-tuo,  guien.  But  when  the  accent  is  on 
the  u,  they  do  not  form  a  diphthong ;  as,  e-fec-t^i-an,  gan-zH-a,  e-fec-iH-e, 
trii-e-no,  e-fec-tu-o. 

(/.)  la  are  not  a  diphthong  when  they  occur  in  the  terminations  of  the 
imperfect  tenses  of  the  indicative  and  subjunctive,  because  the  i  is  always 

*  H  being  a  silent  letter,  of  course  its  intervention  between  two 
vowels  does  not  prevent  their  union  of  sound,  as  required  by  the  above 
rule. 

t  The  diphthong  ou  is  seldom  found  in  Spanish  writings ;  never,  in 
fact,  except  in  foreign  proper  names. 

X  This  list  can  be  readily  remembered,  as  it  comprehends  all  the  diph- 
thongs ending  with  u  or  y. 

§  All  words  ending  with  y,  preceded  by  a  vowel,  it  must  be  kept  in 
mind,  are  accented  on  the  last  syllable. 


OP   PROSODY.  187 

to  be  accented  in  these  tenses,  whether  marked  or  not ;  as,  ha-bt-a,  ha- 
bt-a-mos^  a-ma-ri-a,  a-ma-ri-ais. 

{g.)  The  above  rules  are  general ;  yet  in  Spanish  poetry,  as  in  Eng- 
lish, vowels  which  ought  to  form  a  diphthong  are  sometimes  found 
forming  two  syllables ;  as,  rii-t-do,  sii-d-ve,  instead  of  rut-do,  sua-ve. 
So  likewise  two  vowels  which  ought  to  form  two  syllables,  are  often 
found  united  into  one ;  as,  poe-ta,  instead  of  po-e-ta. 

g^^  Thus  also  in  English  poetry,  two  vowels  which  properly  form 
two  syllables  are  often  united  into  one ;  as  in  the  words  potrer,  period, 
injluence. 

OF    VERSE    AND    RHYME. 

414.  A  verse  is  a  line  containing  a  certain  number  of 
poetic  feet^  or  syllables  arranged  according  to  certain  rules 
of  prosody.  There  are  many  kinds  of  verse  distinguished 
by  the  number  of  syllables  they  contain ;  this  constitutes 
the  metre  or  measure.  This  measured  division  of  sylla- 
bles, with  the  musical  cadence  of  the  voice  in  repeating 
them,  is  called  rhythm. 

415.  Rhyme  consists  in  the  similarity  of  sounds  at  the 
end  of  two  or  more  verses.  This  similarity  of  sound  may 
exist  between  one,  two,  or  three  syllables  of  different 
words  ;  sls,  pinior  and  jprimor  ;  vido  and  vesiido  ;  utiliddd 
and  habiliddd.  Yerses  without  rhyme  are  called  versos 
sueltos.  or  blank  verses. 

(a.)  Rhyme  in  Spanish  poetry  is  of  two  kinds ;  that  of 
consonance  {consondncia),  and  that  of  assonance  (asondncia). 
By  consondncia  is  meant  the  sameness  or  similarity  of 
sound  between  certain  vowels  and  consonants  :  as,  canto 
and  ianto.  By  asondncia  is  meant  the  rhyming  of  the 
vowels  alone ;  thus,  senorx,  espanola,  otra,  toda,  coma,  all 
rhyme  by  asondncia^  since  the  accented  vowel  and  final 
vowel  are  alike. 

416.  A  verse  terminated  with  a  word  that  is  accented 
on  the  last  syllable  is  called  verso  agudo  (see  409) ;  with 
a  word  accented  on  the  penultimate,  is  called  verso  llano  ; 
and  with  a  word  accented  on  the  antepenultimate,  is  called 
verso  esdrujulo. 


188  OP   PROSODY. 

(a.)  In  the  versos  llanos,  the  number  of  syllables  is  precisely  equal  to 
that  determined  by  the  metre ;  in  versos  agudos,  the  number  of  syllables 
is  one  less  than  that  indicated  by  the  metre  ;  and  in  versos  esdricjulos,  the 
number  of  syllables  is  one  more  than  that  belonging  to  the  metre ;  tlms, 

1  2  3  4         5  6  7  8 

Verso  llano.  Ha-  |  cien-  |  do    |  del  |  lo-  j  ro     |  mC-  |  fa. 

1  2  3  4         5  6  7 

Verso  agudo.        La    \  car-    |  ca-  j  ja-  j  da  |  sol-  |  to. 

1  2  3456789 

Verso  esdrHjulo.  De    j  to-      |  dos  |  los  |  es-  |  pe-   I  ci-    |  fi-  j  cos. 

^^  In  these  examples  the  metre  belongs  to  that  consisting  of  eight 
syllables,  and  every  verse  is  accented  on  the  seventh  syllable ;  but,  as 
will  be  perceived,  only  the  verse  llano  contains  the  number  denoted  by 
the  measure.     Versos  llanos  are  in  most  common  use  in  Spanish, 

417.  When  in  a  verse  a  word  ends  with  a  vowel  and  the 
following  word  begins  with  a  vowel  or  an  A,  the  final 
vowel  forms  a  diphthong  with  the  other,  and  both  are 
reckoned  only  as  one  syllable  ;  and  three  vowels  coming 
together  in  the  same  manner,  are  reckoned  as  one  syllable, 
the  sounds  of  each  being  made  to  glide  into  one  sound  ;  as 

due  un  j  tor-       j  do  en  |  a-  |  ques-  j  te  en-  \  gi.-  \  no. 

E'  hi-    j  cie-       |  se  a-   j  HI  j  su       |  ra-       \  pi-  j  na. 

Di-         I  jo  ^  u-  I  na       (  mo-  |  na      |  tai-      |  m^-  |  da. 

Sa-         I  lio-        I  se        j  del  |  cor-    j  ro,  y*  |  dl-  |  jo. 

(a.)  This  union  of  all  the  vowels  sometimes  does  not  take  place ;  thus 
when  the  second  word  begins  with  an  h,  or  when  there  is  a  natura 
pause,  or  when  the  conjunction  y  comes  between  two  vowels. 

Gran-  |  de  3s,  j  si  es  |  bue-  |  na,  \u-     |  na  6-  |  bra. 

Die-     I  tan-     |  la  el    j  cie-  |  go   |  y  el  |  m^n-  j  co 

EXAMPLES    FOR    SCANNING. 

Y  si  caigo,  4. 

I  Q,u6  es  la  vida  7  4. 

For  perdida        4. 

Yaladi,  3. 

Cuando  el  yugo  4. 
Del  esclavo,  4. 

Como  un  bravo     4. 

Sacudi.  3. 

g^*  The  figures  at  the  close  of  each  verse  indicate  the  number  of 

*  y,  when  a  consonant,  that  is,  when  it  begins  a  word,  can  not  tima 
form  a  diphthong  with  another  vowel. 


OF   PROSODY.  IW 

•yllables  whith  that  verse  contains,  when  scanned  according  lo  the  di- 
rection* fn  ihe  |>receding  rules. 

Pescadorcita  mia,  7. 

Desciende  i.  la  ribera,  7. 

Y  escucha  placentera,  7. 
Mi  c^ntico  de  amor ;  6. 

Sentado  en  su  barquilla,  7. 
Te  canta  su  cuidado,  7. 

Cual  nunca  enamorado        7. 
Tu  tiemo  pescador.  6. 

J.  DE  ESPBONCEDA. 

Todos  suave  reposo  8. 

En  tu  calma  i  oh  noche !  buscan,  8. 

Y  aun  las  ligrimas  tus  suenos  8. 
Al  desventurado  enjugan.  8. 

J.   DE   EsraONCEDA. 

Si  querer  entender  de  todo    9. 
Es  ridicula  presuncion,  8. 

Servir  solo  para  una  cosa      9. 
Suele  ser  falta  no  menor.      8. 

T.  DB  Iriabts, 

De  sus  hijos  la  torpe  avutarda         10. 
El  pesado  volar  conocia,  10. 

Deseando  sacar  una  crla  10. 

Mas  lijera,  aunque  fuese  bastarda.  10. 

T.  DE  Ibiabtk. 

Hubo  un  rico  en  Madrid  (y  aun  dicen  que  era  11 


Mas  n^cio  que  rico), 

6. 

Cuya  casa  magnifica  adomaban 

11. 

Muebles  esquisitos. 

6. 

i  Ldstima  que  en  vivienda  tan  preciosa, 

11, 

Le  dijo  un  amigo. 

6. 

Falte  una  libreria!  bello  adomo, 

11. 

U'til  y  preciso. 

6. 

T.   DE 

Ibiabtb. 

Cuando  veo  yo  algunos  que  de  otros  escritores  14. 
A  la  sombra  se  arriman,  y  piensan  ser  autores  14. 
Con  poner  cuatro  notas  6  hacer  un  proloquillo,  14. 
Estoy  per  aplicarles  lo  que  dijo  el  tomillo.       14. 

T.  DE  Ibiabtb 


*90  OF    PRUSODY. 

Remark. — These  vowel-sounds  at  the  end  of  one  word  and  beginning  of 
the  succeeding  word,  glide  into  one  diphthongal  sound,  just  as  in  the  fol- 
lowing distich  in  English  the  vowels  e  and  u  of  the  words  "  the-un- 
broken"  run  into  one  sound,  the  syllables  "^/ic"  and  "un"  forming  in 
the  metre  but  a  single  syllable  : 

"  With  naked  feelings  and  with  aching  pride, 
He  hears  the  unbroken  blast  on  every  side." 

S.  T.  Coleridge. 

418.  The  rhyme  must  always  begin  at  that  vowel  upon  which  the 
accent  is  placed  (whether  marked  or  not) ;  thus  in  versos  agudos,  the 
rhyme  is  to  begin  at  the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  syllable ;  in  versos  llanos, 
at  the  vowel  of  the  penultimate ;  and  in  versos  esdriijulos,  at  the  vown'* 
of  thr  antepenultimate ;  as, 

Agudo.  i  Cuan  presto  se  va  el  placer, 
Llano.    Como  despues  de  acordado, 
Agudo.  Da  dolor ! 
Agudo.  i  Como  ^.  nuestro  paracer 
Llano.    Cualquiera  tiempo  pasado, 
Agudo.  Fu6  mejor ! 

Jorge  Manriqite. 

IEllo  es  que  hay  animales  muy  cientificos 
En  curarse  con  varios  especificos, 
Y  en  conservar  su  construccion  org^nica 
Como  hibiles  que  son  en  la  bot^nica. 

T.  DE  Ibiabte. 


APPENDIX  TO  PART  III. 
NUMBER  IL 


A  SUMMAKY   OF   THE   RULES   OF   GENDER 
OF  SPANISH  NOUNS. 

419.  In  Spanish,  as  in  English,  all  nouns  which  from 
their  signification  refer  to  male  beings  are  masculine ;  as 
un  homhre^  a  man  ;  un  sombrerero,  a  hatter ;  un  juez^  b.  judge ; 
un  leon^  a  lion :  and  all  nouns  which  from  their  significa- 
tion refer  to  female  beings  are  feminine ;  as,  una  muger^  a 
woman ;  una  lavandera^  a  laundress ;  una  actriz^  an  actress ; 
una  leona^  a  lioness.  Such  nouns  are  said  to  be  masculine 
or  feminine  from  their  signification. 

420.  As  all  nouns  in  Spanish  (including  those  which  in  English  are 
said  to  be  of  the  neuter  gender)  are  considered  as  either  masculine  or 
feminine,  it  is  important  to  know  how  to  distinguish  the  gender  of  such 
nouns  as  are  properly  neither  masculine  nor  feminine  from  their  signifi- 
cation. The  following  simple  rules  will  show  that  the  gender  of  such 
nouns  depends  with  but  few  exceptions  on  their  terminations : 

421.  Nouns  that  terminate  in  a,  d,  ie,  umbre,  ion,  is,  or 
ez  (unless  they  may  be  masculine  from  their  signification ; 
see  419),  2iiQ feminine ;  as,  una  casa^  a  house;  la. pared,  the 
wall :  la  especia,  the  species  ;  una  costumbre,  a  custom  ;  una 
ocupacion,  an  occupation ;  una  tesis,  a  thesis ;  la  tez,  the 
complexion. 

(a.)  Nouns  that  terminate  in  ii  (that  is,  such  as  are  accented  on  the 
last  syllable)  form  an  exception  to  the  above  rule,  being  always  mascu- 
line. The  only  nouns  which  come  under  this  class  are  pie  and  all  its 
compounds;  as,  elpie,  the  foot ;  el  aguapie.  the  small-wine  j  unpunta- 
piSf  a  kick.     So  huscapie^  hincapie,  paspie,  ncUipie^  sobrepie,  traspie,  etc. 

422.  Nouns  that  do  not  terminate  in  a,  d,  ie,  umbre,  ion^ 
15,  or  ez  (unless  feminine  from  their  signification;  see  419). 


192 


RULES   OP   GENDER   OE   SPANISH   NOUNS. 


are  masculine  ;  as,  un  camino,  a  road  ;  un  buque^  a  ship  ;  el 
oleli^  the  gillifiower  ;  el  jabon^  the  ^ro-;? ;  el  caliz^  the  chalice , 
un  clariuj  a  clarion  ;  un  ^i^^iZ,  a  ^?t ;  un  ^^5,  a  ^^5  ;  un 
huracan^  a  hurricane  ;  un  convoy^  a  convoy. 

EXCEPTIONS  TO  THE  GENERAL  RULES  OF  GENDER. 

423.  The  nouns  in  the  following  list  B.Te  feminine^  though 
they  do  not  terminate  in  a,  d,  ie^  umbre,  ion^  is,  or  ez  : 


Aguachirle, 

sviaU-wine. 

Cargazon, 

cargo. 

Aguamiel, 

hydromel. 

Cariatide, 

cariatydes. 

Anagalide, 

pimpernel. 

Caries, 

cariosity. 

Anemone, 

anemone. 

Came, 

Jlesh. 

Anime, 

a  kind  of  resin. 

Carraspique, 

candy-tuft. 

Apocope, 

apocope. 

Castrazon, 

the  gelding-season 

Apofise, 

apophysis. 

Catanance,     > 
Catananque,  S 

the    plant    lion^s 

Apomeli, 

apomel. 

foot. 

Apostrofe, 

apostrophe. 

Castastrofe, 

catastrophe. 

Armazon, 

carcase. 

Catedral, 

cathedral-church. 

Ave, 

a  bird. 

Cerachates  (plu 

),wax-stones. 

Base, 

base. 

Cerrazon, 

cloudy  weather. 

Beladin,  i 
Beram,    J 

Cerviz, 

nape. 

a  sort  of  muslin. 

Champan, 

a  kind  of  sloop. 

Bezar,    ^ 
Bezoar,  \ 

Chile, 

a  sort  of  pepper. 

bezoar. 

Chinche, 

a  bug. 

Binazon, 

second  ploughing. 

Chochaperdiz, 

a  wood-cock. 

Bocacalle, 

end  or  opening  of 

Cicatriz, 

a  scar. 

a  street. 

CiclOide, 

cycloid. 

Cachunde, 

a  kind  of  paste. 

Clase, 

class;  rank. 

Cal, 

lime. 

Clavazon, 

a  set  of  nails. 

Caladre, 

a  species  of  lark. 

Clave, 

a  key-stone  f  key. 

Calicut, 

a  sort  of  sUk  goods. 

Clem^tide, 

clematis. 

CaUe, 

street. 

Clin, 

mane. 

Camedafne, 

spurge-olive. 

Codomiz, 

a  quail. 

Caniqui, 

a  sort  of  muslin. 

Cohechazon, 

last  ploughing. 

Capital,* 

capital-city. 

Col, 

cabbage. 

Car, 

end  of  the  mizen- 

Coliflor, 

cauliflower. 

yard. 

Colzal, 

colewort-seed. 

Caramel, 

a  kind  ofpUckard. 

ConcSide, 

conchoid. 

Cdrcel, 

prison. 

Conuide, 

conoid.                    i 

Cardamouri, 

a  kind  of  drug-dye 

Consonante, 

a  consonant. 

*  Capital^  ivhen  it  means  "  a  sum  of  TJWTTiey,"  is  masculine 


RULES   OF   GENDER    OP    SPANISH   NOUNS. 


193 


Central  uz, 

counterUghf. 

Faringe, 

pharynx. 

Conventual, 

convent-church. 

Fasces  (plural) 

fasces. 

Corambre, 

hides  of  animals. 

Fase, 

phase. 

Corriente, 

current. 

Fauces  (plural),  fauces.                  \\ 

Corte, 

court. 

Faz, 

face. 

{Cose, 

a  kind  of  measure. 

F^, 

faith. 

Cotangente, 

cotangent. 

Fiebre, 

fever.                     1 

Coz, 

a  kick. 

Fleme, 

fleam. 

1  Creciente, 

a  rise  of  waters. 

Flor, 

flower. 

Credencialj 

credential. 

Erase, 

phrase. 

Criazon, 

breed  of  animals. 

Frente, 

forehead. 

Crin, 

mane. 

Fretes  (plural), 

frets. 

Cruz, 

cross. 

Fronte, 

front. 

Cuspide, 

cuspis. 

Fuente, 

fountain. 

Dendrite, 

dendrites. 

F'ustan, 

fustian. 

Desazon, 

disquietness. 

Galactite 

fuller's  earth. 

Diucesi, 

diocese. 

Geitte, 

people. 

Diplas, 

a  species  of  serpent 

Goguerin, 

afrill. 

Doral, 

fy-catcher. 

Granazon, 

seeding. 

Egllope, 

a  sort  of  wild  oats. 

Grey, 

flock. 

Eglantine, 

smooth  speedwell. 

Hambre, 

hunger. 

Elipse, 

ell'psis. 

Haz, 

surface. 

Enjambrazon, 

swarming  of  bees. 

Helice, 

helix. 

Entrecanal, 

space  between  the 

Hemionite, 

liarV  s-tongue. 

Jiutings    of     a 

Kiel, 

gall. 

column. 

Higiene, 

hygiene. 

EpiciclGide, 

epicycloid. 

Hinchazon 

swelling. 

Epigrafe, 

epigraph. 

Hiperbole, 

hyperbole. 

Epipactide, 

epipcLctis. 

Hojaldre, 

a  sort  of  pan-cake. 

Eringe, 

fe.ld-eringo. 

Hoz, 

sickle. 

Escorpiode 

caterpillar. 

Hueste, 

host. 

Esferoide, 

spheroid. 

Imogen, 

image. 

Espicanarde, 

spikenard. 

Indole, 

temper.               • 

Estirpe,  • 

a  race. 

Ingle, 

groin. 

Estriga, 

screech-owl. 

Isagoge, 

introduction 

Etiopide, 

clary. 

1  Labor, 

labor. 

Etites, 

eagle-stone. 

|Lande, 

acorn. 

Extravagante, 

a  kind  of  papal 

Landre, 

swelling     of    the 

constitution. 

glands. 

Falange, 

phalanx. 

Lapade, 

acorn  shell-fish. 

Falaride, 

canary-grass. 

Lapislazuli, 

lapis  lazuli. 

Falce, 

sickle. 

Laringe, 

larynx. 

Paldetes  (plu.), 

tassels. 

Laude, 

a  tombstone  with 

j  Fame, 

i- ^ 

hunger. 

an  epitaph. 

17 


i94 


RULES    OF    GENDER    OF    SPANISH   NOUNS. 


Lee  he, 

mUk. 

Peplide, 

peplis. 

Lente, 

lens. 

Perdiz, 

partridge. 

1 

Ley, 

law. 

Perifrase, 

periphrasis. 

Liebre, 

hare. 

Piel, 

skin. 

Liendre, 

nit. 

Pir^mide, 

pyramid. 

Ligazon, 

contexture. 

Pixide, 

pyx. 

Lite, 

law-suit. 

Plebe, 

common  people. 

Loche, 

loach. 

Podre, 

pus. 

Lornbriz, 

a  sort  of  worm. 

Portapaz, 

portapax. 

Loor, 

praise. 

Prole, 

offspring. 

Luz, 

light. 

Prostaferide, 

prostqferis. 

Llave, 

key. 

Puches  (plural) 

a  sort  of  fritters. 

Madriz, 

place  of  a  qiiaiVs 

Raigambre, 

collection  of  roots. 

i 

nest. 

Raiz, 

root. 

Mano, 

hand. 

Rascazon, 

an    incitement  to 

Matriz, 

matrix. 

scratch. 

Melindre, 

sort  of  fritters. 

Razon, 

reason. 

Menguante, 

ebb-tide. 

Res, 

head  of  cattle. 

Meninge, 

meninges. 

Sal, 

saU. 

Merey, 

cashew-tree. 

Salazon, 

seasoning. 

MetrCpoli, 

metropolis. 

Sangre, 

blood. 

Miel, 

honey. 

Sardoniz, 

sardonyx. 

Mies, 

harvest ;  crop. 

Sarten, 

frying-pan. 

Mole, 

massiveness. 

Sazon, 

seasoning. 

Moral, 

ethics. 

Sebe, 

enclosure  of  high 

Muerte, 

death. 

pales. 

Nariz, 

nose. 

Sede, 

a  see. 

Nave, 

nave;  ship. 

Segazon, 

harvest-season. 

Nicle, 

a  species  of  agate. 

Segur, 

axa. 

Nieve, 

snow. 

Selenites, 

selenites. 

Noche, 

night. 

Seleiicide, 

a  species  of  bird. 

Nube, 

cloud. 

Seniles, 

seHnites. 

Oenate, 

fallow-finch. 

Serpiente, 

serpent. 

Palmachristi, 

palmachrist. 

Sien, 

temple  of  the  head. 

Palude, 

lake. 

Sierpe, 

young  serpent. 

Panace, 

all-heal. 

Simiente, 

seed. 

Pardfrase, 

paraphrase. 

Slncope, 

a  syncope. 

Paragoge, 

paragoge. 

Sinrazon, 

injustice. 

Panlije, 

parallax. 

Sirte, 

quicksand. 

Pareselene, 

mock-moon. 

Sistole, 

systole. 

Parroquial, 

parochial-church. 

Sobrefaz, 

superficies. 

Parte, 

part. 

Sobrehaz, 

surface. 

jPatente, 

patent. 

SobrellPive, 

double  key. 

;|Paz, 

peace. 

Sobrepelliz, 

surplice. 

RULES    OF    GENDER    OF    SPANISH    NOUNS. 


195 


Sobretarde, 

close  of  evening. 

Suerte, 

chance  ;  fate. 

Tarde, 

afternoon. 

Teamide, 

a  stone  repelling 

iron. 

Tilde, 

the  character  ("") 

over  n. 

Tingle, 

an  instrumentfor 

glaziers. 

Torre, 

tower. 

Tos, 

cough. 

Trabazon. 

juncture. 

Trabe, 

beam. 

Tragaluz, 
Tragazon, 
Trireme, 

sky-light, 
gluttony. 
tHreme. 

Troj,    ^ 
Troje,  J' 
Ubre, 

a  granary, 
udder. 

Urdiembre, 
Varice, 

warp, 
varix. 

Vocal, 

vowel. 

Voragine, 
Voz, 

vortex, 
voice. 

424.  The  following  nouns  are  masculine^  although  they 
have  the  terminations  which  belong  in  all  other  cases  to 
feminine  nouns : 


Agrion, 

a  species  of  tumor 

Argiritas  (plu. 

),   marcasites  of  sil- 

Agropila, 

German  bezoar. 

ver  mines. 

Ajedrez, 

chess. 

Aroma, 

odorant  principle 

Ajimez, 

an  arched  window 

of  plants. 

Alarguez, 

dog-rose. 

Artritis, 

arthrniis. 

Alcion, 

a  king-fisher. 

Aspid, 

a  species  of  ser- 

1 Alcribis, 

a  tube  for  bellows. 

pent. 

'  Alefris, 

a  mortise. 

Asturion, 

pony. 

Alerta, 

a  watchword. 

Ataud, 

coffin. 

Aljez, 

gypsum. 

Avion, 

martin. 

Almez, 

lote-tree. 

Axioma, 

axiom. 

Almirez, 

a  mortar 

Bastion, 

bastion. 

Almud, 

a  dry  measure. 

Berberis, 

barberry. 

Alguez, 

a  wine  measure. 

Biribis,  ^ 
Bribis,  I 

Alumbre, 

alum. 

a  sort  of  game. 

Amaiiris, 

a  kind  of  linen, " 

Brandis, 

a  kind  of  great- 

Anagrama. 

anagram. 

coai. 

Anilasis, 

analysis. 

Budion, 

peacock-fi^h. 

Anfion, 

opium. 

Busilis, 

the  point  of  diffi- 

Anis, 

anise. 

culty. 

Antlpodas  (plu 

.),antipodes. 

Calamis,  j 
Calanis, 

Antuvion, 

a  sudden  stroke. 

sweet-flag. 

Apocallpsis, 

apocalypse. 

Cam^dris, 

wild  germander. 

Aporisma, 

echymosis. 

Carpion, 

a  kind  offish. 

Apotegma, 

apothegm. 

Cazumbre, 

a  sort  of  cord. 

ArchMaud, 

a  kind  of  lute. 

Cencris, 

a  kind  of  serpent. 

Ardid, 

stratagem. 

Cercion, 

a  species  of  mock" 

Argema, 

anulcerofthe  eye 

ing  bird 

196 


RULES   OF   GENDER   OF    SPANISH   NOUNS. 


Gasped, 

sod. 

Lacris, 

fruit  of  rosemary. 

Chirrion, 

a  sort  of  cart. 

Laud, 

a  lute. 

Cicion, 

intermittent  fever. 

Lema, 

lemma. 

Clarion, 

crayon. 

Lid, 

conflict. 

Clima, 

climate'. 

Man^, 

manna. 

Col-pez, 

isinglass. 

Mapa, 

map. 

Cometa, 

comet. 

Morrion, 

murrion. 

Corion, 

chorion. 

Ndo, 

ship. 

Crisma, 

chrism. 

Pais, 

country. 

Cuatemion, 

union     of    four 

Paradigma, 

paradigm. 

things. 

Par^ntesis, 

parenthesis. 

Dia, 

day. 

Pariilis, 

gum-bile. 

Diafragma, 

diaphragm. 

Pez, 

fish. 

Diagrama, 

diagram. 

Planeta, 

planet. 

Dilema, 

dilemma. 

Poema, 

poem. 

Diploma, 

diploma. 

Postema, 

aposteme. 

Dogma, 

dogma. 

Prisma, 

prism. 

Drama, 

drama. 

Problem  a. 

problem. 

E'nfasis, 

emphasis. 

Progimnasma, 

essay. 

Enigma, 

enigma. 

Prois, 

ship-rope. 

Entimema, 

enthymeme. 

Relumbre, 

coppery  taste. 

Epigrama,     . 

epigram. 

Rondis,  ) 

face  of  a  precious 

Escorpion, 

scorpion. 

Rondiz,  S 

stone. 

Esperma, 

sperm. 

Sarampion, 

measles. 

E'stasis, 

ecstacy. 

Sintoma, 

symptom. 

Estilion, 

a  species  of  lizard. 

Sirascusis, 

syssarcosis. 

Prontis, 

frontispiece. 

Sistema, 

system. 

Gabion,  ^ 
Gavion,  \ 

Softt, 

sofa. 

gabion. 

Sofion, 

a  hoot. 

Genesis, 

genesis. 

Sofisma, 

sophism. 

Gis, 

crayon. 

Solivion, 

a   sudden  lifting 

Gldcis, 

glacis. 

up. 

Gorbion, 

a  kind  of  edging. 

Sud, 

south  wind. 

Gris, 

gray. 

Tapaboca, 

slap  on  the  mouth. 

Guion, 

standard. 

Tema, 

theme. 

Gurbion, 

gum-spurge. 

Teorema, 

theorem. 

Historion, 

a  tedious  story. 

Torticolis, 

torticollis. 

Idioma, 

idiom;  language. 

Tris, 

noise  of  breaking 

Jamis, 

a  kind  of  cotton 

glass. 

goods. 

Turbion, 

.  hurricane 

Jibion, 

cuttle-fish  hone. 

Viva, 

a  huzza. 

425.  The  nouns  in  the  following  list  are  of  both  gen- 
ders, and  of  course  may  be  used  with  the  masculine  and 


RULES   OP    GENDER    OF    SPANISH   NOtTNS. 


197 


the  feminine  article;    thus,  el  puente  or  la  puente,  the 
bridge. 


AlbaM, 

a  certificate. 

Mar, 

sea. 

*~ 

Anatema, 

anathema. 

Margen, 

margin. 

Arte, 

art. 

Nema, 

seal. 

Canal, 

canal. 

O'rden, 

order. 

Cisma. 

schism. 

Puente, 

bridge. 

Cutis, 

skin. 

Reuma, 

rheum. 

Dote, 

dowry. 

Tribii, 

tHbe. 

Emblema, 

emblem. 

426.  Some  nouns  are  applied  to  male  or  female  beings,  and  the  article 
in  such  cases  will  serve  to  distinguish  the  gender ;  thus,  el  cliente,  the 
male  client;  la  cliente,  the  female  client. 

427.  Some  nouns,  the  names  of  both  male  and  female  beings  are 
always  used  as  if  belonging  only  to  one  gender;  thus,  un  caracol,  a 
snail ;  una  serpiente,  a  serpent ;  un  salmon,  a  salmon ;  una  trucha,  a 
trout. 

428.  The  proper  names  of  cities,  towns,  villages,  and  islands,  etc., 
generally  take  the  gender  of  the  common  nouns  ciudad  (city),  villa 
(town),  lugar,  (village),  isla  (island),  mes  (month),  to  which  they  refer. 
Thus  Parts  is  feminine,  because  villa  is  understood ;  and  Fuencarrdl  is 
masculine,  because  lugar  is  understood.  But  it  must  also  be  mentioned 
that  many  proper  names  of  countries,  cities,  etc.,  follow  the  rule  cf  their 
termination.     Thus  Cairo  is  masculine,  and  Habana,  feminine. 

(a.)  The  names  of  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  are  feminin.;  the 
months  of  the  year  and  days  of  the  week  are  masculine. 

17* 


APPENDIX  TO  PART  III. 
NUMBER  III. 


IDIOMATIC    USE    OF   CERTAIN   ADJECTIVES 
AND  VERBS  WITH  PREPOSITIONS. 

429.  The  idiomatic  use  of  some  adjectives  and  verbs 
accompanied  by  prepositions  will  be  exhibited  in  the  fol- 
lowing list,  selected  chiefly  from  a  table  in  the  Grammar 
of  the  Spanish  Academy : 


Abocarse  con  alguno, 

to  confer  with  any  one. 

Aborrecido  de  todos. 

hated  by  all. 

Abrasarse  en  deseos, 

to  be  injlamed  with  desires. 

Abundar  deo  en  riquez  is, 

to  abound  with  or  in  Tic\cs, 

Abusar  de  la  amistad, 

to  abuse  friendship. 

Acabar  de  venir. 

to  have  just  come. 

Acordarse  de  lo  pasado, 

to  remember  the  past. 

Acre  de  genio. 

sour  in  disposition. 

Acreditarse  de  n^cio, 

to  show  one's  self  a  fool. 

Acreedor  d  la  confianza, 

worthy  of  confidence. 

Afirmarse  en  Jo  dicho, 

to  affirm  what  has  been  said. 

Ageno  de  verdad, 

foreign  to  truth. 

Agradecido  a  los  benef Icios, 

grateful  for  benefits. 

Agudo  de  ingenio, 

acute  in  intellect. 

Ahorrar  de  razones, 

to  be  sparing  of  arguments. 

Alabarse  de  valiente, 

to  brag  of  one^s  own  bravery. 

Alto  de  cuerpo, 

tall  in  stature. 

Ancho  de  boca, 

wide-mouthed. 

Andar  de  capa, 

to  go  with  a  cloak  on. 

Andar  d  cuerpo, 

to  go  without  a  cloak. 

Andar  d  gatas, 

to  go  on  all  fours. 

Andar  for  tierra, 

to  go  humbled  to  the  earth. 

Angosto  de  manga, 

tight-sleeved. 

Apasionarse  4  d^i  ^  por  alguno, 

to  be  enamored  with  any  one. 

Apearse  de  su  opinion, 

to  alter  one^s  opinion. 

Apercibirse  de  armas, 

to  prepare  one's  self  with  arms. 

OF   ADJECTIVES   AND   VERBS    WITH   PREPOSITIONS.       199 


Apercibirse  &,  6  para  la  batalla, 

(0  prepare  for  battle. 

Apetecible  61  gusto, 

desirable  to  the  taste. 

Apetecido  rfe,  6  por  todos, 

desired  by  all. 

Apiadarse  de  los  pobres, 

to  pity  the  poor. 

Apostar  6,  correr, 

to  bet  on  running. 

Apresurarse  a  venir, 

to  hasten  to  come. 

Aprobado  de.  cirujano, 

approved  as  a  surgeon. 

Aprovecharse  de  la  ocasion, 

to  improve  the  occasion. 

Apurado  de  medios, 

destitute  of  means. 

Arder  en  des^os, 

to  burn  with  desires. 

Arderse  en  quimeras, 

to  abound  in  quarrels. 

Arriniarse  a  la  pared, 

to  lean  against  the  wall. 

Atento  con  sus  mayores, 

attentive  to  one^s  betters. 

Aventajarse  a  otros, 

to  gain  the  advantage  over  others. 

Bajo  dt  cuerpo, 

low  in  stature. 

Ben^fico  o,  o  ipara  la  salud, 

good  for  the  health. 

Blanco  de  cutis, 

white-complexioned. 

Blando  de  corteza, 

soft-skinned. 

Blasfemar  de  la  vlrtud,            ^ 

to  blaspheme  against  virtue. 

Bordar  aZ  tambor, 

to  embroider  on  a  tambour  frame. 

Bordar  de  pasados, 

to  embroider  on  both  sides. 

Boto  de  punto, 

blunt  at  the  point. 

Bramar  de  corage, 

to  roar  from  passion. 

Brear  &  chasco, 

to  vex  with  joking. 

Bueno  de,  6  ipara  comer 

good  to  eat. 

Caber  de  pies. 

to  have  room  to  stand  on  one^s  feet. 

Calificar  de  docto, 

to  qualify  one  as  learned. 

Calzarse  a  alguno, 

to  manage  any  one.* 

Caminar  &  pi^, 

to  journey  on  foot.                  [I'obas. 

Capaz  de  cien  arrobas, 

capable  of  containing  a  hundred  ar- 

Cargarse  de  razon, 

to  maintain  one^s  own  opinion 

Chico  c?e  cuerpo, 

small  in  body. 

Comerse  de  invidia, 

to  pine  away  from  envy. 

Complacerse ' de^  6  en  alguna  cosa 

,  to  be  pleased  with  any  thing. 

Concebir  por  bueno, 

to  conceive  as  good. 

Conceptuar  a  alguno  de,6  por  sabio 

,  to  regard  any  one  as  wise. 

Concurrir  d  alguna  parte, 

to  meet  at  some  place. 

Conferir  con^  u  entre  los  amigos, 

to  confer  "wiih  friends. 

Confesarse  con  alguno. 

to  confess  to  any  one. 

Confesarse  de  sus  culpas, 

to  confess  one^s  faults. 

Conformarse  con  el  tiempo 

to  conform  to  the  times. 

Congratularse  de  alguna  cosa, 

to  rejoice  in  any  thing. 

*  Literally,  "  to  put  on  the  shoes  to  any  one ;"  meaning,  "  to  lead  any 
one  by  the  n  "^se." 


200       OF    ADJECTIVES    AND    VEPwBS    WITH    PREPOSITIONS. 


Consentir  en  algo. 

to  consent  to  any  thing. 

Constar  por  escrito, 

to  appear  in  writing. 

Contrapuntearse  de  palabras, 

to  revile  one  another. 

Contravenir  d  la  ley, 

to  violate  the  law. 

Contribuir  con  dinero, 

to  contribute  money. 

Correrse  de  vergiienza, 

to  be  ashamed.                      [benejits. 

Corresponder  d  los  benef  icios, 

to  make  return,  to  be  grateful  foi 

Crecido  de  cuerpo, 

increased,  or,  large  in  stature. 

Creerse  de  alguna  cosa, 

to  be  convinced  of  anything. 

Cumplir  con  alguno, 

to  discharge  one^s  duty  to  any  one. 

Cumplir  con  su  obligation, 

to  discharge  one's  duty. 

Cumplir  de  palabra. 

to  perform  by  word  only. 

Cutirse  al  aire, 

to  be  tanned  by  the  air. 

Dar  a  alguno  de  palos, 

to  strike  any  one  with  sticks. 

Dar  en  el  bianco, 

to  hit  the  mark. 

Dar  en  manias, 

to  be  foolish. 

Dar  o  reir. 

to  set  to  laughing. 

Dar  con  la  entretenida, 

to  put  off  with  words  and  excuses. 

Dar  con  uno. 

to  meet  a  person  sought  for. 

Dar  tras  uno, 

to  persecute  one. 

Dar  por  visto, 

to  suppose  as  seen. 

Dar  sobre  la  calle, 

to  overlook  the  street. 

D  arse  porven  cido. 

to  own  one^s  self  as  conquered. 

Delante  de  alguno, 

before  any  body. 

Dentro  de  casa. 

within  the  house. 

Desagradecido  d  alguno  beneflcio 

,  ungrateful  for  any  benefit. 

Desconfiar  de  alguno, 

to  distrust  any  one. 

Descono*cido  a  los  beneficios, 

ungrat^ul  for  benefits. 

Dividir  poi-  mitad. 

to  divide  into  halves. 

Dotado  de  ci^ncia. 

endowed  with  learning. 

Dudar  de  alguna  cosa, 

to  be  doubtful  concerning  any  thing. 

Echar  ^  alguno  a  patadas. 

to  force  any  one  out  with  kicks. 

Echar  de  manga, 

to  make  a  cat's  pg,w  of  one. 

Empaparse  en  agua, 

to  be  soaked  with  icater. 

Emparentar  con  alguno, 

to  be  related  to  any  one. 

Empenarse  en  algo. 

to  take  a  fancy  to  a  thing.        [part. 

Empenarse  por  alguno. 

to  recommend  any  one,  or  take  his 

Enamorarse  de  alguna. 

to  be  enamored  with  any  one. 

Encaramarse  en,por,6«o6r«  la  pared,  to  climb  up  or  over  the  wall.             \ 

Encenderse  en  ira. 

to  be  enkindled  with  anger. 

Enfermar  del  pecho. 

to  be  weak  in  the  breast. 

En  tender  de  alguna  cosa. 

to  understand  about  a  thing. 

Escaso  de  m^dios, 

limited  in  means. 

Espantarse  de  algo, 

to  be  frightened  at  any  thing. 

OF    ADJECTIVES,  AND    VERBS    Vl^lTH    PREPOSITIONS.       201 


Estar  d  la  orden  de  otro, 

Estar  de  buen  humor, 

Estar  de  viage, 

Estar  c?e,  6  en  pid, 

Estar  de  por  m^dio, 

Estar  en  ^nimo  c?e, 

Estar  en  lo  que  se  dice, 

Estar  'para  salir, 

Estar  por  aJguno, 

Estar  (algo)  por  suceder, 

Escusarse  coti  alguno, 

F^cil  de  digerer, 

Faltar  d  la  palabra, 

Paltar  de  algo, 

Fastidiarse  de  manjares, 

Fatigarse  de,  en,  u  por  alguna  cosa, 

i^'iarse  de^  o  en  alguno, 

Fuerie  en  condicion, 

Gordo  de  talle, 

Gozar  de  alguna  cosa, 

Guiado  dc  alguno, 

Guiarse  por  alguno, 

Gustar  de  alguna  cosa, 

Hacer  a  todo, 

Hacer  de  valiente, 

Hacer  de  escribano, 

Hacer  para^  u  por  salvarse, 

Hacerse  con  algo, 

Hincarse  de  rodillas, 

Holgarse  con^  6  de  alguna  cosa, 

Inapeable  de  su  opinion, 

Inductivo  de  error, 

Infecto  de  heregias, 

Ingrato  a  los  beneficios, 

Ingrato  con  los  amigos, 

Ir  con  alguno, 

Jugar  d  tal  juego. 

Largo  de  manos, 

Lastimarse  de  alguno, 

Leer  los  pensamientos  d  alguno, 

Limitado  de  talentos, 

Malquistarse  con  alguno, 

Mantenerse  de  yerbas, 

Maravillarse  de  alguna  cosa, 


to  he  at  the  service  of  another. 

to  be  in  a  good  humor, 

to  be  on  a  journey. 

to  be  on  foot;  to  stand. 

to  interpose. 

to  have  an  inclination  to. 

to  understand  what  is  said. 

to  be  ready  to  start. 

to  be  in  favor  of  any  one. 

to  be  (something)  near  happening. 

to  apologize  to  any  one. 

easy  to  digest. 

to  fail  in  one^s  word. 

to  be  wanting  in  any  thing. 

to  loathe  victuals. 

to  worry  one's  self  about  any  thing. 

to  confde  in  any  one. 

strong  in  temper, 

large  at  the  waist ;  thick  set. 

to  enjoy  any  thing. 

guided  by  any  one. 

to  guide  one^s  self  by  any  one. 

to  like  any  thing. 

to  be  ready  at  doing  any  thing. 

to  act  as  if  valiant. 

to  act  as  a  scribe. 

to  endeavor  to  save  one^s  self. 

to  provide  one's  self  with  any  thing. 

to  kneel  down. 

to  delight  in  any  thing. 

stubborn  in  one's  opinion. 

leading  to  error. 

infected  with  heresies. 

ungrateful  for  benefits. 

ungrateful  to  friends. 

to  agree  with  any  one. 

to  play  at  such  a  game. 

with  a  liberal  hand. 

to  have  compassion  on  any  one. 

to  read  the  thoughts  of  any  one. 

limited  as  to  talents. 

to  incur  the  haired  ot  any  one. 

to  Zirc  upon  herbs. 

to  marvel  at  any  thing. 


202      OF   ADJECTIVES   AND   VERBS   WITH ,  PREPOSITIONS. 


Mas  dc  cien  ducados, 
Matarse  en  trabajar, 
Mediano  de  cuerpo, 
Mejorar  de  empl^o, 
Menor  de  edad, 
Meterse  d  s^bio, 
Meterse  con  alguno, 
Meterse  en  todo,    ^ 
Meterse  en  los  peligros, 
Mirar  par  alguno, 
Molido  de  andar, 
Montar  d  caballo, 
Montar  en  mula, 
Montar  en  colera, 
Morir  de  poca  edad, 
Morirse  de  frlo, 
Mudar  de  intento. 
Murmurar  de  alguno, 
Nacer  con  fortuna, 
Nacer  ^ara  trabajos, 
Notar  d  alguno  de  hablador, 
Oblividarse  de  lo  pasado, 
Optar  d  los  empleos, 
Ordenarse  de  sacerdote, 
Pagarse  de  buenas  razones, 
Partir  por  mitad, 
Pasar  d  cuchillo, 
Pasar  de  Sevilla, 
Pasar  por  cobarde, 
Pasarse  con  poco, 
Pasarse  de  bueno, 
Peear  de  ignorante, 
Pedir  algo  d  alguno, 
Pedir  de  justicia, 
Pedir  en  justicia, 
Perecer  de  hambre, 
Persuadirse  d  alguna  cosa, 
Precedido  de  otro, 
Preciarse  de  valiente, 
Presumir  de  docto, 
Quedar  de  asiento, 
Quedar  de  pi4s, 
Q^uedar  en  casa, 
Q,uedar  por  andar, 


Tiiore  than  a  hundred  ducats, 
to  kUl  one's  self  with  labor. 
of  middling  stature, 
to  better  one's  employment, 
under  age  ;  minor, 
to  affect  the  sage, 
to  pick  a  quarrel  with  any  one. 
to  he  jack  of  all  trades, 
to  expose  one's  self  to  dangers, 
to  look  after  any  one's  interest, 
fatigued  with  walking, 
to  Tnount  a  horse. 
to  mount  a  mule, 
to  fly  into  a  passion, 
to  die  at  an  early  age, 
to  he  dying  with  cold, 
to  alter  one^s  mind, 
to  murmur  against  any  one. 
to  he  6or7i  to  a  fortune, 
bom  to  labor, 
to fnd  fault  with  any  one  as  a  talker, 
to  forget  the  past, 
to  seek  for  an  office. 
to  be  ordained  as  a  priest, 
to  he  satisfied  with  good  reasons. 
to  divide  into  halves. 
to  put  to  the  sword. 
to  go  beyond  Seville. 
to  pass  for  a  coward. 
to  he  satisfied  with  a  little. 
to  he  too  good. 
to  sin  through  ignorance, 
to  ask  any  thing  of  any  one. 
to  claim  in  law. 
to  sue  at  law. 
to  perish  with  hunger, 
to  be  persuaded  of  any  thing, 
preceded  by  another, 
to  boast  of  one^s  self  as  courageous, 
to  make  pretensions  for  a  man  of 
to  remain  in  a  spot.  [learning. 

to  remain  on  font, 
to  remain  at  home. 
to  have  to  go  farther. 


OF    ADJECTIVES    AND    VERBS    WITH    PREPOSITIONS. 


•203 


Quedar  j>or  valiente, 
Qiuedarpar  alguno, 
Recebirse  de  abogado, 
Redundar  en  beneficio, 
Revolver  hdciay  o  sobre  el 
Saber  a  vino, 
Saber  d  trabajos, 
Sacar  en  limpio, 
Salir  d  alguna  cosa, 
Salir  con  la  pretension, 
Salir  por  fiador, 
Servir  de  mayor-domo, 
Sordo  de  un  oido, 
Suplicar  de  la  sentencia, 
Suspirar^Jor  el  mando, 
Tenir  de  azul, 
Triunfar  de  los  enemigos, 
Utilizarse  en  6  con  alguna 
Vecino  al  trono, 
Vencerse  d  alguna  cosa, 
Vengarse  de  otro. 
Verse  con  alguno, 
Vestir  d  la  moda, 
Verstirse  de  paiio, 
Volver  por  la  verdad, 
VAlver  en  si, 


to  be  reputed  as  a  valiant  man, 

to  go  surety  for  any  one. 

to  be  admitted  as  a  counsellor. 

to  redound  to  the  benefit. 
enemigo,  to  return  to  the  enemy. 

to  taste  like  wine. 

to  be  acquainted  with  labor. 

to  clear  up  all  doubts. 

to  co-operate  in  any  thing, 

to  obtain  one's  end. 

to  act  as  surety. 

to  serve  as  major-domo. 

deaf  with  one  ear. 

to  supplicate  against  the  smtence. 

to  aspire  after  the  command. 

to  dye  in  blue. 

to  triwmph  over  the  enemy. 
L,        to  reap  benefit  from  any  thing. 

near  the  throne. 

to  conquer  one's  self  in  any  thing. 

to  revenge  one's  self  on  another. 
to  meet  any  one  (for  settling  differences). 

to  dress  according  to  the  fashion. 

to  be  dressed  in  cloth. 

to  stand  out  for  the  truth. 

to  come  to  one's  self. 


APPENDIX  TO  PART  III. 

NUMBER  IV. 


A  LIST  OF  THE   MOST  COMMON   IDIOMATIC 
PHRASES. 

430.  The  general  laws  of  the  Spanish  and  English 
languages  are  the  same ;  yet  there  are  many  forms  of 
expression  peculiar  to  each,  which  can  not  be  translated 
from  one  language  into  the  other  by  an  exactly  literal 
combination  of  words :  such  words  or  phrases  are  termed 
idioms, 

(a.)  In  English  we  speak  of  "playing  on  a  flute,"  while  in  Spainish 
the  same  idea  is  expressed  by  "  tocando  la  flauta,"  which  literally  means 
*'  touching  the  flute."  One  form  of  expression  is  as  good  as  the  other, 
since  those  who  speak  either  language  know  what  is  meant.  In  Eng- 
lish, "  what  o^clock  is  it  7"  is  a  very  common  colloquial  idiom,  which  in 
Spanish  is  expressed  by  %q\i4  hora  es7"  ("what  hour  is-it?")  In 
English  we  say,  " I  am  afraid"  " I  am  hungry ;"  while  according  to 
the  Spanish  idiom  it  would  be  said,  "I  have  fear,"  "I  huve  hunger." 
"  Hacer  gran  papel"  (which  rendered  literally  would  be,  "  to  make  ^rca^ 
paper  "),  is  a  Spanish  idiomatic  term,  meaning  "  to  make  a  great  dis- 
play" or  as  it  is  often,  though  not  very  elegantly,  said  in  English,  "  to 
make  a  figure,"  or  "  to  cut  a  dash."  These  two  latter  phrases  rendered 
literally  into  Spanish,  "  hacer  una  figure"  or  "  cortar  un  choque"  would 
be  as  little  understood  as  "  to  make  a  great  paper  "  would  be  in  English. 
Some  of  the  most  common  Spanish  idioms  will  be  given  in  the  follow- 
ing Ust  : 

431.  A. — When  in  English  the  indefinite  article  a  is  used  after  the 
price  or  rate  of  any  thing,  as  "  ten  dollars  a  yard,"  in  Spanish  the  defi- 
nite article  eZ  or  la,  or  the  preposition por  is  employed;  as,  "at  fifteen 
crowns  a  volume,"  a  quince  escudos  el  tomo  (or,  por  toTno). 

(a.)  When  a,  used  as  above,  comes  before  a  noun  implying  time,  the 
preposition  d  is  used  with  the  definite  article ;  as,  "  six  hundred  francs  a 
y^ear,"  seiscientos  francos  al  ano. 

432.  Above. — In  such  phrases  as  "  abate  mentioned,"  this  word  is  ren- 
dered by  ya  ;  as,  "the  author  above  cited,"  el  auior  ya  dtado. 


IDIOMATIC    PHRASES.  .205 

433.  Account. — "  On  no  account,"  de  ninguna  manera ;  "  on  your  ojc- 
count"  (that  is,  "for  your soAre "),  por  amor  rfe  vd. — "to  yoMX  account** 
(that  is,  "to  your  charge"  or  "  debt"),  d  cargo  de  vd. 

434.  Act — "  To  act  as"  is  rendered  by  hacer  de;  as,  ^^ he-acted  as 
porter,"  hizo  de  portero. 

435.  After. — This  word  in  such  phrases  as  "  ten  minutes  after  three," 
is  rendered  by  y ;  as,  it  is  twenty  minutes  after  eight,  son  las  ocho  y 
viente  minutes. 

436.  Ago. — This  word  is  generally  rendered  by  the  verb  hace  or  ha  (see 
304,  c) ;  as,  a  few  days  ago,  pocos  dias  ha,  or,  hace  pocos  dias ; — how 
long  ago  7  i  cuanto  tiempo  ha  7 — long  ago,  mucho  tiempo  ha ; — some  time 
ago,  hace  algun  tiempo  ;  a  while  ago,  hace  ya  mucho  tiempo. 

437.  Agree. — "  To  agree,"  when  referring  to  a  climate,  is  rendered  by 
vrohar;  as,  the  country  agreed  well  with  me,  me  probo  bien  el  pais. 

(a.)  "  To  agree,"  when  referring  to  food,  is  rendered  by  sentar  Hen; 
as,  coffee  does  not  agree  with  me ;  el  cafe  no  me  sienta  bien. 

438.  AU. — "  To  ail "  is  rendered  by  tener  or  doler ;  as,  what  ails  you? 
c  que  tiene  vd.  7  or,  i  que  le  duele  d  vd.  7 — nothing  ails  me,  nada  tengo, 
or  nada  me  duele. 

439.  Amiss. — "It  would  not  be  amiss  if,"  is  rendered  by  no  ser  malo 
que,  or  by  no  serfuera  del  caso  que  ;  as,  it  would  not  be  amiss  if  you  should 
go  there,  no  seria  malo  que  vd.fuese  alia,  or,  no  serta  fuera  del  caso  que 
vd.fuese  alld. 

(a.)  "Tb  take  amiss,"  is  rendered  by  llecar  d  mat;  as,  do  not  take  it 
aniss,  no  lo  Ueve  vd.  i.  mal. 

440.  And. — Such  sentences  as  "go  and  see  who  it  is,"  " go  and  open 
the  door,"  etc.,  would  be  rendered  in  Spanish,  "  go  to  see  who  it  is," 
"  go  to  open  the  door;  as,  vaya  vd.  i.  ver  quien  es ;  vaya  vd.  i.  abrir  la 
puerta. 

441.  Answer. — "Tb  answer"  when  meaning  "to  correspond  to,"  is 
rendered  hy  corresponder  d ;  as,  this  year's  crop  does  not  answer  our 
expectations,  la  cosecha  de  este  ano  no  corresponde  i.  nuestras  espe- 
ranzas. 

442.  As. — When  a*  is  used  after  such  in  the  sense  of  who,  in  Span'sh, 
the  relative  pronoun  is  employed ;  as,  all  such  as  went  there,  todos  las 
que Jueron  altt. 

443.  Aware. — "Tb  be  aware  of,"  is  rendered  by  saber;  as,  you  are  not 
aware  of  such  a  thing,  vd.  no  sabe  tal  cosa. 

444.  Become. — "  To  become,"  when  referring  to  entering  upon  some 
ofl&ce  or  profession,  is  rendered  by  hacerse  or  meterse  d  ;  as,  he  became  a 
carpenter,  se  hizo  carpintero  ;  he  became  a  knight,  se  meti5  i,  caballero. 

(a.)  Before  an  adjective,  "  to  become  is  rendered  by  hacerse ;  as,  he  be- 
came poor,  se  hizo  ^obre. 

(b.)  "  To  become,"  meaning  "  to  suit "  or  "  to  be  suitable  to,"  is  rendered 
by  sentar,  or  caer,  or  vcir  bien;  as,  this  hat  becomes  you  n^^rfectly,  este 

18 


206  IDIOMATIC   PHRASES. 

sornbrtro  le  sienta  d  vd.  perfectamente ;  that  suit  becomes  you  well,  ese 
vestido  le  cae  d  vd.  bien;  this  coat  becomes  you  well,  este  frac  le  va  d  vd, 
bien. 

(c.)  "  To  become  of^^  is  rendered  byscr  rfd  and  ^occr^c  de  in  the  phrase, 
"  what  has  become  ofi^  as,  what  vMl  become  of  my  brother  ?  ^  que  serd 
de  mi  hermano  ?  what  ^x«s  become  of  my  shoes  7  <j  ^c  se  ha  hecho  de 
mis  zapatos  7 

445.  Bespeak. — "  To  bespeak"  meaning  "^o  evince"  by  demosirar;  as, 
his  behavior  bespeaks  a  composed  mind,  su  porte  demuestra  un  dnimo 
tranquilo. 

446.  Bite. — "  To  bite"  is  rendered  by  quemar  in  such  expressions  as, 
this  mustard  bites  my  mouth,  este  mostaza  quema  la  boca. 

447.  BloiD.—^^  To  blow"  a  trumpet,  tocar  un  trompeia. 
(a.)  "  To  blow"  one's  nose,  sonarse  las  narices. 

448.  Break. — "  To  break"  a  horse,  domar  un  caballo. 

449.  Broad. — "  Broad  as  long,"  is  rendered,  iqual  en  iodo. 

450.  Care. — "  To  care  "  is  thus  rendered  in  such  expressions  as  these . 
what  care  II  i que  me  importa  d  mi?  I  care  nothing  for  his  laughing, 
no  se  me  da  nada  por  su  rdr.  Will  you  come  to  walk  7  I  don't  care  if  I 
do,  i  quiere  vd.  venir  dpaseo?  m,e  importa  poco  el  hacerlo  6  no  Jmcerlo. 

451.  Choose. — "  To  choose"  when  meaning  "/o  have  a  disposition  to" 
is  rendered  by  dar  la  gana;  as,  why  don't  you  tell  me  your  age  7  because 
I  don't  choose^  ipor  que  no  me  dice  vd.  cuantos  anas  tiene  ?  por  que  no  m« 
da  la  gana. 

452.  Coiue. — "  How  comes  that  7"  is  rendered,  i como  es  eso? 

453.  Conceit — "  To  be  out  of  conceit  of  any  thing,"  is  rendered,  perder 
el  gusto  por  alguna  cosa. 

454.  Confess. — " I  must  confess"  is  rendered,  debo  decir. 

455.  Confine. — "  He  is  coirfined  to  his  bed,"  is  rendered,  no  puede  salir 
de  la  cama,  or,  est^  en  cama  enfermo. 

456.  Count. — "  To  count"  meaning  "  to  regard"  or  ^^  hold  for  "  is  ren- 
dered by  tenerse  par ;  as,  he  counts  himself  a  learned  man,  el  se  tiene 
por  hombre  docto. 

457.  Depth. — "  In  the  depth  of  winter,"  is  rendered,  en  el  rigor  dd 
ininemo. 

458.  Do.* — "  To  do"  meaning  '^  to  make"  or  "to  perform"  is  render- 
ed by  hacer,  or  ejecutar,  or  obrar ;  as,  do  good  to  those  who  hate  you, 
haced  bien  d  los  que  os  aborrecen. 

(a.)  "  How  do  you  do  ?"  may  be  rendered,  i  como  le  va  d  vd.  ?  or  i  c6mo 
est^  vd.  7  or  I  como  se  halla  vd.  7   ^ 

459.  Else. — "  Nobody  dse"  is  rendered,  ninguna  otro  ;  '*  nothing  else" 
noda  mas. 


*  It  must  be  kept  in  mind  that  do  is  not  expressed  in  Spanish  when 
used  in  English  as  an  auxiliary  verb ;  thus,  does  he  know  7  would  be 
rendered,  i  sabe  ^1 7  knows  he  7 


IDIOMATIC    PHRASES.  207 

460.  End.— *^  My  hair  stands  on  an  end"  is  in  Spanish,  se  me  erizan 
)0S  cabellos, 

461.  Fair.—^^  To  play /air  "  is  renderedy  jugar  llmpio. 

462.  Fare. — "  To  fare  like"  is  rendered  by  traiarse  como;  as,  hefarei 
like  a  king,  se  le  trata  como  d  rey. 

463.  Fault.— ''To  he  in  fault  for,"  or  "to  be  to  blame  for,"  is  rendered 
by  tener  la  culpa  de ;  as,  am  I  in  fault  for,  or  am  I  to  blame  for  this  1 
I  tengo  yo  la  culpa  de  eso  ? 

(a.)  ''To  fnd  fault  with,"  hollar  que  decir;  as,  he  finds  fault  with. 
every  thing,  en  todo  halla  que  decir. 

464.  Fav(yr. — "  To  favor,"  meaning  to  resemble,  is  rendered  hy  pare- 
terse ;  as,  this  gentleman  favors  his  father,  este  caballero  se  parece  d  su 
padre. 

(a.)  "To  do  a  favor,"  hacer  un  favor;  as,  do  me  the  favor,  hagame  vd. 
el  favor. 

465.  Feel. — "  To  feel,"  referring  to  the  state  of  health,"  is  rendered  by 
sentirse  or  haUarse;  as,  how  do  you  feel  7  icomo  se  siente  vd.  ?  or  icomo 
se  halla  vd,  ? 

(a.)  "  To  feel  thirsty,"  "to  feel  pain,"  etc.,  are  rendered  by  tener;  as, 
I  feel  hungry,  tengo  hambre ;  I  feel  nervous  spasms,  tengo  espasmos 
nerviosos. 

(b.)  "  To  feel  the  pulse"  is  expressed  by  tomar;  as,  permit  me  to  feel 
your  pulse,  permita  vd.  que  le  tome  el  pulso. 

466.  FeUaw. — "Fellow,"  meaning  something  corresponding  to  or 
mated  with  another  thing,  is  rendered  by  companero  or  companera  ;  as, 
my  buckles  are  not  fellows,  mis  hebillas  no  son  compaiieras. 

467.  Figure. — "  To  cut  or  make  a  figure,"  hacer  papd  ;  as,  he  makes  a 
figure  in  the  world,  hace  papel  en  el  mundo. 

468.  Find.—"  To  find  one^s  self,"  referring  to  the  state  of  health,  is 
rendered  by  hollar  se,  or  sentirse,  or  pasar;  as,  how  do  you^Tic^  yourself? 
I  como  se  halla  vd.  7  ox  i  como  se  siente  vd.  7  or  icomo  lo  pasa  vd.  ? 

469.  Fit.—"  To  fit,"  meaning  "to  suit "  or  "  to  be  adapted  to,"  is  ren- 
dered by  sentar,  or  caer,  or  venirj  in  the  same  manner  as  "to  become" 
(see  444,  b). 

(a.)  "  To  think  fit"  is  rendered  by  parecer ;  as,  if  you  thinik  fit,  si  a 
vd.  le  parece. 

470.  Fond. — "To  be  fond  of"  is  often  rendered  by  ser  amigo  de  or  by 
ser  amante  de  ;  as,  Santa  Anna  is  very  fond  of  cocks,  Santa- Anna  es 
muy  amigo  de  gallos;  he  was  xery  fond  o/*  literature,  era  muy  amante 
de  las  letras. 

(a.)  But  more  frequently,  "  to  be  fond  of"  is  rendered  by  gustar  (see 
344) ;  as,  I  am  fond  of  singing,  d  mi  me  gusta  el  cantar. 

471.  Forbear. — "Not  to  forbear,"  meaning  "not  to  be  able  to  help  or 
avoid,"  is  rendered  by  no  poder  menos  de ;  as,  I  can  notforbea^  laughing 
at  it,  no  puedo  m^nos  de  rdrm^  de  eUo, 


208 


IDIOMATIC    PHRASES. 


472.  Glad. — "7b  be  glad"  is  rendered  by  alegrarse;  as,  I  am  ghd  to 
see  you  well,  me  alegro  de  verle  dvd.  bueno. 

473.  Handsome. — "Tb  look  handsome."     (See  look,  487.) 

474.  Happen. — "  To  happen  to  be"  haUarse  por  casualidad,  or  hallarae  ; 
as,  I  happened  to  be  there,  por  casualidad  me  hallaba  alii;  I  unfortu- 
nately happened  not  to  be  there,  por  desgrdcia  no  me  halle  allt. 

475.  Have. — "Tb  liave"  employed  in  the  sense  of  *'/o  desire"  is  ren- 
dered by  querer  or  pedir;  as,  what  would  you  have?  ique  quiere  vd.? 
or  I  que  pide  vd.  7  I  will  Aare  it  so,  a^i  lo  quiero. 

476.  Help. — ^^To  help  to,"  meaning  "to  serve  at  table"  is  rendered  by 
servir;  as,  shall  I  help  you  to  a  wing  of  this  capon?  i quiere  vd.  que  le 
sirva  un  ala  de  este  capon  7 

(a.)  "  To  help"  meaning  "to  avoid"  or  "to  prevent"  is  rendered  by 
remediar,  or  dejar  de  hacer ;  as,  I  can  not  help  it,  no  remediarZo,  or  no 
dejarto  de  hacer.  ^^Not  to  help"  meaning  ^^not  to  prevent"  is  rendered 
as  "  710^  to  forbear  "  (see  471) ;  as,  I  can  not  help  believing  it,  no  puedo 
m^nos  de  creerlo. 

{b.)  *'  There  is  no  help  for  it"  is  rendered,  no  tiene  remedio. 

477.  Hit. — *'Tb  hit  the  mark"  is  rendered  by  dar  en  el  bianco. 

(a.)  ^^To  hit  the  nail  on  the  head"  meaning  "to  come  to  the  point"  is 
rendered  by  dar  en  el  hito,  or  acertar,  or  dar  en ;  as,  you  hit  it  right,  or, 
you  hit  the  nail  on  the  head,  vd.  diu  en  el  hito,  or,  vd.  lo  acertu,  or,  dio  vd. 
en  ello. 

478.  How. — ^^How"  succeeded  by  " exer"  used  to  qualify  adjectives, 
is  expressed  by  por,  and  the  adjective  followed  by  the  conjunction  que  / 
as,  how  great  soever  your  merit  may  be,  por  grande  que  sea  vuestro  mer- 
ito :  how  ever  amiable  thou  mightest  be,  por  amable  que fueses. 

(a.)  ^^How  "  is  rendered  in  various  ways  in  Spanish,  according  to  its 
meaning  and  manner  of  use  in  English ; 


How  is  the  weather  7 
How  happy  I  am ! 
How  can  you  be  so  wicked  1 
How  well  it  fits  you  ! 
How  do  you  like  the  symphony  'I 
How  shall  we  spend  the  afternoon  7 
How  pure  and  healthful  is  the  coun- 
try air ! 


iQue  tal  tiempo  hace  7 
/Que  feliz  soy ! 

iComo  puede  V.  ser  tan  malo  7 
I  Que  bien  le  sienta  i.  V. ! 
I  Que  tal  le  parece  la  sinfonia  7 
lEn  que  emplearemos  la  tarde  7 
iCuan  puro  y  saludable  es  el  aire 
del  campo ' 


(6.)  The  following  examples  will  also  serve  to  show  the  manner  in 
which  "  how  "  before  an  adjective  or  adverb  in  English,  is  used  before  a 
verb  or  noun  in  Spanish;  thus, 


How  far  is  it  from  here  to  Madrid  7 

How  far  is  it  to  the  hotel  7 

How  long  is  this  street  7 

How  high  is  that  pillar  7 

How  much  do  you  ask  for  this? 


iCuanto  dista  de  aqul  i.  Madrid? 
iQue  distincia  hay  i.  la  fonda? 
iCu^d  es  la  estencion  de  esta  calle? 
cQjue  altura  tiene  esa  columna  7 
iCuanto  pide  V.  por  esto  \ 


IDIOMATIC    PHRASES. 


209 


How  many    miles   from    here    to 

Rome? 
How  often  does  the  steamer  sail  7 


iCuantas  millas   hay  de    aqui    a 

Roma  7 
iCon  que  frecu^ncia  sale  el  vapor? 


479.  In. — ^^Not  to  be  in  a  person,"  signifying  a  want  of  ahility^  is  ren- 
dered by  no  poder^  or  no  ser  capaz  de ;  as,  it  is  not  in  him  to  do  it,  no 
puede  hacerlo^  or  no  es  capaz  de  hacerlo. 

460.  Instant. — ^^Instant,^'  used  to  point  out  the  present  month,  is  ren- 
dered by  corriente  ;  as,  the  fifth  instant^  el  cmco  del  corriente. 

481.  Kind. — "To  be  so  kind  as,"  is  rendered  by  iener  la  bondad  de,  or 
ser  basf-ante  bondadoso  para ;  as,  be  so  kind  as  to  repeat  what  you  said, 
tenga  vd.  la  bondad  de  repetir  lo  que  ha  dicho  vd.,  or,  sea  vd.  bastante 
bondadoso  para  repetir  lo  que  ha  dicho. 

482.  Last. — ^^Last  week"  is  rendered,  lasemanapasada. 

483.  Laugh. — "To  laugh  in  ond*s  sleeve,"  reir  entresi. 

484.  Leave. — "Z/eare,"  meaning  ''^permission"  is  rendered  by  permiso 
or  licencia ;  as,  by  your  leave,  con  el  permiso  de  vd.^  or  con  lic^ncia  de 
vd. 

(a.)  ^^To  take  have  of"  is  rendered  by  despedirse  de;  as,  he  took  leave 
of  his  friends,  se  despidio  de  los  amigos. 

485.  Like. — "  To  like"  meaning  "  to  be  fond  of,"  is  rendered  by  gustar 
(see  344) ;  as,  do  you  like  chocolate  ?  i  le  gusta  6.  vd.  el  chocolate  ? 

(a.)  ^^To  like,"  meaning  "/o  suit,"  is  rendered  by  liallar ;  as,  how  do 
you  like  this  beer  7  i  como  halla  vd.  esta  cerveza  ? 

{b.)  ^^  To  like,"  meaning  ^^  to  wish,"  ^^  to  desire"  "  to  esteem,"  hy  querer; 
as,  who  likes  soup  7  i,  quien  quiere  sopa  ? — as  you  may-like  it,  como  vd. 
quisiere ; — he  likes  nobody,  el  no  quiere  a  nddie. 

(c.)  "//e  has  not  his  like,"  no  tiene  igual. 

486.  Long. — ^^Long  ago,"    mucho    tiempo    ha; — "long   afterward,"* 
nmcho  despues; — "  ere  long,"  antes  de  mucho ; — "  not  long  before,"  poco 
^jiies,  or  poco  tiempo  antes;  " how  long  is  it  7"  i,  cuanto  tiempo  hace  ? 

487. — Look. — "To  look  beautiful,  homely"  etc.,  is  rendered  by  parecer, 
or  tener  apariencia;  as,  how  handsome  she  looks!  ique  hermosa  ella 
parece  !  or  que  hermosa  aparencia  tiene  eUa. 

(a.)  "To  look  well,  ill,"  etc.,  is  rendered  by  tener  semblante,  or  tener 
cara  de ;  as,  how  does  he  look  ?  i  que  semblante  tiene  7  He  looks  sick, 
tiene  m.al  semblante,  or  tiene  semblante  de  enfermo,  or  tiene  cara  de  en- 
fermo. 

488.  Manners. — "Good  manners,"  buena  crianza; — he  has  no  man- 
ners, es  un  mal  criado,  or  po  tiene  crianza ; — I  shall  teach  you  Ijetter 
manners,  yo  te  ensenare  d  portarte  mejor. 

489.  Matter. — "To  matter,"  by  importar ;  as,  what  matters  it 7  ique 
importa  eso  ?— it  matters  not,  no  importa. 

(a.)  "To  be  the  matter  with,"  by  tener ;  as,  what  is  the  matter  with 
you  7  I  que  tiene  vd.  7  When  it  refers  to  illness,  doler  may  be  used,  ap 
in  ail  (see  438). 

18* 


210  IDIOMATIC   PHRASES. 

(6.)  "What  is  the  matter  7^^  (meaning  "what  is  going  on?")  ide  qu^ 
se  trata? 

490.  Mean. — *'7b  mean,"  signifying  "to  wish"  " to  express"  is  ren- 
dered by  querer  decir ;  as,  what  do  you  mean  by  that?  ique  quiere  vd. 
decir  con  eso  7 

(a.)  "  To  mean"  signifying  "  to  intend"  by  estar  en,  or  tratar  de ;  as,  I 
mean  to  go  to-morrow,  estoy  en  ir  man  ana ; — what  do  you  mean  to  do  7 
/  que  trata  vd.  de  hacer  ? 

ip.)  "  He  means  well,"  tiene  buenas  intenciones. 

491.  Mind. — "  To  mind,"  meaning  "  to  take  care  of,"  is  rendered  by 
ttner  cuidado  con ;  as,  mind  him,  ten  cuidado  con  el. 

(a.)  "  To  have  a  mind,"  by  tener  gana  ;  as,  I  had  a  mind  to  ask  him, 
yo  tenia  gana  de  pedirle  ;  I  have  a  great  mind  to  go,  muchas  ganas  tengo 
de  ir. 

{b.)  "  To  call  to  mind,"  by  traer  d  la  memoria;  as,  I  called  to  mind  the 
promise,  me  traje  a  la  memuria  la  promesa. 

492.  Miss. — "Tb  miss,"  meaning  "tojind  missing,"  is  rendered  by 
echar  menos ;  as,  he  missed  his  watch,  echo  menos  su  reloj. 

(a.)  "To  miss,"  meaning  "to  omit,"  by  dejar ;  as,  we  can  not  miss 
finding  it,  no  podemos  dejar  c?e  hallarlo. 
{b.)  "To  miss  the  mark,"  errar  eZ  bianco. 

493.  Mistress. — "To  be  mistress  or  master  of,"  meaning  "to  under- 
stand thoroughly,"  is  rendered  by  poseer;  as,  she  is  mistress  of  the  Eng- 
lish language,  ella  posee  Za  lengua  Inglesa. 

494.  Muster. — "To  pass  muster,"  meaning  "to  avail,"  is  rendered  by 
valer;  as,  such  excuses  will  not  pass  muster  with  the  judge,  semejantes 
disculpas  no  valdran  nadapara  con  eljuez. 

.  495.  Must. — "Must"  is  rendered  by  huber  de,  by  ser  preciso,  by  ser 
menester,  by  c?e6er,  or  by  tener  que;  as,  I  mits^  be  there  at  two  o'clock, 
he  de  estar  alti  d  las  dos; — I  must  go,  es  preciso  que  me  vaya; — I  must 
wash  my  hands,  es  menester  que  me  lave  las  manos ; — I  must  have  done 
it,  yo  hubiera  debido  hacerlo  ;  it  must  be,  debe  ser ; — I  must  go,  tengo 
que  irme. 

496.  Near. — "To  come  near  or  very  near"  doing  a  thing,  meaning 
"  to  have  like  to  have  done  it,"  or  "to  be  upon  the  point  of  doing  it,"  is 
rendered  by  estar  d  pique  de,  by  estar  er,i  punto  de,  by  estar  para,  hy  /al- 
tar poco  para  que,  or  by  por  poco  ;  as,  I  came  near  being  killed,  estuve  a 
pique  de  matarme ; — I  had  like  to  have  been  killed,  estuve  a  punto  de 
matarme ; — I  came  very  near  writing  to  thee  this  morning,  estuve  para 
escribirte  esta  manana  ; — they  were  very  near  being  punished,  poco  faliT 
para  que  Juesen  castigados  ; — I  was  very  near  falling,  por  poco  me  cat. 

497.  Need. — "To  need,"  or  "  to  stand  in  need  of,"  by  hacer falta  a;  hi, 
we  need  a  little  rain,  nos  hace  falta  un  poco  de  dgua;  John  stands  in 
much  need  of  your  advice;  d  Juan  le  hace  mucha  falta  el  consejo  de  vd. 
(see  345,  a).  "To  need  "  is  also  sometimes  rendered  by  necesitar,  or  by 
}i43Jber  menester. 


IDIOMATIC    PHRASES.  211 

498.  Next. — ^^Next  Sunday,"  el  domingo  que  viene,  or  el  domingo 
proximo; — "the  next  house,"  la  casa  inmediata; — "next  to  impossible," 
casi  imposihle. 

499.  Nothing. — "Tb  he  nothing  or  as  nothing  to  any  one,"  hy  nada 
iiiportar;  as,  that  is  nothing  to  me,  eso  nada  me  importa. 

(a.)  "To  be  good  for  nothing"  by  para  nada  servir  ;  as,  it  is  good  for 
nothings  para  nada  sirve. 

(6.)  "Tb  mean  or  signify  nothings"  by  nada  querer  decir;  as,  it  signi- 
Jles  nothing;  nada  quiere  decir. 

500.  Obligation. — "Tb  be  under  obligations  to"  by  deber favor  es  ;  as,  I 
am  under  many  obligations  to  him,  le  debo  muchos  favores. 

501.  Oblige. — "Tb  oblige"  meaning  "to  do  a  favor  Xo  anyone  and 
bring  under  obligations"  is  rendered  by  estimar ;  as,  you  will  greatly 
oblige  me  by  writing  to  me,  le  estimar^  a  vd.  mucho  que  me  escriba. 

(a.)  " To  be  obliged"  is  rendered  by  agradecer,  by  estar  agradecido,  or 
by  estar  reconocido;  as,  I  am  obliged  to  you  for  your  attention,  le  agra- 
dezco  a  vd.  su  atencion; — I  am  very  much  obliged  to  you,  le  estoy  d  vd. 
muy  agradecido,  or  le  estoy  a  vd.  muy  reconocido. 

502.  Offer.— "Not  to  offer  to  do  any  thing"  is  rendered  by  guardar  de; 
as,  do  not  offer  to  do  it,  guardese  vd.  de  hacerlo. 

503.  Old. — "Old"  when  referring  to  the  age  of  any  one,  is  rendered 
by  edad  or  ano  with  the  verb  tener  ;  as,  how  old  are  you  7  i  cuantos  anos 
tiene  vd.  7  ox  i  que  edad  tiene  vd.  7  I  am  twenty  years  old^  tengo  viente 
alios. 

504.  Opinion. — "To  have  a  high  opinion  of  one's  self,"  estar  muy  lleno 
de  s7  mismo  ;  as,  he  has  a  very  high  opinion  of  himself,  esta  muy  lleno  de 
si  mismo. 

(a.)  "  This  is  my  opinion"  by  esto  es  lo  que  yo  pienso. 

505.  Ought. — "Ought"  may  be  rendered  by  deber,  by  ser  menester,  or 
by  preciso  es ;  as,  you  ought  to  remember  that  we  must  all  die,  vd.  debe 
acordarse  que  todos  hemos  de  morir; — I  ought  to  go,  es  menester  que  me 
vaya. 

506.  Over. — "To  be  over"  in  trie  sense  of  "to  be  past,"  is  rendered  by 
pqsar;  as,  winter  is  already  orer,  pasoyael  inviemo ;  I  wish  that  the 
summer  was  already  over;  quiesiera  que  ya  hubiese  pasado  el  verano. 

507.  Own. — "To  own,"  meaning  "to  possess,"  by  ser  de;  as,  who 
owns  this  house  7  John  mvns  it,  i  de  quien  es  esta  casa?  es  de  Juan. 

{a.)  "To  own,"  meaning  "  to  confess,"  by  confesar  or  reconocer ;  as, 
she  owns  it,  ella  lo  confiesa. 

508.  Part. — "Tb  act  the  part  of,"  by  hacer  elpapel  de  ;  as,  he  acted  the 
part  of  an  emperor,  hizo  el  papel  de  emperador. 

(a.)  "For  my  part,"  by  por  mi  parte,  or  por  lo  qui  a  ml  toco,  or  en 
cuanto  d  mt. 

509.  Pass. — "To pass  compliments,"  by  hacer  or  dar  cumplimientos. 
{a.)  "To  pass  sentence,"  hy  pronunciar  la  sentencia. 

{"lO.  Past. — "To  be  past,"  meaning  "to  be  over,"  by  pasar  (see  506). 


212  IDIOMATIC    PHilASES. 

(a.)  "To  he  past"  meaning  "/o  be  more  than"  by  ser  mas  de;  as,  it  is 
past  four  o'clock,  son  mas  de  las  cuatro. 

(b.)  '•  He  is  past  recovery,"  no  hay  esperanzas  de  que  se  cure;  "he  is 
past  cure,"  esta  incurable. 

511.  Piece. — "Apiece,"  meaning  *^ each  oncy"  is  rendered  cada  uno ; 
as,  I  gave  them  ten  shillings  apiece^  les  dz  diez  chelines  a  cada  uno. 

512.  Play. — "To  play"  referring  to  musical  instruments,  hytocar; 
as,  he  plays  the  flute  very  well,  toca  lajlauta  muy  bien. 

(a.)  "  To  play"  meaning  "to  act  the  part  of"  by  hacer  ;  as,  he  plays 
the  fool,  el  hace  el  tonto. 

513.  Please. — "To  please"  meaning  "to  gratify"  or  "to  give  plea- 
sure" is  rendered  by  agradar,  by  dar  gusto,  or  by  gustar  (see  344) ;  as, 

^  the  proposal  pleases  me  very  much,  muchtsimo  me  agrada  la  propuesta ; — 
if  you  please,  si  vd.  gusta. 

{a.)  "To  please,"  meaning  *'/o  be  pleased,"  and  used  as  a  word  of  re- 
quest or  ceremony,  is  rendered  by  servirse;  as,  please  to  accept  this 
liomage,  sirvase  vd.  aceptar  este  homenage  ;  please  lend  me  two  pens,  sir- 
vase  vd.  prestarme  dos  plumas. 

514.  Pray. — "Pray,"  used  as  a  request,  as,  "pray  do  it,"  is  rendered 
by  servirse  (see  513,  a),  or  by  hacer  el  favor  de;  as,  pray  give  me  my  hat, 
sirvase  vd.  darme  el  sombrero,  or  hagame  vd.  el  favor  de  darme  el  som- 
bi  ero. 

515.  Rather. — "Rather"  is  generally  rendered  in  Spanish  according  to 
its  meaning  in  connection  with  the  accompanying  words  in  English; 
as,  1  would  rather  go  than  stay,  mas  quisiera  irme  que  quedarme  ;— this 
work  is  rather  dear,  esta  obra  no  deja  de  ser  cara  (literally,  "  this  work 
Jails  not  in  being  dear"). 

516.  Regard. — "With  regard  to,"  or  "in  regard  to,"  or  "as  it  re- 
gards," by  en  cuanto  d,  or  by  tocante  d;  as,  with  regard  to  what  you 
say,  en  cuanto  a  lo  que  vd.  dice,  or  tocante  a  lo  que  vd.  dice. 

517.  Respect. — "It  respects,"  meaning  "it  concerns,"  by  toca;  as,  it 
respects  you  directly,  toca  d  vd.  en  derechura. 

{a.)  "With  respect  to"  by  tocante  d,  or  by  con  respecto  d;  as,  with  re- 
spect to  what  you  say,  tocante  a  lo  que  vd.  dice. 

(6.)  "  In  some  respect,"  de  alguno  modo  ;— "  in  another  respect,"  por 
otra  parte  ; — "  out  of  respect  for  you,"  por  consideracion  d  vd. 

(c  )  "  To  give  one's  respects  to,"  dar  expresiones,  or  rendar  respetos,  or 
dar  memoHas  ;  as,  give  my  respects  to  him,  dele  vd.  mis  expresiones ; 
or  present  my  respects  (or  regards)  to  your  brother,  rinda  vd.  mis  respetos 
d  su  hermano. 

518.  Right. — "To  be  right  or  in  the  right,"  by  tener  razon ;  you  are 
right,  vd.  tiene  raion ;  you  are  not  right  (or  you  are  wrcng)  vd.  no  tiene 
razon. 

519.  Sake. — "  Por  God's  sake,"  por  amor  de  Dios ;  "for  yoxxr  soJca.^' 
por  respeto  i,  vd; — "do  it  for  my  sake,"  hdgalo  vd.  por  ml. 


IDIOMATIC    PHRASES.  213 

520.  Same. — "  To  be  all  the  same  to"  by  ser  todo  uno  para;  as,  it  is  all 
the  same  to  me,  para  tju  es  todo  uno. 

521.  Short. — ^^Short  of^^  meaning  ^^  not  to  have  a  supply  qf"  is  ren- 
dered by  escaso  de ;  as,  he  finds  himself  short  of  money,  se  halla  escaso 
de  dinero. 

(a.)  ^^  To  fall  short  or  come  sliort  of"  meaning  "  to  he  inferior"  by  no 
Uegar  d,  or  ser  inferior  d;  as,  the  translation  jTaZZs  short  of  the  original, 
la  traduccion  no  llega  al  original^  or  la  traduccion  es  inferior  al  original. 

522.  Since. — "Since,"  when  meaning  " ago"  is  rendered  in  the  same 
manner  (see  436) ;  as,  some  months  since,  algunos  meses  ha ; — long  since, 
hace  mucho  tiempo ; — not  long  since,  hace  jaoco,  or  hace poco  tiempo. 

(a.)  "Since  it  is  so,"  by  siendo  esto  asi,  or,  pues  que  esto  es  asi. 

523.  Smell. — "To  smell  of  or  to  smell  like,"  by  oler  a;  as,  he  smells  of^ 
garlic,  huele  a  ajo. 

524.  So. — "So,"  when  meaning  "it,"  is  rendered  by  lo  or  eso;  as,  do 
you  so?  I  hace  vd.  eso  7  you  think  that  she  is  rich,  but  she  is  not  so, 
vd.  picnsa  que  ella  es  i-ica,  pero  no  lo  es. 

525.  Soon. — In  such  expressions  as,  "how  soonwiW  he  return,"  mean- 
ing "  how  long  will  he  be  in  returning,"  tardur  (to  delay,  to  stay  long)  is 
used  :  as,  how  soon  will  we  arrive?  i  cuanto  tardaremos  en  Uegar?— how 
soon  shall  you  return  1  i  cuanto  tardara  xd.  en  xolver  ? 

526.  Sorry. — "To  he  sorry  for,"  by  sentir  ;  as,  I  am  very  sorry  for  it, 
mucho  lo  siento. 

527.  Spare. — "To  spare,"  meaning  *'^o  leave  untried,"  by  perdonar  ; 
as,  we  spai-e  not  any  effort  to  carry  out  our  project,  no  perdonamos  esfu- 
erzo  alguno  para  llevar  a  cabo  nuestro  proyecto. 

528.  Spend. — "To  spend,"  meaning  "to  pass,"  hy pasar;  as,  I  shall 
spend  the  winter  with  my  sister,  pasare  el  invierno  con  mi  hermana. 

529.  Stand. — "  To  stand,"  meaning  "  to  be  upon  the  feet,"  is  rendered 
i)y  estar  en  pie;  as,  the  Pharisee  standing,  prayed,  el  Fariseo  estando  en 
pi^,  oraba ;  she  stood  warming  herself,  ella  estaba  en  pie,  calentdndose. 

530.  Strike. — "To  strike,"  referring  to  the  sounding  by  percussion  of 
a  clock,  is  rendered  by  dar  as,  the  clock  strikes  eight,  el  reloj  da  las 
ocho;  it  has  just  struck  nine,  las  nueve  acaban  de  dar  (see  337). 

(a.)  "To  strike  the  flag,"  meaning  to  haul  down  the  colors,  by 
arriar  la  handera. 

531.  Succeed. — "Tb  succeed,"  is  rendered  by  salir  bien,  or  by  tcner 
huen  exito,  or  by  ser  afortunado  ;  as,  I  wish  that  you  Tuay-succeed,  desto 
que  vd.  saiga  bien,  or  deseo  que  vd.  tenga  buen  exito  ; — if  I  succeed  in  this 
business,  si  soy  afortunado  en  este  negoclo,  or  si  salgo  bien  en  este  ne- 
gocio. 

532.  Such. — "In  such  a  time,"  en  IbI  tiempo ; — ''Mr.  Such-a-one,"  el 
senor  fulano  de  tal. 

533.  SuU.~"To  suU."    (See  437,  a,  and  444,  b.) 

534.  Sure. — "To  be  sure  not,"  hy  guardarse  bien  de;  as,  be  sure  not 
tp  do  it,  guarde  vd.  bien  de  haccrlo. 


214  IDIOMATIC    PHRASES. 

535.  Taste.— ^^  To  taste  qf^'^  by  saber  d;  as,  this  honey  tastes  of  {en 
like)  pitch,  esta  miel  sabe  i,  la  pez. 

536.  Teens.— ^^  To  he  in  teens"  by  no  llegar  d  los  viente  ;  as,  she  is  norJ 
yet  out  of  hex  teens i  ella  aun  no  llega  a  los  viente. 

537.  Test. — ^^To  stand  the  test,"  by  ser  de  prueha;  as,  she  stands  the 
test,  ella  es  de  prueba. 

.538*  There. — "T/icre,"  used  in  English  before  verbs  in  such  expres- 
sions, '*  there  is  a  man  in  Boston,"  "  there  are  some  people  who  are 
never  satisfied,"  etc.,  is  rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  tenses  of  the  verb 
haber  used  impersonally  (see  218),  and  sometimes  by  the  third  person 
singular  or  plural  of  other  verbs  ;  thus,  there  is  a  place  in  Spain,  hay  un 
lugar  en  Espana; — there  are  many  things,  hay  muchas  cosas ; — there 
^were  many  soldiers,  hubo  muchos  soldados ; — there  can  not  be,  no  puede 
haber ; — there  came  a  man  from  Rome,  vino  un  hombre  de  Roma. 

539.  Thereabouts. — ^^Thereabouts"  referring  to  number  or  quantity, 
is  rendered  by  poco  mas  6  menos  ;  as,  my  sister  is  eighteen  years  old  or 
thereabouts,  mi  hermana  tiene  diez  y  ocho  anos  6  poco  mas  0  menos. 

540.  To. — ^^To"  is  sometimes  rendered  in  Spanish  by  de;  as,  he  is  a 
friend  to  the  poor,  es  amigo  de  los  ;7o6rc5;— Philip  the  Second  was  suc- 
cessor to  Charles  the  Fifth,  Felipe  segundo  fue  sucesor  de  Cdrlos  quin- 
to ; — the  road  to  London,  el  camijio  de  Londres. 

541.  Upwards. — ^^  Upwards,"  meaning  more,  is  rendered  by  m^s;  as, 
ten  pounds  and  upwards,  diez  libras  6  mas. 

542.  Usual.— ^^  As  usual,"  employed  in  speaking  of  the  state  of  the 
health,  is  rendered  by  como  siempre ;  as,  how  is  your  father  1  As  usual, 
su  senor  padre  de  vd.,  i  como  estd  7    Como  siempre. 

543.  Wage. — "  To  wage  war,"  hacer  guerra. 

544.  Want. — "Tb  want,"  is  rendered  hy  querer  Q.r).6.  \>y  necesitar ;  as, 
what  do  you  want  7  i  que  es  la  que  vd.  quiere  7 — do  you  want  nothing 
else  7  I  nada  mas  necesita  vd.  7 

(a.)  "To  be  wanted,"  in  such  sentences  as,  "you  are  wanted,"  and 
"  he  is  wanted,"mdiy  be  rendered  by  le  llaman  a  vd.^  and  Ze  buscan. 

545.  Wind. — "To  wind  up  a  watch  or  clock,"  by  dar  cuerda  at  reloj. 

546.  Wonder. — ''To  wonder  "  is  not  rendered  in  Spanish  in  such  sen- 
tences as,  "  1  wonder  whether  she  will  sing  to-night?  isi  ella  cantard 
esta  noche  7 

547.  Worth. — "Tb  be  worth"  (speaking  of  persons),  is  rendered  by 
poseer,  or  by  tener ;  as,  he  is  worth  a  house,  el  tiene  unu  casa. 

(a.)  "To  be  worth  "  (speaking  of  the  value  of  things),  is  rendered  by 
valer ;  as,  how  much  is  this  watch  worth  7  i  cuanto  vale  este  reloj  7 

(6.)  "To  be  worth  while,"  by  merecer  or  valer  la  pena  de,  or  by  haber 
para  que;  as,  it  is  worth  tchile  to  do  it,  vale  la  pena  de  hacerlo ; — :t  is 
not  worth  while,  no  hay  para  que. 

548.  Wrong. — "To  be  wrong,"  or  "to  be  in  the  wrong,"  hy  no  tinei' 
razon;  as,  he  is  wrong,  no  tiene  razon. 

549.  In  English,  a  negative  interrogative  is  frequently  added  tc  an 


IDIOMATIC    PHRASES.  2    5 

affirmative,  and  an  affirmative  to  a  negative  sentence,  to  render  them 
more  expressive;  thus,  "she  is  here,  is  she  not?" — "they  will  come, 
will  they  not?" — "you  have  studied  Spanish,  have  you  not?" — or,  "she 
is  not  here,  is  she?" — "  they  will  not  come,  will  they?" — "you  have  not 
studied  Spanish,  have  you?"  In  Spanish,  this  sort  of  interrogatory  is 
rendered  after  affirmative  sentences  by  i,  no  es  verdad  ?  ("  is  it  not  true  ?") 
and  after  negative  sentences  by  les  verdad?  ("is  it  true?")  as,  "you 
will  do  me  the  pleasure  to  dine  with  me,  will  you  not?"  me  hard  vd.  el 
gusto  de  coiner  conmigo,  i  no  es  verdad  7 — "  you  have  not  eaten  any  fish, 
have  you  ?"  no  ha  comido  vd.  pescado,  i,es  verdad  7 — "  the  traitor  would 
have  disclosed  every  thing,  wouldnH  he  ?"  todo  lo  hubiera  declarado  el 
traidor,  i  no  es  verdad  7 

550.  The  particle  "  i/,"  followed  by  a  relative  pronoun,  is  frequently 
used  in  English  in  sentences  like  these  :  "  it  was  John  who  did  that ;" — 
"  it  is  the  king  who  is  to  be, blamed ;" — "  it  was  the  French  who  first  dis- 
covered it."  In  Spanish,  the  word  "i7"  is  not  rendered,  and  the  verb 
which  in  English  agrees  in  the  singular  number  with  "  it,"  is  in  Span- 
ish in  the  number  of  the  noun  to  which  it  refers  ;  as,  fue  Juan  el  que  lo 
hizo  i—fueron  los  Espanoles  los  que  conquistaron  a  Mejico ;  that  is,  John 
was  he  who  did  it, — the  Spaniards  were  they  who  conquered  Mexico. 

551.  In  translating  English  phrases  into  Spanish,  it  will  generally  be 
found  necessary  to  resolve  them  into  their  most  obvious  meaning;  thus, 
"  he  stood  up  for  the  robbers,"  means,  "  he  defended  (or  took  the  part  of) 
the  robbers,"  and  can  be  rendered,  defendiO  d  los  ladrones.  '*  He  stood 
{stands)  godfather  to  the  child,"  means,  "he  is  godfather  to  the  child," 
and  may  be  rendered,  es  padrino  del  nino.  "John  takes  after  his 
father,"  may  mean,  "  John  imitates  his  father,"  or  "  John  resembles  his 
father,"  and  may  be  rendered,  Juan  imita  d  su  padre,  or  Juan  se  parece 
a  su  padre.  "  The  judge  took  up  with  this  bed-room,"  means,  "  the  judge 
contented  himself  (or  was  contented)  with  this  room,"  and  may  be  ren- 
dered, eljuez  se  contenta  con  esta  alcoba.  "  To  coin  words,"  means  "  to 
invent  words,"  and  is  rendered,  inventar  palabras; — "to  coin  a  lie,"  is 
rendered,  forjar  una  mentira.  "  He  keeps  up  his  usual  retinue,"  is  ren- 
dered, mantiene  su  tren  acostumbrado.  *'He  eats  nothing  but  what 
comes  up"  means,  "he  vomits  whatever  he  eats,"  and  is  rendered, 
vomita  cuanto  come. 

552.  The  word  "^ue"  in  Spanish,  like  the  word  *^that"  in  English, 
is  employed  with*  various  meanings,  as  is  shown  by  the  following  exam- 
ples: 

(a.)  La  muger  que  vimos.  The  woman  whom  (that)  we-saw. 

(6.)  El  hombre  que  habla.  The  man  who  {that)  is-speaking. 

(c.)  Lo  que  es  propio  en  uno,  es  What  {that  which)  is  proper  in  one^ 

imprCpio  en  otro.  is  improper  in  another. 

(d.)  No  s6  que  hacer.  I  know  not  what  to  do. 

(e.)  No  s^  gtie  pluma  tomar.  I  know  which  pen  to  take. 


216 


IDIOMATIC    PHRASES. 


{f.)  Ofrecimientos  es  la    moneda 

que  corre  en  este  siglo. 
{g.)  ;Qu^  desgracia! 
Qi.)  Le  mandu  que  viniese. 
(i.)   El  pintor  es  mas  docto  que  el 

cirujano. 
{j.)  No  es  lo  mismo  prometer  que 

cumplir. 
{k.)  ,'Que  enfadoso  es  vd. ! 
(Z.)   AUi  no  es  licito  que  las  lagri- 

mas  lleguen  a  los  ojos,  que  eso  es 

flagueza. 
(m.)  Que  Uueva,  que  no  Uueva. 
(n.)  Tarde  que  temprano. 
(o.)  iQue  es  del  libro  1 
(p.)  Sentiria  que  fuesen  rehusados. 

(q.)  Esperala  que  yo  tuviese  ver- 
duras. 

553.  Sometimes  que  is  employed 
dant  in  English ;  as, 

Cualquier  cerveza  que  yo  tuviese. 
Estate  alll  hasta  que  yo  te  lo  diga. 

Antes  de  que  estuviesen  de  vuelta. 
Que  sus  tesoros  sean  cojidos. 
Que  no  se  engaiie. 

554.  Que  is  sometimes  preceded 
lated  in  English ;  as, 

A  fin  de  que  yo  sea  rico. 
Espera  d  que  yo  este  necesitado. 
En  caso  de  que  seals  enganados. 
Cuidabamos  de  que  no  se  despar- 
tas3  vd. 


Promises  are  the  con  w/iich  is  cnr 

rent  in  this  age. 
What  a  misfortune ! 
I  ordered  that  he  should  come. 
The  painter  is  more  learned  than 

the  surgeon. 
It  is  not  the  same  to  promise  as  to 

perform. 
Hoic  tedious  you  are ! 
Here  it  is  not  proper  that  tears 

should-come  to  the  eyes, /or  (or 

because)  this  is  a  weakness. 
Whether  it  may-rain,  or  not  rain. 
Late  or  early. 
Where  is  the  book  7 
I-should-be-sorry    if  they-should- 

be  refused. 
He-was- waiting  till  I  should- have 

vegetables. 

in  Spanish  when  it  would  be  redun- 

Whatever  beer  I  might  have. 
Remain-thou  there  until  I  tell  it 

thee. 
Before  they-were  returned. 
Let  his  treasures  be  seized. 
Let  him  not  deceive  himself. 

by  a  preposition  which  is  not  trans- 

In  order  that  I  may-be  ricn. 
He-is-waiting  till  I  may-be  needy. 
In  case  that  you  should-be  deceive  1. 
We-were-careful  tha^  you  shoui  1 
not  awake. 


OTHER    IDIOMATIC    EXPRESSIONS. 


Es  de  dia.    Es  de  noche. 
El  sol  sile.    El  sol  se  pone. 
Hace  calor.     Hace  mucho  frlo. 
Corre  mucho  viento. 
Hace  os:uro.    Hace  luna, 
Hace  un  tiempo  hiimido. ' 
I  Q,ue  tal  tiem  K>  hace  'i 


It  is  day.    It  is  night. 

The  sun  rises.    The  sun  sets. 

It  is  hot.    It  is  very  cold. 

The  wind  blo^  s  hard. 

It  is  dark.     It  is  moonlight. 

The  weather  is  damp. 

How  is  the  voatherl 


IDIOMATIC   PHRASES. 


•217 


I  Cuantos  anos  tiene  vd.  7    i  Q,u6 

edad  tiene  vd.  1 
Tengo    quince    anos    cumplidos. 

Acabo  de  cumplir  veinte  aiios. 
lQiu6  edad  le  eciiaria  vd.   i,   mi 

padre  1 
Ya  debe  haber  pasado  de  los  cin- 

cuenta. 
I  Q,uiere  vd.  hacerme  un  favor  1 
I  Puedo  pedirle  d  vd.  un  favor  1 
Cuento  con  vd.  i  no  es  verdad  7 
Llaman  i,  la  campanilla. 
Oigo  llamar.    Es  el  senor  S . 

Vd.  come  dentro  de  m^dia  hora 

corta. 
Yo  estoy  hecho  a  todo. 
Ese  fuego  est^  bien  muerto. 
Ya  empieza  ^  hacer  llama. 
I  Que  dia  del  mes  tenemos  7 
Enseneme  vd.  betas.     Aqul  tiene 

vd.  un  par. 
No  tenga  vd.  cuidado. 
El  tiempo  estd  tan  cubierto  que 

ap^nas  se  ve. 
Quisiera  un  sombrero  i,  la  moda. 
I  Se    siguen    haciendo    sombreros 

altos  de  forma  7 
Algunos  se  ven. 
Aqui  tiene  vd.  uno. 
*,  Cuanto  vale  1 

I  Cuando  estara  corriente  7 

Me  duele  mucho  la  cabeza. 

Veamos  la  lengua. 

Todas  los  dias  doy  un  pas^o  de  tres 

o  cuatro  horas. 
;  Tiene  vd.  habitaciones  que  alqui- 

lar7 
I  Da  el  cuarto  sobre  la  calle  7 
No  senor,  da  sobre  el  jardin. 
I  Monta  vd.  a  caballo  7 
Pronto  van  d  acabar  los  encantos 

del  otono. 
Ya  estamos  en  invierno. 
tCOrao  se  pUcde  gustar  del  invierno  7 


19 


How  old  are.  you  7    What  is  your 

age  7 
I  am  past  fifteen.   I  am  just  twenty 

years  old. 
How  old  do  you  think  my  fathet 

is  7 
He  must  be  above  fifty  years  old. 

Will  you  do  me  a  favor  7 

May  I  ask  you  a  favor  7 

I  can  rely  upon  you,  can't  1 7 

Some  one  rings  the  door-bell. 

I  hear  a  knock,  a  ring.    It  is  JMr. 

S . 

You  dine  in  less  than  half  an  hour. 

I  am  used  to  every  thing. 
This  fire  is  almost  out. 
It  just  begins  to  blaze. 
What  day  of  the  month  is  it  7 
Show  me  some  boots.    Here  is  a 

pair. 
Make  yourself  easy. 
The  weather  is  so  cloudy  that  we 

can  scarcely  see  each  other. 
I  want  a  fashionable  hat. 
Are  high  crowned  hats  still  made  7 

Some  are  still  seen. 

Here  is  one  (Here  you  have  one). 

What  is    the    price  of  it  7   (how 

much  is  It  worth  7) 
When  will  it  be  ready  7 
My  head  aches  very  much. 
Let  me  see  your  tongue. 
I  walk  three  or  four  hours  every 

day. 
Have  you  any  apartments  to  let  7 

Does  the  room  look  into  the  street  7 
No,  sir,  it  looks  into  the  garden. 
Do  you  ride  on  horseback  7 
The  pleasures  of  autumn  are  about 

to  dsappear. 
It  is  winter.    (We  are  in  winter. 
How  can  any  one  like  winter  7 


218 


IDIOMATIC    FHRASES. 


Andar^  el  camino  ^  caballo. 

I  Se  duerme  en  el  camino  1 

Es  cerca  de  las  dos. 

Han  dado  las  tres. 

I  Cuanto  tiempo  hace  que  est^  vd. 

en  los  Estados  Unidos  1 
Hace  mas  de  un  ano. 
Le  tuve  por  un  Ingles. 
I  Qiu6  noticias  tenemos  7 

I  Q,u6  noticias  corren  1 

I  Qu6  se  dice  en  la  ciudad  1 

I  No  ha  oido  vd.  hablar  de  la  guer- 
ra'J 

No  se  dice  nada  de  ella. 

Se  habla  de  un  sltio. 

Todos  necesitan  de  la  paz. 

I  Q,u6  le  parece  a  vd.  de  mi  som- 
brero 7 

Buenos  dias  tenga  vd. 

Le  diremos  &  vd.  nuestro  parecer. 

Pues,  iqii6  tell 

Buenas  noches. 


I  vfc^ill  perform  the  journey  on  horse 

back. 
Do  we  sleep  on  the  road  1 
It  is  nearly  two  o'clock. 
It  has  struck  three. 
How  long  have  you  been  in  the 

United  States? 
It  is  more  than  a  year. 
I  took  him  for  an  Englishman. 
What  is  the  news  7    (What  news 

have  we  7) 
What  news  is  current  7 
What  do  they  say  in  the. city  7 
Have    you   not    heard    the    war 

spoken  of  7 
Nothing  is  said  of  it. 
They  talk  of  a  siege. 
Every  body  wishes  for  peace. 
How  does  my  hat  appear  to  yuul 

Good  morning  to  you. 
We  will  give  you  our  opinio^ 
Well,  how  do  you  like  it  7 
Good  night. 


APPENDIX  TO  PART  III. 
NUMBER  V. 


A  LIST   OF  THE    MOST   COMMON   ABBRE- 
VIATIONS. 

556.  The  following  list  comprehends  the  most  common 
abbreviations  employed  by  Spanish  writers: 


A, 

Arroha^ 

Twenty-five  pounds  weight. 

AA. 

Autoresj 

Authors. 

A.  C. 

Ano  CristianOf 

Christian  year. 

Agto. 

Agosto, 

August. 

Art.  6  Artie 

ArticulOf 

Article. 

B, 

BeatOy  BachUUr^ 

Blessed,  Bachelor  of  Afi*. 

B.  L.  M. 

[  BesOj  6  besa  la  mano^  o  las 
i     manoSj 

'  1 1  kiss  the  hands. 

B,  L.  P. 

BesOy  o  besa  los  jnes^ 

I  kiss  the  feet. 

Bmo.  P. 

Beatisimo  Padre^ 

Most  blessed  Father. 

C.  6  Cap.  6  Capit.  CapUulo, 

Chapter. 

C.  M.  B. 

Cuyas  manos  beso^  6  besoy 

Whose  hands  I  kiss. 

Col. 

ColUTUlj 

Column. 

Conocito. 

Conocimienfo, 

Bill  of  lading. 

Corte. 

CorrienUy 

Current. 

C.  P.  B. 

Cuyos  pies  beso^  &  besa^ 

Whose  feet  I  kiss. 

eta. 

CuenMf 

Account. 

D.  6  Dn. 

Don, 

Mr. 

Da. 

Dona, 

Mrs. 

DD. 

DoctoreSi 

DQCtors 

Dha, 

Dicha^ 

Ditto  or  said. 

Dho. 

Dicho, 

Ditto  or  said. 

Dicw- 

Diciembre^ 

December. 

Dr. 

Doctor, 

Doctor. 

E.  g.  6  E.  gr. 

\  \  Exempli  gratia  (por  ejem- 
I     plo), 

I^Fdr  example. 

Eno- 

Enero, 

January. 

Egnoo.  ^  £^scin» 

EscelenMsimOi 

Most  excelleai. 

Peb<». 

Febrero^ 

February. 

Pha. 

Fecha, 

Dated. 

220 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


Fho. 
Fol. 
Fr. 
lb. 

ine,Illmo,IUma    | 

J.C. 
L. 

Lib. 
Lin. 

M.  P.  S. 
Mr.  6  Mr. 
M^-  as- 
MS. 
MSS. 
N. 

N.  B. 
N.  S. 
N.  S"- 
N.  S.  J.  C 
Novb«- 
No-  6  niim 
Nro. 
Octe 
Onz. 
Om. 
0ms, 
P.  6  P^. 

pa. 

Pdr. 
P.  D. 

po. 

P'^ 

Q.iV.  B.L.M. 

R.P.M.6Mtro. 
Ri   Rie«. 

Rw- 

Rdo. 

Rev™o- 

S.  Sto..  Sto,  St- 

S.  A. 

S.  A.A 

S.  M. 

Sr.  S«- 


FechOi 

FollOf 

Fray,  (tfrey, 

Ibidem, 

Mustre,  Jlustrtsimo,  llus- 

trtsima, 
JesucridOy 

Libro, 

Linea, 

Mvy  poderoso  senor, 

Monsieur,  &  mister, 

Mudws  arx}s, 

Manuscrito, 

ManuscritoSj 

Fulano, 

Nota  bene, 

Nuestro  Senor, 

Nuestrd  Senora, 

Nuestro  Senor  Jesucristo, 

NoviembrCf 

NUmero, 

Nuestro, 

Octubre^ 

Onza, 

Orden, 

Ordenes, 

Pdgina, 

Para, 

Pdrrafo, 

PostdatOj 

Pero, 

Por, 

Que  d  usted  besa  la  mono, 

Que,    • 

Reoerendo  padre  maestro, 

Real,  Reales, 

Reabt, 

Reverendo, 

Reverendtsimo, 

San,  6  santo, 

Su  alteza, 

Su  afecto  amigo, 

Su  magestad, 

ScfUyTi 


Dated. 

Folio. 

Friar,  Brother. 

Same. 

>  Illustrious,    Most   lUustri* 
i     ous. 

Jesus  Christ. 

Law. 

Book. 

Line. 

Most  powerful  Lord. 

Mr. 

Many  years. 

Manuscript. 

Manuscripts. 

Such  a  one. 

Take  notice. 

Our  Lord. 

Our  Lady. 

Our  Lord  Jesus  Christ 

November. 

Number. 

Our. 

October. 

Ounce. 

Order. 

Orders. 

Page. 

For. 

Paragraph. 

Postscript. 

But. 

For  or  By. 

Who  kisses  your  haud. 

That. 

Reverend  fether. 

Royal. 

I  received. 

Reverend. 

Most  reverend. 

Saint. 

His  highness. 

Your  affectionate  friend. 

His  majesty. 

Sir,  Lord. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


221 


s.  s«. 

Su  Senoria, 

His  lordship. 

S.  Sd. 

Su  Santidad, 

His  holiness. 

Setbre. 

Setiemhre^ 

September. 

Sego-  seror- 

Seguro  servidoTf 

Obedient  servant. 

Spre. 

Siempre^ 

Always. 

SS.  6  Sres. 

Senores, 

Sirs,  Messrs. 

SS'no. 

Santisimo  padre^ 

Most  holy  father. 

SS.  pp. 

Santos  padres. 

Holy  fathers. 

s.  s.  s. 

Su  seguro  servidor^ 

Your  obedient  servant. 

Sumate- 

Sumamente^ 

Totally. 

T.  6  torn. 

Tomo, 

Volume. 

Tpo. 

7\empo, 

Time. 

V. 

VeasCf 

See. 

y.  Ve-  OVen.- 

Venerable, 

Venerable. 

V.,Vd.,Vm.,Jj 
Vmd. 

>  Usted  6  vuesa  merced, 

Your  worship;  you. 

VV.,Vs.,Vms., 
CVds. 

i  Ustedes,  6  vuesas  mercedes,  Your  worships  -,  vou. 

V.  A. 

Vuestra  alteza, 

Your  highness. 

V.E.,6V.  Esc 

a-  Vuecelencia, 

Your  excellency. 

V.  G.,  6  V.  gr. 

Verbi  grdcia, 

For  example. 

Verso- 

Verstculo, 

Versicle. 

V.M. 

Vuestra  magestad, 

Your  majesty. 

Vol. 

VoMmen, 

•  Volume. 

V.  P. 

Vuestra  patemidad, 

Your  paternity. 

V.  S. 

Vuesenorm,  6  u^ia, 

Your  lordship. 

V.  S. 

Vuestra  santidad, 

Your  holiness. 

V.  S.  S. 

Vuesenorias, 

Your  lordships. 

V.  S.  I. 

Vuesenorta  ilustrtsima, 

Your  grace. 

Vro.  Vra. 

Vuestro,  vuestra, 

Your. 

Xmo. 

Diezmo, 

Tithe. 

Xptno. 

Cristiano, 

Christian. 

I9« 


APPENDIX  TO  PART  HI. 
NUMBER  VI. 


SPANISH  MONEY,  WEIGHTS,  AND  MEASURES. 

557.  The  following  table  contains  the  names  of  Spanish 
coins,  with  their  value  in  Spanish  and  approximate  value 
in  United  States  currency : 


NAMES. 

SPANISH 
VALUE. 

U.    STATES 
VALUE. 

j            Copper. 

R.* 

m. 

$     cfs.    m. 

'      Maravedi, 

1 

i.47 
2.94 

2    Maravedises  make  one  Ochavo, 

2 

2    Ochavos 

•' 

Guar  to, 

4 

5.83 

2    Cuartos 

(C 

Pobie  Guar  to, 

8 

1    1.76 

SUver. 

8J  Cuartos 

Ct 

Real  de  vellon, 

34 

5    0 

U  Reales 

(C 

Cuarto  de  Peseta, 

1 

8h 

6    2.5 

2i  Reales 

u 

M^dia  Peseta, 

2 

17 

12    5. 

5    Reales 

(( 

Peseta,t 

5 

0 

25    0. 

2    Pesetas 

(( 

Escudo  de  vellon, 

10 

0 

50    0. 

2    Escudos,  or  } 
20    Reales,         3 

(( 

Peso  Duro, 

20 

0 

1    00    0. 

Gold. 

20    Reales 

(C 

Peso  de  oro. 

20 

0 

1    00    0. 

2    Pesos 

(C 

Escudo  de  oro, 

40 

0 

2    00    0. 

2    Escudos  de  oro 

(( 

Doblon, 

80 

0 

4    00    0. 

2    Doblones 

(( 

M^dia  Onza, 

160 

0 

8    00    0. 

4    Doblones 

(( 

Onza, 

320 

0 

16    00    0. 

1 

1^^  The  value  in  United  States  currency,  given  in  the  preceding  ta- 
ble, is  determined  by  estimating  the  real  at  its  true  value,  five  cents. 

*  R  here  is  an  abbreviation  for  reales,  and  m  for  maravedi. 

t  In  some  parts  of  Spain,  the  peseta  is  the  name  for  the  pistareen  or 
twenty-cent  piece  o "  money,  and  then  the  piece  of  five  reales  is  called 
peseta  columndria. 


SPANISH  MONEY,   WEIGHTS,   AND  MEASURES. 


223 


The  ansa  has  a  relative  value  in  exchanges  of  a  little  more  than  sixteen 
dollars.  The  cuarto  de  peseta  has  long  been  in  circulation  in  the  United 
States,  and  valued  at  six  and  a  quarter  cents,  and  the  media  peseta 
valued  at  twelve  and  a  half  cents. 

^^  In  the  Spanish  States  of  America,  money  is  reckoned  by  the 
peso,  real,  and  medio  real.  The  peso,  or  dollar,  is  divided  into  cuatro 
pesetas,  four  quarters  of  a  dollar;  ihepesdn  into  dos  reales,' two  twelve 
and  a  half  cent  coins ;  and  the  real  into  dos  medios,  two  six  and  a  quar- 
ter cent  coins,  which  last  is  the  coin  of  lowest  value  used  in  those 
States.    Copper  coin  is  not  known  there. 

558.  Table  of  Spanish  weights  with  their  equivalent  in 
Avoirdupois  and  Troy  weight  in  English : 


NAMES. 

SPANISH    VALUE. 

AVOIRDUPOIS. 

TROY. 

lb.  oz.  dr.  gr. 

lb.  OZ.  pwt.  gr. 

Quintal,     -    -    - 

4  arrobas,      -    - 

101  7    0  19 

123  3    4  19 

Arroba,      -    -    - 

25  libras,    -    -    - 

25  5  12    4.8 

30  9  16    4.8 

Libra,    -    -    -    - 

2  marcos,      -    - 

1  0    3  20 

1  2  15  20 

Marco,  -    -    -    - 

8  onzas,   -    -     - 

8    1  25 

7    7  22 

Onza,    -    -    -    - 

8  ochaves,    -    - 

1    0    7 

18  12 

Ochava,     -    -    - 

2  adarmes,    -    - 

2     1 

2    7 

Adarme,     -    -    - 

3  tomines,    -    - 

1    0 

1     3 

Tomin,       -    -    - 

12  granos,  -    -    - 

10 

9 

Grano,  -    -    -    - 

— 

0.83 

0.75 

'  The  quintal  de  CastUla  is  equivalent  to  6  arrobas,  or  152  lbs.  2 
ozs.  8  drs.  29  grs.  avoirdupois. 

559.  Tables  of  Spanish  measures  with  their  equivalents 
in  English  measure : 


(a.)  LONG  MEASURE.*                                    | 

NAMES. 

SPAN.    EQUIVALENT. 

ENGL.    EQUIVALENT.    ', 

Estado,    - 

Pi^, 

Pulgado,  ------ 

Linea, 

6pi^s,     -    .    -    - 
12  pulgados,  -    -    - 
12  lineas,  -    -    -    - 

ft.      in.       I. 
5      6      9.9 
11       1.66 
11.14 
0.92      1 

*  The  legiuL  or  league,  of  Spain,  contains  8,000  varas  or  Spanish 
yards,  equivalent  to  3.797  English  miles,  that  is,  somewhat  more  than  3| 
English  miles.  Sometimes  the  Spaniards  reckon  by  a  legua  of  5,000 
varas,  or  2 J  English  miles. 


224 


SPANISH   MONEY,    WEIGHTS,    AND   MEASURES 


(b.)    CLOTH  MEASURE. 

NAMES. 

SPAN.    EQUIVALENT. 

ENGL.    EQUIVALENT. 

Vara, 

Palmo,     -.----- 

Dedo, 

Linea, 

4  palmos,     -    -    - 
12  dados,  -    -    -    - 
12  lineas,  -    -    -    - 

ft.  in.      I. 

2    9    4.3 

8    4.1 

8.3 

0.7         ! 

(c.)     DRY   MEASURE. 

Cahiz, 

Fanega,   ------ 

Celemin,       -    -    -    -    - 

Cuartillo, 

12  fanegas,     -    -    - 

12  celemines,      -    - 

4  cuartillos,  -    -    - 

bu.  pks.    qts. 

18    3    6.53 

1     2    2.54 

4.21 

1.05 

(d.)    LiaUID  MEASURE. 

Moyo,      ------ 

Pipa, 

Bota, 

Cantaro,  or       ?     .    _    . 
Arroba  mayor,  5 

Azumbre, 

Cuartillo, 

16  cantaros,  -    -    - 
27  cantaros,  -    -    - 
30  cantaros,  -    -    • 

8  azumbres,      -    - 
4  cuartillos,       -    - 

gals.  qts.  pts. 
56  1  1.04 
95    0     1.1 

105    2     1.7 

3    2    0.19 

1     1.52 

.88 

(e.)  In  Spanish  land  measure,  the  fanegada  contains  about   5.500 
English  square  yards,  or  la^  English  acres. 


APPENDIX  TO  PART  III. 
NUMBER  VIL 


SPANISH  PROPER  NAMES. 

560.  Many  proper  names  are  spelled  alike  both  in  Span- 
ish and  in  English  ;  as,  America,  America;  Arabia,  Ara- 
bia :  many  differ  slightly  in  the  orthography  ;  as,  Europa, 
Europe  ;  Frdncia,  France  ;  Corcega^  Corsica ;  Vizcaya, 
Biscay :  and  some  names  differ  entirely  in  their  orthogra- 
phy ;  as,  Alemdnia,  Germany. 

561.    SOME    COMMON    GEOGRAPHICAL    PROPER    NAMES.* 


Alejandria, 

Alexandria. 

Brasil,                   BazU. 

Alemdnia, 

Germany. 

Brema,                   Bremen. 

Amberes, 

Antwerp. 

Bretana,                 Great  Britain,  or 

Antioqula, 

Antioch. 

Brittany. 

Antuerpia, 

Antwerp. 

Brujas,                   Bruges. 

Argel, 

Algiers. 

Burd^os,                Bourdeaux. 

Asiria, 

Assyria. 

Cabo    de   Buena  Cape     of     Good 

Atenas, 

Athens. 

Esperanza,            Hope. 

Avinon, 

Avignon. 

Cabo  de  Homos,  Cape  Horn. 

Ayacio, 

Ajaccio. 

Cald^a,                  Chaldea. 

Babilonia, 

Babylon. 

Cal^s,                     Calais. 

Bahia  Botanica, 

Botany  Bay. 

Canal  de  la  Man-  English  Channel. 

Bajo  Rin, 

Lower  Rhine. 

cha. 

Barbada, 

Barhadoes. 

Cantorberi,            Canterbury. 

Berberia, 

Barbary. 

Cartagena,             Carthagena. 

Bizdncio, 

Byzantium. 

Cartago,                 Carthage. 

Bolonia, 

Bologna. 

Castilla  la  INuevajA'ew?  Castile. 

Boloiia, 

Boulogne. 

Castilla  la  Vieja,   Old  Castile. 

Bona, 

Bonn. 

Ceilan,                   Ceylon. 

Borgona, 

Burgundy. 

Cerdena,                 Sardinia. 

Bosforo, 

Bosphorus. 

Chipre,                  Cyprus. 

*  In  general,  those  proper  names  which  do  not  differ,  or  but  slightly, 
in  the  two  languages,  are  not  giveri,  as  they  present  no  diflSculty  to  the 
reader. 


226 


SPANISH  PROPER   NAMES. 


(Jolonia, 

Cologne. 

Habana, 

Havanna. 

Constanza, 

Constance. 

Habra  de  Grdcia,  flarre  <ie  G    jt. 

Copenh^gue, 

Copenhagen. 

Haiti, 

Hayii. 

Corcega, 

Corsica^ 

Haya, 

Hague. 

Corinto, 

Corinth. 

Hen^o, 

HainauU. 

Delfinado, 

Dauphiny. 

Hungria, 

Hungary. 

Dinamarca, 

Denmark. 

Indost^n, 

Hindoostan. 

Dresde, 

Dresden. 

Inglaterra, 

England. 

Duay, 

Douay.  .„ 

Irlanda, 

Ireland. 

Dunas, 

The  Downs.  - 

Islanda, 

Iceland. 

Dunquerque, 

Dunkirk. 

Japon, 

Japan. 

Edinburgo, 

Edinburgh. 

Laponia, 

Lapland. 

Efeso, 

Ephesus. 

Leida, 

Leyden. 

Egipto, 

Egypt. 

Leon, 

Lyons. 

Escafusa, 

Scliqff'hausen. 

Lila, 

Lisle. 

Escalda, 

Scheldt. 

Liorna, 

Leghorn. 

Escania, 

Scania. 

Lisboa, 

Lisbon. 

Esclo, 

Scio  or  Chio. 

Londres, 

London. 

Escocia, 

Scotland. 

Luisiana, 

Louisiana. 

Esmirna, 

Smyrna. 

Madera, 

Madeira. 

Espaiia, 

Spain. 

Magiincia, 

Mayence. 

Esparta, 

Sparta. 

Mallorca, 

Majorca. 

Espizberga, 

Spitzhergen. 

Mar  Bermejo, 

Bed  Sea. 

Estados    de     la  States     of    the  \ 

Mar  Eg^o, 

JEgean  Sea, 

Iglesia, 

Church. 

Mar  Glacial, 

Frozen  Sea. 

Estados  Unidos 

United  States. 

Mar  Negro, 

Black  Sea. 

Estocolmo, 

Stockholm. 

Maranon, 

Amazon. 

Estrasburgo, 

Strashurg. 

Marrudcos, 

Morocco. 

Ex, 

Aix. 

Marsella, 

Marseilles. 

Ex-la-Chapela, 

Aix-la-Chapelle. 

M^jico, 

Mexico. 

Fenlcia, 

PhoBnicia. 

Menorca, 

Minorca. 

Filad^lfia, 

Philadelphia. 

Mino, 

Minho. 

Filipinas, 

Phillipines. 

N^poles, 

Naples 

FMndes, 

Flanders. 

Niza, 

Nice. 

Flesinga, 

Flushing. 

Noru^ga, 

Nortcay. 

Francia, 

France. 

Nueva  Bretana, 

New  Britaxn 

Frigia,  • 

Phrygia. 

Nueva  G^les, 

New  Wales. 

Filsia, 

Friesland. 

Nueva  Orleans, 

New  Orleans. 

G^les, 

Wales. 

Nueva  York, 

New  York. 

G^lia, 

Gaul. 

Olimpo, 

Olympus. 

Gascuiia, 

Gascony. 

Otaita, 

OtaheUe.      [tHes. 

Genova, 

Genoa. 

Paises  Bajos, 

The    Low   Coun^ 

Ginebra, 

Geneva. 

Piamonte, 

Piedmont. 

Gotinga, 

Gottingen. 

Polonia, 

Poland. 

Gran  Bretaiia, 

Great  Britain. 

Ponto  Euxino, 

Black  Sea. 

GroenMndia, 

Greenland. 

Praga, 

Prague. 

SPANISH   PROPER   NAMES. 


227 


Puerto  Mahon, 

Port  Mahon. 

Tierra  Santa, 

Holy  Land. 

Puerto  Rico, 

Porto  Rico, 

Tolon, 

Toulon, 

Rin, 

Rhine. 

Tolosa, 

Toulouse. 

Rodano, 

Rhone. 

Tornay, 

Tournay. 

Ruan, 

Rouen. 

Toscana, 

Tuscany. 

Riisia, 

Russia. 

Trento, 

Trent. 

Saboya, 

Savoy. 

Tr^veris, 

Treves. 

Sajoniaj 

Saxony.   - 

Troya, 

Troy. 

Salonica, 

Thessalonica. 

Tunez, 

Tunis. 

San  Gotardo, 

St.  Gothard. 

Turquia, 

Turkey. 

Sena, 

Seine. 

Turs, 

Tours. 

Setiibal, 

St.  Ubes 

Ulma, 

Ulm. 

Sevema, 

Severn, 

Undervald, 

Unierwaldcn. 

Su^cia, 

Sweden. 

VaMquia, 

WaUachia. 

Suiza, 

Switzerland. 

Vars6via, 

Warsaw, 

Tajo, 

Tagus. 

Vidin, 

Widin. 

Tamesis, 

Thames. 

Viena, 

Vienne. 

Tanger, 

Tangier. 

Virtemberg, 

Wurtemhurg, 

T^bas, 

Thebes. 

Vizcaya, 

Biscay. 

Terranova, 

Newfoundland. 

Zaragoza, 

Saragossa. 

Tes^lia, 

Thessalv. 

Zelanda, 

Zealand. 

562.  The  proper  names  applied  to  persons  from  the 
place  of  their  nativity,  in  general  differ  but  little  from  the 
orthography  of  the  name  of  the  place  itself;  thus,  Ale- 
mdnia^  Germany,  and  Aleman^  a  German  (or  Alemancu^  a 
German-woman).  Sometimes,  however,  such  proper  names 
differ  somewhat  from  the  name  of  the  place ;  thus, 
Fldiides^  Flanders,  and  Flamenco^  a  native  of  Flanders ; 
Cadiz,  Cadiz,  and  Gaditano,  a  native  of  Cadiz. 

563. NAMES    APPLIED    TO    PERSONS    ACCORDING   TO    THEIR 

COUNTRY   OR   TOWN. 


Africano, 

an  Afj^an. 

Bavaro, 

Bavarian. 

Aleman, 

a  German. 

Belga, 

Belgian. 

Algerino,  > 
Argelino,  > 

Algerine. 

Berberisco, 

native  of  Barhary, 

Brasileno, 

Brazilian. 

Americano, 

American. 

Breton, 

Briton. 

Andaluz, 

Andalusian. 

Castellano, 

CastUian. 

Arabe, 

Arabian. 

Catalan, 

Catalonian, 

Asiatico, 

Asiatic. 

Chileiio, 

Chilian. 

Ateniense, 

Athenian. 

Chino, 

Chinese. 

Austriaco, 

Austrian* 

Chipreno, 

Cyprian, 

228 


SPANISH   PROPER   NAMES. 


Gipayo, 

Sepoy. 

Malayo, 

Malay. 

Corso, 

Corsican. 

Malagueiio, 

native  of  Malaga. 

Criollo, 

Creole. 

Manchego, 

native  of  La  Man- 

Dinamarqu^s, 

Dane. 

Mejicano, 

Mexican,        [cha. 

Escoses, 

Scotchman. 

Montanes, 

Highlander. 

Espaiiol, 

Spaniard. 

Moro, 

Moor. 

Europco, 

European. 

Napolitano, 

Neapolitan. 

Estrameiio, 

Estramadurian. 

Noruego, 

Norwegian. 

Flamenco, 

Fleming. 

Persa, 

Persian. 

Prances, 

Frenchman. 

Peruano, 

Peruvian. 

Prison, 

Erieslander. 

Polaco, 

Pole. 

Gaditano, 

native  of  Cadiz. 

Portugu^s, 

Portuguese. 

Gallego, 

Galician. 

Porteiio, 

native  of  Port  St. 

Gales, 

Wekhman. 

Prusiano,  ) 
Pruso,       ) 

Prussian,  t^^^' 

Ginebr^s, 

Genevese. 

Genoves, 

Genoese. 

Ruso, 

Russian. 

Griego, 

Greek. 

Sardo, 

Sardinian. 

Groenlandes, 

Greerdandtr. 

Sajon, 

Saxon. 

Heses, 

Hessian. 

Sueco, 

Swede. 

Holand^s, 

Dutchman. 

Suizo, 

Swiss. 

Indio, 

Hindoo;  Indian. 

Sirio, 

Syrian. 

Ingles, 

Englishman. 

Tejano, 

Texan. 

Irland^s, 

Irishman. 

Toscano, 

Tuscan. 

Islandes, 

Icelander 

Tuned, 

Tunisian, 

Isleiio, 

Islander. 

Turco, 

Turk. 

Japon, 

Japanese. 

V^laco, 

Wallachian. 

Jerezano, 

native  of  Xeres. 

Valon, 

Walloon, 

Judio, 

Jew. 

Vizcaino, 

Blscayan. 

Lapon, 

Laplander. 

Zeland^s,  [ 
Celand^s,  • 

Zealander, 

Madrileno, 

native  of  Madrid. 

564. 

CHRISTIAN   ^A 

MES    OF    MEN. 

Adan, 

Adam. 

Balduino, 

Haldwin. 

Adolfo, 

Adolphus, 

Baltas^r, 

Balthasar. 

Alano, 

Alany  or  Alien. 

Bernab^, 

Bamahy. 

Alberto, 

Alberto. 

Bartolomd, 

Bartholomew. 

Alejandro, 

Alexander. 

Basilio, 

Basil. 

Alfredo, 

Alfred. 

Benito, 

Benedict. 

Alfonso, 

Alphonsus. 

Benjamin, 

Benjamin. 

Andres, 

Andrew. 

Bernardo, 

Bernard. 

Anton,  Antonio 

Anthony. 

Beltran, 

Bertram. 

Archibaldo, 

Archibald. 

Bonifacio, 

Boniface. 

Arldro, 

Arthur. 

Cdsar, 

CcBsar. 

August©, 

Augustus. 

Carlos, 

Charles. 

Agustin, 

Augustin  or  Aus- 

Christobal, 

Christopher. 

Anibal, 

HannibaL       [tin. 

Chrisostomo, 

Chrysostom. 

SPANISH  PROPER  NAMES. 


229 


Cl^udio, 

Claudius, 

Hor^cio, 

Horace. 

Clem^nte, 

Clement. 

Hiigo, 

Hugh. 

Conrado, 

Conrad. 

Humfr^do 

Humphrey, 

Constantino, 

Constantine. 

Ign^cio, 

Ignatius. 

Const^ncio, 

Constantius, 

Ireneo, 

Ireneus. 

Corn^lio, 

Cornelius. 

Isaac, 

Isaac. 

Cipridn, 

Cyprian. 

JacCb, 

Jacob. 

CirUo, 

Cyril. 

Jay'me,    Jacobo,  ^ 

Daniel, 

Daniel. 

Diego,  or  San 

-  >  James. 

David, 

David. 

tiago, 

3 

Donstdna, 

Dunsian. 

Jeremias, 

Jeremy. 

EdmCndo, 

Edmund. 

Job, 

Job, 

Eduardo, 

Edward. 

Juan, 

John. 

Ele^zaro, 

Eleazar. 

Jonat^s, 

Jonathan. 

Elias, 

Elias. 

Jorge, 

George. 

Elis^o, 

Elisha. 

Jos4, 

Joseph. 

Enrique, 

Henry. 

Josu^, 

Joshua. 

Est^ban, 

Stephen. 

Josias, 

Josiah. 

Ethelredo, 

Ethelred. 

Jiidas, 

Judas. 

Eug^nio, 

Eugene. 

Jdlio, 

Julius. 

Eus^bio, 

Eusebius. 

Lorenzo, 

Laurence. 

Eust^quio, 

Eustace. 

Lazaro, 

Lazarus. 

Ezequias, 

Ezechias. 

LeopoldO; 

Leopold. 

Ezequi^l, 

Ezekiel. 

Lucas, 

Luke. 

Felipe, 

Philip. 

Luis, 

Lewis. 

Felix, 

Felix. 

Lucio, 

Lucius. 

Fernando, 

Ferdinand. 

Malaquias, 

Malachy. 

Francisco, 

Francis. 

Manuel, 

Emanuel. 

Frederico, 

Frederick. 

Marco, 

Mark. 

Gabriel, 

Gabriel. 

Martin, 

Martin. 

Geofredo, 

Geffery. 

Mateo, 

Matthew. 

Gedonio, 

Gideon. 

Matias, 

Matthias. 

Gerunimo, 

Jerome. 

Mauricio, 

Maurice. 

Gilb^rto, 

Gilbert. 

Maximiliano, 

Maximilian 

Gil, 

GUes. 

Miguel, 

Michael. 

Godefr^dO; 

Godfrey. 

Moists. 

Moses. 

Gedevino, 

Goodwin. 

Natan, 

Nathan. 

Gregurio, 

Gregory. 

Natanael, 

Nathaniel. 

Guido, 

Guy. 

Nehemias, 

Nehemiah, 

Guillermo, 

William. 

Nicolas, 

Nicholas. 

Gualt^rio, 

Walter. 

Oct^vio, 

Octavius. 

Hector, 

Hector. 

Oliv^rio, 

Oliver. 

Henrique, 

Henry. 

Oton, 

Otho. 

Heb^rto, 

Herbert. 

Patricio, 

Patrick. 

HiMrio, 

Hilary. 

Pdblo, 

Paul. 

Hubdrto, 

Hubert. 

2 

P^dro. 
0 

PeUr. 

'^30 


SPANISH   PROPER   NAMES. 


Phiie^s, 

Phineas. 

Silvestre, 

Silvester, 

Rodolfo, 

Ralph  or  Rolph, 

Salomon, 

Solomon. 

Rafael, 

Raphael. 

Tad^o, 

Phaddeus, 

Raimunde, 

Raymond. 

Theob^ldo, 

Theobald. 

Reinaldo, 

Reynold. 

Theodoro, 

Theodore. 

Ricardo, 

Ricliard. 

Theodorico, 

Theodoric. 

Roberto, 

Robert  or  Rupert. 

Theodosio, 

Theodosius.' 

Rodrigo, 

Roderic. 

TheOfilo, 

Theophilus. 

Rog^rio, 

Roger. 

Tom^s, 

Thomas. 

Rolando, 

Rowland. 

Timot^o, 

Timothy. 

Sanson, 

Sampson. 

Tito, 

Titus, 

Samuel, 

Samuel. 

Tobias, 

Toby. 

Sebastian, 

Sebastian. 

Urbano, 

Urban. 

Sigismundo 

Sigismund. 

Valentin, 

Valentine. 

Simeon, 

Simeon. 

Vicente, 

Vincent, 

Simon, 

Simon. 

Zacarias, 

Zachary, 

Silvano, 

Silvan, 

565. 

CHRISTIAN   NAM 

ES    OP    WOMEJN 

r. 

Abigail, 

Abigail. 

Flora, 

Flora, 

Agatha, 

Agatha. 

Flor^ncia, 

Florence. 

AdeMida, 

Alice. 

Francisca, 

Frances. 

Ali.t^a, 

Alithea. 

Gertrudis, 

Gertrude. 

Amelia, 

Amelia. 

Isabel, 

Isabel    or    Eliza' 

Ana, 

Ann  or  Anne. 

Juana, 

Jane.             \beth 

Antoneta, 

Antonette. 

Judit, 

Judith. 

Barbara, 

Barbara. 

Juliana, 

Julia. 

Bealriz, 

Beatrix^  Beatrice. 

Leanor, 

Eleanor. 

Benita, 

Benedicta. 

Luisa, 

Louisa. 

Bona, 

Bona. 

Lucia, 

Lnicy. 

Brigida, 

Bridget. 

Lucrecia, 

Lmcretia. 

Carolina, 

Caroline. 

Magdalena, 

Magdalen. 

Casandra, 

Cassandra. 

Margarita, 

Margaret. 

Catalina, 

Catharine. 

Maria, 

Mary. 

Cecilia, 

Cecily. 

Matilde, 

Maud  or  Matilda. 

Carlota, 

Charlotte. 

Paula, 

Paulina. 

Cristina, 

Christiana. 

Penelope, 

Penelope. 

Clara, 

Clara. 

Prud^ncia, 

Prudence. 

Claudina, 

Claudia. 

Raqu^l, 

Rachael. 

Clotilde, 

ClotUda. 

Rebeca, 

Rebecca. 

Constanza, 

Constance. 

Rosa, 

Rose. 

Dionlsia, 

Diona. 

Sabina, 

Sabina. 

Dorot^a, 

Dorothy, 

Sara, 

Sarah. 

Elena  or  Helena 

,  Ellen  or  Helen. 

Sofia, 

Sophia. 

Sngricia, 

Grace. 

Susana, 

Susan. 

Est^r, 

Hester,  Esther. 

Teresa, 

Theresa. 

Eva, 

Eve, 

Ursula, 

Ursula. 

PART  IV. 


SPANISH  AND  ENGLISH   EXERCISES  FOK 
TRANSLATION. 

SECTION  FIRST. 

Remark. — The  exercises  which  follow  consist  of  Spanish  phrases  and 
sentences  to  be  translated  into  English,  and  of  English  phrases  and  sen- 
tences to  be  translated  into  Spanish.  Such  exercises,  on  the  method  of 
"  constant  imitation  and  repetition,"  will  be  found  highly  useful  to  the 
learner.  By  means  of  the  definitions,  the  model  sentences,  the  explana- 
tions, and  the  references  to  rules  and  remarks,  the  English  exercises  can 
be  readily  rendered  into  Spanish. 

566.  The  abbreviations  employed  in  the  following  exercises  are  those 
generally  used  in  grammatical  works ; — thus,  masc.,  for  masculine  ;  fern., 
ior  feminine;  sing.y  for  singular;  plur.^  for  plural.  Other  abbreviations 
will  be  explained  as  they  occur. 

567.  When  two  or  more  words  in  English  are  connected  by  a  hyphen, 
they  are  to  be  rendered  by  one  word  in  Spanish ;  thus,  "  a  thrust-wifJi-a- 
sword"  is  rendered  by  una  estocada;  " thou-shouldst-speak"  by  the  sin- 
gle word  hablaras;  "the  poor-man"  by  el  pobre;  ^^ he-is  hlind-of-ont- 
eye"  by  es  tuerto. 

568.  A  word,  abbreviation,  or  number,  in  Roman  characters,  inclosed 
in  a  parenthesis,  is  designed  to  give  some  direction  or  reference  to  assist 
the  learner ;  thus,  "  the  brother  of  the  (87 ;  88)  housekeeper."  Here  the 
figures  87  and  88^are  designed  to  call  attention  to  those  respective  para- 
graphs, which  will  be  found  on  pages  31  and  32. 

569.  A  word  or  phrase  in  Italics,  inclosed  in  a  parenthesis,  shows  that 
the  preceding  word  is  to  be  translated  by  the  italicised  word  or  words. 
Thus,  in  the  sentence,  "he-is  {estd)  in  Spain,"  the  words  '^ he-is"  are  to 
be  rendered  by  estd.  So  in  the  sentences,  "  you  (vmd.)  are  rich,"  and, 
"  you  (vms.)  are  poor,"  the  word  "  you  "  in  the  former  case  is  to  be  ren- 
dered by  rmd.^and  in  the  lattet  by  vms.  , 

570.  A  word  or  phrase  inclosed  in  brackets  must  not  be  expressed  in  the 
language  in  which  the  sentence  is  to  be  translated.  Thus,  la  virtud  de 
[la]  fortaleza,  is  to  be  rendered  in  English  by,  "  the  virtue  of  fortitude  ;" 
and,  "  [he]  has  [aj  fever,"  in  Spanish,  by  tiene  calentura. 

1^^  The  learner  must  endeavor  to  retain  the  meaning  of  the  words 
and  their  manner  of  arrangement,  as  well  as  the  rules  and  remarks  to 
which  refeience  is  made,  as  he  will  thus  be  the  better  enabled  to  proceed 


232 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 


with  each  succeeding  exercise,  and  when  no  such  aids  are  furnished ; 
for  after  a  few  examples  and  references  to  any  particular  rule,  we  shall 
give  him  no  further  directions  in  the  exercises  which  come  under  that 
rule,  except  where  there  may  be  expected  to  be  cases  of  considerable 
doubt  on  his  part.  The  vocabulary  should  be  carefully  read  before 
attempting  to  translate  the  exercises. 


EXERCISE   I. 


571.  Vocabulary. 

Hombre,  man. 
Mugei;  woTnarij  wife, 
Marido,  husband. 
Hermano,  brother. 
Hermana,  sister. 
Hijo,  son. 
Hija,  daughter, 
Juez,  judge. 
Bello,  beautiful. 
Pasado,  pa^t. 

572.  Model  Phrases. 
(a.)  El  marido  de  la  Francesa. 

(6.)  Al  hermano  del  medico, 
(c.)  A  un  Americano. 
id.)  Lo  bello. 

(e.)  Los  maridos  de  las  Francesas. 


Medico,  physician. 
Criado,  male-servant. 
Criada,  JenuUe-servant. 
Americano,  American. 
Francesa,  French-woman. 
Alma,  sold. 

Ama,  mistress^  housekeeper 
Hambre,  hunger,  famine. 
Cierto,  true. 
Futuio,fuiure. 


The  husband  of  the  French-wo- 
man. 

To-the  brother  of-the  physician. 

To  an  American. 

The  beautiful,  or,  that-which-is 
beautiful  (84). 

The  husbands  of  the  French-wo 


573.  Spanish  to  be  translated  into  English.  < 
El  juez.  El  medico.  La  criada.  IJna  Francesa.  La 
muger.  El  hermano.  Un  criado.  El  alma.  Un  ama. 
El  alma  del  (88)  hombre.  La  hermana  del  Americano. 
La  hija  de  la  Francesa.  La  criada  de  la  muger.  Lo  (84) 
cierto.  Lo  bello.  Un  criado  del  juez.  Una  hija  del 
medico.  Lo  futaro.  Al  (88)  marido  de  la  Francesa.  A 
la  muger  de  juez.  Al  alma  del  ama.  El  hambre  del 
criado.  El  hijo  del  hermano  del  medico.  El  criado  de  la 
muger.  Al  hermano  del  juez.  A  la  hermana  del  Ameri 
cano.  Al  hijo  de  la  Francesa.  A  una  hija  del  America- 
no.    Lo  pasado.     A  lo  (84)  bello. 


EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLAIlON.  233 

\^^  The  plural  of  such  words  in  the  above  vocabulary  as  end  with  a 
vowel,  is  formed  by  adding  s  to  the  singular ;  as,  hombrt,  man ;  hcmi- 
hre^ty  men. 

Los  hombres.  Los  maridos.  Las  criadas.  Las  her- 
manas  de  la  Francesa.  Los  hijos  del  medico.  A  las  hijas 
de  la  muger.  A  los  hermanos  del  juez.  Las  almas  (84,  a) 
de  las  FraDcesas.  Las  hijas  del  Americano/  Las  criadas 
de  los  medicos.  Los  hermanos  del  marido  de  la  Francesa. 
Las  hijas  de  los  Americanos.  Los  hermanos  de  las  cria- 
das. 

574.  English  to  be  translated  into  Spanish. 

The  (80)  man.  The  (81)  woman.  The  (87)  soul.  The 
(82)  men.  The  physician.  The  (83)  daughters.  A  (86) 
woman.  A  (85)  judge.  A  (87)  famine.  A  (87)  mistress. 
The  brother  of-the  (88)  physician.  The  son  of  the  (88,  a) 
French-woman.  The  husband  of  the  woman.  The  male- 
servant  of-the  American.  The  sister  of-the  judge.  The 
female-servant  of  the  woman.  The  wife  of-the  physician. 
The  son  of-the  American.  To-the  (88)  brother  of  the 
female-servant.  To  the  (88,  a)  sister  of  the  French- 
woman. To-the  (87;  88)  soul  of-the  (87;  88)  housekeeper. 
The  (84)  beautiful.  To  (88,  a)  that-which-is  (84)  beauti- 
ful. The  past.  That-which-is  true.  The  future.  To 
the  future. 

The  brothers.  The  sisters.  The  sons  of  the  American. 
To  the  (88,  a)  brothers  of-the  physician.  To  the  (87,  a) 
souls  of  the  female-servants.  The  daughters  of  the 
French-woman.  The  sisters  of-the  judge.  The  male- 
servants  of  the  sons  of-the  physician.  The  sons  of  the 
sisters  of-the  American.  The  husbands  of  the  daughters 
of-the  judge.     The  brothers  of  the  female-servants. 


SECTION  SECOND. 

Remark.— That  the  learner  may  be  able  to  translate  and  to  form  com- 
plete sentences,  a  few  verbs  will  be  placed  in  the  vocabulary.    As  he  !» 
20* 


!2^4 


EXERCISES  TOR   TRANSLATION. 


not  yet  supposed  to  be  acquainted  with  the  form  of  conjugating  verbs  in 
Spanish,  it  is  necessary  to  mention  that  of  the  few  verbs  for  the  present 
given  in  the  vDcabulary,  those  ending  with  n  are  in  the  third  person 
plural,  and  of  course  are  to  be  used  when  plural  nouns  are  nominative 
to  them :  those  in  the  vocabulary  not  ending  with  n  are  in  the  third  per- 
son singular.  In  English  we  say,  "  the  man  wrote"  and  '*  the  men 
wrote  "  (the  verb  being  spelled  alike  in  both  the  third  persons  singular 
and  plural) ;  out  in  Spanish  we  would  say,  el  hombre  escribio,  "  the  man 
wrote"  and,  los  horobres  escribieron,  "  the  men  wrote." 

575.  In  Spanish,  the  general  rule  of  constructing  sentences  is  to  pro- 
duce clearness  and  harmony.  Hence  it  is  by  no  means  important  to 
place  the  nominative  before  the  verb,  as  is  usually  the  case  in  English. 
Thus  in  Spanish  we  can  say,  Pedro  dio  el  libra  d  Maria^  "  Peter  gave 
the  book  to  Mary ;"  or,  Pedro  dio  a  Maria  el  libro^  "  Peter  gave  to  Mary 
the  book ;"  or,  Pedro  d  Maria  dio  el  libro,  "  Peter  to  Mary  gave  the 
book ;"  or,  Pedro  d  Maria  el  libro  dio,  "  Peter  to  Mary  the  book  gave  ;" 
or,  a  Maria  dio  Pedro  el  libro,  "  to  Mary  gave  Peter  the  book ;"  or,  dio 
Pedro  d  Maria  el  libro,  "  gave  Peter  to  Mary  the  book ;"  and  each  of  these 
positions  of  the  words  is  allowed  by  the  rules  of  Spanish  construction, 
that  form  which  is  most  clears  forcible,  and  harmonious  being  always 
preferred. 

576.  The  learner  will  be  able  to  distinguish  the  gender  of  nouns,  either 
from  their  sex,  or  from  their  termination  (see  92,  c ;  and  92,  d).  Any 
noun  forming  an  exception  to  the  general  rules  of  gender,  will  have  its 
gender  specified  in  the  vocabulary,  and  should  be  remembered  by  the 
learner. 

EXERCISE    II. 

577.    Vocabulary. 

Tadre,  father. 

Madre,  mother. 

Impresor,  printer, 

Pintor,  painter, 

Carpintero,  carpenter. 

Caballo,  horse. 

Navio,  ship. 

Buey,  ox. 

Hambre  (fem.),  hunger. 

El  pintor  tiene,  the  painter  has. 

El  pintor  fu6,  the  painter  went. 

El  pintor  di6,  the  painter  gave. 

El    pintor    escribio,    the    painter 
wrote. 


Libro,  book. 

Carta,  letter. 

Dinero,  money. 

Oro,  gold, 

Plata,  silver. 

Hoja,  leaf. 

Casa,  house. 

Cuchara,  spoon. 

Sed,  thirst. 

Los  pintores  tienen,  the  painters 
have. 

Los  pintores  fueron,  the  painters 
went. 

Los  pintores  dieron,  the  painters 
gave. 

Los  pintores  escribieron,  the  paint- 
ers wrote. 


EXERCISES  FOR  TRANSLATION.  235 


578.  Model  sentences. 

(a.)  El  pintor  escribi6  una  carta  al 

hijodeljuez. 
(6.)  Las  mugeres  escribieron  cartas 

al  carpintero  de  navlo. 
(c.)  El  juez  fu6  i.  casa  del  mddico. 

{d.)  El  Americano  tiene  dinero. 
(e.)  La  muger  tiene  hambre. 


The  painter  wrote  a  letter  to  the 

judge's  son  (97). 
The  woman  wrote  letters  to  the 

ship  carpenter  (97,  a). 
The  judge  went    to  the  doctor's 

(97,  a). 
The  American  has  money. 
The  woman  has  hunger,  i.  c.  the 

woman  is  hungry. 

579.  The  Spanish  for  ^^ship  carpenter^'^  ^s  seen  above  (578,  b),  is  car- 
pintero de  navio,  "carpenter  of  ship."  So  ^^ ship  surgeon"  ^^ coach 
horses"  would  be  "  surgeon  of  ship"  *'  horses  of  coach." 

580.  It  can  not  be  said  in  Spanish,  "  I  am  hungry  "  "Iain  thirsty,'' 
"  I  am  afraid  "  but,  "/  have  hunger"  "/  have  thirst,"  "/  have  fear." 
El  impresor  tiene  hambre,  should  be  translated  in  English,  "the  printer 
is  hungry"  and  not  "  the  printer  Jias  hunger."  So  "  John  is  thirsty," 
should  be  translated  in  Spanish,  Juan  tiene  sed,  "John  has  thirst." 

581.  Spanish  to  be  translated  into  English. 

Los  impresores  (93)  tienen  dinero.  Las  mugeres  (93) 
tioHen  hambre  (580).  Los  pintores  tienen  libros  (94). 
Los  jueces  (95,  a)  tienen  sed.  Las  mugeres  dieron  libros 
al  padre  de  la  Francesa.  Los  hombres  dieron  dinero  a  la 
madre  del  Americano.  Los  carpinteros  fueron  a  casa*  del 
pintor.  Los  medicos  fueron  a  casa  del  juez.  Los  criados 
del'  juez  escribieron  cartas  a  las  criadas  de  la  Francesa. 
Los  jueces  escribieron  cartas  a  la  madre  del  pintor.  Los 
carpinteros  de  navio  (579)  tienen  dinero. 

La  hermana  del  impresor  escribio  una  carta  al  padre  del 
carpintero.  El  marido  de  la  Francesa  escribio  una  carta 
a  la  madre  del  juez.  El  hermano  de  la  Francesa  fue  a 
easa  del  Americano.  El  pintor  escribio  al  medico  una 
carta.  El  medico  fue  a  casa  del  impresor.  La  hija  del 
carpintero  tiene  dinero.  La  hermana  del  medico  tiene  una 
cuchara  de  plata  (97,  a).  El  libro  tiene  hojas  de  oro  (97, 
a).     El  caballo  tiene  hambre.      Los  bueyes  (93)  tienen 

*  Casa,  when  it  means  a  house,  as  a  place  of  residence,  or  home^  does 
not  take  the  artir 'e  before  it,  as  in  English. 


236  EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

sed.  El  carpintero  de  navio  tiene  hojas  de  plata  (97,  a). 
El  Jiermano  del  impresor  dio  al  pintor  una  cuchara  de  oro 
(97,  a).  El  hijo  del  carpintero  dio  un  libro  a  la  hermana 
del  Americano. 

Al  medico  dio  el  Americano  (575)  una  cuchara  de  plata. 
Al  juez  la  Francesa  escribio  una  carta.  A  los  criados  dio 
la  muger  (575)  libros.  Escribio  la  madre  de  la  Francesa 
cartas  a  las  hijas  del  medico.  Dio  el  Lermano  del  impre- 
sor al  pintor  una  cuchara  de  oro.  A  las  mugeres  dieron 
los  jueces  cucharas  de  plata. 
*    582.  English  to  be  translated  into  Spanish. 

The  painters  (93)  have  money.  The  printers  (93)  have 
books.  The  women  have  husbands  (94).  The  carpenters 
gave  a  (85)  book  to  the  son  of  the  judge.  The  sons  of  the 
American  gave  money  to  the  male-servants  of  the  physician. 
The  daughters  of  the  French-woman  wrote  letters  to  the 
sons  of  the  judges  (95,  a).  The  physician  wrote  letters  to 
the  mother  of  the  painter.  The  male-servants  of  the  phy- 
sician wrote  letters  to  the  female-servants  of  the  French- 
woman. The  printers  went  to  [the]  house  of  the  judge. 
The  horses  are  (580)  hungry.  The  men  are  (580)  thirsty. 
The  oxen  (93)  are  thirsty. 

The  ship  carpenter  (97,  a)  went  to  the  physician's*  (97. 
a).  The  judge's  son  (97)  went  to  the  painter's  (97,  a). 
The  French-woman's  daughter  gave  to  the  carpenter  a  sil- 
ver spoon  (97,  a).  The  printer's  brother  gave  to  the 
painter  a  gold  spoon.  The  carpenter's  son  has  money. 
The  physician's  sister  wrote  a  letter  to  the  judge's  daugh- 
ter. The  male-servant  is  hungry  (580).  The  woman  is 
thirsty  (580).  The  painter  is  hungry.  The  American  is 
thirsty.  The  judge's  daughter  wrote  a  letter  to  the  phy- 
sician's sister.  To  the  judge  the  French-woman  wrote  a 
letter. 

*  That  is,  "  to  [the]  house  of  the  physician," 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 


237 


SECTION  THIRD. 

583.  In  cases  in  which  the  position  of  adjectives  would  present  any 
difficulty  to  the  learner,  the  order  of  the  words  will  be  numbered :  thus, 
los  hombres^  magndnimos^  son  bienhechores  del  genero^  humano^.  The 
figures  here  indicate  that  in  translating  into  English,  "  magndnimos  " 
is  to  come  before  ^^hombres,"  and  ^'humano"  before  ^^genero;"  as,  "  the 
magnanimous  men  are  benefactors  of  the  human  race."  The  order  in 
which  English  words  must  be  placed  in  Spanish,  will  be  indicated  in  the 
same  manner  when  deemed  necessary;  thus,  "the^  openS  rebuke^  is2 
better^  than  [the]  secret2  love^"  Here  the  figures  show  the  order  in 
which  the  words  should  be  arranged  in  translating  into  Spanish ;  as, 
mejor  es  la  correccion  Ttianifiesta^  que  el  amor escondidoj  that  is,  "better is 
the  rebuke  open,  than  the  alfection  hidden." 

584.  A  sentence  is  rendered  negative  in  Spanish  by  placing  the  adverb 
no  {not)  before  the  verb ;  as,  Juan  no  es  sdbw,  "  John  is  not  wise ;" 
Pedro  no  tiene  dinero,  "Peter  has  not  money;"  Marza  no  tiene  sed, 
"  Mary  is  not  thirsty ;"  Diego  no  escribio  cartas,"  James  wrote  not  let- 
ters "  (or,  *'  James  did  not  write  letters  "). 


EXERCISE   III. 


585.  Vocabulary, 

Sibio,  wise. 

Ignorante,  ignorant. 

Impio,  impioiiSj  wicked. 

Falaz,  deceitful-,  false. 

Rico,  rich. 

Pobre,  poor. 

Bueno,  good. 

Malo,  bad,  evil. 

Nuevo,  new. 

Ingles,  English. 

Espanol,  Spanish. 

Frances,  French. 

Amigo,  friend. 

Lingua,  tongue,  language. 

General,  general. 

Es,  is. 

El    Espaiiol    ama,    the    Spaniard 

loves. 
Y,  and. 

586.  Model  sentences. 

(a.)  El    Espaiiol  no  tiene  libros2 
franceses.i 


Teriebroso,  dark,  gloomy, 

Fuerte,  strong. 

Robusto,  robust. 

Estrecho,  narrow,  close. 

Sob^rbio,  proud. 

Viejo,  old. 

Espacioso,  spacious,  wide. 

Hermosa,  beautiful,  handsome. 

Grande,  great. 

Lindo,  pretty. 

Dos,  two. 

Tres,  three. 

Camino,  road,  way. 

Verdad,  trvih. 

Ej^rcito,  army. 

Son,  are. 

Los  Espanoles  aman,  the  Spaniards 

love. 
E',  and  (before  i). 


The  Spaniard  (100)  has  not  (SS-l) 
French  books. 


?38  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 


(6.)  La  Espanola  tiene  una  16ngua2 

falaz.i 
(c.)  El  general  es  fuerte  y  robusto. 
(rf.)  El  viejo  es  s^bio. 
(c.)  Las  hijas  son  sob^rbias  6  igno- 

rantes/ 


The  Spanish- woman  (IJO,  a)  has  a 
deceitful  tongue. 

The  general  is  strong  and  robust. 

The  old-man  (102)  is  wise. 

The  daughters  are  proud  (100,  a) 
and  (587)  ignorant. 

587.  yis  used  for  the  conjunction  "a7i/f,"  except  before  words  begin 
ning  with  i  or  hi,  when  e  is  used ;  as,  el  hombre  y  la  muger,  "  the  man 
and  the  woman ;"  viejo  ^  impw"  old  and  impious ;"  hijos  e  hijas,  "  sona 
and  daughters." 

588.  Spanish  to  be  translated  into  English. 

El  camino  es  estrecho.  La  casa  es  espaciosa  (100,  a). 
Las  mugeres  son  soberbias  (99,  and  100,  b).  Los  Ingleses 
(102)  no  (584)  tierien  dinero.  Las  Inglesas  (100,  b)  nc 
tienen  hambre.  Los  Espanoles  (99  and  100,  b)  no  tienen 
sed.  Las  Americanas  (100,  b,  and  102)  son  hermosas. 
Los  libros  son  nuev^s.  Un  buen  (101)  general  es  el  (87) 
alma  de  un  ejercito.  El  Frances  (102)  es  pobre  y  sober- 
bio.  El  amigo  del  medico  es  ignorante.  El  juez  es  sabio 
y  rico.  La  lengua^  falaz^  no  ama  la  verdad.  Los  Ameri- 
canos aman  dinero.  Los  hijos  del  pintor  son  fuertes  y 
robustos.     Los  pobres  tienen  hambre. 

El  camino  de  los  impios  (102)  es  tenebroso.  El  her- 
mano  del  carpintero  dio  un  libro*  francos^  a  la  hermana 
del  Ingles.  El  padre  de  la  Francesa  es  viejo  y  pobre.  El 
criado  del  pintor  tiene  dos  libros^  malos^  Las  hijas  del 
impresor  tienen  tres  cucharas^  nuevas^  Los  jueces  escri- 
bieron  cartas^  inglesas'  a  las  hermanas  del  general.  El 
caballo  es  fuerte.  Los  hijos  del  medico  son  males  e  igno- 
rantes.  Las  mugeres^  falaces'  (95,  a)  no  aman  la  verdad. 
Las  hijas  del  amigo  del  impresor  dieron  al  criado  tres 
libros  nuevas  y  hermosas.  El  general  del  ejercito  es 
un  gran  (101,  a)  hombre.  Los  grandes  generales  del  ejer- 
cito son  amigos  del  juez.  Los  caminos  de  los  impios  son 
males.  Las  Francesas  no  son  lindas.  Los  pobres  y  loa 
ricos  son  soberbios.  La  hija  del  Espanol  es  linda  y  rica. 
El  Americano  es  soberbio  e  ignorante. 


EXERCISES    FOR   TRANSLATION.  239 

589,  English  to  he  translated  into  Spanish. 

The  Frenchman  (100)  wrote  letters  to  the  Spanish- 
woman  (100).  The  Americans  are  friends  of  the  English 
(Ingleses),  The  way  of  the  wicked  (102)  is  dark.  The 
daughters  of  the  Spaniard  (Espanol)  are  pretty.  The 
books  are  new.  The  house  of  the  physician  is  spacious. 
The  horses  of  the  Englishman  are  strong.  The  sons  of 
the  judge  are  poor  and  proud.  The  daughter  of  the 
French-woman  is  proud  and  (587)  ignorant.  The  sisters 
of  the  painter  are  rich  and  handsome.  A  good  (101)  man 
loves  the  truth.  A  false^  tongue*  loves  not  (584)  the 
truth.  The  Spaniards  and  the  Americans  love  money. 
The  silver  spoons  (cucharas  de  plata)  are  new.  The  road 
is  narrow.  The  judge's  son  (97)  is  bad  and  (587)  igno- 
rant. The  printers  are  rich.  The  physician's  male-ser 
vant  is  robust. 

The  physician's  horse  is  old.  The  poor-man  (102) 
wrote  a  letter  to  the  rich-man's  (102)  sons.  The  carpen- 
ter gave  three  books  to  the  friend  of  the  painter.  The 
father  of  the  French-woman  gave  two  French^  books'  to 
the  mother  of  the  printer.  The  judge's  father  gave  three 
English^  books*  to  the  general's  mother.  The  sisters  of 
the  American  are  not  (584)  wise.  The  house  is  not  (584) 
spacious.  The  general  of  the  army  wrote  net  letters  to 
the  father  of  the  judge.  The  Frenchmen  are  hungry 
(tienen  hamhre).  The  Englishmen  are  thirsty.  The  judge 
is  not  hungry.  The  women  are  not  thirsty.  The  general 
gave  a  great  (101,  a)  sum  (sumo)  of  money  fco  the  poor- 
men.  The  road  is  wide.  The  road  is  not  narrow.  The 
sisters  of  the  Englishman  are  not  beautiful.  The  male- 
servant  has  not  money.  The  American  is  proud  and 
ignorant.     The  Spaniard's  father  is  old  and  poor. 

590.  In  Spanish,  proper  names  employed  as  adjectives  are  not  gener- 
ally  written  with  a  capital  initial  letter ;  thus  we  write,  libros  espanolea^ 
"  Spanish  books,"  and  not  Ubros  Espanoles. 


240 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 


SECTION  FOURTH. 


EXERCISE   IV. 


591.  Voccbbulary, 

Alto,  hight  hfly. 

*^ulpable,  culpable. 

4Lmable,  amiable, 

Belio,  Jine,  elegant, 

Escrupuloso,  scrupulous. 

Todo,  every,  all 

Sol,  sun. 

Luna,  moon. 

Estrella,  star. 

Plane ta  (masc),  planet. 

Prud^ncia,  prudence. 

Tesoro,  treasure. 

El  medico  hallo,  the  doctor  found. 

592.  Model  sentences. 

(a.)  El  medico  hallo  un  libro  ale- 
man  en  el  camino. 

(6.)  La  Alemana  es  de  muy  gran 
prud^ncia. 

(c.)  Maria  es  una  muger  muy  ama- 
ble. 

{d.)  Los  montes  son  altlsimos. 

(e.)  El  caballo  es  mas  litil  que  el 
buey. 

(/.)  El  sol  es  el  mas  brillante  de 
todos  los  planetas. 

593.  Spanish  to  he  translated  into  English. 

La  muger  es  muy  (108)  amable.  El  juez  es  muy  (108) 
viejo  La  Francesa  es  muy  vieja.  El  criado  es  muy  cul- 
pable. La  lengua'^  esparola^  es  bella  y  muy  armoniosa. 
La  luna  es  muy  brillante.  Las  estrellas  son  muy  brillan- 
tes.  Las  torr*p  son  altisimas  (108).  Las  Espa'^oles  son 
m«y  soberbios  El  juez  es  muy  escrupuloso.  La  cas '  e* 
altisima  (108).  El  buey  es  tan  (104)  fuerte  como  (1  )4)  el 
caballo.  El  caballo  es  tan  viejo  como  el  buey.  El  pi  t 
es  mas  (106)  robusto  que  (106)  el  impresor.     Las  ci  la 


Brillante,  brilliant. 

G^rrulo,  garrulous,  taikative, 

Armonioso,  Jiarmonious. 

Benigno,  benign. 

Aleman,  Germaiu 

Sombrero,  hat. 

Leon,  lion. 

Bestia,  beast. 

Torre,  (fem.),  tower. 

Monte,  mountain. 

Genio,  genius,  disposition. 

En,  172,  on.  \  found. 

Los  medicos  hallaron,  the  doctors 


The    physician  found  a    German 

book  in  the  road. 
The  German-woman  (100,  a)  is  of 

very  great  prudence. 
Mary  is  a  woman  very  amiable. 

The  mountains  are  most  high. 
The  horse  is  more  useful  than  the 

ox. 
The  sun  is  the  most  brilliant  of  al 

the  planets. 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION.  241 

de  la  Espanola  (100,  a)  son  mas  garrulas  que  los  criados 
del  Aleman.  El  sol  es  mas  brillante  que  la  luna.  La 
luna  es  m^nos  (105)  brillante  que  (105)  el  sol.  La  hija 
del  medico  es  menos  (105)  hermosa  que  la  hija  del  juez. 
Las  casas  no  son  tan  altas  como  las  torres. 

El  sol  es  un  planeta  brillantisimo.  La  Francesa  es  la 
mas  (109)  hermosa  de  todas  las  mugeres.  Los  Inglesas 
son  mas  (106)  soberbios  que  los  Alemanes.  Los  pintores 
son  los  mas  (109)  ricos  de  todos  los  hombres.  Las  her- 
manas  del  impresor  son  las  menos  (109)  garrulas  de  todas 
las  mugeres.  La  Espanola  es  de  muy  gran  prudencia.  El 
marido  de  la  Inglesa  es  un  hombre  soberbio  y  muy  igno- 
rante.  El  leon  es  el  mas  fuerte  de  las  bestias.  El  juez 
es  de  genio  benignisimo.  El  amigo  del  general  did  al 
Frances  tres  libros^  alemanes^ 

El  viejo  hallo  un  tesoro  en  el  camino.  Los  hijos  del 
pintor  hallaron  un  sombrero^  nuevo^  en  el  camino.  Los 
hermanas  del  carpintero  escribieron  cartas  a  los  jueces^  es- 
crupulosos^  Los  generales  del  ejercito  son  culpables.  La 
madre  del  impresor  es  muy  viejo.  Las  hijas  del  carpin- 
tero tienen  hambre.  Los  buenos  (102)  aman  la  verdad. 
La  muger  hallo  dos  cucharas  de  oro  en  el  camino.  El 
medico  tiene  tres  libros^  franceses^  El  juez  ama  lo  (84) 
bueno. 

594.   English  to  he  translated  into  Spanish. 

The  mountain  is  very  (108)  high.  The  male-servant  is 
very  (108)  old.  The  Spanish^  language^  is  elegant  and 
very  harmonious.  The  sun  is  most  (108)  brilliant.  The 
stars  are  very  brilliant.  The  painter  is  as  (104)  proud  as 
(104)  the  judge.  The  horse  is  as  (104)  strong  as  (104) 
the  ox.  The  carpenter  is  as  rich  as  the  printer.  The 
daughters  of  the  German-woman  {Alemana)  are  less  (105) 
culpable  than  (105)  the  daughters  of  the  Spanish-woman 
{Espanola).  The  stars  are  less  (105)  brilliant  than  the 
moon.     The  moon  is  less  brilliant  than  the  sun.     The 

21 


242  EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

carpenter  is  more  (106)  ignorant  than  (106)  the  painter. 
The  lion  is  stronger*  than  the  horse.  The  judge  is  wiser 
than  the  physician. 

The  sister  of  the  printer  is  the  most  talkative  (109)  of 
all  the  women.  The  mother  of  the  German  is  the  most 
(109)  proud  of  all  the  women.  The  general  is  a  man  of 
very  great  (101,  a)  prudence.  The  physician  is  the  least 
(109)  ignorant  of  the  judge's  friends.  The  lion  is  the 
strongest  (most  strong)  of  all  the  beasts.  The  judge  is 
the  wisest  of  the  men.  The  German  is  of  [a]  disposition 
most  (108)  benign.  The  English^  language^  is  not  as  har 
monious  as  the  Spanish^  language^  The  hat  is  newer  than 
the  book.     The  book  is  less  new  than  the  hat. 

The  printers  are  hungry.  The  male-servant  is  thirsty. 
The  carpenter  found  a  new^  spoon^  of  silver  in  the  road. 
The  judge's  daughters  found  a  treasure  in  the  road.  The 
painter's  sons  love  the  truth.  The  (84)  good  is  preferable 
{preferible)  to  the  (84)  beautiful.  The  mountains  are  very 
high.  The  Englishman  gave  to  the  German  two  French^ 
books^  The  sister  of  the  painter  wrote  not  letters  to  the 
sons  of  the  carpenter.  The  (87)  housekeeper  is  proud  and 
ignorant. 


SECTION  FIFTH. 

595.  Personal  pronouns  must  always  agree  with  the  nouns  for  which 
they  are  substituted,  in  gender,  person,  and  number.  Thus,  if  it  is  said, 
"  John  lost  his  pen  {jpluma)  and  Peter  found  i7,"  the  pronoun  "  it "  must 
be  rendered,  in  Spanish,  by  to,  because  plwnia  is  feminine. 

EXERCISE   V. 

596.    Vocabulary. 


Oonfianza,  conjidence. 
Alguno,  some^  any. 
Hablo,  {Tie)  spoke. 
Vio,  {he)  saw. 
Vino,  (he)  came. 


Para,ybr. 

Mucho,  much^  many. 
Hablaron,  {tfiey)  spoke. 
Hizo,  ijie)  made,  (he)  did. 
Vinieron,  {they)  came. 


*  That  is,  as  it  would  be  expressed  in  Spanish,  "  more  stror.^." 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION.  243 


Tii  eres,  thmi  art. 
Yo  voy,  Igo^  lam-going, 
Comprar,  {to)  buy, 
Hablar,  {to)  speak. 
Pedro,  Peter. 


The  judges  brought  him  to- you. 

I  am-going  to  see  her. 
Bring  it  to-me  (Bring-me-it) 
Peter  saw  me. 
The  Frenchman  spoke  to-me. 


Yo*  soy,  /  am. 
Nosutros  somos,  we  arc. 
Traed,  bring  {ye). 
Dar,  {to)  give. 
Ver,  {to)  see. 

597.  Model  sentences. 

(a.)  Losjuecesos  le  llevaron  (115, 

a). 
(6.)  Yo  voy  ^  verla  (116). 
(c.)  Traedmelo  (116). 
{d.)  Pedro  me  vio  (113). 
(e.)  El  Frances  me  hablo  (114). 

598.  Spanish  to  be  translated  into  English. 

[The  personal  pronouns  are  in  Italics.] 
Pedro  me  (113,  and  114)  escribio  dos  cartas.  Ella  U 
( 1 1 3,  and  1 1 4.  b)  dio  un  libro.  El los{\\ 4,  a)  hallo.  Ella 
les  (1 14,  b)  escribio  algunas  cartas.  El  medico  /t;^  (114, 
b)  hablo.  Yo  soy  pobre  y  viejo.  Tu  eres  muy  sabio.  El 
es  ignorante.  Nosotros  somas  fuertes  y  ricos.  El  pintor 
^e  (1 14)  dio  una  cuchara  de  plata.  La  muger  nos  (114) 
vio.  El  carpiutero  ncs  hablo.  Los  Espa Holes  h  hablaron. 
El  juez  h  vio.  La  Fraucesa  los  (114,  a)  vio.  La  Inglesa 
las  vio.  El  carpintero  lo  hizo  para  (1  L"^)  el.  El  impresor 
tiene  mucha  confianza  en  ella  (115).  Los  pintores  tienen 
confianza  en  el.  El  Aleman  lo  hizo  para  mi.  El  medico 
tiene  mucha  confianza  en  ellos.  El  padre  del  impresor 
tiene  confianza  en  nosotros.  El  Frances  la  vio.  El  juez 
las  vio. 

El  Americano  hallo  un  sombrero  en  el  camino,  y  le\  dio 
al  hermano  del  juez.  La  muger  hallo  una  cuchara  en  el 
camino,  y  la  dio  a  la  hija  de  Pedro.  Pedro  hallo  tres 
cucharas,  y  me  Z(2s(115,  a)  dio.  La  Espanola  hallo  dos 
sombreros,  j  nos  los   (115,  a)  dio.     Ellos  nos  escribieron 


*  For  the  present,  we  shall  use  the  nominative  personal  pronouns 
with  the  verb,  though  it  is  not  in  general  required.    (See  139,  a.) 

t  "Z/e"  here  means  "i^,"  and  refers  to  sombrero,  being  of  the  same. 
ge«der.     (See  595.)  .  . 


244  EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

algunas  cartas.  Yo  voy  a  hablarZe  (116).  Yo  voy  a  verle 
(116).  Yo  la  (116,  a)  voy  a  ver.  Pedro  tiene  muchos 
libros,  y  me  dio  algunos  de  ellos  {[15).  El  medico  vino 
consigo  {ll5j  c).  La  Inglesa  vino  con^i^o  (115,  c).  Los 
pintores  vinieron  conmigo.  TraedweZo5  (116).  Trsidmele 
(116).  Traedw^  (116)  ^na  cuchara.  Traeo5  (116,  b)  algu- 
nas cucharas.  Yo  voy  a  darZ^5  (116)  tres  sombreros.  Ella 
tiene  algunos  libros ;  yo  voy  a  comprar/o5.  La  muger 
tiene  muchas  cucharas  de  oro  ;  yo  voy  a  comprarto.  Pe- 
dro OS  dio  dos  sombreros ;  yo  Jos  voy  a  comprar. 

599.  In  forming  a  negative  sentence,  the  adverb  no  must  come  not 
only  before  the  verb,  but  also  before  personal  pronouns  of  the  first-objee- 
tive  case;  as,  Juan  no  me  la  dijoj  "John  not  to-me  it  said,"  i.  c,  "John 
said  it  not  to-me,"  or  as  it  would  be  commonly  expressed  in  English, 

'  John  did  not  say  it  to  me." 

600.  Vnid.  (pronounced  usted)  is  generally  used  in  common  conversa- 
tion, and  though  of  the  third  person,  is  equivalent  to  the  English  word 
"you"  (see  110,  c) :  thus  the  sentence,  "you  are  rich,"  if  addressed  to 
one  person,  would  be  vmd.  es  rico  ("  your-worship  is  rich  ") ;  if  address- 
ed to  more  than  one  person,  vms.  son  ricos  (" your- worships  are  rich"). 
W^hen  females  are  referred  to,  the  feminine  form  of  the  adjective  must 
be  used. 

Vmd.  es  muy  sabio.  V7n,d.  tiene  hambre.  Vd.  (110,  c) 
me  dio  un  libro.  Vm.  tiene  una  casa.  Vms.  tienen  sed. 
Vms.  aman  la  ver  dad.  V7ns.  no  son  soberbios.  El  juez 
tiene  mucha  confianza  en  vd.  Pedro  le  (see  112,  II.)  dio 
el  libro.  El  Aleman  no  le  dio  dinero.  La  Alemana  no  le 
hablo.  La  muger  no  me  hablo.  El  pintor  no  le  vio.  El 
carpintero  no  los  hallo.  Yo  voy  a  darZe  un  libro.  V. 
(110,  c)  es  rico.  VV.  (110,  c)  son  pobres.  Vds.  son  so- 
berbios. 

601.  English  to  he  translated  into  Spanish. 

Peter  wrote  me  (113  and  114)  two  letters.  The  painter 
gave  him  (113  and  114,  b)  a  book.  She  found  them  (114, 
a).  He  wrote  to-them  (114,  b)  some  letters.  I  am  old 
and  poor.  The  judge  spoke  to-them  (114,  b).  Thou  art 
very  rich.     He  is  wise.      We   are  ignorant.     They  are 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION.  245 

strong  and  rich.  The  painter  gave  thee  (114)  a  silver 
spoon.  The  woman  saw  us  (H4).  The  carpenter  spoke 
to  us  (114).  The  Spanish-women  spoke  to  him  (114,  b). 
The  physician  saw  him  (114,  a).  The  French-woman  saw 
them  (masc).  The  German-woman  saw  them  (fern.).  The 
carpenter  made  it  (Zo)  for  him  (115).  The  painter  has 
confidence  in* her  (115).  The  printers  have  much  confi- 
dence in  him  (115).  The  American  made  it  for  me  (1 15). 
The  physician  has  much  confidence  in  them  (masc).  The 
mother  of  the  painter  has  much  confidence  in  us.  The 
Spaniard  saw  her.  The  Frenchman  saw  them.  Peter 
saw  him.     They  spoke  to-me  (114). 

The  French-woman  found  two  hats,  and  gave  them  to 
Peter.  The  woman  found  a  book  in  the  road,  and  gave  it 
(595)  to  the  physician.  The  American  found  a  spoon  in 
the  road,  and  gave  it  (595)  to  the  judge's  daughter  Peter 
found  three  spoons,  and  gave  them  to-me  (1J5,  a).  They 
wrote  us  some  letters.  They  (fem.)  spoke  to-us  (114).  I 
am-going  to  speak  to  him  (116,  and  116,  a).  I  am  going  to 
see  her  (116,  and  1 16,  a).  I  her  (116,  a)  am-going  to  see. 
The  physician  came  with-him  (115,  e).  Peter  has  many 
books,  and  he-gave  {did)  me  some  of  them  (115).  The 
Frenchman  came  with-thee  (115,  c).  The  carpenters  came 
with-me.  Bring  me  (116)  a  book.  Bring  him-to-me  (116). 
Bring-me-them  (1^)  Bring  (1 16,  b)  yourselves  (os)  some 
spoons.  I  am-going  to  give-him  (116)  three  books.  I  am- 
going  to  give  them  (1 16)  three  hats.  She  has  some  books  ; 
I  am-going  to  buy  them  (116).  The  judge  has  many  gold 
spoons  (97,  a) ;  I  am-going  to  buy  them.  Peter  gave  you 
three  books  ;  I  them  ( 1 1 6,  a)  am-going  to  buy.  I  am-going 
to  see  them  (masc).     I  am-going  to  see  them  (fern.). 

E^"  The  remaining  exercises  in  this  section  are  to  be  rendered  by 
vmd.  and  its  objective  cases,  when  the  second  person  ^^ you"  occurs  in 
English  (see  600).  Instead  of  vmd.,  any  of  the  other  abbreviations,  F., 
Vd.,  Vm.  (all  pronounced  listed),  may  be  used ;  and  instead  of  xiiides., 
the  other  abbreviations  in  the  plural,  FK,  Fs.,  Vms.,  Vds,,  may  be  used 
(See  no,  c). 

21* 


246 


EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION. 


Yoa  gave  me  a  book.  You  are  very  wise.  You  are 
hungry.  You  have  a  house.  You  (plur.)  are  thirsty. 
You  (plur.)  are  not  proud.  You  (plur.)  love  the  truth. 
The  physician  has  much  (confidence  in  you  (115).  The 
judge  gave  you  the  book.  The  American  gave  you  (le)  not 
money.  The  painter  spoke  not  to-you  {le).  The  woman 
spoke  not  to-you  (plur.).  She  spoke  not  to-me.  The  paint- 
er saw  thee  not.  The  carpenter  found  them  not.  I  am- 
going  to  give  you  (le)  a  book.     Peter  saw  you  (le). 


'  Every  sentence  in  the  preceding  English  eKercises  should  be 
carefully  written,  and  the  rules  for  the  position  of  the  pronouns  well 
studied.  By  examining  the  Spanish  exercises,  the  private  learner  will 
be  able  to  know  whether  or  not  he  renders  the  personal  pronouns  in  the 
English  sentences  correctly  in  the  Spanish.  We  would  recommend  to 
the  learner  to  write  and  re-write  these  exercises,  as  well  as  the  preceding 
ones,  till  he  becomes  perfectly  familiar  with  the  rules  referred  to  in  trans- 
lating from  one  language  to  the  other. 


SECTION  SIXTH. 


EXERCISE    VI. 


602.  Vocabulary. 

Calle  (fem.),  street, 
Mano  (fem.),  hand. 
Sobrino,  nephew. 
Levanto,  (he)  raised. 
Duele,  {if)  pains^  (it)  aches. 

603.  Model  sentences. 

{a.)  Las  casas  son  swyos  (119,  a; 

120). 
(b.)  Los  sombreros  son  suyos  de  el 

(120,  a), 
(c.)  Tu  (119)   hermana  y  la  mm 

(121)  tienen  hambre  y  sed. 
(fZ.)  Pedro  es  amigo  mio  (121,  b). 
(e.)  La  muger  levanto  los  ojos  (122). 
(/.)  Le  duele  la  garganta  de  Pedro 

(122,  a). 


Cabeza,  head, 
Garganta,  throat, 
Ojo,  eye. 
Tomo,  {he)  took. 
Por,  by,  through. 


The  houses  are  his   (or  hers,   or 

theij's). 
The  hats  are  his. 

Thy  sister  and  mine  are  hungry 

and  thirsty. 
Peter  is  a  friend  of  mine. 
The  woman  raised  her  (the)  eyes. 
The  throat  of  Peter  pains  him,*  i, 

e„  Peter's  throat  is  sore. 


*  Literally,  "  to-him  pains  the  throat  of  Peter." 


EXERCISES  FOR  TRANSLATION.  247 

604.  Spanish  to  he  translated  into  English. 

Mis  (119)  amigos  hallaron  un  tesoro  en  el  camino.  Un 
amigo  mio  (119,  a)  hallo  un  sombrero.  Tu  (119)  hijo  vio 
un  libro  en  la  calle.  El  juez  hablo  a  sus  (119)  amigos. 
Mi  madre  tiene  hambre.  Su  (120)  criado  tiene  sed.  Su 
(120)  hija  tiene  tres  cucharas.  Todos  mis  libros  son  tuyos 
(119,  a).  Yo  voy  a  su  easa.  Nuestras  criadas  son  culpa- 
bles.  El  libro  es  mio  (119,  a).  La  cucliara  es  tuya  (119, 
a),  Los  sombreros  son  nuestros.  Mi  padre  me  vio.  Las 
casas  son  suyas  de  el  (120,  a).  Los  caballos  son  suyos  do 
ella  (120,  a).  Las  cucharas  son  suyas  de  ellos.  Las  casas 
son  mias. 

Tu  (119)  madre  y  la  mia  (121)  tienen  prudencia.  Tus 
hermanos  y  los  mios  (121)  son  muy  pobres.  Sus  (120) 
hermanas  y  las  nuestras  son  soberbias.  Pedro  es  sobrino 
mio  y  suyo  de  ella  (121,  a).  El  medico  es  amigo  mio  y 
suyo  de  el  (121,  a).  Una  criada  mia  (121,  b)  hallo  un 
sombrero  en  la  calle.  El  dio  el  libro  a  un  amigo  nuestro 
(121,  b).  El  levanto  las  (122)  manos.  Ella  levanto  los 
(122)  ojos.  Pedro  levanto  la  cabeza.  El  criado  tiene  un 
sombrero  en  la  (122)  mano.  Ella  le  tomo  por  la  (122) 
mano.  El  la  tomo  por  la  (122)  mano.  La  (122,  a)  cabe- 
za me  (122,  a)  duele.  Te  (122,  a)  duele  la  (122,  a)  cabe- 
za.* La  cabeza  les  (122,  a)  duele.  Me  (122,  a)  duele  la 
garganta.  La  cabeza  nos  (122,  a)  duele.  La  garganta 
le(122,  a)  duele.  La  garganta  les  duele.  El  pintor  le 
(122,  a)  tomo  el  (122,  a)  sombrero,  y  fue  a  casa  del  medi- 
co. La  muger  les  (122,  a)  tomo  los  (122,  a)  sombreros. 
Mi  sobrino  levanto  la  ( 1 22)  cabeza. 

Vmd.  tiene  su  (123)  dinero.  La  muger  tieue  su  (123^, 
libro.  Vmd.  escribio  algunas  cartas  a  sus  (123)  amigos. 
Yms.  dieron  tres  libros  a  sus  criadas.  El  medico  le  (123, 
a)  dio  a  vmd  (123,  a)  muchos  libros.     Su  (123,  a)  hijo  de 

*  "  Te  duele  la  cabeza^'  means  the  same  as  "/a  cabeza  te,  duele,^^  the 
difference  in  ccnstruetion  not  altering  the  meaning.     (.Scj  575.) 


248  EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

vmd.  (123,  a)  cs  muy  amable.  Sus  (123,  a)  hijas  de  vmdes, 
son  muy  hormosas.  Las  easas  son  suyas  de  Y.  (120,  a), 
Los  caballos  son  suyos  de  VY.  (120,  a).  Sus  hermanas 
de  Yd.  son  amabilisimos.  Sus  libros  de  Yms.  son  buenos. 
Ym.  hallo  £u  (123)  dinero. 

605.  English  to  be  translated  into  Spanish. 

My  (119)  friend  is  rich.  My  (119)  mother  is  poor. 
My  (119)  frivmds  found  a  treasure  in  the  road.  Thy  (119) 
sister  saw  a  b:>ok  in  the  street.  A  friend  of  mine  (121,  b) 
found  a  hat.  The  physician  spoke  to  his  (119)  friends. 
My  brother  is  hungry.  His  (120)  horse  is  strong.  All 
my  books  are  tMne  (119,  a).  His  (120)  female-servant  is 
thirsty.  I  am-going  to  his  (or  her)  house.  Our  (118) 
female-servants  are  talkative.  The  book  is  mine  (1 19,  a). 
The  spoon  is  thine  (il9,  a).  The  hats  are  mine  (119,  a). 
The  houses  are  mine  (119,  a).  The  books  are  ours.  My 
father  saw  me  (113).  The  houses  are  his  {suyas  de  el). 
The  spoons  are  hers  (i?3,  s).  The  horses  are  theirs  (fern. ; 
120,  a). 

Thy  (119)  house  and  mine  {la  mia ;  121)  are  beautiful. 
Thy  mother  and  mine  (121)  bcve  prudence.  Thy  brothers 
and  mine  (121)  are  very  poor.  Thy  sisters  and  ours  (121) 
are  proud.  Peter  is  [a]  nephow  of  mine  (121,  b)  and 
hers  ( 12 1,  a).  The  painter  is  a  friend  of  mine  (120;  b)  and 
his  (120,  a;  121,  a).  A  female-servant  of  mine  (121,  b; 
found  a  hat  in  the  street.  He  gave  the  book  to  a  frient  . 
of  ours  (121,  b).  She  raised  her  (122)  hands.  He  raisai 
his  (122)  eyes.  Peter  raised  his  (122)  head.  She  raistv 
her  (122)  eyes.  The  male-servant  has  a  hat  on  {en)  hC' 
{la;  122)  head.  He  took  her  by  her  (122)  hand.  Sh. 
took  him  by  his  (122)  hand.  My  (122,  a)  head  aches  (tbi 
head  to-me  aches;  122,  a).  Thy  (122,  a)  head  aehes  (ic 
thee  aches  the  head,  122,  a).  His  (122,  a)  head  acheb 
Peter's  head  aches  (603,  f).  My  (122,  a)  throat  paiuh 
me.     Thy  (122,  a)  throat  is-sore  {duele).     The  physiciiju 


EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION.  249 

took  his  (122,  a)  hat,  and  went  to  [the]  house  of  the  paint- 
er.    The  women  took  their  (122,  a)  hats. 

(a )  In  the  remaining  exercises,  when  the  second  person  (you  or  ycmr) 
occurs,  it  is  to  be  rendered  by  vmd.  and  its  objective  cases  and  posses- 
sive pronouns ;  thus,  "  You  found  your  book,"  vmd.  hallo  su  librOj  liter- 
ally, ^^ your-worship  found  his  book."  So,  "John  gave  the  book  to 
you"  Juan  le  dio  el  libro,  or  Juan  le  dio  a  vmd.  el  libro,  literally,  "  John 
gave  the  book  to  him^"  i.  c,  "  to  your-worship." 

The  painter  has  your  (123)  book.  You  have  your  (123) 
money.  You  wrote  letters  to  your  (123)  friends.  You 
gave  a  book  to  your  father.  You  (plur.)  gave  to  your 
male-servants  two  silver  spoons  (97,  a).  The  physician 
gave  you  (to-him  gave  to  your-worship ;  123,  a)  many 
books.  Your*  (123,  a)  son  is  very  amiable.  Your  (123, 
a)  daughters  are  very  beautiful.  The  houses  are  yours 
[suyas  de  vmd.  ;  120,  a).  The  horses  are  yours  (120,  a). 
The  oxen  are  yours.  The  painter  gave  you  (123,  a)  three 
hats.  Your  (123,  a)  sons  are  proud.  Your  (123,  a)  sis- 
ters are  most  amiable  (108).  You  have  not  your  money. 
The  woman  has  not  your  book.  You  wrote  not  letters  to 
your  friends.     Your  father  is  rich. 


SECTION  SEVENTH. 
EXERCISE    VII. 

606.    Vocabulary, 


Cuidado,  care^  anxiety. 

Juan,  John, 

Cuarto,  room, 

Ciudad,  citj/. 

Agradable,  agreeable^  pleasant, 

Posible,  possible. 

Sabe,  {he)  krunos. 

Hacer,  to  make,  to  do. 

Leer,  to  read. 


Dios,  God. 

Maria,  Mary, 

Nombre,  name. 

Sabidurla,  wisdom. 

Desgraciado,  unfortunate,  unhajjpy. 

Imposible,  impossible. 

Saben  {they)  know. 

Decir,  to  say. 

Tomar,  to  take. 


*  That  is,  "his  son  of  your  voorship,^*  su  hijo  de  vmd.    (See  123,  a). 


250  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 


My  brothers  are  {they)   who  saw 

them. 
The  painters  whom  you  saw,  and 

of  whom  John  spoke,  are  very 

rich. 
The  man  whose  brother  is  general 

of  the  army,  found  a  treasure  in 

the  city. 
She  knows  what  is  good. 

She  who  has  money,  has  care. 


607.  Model  sentences. 

(a.)    Mis   hermanos    son    quienes 

(124,  a)  los  vio. 
[b.)  Los  pintores  d  quienes  (124,  b) 

vmd.  vio,  y  de  los  cuales  (124,  c) 

Juan  hablo,  son  muy  ricos. 
(c.)  El  hombre  cuyo  (124,  d)  her- 

mano    es    general    del    ejercito, 

hallo  un  tesoro  en  la  ciudad, 
(d.)  Ella  sabe  lo  que  (125,  b)  es 

bueno. 
(e.)  La  que  (125,  c)  tiene  dinero, 

tiene  cuidado. 

608.  Spanish  to  be  translated  into  English. 

El  juez  es  quien  (124,  a)  vio  las  cartas  que  (124,  c) 
vmd.  escribio.  Las  Francesas  son  quienes  (124,  a)  dieron 
los  libros  a  Pedro.  El  hombre  a  quien  (125,  a)  el  Ale- 
man  dio  los  sombreros,  es  muy  rico  e  ignorante.  Las 
mugeres  a  quienes  (125,  a)  el  medico  escribio  las  cartas, 
son  muy  pobres  e  ignorantes.  El  juez  dio  los  libros  a  un 
pintor^  ingles^  (100,  c)  en  quien  (125,  a)  el  medico  tiene 
mucha  confianza.  Los  mugeres  para  quienes  (125,  a)  Pe- 
dro escribio  las  cartas,  son  muy  hermosas  y  ricos.  La 
Espanola  a  quien  (124,  b)  Pedro  ama,  es  muy  bermosa. 
Las  Francesas  a  quienes  (124,  b)  vmd.  vio,  me  (1 13  ;  114) 
escribieron  muchas  cartas.  Las  cucharas  que  (124,  c) 
Maria  tiene,  y  las  cuales  (124,  c)  el  Frances  hallo,  son 
mias.  El  caballo  que  (124,  c)  Juan  vio,  y  del  cual  (124, 
e)  Pedro  hablo,  es  robusto  y  fuerte.  Las  calles  cuyas 
(124,  d)  casas  son  hermosas,  son  agradables. 

El  criado  cuyo  (124,  d)  nombre  es  Pedro,  vino  a  mi 
casa.  Las  casas  cuyos  (124,  d)  cuartos  son  espaciosos,  son 
muy  agradables.  Juan  dio  el  libro  a  una  muger  cuyo 
nombre  es  Maria.  El  pintor  y  el  impresor  vinieron  a 
Madrid,  en  cuya  (124,  d)  ciudad  el  pintor  hallo  un  tesoro. 
El  hombre  que  (125)  tiene  prudencia,  es  muy  sabio.  El 
hombre  que  tiene  dinoro,  tiene  cuidado.  La  muger  que 
(125)  OS  soberbia  e  igno'^ante,  es  desgraciada.     Los  horn- 


EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION.  251 

bres  que  (125)  tienen  dinero,  tienen  cuidados.  Lo  que 
(125,  b)  es  imposible  para  los  (230)  hombres,  es  posible 
para  Dios.  Lo  que  (125,  b)  es  nuevo,  no  es  viejo.  El 
pintor  tiene  el  tesoro  que  el  medico  hallo  en  la  calle. 
Pedro  ama  lo  que  (125,  b)  es  bueno.  Ella  sabe  que  (125, 
b)  hacef.  El  hombre  no  sabe  que  (125,  b)  hacer.  Pedro 
sabe  lo  que  es  bueno.  La  Francesa  no  sabe  que  decir. 
Las  hijas  del  juez  no  saben  que  comprar.  El  pintor  no 
sabe  que  (125,  b)  libro  leer.  Los  Alemanes  no  saben  cual 
(125,  b)  sombrero  tomar.  Mi  hermana  no  sabe  cuales 
libros  leer. 

La  que  (125,  c)  es  soberbia,  no  es  amable.  Los  que 
(125,  c)  aman  la  verdad,  son  sabios.  El  que  (125,  c)  tiene 
sabiduria,  tiene  prudencia.  Mi  hermano  tiene  un  tesoro, 
que  (124,  c)  su  criado  hallo  en  la  ciudad.  El  que  tiene 
prudencia,  es  sabio.  Los  que  nos  dieron  los  libros,  son 
amigos  nuestros  (121,  b).  La  que  no  es  agradable,  es  des- 
graciada.  La  ciudad  en  que  (126)  Juan  hallo  el  tesoro, 
es  grande  y  hermosa.  La  muger  a  quien  Maria  hablo,  es 
muy  amable.  El  que  tiene  oro,  tiene  mucho  cuidado.  El 
Aleman  dio  dos  libros  al  hombre  a  quien  (124,  b)  Juan 
vio.  El  medico  dio  tres  libros  a  la  Francesa  en  quien  mi 
madre  tiene  mucha  confianza.  El  pintor  fue  a  Madrid,  en 
cuya  (124,  d)  ciudad  las  calles  son  agradables  y  las  casas 
hermosas.     Las  criadas  no  saben  que  hacer. 

609.   English  to  he  translated  into  Spanish. 

The  physician  is  [he]  who  (124,  a)  wrote  the  letter 
which  (124,  c)  you  {vmd.)  saw.  The  judge  is  [he]  who 
(124,  a)  saw  the  letters  which  (124,  c)  you  (vmd)  wrote. 
The  Spanish-women  are  [they]  who  (124,  a)  gave  the  books 
to  Peter.  The  man  to  whom  ( 1 25,  a)  John  gave  the  hats, 
is  very  rich  and  (587)  ignorant.  The  women  to  whom 
(125,  a)  the  judge  wrote  the  letters  are  very  poor  and 
ignorant.  The  women  for  whom  (125,  a)  Mary  wrote  the 
letters,  are  very  amiable  and   beautiful.     The  physician 


252  EXERCISES  FOR  TRANSLATION. 

gave  the  spoons  to  an  English^  painter^  (100,  c),  in  whom 
(125,  a)  the  judge  has  much  confidence.  The  French- 
woman whom  (124,  b)  Peter  loves,  is  very  beautiful.  The 
German-woman  whom  (124,  b)  you  (vmd.)  saw,  wrote  me 
many  letters.  The  spoons  which  (124,  c)  Mary  has,  and 
which  ( 1 24,  c)  the  Frenchman  found,  are  mine.  The  male- 
servant  who  (125)  came  with  me  (115,  c),  is  strong  and 
robust.  The  horse  which  (124,  c)  John  saw,  and  of  which 
(del  cual ;  124,  c)  Peter  spoke,  is  strong.  The  streets 
whose  (124,  d)  houses  are  beautiful,  are  agreeable. 

The  man  whose  (124,  d)  name  is  John  came  to  my 
house.  The  woman  whose  name  is  Mary  gave  me  three 
books.  The  houses  whose  (124,  d)  rooms  are  spacious,  are 
very  pleasant.  John  gave  three  silver  spoons  to  a  woman 
whose  name  is  Mary.  The  painter  and  the  printer  came 
to  Madrid,  in  which  (124,  d)  city  the  painter  found  a  trea- 
sure. The  man  who  (125)  has  prudence,  is  wise.  The 
woman  who  (125)  is  proud  and  ignorant,  is  unhappy.  The 
men  who  have  money,  have  cares.  That  which  (125,  b)  is 
possible  for  Peter,  is  possible  for  John.  What  (125,  b)  is 
possible  for  the  painter,  is  not  possible  for  the  carpenter. 
The  Frenchman  has  the  treasure  that  (124,  c)  the  physi- 
cian found  in  the  street  of  the  city.  Peter  loves  what 
(125,  b)  is  good.  Mary  knows  what  (125,  b)  is  good.  The 
German  knows  what  (125,  b)  to-do.  The  painter  knows 
not  what  (125,  b)  to-do.  The  French-woman  knows  not 
what  to-say.  The  physician's  sister  knows  not  what  to- 
buy.  The  male -servants  know  not  what  to-say.  My 
father  knows  not  what  (125,  b)  book  to-read.  My  brothers 
know  not  which  (125,  b)  books  to-buy.  The  Germans 
know  not  which  (125,  b)  hat  to-take.  She  knows  not  what 
spoon  to-take. 

He  that  (125,  c)  has  much  gold,  has  much  care.  She 
that  (125,  c)  is  proud,  is  not  amiable.  They  who  (125,  c) 
love  the  truth,  are  wise.     He  who  has  wisdom,  has  pru 


EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION.  253 

dence.  He  who  has  prudence,  is  wise.  My  father  has  a 
treasure  which  (124,  c)  his  male-servant  found  in  the  city. 
They  who  gave  us  the  books,  are  friends  [of  J  ours  (121,  b). 
She  who  is  not  agreeable,  is  unfortunate.  Those  who  are 
ignorant  and  impious,  are  unhappy.  The  city  in  which 
(126)  Peter  found  the  books,  is  large  and  beautiful.  The 
woman  to  whom  Mary  spoke,  is  very  agreeable.  The 
painter  went  to  Madrid,  in  which  (124,  d)  city  the  streets 
are  pleasant  and  the  houses  handsome. 


SECTION  EIGHTH. 

610.  In  Spanish,  all  that  is  necessary  to  form  an  interrogatory  sen- 
tence, is  to  place  the  interrogation  mark  before  (inverted)  and  after  the 
sentence.  Thus,  Juan  tiene  dinero,  means,  "John  has  money,"  and 
I  Juan  tiene  dinero?  means,  "has  John  money?"  It  is,  however,  com- 
mon (though  not  necessary)  in  Spanish,  to  place  the  nominative  after  the 
verb  in  interrogations;  as,  i tiene  Pedro  dinero?  itienen  los  pintores 
libros?  "  has  Peter  money  7"   "have  the  painters  books  7" 

611.  The  auxiliary  werhdo  is  unknown  in  Spanish  (as  also  in  all  the 
languages  of  Europe  except  the  English),  and  all  such  expressions  as, 
^^ does  John  speak?" — "c?o  they  love 7" — "how  much  do  you  ask  a 
week  T — "  did  it  not  snow  during  my  absence  7" — "  did  they  see  her  7" 
— "  Peter  did  speak,"  must  be  rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  simple  form 
of  the  verb  ;  as,  i  hdbla  Juan  ? — i  aman  ellos  ? — i  cudnto  pide  vd.  por 
semana? — ^no  nevO  durante  mi  ausencia? — ila  vieron  ellos? — Pedro 
hablo;  that  is,  "speaks  John  1" — "tore  they 7"— "how  much  ask  you 
per  week  7" — "snowed  it  hot  during  my  absence 7" — "  her  saw  thev 7" 
(or,  "saw  they  her 7")  "  Peter  spofce," 


EXERCISE   VIII. 


612.    VocahvZary. 

Aziicar,  sugar. 

Manteca,  butter. 

Esp6cie  (fem.)  species,  sort. 

Seiior,  sir. 

Si,  yes. 

Toma,  (he)  takes. 

Dice  (he)  says. 

Habla  (he)  speaks. 

Quiere  (he)  wishes,  (he)  wants. 


Pan,  bread. 
A'gua,  water. 
Boton,  button. 
Senora,  madam,  lady. 
No,  no. 

Dicen,  (they)  say. 
Dijo,  (he)  said. 
Entiende,  (he)  understands. 
Quieren,  (ihey)  wish,  (they)  want. 
22 


254  EXERCISES   FOR    TRANSLATION. 


613.  Model  sequences. 

(o.)  I  Q,ui6n  tiene  aziicar  7 
(6.)  I  Q,uien  habla  Ingles  7 
(c.)  I  Cual  de  los  dos  pin  tores  iene 

dinero  1 
(d.)  I  Que  dijo  la  hija  del  juez'? 
(e.)  I  Qu6  libro  tiene  vra.  7 
(/.)  ^  De  quien  es  el  tesoro  7 
(g.)  I  Quiere  su  hijo  pan^  seiior  1 
(A.)  No,  senor,  mi  hijo  tiene  pan. 


Who  has  sugar  7 

Who  speaks  English  7 

Which  of  the  two   painters  has 

money  7 
What  said  the  judge's  daughter  7 
What  book  have  you  7 
Whose  is  the  treasure  7 
Does  your  son  want  bread,  sir  7 
No,  sir,  my  son  has  bread. 


614.  Spanish  to  be  translated  into  English. 

2, Quien  (127)  es  bueno?  ^/Q^^^^^s  (^2^)  son  rices? 
[  De  quien  (127)  son  las  casas  ?  i  Cuyos  ( 127)  libros  tiene 
Vmd.  ?  2»^ual{127)  de  los  dos  hijos  del  juez  hallo  un 
tesoro  ?  I  Que  (127)  dijo  Ymd.  ?  i  Que  (127)  sombrero 
tiene  vmd.  ?  i  Que  tesoros  hallo  Pedro  ?  i  Que  quiere 
Vm.  ?  I  Que  lengua  habla  el  general  ?  i  Para  quien  (127, 
a)  escribio  Maria  las  cartas?  Para  el  muger  (127,  a). 
iK  quienes  (127,  a)  dio  Juan  los  libros^  espanoles^  ?  A 
los  Alemanes  (127,  a),  j  Que  (127,  b)  hombre  es  Vm.  ! 
i  Que  (127,  b)  hermosa  muger!  ^^  Q^i^^  quiere  pan? 
I  Quien  quiere  azucar  ?  i  Quien  habla  Espanol  ?  i  Quien 
entiende  el  Ingles?  ^/Q^i^^  ^^^  ^^  verdad?  ^^  Q^i^^ 
habla  el  Frances?  i  Quien  entiende  lo  que  (125,  b)  Juan 
dice  ?  I  Que  especie  de  botones  quiere  Vm.  ?  i  Que 
especie  de  azucar  tiene  Pedro?  ^^  Que  quieren  Vms.  ? 
I  Que  libros  quieren  los  pintores  ?     i  Que  dicen  los  jueces  ? 

I  Toma  Vmd.  agua  ?  i  Que  dijo  el  hermano  del  medi- 
co? Senora,,  2,  quiere  Vmd.  manteca?  2,11^^1^  su  (123) 
hijo  Espanol^  senor?  Si,  senor,  mi  hijo  habla  Esparlol. 
,.  Entiende  su  hija  de  Vmd.  (123,  a)  el  Ingles,  senora? 
■STo,  senor,  ella  no  entiende  el  Ingles,  i  Cuyas  cucharas 
tiene  la  Francesa  ?  i  Cuyos  botones  tienen  los  criados  ? 
i,  Cuyo  sombrero  tiene  Juan?  iQ\xq  libros  tiene  Pedro? 
[Quien  tiene  hambre?  ^z  Q^i^^^^  tienen  sed?  ^  Que 
especie  de  cucharas  tienen  las  hermanas  del  Americano  ? 
i  Que  dicen  lo-  Espanoles  ?     i  Que  quieren  Pedro  y  Juan  1 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION.  255 

I  Toma  el  pintor  agua  ?  i  Quien  entiende  lo  que  Vms. 
dicen  ?  i  Que  dijo  el  padre  del  medico  ?  i  Quien  tiene 
pan  ?  ^  De  quien  son  los  libros  1  i  Cual  de  los  dos  Fran- 
ceses Labia  Espanol?     lA  quien  habla  Ym.  1 

2,  Tiene  Ym.  dinero?  ^^^ienenlos  carpinteros  muchos 
amigos?  ^^ Tiene  Y.  muchos  libros?  ^^  Tiene  el  libro 
hojas  de  oro  ?  i  Tienen  los  jueces  hambre  ?  ^z  ^s  Y.  Es- 
panol  ?  i  Son  las  casas  nuevas  ?  i  No  son  sus  amigos 
ricos?  i  Sus  hermanas  610  no  son  tan  104  ricas  como 
el?  ^  Mis  hermanos  no  son  mas  106  ricos  que  106 
los  carpinteros  de  navio  ?  i  Escribio  el  criado  de  juez 
cartas  a  las  criadas  de  la  Francesa  ?  ^  Es  la  muger  ama- 
ble  ?  I  Son  los  Ingleses  mas  soberbios  que  (106)  los  Ale- 
manes  ?  I  Hallo  el  pintor  dos  libros  en  la  calle  de  la  ciu- 
dad  ?  I  Tienen  los  criados  hambre  ?  Si,  senor,  los 
criadas  tienen  hambre.  i  Tienen  las  Espanolas  sed  ?  No, 
senor,  las  Espanolas  no  tienen  sed. 

615.  English  to  be  translated  into  Spanish. 

Who  (127)  is  wise?  Who  is  rich?  Who  (127)  are 
good  ?  Who  are  culpable  ?  Who  is  strong  ?  Who  are 
robust?  Of  whom  (127,  a)  speaks  John?  Of  the  phy- 
sician (127,  a).  Whose  (of  whom  ;  127,  a)  are  the  houses  ? 
Peter's  (127,  a).  Whose  (127)  books  has  Mary?  Whose 
(127)  buttons  have  the  male-servants?  Whose  spoons 
have  my  sisters  ?  Which  (127)  of  the  two  sons  of  the  phy- 
sician found  a  treasure  in  the  road  ?  Which  of  the  two 
men  is  culpable?  What  (127)  say  you  ?*  (what  says  your 
worship  ?)  What  (127)  said  you  ?  What  does  (611)  John 
wish  ?  (what  wishes  John  ?)  What  does  (611)  Peter  say  ? 
What  do  (611)  the  judges  say?  What  (127)  hat  have 
you?  What  (127)  treasures  did  Peter  find  ?  (what  trea- 
sures found  Peter?)  What  wish  you?  What  language 
speaks  the  general  ?     For  whom   (127,  a)  wrote  John  the 

*  The  learner  can  use  rm.,  vmd.,  F.,  Fw.,  Vcl.,  orVi'd.  in  the  singu- 
lar for  you.     (See  remark  at  the  bottom  of  p.  245.) 


256  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

letters?  Tor  the  French-woman  (127,  a).  To  whom 
(plur.)  gave  John  the  French^  books^  ?  To  the  daughters 
of  the  judge.  What  a  (127,  b)  woman !  What  a  (127,  b) 
beautiful  city!  Who  (127)  wishes  bread?  Who  wishes 
sugar  ?  Who  speaks  English  ?  Who  understands  the 
Spanish  ^  Who  speaks  the  French  ?  Who  understands 
what  (125,  b)  Mary  says?  Who  understands  what  the 
Americans  say?  What  sort  of  buttons  do  (611)  you 
want  ?  What  sort  of  sugar  has  John  ?  What  sort  of 
spoons  do  (611)  my  friends  want?  What  do  (611)  the 
women  say? 

Do  (611)  you  take  water  ?  Do  you  take  sugar  ?  What 
said  the  sister  of  John  ?  What  said  the  brother  of  the 
physician  ?  Sir,  do  you  want  butter  ?  (sir,  wishes  your- 
worship  butter?)  Does  (611)  your  (123)  son  speak  Span- 
ish, sir  ?  (speaks  his  son  Spanish,  sir  ?)  Yes,  madam,  my 
son  speaks  Spanish.  Does  (611)  your  (123,  a)  daughter 
understand  the  English,  madam  ?  No,  sir,  my  daughter 
does  (611)  not  understand  the  English.  Whose  spoons 
has  the  female-servant  ?  Whose  hat  has  Peter  ?  Whose 
buttons  have  the  painters  ?  What  books  has  Mary  ? 
What  bread  have  you?  Who  is  thirsty  ?  (who  has  thirst?) 
Who  are  hungry?  What  do  (611)  the  Spaniards  say? 
What  wish  Peter  and  John  ?  What  sort  of  spoons  has 
the  daughter  of  the  carpenter  ?  Does  the  German  take 
water?  Who  understands  what  (125,  b)  you  (plur.)  say  ? 
What  says  the  father  of  the  painter  ?  Who  has  butter  ? 
Whose  (of  whom)  are  the  books  ?  Which  of  the  two 
Spaniards  speaks  English?  To  whom  do  (611)  you 
speak? 

Have  you  money?  Have  the  Frenchmen  many  friends  ? 
Have  you  many  books  ?  Has  the  book  leaves  of  gold  ? 
Are  the  women  hungry?  Are  you  [a]  Spaniard?  (is 
your  worship  Spanish  ?)  Are  you  [a]  Frenchman  ?  Are 
you  [a]  German  ?     Are  the  houses  new  ?     Are  not  his 


EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION.  257 

friends  rich  ?  Are  not  his  brothers  as  ( 1 04)  rich  as  ( 1 04) 
he?  My  brothers  are-they  (son)  not  richer  (106)  than 
(106)  the  judge's  sons?  Wrote  the  son  of  the  painter 
letters  to  the  French-woman  ?  Is  the  woman  amiable  ? 
Are  the  Spaniards  more  proud  than  the  English  ?  Did 
the  painter  find  (found  the  painter)  two  books  in  the  road  ? 
Are  the  Germans  hungry  ?  Yes,  sir,  the  Germans  are 
hungry.  Are  the  Spanish- women  thirsty  ?  No,'  madam, 
the  Spanish-women  are  not  thirsty.  Is  John  [a]  carpen- 
ter ?     Yes,  sir,  John  is  [a]  carpenter. 


SECTION  NINTH. 

616.  The  English  demonstrative  pronoun  "  that"  is  rendered  in  Span- 
ish by  the  definite  article  when  it  refers  to  something  having  preceded 
it  and  is  followed  by  the  preposition  "of;"  as,  "my  house  and  that  of 
my  servant,"  mi  casa  y  la  de  mi  criado;"  "his  only  desire  was  that  of 
freeing  his  country  from  the  Saracen  yoke ;"  su  Unico  deseo  era  el  de 
libertar  d  su  patria  del  yugo  sarraceno;  "  the  repose  of  the  poor-man  is 
not  a  cheerless  leisure  like  that  of  the  rich-man,"  el  descanso  delpobre  no 
es  un  ocio  insipido^  como  el  del  rico  ;  "  Saguntum  endured  a  siege  equal 
io-that  of  Numantia,"  Sagunto  sufrioun  sitio  iqual  al  de  Numdncia; 
"the  soldiers  of  General  Taylor  are  as  brave  as  those  of  General 
Scott,"  los  soldados  del'general  Taylor  son  tan  valientes  como  los  del  gen- 
eral Scott. 

617.  When  in  cases  like  those  referred  to  in  the  preceding  rule,  the 
possessive  case  in  English  is  employed  instead  of  the  demonstrative 
pronoun  ^^that"  the  definite  article  is  used  in  Spanish ;  as,  "ray  house 
and  my  servants"  mi  casa  y  la.  de  mi  criado;  "  I-have  my  book  and  my 
father'' s"  tengo  mi  libro  y  el  de  mi  padre;  "my  wine  is  better  than 
John^s"  mi  vino  es  mejor  que  el  de  Juan ;"  that  is,  " my  house  and  that 
of  my  servant," — "my  book  and  that  of  my  father," — "my  wine  is  bet- 
ter than  that  of  John." 

EXERCISE   IX.  / 

618.    Vocabulary. 

Pronunciacion,  pronunciation,  '  Caballero,  gentleman. 

Lampara,  lamp  Espejo,  looking-glass. 

Cuchillo,  knife.  Tenedor,  fork. 

Brisa,  breeze.  Pluma,  pen,  feather, 
Diego,  James.  Lucia,  Lucy. 

22* 


258 


EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION. 


Panadero,  baker. 
Sombierero,  hatter, 
Librero,  bookseller. 
Posadero,  innkeeper. 
Londres,  London. 
Facil,  easy. 
Pero,  but. 

619.  Model  sentences. 
(a.)  Aquellas  (128)  mugeres  tienen 

prudencia. 
b.)  Aquellos  a  quienes  (129)   mi 

padre  hablo,  no  tienen  dinero. 

J.)  Pedro    dio     una    Mmpara    ^ 

aquella    (129,   b)    que    hallo    su 

sombrero. 
{d.)  Juan  hablo  d  aquella  d  quien 

(129,  a)  Vm.  vio;  or,  Juan  ha- 

bl6  a  la  que  (129,  a)  Vm.  vi6. 
(c.)  La  pronunciacion  del*  Espa- 

nol  es  mucho  mas  flcil  que  la 

del  Ingles. 
(/.)  i^Tiene  Vm.   mi  espejo  6  el 

(617)  de  Maria'? 


Zapatero,  sfwemaker 
Zapato,  shoe. 
Cerveza,  beer. 
Vino,  wine. 

Nueva-York,  New  York. 
Ancho,  wide. 
O',  or. 

Those  women  have  prudence. 

Those  (or  they)  to  whom  my  fa- 
ther spoke,  have  not  money. 

Peter  gave  a  lamp  to  her  who 
found  his  hat. 

John  spoke  to  her  whom  you  saw. 


The  pronunciation  of  the  Spanish 
is  much  more  easy  than  that  of 
the  English. 

Have  you  my  looking-glass,  or 
Mary's  ? 

620.   Spanish  to  be  translated  into  English. 

Este  (128)  hombre  es  rico.  Aquella  (128)  muger  es 
soberbia.  Esos  (128)  libros  son  nuevos.  Estas  (128) 
cucharas  son  de  oro.  Aquellos  (128)  pintores  son  pobres. 
Estas  casas  son  nuestras.  Esos  sombreros  son  mios.  Este 
vino  es  bueno.  Esa  cerveza  no  es  bueno.  i  De  quienes 
son  aquellas  casas  ?  ^  De  quien  es  esta  casa  ?  i  Quien  es 
ese  caballero  ?  i  Habla  este  caballero  la  lenguaa  espaiiolai  ? 
I  Habla  esa  senora  la  lengua^  inglesa^  ?  Esta  lampara  es 
nueva.  Ese  espejo  es  viejo.  Aquel  hombre  habla  Fran- 
ces. I  Son  estos  mis  zapatos  ?  i  Cuyo  es  este  cuchillo  ? 
I  Cuyos  son  esos  tenedores  ?  La  Francesa  y  la  EspaHoIa 
tienen  prudencia;  esa  (128,  c)  es  mas  amable  que  (106) 
esta.     Aquel   (129)   a  quien  (129)  mi  padre  escribio  las 


*  The  masculine  article  is  here  used  before  Espanol  and  Jngles,  be- 
cause these  agree  with  idioma  (idiom,  cr  language)  understood.  Idioma 
Is  masculine  (see  4  ^4). 


EXERCISES  FOR   TRANSLATION.  259 

cartas,  tiene  muclio  dinero.  Aquellos  a  quienes  (129) 
Pedro  dio  los  libros,  son  pobres  e  ignorantes.  Aquella 
(129)  a  quien  (129)  Juan  dio  un  espejo,  es  muy  hermosa. 

Diego  dio  los  libros  a  los  (129,  a)  que  Ym.  vi6.  Lucia 
dio  vino  a  aquella  (129,  b)  que  tiene  sed.  El  librero  dio 
dos  libros  a  la  (129,  b)  que  le  (113)  escribio  las  cartas. 
Esta  casa  y  la  que  vmd.  vio,  son  mias.  i  No  es  este  el 
hijo  del  panadero  ?  i  No  es  esta  la  hija  del  zapatero  ? 
I  No  son  estas  las  hermanas  del  posadero  ?  El  sombrerero 
escribio  estas  cartas.  Esos  tenedores  son  suyos  de  ella 
(120,  a).  Estos  cuchil^os  son  suyos  de  el  (120,  a).  Este 
espejo  es  mio.  Este  hombre  es  mi  amigo.  i  Quien  es  esa 
muger  ?  i  Quien  es  este  caballero  ?  ^  Es  este  el  libro  de 
su  (123,  a)  hermana  de  Ym.  ?  No,  senor,  este  es  el  libro 
de  mi  padre.  Esta  brisa  es  agradable.  i  No  es  esta  brisa 
agradable  ?     i  Cuya  es  esta  pluma  ? 

Diego  hallo  mi  sombrero  y  el  (129,  c)  del  medico.  Las 
cucharas  de  Lucia  y  las  (616)  de  Maria,  son  de  oro.  La 
pronunciacion  del  Aleman  no  es  tan  facil  como  la  (616) 
del  Espa^ol.  Juan  no  tiene  mi  libro,  pero  el  tiene  el 
(617)  de  mi  hermana.  Las  calles  de  Londres  son  mas 
anchas  que  (106)  las  (616)  de  Madrid.  La  ciudad  de 
Nueva-York  no  es  tan  grande  como  la  (616)  de  Londres. 
Mi  cerveza  no  es  tan  bueno  como  la  (617)  de  Diego.  Mi 
casa  es  alta,  pero  la  (617)  de  mi  hermano  es  mas  alta. 
I  Tiene  Ym.  mis  plumas  6  las  (617)  de  mi  padre?  i  Tiene 
el  sombrerero  mi  sombrero  6  el  (617)  de  mi  amigo?  El 
sombrerero  no  tiene  su  sombrero  de  Ym.  (123,  a),  pero 
tiene  (he-has)  el  de  su  amigo  de  Ym.  i  Tiene  el  panadero 
mi  pan  6  el  del  posadero  ?  i  Tienen  los  libreros  tus  espe- 
jos  6  los  de  tu  madre  ?  Los  libreros  no  tienen  mis  espe- 
jos,  pero  tienen  {they-have)  los  de  mi  madre.  La  cerveza 
del  posadero  es  tan  bueno  como  la  del  zapetero.  Los  za- 
patos  del  librero  son  tan  viejos  como  los  del  panadero.  El 
vino  de  Diego  es  'an  bueno  como  el  de  Pedro.     Las  callea 


260  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

de   Nueva-York  son  mas  anchas  que  (106)  las  de  Lon 
dres. 

62 1 .  English  to  he  translated  into  Spanish. 

This  (128)  gentleman  is  good.  This  (128)  woman  is 
rich.  That  (128)  man  is  rich.  That  (128)  woman  is 
proud.  Those  (128)  spoons  are  new.  Those  (128)  books 
are  old.  Those  painters  are  poor.  These  spoons  are  of 
gold.  These  houses  are  loftj.  Those  hats  are  ours.  This 
beer  is  good.  That  wine  is  not  good.  Of  whom  are 
those  houses  1  Whose  (of  whom)  is  this  house  1  Who 
is  that  gentlemen?  Who  (plur.)  are  those  gentlemen^ 
Does  (611)  that  lady  [senora)  speak  the  Spanish^  Ian 
guage^  1  Does  this  gentleman  speak  the  French^  lan- 
guage^ ?  This  lamp  is  not  new.  That  looking-glass  is 
not  old.  That  man  speaks  English.  Are  these  my 
shoes  ?  Whose  is  this  hat  ?  Whose  are  these  knives  ? 
Whose  is  this  fork  ?  The  Spanish-woman  and  the  Eng- 
lish-woman have  prudence;  the  former  (128,  c)  is  more 
amiable  (106)  than  the  latter  (128,  c).  He  (129)  to  whom 
(129)  my  mother  wrote  the  letters,  has  much  money. 
Those  to  whom  (129)  James  gave  the  pens,  are  poor  and 
ignorant.  She  (129)  to  whom  (129)  the  hatter  gave  a 
looking-glass,  is  poor  and  proud. 

Lucy  gave  the  spoons  to  them  (129,  a)  whom  you  saw. 
James  gave  the  knives  to  him  (129,  a)  whom  John  saw. 
John  gave  wine  to  him  (129,  b)  who  is  thirsty.  Mary 
gave  bread  to  her  (129,  b)  who  is  hungry.  The  bookseller 
gave  three  books  to  her  (129,  b)  who  wrote  him  (1 13)  the 
letters.  This  house  and  that  (la)  which  you  saw,  are 
mine.  Is  not  this  the  brother  of  the  hatter  ?  Is  not  this 
the  daughter  of  the  baker  1  Are  not  these  the  sons  of 
the  shoemaker?  Are  not  these  the  sisters  of  the  inn- 
keeper? Is  not  this  the  mother  of  the  bookseller  ?  Tlie 
carpenter  wrote  these  letters.  Those  knives  are  hers 
(120,  a).     These   forks   are  his   (120,  a).     This  looking- 


EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION.  261 

glass  is  ours.  This  man  is  my  friend.  Who  is  this  lady  1 
Who  is  that  woman  ?  Who  is  this  gentleman  ?  Is  this 
the  book  of  your  (123,  a)  brother.  No,  sir,  this  is  my 
father's  book.  Whose  is  this  pen  ?  Whose  are  those 
pens?  This  breeze  is  agreeable.  Is  not  this  breeze 
agreeable  ? 

Peter  found  my  hat  and  that  ( 1 29,  c)  of  the  physician. 
The  spoons  of  Lucy  and  those  (616)  of  Mary  are  of  gold. 
Mary's  spoons  and  Lucy's  (617)  are  of  silver.  James  has 
not  my  book,  but  he  has  my  sister's  (617).  The  streets 
of  New-York  are  wider  than  (106)  those  (616)  of  Lon- 
don. The  pronunciation  of  the  French  is  not  so  easy  as 
that  (616)  of  the  Spanish.  The  city  of  Madrid  is  not  so 
large  as  that  of  London.  My  beer  is  not  as  good  as 
John's  (617).  My  wine  is  not  as  good  as  James' (617). 
My  house  is  lofty,  but  my  father's  (617)  is  more  lofty. 
Have  you  (  Vm.)  my  pens  or  my  father's  (617)  ?  Has  the 
hatter  my  hat,  or  my  friend's  (617)  ?  The  hatter  has  not 
your  (123,  a)  hat,  but  he-has  your  (123,  a)  friend's  (617). 
Has  the  baker  my  bread,  or  the  inn-keeper's  (617)  ?  Have 
the  shoemakers  my  shoes,  or  those  (617)  of  my  brother? 
The  shoemakers  have  not  my  shoes,  but  they-have  (tienen) 
my  mother's  (617).  The  inn-keeper's  wine  is  not  as  good 
as  the  shoemaker's.  Peter's  shoes  are  as  old  as  John's. 
The  streets  of  New  York  are  wider  than  those  of  Madrid. 


SECTION  TENTH. 

622.  In  Spanish,  two  negatives  serve  to  strengthen  a  negation.  Thus, 
este  autor  no  ve  nada  de  honroso  en  el  cardcter  de  los  Espanoles,  "  this 
author  not  sees  nothing  of  honorable  in  the  character  of  the  Spaniards," 
or,  as  it  would  be  expressed  in  good  English,  "  this  author  sees  nothing 
honorable  in  the  character  of  the  Spaniards."  If  in  a  negative  sentence  only 
one  negative  word  is  usedy  it  must  always  come  before  the  verb  ;  if  two  ne- 
gcMve  words  are  used,  the  adverb  of  negation  mv^t  come  before  the  verbf 
and  the  other  negative  word  after  it ;  thus  we  can  say,  Diego  nada  tieney 
or,  Diego  no  tiene  nada,  "James  nothing  has,"  or,  "James  nx)l  has  nxh 


262 


EXERCISES    FOR   TRANSLATION. 


thtjigf"  the  meaning  in  English  being,  "  James  has  nothing        The  for- 
mer mode  of  expression  in  Spanish  is  generally  considered  more  elegeint. 


EXERCISE    X. 


623.  Vocabulary. 
Obra,  word,  deed. 
Merito,  merit. 

Peso,  dollar. 
Aldeano,  villager. 
F aha,  fault,  deftct. 
Rosa,  rose. 
Diferente,  diff'erent. 
Doce,  twelve 
Segun,  according-to. 
Seran,  {they)  shall  be,  or,  will  be. 
Tendrd,-  {he)    shall-have,  or,    will- 
have. 
Dara,  {he)  will-give. 
Aborrece,  (^e)  hates. 
Hay,  there-is;  there-are. 

624.  Model  sentences. 

{a.)  El  juez  no  dijo  mal  de  n^- 
die(131). 

(6.)  De  n^die  el  juez  dij\ 

(c)  Hay  una  casa  en  el  camino. 

{d.)  Hay  muchas  casas  en  el  cami- 
no. 

(e.)  I  Q,u6  hay  en  ese  sombrero  ? 

(/.)  I  No  hay  medico  en  la  cuidad  ? 

{g.)  i^Hay  en  Madrid    doce  pin- 
tores  ? 


Idioma,  (masc.)  idiom,  language, 

Mal,  evilj  HI. 

Cosa,  thing. 

El  Senor,  the  Lord, 

Sexo,  sex. 

Espina,  thorn. 

Premiado,  rewarded. 

Diez,  ten. 

Sin,  withovi. 

Sea,  {he)  may-be. 

De,  Qie)  may-give. 

Diga,  {he)  may-say. 

Brilla,  {it)  shines,  {it)  glitters 

Comer,  to-eat. 


nal  de  n^-^ 
lijo  mal.      J 


The  judge  said  evil  of  nobody. 

There-is  a  house  on  the  road. 
There-are    many    houses    on    the 

road. 
What  is-there  in  that  hnt  ? 
Is-there  not  a    physician    in   the 

city  ? 
Are-there  in  Madrid  twelve  paint 

ers7 

'  For  other  model  sentences,  the  learner  is  referred  to  the  examples 
under  the  indefinite  pronouns,  on  pages  52,  53,  and  54. 

625.  Spanish  to  be  translated  into  English. 

Las  tres  mugeres  cada  uno  (131)  de  ellas.  tiene  dos 
espejos.  Estos  hombres  seran  premiados,  cada  cual  (131) 
segun  sus  obras.  Pedro  tiene  doce  libros,  cada  uno  en  uii 
idioma^  diferente^  Todas  (133)  las  mugeres  seran  premi- 
adas,  cada  cual  segun  sus  meritos.  Ella  y  todas  (133)  sus 
hijas  son  robustisimas  (108,  a).     Maria  dio  libros  a  oada 


EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION.  263 

uno  de  ellos.  Uno  y  otro  (131)  saben  lo  <iue  es  bueno. 
^Hay  algo  (131)  de  (134,  b)  nuevo?  No  (622)  hay  nada  ^ 
(622)  de  (134,  b)  nuevo.  Juan  no  quiere  (622)  nada. 
Los  libreros  no  quieren  nada.  Todo  lo  que  (131)brilla, 
no  es  oro.  Todo  lo  que  (131)  Diego  tiene,  es  mio.  Todo 
(133)  libro  tiene  hojas  (577).  Nadie  (131;  622)  Labia 
mal  de  el.  A  nadie  (622)  babla  el  librero  (575).  El  po- 
sadero  no  (622)  habla  a  nadie  (622).  A  ninguno  (133  ; 
622)  dio  Maria  los  cucbillos  y  tenedores.  El  zapatero  no 
dio  los  zapatos  a  ninguno  (622).  Nada*  es  bueno  para  el. 
Pedro  no  tiene  nada  (622).  El  juez  no  me  dijo  nada. 
Ninguna  (134)  de  estas  senoras  es  rica.  No^  sabe^  uno 
(133)  que  deeir  (606).     No  sabe  uno  que  comprar  (596). 

I  Tiene  vmd.  otro  (133)  hermano?  i  Vio  alguien  (131) 
mi  sombrero?  ^  Habla  alguien  (131)  Espanol  ?  El  juez 
tiene  dos  criados  ;  y  dio  al  uno  (131)  doce  pesos,  y  alotro 
(131)  diez,  a  cada  uno  segun  su  merito.  El  librero  tiene 
dos  hijas  el  nombre  de  la  una  es  Maria,  y  el  nombre  de  la 
otra  es  Lucia.  Diego  hallo  algo  (131)  en  el  camino.  Las 
mugeres  tienen  algo  (131)  que  comer.  Todo  lo  que  (131) 
brilla,  no  es  plata.  Pedro  dio  algo  a  los  pobres.  La  Fran- 
cesa  tiene  algo  que  comer.  Una  de  las  senoras  "vino  (596) 
conmigo  (115,  c).  Mi  hermano  tiene  todo  lo  que  mi 
padre  le  dio.  El  que  es  rico,  quienquiera  que  (131)  el  sea, 
tendra  cuidados.  A  cualquiera  que  (131)  Vmd.  de  pan, 
Diego  dara  dinero.  A  cualquiera  que  (131)  Maria  de 
libros,  Lucia  dara  zapatos.  Cualquier  (132)  cosa  que 
Juan  diga,  sus  casas  no  son  hermosas.  Todos  los  que  son 
buenos,  aman  la  verdad.  Dios  aborrece  todos  los  caminos 
de  los  impios.  El  Senor  aborrece  todo  (133)  camino  malo. 
I  Dio  Juan  libros  a  algunos  (134)  de  estos  Alemanes  ?  Si, 
senor,  Juan  dio  libros  a  unos  (133).  i  Tiene  alguno  (133) 
mi  sombrero?     Ninguno  tiene  tu  sombrero.      Tiene  al- 


*  Nada  requires  the  adjective  which  agrees  with  it  to  be  in  the  mas- 
culine. 


264  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

guien  (131)  mi  espojo?     Nadie  tiene  tu  espojo.     Todo  eso 
(128,  a)  es  muy  cierto. 

^  Tienen  algunas  (134)  de  estas  mugeres  cucharas  de 
plata?  Cada  uno  (131)  de  nosotros  tiene  algun  (101) 
merito.  Pedro  dio  dinero  a  uno  de  las  hermanas  de 
Maria.  A  ninguno  (133)  escribio  (575)  Maria  cartas. 
La  criada  no  hallo  tesoros  algunos  (134,  a)  en  la  ciudad. 
Unos  (133)  hombres  tienen  'dinero,  otros  (133)  no  lo  (117) 
tienen.  Muchos  aldeanos  de  ambos  (133)  sexos  vinieron 
(596)  a  la  ciudad.  El  pintor  dio  un  sombrero  al  Aleman, 
y  un  libro  al  Espanol ;  ambos  son  pobres.  Maria  no  habla 
de  las  faltas  agenas  (134,  c). 

626.  Instead  of  ninguno,  the  adverb  no  is  often  used- in  the  sense  of 
^*not  a,"  "  710^  a?iyj"  or  "  no,''  especially  with  verbs  denoting  possession  ; 
as,  ella  no  tiene  marido*  "  she  has  not  a  husband,"  or  *'  she  has  no  hus- 
band;" estas  senoras  no  tienen  libros,''  these  ladies  have  no  books,"  or, 
"  not  any  books." 

Mi  madre  no  (626)  tiene  cucbara.  Mi  padre  no  (626) 
tiene  hermano.  Ella  no  tiene  tenedor.  Mis  hermanas  no 
tienen  cuchillos.  Maria  no  tiene  padre.  Mis  hijos  no 
tienen  sombreros.  Mi  hermano  no  tiene  casa.  El  librero 
no  tiene  espejo.  Diego  no  tiene  dinero.  Juan  no  tiene 
oro.  Ella  no  tiene  hijas.  Pedro  no  es  Americano.  Maria 
no  es  Francesa.  i  No  (626)  tiene  Juan  libros  ?  Los  pin- 
tores  no  tienen  botones.  Mi  sobrino  (602)  no  tiene  plu- 
mas.  Este  caballero  no  tiene  manteca.  El  pandero  tiene 
pan,  mojateca,  azucar,  vino  y  cerveza.  i  Hay  (624,  g)  cartas 
para  mi  ?  No,  senor,  no  hay  (624,  d)  cartas  para  vmd. 
I  Que  hay  en  el  camino  ?  Hay  casas  y  ciudades.  i  Que 
hay  en  esa  cuchara  ?  Hay  agua  en  esta  cuchara.  i  Hay 
rosas  sin  espinas  ?  No,  senora,  no  hay  rosas  sin  espinas. 
I  Hay  hombres  sin  faltas  ?  No,  senor,  no  hay  hombres  sin 
faltas.  2, Hay  una  rosa  sin  espinas?  No  hay  rosa  sin 
espinas.    No  hay  nada.    No  hay  casas  en  el  camino.    i  No 

*  Literally,  "  she  has  not  husband."    (See  242.) 


EXERCISES   FOR    TRANSLATION.  265 

hay  zapatero  en  esta  ciudad  ?     Si,  seiiorj  hay  uno.     i  Hay 
en  esa  casa  muehos  cuartos  ?     Hay  diez  cuartos  (606). 

627.   English  to  be  translated  into  Spanish. 

The  ten  male-servants,  every  one  (131)  of  them  has 
three  roses.  The  three  women,  every  one  of  them  has 
twelve  looking-glasses.  These  carpenters  shall  be  reward- 
ed (plur.,  premiados)j  each  (131)  according-to  his  works. 
Lucy  has  ten  books,  each  one  in  a  different^  language^ 
All  (133)  the  female-servants  shall-be  rewarded  (plur., 
fem.),  each  according-to  her  merits.  She  and  all  (133)  her 
daughters  are  very  handsome  (108,  a).  Mary  gave  knives 
to  each  one  of  them.  Both  (131)  are  amiable.  Is-there 
(624,  f)  anything  (131)  new  (134,  b)?  There-is  nothing 
(622;  131)  new  (134,  b).  Peter  wants  nothing  (622). 
The  gentlemen  want  nothing.  Every  thing  which*  (131) 
glitters  is  not  gold.  Every  thing  which  (131)  my  brother 
has  is  mine.  Every  (133)  book  has  leaves  (577).  No- 
body (131  ;  622)  speaks  evil  of  him.  To  nobody  speaks 
the  bookseller  (575).  The  innkeeper  speaks  to  nobody 
(622).  To  no-one  (133;  622)  gave  John  the  pens  and 
spoons.  The  bookseller  gave  the  books  to  no-one  (622). 
Peter  has  nothing.  The  French-woman  said  nothing  to- 
me (113).  Nothing  is  good  (masc.)  for  her.  No-one  (134) 
of  these  ladies  is  rich.  One^  (^33)  knows^  not^  what  to- 
say  (606).     One^  knows^  not^  what  to-buy  (596). 

No-one  (134)  of  those  painters  shall-be  rewarded.  Have 
you  (vmd.)  another  (133)  sister  ?  Did  (611)  any-one^  (131) 
see^  my  hat?  Does  (611)  any-one^  (131)  speak^  Spanish? 
That  gentleman  has  two  male-servants  ;  and  [he]  gave  to- 
the  one  (131)  ten  dollars  and  to-the  other  (131)  twelve; 
to  each  one  according-to  his  merit.  The  shoemaker  has 
two  daughters ;  the  name  of  the  one  is  Lucy,  and  the 
name  of  the  other  is  Mary.     The  baker  found  somethii^ 


*  "  Every  thing  tkat^**  or,  "  cvertf  thing  which^"  is  rendered  "  todo  h 
queJ* 

23 


266  EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

(131)  in  the  road.  The  booksellers  have  something  (13 1) 
which  to-eat.  Every  thing  that  (131)  shines  is  not  silver. 
Peter  said  something  to  the  poor-men.  She  has  some- 
thing {algo  que)  to  eat.  One  of  the  ladies  came  with-me 
(1 15,  c).  My  sister  has  every  thing  that  J[  131)  my  father 
gave  her.  He  who  is  rich,  whoever  that  (131)  he  may-be, 
will  have  cares.  To  whomsoever  that  (131)  you  (vmd.) 
may-give  bread,  my  father  will-give  money.  To  whomso- 
ever that  Mary  may-give  knives,  Lucy  will-give  forks. 
Whatever  (132)  thing  that  John  may-say,  his  houses  are 
not  handsome.  All  those  who  are  good,  love  the  truth. 
The  Lord  hates  all  the  ways  (caminos)  of  the  impious.  God 
hates  every  wicked^  way^  All  this  (128,  a)  is  very  true 
(571).  Nobody  (131)  has  thy  looking-glass.  No-one  (133) 
has  thy  hat.  Has  anybody  (131)  my  books  ?  Has  any- 
one (133)  my  pens?  Gave  Peter  shoes  to  any  (134)  of 
these  poor-women  ?*  Yes,  sir,  Peter  gave  shoes  to  some 
(133).     Each  (132)  painter  found  a  treasure. 

Have  any  (134)  of  those  women  silver  (97,  a)  forks? 
Have  any  of  these  ladies  gold  spoons?  Each  one  of  us 
(115)  has  some  (101)  merit.  The  shoemaker  gave  money 
to  one  of  (130)  the  sisters  of  Lucy.  Mary  wrote  letters 
to  no-one  (622).  The  physician  found  not  any  (134,  a) 
treasures  in  the  city.  Some  (unos  ;  133)  men  have  money, 
others  (133)  have  it  not.  Many  villagers  of  both  (133) 
sexes  came  to  London.  The  judge  gave  a  hat  to  the 
♦  Frenchman  and  a  book  to  the  Englishman ;  both  are  poor. 
She  speaks  not  of  another's  (134,  c)  faults. 

She  has  no  (626)  daughters.  Peter  is  no  (626)  Span- 
iard. My  father  has  no  (626)  brother.  John  has  no  (626) 
hat.  James  has  no  money.  Mary  has  no  father.  You 
{vmd.)  have  no  looking-glass.  John  has  not-any  (626) 
books.      These  ladies  have  not-any   (626)  roses.      My 

*  "  These  poor  wome7i"  is  to  be  rendered  "cstaa  pobr^J*  "Thesw 
poor  men  "  would  be  *'  catos  pobrcs," 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION.  2G7 

nephew  has  not-any  (626)  pens.  My  mother  has  not  a 
(626)  spoon.  My  sister  has  not-a  (626)  fork.  The  (87) 
housekeeper  (571)  has  no  (626)  butter.  Are- there*  (624, 
g)  letters  for  me  (115)?  No,  sir,  there-are  (624,  d)  no 
(626)  letters  for  you  (vmd.).  What  is-there  (624,  e)  on 
the  road  ?  There-are  houses  and  cities.  What  is-there  in 
that  spoon  ?  There  is  sugar  in  it  (ella).  Are-there  roses 
without  thorns  ?  There-are  no  (626)  roses  without  thorns. 
Are-there  women  without  faults  ?  No,  sir,  there  are  no 
(626)  women  without  faults.  There-is  nothing  (622). 
There-are  no  (626)  houses  on  the  road.  Is-there  no  (626) 
physician  in  that  city  ?  Yes,  sir,  there-is  one.  There-are 
no  books  without  leaves. 


We  would  recommend  to  the  learner  to  review  carefully  all  the 
preceding  sections,  especially  the  last  six ;  and  then,  after  having  atten- 
tively studied  the  following  rules,  to  translate  the  sentences  of  the  re- 
maining exercise  of  this  section. 

628.  In  Spanish,  the  definite  article  is  to  be  used  before  all  common 
nouns  taken  in  a  general  sense,  or  which  denote  a  whole  class  or  species 
of  things  ;  as,  la  paciencia  y  la  actividad  remueven  montanas,  "  patience 
and  diligence  remove  mountains;"  le  prohiben  el  uso  del  vino,  "  they- 
forbid  him  the  use  of  wine ;  jamas  la  soberbia  ni  la  ira  podrdn  acordarse 
con  la  amabilidad  y  la  mansedumbre,  "  never  pride  nor  anger  can  agree 
with  amiability  and  meekness;  todas  las  cosas  tienen  su  iiempo,  "all 
things  have  their  season."  Here  patience^  diligence,  wine,  pride,  anger, 
amiability,  meekness,  and  things,  are  taken  in  an  absolute  or  general 
sense,  and  each  requires  the  definite  article  in  Spanish,  though  not  in 
English,  to  precede  it.t    (See  230.) 

629.  The  definite  article  is  not  to  be  used  in  Spanish  before  nouns  not 
taken  in  a  general  or  determinate  sense,  or  which  do  not  refer  to  the 
whole  class  or  species  of  things,  or  the  ichole  of  any  object ;  as,  ella  iiene 
azUcar,  "she  has  sugar;"  Juan  bebe  vino  al  almuerzo,  "John  drinks 
wine  at  breakfast."  Here  sugar  and  wine  are  to  be  taken  in  a  partitive 
sense,  meaning  "  some  sugar,"  •'  some  wine." 

'^  ^^  There  is ^^  and  ^^  there  are"  are  each  rendered  by  "hay."  " /<. 
there?"  and  "are-thcre?"  are  each  rendered  "ihay?" 

t  This  is  an  important  rule  of  Spanish  syntax,  and  it  should  bo  well 
studied  by  the  learner. 


26S 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 


EXERCISE   XI. 


630.    Vocabulary. 
Garidad,  charity. 
Beneficencia,  beneficence, 
Ignordncia,  ignorance. 
Error,  error, 
Vida,  life. 

Sueno,  dreaiUj  sleeq). 
Tiempo,  time. 
Virtud,  virtue, 
Vicio,  vice. 
Paz,  peace. 
Sociedad,  society. 
Muerte  (fern.),  death. 
Paciente,  patient. 
Precioso,  precious. 
Mejor,  better. 
Mortal,  mortal. 
Odioso,  odious. 
Terrible,  terrible. 
Juan  hace,  John  makes. 
Pedro  prefiere,  Peter  prefers. 


Alio,  year. 

Harina,  ^ur. 

Yelo,  ice. 

Religion,  religion. 

Gratitud,  gratitude. 

Hermosura,  beauty. 

Julcio,  judgment. 

HistOria,  history. 

Maestra,  mistress,  instructress, 

Justicia,  justice. 

Riqueza,  wealth,  riches, 

Leche  (fern.),  milk. 

U'til,  useful, 

Caro,  dear. 

Frio,  cold. 

Blanco,  white. 

Dulce,  sweet. 

Necesario,  necessary, 

Ella  teme,  she  fears, 

E'l  depende,  he  depends. 


631.  Model  sentences. 
(a.)  El  (623)  hombre  es  polvo  (629). 
(6.)  La  (628)  hermosura  es  despojo 

(629)  del  (628)  tiempo. 
(c.)  El  (628)  despotismo  los  embru- 

tece,  la  (628)  severa  disciplina^ 

militar^  los  degrada,  la  (628)  su- 

persticion  los  condena  al  (628) 

error  y  d  la  (628)  ignorancia. 
id.)  El  (87)  alma  de  la  (628)  muger 

es    naturalmente    mas    sensible 

que  la  del  (628)  hombre. 
(c.)  El  hambre  (87)  es  la  (265,  a) 

mejor  salsa. 

632.  Spanish  to  he  translated  into  English. 

El  (628)  tiempo*  es  mas  precioso  que  el  (628)  oro. 


Man  is  dust. 

Beauty  is  the  spoil  of  time. 

Despotism  stupefies  them,  severe 
military  discipline  degrades  them, 
superstition  condemns  them  to 
error  and  ignorance. 

The  soul  of  woman  is  naturally 
more  sensitive  than  that  of  man. 

Hunger  is  the  best  sauce. 


La 


*  The  learner  must  not  in  these  cases  translate  the  article  in  English ; 
thus,  he  must  not  render  d  tiempo,  by  ^Hhe  time,"  but  by  "time."  So, 
d  yelo  csfrto,  by  "  ice  is  cold,"  and  not  by  ^^the  ice  is  cold."  Los  vinos 
eon  buenos  este  ano,  "  vi^ines  are  good  this  year ;"  la  guerra  hace  mvjch-o 
daSio  al  cometcio,  "  war  does  much  injury  to  trade." 


EXERCISES  FOR  TRANSLATION.  269 

(628)  caridad  es  paciente.  La  (628)  beneficencia  nos  (113) 
hace  amables.  La  (628)  vida  no  es  un  sueno.  El  tiempo 
es  precioso.  La  ignorancia  es  madre  del  (628)  error.  El 
(87)  agua  es  tan  bueno  como  el  vino.  La  sabiduria  (606) 
es  mas  preciosa  que  todas  las  (628)  riquezas.  La  pruden- 
cia  es  mas  preciosa  que  la  plata.  Mejor  es  la  sabiduria 
que  (106,  a)  la  hermosura.  El  (628)  hombre  teme  la  (628) 
muerte.  El  hombre  no  teme  la  vida.  La  virtud  es  ama- 
ble.  El  vicio  es  odioso.  Los  (628)  hombres  son  mortales. 
El  oro  es  precioso.  La  prudencia  es  util.  Ella  tiene  pru- 
dencia  (629).  Juan  tiene  oro  (629).  El  (628)  dinero  es 
util.  Pedro  tiene  dinero  (629).  Los  (628)  libros  son 
utiles.  Maria  no  hallo  libros  (629).  Este  ano  la  (628) 
harina  es  muy  cara.  Los  vinos  seran  buenos  este  ano. 
El  vino  es  muy  caro  este  ano.  La  manteca  es  muy  cara. 
La  cerveza  es  buena.  El  yelo  es  frio.  La  muerte  es  ter- 
rible. La  leche  es  blanca.  El  azucar  es  dulce.  La  gra- 
titud  es  el  (87)  alma  de  la  religion.  Juan  prefiere  el  vicio 
a  la  virtud.  Maria  no  prefiere  el  error  a  la  verdad.  Pe- 
dro prefiere  las  (628)  riquezas  a  la  sabiduria.  El  medico 
prefiere  la  cerveza  al  vino.  La  prudencia  y  el  julcio  son 
necesarios  (260,  d)  a  todo  (591)  hombre.  La  historia  es 
maestra  de  la  vida.  La  paz  de  la  (628)  sociedad  depeiide 
de  (on)  la  justicia.  La  plata  es  preciosa.  Los  tenedores 
son  utiles.  Este  ano  la  harina  no  es  cara.  La  religion  es 
amable.  El  oro  es  mas  precioso  que  la  plata.  Mejor  es  la 
prudencia  que  el  dinero. 

633.  English  to  be  trayislated  into  Spanish. 

Time  (628)  is  precious.  Prudence  (628)  is  useful. 
Vice  (628)  is  odious.  Money  (628)  is  useful.  Ice  (628) 
is  cold.  Sugar  (628)  is  sweet.  Religion  (628)  is  lovely 
(amable).  Virtue  (628)  is  lovely.  Books  (628)  are  useful. 
Time  (628)  is  more  precious  than  gold  (628).  Ignorance 
(628)  is  [the]  mother  of  (628)  error.  Prudence  is  more 
precious  than  silver  (628).     Water  (87)  is  as  good  as  wine 


270  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

(628).  Charity  is  patient.  Life  is  not  a  dream.  Wis- 
dom is  more  precious  than  all  (628)  riches.  Beneficence 
makes  us  (113)  amiable.  Wisdom^  is^  better^  than  beauty. 
Men  (628)  are  mortal.  Man  (628)  fears  death  (628). 
Man  fears  not  life.  Gold  is  precious.  She  has  prudence 
(629).  Peter  has  money  (629).  Lucy  found  no  (626) 
books  (629).  John  has  gold  (629).  Butter  (628)  is  very 
dear.  Milk  is  white.  Beer  is  good.  This  year  flour 
(628)  is  very  dear.  Wine  is  ^3ry  dear  this  year.  Death 
(628)  is  terrible.  Gratitude  is  the  (87)  soul  of  religion 
(628).  Prudence  and  judgment  are  necessary  to  every 
(591)  man.  Wines  will-be  good  this  year.  Peter  pre- 
fers vice  to  virtue.  The  shoemaker  prefers  beer  to  wine. 
Forks  are  useful.  This  year  flour  is  not  dear.  Gold  is 
more  precious  than  silver.  History  (628)  is  fthe]  instruc- 
tress of  life  (628).  John  prefers  riches  (628)  to  wisdom. 
This  gentleman  prefers  truth  to  error.  The  peace  of  so- 
ciety (628)  depends  on  (de)  justice  (628).  Prudence  is 
better  than  money. 


SECTION  ELEVENTH. 

Remark. — fo  commit  to  memory  the  conjugations  of  the  Spanish 
verbs  may  seem  a  difl&cult  task,  yet  if  the  learner  will  faithfully  follow 
the  directions  as  contained  in  the  remaining  sections  of  this  Part  (IV.), 
we  think  he  will  be  enabled  to  learn  the  variations  of  person  and  nujii- 
ber  in  all  the  moods  and  tenses  of  the  different  verbs,  without  any  very 
laborious  effort  on  his  part.  The  irregular  auxiliary  verb,  haber,  should 
be  copied  and  re-copied,  each  tense  at  a  time,  till  it  is  thoroughly  learn- 
ed, that  is,  till  the  pupil  can  readily  write  all  tlie  persons  of  each  tense 
without  referring  to  the  conjugated  form,  pronouncing  and  accenting  all 
properly  as  he  copies.  After  having  committed  this  verb  to  memory,  he 
will  be  prepared  to  conjugate  the  compound  tenses  of  any  other  verb. 

ly  This  section  contains  exercises  on  the  verb  ser,  to  be.  (See 
158.) 

EXERCISE   XII. 

634.    Yocahulary. 
Abogado,  lawyer^  barrister,  I  Soldado,  soldier, 

Joven,  young.  I  Criado.  created. 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 


^71 


Castigado,  punished. 
Escrito,  written. 
Enganado,  deceived. 
Imprudente,  imprudent. 
Economico,  economical. 
Probable,  probable. 
Diligente,  diligent. 
Q,uiero,  I-wish. 
Puede,  {he)  can,  (he)  is-able. 
Preciso  es,  \ 
Es  preciso,  ! 
Ahora,  now. 


>  it-is  necessary. 


Pequeiio,  littUy  small, 

Fie\,  faUhfiU, 

Fe\i2,  fortunate^  happy. 

Prudente,  prudent.      ^ 

Barato,  cheap. 

Puntual,  punctual. 

Negligente,  negligent. 

Frugal,  frugal, 

Cr^o,  I-believe. 

Pretende,  (he)  pretends. 

.  OjaM !  O  that  I  would  to  God  that ! 

Nunca,  never. 

635.  Model  sentences 

(a.)  Somos  (158)  Alemanas. 

(6.)  Madrid  era  pequena,  pero 
ahora  es  grande. 

(c.)  Pedro  serd  abogado. 

{d.)  Es  posible  que  V.  no  sea  pre- 
miado. 

(e.)  Si  yo  fuese  rico,  no  serla  so- 
berbio. 

(/.)  No  cr^o  que  tii  s^as  mas  dili- 
gente que  yo. 

{g.)  i  OjaM  hubiese  yo  sido  fiel  a 
^1. 

{h.)  Siendo,  como  V.  es,  tan  negli- 
gente, I  qui^n  le  dar^  a  V.  libros  ? 

636.  Spanish  to  he  translated  into  English. 

Soy  (158)  hijo  del  juez.  Tu  eres  joven.  i  Soy  yo  rico? 
Yms.  son  jovenes.  La  cucbara  no  es  de  oro.  Pedro  es 
robusto.  El  azuear  (628)  es  dulce.  Este  libro  es  de  (97) 
Maria.  Estos  tendores  son  de  plata.  Estas  senoras  son 
Francesas.  V.  es  (243)  Espanol.  Vms.  son  Alemanes. 
Somos  Espanoles.  Sois  Inglesas.  Sou  Ingleses.  Somos 
Inglesas.  Yms.  son  Ingleses.  Soy  (243)  Aleman.  Es 
Espaiiola.*  Eres  Inglesa.  Somos  carpinteros.  Sois  pin- 
tores.  Eres  zapatero.  Es  (243)  medico.  Soy  librero. 
Somos  jueces. 


We-are  German-women. 

Madrid   was    small,   but    now   is 

large. 
Peter  will-be  a  lawyer. 
It-is  possible  that  you  may  not  be 

rewarded. 
If  I  were  rich,   I-should  not  be 

proud. 
I  do  not  believe  that  thou  mayest- 

be  more  diligent  than  I. 
0-that  I  had  been  faithful  to  him  ! 

Being  as  you  are  so  negligent,  who 
will  give  you  books  7 


*  Es  Espanola,    "  she-is    a  Spanish-woman." 
te   a  Spanish-man,"  or  "  Spaniard." 


Es  Espanol,      "  he- 


272  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

Pedro  era  (158)  posadero.  Mis  hermanos  eran  somber- 
eros,  pero  ahora  son  carpinteros.  Tu  padre  era  (243)  pan- 
adero,  y  ahora  es  librero.  Eras  medico.  Yo  era  abogado. 
Eran  soldados.  E'ramos  zapateros.  *  Erais  abogados. 
Vm.  era  juez.  Yms.  eran  libreros.  Eran  impresores, 
pero  ahora  son  carpinteros.  Ella  no  era  una  hermosura. 
I  No  era  yo  mas  robusto  que  el  ?  i  Eran  abogados  ?  i  Mis 
hermanas  no  eran  tan  culpables  como  ella  ?  Erais  impre- 
sores.  Yo  era  general.  Estas  ciudades  eran  pequenaSj 
pero  ahora  son  grandes. 

El  (628)  hombre  fue  (158)  criado.  Fui  castigado. 
Esta  carta  fue  escrita  para  mi  madre.  Fuimos  castigados. 
Las  cartas  fueron  escritas  para  las  Francesas.  Fuiste 
castigado.  Ymd.  fue  premiado.  Yms.  fueron  premiados. 
Fuisteis  castigados.  i  Fui  premiado  1  La  Espaiiola  fue 
premiada.     Fui  joven. 

Mi  madre  ha  sido  (158)  desgraciada.  He  sido  desgra- 
ciado.  Has  sido  premiado.  Han  sido  fieles.  Hcmos  sido 
castigados.  He  sido  castigado.  Habeis  sido  fieles.  Ella 
ha  sido  hermosa.  El  abogado  ha  sido  desgraciado.  Yms. 
han  sido  premiados.  He  sido  feliz.  Ym.  ha  sido  fiel. 
Mi  hermana  habia  sido  (158)  imprudente.  Habiamos 
sido  imprudentes.  Yo  habia  sido  castigado.  Y.  habia 
sido  premiado.  Yms.  habian  sido  imprudentes.  Habiais 
sido  castigados. 

Seran  (158)  premiados.  Juan  sera  soldado.  Mis  her- 
manos seran  abogados.  Maria  sera  una  hermosura.  Sere 
medico.  Sereis  soldados.  Yms.  seran  premiados.  Seras 
castigado.  Sere  rico.  Pedro  sera  mas  rico  que  Juan,  pero 
Juan  sera  menos  ignorante  que  Pedro.  El  vino  (628) 
sera  barato  este  ano.  La  harina  (628)  sera  barata.  El 
azticar  sera  caro.  Nunca  seras  juez.  .  No  seran  premiados 
segun  (623)  sus  obras.  i  Los  criados  seran  castigados? 
Nunca  sereis  abogados.     Los  buenos  seran  premiados. 

Se  (158)  fiel.     Se  bueno.     Sed  fieles.     Sed  puntuales. 


EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION.  273 

Se  puntual.  Seamos  buenos  y  sabios.  Sea  (309,  f )  cl 
criado  pr«miado.  Sean  (309,  f)  las  criadas  castigadas. 
Sea  (309,  f )  Juan  tan  fiel  como  Pedro.  Sean  (309,  f ) 
Yms.  Mices.  S6a  Y.  muy  feliz.  Sean  los  impios  castiga- 
dos.  Que  (309,  e)  las  cartas  sean  escritas.  Sea  el  impre- 
sor  premiado. 

Quiero  que*  (552,  h)  Juan  sea  (158)  rico.  Quiero  que 
mis  amigos  sean  buenos.  Quiero  que  Y.  sea  economico. 
Quiero  que  seas  feliz.  Quiero  que  seals  economicos.  Es 
posible  que  no  seas  pobre.  Muy  probable  esf  que  nunca 
seals  ricos.  Esf  posible  que  Juan  no  sea  castigado.  Muy 
probable  es  que  estas  senoras  nunca  sean  premiadas. 

Preciso  eraj  que  ella  fuese  (158)  castigada.  Preciso 
era  que  fuesen  puntuales.  EraJ  preciso  que  no  fuesemos 
negligentes.  Era  preciso  que  los  pintores  fuesen  economi- 
cos. 2,  No  seria  (158)  este  librero  el  mejor  de  los  dos? 
Si  (635,  e)  yo  fuese  rmd.,  yo  seria  puntual.  Si  yo  fuera 
rico,  yo  seria  economico.  Si  fueran  ricos,  serian  sober- 
bios. 

No  creo  (635,  f )  que  vuestra  madre  baya  jamas  (ever) 
sido  (158)  linda  (585).  No  creo  que  Yms.  hayan  jamas 
(ever)  sido  prudentes.  j  Ojala  hubiese  yo  sido  (158)  fru- 
gal !  i  Ojala  hubiesen  sido  prudentes !  j  Ojala  hubieseis 
sido  frugales  !  Seras  (158)  premiado,  si  fueres  (158)  dili- 
gente.  Quiero  ser  (158)  prudentes.  Quiero  ser  diligente. 
El  que  es  mal  (101)  hijo  no  puede  ser  buen  (101)  padre. 
El  que  es  impio,  no  puede  ser  amable.  Pretende  no  haber 
sido  (158)  enganado.  Pretende  no  haber  sido  castigado. 
Siendo  (158)  como  (635,  h)  eres,  tan  (635,  h)  imprudente 
^quien  te  dara  (623)  dinero?  Habiendo  sido  (158)  en- 
ganado por  sus  amigos,  les  escribio  muchas  cartas. 


*  Que,  before  the  subjunctive  mood,  is  generally  a  conjunction,  mean- 
ing "  thai  ;"  as,  quiero  que  Maria  sea  buena,  "  I  wish  that  Mary  may-be 
good." 

t  "£75"  is  here  used  as  an  impersonal  verb,  and  means  "  it  is." 

t  Era^  used  impersonally,  meaning  " U  was" 


274  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

637.  English  to  be  translated  into  Spanish. 

I  (139,  a)  am  (158)  a  (243)  soldier.  Thou  (139,  a)  art 
(158)  a  (243)  lawyer.  They  are  young.  He  (139,  a)  is 
diligent.  I  am  frugal.  Ye  are  negligent.  You  (Vmd.) 
are  (161)  punctual.  They  are  fortunate.  I  am  small. 
She  is  small*  and  pretty.  You  (  Vms.)  are  (161)  prudent. 
I  am  a  (243)  son  of  the  judge.  Am  I  imprudent?  The 
spoon  is  of  gold.  These  forks  are  of  silver.  The  ladies 
are  French-women.  You  ( Vmd.)  are  a  (243)  Spaniard. 
Ye  are  English-women.  We  are  Germans  I  am  an  (243) 
Englishman.  She  is  a  Spanish-woman.  Thou  art  a  phy- 
sician. He  is  a  bookseller.  Ye  are  painters.  They  are 
shoemakers. 

[In  the  following  paragraph,  the  imperfect  tense  in  English  is  to  bo 
rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  imperfect  of  the  indicative.] 

Peter  was  (158)  an  (243)  innkeeper.    My  brothers  were 

hatters,  but  now  are  carpenters.     Thy  father  was  a  baker, 

and  now  is  a  bookseller.     Thou  wast  a  physician.     I  was 

a  lawyer.      They  were  soldiers.      We  were  shoemakers. 

Ye   were   lawyers.      You   (Vmd.)   were    (161)   a    judge. 

You  (Vms.)  were  (161)  booksellers.     They  were  printers, 

but  now  are  carpenters.     She  was  not  a   (una)  beauty. 

Was  I  not  more  robust  than  he  ?     Were  they  lawyers  ? 

Were  ^  not^   my^  sisters^  as  culpable  as  she  ?     Ye  were 

printers.      I  was  general.      These  cities  were  small,  but 

now  they  are  large  (grandes). 

[In  the  following  paragraph,  the  Spanish  perfect-definite  of  the  indi- 
cative is  to  be  used.] 

Man  (628)  was  (158)  created.  I  was  punished.  This 
letter  was  writtenf  for  my  mother.  We  were  punished,  f 
The  letters  were  writtenf  for  the  French-women.     Thou 


*  There  is  no  necessity  for  em  ploying,  the  pronoun  "  ella"  here,  as  the 
gender  of  the  adjective  terminations  indicates  the  gender  of  the  nomina- 
tive of  the  verb,  thus,  "  es  pequenay  linda.^^ 

t  The  participle  after  neuter  verbs  must  agree  in  gender  and  number 
with  the  word  to  which  it  belongs.     (See  300,  a.) 


EXERCISES   FOR    TRANSLATION.^  275 

wast  punished.  You  (Vmd.)  was  rewarded.  You  (Vms.) 
were  rewarded.  Ye  were  punished.  I  was  rewarded.  I 
was  young.     The  Spanish-woman  was  rewarded. 

My  mother  has  been  (158)  unfortunate.  I  have  been 
unfortunate.  Thoujjast  been  rewarded.  They  have  been 
faithful.  We  have  been  punished.  I  have  been  punished. 
Ye  have  been  faithful.  She  has  been  beautiful.  The 
lawyer  has  been  unfortunate.  You  ( Vms.)  have  been  re- 
warded. I  have  been  fortunate.  You  (Vm.)  have  been 
faithful.  My  brother  had  been  (158)  imprudent.  We 
had  been  imprudent.  I  had  been  punished.  You  (V.) 
had  been  rewarded.  You  ( Vms.)  had  been  imprudent. 
Ye  had  been  punished. 

They  shall-be  (158)  rewarded.  John  will  be  a  (243) 
soldier.  My  brothers  will  be  lawyers.  You  ( Vms.)  will 
be  rewarded.  Thou  wilt  be  punished.  I  will  be  rich. 
Peter  will  be  richer  than  John,  but  John  will  be  less  ig- 
norant than  Peter.  Wine  (628)  will  be  cheap  this  year. 
Flour  (628)  will  be  cheap.  Sugar  (628)  will  be  dear.  Never 
wilt-thou-be  a  (243)  judge.  They  will  not  be  rewarded 
according-to  (623)  their  works.  WilP  the^  male-servants'^ 
be^  rewarded?  Never  will-ye-be  lawyers.  The  good 
shall-be  rewarded. 

Be-thou  (158)  faithful.  Be-thou  good.  Be-ye  faithful. 
Be-ye  punctual.  Be-thou  punctual.  Let-us-be  good  and 
wise.  May  (309,  f )  the  male-servant  be  rewarded.  Let 
(309,  f )  the  female-servants  be  rewarded.  May  John  be 
as  faithful  as  Peter.  May  (309,  f)  you  (Vms.)  be  happy. 
May  you  ( Vm.)  be  very  fortunate.  Let  the  impious  be 
punished.  Let  (309,  e)  the  letters  be  written.  Let  the 
printer  be  rewarded. 

Lwish  that  {que  ;  552,  h)  John  may -be  (158)  rewarded. 
I-wish  that  my  friends  may  be  good.  I-wish  that  you  (  V. ) 
may  be  economical  I-wish  that  thou  mayest-be  happy, 
[-wish  that  yo  may  be  economical      It-is  {es)  possible  that 


276  EXERCISES   FOR    TRANSLATION. 

thou  mayest-not  be  poor.  Yery  probable  it-is  that  ye  may 
never  (622)  be  rich.  It-is  possible  that  John  may  not  be 
punished.  Yery  probable  it-is  that  these  ladies  never  may 
be  rewarded. 

It-was  (era)  necessary  that  she  sho^ld-be  (314)  punish- 
ed. It-was  necessary  that  they  should-be  (314)  punctual. 
It-was  necessary  that  we  should  not  be  (314)  negligent. 
It-was  necessary  that  the  painters  should-be  (314)  econom- 
ical. Would  not  this  bookseller  be  (315)  the  better  of  the 
two?  If  (si)  I  were  (should-be;  314)  you  (Vmd.)  I 
would-be  (315)  punctual.  If  I  should-be  (314)  rich.  I 
would  be  (315)  economical  If  they  should-be  (316) 
rich,  they  would  be  (315)  proud. 

I  do  (611)  not  believe  that  the  physician's  mother  may 
have  ever  (jamas)  been  (158)  pretty  (585).  I  do  not  be- 
lieve that  you  ( Vms.)  may-have  ever  (jamas)  been  prudent. 
0-that  I  had  (should-have)  been  (318;  314)  prudent! 
0-thatI  had  (314)  been  (318)  frugal!  0-that  ye  had 
been  frugal !  Thou  shalt-be  rewarded  if  thou  shouldst-be 
(319)  diligent.  I-wish  to-be  (158)  prudent.  I-wish  to-be 
diligent.  He  who  is  a  (243)  bad  (101)  son,  can  not  be 
(ser)  at,  (243)  good  (101)  father.  He  who  is  impious  can 
not  be  amiable.  He-pretends  not  to-have  been  deceived. 
He-pretends  not  to  have  been  punished.  Being  (158)  as 
thou  art  so  (ta7i)  imprudent,  who  will-give  (628)  thee 
money?  Having  been  (158)  deceived  by  his  friends,  he 
wrote  them  mjany  letters. 

I^*  The  learner  should  now  write  out,  for  practice,  the  different  per- 
sons of  all  the  tenses  of  the  various  moods  of  the  verb  ser  (omitting 
the  nominative  personal  pronouns),  as  directed  in  the  Remark  at  the  be- 
ginning of  this  section.  The  distinctions  between  the  tenses  will  be 
found  in  a  proper  place. 


SECTION  TWELFTH. 

638.  The  different  persons  of  the  verb  estar  are  generally  rendered 
In  English  the  same  as  those  of  the  verb  ser  /  but  in  Spanish  these 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 


277 


verbs  are  not  employed  indiscriminately,  the  one  for  the  other.  Ser  is 
used  to  affirm  what  a  person  or  thing  is  naturally  (or  by  nature),  as  well 
as  habitual  qualities,  or  pervfianent  or  characteristic  properties  of  an  ob- 
ject. Estar  is  used  to  affirm  Iww  any  thing  exists  at  any  period  of 
time,  or  where  any  thing  exists.  Thus  the  sentences,  la  donceUa  es 
amable,  and  la  doncella  esta  amable,  would  each  be  rendered  in  English 
by  "the  maid  is  amiable ;"  but  in  Spanish  the  former  means  "the  maid 
is  amiable  "  naturally  or  permanently,  i.  e.,  of  an  amiable  disposition ; 
the  latter  means  "  the  maid  is  amiable"  for  the  time  being,  though  her 
disposition  may  be  far  from  being  amiable.  "Mary  is  beautiful,"  is  ren- 
dered Maria  es  hermosa,  since  it  is  intended  to  affirm  a  natural  quality 
of  Mary,  or  what  she  is ;  and  "  Mary  is  sad,"  is  rendered  Maria  esta 
triste,"  since  it  is  intended  to  affirm  a  merely  accidental  or  transient 
quality,  or  Jimo  she  is:  "Mary  is  in  the  country,"  is  rendered  Maria 
esta  en  el  campo,  since  estar  (and  not  ser)  is  used  to  affirm  where  a  thing 
is.  Juanesbueno,  means  "John  is  good,"  affirming  what  John  is; 
Juan  esta  bueno,  means  "  John  is  well,"  i.  e.,  in  good  health,  affirming 
how  John  is.  (For  a  more  complete  illustration  of  this  subject,  see 
333—336.) 

EXERCISE   XIII. 

639.  Vocabulary. 

■  Fonda,  hotel 
Inglaterra,  England. 
Campo,  country,  field. 
La  senora  T— ,  Mrs.  T—. 
Triste,  sad,  sorrowful. 
Enfadado,  angry. 
Ocupado,  &iwy,  occupied. 
Caliente,  warm. 
Bueno,  well, 
Aqul,  here. 
I  Como  7  how  ? 
Siempre,  always, 
i  Cuanto  7  how  much? 
Mesa,  table. 

640.  Model  sentences. 

(a.)  I  COmo  est^   vmd.  7     Estoy 

muy  bueno. 
{b.)  Los  pintores  est^n  en  el  campo. 
(c.)  La  senorita  T—  siempre  est^ 

ocupada. 
(d)i,D6nde  esti  mi  Ubro?    Aqui 

estd. 


Los  Estados  Unidos,   the   United 

States. 
El  sefior  T— ,  Mr.  T—. 
La  seiiorita  T— ,  Miss  T—. 
Con  ten  to,  contented,  pleased. 
Enfermo,  sick,  ill. 
Cansado,  weary,  tired, 
Presente,  present. 
Sobre,  upon. 
Alii,  there. 
j,Donde7  where? 
Luego,  soon,  immediately. 
En  casa,  at  home. 
Con,  with. 


How  are  you  7    I-ani  very  well. 

The  painters  are  in  the  country. 
Miss  T —  is  always  busy. 

Where  is  my  book  7    Here  it-ia 


24 


278  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

641.  Spanish  to  he  translated  into  English. 

El  Frances  esta  (159)  en  la  ciudad.  Estoy  en  la  calle. 
Estamos  tristes.  Estan  contentos.  Estais  enfadados. 
Estas  enfermo.  Esta  ocupado.  Estoy  cansado.  El  (87) 
agua  esta  caliente.  Estas  en  tu  casa.  Los  abogados  estan 
en  la  fonda.  Mi  padre  esta  en  la  ciudad.  i  Estais  cansa- 
dos?  No  estamos  cansados.  El  impresor  siempre  esta 
ocupado.  Siempre  estas  ocupado.  ^  Donde  esta  la  fonda? 
Aqui  esta.  i  Donde  esta  el  libro  de  Juan  ?  Aqui  esta. 
I  D6nde  estan  mis  cucharas,  cuchillos  y  tenedores  ?  Aqui 
estan.  i  Donde  esta  mi  sombrero  ?  Esta  sobre  la  mesa. 
I  Como  esta  Y.  ?  Estoy  bueno  (335,  e).  i  Como  esta  la 
sefiora  B —  1  Esta  buena.  i  Como  esta  la  sefiorita  B —  ? 
No  esta  muy  buena.  i  Esta  el  senor  B —  en  casa  ?  Esta 
en  casa.  i  Estan  Vms.  buenos  ?  Estamos  buenos.  i  Esta 
Ymd.  cansado  ?  No  estoy  cansado.  i  Esta  Pedro  en  los 
Estados  Unidos  ?  No,  senor,  esta  en  Inglaterra.  Diego 
esta  en  el  campo.     El  libro  esta  sobre  la  mesa. 

Estaba  (159)  enfermo.  Yo  estaba  contento.  Estaba 
mos  presentes.  Estaban  cansados.  La  senora  B —  esta- 
ba ocupada.  Yms.  estaban  presentes.  Estabas  enfermo. 
Estabais  presentes.  i  No  estaba  Y.  en  el  campo  ?  i  No 
estaba  mi  padre  en  la  calle  ?  i  Estabamos  en  la  ciudad  ? 
Estabas  con  tu  amigo. 

Estuve  (159)  triste  dos  anos.  i  Estuvisteis  alli  muchos 
anos  ?  I  Estuviste  alli  ?  i  Estuvo  alli  ?  i  Estuvieron 
tristes?  ^^ Estuvo  vmd.  mucho*  tiempo  con  el  juez  ? 
Nunca  he  estado  (159)  en  Inglaterra.  Nunca  ban  estado 
en  los  Estados  Unidos.  i  Cuanto  tiempof  ha  estado  Ymd. 
en  los  Estados  Unidos  ?  i  Cuanto  tiempo  has  estado  en 
Inglaterra  ?  Nunca  hemos  estado  en  Inglaterra.  He  esta- 
do muy  enfermo.     Habiamos  estado  (159)  muy  enfermos. 


*  Mucho  tiempo,  '*  much  time,"  equivalent  to   "  long  time,"  or, 
great  while,"  in  English, 
t  CuavAo  tiempo,  "how  much  time,"  meaning  "how  long." 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION.  279 

Juan  estara  (159)  en  su  casa.  Estare  ocupado.  Esta- 
ran  con  Vmd.  luego.  Estaras  presente.  Estaremos  en 
nuestras  casas.  Estareis  presentes.  Estare  con  Yms. 
luego.  Pedro  estara  con  nosotros  luego.  Estare  en 
Londres  luego. 

Estad  (159)  contentos.  Estemos  (309,  f)  contentos. 
Esten  (309,  f )  presentes.  Esta  contento.  Este  (309,  f ) 
el  agua  caliente.  Es  pdsible  que  Pedro  este  (311)  en  su 
casa.  Es  posible  que  esteis  presentes.  Probable  es  que 
los  abogados  esten  cansados.  Si  Juan  estuviese  (314) 
presente,  Maria  estuviera  (316)  contento.  No  creo  que 
la  senora  B —  haya  estado  (159)  jamas  (ever)  contento. 
j  Ojala  no  hubiese  yo  estado  enfermo.  j  Ojala  Y.  hubiese 
estado  presente !  Estado  enfermo  (299)  el  juez  dio  su 
diner 0  a  sus  bijos. 

642.  English  to  be  translated  iiito  Spa7iish. 

The  Spaniard  is  (159  ;  638)  in  the  city.  1-am  (638)  in 
the  street.  We-are  sad.  They-are  contented.  Ye  are 
angry.  Thou  art  ill  He-is  busy.  I  am  tired.  The  (87) 
water  is  hot.  Thou  art  in  thy  house.  The  lawyers  are  in 
the  hotel.  My  father  is  in  the  city.  Are-ye  tired  ?  We- 
are  not  tired.  The  printer  always  is  occupied.  Thou-art^ 
always^  busy.  Where  is  the  hotel  ?  Here  it-is.  Where 
is  John's  book?  Here  it-is.  Where  are  my  spoons, 
knives,  and  forks  ?  Here  they-are.  Where  is  my  hat  ? 
[t-is  upon  the  table.  How  are  you?  (how  is  your-wor- 
ship  ?)  I-am  well  (335,  e).  How  is  Mrs.  (233)  *B—  ? 
She-is  well.  How  is  Miss  B — ?  She-is  not  very  well 
Is  Mr.  B — at  home?  He-is  at  home.  Are  you  (Vms.) 
well?  We-are  well.  Are  you  ( Fm^.)  tired?  I-am  not 
tired.  Is  Peter  in  the  United  States  ?  No,  sir,  he  is  in 
England.  James  is  in  the  country.  The  book  is  upon 
the  table.  The  buttons  are  in  the  hat.  The  printer  is  in 
the  hotel.  The  painter  is  busy.  My  brothers  are  in  the 
country.     How  are  my  friends  ?     They  are  not  very  well. 


280  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

[The  verb  in  the  following  paragraph  is  to  be  rendered  by  the  imper- 
fect tense  in  Spanish.] 

Ke  was  (159)  ill.  I  was  contented.  We-were  present. 
They -were  tired.  Mrs.  B —  was  busy.  You  ( Vms.)  were 
present.  Thou-wast  ill.  Ye-were  present.  Were  you 
( F)  not  in  the  country  ?  Was  not  my  father  in  the 
city  ?  Were  we-not  in  the  street  ?  Thou-wast  with  thy 
friend. 

I-was  (perf  def )  sad  two  years.  Were-ye  (303)  there 
many  years  ?  Wast-thou  there  ?  Was-he  there  ?  Were- 
they  sad  ?  Were  you  ( Vmd.)  [a]  long  (mucho)  time  with 
the  judge  ?  Never  have-I  been  in  England.  Never  have- 
they  been  in  the  United  States.  How  long  (how  much 
time)  have  you  (  Vmd.)  been  in  the  United  States  ?  How 
long  hast-thou  been  in  England  ?  We-have  never  (622) 
been  in  England.,  I-have  been  ill.  We-had  been  (159) 
very  sick. 

John  will-be  (159)  in  his  house.  I-shall-be  busy.  They- 
will-be  with  you  [Vmd.)  soon.  Thou-wilt-be  present.  We- 
shall-be  in  our  houses.  Ye-will-be  present.  I-shall-be 
with  you  ( Vms.)  soon.  Peter  will-be  with  us  immediately. 
I-shall-be  in  London  soon. 

Be-ye  (159)  contented.  Let-us-be  (309,  f )  contented. 
May-they-be  (309,  f )  present.  May-he-be  contented.  Let 
the  water  be  warm.  It-is  possible  that  Peter  may-be 
(159)  in  his  house.  It-is  possible  that  ye-may-be  present. 
It-is  p**obable  that  the  lawyers  may-be  tired.  If  John 
should-be  (314)  present,  Mary  would-be  pleased.  I  do  not 
believe  that  Mrs.  B —  may-have  ever  [jamas)  been  content- 
ed. 0-that  I  had  (314)  not  been  sick  !  0-that  you  (  V) 
might-have  (31 4)  been  present !  The^  judge'*  being^  (299) 
ilP,  gave  his  money  to  his  sons. 

g^"  The  learner  can  proceed  to  write  and  re-wrile  all  the  parts  of 
this  verb  {estar)^  continuing  the  practice  till  he  has  committed  it  to 
memory  and  afterward  translate  the  following  exercises  on  sev  and 
eatur. 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION.  281 

EXERCISE   XIV. 


643.  Vocabulary. 

Plomo,  lead. 
M6dia,  stocking. 
Candelero,  candlestick. 
Ciego,  blind. 
Pesado,  heavy. 

644.  Model  senteiices. 
(a.)  Mi  padre  es  ciego. 

(6.)  Mi  hermana  esta  ciega  de  ira. 
(c.)  Juan  es  enfermizo. 
{d.)  Pedro  estd  escribiendo. 


Miel  (fern.),  honey. 
Seda,  silk. 
A'grio,  sour. 
Enfermizo,  sickly. 
Escribiendo,  writing. 


My  father  is  blind. 

My  sister  is  blind  with  passion. 

John  is  sickly. 

Peter  is  writing. 


'  The  following  promiscuous  examples  on  the  use  of  ser  and 
estar  can  be  readily  translated  by  means  of  the  references. 

645.  English  to  he  translated  into  Spanish. 

Thou  art  (334)  proud.  Thou  art  (335)  angry.  Death 
(628)  is  (334)  terrible.  We  are  (335,  b)  in  the  street. 
My  father  is  (334)  very  rich.  My  mother  is  (335)*  very 
sorrowful.  Lead  (628)  is  heavy.  The  milk  is  (335)  sour. 
Honey  (628)  is  sweet.  The  honey  is  (335)  warm.  I  am 
a  (243)  German.  I  am  angry.  We  are  (334)  imprudent. 
We  are  ill.  She-is  (334)  old.  She-is  (335)  contented. 
My  mother  is  (334)  blind.  My  daughter  is  (335)  blind 
with  [de)  anger  (ira).  Mary  is  beautiful.  Lucy  is  (335) 
busy.  John  is  good.  John  is  well  (335,  e).  The  spoon 
is  (334,  b)  of  gold.  The  spoon  is  (335,  b)  upon  the  table. 
The  fork  is  (334,  b)  mine.  The  fork  is  (335,  b)  in  the 
house.  The  stockings  are  (334,  b)  of  silk.  The  stockings 
are  (335,  b)  in  the  street.  The  book  is  for  (334,  b)  Mary. 
The  book  is  (335,  b)  in  the  hotel.  The  stockings  are  for 
Lucy.  Here  are  (335,  b)  the  stockings.  I-am  (334) 
young.  I-am  (335,  c)  writing.  My  mother  is  sickly.  My 
mother  is  sick.  The  candlesticks  are  (334)  of  gold.  The 
buttons  are  of  silver.  The  looking-glass .  is  (334)  new. 
The  caodlestick  is  of  silver.  They-are  (335,  c)  writing. 
Sugar    (628)   is   (334)    sweet.      This   hat   is   for   John. 

24* 


282^ 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 


They-are  wise.     They-are  sorrowful.     Where  is  (335,  b) 
my  hat  ?     Here  it-is  (335,  b).     My  shoes  are  of  silk. 


SECTION  THIRTEENTH. 

646.  The  phrases,  "  to  be  hungry"  "  to  be  thirsty^"  "  to  be  afraid^"  "  to 
be  cold,"  "/o  be  hot"  are  rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  verb  tener  (to  have), 
and  the  corresponding  noun ;  as,  "  to  have  hunger"  "  to  have  thirst"  "  to 
'lavefear"  "/o  have  shame"  ^^to  have  cold"  "to  have  heat" 


EXERCISE   XV. 


647.    Vocabulary. 
Manzana,  apple. 
Nuez,  nut. 
Sopa,  soup. 
Calentura, /ercr. 
Marmol,  viarble. 
Paciencia,  patience. 
Calor,  heat. 
Vergiienza,  shame. 
Silla,  chair. 
Es  estrano,  it-is  strange. 


Pera,  pear. 
Bota,  boot. 
Aceite,  oil. 
Memoria,  memory. 
Hierro,  iron. 
Suceso,  success. 
Frio,  cold,  coldness. 
Temor,  fear. 
Ayer,  yesterday. 
Con,  with. 


That  woman  has  not  shame  (t.  «., 

is  not  ashamed). 
John  has  heat  (i.  c,  John  is  hot). 
Let  Peter  have  money. 


648.  Model  sentences. 
(a.)  Esa  muger  no  tiene  vergiien- 
za. 

{b.)  Juan  tiene  calor. 

(c.)  Tenga  Pedro  dinero.   . 

649.  Spanish  to  he  translated  into  English. 

2,  Tiene  (160)  Vmd.  manaanas?  Tengo  (160)  manzanas. 
Tenemos  plumas.  Tienen  peras.  Yms.  tienen  sillas. 
Ella  tiene  hambre.  Tengo  sed  (646).  Tenemos  calor 
(646).  Tienen  vergiienza  (646).  Tengo  temor  (646). 
Tenemos  frio  (646).  ^  ^engo  yo  verguenza?  Tienes  ver- 
giienza. Teneis  una  lampara.  i  Quien  tiene  nueees  ? 
I  Quienes  tienen  peras  ?  Mis  hermanos  tienen  hierro. 
Tengo  manteca.  Teneis  espejos.  Tenemos  tenedores. 
Tienes  cuchillos.  i  Que  especie  de  botones  tiene  V.  ? 
^Tenemos   marmol?     ^  Q^^    especie   de   azucar  tiene   el 


EXERCISES  FOR  TRANSLATION'.  283 

aldeano  ?  Ella  no  tiene  (626)  marido.  Tengo  tres  hijos 
y  dos  hijas.  Te«eis  tres  hermanos.  Tenemos  una  casa. 
I  Tenemos  medias  ?  i  Tiencs  candeleros  ?  No  tengo  hari- 
na  (626).  No  teneis  leche  (626).  La  rosa  tiene  espinas. 
Ymd.  tiene  memoria  (242).  Maria  tiene  mucha  confianza 
en  el  jucz.  ^^  ^ienen  Yms.  sopa?  Tenemos  suceso. 
^  Teneis  paciencia  ?  El  medico  tenia  (160)  confianza  en 
la  Espanola.  Ella  no  tenia  lampara.  Teniamos  hambre. 
Yo  tenia  una  rosa.  Tenian  dinero;  Ymd.  tenia  una 
media.  Teniais  plata.  Yms.  tenian  confianza  en  mi  her- 
mano.  Tenias  oro.  Ella  tenia  prudencia.  i  Tenia  yo 
zapatos  ?     I  Teniamos  botas  ?     i  No  tenian  mesas 

Tuvo  (160)  azucar  ayer.  Tuvieron  manteca  ayer.  Tuve 
botones  ayer.  Ella  tuvo  harina  ayer.  Tuvisteis  dinero. 
Tuvimos  lamparas.  Tuviste  candeleros.  No  tuvieron 
espejos.  ^Tuviste  una  pluma?  Tuve  una  casa.  Tuvi- 
mos medias  de  seda  ayer,     Tuvo  sillas  ayer. 

El  zapatero  ha  tenido  (160)  mucho  cuidado.  He  tenido 
mucho  hierro.  Has  tenido  tres  hijas.  Hemos  tenido  dos 
hijos.  Maria  ha  tenido  calentura  (242).  Ella  has  tenido 
dos  maridos.  Han  tenido  muchos  cuidados.  Habeis  ten- 
ido mucho  dinero.     Yo  no  habia  tenido  (160)  sopa, 

Tendre  (160)  una  candelero.  Ella  tendra  un  tenedor. 
Tendran  aceite.  Ymd.  tendra  hambre.  Tendras  calor 
(646).  Tendremos  sed.  Tendran  vergiienza  (646).  Ten- 
dreis  temor  (646).  Tendre  frio  (646).  Habre  tenido 
(160)  dinero. 

Tened  (160)  paz  con  todos  los  hombres.  Ten  paz  con 
todos  los  hijos  del  medico.  Tenga  (309,  f )  plumas.  Ten- 
gan  (309,  f )  miel.  Tengamos  (309,  f )  espejos.  Tenga 
(309,  f )  Ymd.  confianza  en  el. 

Quiero  que  mi  madre  tenga  (160)  harina.  Es  posible 
que  tengas  aceite.  Probable  es  que  tengan  lamparas. 
Quiero  que  Maria  tenga  dinero.  Quiero  que  yo  tenga 
medias  de  seda.     Probable  es  que  tengamos  algun  (101) 


284  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

merito.      Es   posible   que   tengais   hambre.     Quiero   que 
Vms.  tengan  candeleros. 

No  era  estrano  que  tuviesen  (314)  peras.  No  era  estra- 
no  que  yo  tuviese  (314)  dinero.  No  era  estrano  que  Ymd. 
tuviese  aceite.  Era  preciso  que  no  tuviesemos  azucar. 
Si  tuvieses  (314)  betas,  yo  tendria  (315)  zapatos.  Juan 
tendria  (315)  un  tenedor.  No  creo  que  Pedro  haya  tenido 
(160)  manteca.  j  Ojala  yo  no  hubiera  tenido  (160)  estas 
lamparas  !  \  Ojala  no  hubieran  tenido  esos  libros  !  Si  yo 
tuviere  paciencia,  tendre  suceso.  Si  mis  hijos  tuvieren 
pacieneia,  tendran  suceso. 

650.  English  to  he  translated  into  Spanish. 

They-have  (160)  pears.  Have  jovi{Vmd,)  apples?  I- 
have  apples.  We-have  pens.  They-have  pears.  You 
( Vms.)  have  chairs.  She  is  hungry  (646).  I  am  thirsty 
(646).  We  are  hot  (646).  They  are  ashamed  (646). 
I  am  afraid  (646).  We  are  cold  (646).  t  am  ashamed. 
Thou  art  ashamed  (646).  Ye  have  a  lamp.  Who  has 
nuts  1  Who  have  pears  ?  My  brothers  have  iron.  I 
have  butter.  Ye  have  looking-glasses.  We  have  forks. 
Thou  hast  knives.  What  sort  of  buttons  have  you  (  Vmd.)  ? 
Have-we  marble  ?  What  sort  of  sugar  has  the  villager  ? 
She  has  no  (626)  husband.  I  have  three  sons  and  two 
daughters.  Ye  have  three  brothers.  We  have  a  house. 
Have  we  stockings  ?  Hast  thou  candlesticks  ?  I  have  no 
(626)  flour.  Ye  have  no  (626)  milk.  The  rose  has 
thorns.  You  {Vmd.)  have  a  (242)  memory.  Mary  has 
much  confidence  in  the  judge.  Have  you  ( Vms.)  soup  ? 
We  have  success.     Have  ye  patience  ? 

The  physician  had  (imperf.)  confidence  in  the  Spanisli- 
woman.  She  had  (imperf)  no  (626)  lamp.  We  were  (im- 
perf.) hungry.  You  (  Vms.)  had  (imperf)  confidence  in  my 
brother.     Had  (imperf)  we  boots  ? 

He  had  (303)  sugar  yesterday.     They  had  (303)  butter 


EXERCISES   FOli  TRANSLATION.  285 

yesterday.  I  had  (303)  buttons  yesterday.  We  had  a 
(242)  fever  yesterday.     Ye  had  chairs  yesterday. 

The' shoemaker  has  had  (160)  much  care.  I  have  had 
much  iron.  Thou  hast  had  three  daughters.  We  have 
had  two  sons.  Mary  has  had  a  (242)  fever.  She  has  had 
two  husbands.  They  have  had  many  cares.  Ye  have  had 
much  money.     I  had  not  had  (305)  soup. 

I  shall  have  (160)  a  candlestick.  She  will  have  a  fork. 
They-will  have  oil.  You  ( Vmd.)  will  be  hungry  (646). 
Thou-wilt-be  (646)  hot.  We  shall-be  (646)  thirsty. 
They  will  be  (646)  ashamed.  Ye  will  be  (646)  afraid.  I 
shall  be  (646)  cold.     I  will  have  had  (160)  money. 

Have-ye  (160)  peace  with  all  men  (628).  Have-thou 
peace  with  all  the  sons  of  the  physician.  Let-him-have 
(309,  f)  pens.  Let-them-have  (309,  f)  honey.  Let-us- 
h&ve  looking-glasses.  May  you  (  Vmd.)  have  confidence  in 
him. 

I  wish  that  my  mother  may-have  (160)  flour.  It-is  pos- 
sible that  thou-mayest-have  oil.  Probable  it-is  that  they- 
may-have  lamps.  I-wish  that  Mary  may-have  money.  I- 
wish  that  I  may -have  silk  stockings  (97,  a).  Probable  it-is 
that  we-may  have  some  (101)  merit.  It-is  possible  that 
ye-may  be  (646)  hungry.  I  wish  that  you  ( Vms.)  may- 
have  candlesticks. 

It-was  {era)  not  strange  that  they-should-have  (314) 
pears.  It-was  not  strange  that  I  should  have  (314) 
money.  It- was  not  strange  that  you  (  Vmd.)  should  have 
oil.  It  was  necessary  that  we  should  not  have  (314) 
sugar.  If  thou  shouldst  have  (314)  boots.  I  would-have 
(315)  shoes.  John  would  (315)  have  a  fork.  I  do  not 
believe  that  Peter  may-have  had  (160)  butter.  0-that  I 
had  not  had  (318)  these  lamps  !  0-that  they-had  not  had 
(318)  those  books!  If  I  shall  have  (319)  patience,  I 
shall  have  (307)  success.  If  my  sons  shall  have  (319) 
patience,  they  will  have  success. 


286 


EXERCISES   Foi   TRANSLATlOi^. 


'  The  learner  can  now  write  all  the  persons  of  the  tenses  of  the 
verb  tener^  as  directed  at  the  close  of  the  last  two  sections. 


SECTION  FOURTEENTH. 

Remark. — The  exercises  in  this  section  are  designed  for  practice  in 
tlie  conjugations  of  regular  verbs  of  the  three  terminations,  ar^  er,  and 
ir.  Of  course,  all  verbs  whose  present  infinitive  ends  with  ar,  are  of 
the  first  conjugation,  and  are  to  be  conjugated  like  amar  (168,  a) ;  those 
ending  with  er,  are  of  the  second,  and  to  be  conjugated  like  comer  (168, 
b) ;  and  those  ending  with  ir,  of  the  third,  and  to  be  conjugated  like 
vivir  (168,  c). 

EXERCISE   XVI. 

65 1 .  Vocabulary. 

Hablar,  to  speak. 

Buscar,  to  seek. 

Q,'uedar,  to  remain. 

Llevar,  to  carry. 

Rehusar,  to  refuse. 

Comer,  to  eat,  to  dine. 

Leer,  to  read. 

Vivir,  to  live. 

Cumplir,  to  fulfil. 

Terminar,  to  terminate^  to  close. 

Reposo,  repose, 

Correo,  post^  mail. 

Deber,  duty. 

Maiiana,  to-morrow ^  morning. 

Cuando,  wke^i,. 

A'  las  dos,  at  two  o'clock. 

652.  Model  sentences. 

(a.)  El  Senor  nos  (113)  ama. 

(b.)  No  hemos  bedido  vino. 

(c.)  I  Me  permitiri  V.  escribir  dos 

cartas  7 
{d.)  Cumplid  vuestros  deberes. 
(e.)  Hable  V.  alto. 
(/.)  Viva,   Vmd.,  seiiora,  muchos 

anos. 


Amar,  to  love. 

Hallar,  to  find. 

Llorar,  to  weep. 

Viajar,  to  travel. 

Llegar,  to  arrive. 

Beber,  to  drink. 

Responder,  to  reply,  to  answer. 

Escribir,*  to  write. 

Permitir,  to  permit. 

Asunto,  business,  matter. 

Palabra,  word. 

Espana,  Spain. 

Favor,  yaror. 

Hasta  entunces,  till  then. 

Ya,  already. 

A.'  las  tres,  at  three  o'clock. 


The  liOrd  loves  us. 

We  have  not  drunk  any  wine. 

Will  you  permit  me  to-write  tw** 

letters  ? 
Fulfil-ye  your  duties. 
Speak  loud. 
May  you  live,  madam,  many  years 


*  Escribir  is  irregular  in  its  past  participle,  having  escriio  and  nol 
ejfcribido.    (See  222,  a.) 


EXERCISES   FOR    TRANSLATION.  287 

1 

653.  Spanish  to  he  translated  into  English. 

Dios  DOS  (113)  ama.  Los  pintores  la  (113)  aman.  Mi 
madre  busca  reposo.  Ella  no  halla  reposo.  El  Aleman 
ama  la  verdad.  Hablan.  Hablas.  Lloran.  Quedan 
contentos.  Vmd.  busca  reposo.  j  Hablan  Vms.  Espanol  ? 
Hablamos  Espanol.  Quedas  triste.  Hablais  el  Ingles. 
No  hallo  reposo.  Bebes(168,  b)  vino.  Bebo  agua.  El 
Frances  no  come  pan.  Mis  hermanos  no  beben  vino. 
Como  pan.  Juan  lee  libros.  Leen  libros.  No  come  V. 
nada  (622).  No  beben  Vms.  nada.  i  No  respondes  na- 
da?  Bebemos  vino.  Bebeis  agua.  El  medico  vive  (168, 
c)  en  Londres.  Mis  bijas  viven  en  los  Estados  Unidos. 
Maria  escribe  cartas.  Escribis  muchas  cartas.  Cumples 
tu  palabra.  Cumplo  mis  deberes.  Ymd.  vive  en  la  ciu- 
dad.     I  Como  halla  Y.  este  pan  ? 

Llevabamos  (168,  a)  mucho  dinero  con  nosotros.  Maria 
lloraba.  Pedro  hablaba.  Las  mugeres  lloraban.  Las 
senoras  buscaban  reposo.  Yo  lloraba.  Yo  bebia  (168,  b) 
vino.  Diego  bebia  agua.  Comiamos  pan.  Yivian  (168, 
c)  en  Londres.  Yiviais  en  la  ciudad.  Yo  escribia  una 
carta.  Yivias  en  Madrid.  Escribiamos  cartas.  Yo  bus- 
caba  reposo. 

La  Francesa  no  hallo  (168,  a)  reposo.  Yiajo  por  Es- 
pana.  Yiaje  por  los  Estados  Unidos.  Yiajamos  por  In- 
glaterra.  Hallaron  un  tesoro  en  el  camino.  Juan  lloro. 
Lei  (168,  b)  estos  libros.  Comio  pan  y  manteca.  Comi- 
eron  azucar.  Bebimos  vino  y  leche.  Escribi  (168,  c)  dos 
cartas.  Escribieron  doce  cartas.  Juan  no  respondio 
nada.     Ymd.  vivio  en  Madrid. 

Le  (113)  han  rehusado  (168,  a)  ese  favor.  Juan  me  ha 
rehusado  ese  favor.  He  hallado  mis  tesoros.  i  Ha  llega- 
do  el  correo?  Hemos  hallado  las  cucharas.  i  Has  viaja- 
do  por  Espana ?  iJjQ  habeis  rehusado  ese  favor ?  i No 
ha  comido  (168,  b)  V.  pan?  He  comido  mucho  pan.  He 
cumplido  mi  palabra.     Han  cumplido  su  palabra.     2,  Ha 


288  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

llegado  el  juez  ?  i  Han  hallado  Vms.  mis  lamparas  7 
I  Has  comido  muclia  miel  ?  i  Ha  viajado  V.  per  los  Esta- 
dos  Unidos  ? 

Hasta  entonces  habiais  hablado  (168,  a)  Espanol. 
Hasta  entonces  no  habiamos  terminado  nuestros  asuntos. 
Ya  babian  comido  (168,  b)  cuando  llegamos.  i  No  babias 
vivido  (168,  c)  ya  en  Londres  ?  Hasta  entonces  babian 
vivido  en  paz. 

Cuando  hube  ballado  (168,  a)  el  tesoro,  escribi  cartas  a 
mis  amigos.  Cuando  hubiste  comido  (168,  b),  tu  padre 
Uego.  Cuando  hubimos  bablado,  nuestras  bermanas  llora- 
ron. 

Viajare  (168,  a)  por  Espana.  Vijaremos  por  Ingla- 
terra.  Hallara  un  tesoro.  Comere  (168,  b)  este  pan. 
Comeran  manzanas.  Leeras  esos  libros.  Cumpliremos 
(168,  c)  nuestras  palabras.  Escribiran  cartas.  Mi  criado 
llevara  las  cartas  al  correo.  Habre  comido  (168,  b)  a  las 
dos.*  Habran  llegado  alas  tres.  El  correo  babra  llegado 
a  las  dos. 

Llorad  (168,  a)  con  los  que  lloran.  Comed  (168,  b)  este 
pan.  Cumplid  (168,  c)  vuestras  palabras.  Bebed  agua. 
Vivid  en  paz  con  todos  los  bombres.  Habla  alto.  Llora 
tu  con  los  que  lloran.  Come  tu  conmigo.  Come  tu  con 
Pedro.  Cumple  tus  deberes.  Hable  (309,  f )  Juan  alto. 
Lea  (309,  f )  Maria  mis  cartas.  Lean  (309,  f )  las  senoras 
esos  libros.  Cumplan  (309,  f )  los  bombres  sus  deberes. 
Lea  Ym.  (309,  f )  esa  carta.  Hable  Ymd.  (309,  f )  Espa- 
nol. Coma  V.  manzanas  y  peras.  Lean  Yms.  esa  carta. 
No  hable  (309,  a)  Y.  de  eso  (128,  a).  No  lea  (309,  a) 
Ymd.  ese  libro.  No  bebas  (309,  a)  vino.  No  lloreis 
(309,  a).  Respondedme  (116).  Escribidles  (116).  Es- 
cribenos  (116). 

Es  posible  que  balles  (168,  a)  un  tesoro.  Es  posible 
que  lean  (168,  b)  esos  libros.     Es  probable  quq^  no  cum* 

*  See  280. 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION.  289 

plan  (168,  c)  sus  deberes.  Probable  es  que  ella  no  Ic 
responda.     \  Ojala  halleis  reposo ! 

Si  yo  ballase  (314)  libros,  yo  los  leeria  (315).  Si 
Maria  llorara  (316),  Juan  lloraria  (315).  \  Ojala  no  be- 
biesen  (314)  vino!  j  Ojala  no  llorase  !  j  Ojala  los  hom- 
bres  (628)  cumpliesen  (314)  sus  deberes!  Preciso  era 
que  Maria  no  hablase  alto. 

[  Es  posible  que  no  hayan  hallado  (168,  a;  317)  uu 
tesoro  ?  Es  posible  que  no  haya  llegado.  \  Ojala  yo  no 
hubiese  hablado  (318)!  Era  estrano  que  no  hubiesen 
hallado  esos  libros.  Si  Juan  no  hubiese  hablado  (318,  a) 
Maria  no  habria  llorado  (318,  a).  Si  manana  llegare  (319) 
Pedro,  te  escribire.  Si  manana  hallaren  (319)  un  tesoro, 
nos  escribiran.  Si  Diego  no  hubiere  llegado  (320)  mana- 
na a  las  tres,  le  escribiremos  una  carta. 

Permitame  (116)  Y.  leer  (298)  eso  libro.  ^  Me  permi- 
tira  Y.  leer  esa  carta?  Era  preciso  hablarles  (116). 
Juan  pretende  (634)  no  haber  hablado.  Estaban  comien- 
do  (299)  y  bebiendo  (299).  Habiendo  hallado  (299)  un 
libro,  le  lei.  Habiendo  hallado  un  tesoro  en  el  camino.  le 
Uevamos  en  la  casa  del  abogado. 

654.  English  to  be  translated  into  Spanish. 

I-weep  (168,  a).  God  loves  us  (113).  The  painters 
love  her.  My  mother  seeks  repose.  She  finds  not  repose. 
The  German  loves  the  truth.  They  speak.  Thou  speak- 
est.  They  weep.  They  remain  contented  (300,  a).  You 
( Vmd.)  seek  repose.  Do  you  (  Vms.)  speak  Spanish  ?  We 
speak  Spanish.  Thou  remainest  sad.  Ye  speak  the  En- 
glish. I  find  not  repose.  Thou  drinkest  (168,  b)  wine.  I 
drink  water.  The  Frenchman  eats  not  bread.  My  bro- 
thers drink  not  wine.  I  eat  bread.  John  reads  books. 
They  read  books.  You  (vmd.)  eat  nothing  (622).  You 
(Vms.)  drink  nothing.  Repliest-thou  nothing?  We 
drink  wine.  Ye  drink  water.  The  physician  lives  (168, 
c)  in  London.     My  daughters  live  in  the  United  States. 

25 


290  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

Mary  writes  letters.  Ye  write  many  letters.  Thou  ful- 
fillest  thy  word.  I  fulfil  my  duties.  You  (  Vmd.)  live  in 
the  city.     How  do  you  (  V.)  find  this  bread  ? 

We-were-carrying  (168,  a)  much  money  with  u}>.  Mary 
was-weeping.  Peter  was-speaking.  The  women  were- 
weeping.  .The  ladies  were-seeking  repose.  I  was-weep- 
ing. I  was-drinking  (163,  b)  wine.  James  was-drinking 
water.  We  were-eating  bread.  They  were-living  (168,  c) 
in  London.  Ye  were-living  in  the  city.  I  was-writing  a 
letter.  Thou  wast-living  in  Madrid.  We  were-writing 
letters. 

The  French-woman  found  (perf  def )  no  (626)  repose. 
He  travelled  through  Spain  (JEspana).  I  travelled  through 
the  United  States.  We  travelled  through  England. 
They  found  a  treasure  in  the  road.  John  wept  I  read 
(168,  b)  these  books.  I-ate  bread  and  butter.  They  ate 
sugar.  We  drank  wine  and  milk.  I  wrote  ( 1 68,  c)  two 
letters.  They  wrote  twelve  letters.  John  answered 
nothing  (622).     You  ( Vmd.)  lived  in  Madrid. 

They  have  refused  (168,  a)  him  (113)  that  favor.  John 
has  refused  me  that  favor.  I  have  found  my  treasures. 
Has  the^  post^  arrived^?  We  have  found  the  spoons. 
Hast-thou  travelled  through  Spain  ?  Have-ye  refused  him 
(113)  that  favor  ?  Have  you  (  Vmd.)  not  eaten  bread  ?  I 
have  eaten  much  bread.  I  have  kept  {cumplido)  my  word. 
They  have  fulfilled  their  word.  Has  the^  judge^  arrived^  ? 
Have  you^  ( Vms. )  found^  my  lamps  ?  Hast  thou  eaten 
much  honey?  Have  you'^  (7wd)  travelled^  through  the 
United  States  ? 

Till  then  ye-had  spoken  (168,  a;  305)  Spanish.  Till 
then  we-had  not  terminated  (305)  our  business  (plur.). 
They-had^  already^  eaten^  (168,  b;  305)  when  we  arrived. 
Hadst-thou  not  already^  lived^  (305)  in  London?  Till 
then  they  had  lived  (305)  in  peace. 

When  I-had  found  (306)  the  treasure,  I  wrote  letters 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION.  291 

to  my  friends.  When  thou-hadst  (306)  dined  (306)  thy 
father  arrived.  When  we-had  spoken  (306)  our  sisters 
wept. 

I-shall-travel  (168,  a;  307)  through  Spain.  We-shall- 
travel  through  England.  He-will-find  a  treasure.  I- 
shall-eat  bread.  They-will-eat  apples.  Thou-wilt-read 
those  books.  We-shall-fulfil  our  words.  They-will-write 
letters.  My  male-servant  will-carry  the  letters  to  the 
post.  I-shall-have  dined  (308)  at  two  o'clock  (280). 
They-will-have  arrived  (308)  at  three  o'clock  (280),  The 
post  will-have  arrived  (308)  at  two  o'clock. 

Weep-ye  (309)  with  those  who  (125,  c)  weep.  Eat-ye 
this  bread.  Fulfil-ye  your  promises  (palabras).  Drink-ye 
water.  Live-ye  in  peace  with  all  men  (628).  Speak-thou 
loud  (alto).  Weep  thou  with  those  who  weep.  Eat  thou 
with  me  (115,  c).  Eat  thou  with  Peter.  Fulfil  thy  duties. 
Let  John  speak  (309,  f)  loud.  Let  Mary  read  (309,  f  ) 
my  letters.  Let  the  ladies  read  (309,  f)  those  books. 
Let  men  (628)  fulfil  (309,  f )  their  duties.  Read  (309,  f ) 
you  (  Vmd.)  this  letter.  Speak  (309,  f )  Spanish  (let  your- 
worship  speak  Spanish).  Eat  you  ( Vmd.)  some  (254,  c) 
apples  and  pears.  Read  you  (Vms.)  that  letter.  Speak 
not*  (309,  a)  of  this  (128,  a).  Read  not  (309,  a)  this 
book.  Drink-thou  not  (309,  a)  wine.  Weep-ye  -not  (309, 
a).  Answer-ye  me  (116).  Write-ye  to  them  (116).  Write- 
thou  to-us  (116). 

It-is  possible  that  thou-mayest-find  (168,  a;  31 1)  a  trea- 
sure. It-is  possible  that  they-may-read  (168,  b)  those 
books.  It-is  probable  that  they-may  not  fulfil  their  duties. 
It-is  probable  that  she  may  not  answer  him  (113).  0-that 
ye-may-find  repose  ! 

If  I  should-find  (314)  books,  I  would-read  (315)  them. 
If  Mary  should-weep  (316),  John  would-weep  (315). 
0-that   they -would   not   drink    (314)   wine!     0-that   he- 


Literally,  no  hable  V.  de  eao,  "not  let-speak  your-worship  of  this." 


292  EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

would  not  weep  (314)!  O-that  men  (628)  would-fulfil 
(314)  their  duties!  It-was  (era)  necessary  that  Mary 
should  not  speak  (314)  loud  (alto). 

Is-it  possible  that  they-may  not  have  found  (317)  a  trea- 
sure ?  It-is  possible  that  he-may  not  have  arrived  (317). 
O-that  I  had  not  (might  not  have)  spoken  (318;  318,  a)! 
It-was  (era)  strange  that  they-should  not  have  found  (318, 
a)  those  books.  If  John  had  not  (should  not  have)  spoken 
(318,  a),  Mary  would  not  have  wept  (318,  a).  If  Peters 
should-arrive^  (319)  to-morrow,^  I-will-write  to-thee  (1 13). 
If  they-shall-find^  (S19)  a^  treasure^  to-morrow,^  they-will- 
write  to-us.  If  James  shall  not  have  arrived  (320) '  to- 
morrow at  three  o'clock,  we  will  write  him  a  letter. 

Permit  me  (116)  to-read  (298)  that  book.  Will  you 
(Vmd.)  permit  me  (113)  to  read  that  letter?  It-was  ne- 
cessary to-speak  to-them  (116;  114).  John  pretends 
(634)  not  to-have  spoken.  They-were  [estaban)  eating 
(299)  and  drinking  (299).  Having  found  (299)  a  book,  I- 
readit(113). 

Remark. — In  order  to  become  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  conjugation 
of  the  regular  verbs,  the  learner  should  write  and  re-write  all  the  per- 
sons of  the  various  moods  and  tenses  (as  before  directed),  until  he  finds 
himself  able  to  write  them  without  referring  to  the  model-verbs.  He 
must  be  careful  to  remember  the  changes  in  orthography  sometimes 
required.     (See  165  ;  165,  a  ;  and  166  :  166,  a ;  166,  b ;  166,  c.) 

1^^  The  following  verbs,  together  with  those  already  given  in  the 
vocabulary  of  this  section,  will  serve  as  examples  for  practice  : 
Pagar,  ^opay.  Tomm',  to  take. 

Llamar,  to  call.  Ornar,  to  adorn. 

Comprar,  \o  buy.  Juzgar,  to  judge. 

Pender,  to  hang.  Creer,  to  believe. 


Temer,  to  fear. 

Aprender,  to  learn. 

Unir,  to  unite. 

Abrir,  to  open.     (See  222,  a). 

Asistir,  to  assist. 


Escoger,  to  choose. 
Veneer,  to  conquer. 
Sufrir,  to  s^ifer. 
Aiiadir,  to  add. 
Admitir,  to  admit. 


EXERCISES   TOR   TRANSLATION. 


293 


SECTION  FIFTEENTH. 

Remark. — The  exercises  in  this  section  are  designed  for  practice  in 
reflective  verbs  and  passive  verbs.    (See  169;  167,  a,  b;  170;  171 ;  172.) 

655.  Se  and  the  other  personal  pronouns  of  the  first-objective  case, 
are  often  used  in  Spanish  with  neuter  or  active-intransitive  verbs,  and  in 
such  cases  seem  redundant  in  English;  as  V.  se  burla,  "you  jest;" 
mucho  me  alegro,  "  I  rejoice  much ;"  se  caerd  Vmd.y  "  you  will-fall ;" 
rettrese  Vmd.^  "  retire ;"  no  se  enoje  Vmd.^  "  do  not  be  angry."  Those 
verbs  designated  with  a  (*)  in  the  vocabulary,  are  thus  used. 


EXERCISE    XVII. 


656.  Vocabulary. 
Levantar,  to  raise,  to  rise. 
Portarse,*  to  behave,  to  conduct  one^s 

self. 
Quejarse,*  to  complain. 
Acercarse,*  to  approach,  to  draw 

near. 
Salvar,  to  save. 
Alabar,  to  praise. 
Armar,  to  arm. 
Invierno,  winter. 
A'  las  seis,  at  six  ci clock, 

657.  Model  sentences. 

(a)  Los  amigos  se  juntaron  (169, 

a)  en  Londres. 
(i.)  Me  hallo  (169,  a),contento. 
(c.)  Levantaos  (116;  116,  b). 
id.)  V.  se  burla  (655). 


Bien,  well,  properly. 

Meterse,*  to  meddle,  to  interfere. 

Retirarse,  *  to  retire,  to  withdraw. 

Burlarse,*  to  jest. 

Alegrarse,*  to  rejoice. 

Juntarse,*  to  assemble. 

Escondir,  to  hide. 

Pais  (masc),  country,  region. 

Primavera,  spring. 

A'  las  siete,  at  seven  o'clock. 

Mai,  badly,  improperly. 


The  friends  assembled  themselves 

in  London. 
I-find  myself  contented. 
Raise  yourselves. 
You  jest. 
Do  not  complain. 


(e.)  No  se  (655)  queje  V. 

658.   Spanish  to  be  translated  into  English. 

2,C6mo  se  halla  (169,  a)  Ymd.  ?  Juan  se  porta  bien. 
Los  abogados  se  portan  mal.  Te  portas  bien.  Os  portais 
mal.  Ellas  se  juntaron  en  Madrid.  El  carpintero  se 
halla  contento.  Le  amas.  Pedro  se  alabo.  La  muger 
se  escondio.  El  general  se  armo.  Se  alaban  mis  herma- 
nas  (575).  Se  salvaron.  Me  alabo.  Te  armas.  Me  es- 
condi.  Nos  armamos.  Nos  escondimos.  Se  ban  portado 
mal.     i  Ojala  me  ballase  con  ella !     \  Ojala  se  portasea 

25* 


294  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

bien  !  Tus  amigos  se  juntaran  en  Londres.  Escondete 
(116).  Alabaos  (116,.!:)).  Salvaos  (116,  b).  Armemo- 
nos  (116,  b).  Alabese  (116)  Ymd.  (309,  f).  A^rmese 
(116)Ymd. 

Te  (655)  burks.  Me  (655)  alegro  mucho.  Se  (655) 
acerca  la  primavera  (575).  Se  (655)  acerca  el  invierno. 
Se  (655)  quejan.  V.  se  (655)  burla.  Te  (655)  alegras. 
Pedro  se  (655)  queja.  Se  lia  levantado  Y.  (575).  i  De 
quien  se  (655)  quejan  ?  i  Me  (655)  he  nietido  nuuea 
(ever)  en  sus  (123,  a)  asuntos  (affairs)  de  Ymd.  ?  Siempre 
me  (655)  levanto  a  las  seis.  Me  (655)  retirare.  i  No  se 
(655)  retiraria  (315)  Y.  del  pais?  ^-^o  se  (655)  retirarian 
(315)  del  pais?  Siempre  nos  (655)  levantamos  a  las 
siete.  Se  (655)  alegran.  Alegrate  (116).  Alegraos 
(116,  b).  Alegremonos  (116,  b).  Alegrense  (116).  Le- 
vantese  Y.  (309,  f).  No  se  (309,  d)  queje  Y.  (309,  f). 
No  nos  (309,  d)  quejemos  (309,  f ).  No  nos  (309,  d)  me- 
tamos  (309,  f)  en  los  asuntos  del  juez. 

659.  English  to  he  translated  into  Spanish. 

How  do  you  (Vmd,)  find  (169,  a)  yourself  (how  finds 
your-worship  himself )  ?  Peter  behaves  himself  well. 
The  lawyers  conduct  themselves  badly.  Thou  behavest 
thyself  well.  Ye-behave  yourselves  badly.  They  assem- 
bled themselves  in  Madrid.  The  carpenter  finds  himself 
contented.  Thou-lovest  thyself.  John  praises  himself. 
The  woman  hid  herself.  The  general  armed  liimself. 
My^  brothers*  praise^  themselves^  (575).  The3^-saved 
themselves.  I-praise  myself  Thou-armest  thyself.  I- 
hid  myself.  We-arm  ourselves.  We-hid  ourselves.  They- 
have  behaved  themselves  badly.  0-that  I-might-find  (314) 
myself  with  her  !  O-that  they-would-conduct  (314)  them- 
selves well !  Thy  friends  will-assemble  themselves  in 
London.  Hide  (1 16)  thyself.  Praise-ye  yourselves  (1 16, 
b).     Save  (116,  b)  yourselves.     Let-us-arm  ourselves  (116. 


EXERC.SES   FOR    TRANSLATION.  295 

b).     Praise  (116)  yourself  (let  your-worship  praise  him- 
self, 309,  f ).     Arm  (116)  yourself  (309,  f ). 

Thou-jestest  (655).  I-rejoice  (655)  much.  The^  spring^ 
approaches^  (655).  The^  winter^  draws  near^  (655).  They- 
complain  (655).  You  ( F.)  jest  (655).  Thou-rejoicest 
(655).  Peter  complains  (655).  You^  ( V.)  have^  risen^ 
(655).  Of  whom  complain-they  (655)  ?  Have-I  meddled 
(655)  ever  (nunca)  in  your  [de  Vmd.;  123.,  a)  affairs  (asu?i- 
tos)  ?  I  always  rise  (65?)  at  six  o'clock.  I-will-retire  (655). 
Would  (315)  you  ( V.)  not  retire  (655)  from-the  {del)  coun- 
try ?  WoulS-they  (315)  not  retire  (655)  from-the  country  ? 
We  always  rise  (655)  at  seven  o'clock.  They-rejoice  (655). 
Rejoice  thou  (655;  116).  Rejoice-ye  (116,  b).  Let-us- 
rejoice  (655;  116,  b).  Let-them-rejoice  (655;  116). 
Rise  (655  ;  309,  f;  let  your-worship  raise  himself ) .  Com- 
plain not  (309,  d  ;  let  not  your-worship  complain  himself). 
Let  us  not  complain  (309,  d  ;  309,  f ).  Let  us  not  meddle 
(655  ;  309,  d)  in  the  affifcirs  {asuntos)  of  the  judge. 

Remark. — The  inflections  of  reflective  verbs  should  now  be  written 
in  all  the  moods  and  tenses  of  the  three  regular  conjugations. 

EXERCISE   XVIir. 


660.  Vocabulary. 

duemar,  to  hum. 
Maltratar,  to  abuse. 
Calumniar,  to  calumniate. 
Generosidad,  generosity. 
Embajador,  embassador. 
/  yer,  yesterday. 

661.  Model  sentences. 

(a.)  Este  libro    fu^   escrito*   para 

mis  amigos. 
ih.)  Las  casas  han  sido  quemadas. 


Veneer,  to  conquer^  to  surpass. 
Criar,  to  create. 
Presentar,  to  present. 
Tierra,  the  earth. 
Presidente,  president. 
Abiertamente,  openly. 


This  book  was    written    for    my 

friends. 
The  houses  have  been  burned. 


(c.)  Maria  es  amada  (170)  de  Jos^.  ;  Mary  is  loved  by  Joseph. 


Escrito  is  the  past  participle  (irregularly  formed)  of  the  verb  escriblr. 


296  EXERCISES   FOR    TRANSLATION. 

662.  Spanish  to  he  translated  into  English. 

Lucia  es  amada  (170;  171)  de  (323,  b)  Diego.  La 
Espanola  es  amada  (170;  171)  del  Frances.  Fuimos  ven- 
cidos(170;  171)  en  generosidad.  La  tierra  fue  criada 
(170)  por  (323,  b)  Dies.  Ella  fue  calumniada  (170)  abier- 
tamente.  Fueron  vencidos  en  generosidad.  Todas  las 
^(628)  cosas  (623)  fueron  criadas  por  Dios.  Esta  carta  fue 
escrita  (170)  para  Maria.  Esos  libros  fueron  escritos  por 
(323,  b)  el  abogado.  He  sido  (172)  maltratado.  La  ciu- 
dad  fue  quemada.  La  casa  fue  quemada.  Ayer  fue^  pre- 
sentado^  eV  embajador^  frances^  al  presidente  a^  los  Esta 
dos  Unidos.  Ayer  fueron  presentadas  al  presidente  las 
hermanas  y  bijas  del  embajador^  espanoP  {57b).  Las 
Francesas  fueron  calumniados  abiertamente.  Estos  caba- 
lleros  ban  sido  (172)  maltrados.  Las  ciudades  ban  sido 
quemadas.  La  ciudad  sera  quemada.  No  seremos  venci- 
dos en  generosidad.  Ayer  fue  presentado  al  presidente  el 
bijo  del  embajadof^  inglcs.i  Ayer  fui  presentado  al  presi- 
dente de  los  Estados  Unidos. 

663.  English  to  be  translated  into  Spanish. 

Mary  is  loved  (170  ;  \7\)hj  {de;  323,  b)  James.  The 
Spanish-woman  is  loved  (170)  by-the  (323,  b)  Frenchman. 
We-were(perf  def)*  conquered  (170)  in  generosity.  The 
earth  was  (perf  def)  created  (170)  by  {'por ;  323,  b)  God. 
She  was  (perf  def)  calumniated  openly.  They-were  con- 
quered in  generosity.  All  things  (628)  were  created  by 
(323,  b)  God.  This  letter  was  written  {escrita)  for  Mary. 
Those  books  were  written  by  (323,  b)  the  lawyer.  I-have 
been  abused  (172).  The  city  was  (perf.  def)  burned.  The 
house  was  burned.  Yesterday  the^  Frenchs  ambassador^ 
was^  presented^  to-the  president  of  the  United  States. 
Yesterday  were  presented  to-the  president  the  sisters  and 
daughters  of  the  Spanish^  ambassador.^     The  French-wo- 


See  170,  a ;  and  323 ;  323,  a 


EXERCISES  FOR  TRANSLATION.  297 

men  were  calumniated  openly.  These  gentlemen  have 
been  (172)  abused.  The  cities  have-been  burned.  The 
city  will-be  burned.  We  shall  not  be  surpassed  in  gener- 
osity. Yesterday  was  presented  to  the  president  the  son 
of  the  English^  ambassador.'  Yesterday  I-was  presented 
to  the  president  of  the  United  States. 

RemarJ^ — The  inflections  of  passive  verbs  should  now  be  written  in 
all  the  moods  and  tenses  of  the  three  regular  conjugations. 


SECTION  SIXTEENTH. 

Remark. — The  exercises  in  this  section  are  designed  to  show  the  man- 
ner in  which  the  reflective  personal  pronoun  se  is  employed  in  Spanish 
to  express  passive  action. 

664.  We  can  say  in  English,  "  the  man  deceives  himself,"  or,  "  the 
man  is  deceived,"  and  each  sentence  conveys  about  the  same  idea ;  but 
in  Spanish  this  manner  of  expressing  a  passive  act  or  emotion  by  means 
of  the  reflective  pronoun  is  carried  to  a  far  greater  extent  than  in  English. 
Thus  it  can  be  said  in  Spanish,  en  la  Gaceta  de  JPHladelfia  de  ayer  se  leen 
las  slguentes  tineas^  "  in  the  Gazette  of  Philadelphia  of  yesterday  read 
themselves  the  following  lines,"  meaning,  "in  yesterday's  Philadelphia 
Gazette  the  following  lines  are  (or  maij  be)  read.^^  j,  Cumo  se  entenderd 
lo  que  se  dice'?  "how  shall-understand  itself  that  which  says  itself^^ 
meaning,  "how  shall  be  understood  that  which  is  said?"  Las  ventanas 
se  han  cerrado,  "  the  windows  have  shut  themselves,"  meaning  "  the  win- 
dows have  been  shut.''  "  It  is  believed,"  "it  is  said,"  "  the  book  is  open- 
ed," can  be  rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  reflective  pronoun,  thus,  se  cree; 
se  dice;  se  abre  el  libra;  literally,  "it-believes  itself,"  "it  savs  itself," 
"  the  book  opens  itself."  This  peculiar  manner  of  expressing  a  pasaiva 
act  or  emotion  must  be  carefully  noted.     (See  173  and  173,  a). 

EXERCISE    XIX. 

665.  Vocabulary. 

Llamar,  to  call,  to  name. 
Doblar,  to  double,  to  increase. 
Usar,  to  iLse. 

Creer,  to  believe,  to  think. 
Abrir,  to  open. 
Clamor,  noise,  clamor. 
Humo,  smoke. 
Profecia,  prophecy. 


Llenar,  to  Jill. 
Continuar,  to  cvntinue, 
Enganar,  to  dec  aive. 
Vender,  to  sell. 
Botella,  bottle. 
Escuela,  school. 
Puerta,  door. 
Sitio,  siege. 


«i>8 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 


Here  Spanish  is  spoken. 
Ask-ye,  and  it  shall  be  given  to -you. 
The  island  was  called  Melita. 
The  river  is  (has  been)  frozen. 
The  meadows  have  been  mowed. 


666.  Model  sentences, 
(a.)  Aqui  se3  habla2  Espanol.^ 
lb.)  Pedid,  y  se2  os3  dara.^ 
(c.)  La  isla  se  llamaba  MeUta. 
{d.)  El  rio  se  ha  helado. 
(«.)  SeS  han3  segado^  los^  prados.2* 

667.  In  many  of  the  following  sentences  the  nominative  will  be  found 
placed  after  the  verb  (see  666,  e),  this  being  a  very  common  order  of  con- 
struction in  Spanish,  especially  in  sentences  in  which  se,  with  the  active 
verb,  is  used  in  place  of  the  passive  verb. 

668.  Spanish  to  be  translated  into  English. 

Esta  muger  se  llama  (664)  Maria.  Aqui  (639)  se 
Labia  el  Ingles.  Se  cree.  Llamad,  y  se  os  abrira.  Este 
vino  se  vende  a  (378)  tres  pesos  (623)  la  (234)  botella. 
Se  dobla  el  clamor.  Se  enagana  Y.  i  Se  usan  plumas  de 
oro?  i  Que  libros  se  usan  en  esa  eseuela?  La  botella  se 
llenara  de  (with)  vino.  Las  botellas  se  llenaran  de  (399) 
agua.  La  casa  se  llenara  de  (399)  humo.  Se  lleno  toda 
la  cuidad  de  (399)  humo.  Se  abriran  las  puertas.  Aqui 
se  habla  el  Frances.  Se  cumple  la  profecia.  Se  abrira 
la  puerte.  La  cuidad  se  quemo  (660).  Las  casas  se  que- 
maron.  Se  abrio  el  libro.  Aqui  se  venden  libros.  Este 
vino  se  vende  a  (378)  dos  pesos  la  (234)  botella.  Se 
cumplen  las  profecias.  Se  continuara  la  carta.  Este 
hombre  se  llama  Pedro.  Se  abrieron  todas  las  puertas. 
Se  continuaran  esas  cartas.  Se  doblara  el  clamor.  Se 
enganan  los  jueces.  Esa  profecia  se  ha  cumplido.  Se  ha 
enganado  Ymd.  Se  habla  de  un  sitio.  Se  ha  levantado 
(656)  el  sitio.  i  Se  usan  sombreros  de  seda  ?  Las  casas 
se  llenaron  de  (399)  humo. 

669.  English  to  he  translated  into  Spanish. 

This  woman  is  called  (173  ;   173,  a)  Mary.     Here  the 


*  It  must  be  remembered  that  the  literal  rendering  of  these  model  sen- 
tences would  be,  "  here  speaks  itself  Spanish  ;"  "  ask-ye,  and  to-you  {os) 
'n-sludl  give  itself;'^  "  the  island  called  itself  Melita ;"  "  the  river  has  fro- 
ze.n  itself  '     <  the  meadows  have  mowed  themselves." 


EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION.  299 

French  (667)  is  spoken.  It  is-believed  (664).  Knock 
(llamdd),  and  it  sball  be  opened  to-you.  This  wine  is  sold 
at  (a)  three  dollars  a  {la)  bottle.  The  clamor  (667)  is 
doubled.  You  ( V.)  are  deceived  (667).  Are  gold  pens 
(97,  a)  used  (667)?  What  books  are  used  in  that  school? 
The  lottle  will  be  filled  with  {de)  wine.  The  bottles  will 
be  filled  with  [de)  water.  The  house  will  be  filled  with 
(399)  smoke.  All  the  city  (667)  will  be  filled  with  (399) 
smoke.  The  doors  (667)  will  be  opened.  Here  the  Eng- 
lish (667)  is  spoken.  The  prophecy  (667)  is  fulfilled. 
The  door  (667)  will  be  opened.  The  city  is  burned  (perf. 
def.).  The  houses  are  burned.  The  book  (667)  is  open- 
ed (perf.  def).  Here  books  (667)  are  sold  (pres.).  This 
wine  is  sold  at  (378)  two  dollars  a  (234)  bottle.  The  pro- 
phecies (667)  are  fulfilled  (pres.).  The  letter  (667)  will 
be  continued.  This  man  is  called  Peter.  All  the  gates 
(667)  were  opened  (perf  def).  Those  letters  (667)  will 
be  continued.  The  clamor  (667)  will  be  doubled.  The 
judges  (667)  are  deceived.  This  prophecy  has  been  ful- 
filled. You  ( Vmd.  ;  667)  have  been  deceived.  It  is 
spoken  of  a  siege.*  The  siege  (667)  has  been  raised 
(656).  Are  silk  hats  (97,  a)  used  (667)  ?  The  houses 
were  filled  (perf  def)  with  smoke.  Those  prophecies 
have  been  fulfilled. 


SECTION  SEVENTEENTH. 

670.  One  of  the  most  important  rules  in  Spanish  syntax  is  that  by 
which  a  noim  in  the  objective  case,  if  it  be  a  person,  or  inanimate  thing 
personified,  and  the  direct  object  of  a  verb,  is  to  be  preceded  by  the  pre- 
position d.  Thus,  "John  loves  his  brother"  would  be  in  Spanish, 
Juan  ama  a  su  hennano,f  and  not  Juan  ama  su  hcrinano  ;  "  Peter  slew 
the  barber "  would  be,  Pedro  mato  al  barbero^f  and  not  Pedro  maio  el 


*  In  English,  it  would  be  better  to  say,  '  a  siege  is  spoken  of."  In 
Spanish  it  can  be  said,  hablan  de  un  s7tio,  "  they  (i.  e.,  people)  speak  of 
a  siege." 

t  Literally,  "John  loves  to  his  broth*  r;"  "Peter  slew  to-the  barber  " 


30C  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

barbero  ;  "  I  love  those  who  love  n.e,"  would  be,  amo  ^  los  que  me  aman^ 
and  not  amo  los  que  me  aman.  These  sentences  can  be  altered  in  con- 
struction, as  mentioned  in  paragraph  575,  without  any  change  of  mean- 
ing. Of  course  the  preposition  is  not  to  be  translated  in  English,  but 
must  always  be  used  in  Spanish  before  nouns  in  the  objective  case,  gov- 
erned by  an  active  verb,  if  these  nouns  express  a  rational  being  or  per- 
sonified object.* 

EXERCISE    XX. 

67 1 .  Vocabulary. 
Honrar,  to  honor. 
Temer,  to  fear. 
Robar,  to  rob. 
Recompensar,  to  reward. 
Deudor,  debtor. 

672.  Model  sentences. 


Sanar,  to  heal,  to  cure. 
Perdonar,  to  forgive,  to  pardon. 
Matar,  to  slay,  to  kill. 
Visitar,  to  visit. 
Noche  (fem.),  nighi. 


(a.)  Ama  a  nuestra  nacion. 

{b.)  Cain  mato  d  su  hermano  Abel. 

(c.)  Vi  a  una  muger. 

(d.)  A  n^die  vio. 

(e.)  Le  amo  como  d  un  hermano. 


He-loves  our  nation. 

Cain  slew  his  brother  Abel. 

I-saw  a  woman. 

He  saw  nobody. 

I-love  him  like  a  brother. 


673.  Spanish  to  be  translated  into  English. 

El  padre  ama  a  sus  liijos.  Honramos  a\  juez.  El  m6- 
dico  Sana  a  los  enfermos.  Este  juez  no  teme  a  Dios. 
Perdonamos  a  nuestros  dendores.  Yo  perdono  a  mis  deu- 
dores.  Dios  ama  a  los  que  son  buenos.  Llamaron  a  los 
pintores.  Ella  teme  a\  Americano.  El  medico  sanara  a 
muchos  enfermos.  El  juez  perdono  a\  hombre  que  robo 
fl^l  padre  de  Pedro.  Robaron  a  la  muger  a  quien  (125) 
recompensamos.  Mi  criado  i^ato  a  su  padre.  Honrad  a 
vuestros  padres  (parents).  Perdone  a  todos  mis  deudores. 
Te  amo  como  (like)  a  un  padre.  Pedro  me  ama  como  a 
un  hermano.  Las  senoras  recompensaran  a  sus  criadas. 
Visitaremos  al  presidente  esta  noche  (to-night).  Visitare- 
mos  a  algunos  de  mis  amigos  esta  noche.  Recompensare 
a\  que  me  honra.  La  madre  ama  a  sus  hijas.  Juan  mato 
a  su  amigo. 

*  This  rule  applies  only  to  rational  beings  or  personified  objects ;  thus 
»ve  can  not  say,  amo  i.  la  verdad,  but  amo  la  verdad,  "  I  love  the  truth." 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION.  301 

674.  English  to  be  translated  into  Spanish, 
The  mother  loves  (670)  her  daughters.  We-honor  the 
judge.  The  physician  heals  the  sick  (102).  This  judge 
fears  not  God.  We-pardon  our  debtors.  I  forgive  my 
debtors.  God  loves  those  who  are  good.  They-called  the 
painters.  She  fears  the  American.  The  physician  will- 
heal  many  sick  \_ persons.']  The  judge  pardoned  the  man 
who  robbed  Peter's  father.  They  robbed  the .  woman 
whom  (125)  we  rewarded.  My  male-servant  slew  his 
father.  Honor-ye  your  parents  ( padres).  T-pardoned  all 
my  debtors.  I-love  thee  (113)  like  {como)  a  father.  Peter 
loves  me  like  a  brother.  The  ladies  will-reward  their 
female-servants.  We-will- visit  the  president  this  night. 
We-will-visit  some  of  my  friends  to-night  (esta  noche).  I 
will  reward  him  who  honors  me.  The  father  loves  nis 
sons.     John  killed  his  friend. 


PART    V. 


SPANISH    READING    LESSONS. 

FIRST    SECTION. 

Remark. — This  section  of  the  Reading  Lessons  consists  of  easy  sen- 
tences. The  words  selected  are  among  those  in  general  use,  and  should 
be  repeated  by  the  learner  till  he  can  recall  them  and  their  signification 
at  any  moment,  and  thus  be  enabled  to  write  the  exercises  at  the  close 
of  the  section. 

The  verbs  are  printed  in  italics.  The  learner  should  endeavor  to  find 
out  what  verbs  are  irregular,  and  this  he  can  easily  do  by  referring  to  the 
alphabetical  list  (see  221,  a)  of  irregular,  defective,  and  impersonal  verbs 
of  the  three  conjugations.*    Every  verb  not  found  in  this  list  is  regular. 

The  meaning  of  the  words  will  be  found  in  the  vocabulary  at  the  end 
of  the  volume.  Every  word  which  is  varied  by  inflection  is  to  be  sought 
in  its  first  form ;  that  is,  a  noun  plural  must  be  reduced  to  its  singular 
form ;  an  adjective  to  its  masculine  form,  or  if  it  be  plural  and  feminine, 
to  its  singular,  or  singular  masculine.  Thus,  if  the  word  be  rigutsimas, 
it  will  be  perceived  from  tne  termination,  isimas,  that  it  is  a  superlative 
form  of  the  feminine  plural  of  some  adjective  ;  reducing  it  then  to  the 
masculine  singular,  it  will  be  riquisimo,  and  then  removing  its  superla- 
tive ending,  and  remembering  the  change  which  takes  place  in  adjectives 
that  end  with  co  (see  108,  b),  it  will  be  found  that  riquisimas  is  derived 
from  rico.  And  so  with  other  parts  of  speech  that  are  subject  to  inflec- 
tion. All  the  persons  of  verbs  used  in  this  First  Section  will  be  found 
in  the  Vocabulary. 

Reference  will  frequently  be  made  to  some  preceding  paragraph  of  this 
work,  and  the  pupil  being  thus  obliged  to  refer  to  the  specific  rules  so 
jften,  can  hardly  fail  to  learn  them  even  without  much  seeming  effort. 

The  learner  is  expected  to  begin  to  translate  these  Reading  Lessons  as 
soon  as  he  shall  have  proceeded  to  page  86,  in  Part  II,  He  can  be  com- 
mitting to  memory  at  the  same  time  the  irregular  verbs. 


*  In  this  list  the  learner  will  find  a  reierence  either  to  the  conjugation 
of  the  verb  itself,  or  to  the  conjugation  of  one  of  similar  irregularities. 
Thus  the  Yerh  preferir,  to  prefer,  is  irregular,  and  by  seeking  it  in  the  list 
(under  the  third  conjugation,  as  it  ends  in  ir)  it  will  be  seen  that  it  is  to 
be  conjugated  like  sentir  (see  209). 


SPANISH  READING   LESSONS.  303 

\ 

I. SHORT    SENTENCES. 

El  virtuoso^  ama  a^  Dies,  El  mundo  abunda  en  lazes, 
dificultades  y  peligros.  Dehemos^  sufrir  con  paciencia  las 
incomodades  de  esta  vida.  Los  males  de  esta  vida  son  mo- 
mentaneos ;  los  bienes  de  la  otra  eternos.  La^  ambicion 
aumenta  los  muchos  trabajos,  y  disminuye^  los  pocos  place- 
res  que  se  hallan^  en  el  mundo.  Las  perezosos^  son  inutiles 
a  la^  sociedad.  Cada  uno  tiene  sus"''  quebaceres.  Una 
ciudad  que  esta^  puesta  sobre  un  monte,  no  se^  puede^^ 
esconder.  Nadie  es  sin  pecado.  El  conocimiento,  que  ien- 
emos  de  Dios  en  esta  vida,  es  imperfecta.  La*  sabiduria  y 
la<  modestia  son  tan  apreciable  como  la*  locura  y  la*  desfa- 
chatez  son  despreciable.  Lo  que^^  es  propio  en  uno,  es  im- 
propio  en  otro.  Dios  recompensard  a^  los  buenos*  y  casii- 
gar  a  a-  los  malos.*     Los  manSos^  hercdardn  la  tierra. 

El  que '2  no  es  agradecido,  no  puede^^  ser  bueno.  Si 
alguna  virtud  puede^^  neutralizar  los  efectos  de  la*  sober- 
bia,  es  ciertamente  la*  humilidad.  Cada  bora  es  un  paso 
hacia  el  tumulo.  Lo  bueno^^  ^g  perferible  a  lo^^  bermoso. 
El  bombre  virtuoso'*  es  amado  de'^  todos.'*  Los  verdade- 
ros  amigos  deben^  amarse  y  servirse  unos  a  otros.'^  La* 
paciencia  y  la*  diligencia  remueven  montanas..  No  es  oro 
todo  lo  que'^  reluce.  Nadie  puede^^  dar  mas  de'^  lo  que 
tiene.  Todo^*'  tiene  fin^'  en  este  mundo.  Ninguno  puede^^ 
servir  6?  dos  senores.     Todo^^  arbol  bueno'*  lleva  buenos 

I. — '  See  102. — 2  See  670. — ^Deber,  before  an  infinitive,  means  "  oughts 
See  316,  c;  and  326, /.— *  See  628.— 5  See  165.— ^  Se  hallen,  "are 
found."  See  173.— 7  Siis  here  means  "his  own."—^  See  335,  6.-9  See 
116,  a.  Esconderse,  "  to  hide  itself,"  or  passively,  "to  be  hidden."  See 
173. — '"  Puede,  before  an  infinitive,  is  to  be  rendered  "  can." — 11  See  125, 
&.— '2  See  125,  c— 13  See  263,  a.— ^  See  264.-15  See  323,  b.—^6Todos, 
"every  body."  See  133. — ^'^  Amarse  y  servirse  unos  a  otros,  "to  love 
themselves  and  serve  themselves  some  to  others,"  that  is,  "  to  love  and 
serve  one  another."— ^^  See  131.— 19  See  270.— 20  Todo,  "every  thing." 
See  133.— 2ii^X  "  an  end."  See  242.-22  Todo,  used  with  a  noun  m 
«ie  singular,  generally  means  "  every."     See  133. 


304  SPANISH   READING   LESSONS. 

frutos,  y  el  mal*^  arbol  lleva  malos  frutos.  El  que^^  siembre 
poco,  cogerd  poco.  Para^*  coger^  es  necesario  sembrar.  La^ 
ira  convierte  aP  hombre  en  una  fiera.  Una  burla  picante^^ 
es  la  ponzona  de  la^  amistad.  El  momento  actuaP^  es  el 
unico^  que  nos^  pertenece.  El  que^^  es^^  mal  bijo  6  berma- 
110  malevoloj  jamas  merece  el  nombre  de  amigo.  Si  los 
malos^  se  unen^  para^^  hacer  mal,^^  i  porque  no  se  reunirdn^ 
los  buenos^  para^*  obrar  bien  ^^ 

II. SPANISH   AND   ENGLISH. 

I  Habla^  Y.  Espanol  ?^  Hablolo^  un  poco.  i  Lo*  en 
tiende^  ese  caballero  P  No  lo^  entiende}  Algo^  lo^  eniiendo 
J  hablo.  Es'^  una  lengua  muy  iitil  y  hermosa.  La  pro- 
nunciacion  del  Espanol  es  mucbo  mas  facil  que  la^  del  In- 
gles. I  Habla  Y.  Ingles  ?  Mas  en'tiendo  de^  lo  que  habuo. 
La  lengua  inglesa  es  muy  dificultosa  para  los  Espanoles. 
I  Me^«  habla  Y.  ?  Hable'^  Y.  clara^^  j  distintamente.^2  -^^y 
entiendo  bien^^  el  Espanol.     No  entiendo  lo  que^^  Y.  dice 

III. THE    WEATHER. 

I  Que  taF  tiempo^  A<2ce  .^'^  J32ice^  un  tiempo  bermosisimo. 
I  Ha  cambiado  el  viento  ?*  El  viento  ha  caido.  El  tiem- 
po^ amenaza  lluvia.  El  cielo  estd^  nublado.  i  Oye  Y.  el 
trueno?  Estc^  granizando.  Empieza  sJ  nevar.  Hace- 
mucbo  viento.     El  tiempo*^  se  despeja.^     La  nieve  se  der- 

23  See  101.— 24  See  326,  c— 25  U'nico,  ''only  one."—^s  iVo5,  '' to-us:' 
See  114  and  113.— 27  See  243.— ^^  Mal  is  here  a  noun.— 29  See  575.— 
30  Bien  is  here  a  noun. 

II. — 1  See  611. — 2  Espanol  is  an  adjective,  and  agrees  with  id'ioma 
(masc.)  understood.— 3  See  113,  a.—^  See  113  and  117.— 5  See  575.— ^AZ^o, 
''somewhat,''  "seme  little:'— f  Es,  "it-is."  See 220.— 8  See  616.— 9  See 
270.-10  See  114  and  113 ;  also  611.— ^  See  309,/.— 12  See  354,  a.— 's  See 
351,  6.— H  See  125,  b. 

III. — ^Que  tal,  "what  sort  of,"  "how."  See  478,  a. — ^Tiempo,  "  wea 
iher."—^  See  218,  c— 4  See  575.-5  See  335.-6  See  335,  c— 7  See  326,  a. 
^Se  despejaf  "clears  up.'      See  284,  e. 


SPANISH   READING   LESSONS.  305 

rite,^  La  nieve  que  cay 6^^  esta  manana,  ha  suavizado 
mucbo^^  el  tiempo.  Hace^  buen'^  tiempo.^  Ilace^  maP^ 
tiempo.    Relampaguea}^     Trvena}^     Toda  el  dia  lloverd.^'^ 

TV, THE    SEASONS. 

La^  primavera  es  la  estacion  mas^  agradable.  La^  natu- 
raleza  sonrie  en  primavera.  Toda  la^  naturaleza  se  anima.^ 
La  estacion  es  muy  adelantada.  Temo  que  iengamos  un 
verano  muy  caluroso  este  afio.  La  cosecha  sera  muy 
abundante.  El  otono  es  la  estacion  do  los  frutos.  Los 
dias  se  han  acortado^  mucbo.^  Las  bojas  ama^illean  y  evi- 
piezan  aP  caer.  Las  mananas.  y  las  tardes  son  ya  frias. 
Las  noches  son  largas.  Se  acerca^  el  invierno.'''  No  me 
gusta^  el  inviernoj     Este  invierno  es  muy  frio. 

V. THE    COUNTRY. 

Manana^  salgo  para^  ir  al  campo.  El  campo  tiene  para 
mi  un  atractivo  singular.^  Mucho'^  sentiria^  jopasar  en  la 
ciudad  la  estacion  mas^  hermosa  del  ano.  \  Cuan^  puro  y 
saludable  es  el  aire  del  campo  !  Ese  paseo  es  muy  agraaa- 
ble.  Abora  vayamos  por  este  caminito.  Sentemonos^  so- 
bre  la  yerba.  Entremos^  en  este  bosque.  Vamos^^  por 
este  sendero ;  es  el  camino  mas®  corto  para^  volver  a 
casa.^^  Veremos  una  cascada  y  un  lago.  i  No  oye  V.  la 
dulce  melodia  de  las  aves  ?  Estos  arboles  hacen  bella 
sombra. 


9  See  284,  e.— lo  See  165.—"  See  351.— 12  See  101.— 13  See  216. 

IV.— 1  See  628.-2  See  268.-3  See  173.— 4  See  351.— 5  See  326,  a.— 
6  See  284,  e. — 7  gee  575. — ^  This  means  literally,  "  winter  pleases  me 
not,'^  and  is  equivalent  to  "  I  do  not  like  winter,"  in  English.  See  344 
and  485. 

v.— 1  Manana,  ''to-morrow.'"—^  See  326,  c— 3  See  264.-4  See  351.— 
5  Sentiria  yo,  ^^  I  should-be  sorry."  See  315  and  526. — ^  See  268. — 7  See 
478,  a.— 8  See  309,  b.—9  See  309,  /.— lo  See  204.-11  A'  casa,  ''at  home," 
or  "  home."     See  240. 

25* 


306                               SPANISH   READING   LESSONS. 
VI. A   JOURNEY. 

I  Que  especie  de  camino  ha^^  de  aqui  a  Nueva-York  1 
El  camino  es  casi  impractable  en  esta  estacion.  i  Se  hal- 
laiv^  buenas  posadas  en  el  camino  1  Son  en  general  muy 
malas.  i  Que  carruage  puedo  tomar  de  aqui  a  Nueva-York  ? 
Putde  Y}  ir  por  el  camino  de  hierro,^  6  por  el  barco  de 
vapor.^  Puede  Y.^  tomar  el  correo.  Prefiero  viajar  por  el 
ferro-carril>  Prefiero  viajar  por  la  diligencia.  i  Cuanto 
se  faga^  por^  asiento  ?  No  llevare  mas  que^  una  maleta. 
I  Es  seguro  el  camino  P  Si,  senor ;  es  muy  frecuentado. 
I  Cuantos  dftis  se  necesitav}^  para^^  hacer  el  viaje?  i  Haif 
en  el  camino  ciudades  notables  V^  i  Es  ancho  6  angosto 
el  camino  '?^ 

YII. MISCELLANEOUS    SENTENCES. 

Acostumbrdos^  a^  imitar  las  acciones  de  los  virtuosos. 
Nunca  envidieis^  la  dicha  agena.^  Siempre  debes^^  aliviar^^ 
aP  infortunado.  No  levantaras  falso  testimonio  contra  tu 
projimo.  Contempla^  a^  esos  hombres  sublimes^  cuya  con- 
ducta  es  la  mejor^  prueba  de  la  grandeza  moraP  del  genero 
humane.^  y  procura  imitarlos}  Si  puedes  cultivar^^  tu  inge- 
nio  y  no  lo^''  haces^faltas  6}^  un  deber  sagrado.^  En  todos 
tus  estudios  trata  de^^  unir  a  un  discernimiento  tranquilo^ 
una  grande  penetracion,  la^^  paciencia  para  la^^  analisis  y 

VI.— 1  See  218.— 2  See  173.— 3  See  575.—*  El  camino  de  hierro,  liter- 
ally "  the  road  of  iron"  that  is,  "  the  rail-road."  "  Elferro-carril "  also 
means  ^Hhe  rail-way" — 5  Barco  devajwr,  ^^boat  of  steam"  (see  97,  a), 
that  is,  "  steam-boat."  Vapor  is  also  often  used  for  "  steamer  "  or  "  steam- 
boat."— 6  Scpaga,  ^^  is  paid,"  or,  "is  to  be  paid."  See  173. — 7  See  234, 
a. — ^  Masque,  '■'■  more  than"  No  Tuas  que,  ^^  no  more  than,"  ^^  only." — 
8  I  Es  el  camino  seguro  ?  is  the  order  in  which  these  words  are  to  be 
translated.     See  575.— lo  See  173.— "  See  326,  c— 12  See  264. 

VII.— 1  See  116  and  116,  6.-2  See  326,  a.— 3  See  309,  a.— 4  See  134, 
c. — 5  See  670. — ^  Contempla  is  in  the  imperative  mood,  2d  pers.  sing.^ 
7  See  670.-8  See  264.-9  See  265  and  265,  a.— 1°  See  287  and  287,  a.— 
"  Faltar  d,  ^' to  fail  in."-  ^2  Tratar  de,  '^to  aim  at,"  "io  manage  to." 


SPANISH   READING   LESSONS.  307 

ia^3  constancia  en  la^^  sintesis.  La^^  sociedad  seria}^  menos 
viciosa  si  cada  cual  enfrenase^^  su  desarreglada  ambicion  j 
sus  inquietudes.  Se^^  liberal  en  dar^^  todo  genero  de  asis- 
tencia  aP®  que  la  necesita.  Si  quieres  ser^^  justo,  no  aborrez- 
cas  dJ  nadie.^° 

Remark. — After  the  learner  shall  have  carefully  translated  the  preced- 
ing Lessons,  and  examined  the  rules  of  Syntax  and  construction  referred 
to  in  the  notes,  ffe  should  again  translate  all  the  Lessons  by  writing  each 
sentence  in  good  English,  enclosing  the  references  to  rules  in  parenthe- 
ses. Then,  without  looking  at  the  Spanish  Reading  Lessons,  he  should 
endeavor  to  re-translate  his  English  written  sentences  into  Spanish, 
comparing  and  correcting  only  with  the  Reading  Lessons  after  the  whole 
Section  is  thus  translated  and  re-translated.  The  following  exercise, 
taken  from  sentences  in  the  First  Reading  Lesson,  will  indicate  the 
manner  in  which  he  should  form  his  English  translation. 

EXERCISE. — To  he  translated  into  Spanish. 

The  virtuous  man  (102)  loves  God  (670).  The  world  abounds  in 
snares,  difficulties,  and  dangers.  We  ought  (note  3,  Lesson  I.)  to  (326, 
f )  suffer  with  patience  the  inconveniences  of  this  life.  What  (125,  b)  is 
proper  in  one  is  improper  in  another.  Nobody  is  without  sin.  The 
idle  (102)  are  useless  to  society  (628).  Every  one  has  his  own  business 
{quehaceres).  A*  city  that  is  (335,  b)  placed  upon  a  mountain  can  (puede) 
not  be  hid  (116,  a  ;  173).  God  will  reward  (670)  the  good  (102)  and  will 
punish  (670)  the  wicked  (102).  Ambition  (628)  augments  the  many 
troubles  {trahajos) ;  diminishes  (165)  the  few  pleasures  which  are  found 
(173)  in  the  world.  The  meek  (102)  shall  inherit  the  earth.  Every  (132)  ' 
hour  is  a  step  towards  the  tomb.  The  good  (263,  a)  is  preferable  to  the 
beautiful  (263,  a). 


SECOND   SECTION. 

Remark. — The  Reading  Lessons  in  this  Section  contain  sentences 
somewhat  more  complicated  than  those  in  the  former  Section.  The 
verbs  are  printed  in  italics.  The  persons  of  verbs  used  in  this  Section 
will  be  found  in  the  Vocabulary.  Care  has  been  taken  to  select  such 
reading  matter  as  may  be  comparatively  easy  of  translation,  and  at  the 
same  time  useful  in  illustrating  many  idiomatical  expressions. 

13  See  628.— 14  See  315.— 15  See  314.— is  Se,  '' be-tJwu.''  See  Remark, 
page  44.— 17  En  dav,  "  in-giving.''  See  298,  a,  and  327.— is  Al  que,  "to 
him  who.''     See  129,  b,  and  291,  a.— 19  See  326,/.— 20  See  352,  a. 


308                               SPAJCSH   READING   LESSONS. 
VIII. GAINING   AND    LOSING. 

Un  escritor  frances^  decia^  que  solamente  se  habia  vistas 
arruinado  dos  veces'^  en  su  vida ;  la  primera  fue  cuando 
perdio  un  pleito,  y  la  segunda  cuando  gano  otro. 

IX. A    GOOD    REASON    FOR    WRITING    A    LONG   LETTER. 

Escrihio  un  amigo^  a  otro  una  carta  muj^estensa,  y  al 
concluir^  le^  decia  :  "  No  estranes^  que  te  escriba^  una  carta 
tan  larga,  porque  no  he  tenido^  tiempo  para  hacerlsi'  mas 
corta." 

X. REWARDING   A    DULL    WRITER. 

Una  rica  sefiora  que  ha  muerto^  recientemente  en  Lon- 
dres,  lego  en  su  testamento  miP  libras  esterlines  a  un 
autor  ingles,^  para  recompensar  las  horas  de  sueno  que  en 
momentos  de  desvelo  la*  habian  proforcionado^  sus  obras. 

XI. EARLY   RISING. 

Un  yanki  ha  hecho^  el  calculo  de  lo  que  vale^  levantarse^ 
temprano.  "  En  vez*  de  dormir^  hasta  las  oclio,"^  dice  el 
calculista,  levdniese^  un  hombre  a  las  seis^  de  la  manana,  y 
si  durante  cuarenta  anos  hace^  esto  mismo,^  ganard  viente 
mil  horas,  lo  cuaP°  sera  equivalente  a  un  aumento  de  diez 
anos  de  vida,  que  podria  emplear  un  hombre"  en  estudios 
muy  importantes. 

VIII.— 1  See  264.-2  See  302.-3  Se  hahm  visto,  "Ac  had  seen  himself 
See  284  and  305. — ■*  Dos  veces,  ^^two  times^^^  i.  e.,  ^^  twiceJ^  Veces  is  the 
plural  of  xez.     See  95,  a, 

IX.— 1  See  B7o.—^  Al  concluir,  ''on  closing;''  see  298,  b.—^Le,  ''to- 
him.''  See  114,  b.—^  See  309  a.—^  See  311.-6  See  leO.—THacerla,  ''to 
make  it."     La  refers  to  carta.     See  116. 

X.— 1  Ha  muerto,  "has  died^''  or  in  better  English,  "died."—^  See 
248.-3  See  264.-4  /,«,  "/jer."     See  114,  a.— 5  See  305.— «  See  575. 

XI.— 1  Ha  hecho,  "has  made."-^  Vale,  "it  avails."—^  See  665.—"  Kn 
vez,  "instead." — ^  See  327. — 6  See  280. — 1  Lexantese  un  /lombre,  "let  a 
man  rise."  See  665,  and  309,/.— «  Hace,  "  does."—^  Esto  mismo,  "  this 
same,"  "the  same."—^^  See  124,  and  117.— ^^  See  575. 


SPANISH   READING   LESSONS.  309 

XII. A    SINGULAR    EDICT. 

El  einperador  de  todas  las  Rusias  ha  mavdado  puhlicai 
recientemente  un  edicto  en  el  cuaP  se  exige^  de  todos  los 
funcionarios  publicos^  que  posean^  una  fortuna,  manijiestan^ 
esplicitamente  de  que  manera®  la^  han  ohteiiido.  Si  esto^  se 
hiciera^  en  todas  partes — \  Dios  nos  asista  !^^ 

XIII. PERIODICALS    IN    THE    UNITED    STATES. 

En  ningun^  pais  del  mundo  se  publican^  tantos  periodicos 
ni  en  tantos  idiomas  distintos^  como  en  los  Estados  Uni- 
dos.  Esto  es  el  efecto  de  la  ilimitada  libertad  que  goza  la 
imprenta.^  En  esta  Bepublica  se  han  publicado^  periodicos 
nacionales,^  ingleses,^  franceses,^  espanoles,^  italianos,^  ale- 
manes  f  y  en  la  actualidad  se  ha  establecida^  un  noruego.* 

XIY. SAGACITY    OF   A   DOG. 

El  perro  de  un  mercader  en  las  inmediaciones  de  Vera 
Cruz,  recibio  dias  pasados^  una  herida  en  una  oreja.  Su 
dueno  le  Uevo  inmediatamente  a  casa^  de  un  quimico  que 
le  aylico  un  remedio,  venddndoW  en  seguida.^  Tres  dias^ 
se  repiiio^  la  misma  operacion,  pero  el  cuarto,  viendo  el 
perro^  que  su  amo  tardaba  algo  mas  de  lo  regular^  en  ir^  a 
Uevarlej  se  fue  solo  a  la  botica,  salto  sobre  el  mostrador  y 
ulli  estuvo  hasta  que  se  le  hizo^  la  operacion  necesaria,  y 
sin  aguardar^  mas  6}^  que  su  amo  le  acompanase,^^  continuo 


XII.— 1  See  124.— 2  See  173.— s  See  264.-4  See  311,  6.-5  See  314, 
a. — 6  Dq  que  rnanera,  ^^in  what  manner.^' — 7  La,  "it,"  referring  to  for- 
tuna.—s  See  128,  a.-9  See  173  and  316.— lo  See  309,/ 

XIII.— 1  See  101.— 2  See  173.— 3  See  264.-4  See  575. 

XIV. — 1  Dias pasadoSf  "in  days  past,"  i.  e.,  "some  days  ago." — 2  See 
240. — ^  La  refers  io  oreja.  See  116. — ^  En  seguida,  "in  the  sequel;" 
**  afterward." — 5  Tres  dias  "for  three  days."  The  preposition  is  not 
generally  used  in  such  cases,  in  Spanish. — ^  See  173. — ^  in  translating, 
the  construction  would  be  el  perro  viendo. — 8  jligo  mas  de  lo  regular^ 
"somewhat  more  (longer)  than  what  is  proper."  See  263,  a,  and  270 
9  See  227.-10  See  554.— n  See  314. 


310  SPANISH   READING   LESSONS. 

repitiendo  sus  visitas  al  boticario  liasta  que^^  qioedo  complex 
tamente  curado. 

XY. THALES'    SAGE    ANSWERS. 

Thales  Milesio^  uno  de  los  siete  sabios^  de  Grecia,  pre- 
guntado^  cual  era  la  cosa  mas  antigua,^  respondio  que  era^ 
Dios,  porque  Dios  ha  siempre  sido  f — cual  era  la  mas  bella,^ 
respondio  que  el  mundo,^  porque  era  la  obra  de  Dios  ; — cual 
la  mas  grande,  respondio^  que  el  espacio,^  que  coraprende 
todo  f — cual  la  mejor  ;^°  la  virtud,  dijo  el,  porque  sin  ella 
nada  se  fuede  decir^^  ni  hacer  de  bueno  f^ — cual  la  mas 
facil ;  la^^  de  dar^^  consejos  a  otro ; — cual  la  mas  dificil, 
la^^  de  conocerse^^  a  si  mismo/®  dijo  el. 

XYI. SIMPLICITY    OF    A    CHILI). 

"  Mama,  ^ame^  un  cuarto,"  dijo  una  nifia  que  enti'o  pre- 
cipidamente  en  la  sala  de  una  casa  donde  nos  halldbamos'^ 
dias  pasados.^ — ••  i  Para  que  ?"  pregunto  la  madre.^ — ''  Para 
^arselo^  a  un  nino  que  estd  bailando^  alii  en  la  calle  mien- 
tras  su  padre  toca'^  la  musica  en  un  cajon." — "^  Como  sahes 
que  es  su  padre  el  que  toca''  ?  " — "  Lo  se^  porque  los  dos  se 
varecev?  mucho.^^      Yen  mama,  ven  al  balcon  y  lo  verdsP 

12  See  553. 

XV. — ^  Milcsio,  ^Hhe  Milesian^  See  237.— ^  Sdbios,  ^^wise  men.^' 
''sages."  See  102.— 3  Preguntado,  ''being  asked.''  See  3U0,  c— 4  See 
268. — 5  Era^  "it  was." — ^  ffa  sido,  "has  been"  "has  existed." — ^  Bella 
agrees  with  cosa  understood. — ^  ^jj-a  is  understood. — »  Todo,  "  every 
thing." — 10  See  265,  a. — ^^  Nada  se  puede  decir  ni  hacer  de  bueno, 
"  nothing  good  can  be  said  nor  done."  See  116,  a;  and  173. — ^2  See  134, 
b. — ^^  La.,  "that,"  referring  to  cosa.  See  616. — ^^  De  dar,  "  of  giving." 
See  327. — ^5  Dg  conocerse,  "  of  knovdng  one's  self."  See  327. — ^^  See 
285,  b,  and  286.  Literally,  '*  of  knowing  one's  self  to  himself;"  d  si  mis- 
mo  being  redundant  in  English. 

XVI.— I  Dame,  "give  me."  See  116.— 2  See  284,  a.—^  See  XIV., 
note  1. — 4  Sec  575. — ^  Ddrselo,  "to  give  him  it."  See  116,  and  284,/. 
Se  would  be  considered  redundant  in  English,  as  the  object  {a  un  nino) 
follows  the  verb.  See  285,  c— 6  See  335,  c— 7  See  512.— 8  Lo  se,  "  J 
know  it."     See  192.— »  See  464,  and  284.— lo  gee  351. 


SPANISH   READING   LESSONS.  311 

/  Salimos  a  ver  al"  hombre  con  su  hijo,  y  era  nada  menos 
que  un  Italiano  con  su  organo  y  su  mono  ! 

XVII. THE    KINGS    OF    FORMER    TIMES. 

Todo^  muda  con  el  tiempo  :^  unas  cosas  para  bien  y  otras 
para  mal.  Los  Keyes  eran  en  siglos  pasados^  muy  distin- 
tos  de  lo  que  son  ahora.  En  Aragon,  cuando  regia  el 
fuero  de  Sobrarve,  al  tiempo  de  irivestirse'^  un  monarca  con 
la  autoridad  real,^  y  jurado  la  observancia  de  la  constitu- 
cion  a^  nombre  del  pueblo,  se  le  decia^ :  "  Nos/  que  somos 
mas  y  vahmos  mas  que  vos,^  os  hacemos  Hey,  si  observarede^ 
nuestras  leyes,  y  si  non,  non."  Ahora  es  muy  distinto,  y 
sin  ser^^  rey,  ni^^  principe,  un  simple  gobernador  de  Colo- 
nias,  grita  al  pueblo  desde  su  coche :  "  Canalla  vil,^  quitd- 
os'2  el  sombrero  cuando  yo  paso^  que^^  soy  mejor  que  todos 
vosotros  y  deheis  obedecerme  y  besar  al  polvo  que  pisan  mis 
plantas."^^ 

XVIII. AN    irishman's    CONJECTURE. 

Dias  pasados^  examinaba  un  comerciante^  los  efectos  que 
acaba  de^  recibir,  y  hallo  todo''  en  orden  y  corriente  escepto 
un  martillo  qaefaltaba  en  un  casco  que  estaba  bien  cerrado. 
Un  criado  irlandes^  que  no  sabia  a  que  atribuir  la  falta, 
dijo  7'ascdndose  la  cabeza^ :  "  Vamos^  ya  se  yo  lo  que  pnede 
serJ''    I  Que  es  V  replied  el  comerciante — "  Que  en  la  aduana 


11  See  325. 

XVII.— 1  See  XV.,  note  9.-2  See  628.-3  See  264.  Also,  XIV., 
note  1. — 4  De  investirseun  monarca,  *' of  a  monarch'' s  being  invested.^^ 
See  327  and  173. — 5  /i^  nombre  de,  ^Hn  the  name  of.^^ — ^  Sele  dccia,  ^^  it 
was  said  to  him."  See  173,  and  284,  d.—^  See  110,  a.— 8  See  110,  b.— 
•  Ohservaredes,  an  obsolete  form,  for  observareis.  See  224. — ^^  See 
327.-11  See  401,  d.— 12  Quitdos  el  sombrero,  ^'take-qf  to-vou  the  h-at." 
i.  e.,  "  take-qf  your  hats."  See  116,  b,  and  122,  a.— 13  See  552,  6.— i-i  See 
575. 

XVIII.— 1  See  XIV.,  note  1.— 2  See  575.-3  Acaba  de  recibir,  "  had 
fust  received:'  See  337.-4  Todo,  "  &o&ry  thing."--^  See  264.— s  See 
122,  (i.— 7£?5,  «is-£^.» 


312  SPANISH    READING   LESSONS. 

no^  tendrian  martillo  para^  abrir  el  casco  y  examinarlo,  y 
sacaron  uno  para  desdavar  la  tapa." 

XIX. THE    FORCE    OF    SHAME. 

Una  joven  irlandesa  escribio  a  su  amante  pidiendole  una 
cantidad  de  dinero,  y  al  pie  de  la  carta  anadio  la  siguiente 
posdata :  "  Me  dd^  tanta  vergiienza  de  pedirte^  este  favor, 
que  mande^  al  momento^  en  busca  del  criado  que  llevo  la 
carta  al  correOj  pero  mi  hermanito^  no  pudo  alcanzarlo^ 
para  evitar  que  la  echara'  en  la  posta." 

XX. AN   ACCOMMODATING   WIFE. 

Los  papeles  de  Baltimore  han  hccho  graciosos  comenta- 
rios  sobre  una  escena  que  llamo  la  atencion  general^  en 
aquella  ciudad  a  principios  del  presente  mes.  Un  bolan- 
des  compro  un  barril  de  barina.  y  su  muger  lo^  llevo  a  cues- 
tas^  desde  el  almacen  basta  su  casa,  mientras  que*  el  mari(fo 
iha  "  muy  fresco  "  detras  de  eWa,  fumando  su  pipa. 

XXI. AN    INVENTION    OF    QUESTIONABLE    UTILITY. 

Un  yanki  acaba  de  inveniar^  un  jabon  para  afeitar^  con 
el  uso  del  cual  es  inneces§.ria  la  navaja,^  pues  asegura  que 
con  aplicarlo^  a  las  barbas  caen  estas^  al  momento.^  La 
unica  dificultad  que  encuentra  un  amigo^  del  inventor  en 
adopt %r^  para  su  uso  el  taF  jabon  es^  que  juntamente  con 
las  barbas  arranca?  el  pellejo. 

8  gee  626.-9  See  326,  c. 

XIX. — ^  Me  dd^  ^^  it  gives  me." — ^  Depedirte,  "to  ask  thee."  See 
326,  b. — ^  MandSy  "  I  gave  orders" — ^  Al  momento^  "immediately" — 
5  See  256.-6  Lo;  see  287,  b,  and  116.— 7  See  316. 

XX.— 1  See  264.-2  See  287,  b,  and  113.-3^'  cuestas,  "on  her  back" 
or  "shoulders  " — *  See  553. 

XXI.— 1  See  337. — 2  JJn  jabon  para  afeitar^  "asoap  for  shaving"  i.  e., 
"  shaving-soap."  See  327.-3  See  575.-4  See  327,  and  287,  b.—^  See 
XIX.,  note  4.—^  See  327. — '^  El  tal  jabon,  "  the  said  soap."—^  Arranca^ 
"it  tears  off." 


SPANISH   READING   LESSONS.  313 

liemark.— The  Reading  Lessons  in  this  Section  should  now  be  care- 
fully translated  into  English,  as  directed  at  the  close  of  the  former  Sec- 
tion ;  and  then  afterward  re-translated  into  Spanish.  By  this  method, 
the  words  and  their  meaning,  as  well  as  the  phrases,  idioms,  and  forms 
of  construction  used  in  Spanish,  will  become  impressed  on  the  memory 
of  the  learnef.  He  should  not  a^^empt  to  translate  any  of  the  succeed- 
ing Reading  Lessons  till  he  can  i  jadily  translate  the  preceding  Lessona 
from  Spanish  into  English,  and  then  from  English  into  Spanish. 


THIRD  SECTION. 

Remark. — If  the  learner  has  carefully  read  and  re-read  the  preceding 
Lessons,  and  examined  the  rules  referred  to  in  the  notes,  he  will  have 
already  learned  so  well  many  of  these  same  rules,  that  farther  reference 
to  them  will  seldom  be  necessary  in  his  future  reading.  Thus,  for  in- 
stance, he  must  now  know  that  in  Spanish  an  adjective  more  frequently 
is  placed  after,  than  before,  the  noun  which  it  qualifies ; — that  pronouns 
of  the  first-objective  case  are  placed  after,  and  joined  to,  infinitives,  im- 
peratives (when  not  negative)  and  gerunds ;  that  nouns  used  in  a  general 
or  absolute  sense  take  the  definite  article  before  them; — that  active 
verbs  govern  the  noun  which  is  the  object  of  the  action,  with  the  prepo- 
sition d,  if  this  noun  expresses  a  rational  being,  or  personified  object,  etc. 

As  the  learner  is  expected,  by  the  time  he  shall  have  proceeded  thus 
far,  to  be  able  to  conjugate  the  regular,  and  many  of  the  irregular  verbs 
without  diflaculty,  only  the  present  infinitive  of  such  verbs  as  may  be 
used  hereafter  will  be  given  in  the  Vocabulary  at  the  end  of  the  work. 
Reference  will  be  made  in  the  notes  to  such  irregularities  of  verbs  as 
might  occasion  any  diflBculty  on  the  part  of  the  pupil. 

All  the  Lessons  of  this  Section  are  taken  from  "  Deb£res  de  los 
HoMBREs,"  a  work  originally  written  in  Italian,  by  Silvio  P^Uico,  and 
translated  into  Spanish  by  Manuel  Galo  de  Cu^ndias. 

XXII. FILIAL   AFFfeCTION. 

Nuestros  primeros  y  raas^  naturales  amigos  son  nuestros 
padres^ ;  ellos^  son  los  seres'*  a  quien  mas^  debemos^  ;  para 

XXII. — 1  Mas  here  means  "  most."  The  superlative  is  formed  with- 
out the  definite  article,  when  a  possessive  pronoun  precedes  77ias ;  thus, 
es  mi  mejor  amigo,  "  he  is  my  best  friend  ;"  es  nuesiro  mas  cruel  enemi- 
g^o,'*  he  is  our  most  cruel  enemy." — 3  Padres  in  the  plural  means  "/?a- 
rents." — 3  See  283,  a,  latter  clause. — 4  Seres  is  the  plural  of  the  noun 
ser. — 5  Mas,  "most."'^  Debemos,  ^^  we  owe."  '  " 

27 


314  SPANISH   READING    LESSONS. 

con''  ellos  estamos  obligados^  d(jP  modo  mas*®  sagrado, 
a^*  gratitud,  respeto,  amor,  e  indulgencia,  y  a  las  mas 
amorosas  demostraciones  de  estos  sentimentos. 

Nuestra  grande^^  intimidad  con  las  personas  que  nos 
tocan  de  mas  cerca/^  pitede  acostumbrarnos  facilmente  a 
tratarl&a  con  indiferencia  y  sin  procurar^^  hacer  su  existen- 
cia  agradable :  gudrdate^^  de^^  adquirir^^  tamaSo  defecto. 
Si  quieres  en7ioblecertej  con  precision^''  has  de^^  ornar  tus 
acciones  y  afectos  con  aquella  elegancia  y  exactitud  de  que 
son  susceptibles.  , 

i  Triste  de  aqueP^  que  censura  la  conducta  de  sus  pa- 
dres'^ !  I  Quien  compadecerd  a^°  un  hombre  que  no  es  cari- 
tsLtiYOy  J  falia  de  indulgencia  para  con'^  su  padre  y  madre? 
Sea^^  siempre  tu  conducta  para  con''  ellos  un  modelo  de 
amenidad,  un  ejemplo  de  d^lzura ;  sirva^^  tu  vista  para 
consolarles  y  reanimar  su  alegria.  No  lo  dudes;  cada 
acto  de  indulgencia  6  bondad  de  tu  parte.^^  cada  palabra 
de  amor  salida  de^^  tu  boca,  es  una  flor  que  siembras^^  en 
su  camino  hacia  la  tumba,  una  bendicion  para  ti,  pues  te 
bendecirdn,  y  siempre  sanciona  Dios  las  bendiciones  que 
Tin  padre  6  una  madre  derraman  sobre  un  hijo  recon- 
ocido. 


7  See  402.— 8  See  322,  a.— 9  Del  modo,  "  in  a  manner:'— ^^  See  268.— 
^1  The  meaning  of  this  passage  is,  "  wUh  regard  to  them  we  are  obligated 
.  in  a  manner  most  sacred,  to  gratitude"  etc.,  that  is,  " under  obligations 
to  sfww  gratitude,' '  etc. — ^2  See  101,  a. — ^3  Tocar  de  cerca,  means  "  to 
concern  nearly,"  "  to  be  nearly  related,"  and  this  clause  is  to  be  rendered 
^^with  the  persons  who  are  most' nearly  related  to-u^"  {nos). — 14  See  327. — 
15  When  any  person  of  the  imperative  mood  is  spelled  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  some  person  of  a  tense  in  another  mood,  care  must  be  taken  to 
judge  from  the  context  which  mood  is  meant.  Gudrda  may  be  found 
in  the  2d  pers.  of  the  imperative,  or  in  the  3d  pers.  of  the  present  indica- 
tive. Here  it  is  in  the  imperative.  Gudrdate,  "  keep  thyself."  See 
284,  a. — ^^  De,  ^^from." — ^"^  Con  precision,  "with  necessity,"  "necessa- 
rUy»— IB  See  339.— 19  See  40^.— 20  See  670.— 21  Sea  siempre  tu  conducta, 
"  let  thy  conduct  always  be.!'  See  309,./*. — ^2  Sirva  tu  vista,  "  let  thy  pres* 
ence  serve."  See  309,/.— 23  Oe  tu  parte,  "  on  thy  part '  —24  Siemhraa 
Irregular  from  e&mbmr. 


SPANISH  READING   LLlSONS.  315 

XXIII. RESPECT   FOR    OLD   AGE. AN    ANECDOTE. 

Una  de  las  lejes  de  la  antigua  Sparta  exigia,  que  los 
jovenes  cediesen^  el  paso  a  los  ancianos,  se  levantasen^  cuan- 
do  una  persona  de  edad  se  acercaba^^  y  que  callasen^  cuando 
hahlaba  un  major. ^  Lo  que  la  ley  mandaba  en  Sparta, 
mdndeW  entre  nosotros  la  decencia. 

Tal  es  la  bellaza  moraP  de  este  obsequio,  que  aun  los 
que  no  le  practican^  sienten'^  dentro  de  si  gran^  respeto  por 
los  que  acosiumbran  6.  pradicarle,  y  se  kalian  como  forzados 
a  aplaudirlos. 

Un  Ateniense,  cubierto  de®  canas  y  cargado  de®  anos, 
buscaba  puesto^"  en  los  juegos  olimpicos^ ;  pero  las  gradas 
del  2in^te2itTO  estaban  llenas  y  no  le^^  hallaba.  Unos  joven- 
zuelos^^  de  Atenas  le  hicieron  senas  de  acercar^e^^  y,  el 
anciano  cediendo  a  su  invitacion,  llego  con  gran^  dificultad 
hasta  ellos ;  mas^^  estos,  en  vez  de^*  acogerlQ  cual  debie- 
ran^^^  se  hmlarom}^  de^''  el.  Empujado  de  una  parte  a 
otra,  llego  casualmente  aP^  sitio  ocupado  por  los  Spartanos ; 
y  estos,  fieles  a  las  sagradas  costumbres  de  su  patria,  se 
levantan^^  respetuosamente  y  le  colocan  entre  si.  Un  vivo 
aplauso  se  ot/o^^  en  todo  el  anfiteatro  ;  y  los  mismos^° 
Atenienses  que  poco  antes^^  habian  escarnecido'^^  la  vejez,^^ 
se  hallaron  impelidos  a  estimar  a^*  sus  generosos^^  emulos. 
El  anciano  esclamo  :  '-'"  Los  Atenienses  conocen  las^^  buenas 
acciones  ;  los  Spartanos  las  practican.''^ 


XXIII.— 1  See  314.— 2  See  284,  e,  and  314.— 3  See  284,  e.—*  See 
575. — ^  Mandelo,  etc.,  ^^  let  propriety  demand  it  among  iis.''  See  309,yi 
Lo  (it)  would  be  redundant  in  English. — ^  See  264. — ^  Sienten,  irregular 
from  sentir.—^  See  101,  a.— 9  De,  "  wUh."  See  399.— lo  Puesto,  "a 
place,''  "a  seat:'—^^Le,  ''it,''  referring  to  puesto.- ^2  See  256,  last 
clause. — 13  Mas  here  is  a  conjunction,  meaning  "  but."  See  359. — 
^^  En  vez  de,  ''instead  of." — '^^  Cual  debieran,  "as  they  ought."  See 
104,  6,  and  316.— is  See  288,  c— i?  See  330.-18  Al,  "  at  the."  See  378.— 
19  See  173.— 20  See  286,  a.— 21  Poco  dntes,  "a  little  whUe  before."— ^^  See 
305.--23  See  628.— 2^  See  670.— 25  See  264,  a. 


316  SPANISH    READING   LESSONS. 


XXIV. ^FRIENDSHIP. 

i  Bien^  aventurado  el  hombre  feliz^  que  halla^  un  digno 
aiiiigo  !  Abandonado  a  sus  propias  fuerzas,  su  virtud  Jla- 
queaha^  pero  el  ejemplo  y  la  aprobacion  del  amigo  \efortifl- 
can ;  solo,  desanimado  e^  inclinado  a  miP  defectos,  ignoraba^ 
su  fuerza  desconociendo  su  merito ;  pero  el  aprecio  del  amigo 
le  realza  a  sus  propios  ojos.  MiP  veces,  avergonzado  se- 
cretamente  de  no  poseer  el  merito  que  la  indulgencia  del 
amigo  le  supone,  lucha,  se  vence  y  llega  sJ  conseguirle ;  el 
•  amigo  conoce  sus  buenas  prendas,  y  su  corazon  se  halla 
satisfecho ;  y  he  aqui,^  que,  gracias^  a  la  amistad,  avanza 
a  pasos^°  de  gigante  hacia  la  perfeccion^^  un  hombre ^^ 
que,  sin  ella,  estaba  y  hubiera  estado^^  siempre  lejos  de^"* 
ser^^  virtuoso. 

XXV. READING    AND    STUDY. 

Si  puedes^  cuUivar  tu  ingenio,  y  no  lo  haces^faltas  a^  un 
deber  sagrado.^  La  instruccion'*  te.  hard  mas  capaz,  mas 
digno  de  honrar^ ^  a^  Dios  y  de  servir^  a®  tu  patria,  mas 
apto  a  ser  util  a  tus  amigos  y  parientes.  AplicaiQ  a  apren- 
der  cuanto''  estudies^  lo  mas^  profundamente  que  te^°  sea 
posible  y  no  pierdas^^  de  vista  que  los  estudios  superficiales 
no  producen  mas  que^^  hombres  de  poco  merito,  que,  con- 

XXIV.— 1  See  351,  6.-2  See  264.-3  See  325,  a.— 4  See  226,  a.— 5  See 
248. — ^  Jgnoraba,  *^ he-was-ignorant  of." — 7  See  341. — ^  He  aqut,  "be 
hold."  See  406,  a. — 9  Grdcias  d  la  amistad^  ^^  thanks  to  friendship. "— 
^^  A  pasos,  ''with  the  steps  "  or,  "a^  the  speed"  of  a  giant.  See  331. — 
11  See  628. — 12  Hombre  is  nominative  to  avanza.  See  575. — ^3  See  318, 
and  318,  a.—^^  Lejos  de,  "far  from."— ^5  See  327. 

XXV.— 1  Puedes,  irregular  from  poder.  See  189. — 2  Paltar  d,  means 
"to  fail  in  "—3  See  264.-4  See  628.-5  See  327.-6  See  325.-7  Cuanto, 
"as  much  as"  "wJiatever." — ^  See  321,  a. — ^ Lo  maSj  "  the  most."  Lo 
mas  is  generally  used  as  the  superlative  before  adverbs. — ^^  Te,  etc.,  "to- 
ihee  may-be  possible." — ^^  No  pierdas  de  vista,  "  do  not  lose  sight."  See 
309  a.  Pierdas  is  from  the  irregular  verb  perder. — 12  jv/oa  qiKiy  ^vQ' 
ceded  by  7w,  means  "710  Twore  ^fean,"  "oTiZv.'* 


SPANISH   READING   LESSONS.  317 

vennidos^^  interiorinente  de  su  nulidad,  se  reunen  con  otroa 
tan^^  despreciables  como  ellos,  para  aturdir  aP^  mundo 
griiando  que  son  grandes  y  que  los  verdaderamente  sabios 
son  pequenos ;  de  aqui^®  nacen  las  perpetuas  guerras  del 
pedante  contra  el  hombre  instruido,  y  del  charlatan  sofista 
contra  el  verdadero  filosofo. 

Si  quieres^'^  .que  la  lectura  te  deje^^  impresiones  durade- 
ras,  dice^^  Seneca,  limitate^^  a  pocos  autores  que,  llenos  de 
sano  juicio,  nutran  tu  inteligencia :  eslar  en  todas  partes  es 
como^^  no  estar  en  ninguna,^^  y  el  hombre  que  fasa  su 
vida  viajando  conocerd  muchcs  posaderos,  pero  pocos  ami- 
gos.  Tal  es  el  caso  de^^  los  que  ken  precipitadamente : 
leen  muchos  libros,  pero  no  comprenden  ninguno.^^ 

Cualquiera  que^^  sea  la  ciencia  6  arte  a  que  te  aficiones 
gudrdate  de^^  un  vicio  demasiado^^  comun,  esto  es,  de  ser^ 
tan^''  esclusivo  que  desprecies  las^^  que  no  conoces.  Las 
preocupaciones  de  ciertos  poetas  contra  la  prosa,*  las^^  de 
los  prosadores  contra  la  poesia,^  las"*  del  naturalista  contra 
el  metafisico,  las^^  del  matemaiico  contra  el  filosofo,  no  son 
mas  que^^  puerilidades. 

XXYI. SELECTING   A    PROFESSION. 

Todos  los  estados,  desde  eP  ma.i  Gublime  hasta  eP  del 
mas  humilde  artesano,  tienen  en  si^  cierta^  dulzura  y  digni- 
dad  ;  y  basta  querer  ejercerlos  con  integrids^d  y  pradicar  las 
virtudes  que  cada  uno  de  ellos  exige  para  se?  foliz. 

Cuando  hayas  escogido^  prudamente  UR8^  carrera,  no  te 


13  See  300,  c- 14  See  104.— is  See  325.— is  De  aqm,  *'  .^>^.»r^."— 17  Qui- 
eres,  irregular  from  querer. — i^  Te  deje,  ^^  may-have  *c-fh0-^^^ — ^^  Dice, 
irregular  from  decir. — 20  gee  XXII.,  note  15. — 2i  Es  conoip^  ef^^r,  etc., 
"  Z5  as  {the  same  as)  not  to  be  in  any,'' — 22  gee  622. — 23  jiig  ^'^Wi." — 
2^  See  131,  and  311,  c— 25  De,  '\from.''—^^  Demasiado  belbrp  •*«  adjec- 
tive means  ^^  too.'' — 27  See  104,  b. — 28  j^^g^  ^^  those,"  refeningr  •*<*  «■  '^cias 
6  artes.~-^9  See  616. 

XXVI.— 1  See  616.— 2  En  st,  ''in  themselves." ^^  Se^  264,  ^^-  *-f 
317. 

27* 


818  SPANISH   HEADING   LESSONS. 

deje^  dominar^  por  un  vano  arrepentimiento  ni  tengas^  la 
d^bilidad  de^  cambiarla.  Todos  los  caminos  de  la  vida 
titnen  espinas:  cuando  hayas  puesto^  eP°  pie  en  uno^^ 
vrcsiguele^^  con  valor;  eP^  mudar  es  flaqueza.  Siempre  es 
bueno  persistir  escepto  en  el  crimen.  ^^  Solo  el  que  sigue^^ 
su  carrera  con  constancia  puede  esperar^^  llegar^^  algun^'' 
dia  a  senalarse  entre  los  demas^^  hombres. 

XXVII. OUR   AMBITION    SHOULD    BE    RESTRAINED. 

La  sociedad^  seria^  menos  viciosa  si  cada  cual  enfrenase^ 
su  desarreglada  ambicion  y  sus  inquietudes.  Empero  no 
por  eso^  debemos  ser  perezosos  ni  apaticos,  no  :  la  ambicion^ 
\>uede  sernos^  util;  pero  la  unica®  que  le^  es  permitido  al 
hombre''  sensato,^  es  la  que  le  hace  aspirar  a  cosas  nobles, 
y  esta  no  es  interesada  ni  envidiosa,  y  se  contenia  con  lo^ 
necesario.  Consuelate^^  con  pensar,^^  que,  si  no  llegas  a 
aquel  alto  grado  que  ci'eias  merecer,^^  aun  en  el  que^^  te 
hallas,  eres  el  mismo^^  hombre  y  tienes  el  mismo^^  merito. 
Lo^  esencial  no  es  que  nuestro  merito  sea  recompensado  ;  lo 
mas  esencial  ^^  es  tener  merito. 

XXYIII. REPENTING  OF  AND  ACKNOWLEDGING  OUR  FAULTS. 

El  hombre  que  dice  ;    "  mi  educacion  moraP   ya   esta 

5  No  te  dejes,  "  do  not  suffer  thyself^  See  309,  a.— «  See  327,  d.  "  Suf- 
fer not  thyself  to  be  mastered.^' — 7  Ni  tengas^  "  nor  do-thou  have."  See 
309,  a.  TengaSj  irregular  from  tener. — ^  De^  "  ^o." — ^  Puesto,  irregular 
participle,  from  poner.    See  317. — ^^  See  122. — ^^  Uno  refers  to  camino. — 

12  Prosigue,  irregular  from  pi-oseguir.  See  116. — ^^  See  251,  and  298,  b. — 
14  See  628.— 15  Sigue,  irreg.  from  seguir.^^^  See  326,/.— i?  See  101.— 

13  Los  demas,  "  the  rest  of." 

XXVII.— 1  See  628.-2  See  315.— 3  See  314.-4  No  por  eso,  ''not  on 
this  account J^ — 5  Semos,  "  be  to-us." — ^  Lm  Unica  ;  here  ambicion  is  un- 
derstood.— 7  Le^  « to-him."  Le  would  be  here  redundant  in  English. 
See  285,  b;  285,  c— «  See  264.-9  See  263,  a.— lo  Consuelate,  ''console 
thyself"  See  XXII.,  note  15.  Consuele,  irregular  from  consolar. — n  See 
327.-12  See  327,  c— 13  Aun  en  el  que,  "  yet  in  that  in  vhich."—^'^  S'^e 
286,  a. — 15  Lo  mas  esencial,  "  that  which  is  most  esseniial." 

XXVIII.-  1  Set  264. 


SPANISH   READING    LESSONS.  319 

hecha^^  mis  obras  la  han  corrohorado^^  se  engana.  Siempre 
debemos  aprender,  siempre  regularizar  nuestras  obras  ;  tan- 
to^  en  lo  presente  como^  para  lo  future,  nuestra  virtud 
debe  ser  activa  y  crear  cada  dia  nuevos  actos  meritorios.^ 
Continuamente  debemos  tener  presentes*  nuestros  faltas  y 
arreperitirnos^  de  ellas. 

Cuando  conozcas^  haber  covietido^  una  falta.  repdrahi  in- 
mediatemente  y  sin  rubor  ;  solamente  asi  se^  tranquilizard 
tu  coneiencia.®  Se^^  pronto  en  reparar^^  tus  culpas  si  no 
quieres^^  encadenar  tu  alma  almaP^  con  vinculos  mas  y  mas 
fuertes  cada  dia  y  acostumbrarla.  a  despreciarse.^*  i  Des- 
graciado  el  hombre  que  llega  €}^  despreciarse  interior- 
mente  !  j  Desgraciado  de^®  el  cuando  finge  que  se  estima, 
y  aP''  mismo  tiempo  siente^^  en  el  fondo  de  su  conciencia 
el  gus|Lno  roedor  que  le  acusa  ! 

XXIX. GRATITUDE. 

Si  nuestro  deber  es  ser  corteses^  y  beneficos^  con  todo  el 
mundo ;  si  nuestra  benevolencia  debo  ser  general ;  con 
cuanta  mas  razon  debemos  manifestar  estos  sentimientos  con 
los  que  nos^  han  dado^  pruebas  de  compasion.  amistad  6  in- 
dulge ncia. 

Mucbos  se  irritan  al  ver^  que  el  que  los  favorecio  se' 
enorgullece,  y  creen  que  el  envanecimiento  del  bienhechor 
basta  para  dispensaries  de^  ser  agradecidos.  Si  tu  bien- 
hechor se^  envancce ;  si  se  alaha  de^  haberte  hecho  favor  ; 

2  See  322,  a.  ffecha,  irregular  participle  from  hacer. — 3  See  368,  b. — 
4  Tcner  prescnfes,  "  to  have  present,"  "  to  have  before  us." — 5  See  284,  e. — 

6  Conozcas,  irreg.  from  conocer. — 7  See  327,  c-  ^  See  173. — ^  See  575. — 
^^  Se,  ''be-thou."  See  Remark  after  117.—"  See  298,  a.—^^Quieres, 
irreg.  from  querer. — ^3  gee  628. — i*  Despreciarse,  "  to  despise  itself,"  re- 
ferring to  alma.— ^5  See  341. — i^  See  4T)7. — ^^  jn  mismo  tiempo,  ^^  at  the 
same  time." — ^^  Siente,  irreg.  from  sentir. 

XXIX,— 1  Corteses  is  in  the  plural,  because  it  refers  to  nosotros  under- 
stood.—2  A^os,  ''to  us."— ^  Han  dado,  from  dar.  See  304.— ^  ilZ  ver^ 
''on  seeing,"  ''at  seeing."     See  298,  b.—5  See  284,  c— 6  De,  "from."-- 

7  De  haberte,  etc.,  "for  having  done  thee  a  favor." 


32Q  SPANISH   READING   LESSONS. 

si  no  tiene  contigo^  la  delicadeza  que  debiera^ ;  si  solo  fue 
generoso  per  interes,  no  por  eso^  te^°  es  permitido  a  ti^°  eP^ 
condenarle.  No,  amigo ;  al  contrario/^  cubre^^  sus  defec- 
tos  con  el  velo  de  tu  agradecimiento.  Acuerdaie^^  deP^ 
beneficio  que  de®  el  recibiste  j  considera  que  jamas  te^® 
sera  permitido^^  olvidarle,^^  aun  cuando  para  jja^arle/^  le 
hay  as  hecho^^  mil.^° 

XXX. PARDON    TO    ENEMIES. 

Si  te  sucediere^  tener^  enemigos  no  te^  iurbes.  Nadie* 
hay,^  por®  humilde,  sincero,  e''  inofensivo  que  sea,^  que  este 
libre  de  envidiosos.  Tal  es  la  envidiosa  naturaleza  de 
algunos  desgraciados,^  que  no  pueden  vivir  sin  escarnecer^^^ 
degradar  j  acusar^^  falsamente  a^^  cualquiera  que^^  goze^^ 
de^^  alguna  reputacion. 

Perdona^^  franca*®  y  sinceramente*®  a**  los  infelices^ 
que  te  hacen  6  quieren^^  hacerte  mal:  ^' perdonales^^  no 
siete  veces,"  dice^^  el  Salvador,  "  sino  setenta  veces  siete," 
esto  es,  sin  fin. 

Perdonando  una  ofensa,  se  puede  cambiar^^  en^^  amigo 
un  enemigo,  un  perverso  en^°  hombre  de  bien.^*  j  Cuan^^ 
bello,  cuan  consolador  es  tamano  triunfo  !  j  Cuan^^  supe- 
rior en  grandeza  a  todas  las  horribles  victorias  de  la  ven- 
ganza^^  !       Y  ^que  perderds    aun    cuando    tu    enemigo 

8  See  115,  c.—^  Debiera,  '' he-ought."  See  316.  See  XXVII.,  note 
4.— 10  See  285,  6.— ^  See  298,  fe.— 12  Al  contrdrio,  ''on  the  contrary."— 
13  Cubre,  "  cover-thou"  "  conceaUthou." — i^  Acuerdate,  "  remember." 
See  284,  e.— is  See  330.— 16  Te,  ''to-thee."—^'r  See  322.— is  Le,  ''it,"  re- 
ferring to  beneficio. — ^^Hecho,  irreg.  participle  from  hacer.  See  317. — 20  Sgg 
248.  This  clause  means,  "  thou  mayest  have  donehim  a  thousand  (favors)." 

XXX. — 1  Si  te  sucediere,  "  if  it  should  happen  to  thee."  See  319,  and 
220.-2  See  325,  a.— 3  See  309,  a,  and  284,  a.— 4  See  622.-5  See  218, 
and  218,  a.— 6  See  478.-7  See  226,  a.— »  See  311,  c— 9  See  102.— 10  See 
327.-11  See  325.— 12  See  131.-13  See  311,  c— 14  See  330.— is  See  XXII., 
note  15. — IS  See  354,  a. — 17  Quieren,  irreg.  from  querer. — i^  Dice,  irreg. 
from  c?ccir.— 19  See  116,  a.—^°  En,  "into."  See  3S7.—'^^  Hombre  de 
bien,  "  a  man  of  worth,"  "an  honest  man."—^^  See  478,  a.— 23  See  628. 


SPANISH   READING   LESSONS.  321 

fuese^^  irreconciliable  ?  ^  Fuedes  perder  algo  siendo  bueno  1 
^No  gozaste^^  la  mayor  alegria?  jNo  te^^  conservaste^^ 
magnanimOj  digno  de  ti  y^^  del  aprecio  de  los  hombres  d« 
bien?2i 


FOURTH.  SECTION. 

Remark. — None  of  the  words  contained  in  the  Lessons  of  this  Sec- 
tion will  have  the  marked  accent  placed  over  the  accented  vowel,  except 
such  as  are  usually  to  be  found  thus  marked  in  Spanish  reading-matter. 
If  the  learner  should  meet  with  any  difficulty  about  the  accentuation,  he 
can  turn  to  the  Vocabulary,  in  which  he  will  find  every  word  with  the 
proper  syllable  accented. 

XXXI. ^NO    HEREDITARY   TITLES   IN    THE   UNITED    STATES. 

En  los  Estados  Unidos  no  hay  distincion  de  gerarquias 
ni  noblezas  que  se  hacen  tan^  chocantes  en  los  paises  mo- 
narquicos.^  En  los  Estados  Unidos  es  noble  todo^  hom- 
bre^  honrado,  laborioso  y  recto  en  sus  principios,  aunque 
sea  el  hijo  de  un  zapatero  6  de  un  labrador.  Un  hombre 
de  honradez,  de  probidad,  y  de  sentimientos  nobles,^  puede 
aspirar  al  primer  puesto  de  la  nacion  lo  mismo^  que  a  la 
mano  de  la  primera  dama ;  mientras  que  un  principe  6  un 
rey  que  venga^  a  esta  Republica,  aunque  sea  el  primero 
deF  mundo,  con  tal  que^  no  se  porie  noblemente,  seria 
despreciado  por  todos  y  no  podria^  ohtener  ni  el  aprecio  de 
lo  que  se  llama^^  una  persona  de  la  median la  en  un  pais 
monarquico.^  En  fin/^  en  pocas  partes  del  mundo  se^^ 
a/predan  ta'n}  justamente  las  buenas  cualidades  de  un  hom 


24  Fuese,  irreg.  from  ser.  See  314,  and  321,  a.-— 25  See  303.— 26  Te, 
"  thyself:'     See  284,  a.— 27  Digno  de  fi,  "  worthy  of  thyself" 

XXXI.— 1  See  104,  6.-2  See  264.-3  See  I.,  note  22.-4  Hombre  is 
nominative  to  es.—5  See  335,  and  335,  d.—^  Venga,  irreg.  from  venir.—- 
7  Del  mundOf  "in  the  world"  See  387,  and  387,  c. — ^  Con  tal  que,  ^^  pro- 
vided thaty  See  321,  c. — ^  Podrm,  irreg.  from  poder.  Por  todos,  ^^by 
every  body." — ^^  De  lo  que  se  Uama,  "  with  which  is  regarded."  Persona 
is  nominative  to  Uamn.  See  575,  and  173.— ^i  Enfn,  "  injine ;"  ''fnal- 
lyy^\2  See  173. 


322  SPANISH   READING   LESSONS. 

bre  conio  en  los  Estados  Unidos  ;  pero  tambien  en  los  Es- 
tados  Unidos  es^^  donde  se  senalan^^  mas^^  pronto  en  pub- 
lico las  faltas^^  6  las  bajezas^®  de  una  persona,  sea^^  quien 
fuere^^  ;  desde  el  Presidente  hasta  el  ultimo  jornalero : 
todos  son  iguales  en  ese  caso. 

XXXII. INCREASE    OF  POPULATION    IN  THE   UNITED  STATES. 

Las  diferentes  estadisticas  de  la  poblacion  de  esta  Ee-. 
publica  desde  1800  hasta  1848,  fresenian  curiosos  datos, 
que  merecen  consignarse^  a  la  posteridad.  Parecerd^  incre- 
dible que  en  menos  de^  cincuenta  anos  se^  hay  a  aumentado^ 
la  poblacion^  casi  cinco^  tantos  mas  de^  lo  o^o-era  al  empe- 
zar'  el  presente  siglo.  En  1800  contaban  los  Estados 
Unidos^  con  solos  5,305,900.  Los  que  temen  no  llegar  a 
ver  el  fin  del  presente  siglo  se  han  ocupado  en  hacer^  calcu- 
los  de  proporcion  para  averiguar  cual  jpodrd^  ser  el  guaris- 
mo  que  senalard  en  1900  la  poblacion  de  los  Estados  Uni- 
dos, J  juzgando  que  haya^^  un  aumento  semejante,  en  pro- 
porcion, al  que  A^  habido^^  desde  1790  hasta  1840,  se  cree'^^ 
que  dentro  de  cincuenta  y  dos  anos  contard  esta  Eepubli- 
ca^  con  96,000,000  de  habitantes.  El  numero  es  bastante 
crecidoj  j  tal  vez^^  no  seria  dificil  llegase^^  a  completarse^ 
pero  nadie  sabe  como^^  estardn  arreglados  las  cosas^  del 
mundo  dentro  de  cincuenta  anos,  y  cuantas  revoluciones  y 
guerras  ocurriran  que  trastornen  todos  los  planes  y  dividaii 
la   Union   Americana  en   muchos  pedazos.     Por  nuestra 

13  Es^  "  it  is.^^  J^s  should  here  be  translated  immediately  eifter  pero. — 
14  See  173.— 15  Mas,  «  mosV'—'^s  See  575.— 17  Sea,  "  let  him  be."  See 
309,./*. — 18  Quien fuere,  "who  he  may  be."  Fuere,  irreg.  from  ser.  See 
319,  and  311,  o. 

XXXII.— 1  See  m.-^Parecerd,  'Ht  will-appear."— ^  ^ee  270.— 
*  See  317. — 5  gee  575. — ^  Casi  cinco  tantos  mas,  "  almost  Jive  times  more." 
—7  See  298,  6.-8  En  hacer,  "  in  making."  See  298,  a.— 9  Podrd,  irreg. 
from  poder. — i^  Haya,  "  there-may-be."  See  218,  a. — n  Ha  hahido, 
" there  has  been."  See  218,  and  167. — ^^  Se  cree,  "it  is  believed."  See  . 
173.— 13  ToZ  vez,  "perhaps."— ^^  See  314,  a.—^^Camo,  "hmo."  See 
478,  a. 


SPANISH   READING   LESSONS.  323 

parte  solamente  deseamos  que  pueda^^  conservarse^  largos 
anos  en  harmonia,  para  que  nuestros  nietos  logren  ver  tiem- 
pos  mas  venturosos  de^  los  que  alcanzaremos  nosotros.^ 

XXXIII. THE    MAGNETIC    TELEGRAPH. 

Hace^  mucho  tiempo^  que^  habiamos  oido^  la  especie  de 
que  la  aplicacion  de  la  electricidad  a  la  telegrafia  era  in- 
vencion  de  un  Espanol,  pero  no  habiamos  podido^  obtener 
los  datos  indispensables,  y  por  este  motivo  hemos  guardado^ 
silencio  hasta  ahora  que  se^  nos^  han  facilitadb  los  porme- 
nores^  de  inas^°  importancia.  Por  ellos  vemos  pues  que 
Don  Francisco  Sabra  ley 6^'^  a  fines ^^  del  siglo  pasado  en 
la  Academia  de  Ciencias  de  Barcelona  una  memoria  sobre 
la  aplicacion  de  la  electricidad  al  telegrafo,  y  presento  al 
mismo  tiempo^^  un  telegrafo  electrico  de  su  propia^^  in- 
vencion,  el  cuaP^  fue  ensayado^  con  gran  exito,  por  Carlos 
lY.  y  Fernando  VII.  en  presencia  del  Principe  de  la  Paz, 
quien  trato  de^®  ponerlo  en  planta,  y  se  anuncio  en  la  Ga- 
ceta  de  Madrid ^^  el  dia  29  de  Noviembre  de  1796.  Poco 
tiempo  despues  se  propuso^^  el  Infante  Don  Antonio  hacer 
otro  mas^**  completo  para  ponerle  en  operacion,  pero  las 
convulsiones  politicas^*  le  impidieron  atender^^  debidamente 
a  ello,  y  asi  quedo  el  proyecto.  hasta  que^^  treinta  anos 
despues  ha  venido^*  el  Senor  Morse^  a  tratar  el  asunto, 
hacer  algunas  mejoras,  y  poner  al  fin^^  en  pratica  el  invento 
ensayado  en  Espana  hace^  mas  de^^  cincuenta  ar5os. 

^5  Pueda,  '*it-mai/  ;^'  from  poder  ;  '^  it,''  referring  to  la  Union. 

XXXIII.—'  See  218,  c,  and  522.-2  See  522.-3  See  304,  6.-4  See 
305.  Oido,  from  oir. — 5  See  305. — ®  Hemos guardado,  ''we  have  kept." — 
7  See  115,  6,  and  173.-8  Nos,  ''to  its."  See  114.— »  See  575.— 'o  Mas, 
"most" — •!  Leyo,  from  leer.  See  165. — ^^  A'Jines,  "at  the  end." — ^3  Al 
mismo  tiempo,  "at  the  same  time." — ^^  Su  propia,  "his  own." — '5  See 
124,  c. — '6  Tratar  demeans  "to  aim  to"  "to  attempt." — '7  See  173. — 
1^  See  391,./". — '^  Propuso,  'meg.  from  proponer.  Se  propuso,  " propased 
lo-himself."—^o  j[fas,  "  more."- 2i  See  264.-22  See  326,/.— 23  See  553.-^ 
■2-1  See  304. — 25  At  Jin,  "at  length."—^  Hace  mas  de  cincuenta  anos,  "mx>re 
Ihanffty  years  ago."     See  436 ;  also  270. 


324  SPANISH  READING   LESSONS. 

XXXIV. ^THE    FIRST    STEAMBOAT. 

No  sabemos  por  que  motivo  debe  ^arsele^  a  Fulton  toda 
la  gloria  y  el  honor  de  haber  sido^  el  primero  que  puso^  en 
movimiento  un  buque  impelido  por  el  vapor. ^  En  los 
archivos  publicos^  de  Barcelona  consta^  por  docuraentos 
fidedignos^  que  "  el  dia  17  de  Junio  de  1543,  Don  Blasco 
de  Garay  erisayo  por''  primera  vez  en  presencia''  del  Empe- 
rador  Cdrlos  V.  en  Barcelona,  y  en  la  corte  de  Felipe  se- 
gundo.  la  aplicacion  del  vapor^  a  un  pequeno  barco  constru- 
ido^  al  efecto."  Por  los  documentos  que  existen  en  Barce- 
lona se  ve^  pues  que  hace  mas  de*®  trecientos  anos  que** 
Blasco  de  Garay  hizo^^  el  ensayo  de  mover  un  buque  por 
\2i'poTj  logrando  su  objeto ;  y  Fulton  que  mucho  tiempo*' 
despues  puso^  en  planta  el  invento  se  lleva^*  toda  la  gloria 
y  todo  el  renombre.  Desgraciadamente  la  Espana  ha  per- 
dido  el  honor  de  ser  la  primera  en  dos  grandes  invenciones — 
la  aplicacion  de  la  electricidad*  al  telegrafo,  y  la*^  del 
vapor*  a  la  navegacion* — por  la  poca  proteccion  que  daban 
los  reyes*®  a  las  ciencias  en  tiempos  que*''  lasdemas  poten- 
cias  Europeas,  envidiosas  del  brillo  y  engrandecimiento  de 
Espana,  no  perdonaban  medio  alguno*^  para  inquietarlB,  y 
tener^^  siempre  distraidoa^^  a  sus  gobernantes.^" 

XXXY.— WASHINGTON.     [Written  Feb.  22,  1847.] 

El  dia  de  hoy*  es  uno  de  los  que  jamas  deberan  borrarse 


XXXIV. — 1  Darsele,  "to  give  itself  io-him"  that  is,  "to  be  given  to 
him."  See  116,  115,  b,  and  173;  also  285,  c.—^De  haber  side,  "of 
having  been"  See  327. — 3  Puso,  irreg.  from  poner. — 4  See  628. — 5  See 
264. — s  Consta,  "it  is  evident" — 7  gee  240. — ^  Construido  al  efecto^ 
"built  for  the  purpose." — ^  Se  ve,  "  it  is  seen."  See  173. — ^^  Hace  mas 
de,  "it-is  more  than."  See  522,  and  270.— ii  Que,  "since."  See  304, 
c. — 12  Hizo,  irreg.  from  hacer. — 13  Mucho,  "  long."  See  486. — ^^  Se  lleva, 
"gains  for  himself." — ^5  See  616. — ^^  See  575. — ^"^  Que  is  here  used  in 
the  sense  of  "when."—^^  See  527,  and  134,  a.— is  See  300,  6.— 20  Seo 
325. 

XXXV.— 1  El  dia  de  hoy,  "  this  very  day  ;"  "  to-day.' 


SPANISH    READING    LESSONS.  325 

de^  la  memoria  de  los  Norte- Americanos  :  el  22  de  Febre- 
ro,  dia^  memorable  por  los  recuerdos  que  nos  trae;  dia^ 
de  Ventura  y  de  regocijo,  porque  en  el  vio  la  primera  luz 
el  heroe^  de  la  libertad  Americana ;  el  padre^  de  su  patria : 
el  inmortal  Washington. 

Envanezcanse^  en  buen  hora''  las  antiguas  naciones^  con 
sus  heroes  y  sus  guerreros,  zonvertidos  en^  crueles  tiranos. 
Ensalce^^  la  orgullosa  Francia®  a  su  ambicioso  Napoleon  ; 
pero  I  hay^^  una  sola  nacion  deP^  mundo  qu.e  haj/a  produ- 
cido^^  un  heroe  como^^  Jorge  Washington?  ^^  Dia  de 
bendicion  y  de  ventura  fue^^  para  los  Norte-Americanos 
aqueP®  en  que  nacio  el  gran^^  hombre  cuyo  aniversario 
recordamos  hoy.  ;  Raro  portendo  de  fidelidad  patriotica^^ 
fue  Washington  !  A'ngel  Salvador  ^^  que  destino  el  cielo^® 
a  liber  tar  deP  yugo  opresor^^  de  la  esclavitud^"  a^^  unos 
hombres  que  gemian  bajo  el  rigor  de  los  mismos^^  que  de- 
bieran  protejerlo8.  Nacio  Washington,  y  con  su  nacimiento 
dio^^  Dios^  a  los  oprimidos  subditos  de  la  Gran  Bretana 
un  hermano  que  les  indicase^^  el  medio  de  quebrantar  las 
fuertes  cadenas  de  barbara  opresion.  Nacio  Washington, 
y  ocultdndose  para  siempre  el  sol  sangriento^^  de  la  esclavi- 
tud,  aparecio  dulce  y  apacible  la  brillante  aurora  de  glori- 
osa  libertad. 

Washington,  que  desde  la  edad  de  veinte  anos  manifes- 
taba  ya  su  firmeza  y  lealtad  ;  Washington,  que  durante  su 
vida  no  ceso  de^^  afanars>Q  por  lograr  la  felicidad  eterna  de 
su  amada  patria,  murio^^  hace  ya  medio  siglo^^ ;  pero  no 


2  De,  ''from."—^  See  237.-4  See  575.—^  See  237,  a.^s  gee  309,/.— 
7  En  buen  hora,  "at  a  proper  time." — ^  See  575. — ^  En,  "into.''  See 
387.— 10  See  309,/.— "  Hay,  "is-there?"  See  218,  and  218,  a.— 12  Del 
mundo,  "in the  world." — 13  See  317,  and  311,  b.—^^Como,  "li^e.^—^^Dia, 
^'a  day." — ^^  Aquel,  which  follows,  is  nominative  to  ./we. — ^^  See  101, 
a.— 18  See  264.— 19  See  575  ;  also  628.— 20  See  628.— 21' See  670.— 22  Los 
mismos  que,  "the  very  ones  who." — 23  [)i^^  irreg.  from  dar. — 24  See  314. 
and  314,  b. — 25  j}e,  "from."—^^  Murio,  irreg.  from  moHr. — 27  fface  ya 
medio  sigh,  "  a  half  a  century  ofcoj'     See  522 ;  also  248. 

28 


326  SPANISH   READING   LESSONS. 

ha  muerto^^  ni  morird  jamas^^  en  la  memoria  de  sus  hijos 
y  de  sus  hermanos.  En  cada  corazon  amante^®  de  la  ver- 
dadera  libertad  tiene  erijido^^  un  altar  donde  se^^  venera  el 
nombre  glorioso  de  Jorge  "Washington. — E.  J.  Gomez. 

XXXVI. PEDRO    LOPEZ    DE    AYALA. 

Este  escritor  nacio  en  noble  cuna,j^e  senor  de  Salva- 
tierra  en  la  provincia  de  Alava,  y  descendiente  de  la  nobil- 
isima  easa  de  Alaro.  Ajala,fue  canciller  mayor  de  Castilla, 
y  vivid  en  los  reinados  de  don  Pedro  el  justiciero,  llamado 
el  Cruel,  de  Enrique  11. ,  Juan  I.,  y  Enrique  III.  Los 
cuatro  reyes  que  acaho  de  nombrar^  apreciaron  sus  talentos 
como  escritor  y  como  politico,  y  su  valor  como  soldado. 
Sus  talentos  se  mostraron  en  la  direccion  y  arreglo  de  los 
muchos  y  dificiles  negocios  que  sus  soberanos  le  confiaron^ 
y  en  sus  cronicas  de  Pedro  el  Cruel,  y  otros  escritos  cuya 
pureza  y  elegancia  pruehan^  su  mucho  y  sano  gusto  en  la 
cultura  de  las  letras.  Y  bar  to  froho  su  valor  en  las  batallas 
de  Najera  y  Aljubarrota,  en  donde  fue  hecho  prisionero. 
Ayala  murio^  en  1407,  de  edad  de  setenta  y  cinco  anos,  en 
Calahorra.  Los  apologistas  del  rey  don  Pedro  dicen^  falsa 
la  cronica  de  Ayala,  y  que  estej^e  apasionado  de^  don  En- 
rique II.  Zurita  y  otros  dicen  al  contrario,  que  Ayala  fue 
verdadero,  desapasionado  y  sincero  historiador. — M.  G-alo 

DE  CUENDAS. 

XXXVII. MIGUEL    DE    CERVANTES. 

Nada  dire  de  los  escritos  ni  del  merito  literario^  de  Cer- 
vantes,    Dos  siglos  y  todas  las  naciones  de  Europa  le  han 


^  See  352,  a,  and  352,  6.-29  See  470.— 30  See  300,  6.— 3i  See  173. 

XXXVI. — 1  Acaho  de  nombrar,  "  I  have  just  named.^'  See  337. — 
*  Pruehan,  irreg.  from  probar. — 3  Murio,  irregr.  from  morir. — ^  Dicen, 
'leg.  from  decir;  ^^  call  false  the  chronicles." — 5  See  323,  b. 

XXXVII.— 1  See  264. 


SPANISH   READING   LESSONS.  327 

juzgado  ya.  Solo  dire  cuatro  palabras^  de  su  vida,  sus 
desgracias  j  su  miseria. 

Miguel  de  Cervantes  Saavedra  nacio  en  Alcala  de  He- 
nares^  el  9  de  Octubre  de  1547,  de  padres  nobles,  aunque 
mal*  acomodados  en  bienes.  Fue  discipulo^  en  letras  hu- 
manas^  del  maestro  Juan  Lopez  de  Hoyos.  Su  primera 
inclinacionyz//e  por  la  poesia,^  en  que  jamas  j^w^o'''  sobresalir. 
Casi  muerto  de^  hambre  en  1563  jpaso  a  Italia,  y  se  acomodo 
por^  camarero  del  cardenal  de  Aguaviva,  y  en  1570  se 
alislo  en  las  banderas  del  duque  de  Palliamo,  que  Pio  V. 
habia  nomhrado  general  de  sus  tropas.  Cervantes  se  hallo 
en  la  desgraciada  espedicion  de  Chipre,  y  en  la  batalla  de 
Lepanto  que  tuvo^^  lugar  en  1597  ;  en  esta  ultima  perdio 
la"  mano  izquierda.  Despues  de  haber  dejado  el  ejercito 
papal,^  se  alisto  en  las  tropas  de  Napoles,  y  sirvio^^  con 
valor  en  ellas  hasta  el  ano  1575,  epoca^^  en  que  pasando  de 
Napoles  a  Espana,/2^e  hecho  cautivo  por  el  famoso  corsario 
argelino^  Arnuante  Mami. 

Mientras  cautivo  en  Argel,  did  Cervantes^*  innumerables 
y  nada  equivocas^^  pruebas  de  su  indomito  valor,  de  su 
heroica  paciencia  y  aun  de  su  inconcevible  osadia.  JFue 
en  fin^®  rescatado  en  1580  y  1581,  volvio  a  Espana,  en 
donde^''  de  nuevo  se  obstino  en  escribir  versos,  aunque  vio 
el  poco  6  ningun  suceso  de  sus  tentativas.  Casose  en  Es- 
quivia  con  dona  Catalina  Palacios  de  Salazar  en  1584,  y 
las  dificultades  de  su  posicion  se  aumentaron  con  este  matri- 
monio.     Entonces  fue  cuando  escribio  hasta  treinta  come- 


2  Cuatro  palabraSf  literally  ^^four  words"  meaning  "a  word  or  two;'' 
*^  a  few  words" — ^  Alcald  de  Henares,  the  name  of  a  town  in  Spain. — 
*  Mai,  adverb,  ''badly;"  "pooWy."— 5  See  243.— «  See  62S.—T  Pudo, 
irreg.  from  poder. — ^  Cast  muerto  de,  "  almost  dead  with."  Sec  330,  c. — 
^  Por,  ''for  a;"  " as  a."  See  385,  and  385,/.— ^o  Tuvo  lugar,  "took 
place."  Tuvo,  irreg.  from  tene}-. — ^^  See  122. — 12  Sirvio,  irreg.  from  ser- 
vir. — 13  See  244. — ^^  See  575. — ^^  J^ada  eqmvocas,  "in  no  degree  equivo- 
cal." Nada  is  here  an  adverb. — ^^  En  fin,  "  at  length, — ^7  En  donde 
"wherein;"  "where." 


328  SPANISH   READING   LESSONS. 

dias  que  pudieran  llamarse  malisimas,  si  el  respeto  que  se 
debe^^  al  grande  ingenio  del  autor  de  don  Quijote  no  lo 
impidiese}^  Pocos  anos  despues,  escribio  sus  novelas,  Per- 
siles  J  Sigismunda,  y  el  nunca  bastante  alabado,  leido-  y 
admirado  don  Quijote  de  la  Mancha.  El  ilustre  autor  de 
don  Quijote,  hoy  tan  estimado  deP°  mundo  entero,  arr as- 
tro casi  hambrienta  vida,  hasta  el  23  de  Abril  de  1616  en 
que  murw^^  por  Sevilla,  Valladolid,  y  Madrid  en  donde^'' 
fallecio.  Acaso  hubiera  muerto^  de^°  miseria  sin  los  socor- 
ros  del  conde  de  Lemos  y  de  algunos  otros,  aunque  pocos, 
protectores.  Cervantes  fne  a  la  vez^^  la  gloria  de  Espana 
y  el  oprobio  de  su  siglo,  puesto  que^*  este  le  desconocio  y 
aun  le  insulto. — M.  Galo  de  Cuendas. 

XXXYIII. EPITOME    OF    THE    HISTOE-Y    OF    SPAIN. 

La  peninsula,  llamada  Espana,  sola  esta  contigua  al  con 
tinente  de  Europa  por  el  lado  de  Francia,  de^  que  la  sepa- 
ran  los  montes'^  Pirineos.  Es  abundante  en  oro,  plata, 
azogue,  hierro,  piedras,  aguas  minerales,  ganados  de  esce- 
lentes  calidades,  y  pescas  tan  abundantes  como  deliciosas. 
Esta  feliz  situacion  la  hizo^  objeto*  de  la  codicia  de  los 
Fenicios  y  otros  pueblos.  Los  Cartagineses,  parte^  por 
dole,  parte^  por  fuerza,  se  establecieron  en  ella .;  y  los  Ro- 
manes quisieron^  completar  su  poder  y  gloria  con  la  conquista 
de  Espana;  pero  encontraron  una  resistencia,  que parecio  tan 
estrana  como  terrible  a  los  soberbios  duenos  de  lo  restante'' 
del  mundo.  Numancia,  una  sola  ciudad,  les  costo  catorce 
anos  de  sitio,  la  perdida  de  tres  ejercitos,  y  el  desdoro  de 
los  famosos  generales,  hasta  que  reducidos  los  Numanti- 


18  Se  debe,  ^^  owes  itself;^'  ^' is  due." — ^^  Se6  314.  Impidiese,  irregular 
from  impedir. — 20  gg^  323,  b. — 21  Murio,  irreg.  from  morir. — 22  See  318, 
and  318,  a. — 23  J[  /^  -p^z,  n  at  times" — 24  Puesto  que,  "since." 

XXXVllI.— 1  De,  "from."— 2  See  575.-3  ffizo,  irreg.  from  hacer. 
^  Objefo,    "an   object." — ^  Parte,    "partly." — ^  Quisieron,   irreg.    from 
querer. — 7  See  263,  a. 


SPANISH   READING   LESSONS.  329 

nos^  a  la  precision  de  capitular^  6  morir,^  por  la  total  ruina 
de  la  patria,  corto  numero  de  vivos/ °  y  abundancia  de 
cadaverea*  en  las  calles  (sin  contar^  los  que  habian  servido 
de  pasto^^  a  sus  conciudadanos  despues  de''^  concluidos  todos 
sus  viveres^^)  incendiaron  sus  casas,  arrojaron  sus  mujeres, 
nifios,  y  ancianos  en  las  llamas,  y  salieron  a  morir  en  el 
campo  raso  con  las  armas  en  la^^  mano.  El  grande  Esci- 
pion  fue  testigo  de  la  ruina  de  Numancia ;  pues  no  j)ued.e 
llamarse  propiamente  conquistador  de  la  ciudad :  siendo^^ 
de  notary  que  Luculo,  encargado  de^^  levantar^  un  ejercito 
para  aquella  espedicion,  no  hallo  en  la  juventud  romana 
reclutas  que^^  llevar,  hasta  que  el  mismo^''  Escipion  se  alisto 
para  animarlsi}^ 

Si  los  Romanes  conocieron  el  valor  de  los  Espanoles  como 
enemigos,  tambien  esperimentaron  su  virtud  como  aliados. 
Sagunto  sufrio  por  ellos  un  sitio  igual  al  de^^  Numancia 
contra  los  Cartagineses,  y  desde  entonces  for  mar  on  los  Ro- 
manes de  los  Espanoles  el  alto  concepto  que  se  ve^^  en  sus 
autores,  oradores,  historiadores,  y  poetas.  Pero  la  fortuna 
de  Roxpa,  superior  al  valor  humane,  la  hizo^  senora  de  Es- 
paiia,  como  de  lo  restante''  del  mundo,  menos^^  algunos 
montes  de  Cantabria,  cuya  total  conquista  no  consta  de  la 
historia.^  Largas  revoluciones,  inutiles  de  contarse^^  en 
este  paraje,  trajerov^^  deP  norte  enjambres  de  naciones 
feroces,  codiciosas  y  guerreras,  que  se  estahlecieron  en  Es- 
paiia :  pero,  con  las  delicias  de  este  clima,  tan  diferente 
deP^  que  habian  dejado.  cayeron^^  en  tal  grade  de  afemina- 


^  Redudd-os  los  NumantinoSj  "the  Numantians  being  reduced^'  See 
300,  c— 9  See  327.— lo  De  vivos,  "  of  those  alive:'— ^^  De  pasto,  ''for 
food." — 12  The  meaning  is,  "after  all  their  provisions  being  exhausted."  - 
13  See  122. — ^^  Siendo  de  notar,  "it  being  proper  to  note." — ^^De,  "  with." 
See  399.— 16  See  326,  e.— 17  See  286,  a.— is  La,  "it,"  referring  to  e^edi^ 
don.—^^Al  de,  "to  that  of ."  See  129,  c.—^^Se  ve,  "is  seen."  See 
173.— 21  See  360.-22  See  628.-23  De  contarse,  "  of  being  narrated."  See 
327,  and  173.-^4  See  194.-25  Bel,  "from  that."  See  291,  a.—^  Seo 
165. 

28* 


330  SPANISH   PwEADING   LESSONS. 

eion  y  flojedad,  q'le  a  su  tiem.'po'^'^  fueron  esclavos  de  otroa 
sonquistadores,  venidos^^  deP  mediodia.  Huyeron^^  los 
Godos-Espanoles^°  hasta  los  monies  de  una  provincia,  hoy 
llamada  Asturias  ;  y  apenas  iuvieron^^  tiempo  de^^  desechar^ 
el  susto.  llorar  la  perdida  de  sus  casas,  y  ruina  de  su  reino, 
euando  salieron  mandados  por  Pelayo,  uno  de  los  mayores 
hombres  que  la  naturaleza^  ha  producido. 

Desde  aqui  se  abre^^  un  teatro^  de  guerras  que  duraroii 
cerca  de  ocho  siglos.  Varios  reinos  selevantaron^^  sobre 
la  ruina  de  la  monarquia  Goda-Espanola,  destruyendo^^  el 
que  querian  edificar  los  Moros^^  en  el  mismo  terreno, 
regado  con  mas  sangre  espanola,  romana,  cartaginesa,  goda 
y  mora  de^®  cuanto  se  jpuede  fonder ar^^  con  horror  de  la 
pluma  que  lo  escriba,  y  de  los  ojos  que  lo  vean  escrito.^^ 
Pero  la  poblacion  de  esta  peninsula  era  tal,  que  despues  de 
tan  largas  guerras  y  tan  sangrientas,  aun  se  contaban^^ 
veinte  millones'^  de  habitantes  en  ella.  Incorpordronse 
tantas  provincias,^  y  tan  diferentes  en  dos  coronas,  la^^  de 
Castilla  y  la^^  de  Aragon.;  y  ambas  en  el  matrimonio  de 
Don  Fernando  y  Dona  Isabel,  pwncipes  que  serdn  inmor- 
tales  entre  cuantos  sepan^  °  lo  que  es  gobierno.'^^  La  refor- 
ma  de  abuses,  aumento  de  ciencias,  humillacion  de  los 
soberbios,  amparo  de  la  agricultura  y  otras  operaciones 
seme]a.nte?i^  formaron  esta  monarquia.  Ayudoles  la  natu- 
raleza'^  con  un  numero  increible  de  vasallos  insignes  en 
letras  y  armas,  y  se  pudierov}'^  haber  lisonjeado  de  dejar^  a 
sus  sucesores  un  imperio  mayor  y  mas  duradero,  que  el 
de^^    Roma   antigua,   (contando  las  Americas  nuevamente 


27  A  SU  tiempo,  ''Hn  their  turn." — 28  Venidos,  ^^  arrived." — 29  See  165, — 
30  See  575.— 31  See  160.— 32  De  desechar,  ''for  driving  away."—^^  See 
173.— 34  See  165.— 35  See  575.--36  The  meaning  is,  "  than  what  can  be 
dwelt  upon."  See  270.— 37  See  173,  327,  d,  and  116,  a.— 33  Que  lo  vean 
escrito,  ''which  may  see  it  written."  See  300,  a. — 39  See  129,  c— ^o  Cuan- 
tos sepcn,  "  as  many  as  may  know;"  "whoever  may  know."  See  321,  a, 
and  19  ^.— 4i  Lo  que  es  gobierno,  "  what  government  is." — ^2  See  189. — 
«  See  616. 


SPANISH   READING   LESSONS,  331 

descuhierlas)^  si  huhieran  logrado^^  dejar  su  corona  a  un  here- 
dero  varon.  iVf^oles^^  el  cielo  este  gozo  a  trueque  de^^ 
tantos  como  les  habia  concedido^  y  su  cetro  paso  a  la  casa 
de  Austria,  la  cual  gasto  los  tesoros,  talentos  y  sangre  de 
los  Espanoles  en  cosas  agenas  de  Espana,  por  las  continuas 
guerras,  que  asi^^  en  Alemania,  como'*''  en  Italia,  tuvo 
que"*^  sostener  Carlos  Pr-imero^  de  Espana,  hasta  que  can- 
sado  de  sus  mismas^  ®  prosperidades,  6  tal  vez^  °  conocieiido 
con  prudencia  las  vicisitudes  de  las  cosas  humanas,  no 
quiso^^  esponerse  a  sus  reveses,  y  dejo  el  trono  a  su  hijo  Don 
Felipe  II 

Este  principe,  acusado  por  la  emulacion,  por  ambicioso^^ 
y  politico  como  su  padre,  pero  menos  afortunado,  siguiendo 
los  proyectos  de  Carlos,  no  jpudo^^  hallar  los  mismos  suce- 
sos  aun  a  costa  de^^  ejercitos,  de  armadas,  y  de  caudales. 
Murio  dejando  a^^  su  pueblo  estenuado  con  las  guerras ; 
afeminado  con  el  oro  y  plata  de  America ;  disminuido  con 
la  poblacion  de  un  mundo  nuevo  ;  disgustado  con  tantas 
desgracias,  y  deseoso  de  descanso.  Paso  el  cetro'^  por  las 
manos  de  tres  principes  menos  activos  para  manejar  tan 
grande  monarquia  ;  y  en  la  muerte  de  Carlos  Segundo  no 
era  Espana^  sino  el  esqueleto  de  un  gigante. — Jose  Ca- 

DALSO. 

XXXIX— CRITICS. 

Hay  una  secta  de  sabios  en  la  republica  literaria,^  que  lo^ 
son  a^  poca  costa  :  estos  son  los  criticos.  Anos  enteros,  y 
muchos,  necesita  el  hombre^  para  saber  algo  de  las  ciencias 
humanas,  pero  en  la  critical  (cuaP  se  usa)  desde  el  pri- 

44  See  318,  and  318,  a. — 45  See  113,  a. — 46  j^  trueque  de  tantos  como, 
"  in,  exchange  for  as  many  as." — 47  See  368. — 4^  gg^  340,  and  160.— 
49  See  286,  a.— 50  Tal  vez,  ''perhaps."— ^^  See  191.— 52  The  meaning  is, 
"accused  by  emulation  {by  the  emulous)  as  ambitious."  See  385,  jT. — 
63  See  189. — ^4  Acosta  de,  "  at  the  expense  of." — 55  See  325. 

XXXIX.— 1  See  264.-2  Que  lo  son,  "  who  are  it;"  "  who  are  so."  See 
287,  a.— 3  See  378,/.— 4  See  575.-5  La  critica,  ''criticism,"  See  623.— 
*  Cual  sc  usa,  "  as  it  is  a  •^.ployed.    See  104,  b,  and  173. 


332  SPANISH   READING   LESSONS. 

mer^  dia  es  uno^  consumado.  Sujetarse^  a  los  lentos  pro- 
gresos  del  entendimrcnto  en  las  especulaciones  matemati- 
cas,  en  las  espcriencias  de  la  fi'sica,  en  las  confusiones  de 
la  jurisprudencia,  es  no  acordarsQ  de  la  cortedad  de  nuestra 
vida,  que  por  lo  regular^  no  'pasa  de^*^  sesenta  anos,  rebajaii- 
do  de'^  estos  los  que  ocwpa  la  debilidad^  de  la  ninez,  el  de- 
senfreno  de  la  juventud,  y  las  enfermedades  de  la  vejez. 
Se  humilla  mucho  nuestro  orgullo^  con  esta  reflexion  :  el 
tiempo  que  he  de^'^  vivir^  comjmrado  con  el  que  necesito  para 
saber^  es-ifA  que  apenas  fuede  llamarse^^  tiempo.  j  Cuanto 
mas  nos  lisongea  esta  otra  determinacion^  !  Si  no  puedo 
por  el  motivo  dicho,'^  aprender  facultad  alguna,  persuado 
al'^  mundo  y  a'^  si  mismo'®  que  las  poseo  todas,  j  pronuncio 
"  ex  tripode''' "  sobre  cuanto*^  oigo,^^  veo,  y  leo. 

Pero  no  crea^^  que  en  esta  clase  se'^  comprehenden  los 
verdaderos  criticos.'*  Los^'  hay  dignisimos  de  todo  respe- 
to.  I  Pues  en  que  se  diferencian^  y  en  que  se'"^  han  de^^ 
distinguii^  1  La  regla  fija  para  no  confundirlos  es  esta : 
los  buenos  hahlaii  poco  sobre  asuntos  determinados  y  con 
moderacion  ;  los  otros  son  como  toros,  queforman  la  inten- 
cion,  cierraT^  los^^  ojos,  y  arremeten  a  cuanto'^  encuentran 
por  delantCj^®  hombre,  caballo,  perro,  aunque  se  claven  la 
espada  hasta  el  corazon.  Si  la  comparacion  te  pareciereP 
baja,  por  ser^  de  un  ente  racional  con  un  bruto,  creeme  quo 
no  lo  es  tanto,^  pues  apenas  pueden  llaviarse^^  hombres  los 
que  no  cuUivan  su  razon,  y  solo  se  valen  de  una  especie  de 
instinto  que  les  queda  para  hacer  dano  a  todo  cuanto  se 

7  See  101. — ^  Sujetarse,  ^^  to  subject  one^s  self.'''' — ^  Por  lo  regular, 
^^ commonly ;^'  ^^usuallt/." — ^^  Pasar  de,  ^^  to  exceed.^' — ^^  De,  ^'fromJ'— 
^^  Haber  de.  See  339.— 13  See  173.— i^  Dicho,  "said;''  ''aforesaid^ 
See  200.— 15  See  670.-16  See  286.— 17  Ex  tripode,  a  Latin  phrase,  mean- 
ing "authoritatively."' — ^^  Cuanto,  "as  much  as;"  " whatever. '^ — 19  S«^; 
206.— 20  See  309,  a.— 2i  Los,  «  those.''  See  616.-22  See  116,  a.— 23  Cier- 
ran,  irreg.  from  cerrar. — 24  See  122. — 25  Cuanto  encuentran,  "whomso- 
ever they  may  meet ;"  or,  "  any  body  that  they  may  meet.'" — ^^Por  delante, 
"in front;"  "ahead."— ^^  See  319.— 28 Po?-  ser,  "for  being."— '^  No  lo  a 
tanfo,  "it  is  not  so." 


SPANISH   READING    LESSONS.  333 

les  presente^^  amigo  6  enemigo,  debil  6  fuerte,  inocente  6 
culpado. — Jose  Cadalso. 

XL. — AMERICAN  INDEPENDENCE.    [Written  Julj  4th,  1847.] 

Han  transcurrido  ya  setenta  y  un  anos  desde  que^  los 
Norte- American  OS  lograron  sacudir  el  yugo  de  la  monar- 
quia  inglesa  para  hacer^e  verdaderamente  independientes. 
Una  guerra  de  siete  anos,  que  costo  millares  de  vidas,  esta- 
blecio  al  fin^  la  libertad  de  un  pais  que  ha  tenido  la  buena 
suerte  de  no  ahusar  de^  la  gloriosa  condicion  a  que  se  vio 
al  fin^  elevado.  Los  patrioticos  y  denodados  heroes  de 
1 776  juraron  ser  libres  6  morir^  y  asi  lo  cumplieron.  Muchos 
murieron*  en  la  lucha  desigual,  pe|b  al  espirar^  vagaba  por 
sus  labios  una  consoladora  sonrisa  que  decia  al  opresor  tira- 
no :  *^  muero^  por®  libertar  67  mi  patria.  y  mioero  contento  !" 

La  primera  sangre  derramada  en  la  guerra  de  la  inde- 
pendencia.  enrojecio  las  arenas  de  Lexington  el  19  de  Abril 
de  1775j  pero  no  fue  vertida  inutilmente.  Los  ingleses 
quemaron  y  destruyeron  pueblos  y  ciudades  ;  se  ligaron 
con  los  indios  salvages  para  que^  les  ayudaran^  a  asesinar 
sJ  los  hijos  de  las  colonias  que  resistian  la  opresion,  y  la 
justicia  de  Dios  did  el  castigo  merecido  a  la  infamia  y  al 
despotismo.  En  medio  de^°  los  conflictos  y  reveses,  el 
Congreso  americano  publico  el  4  de  Julio  de  1776  su  De- 
claracion  de  Independencia. 

En  aquella  epoca  la  Union  Americana  era  una  pequena 
nacion,  comptiesta^^  de  solos  trece  Estados;  j  terminada  Isi 
guerra/^  establecida  su  inde^endejicia.^^  fue  elejido^^  primer 


30  See  321,  a. 

XL. — 1  Desde  que,  "  since."  Anos  is  nominative  to  han  transcurrido. 
See  b75.—^AlJin,  ''at  length.''— ^  See  330.— ^  Irreg.  from  morir.— 
5  See  298,  6.-6  See  326,  d.— 7  See  325.-8  Para  que,  "in  order  that.''— 
9  See  316. — ^^  En  medio  de,  "in  the  midst  of." — ^i  Compuesta,  irreg.  par- 
ticiple from  componer. — ^2  See  300,  c. — ^3  Construct  su  independencia  C5- 
tabledda,  "its  independence  being  established."  See  300  c— 1^  Eljcn&ral 
Jorge  Washington  is  nominative  lo  fue  elejido.     See  575. 


334  SPANISH    READING   LESSONS. 

Presidente  de  los  Estados  Unidos,  en  Abril  de  789,  el 
jeneraP^  Jorge  Washington.  Espirado  el  termino^^  de 
cuatro  anos,  volvio  a^''  ser  elejido  casi  uuanimemente  por 
todos  los  americanos  hasta  que^^  en  1796  pidio^^  permiso 
para  retirarse  a  la  vida  privada  jft^e  electo  segundo  Presi- 
dente John  Adams,  l^n  aquella  epoca  contaba  la  Union 
con  una  poblacion  compuesta^^  de  cinco  millones  de  habi- 
tantes. 

El  motivo  de  esta  guerra  /^^e  indudablemente  la  mas  in- 
justa  agresion,  y  lo  que  did  origen  a  ella  es  lo  unico  que 
puede  justificar  una  guerra  desastrosa  en  la  presente  edad  : 
la  independencia  nacional.  Todo  individuo  debe  odiar  la 
matanza^"  y  el  esterminio,^^  pero  al  tratarse^^  de  la  inde- 
pendencia de  una  nacionj^e  la  libertad  de  sus  hijos,  de  los 
derechos  de  la  patria ;  todo  el  que^^  tenga^^  sangre  en  las 
venas  debe  correr  presuroso  a  tomar  las  armas  para  repeler 
y  ester minar  aF  enemigo  que  atenta  a  destruir  la  nacionali- 
dad  6  a  usurpar  los  derechos  mas  sagrados.  Los  heroes 
americanos  de  1776  ser  an  inmortalizados,  y  en  los  siglos 
venideros  el  nombre  glorioso  de  Jorge  Washington  sera 
acatado  por  las  nacionas  mas  poderosas  y  bendecido  por 
todo  aquel  que^^  sepa^^  apreciar  la  verdadera  independen- 
cia. Washington  no /we  ambicioso  como  otros  heroes  de 
su  siglo  6  de  siglos  anteriores :  su  unico  deseo  era  eP^  de 
libertar  a  su  patria  del  yugo  opresor  que  se  iba  haciendo^^ 
cada  dia  mas  insufrible  con  su  tirania.  Rompieronse  las 
cadenas  de  hierro  con  que  pretendia  la  Gran  Bretana  sajuz- 
gar  a''  un  pueblo  noble  y  generoso,  y  lucid  para  la  America 
un  dia  de  gloria  y  de  felicidad. 

Setenta  y  un  anos  hace  hoy  que^''  sejirr/io  la  declaracion 

^5  See  233. — ^^  See  300  c. — 17  Volvio  d  ser  elejido,  ^^was  again  elected.^' 
See  336.— 18  See  553.— 19  Pic^id,  irreg.  from  pedir,—^^  See  628.— 21  ^Z 
tratarse  de,  "  on  attempting^ — 22  T^odo  el  que,  or,  iodo  aquel  que.  See 
288,  a.— 23  Tenga.  See  160,  and  310,  6.-24  Sepi.  See  192,  and  310, 
b. — 25  See  616. — 26  ^q  Hjo,  haciendo,  ^^  went  makiig  itself "  ^^wasbecom 
ing»^2i  See  304,  h. 


SPANISH    READING   LESSONS.  335 

de  la  independenciaj  y  vease^^  el  efecto  que  ha  proditcido 
la  libertad  conquistada.  En  cincuenta  alios  se  ha  esfendido 
el  dominio  de  la  nacion  independiente  a  cinco  veoes  mas 
de^®  lo  que  era  a  fines^°  del  siglo  pasado :  en  cincuenta 
alios  se  ha  cuadruplicado  su  poblacion,  y  por  todas  partes 
se  manifiestan^^  los  beneficios  de  las  instituciones  que  cod 
su  independencia  plantearon  los  que  lograran  romper  e 
yugo  de  la  tirania. — E.  J.  Gomez. 

XLI. A    VISIT    TO    THE    TOMB    OF    WASHINGTON. 

La  mafiana  del  23  de  Junio  de  1845  amamcio^  clara  ]f 
Serena.  Mansas  y  tranquilas  corrian  las  aguas  del  Poto- 
mac y  el  vapor  Jorge  Washington  se  separaba  lentamente 
del  estremo  del  ferro-carril  de  Petersburg.  La  vista  del 
rio  era  pintoresca  y  variada :  por  do  quiera^  veianse^  cru 
zar  las  pequenas  embarcaciones  de  los  pescadores,  y  sobre 
ambas  riberas  se  divisaban  los  estensos  saladeros  dondi 
centenares  de  hombres  se  ocupaban  en  sus  faenas,  frepar 
a>ndo  para  embarrilar  la  pesca  de  sus  compaiieros. 

Mas  todo  esto  no  era  suficiente  para  distraerme  por  ue 
minuto  entero  de*  la  idea  principal  que  ocupaba  mi  mente 
Desde^  mis  primeros  alios  habia  leido^  la  vida  de  Jorge 
Washington,  y  ya  que''  no  podia^  conocerle^  al  menos^  ansi 
aba  ver  el  lugar  donde  el  habia  nacido,  y  donde  reposaban 
sus  restos  mortales.  Impaciente  dirijia  a  cada  instante  mi 
anteojo  de  larga  vista  ^'^  hacia  la  margen  izquierda  del  rio, 
buscando  ansiosamente  un  objeto  que  debia  distinguiise  a 
algunas  leguas  de  distancia.  Mis  ojos  buscaban  a  Mount- 
Vernon,  el  punto  donde  vivid,  y  donde  yace  sepultado  el 

28  Vease  el  efecto,  "  the  result  may  he  seen."  See  173. — 29  See  270.—- 
^  Ajines,  "  at  the  end." — 3i  Mani/iestan,  irreg.  from  manifestar. 

XLI. — 1  Amanedo,  "  dawned" — 2  Por  do  quiera,  "  every  where."— 
3  Vezanse,  "  were  seen."  See  173. — *  De,  ^^from." — 5  See  3S6. — ^  Habia 
Uido,  '*  I  had  read." — '''  Ya  que,  "since  that;"  "seeing  that."—^NopO' 
dia^  "7  ccndd  not." — 9  Al  menos,  "at  least." — ^^  Anteojo  de  larga  m^ia, 
"  spy^glass,**  "ideacope." 


336  SPANISH   READING   LESSONS. 

hombre  mas  digno  de  admiracion  que  ha  producido  la 
America.  ^^ 

Tal  era  mi  impaciencia  que  a  cada  instante  preguniaba 
a  un  anciano  residente  sobre  la  margen  del  rio  que  navega- 
hamos^  si  tardaria  muchb^'^  en  ver^Q'.  con  algun^^  descon- 
suelo  supe^*  que  debiamos  aun  tardar^^  algunas  horas.  De 
pronto ^^  divisamos  una  ciudad  coronada  de^''  torres  y  ele- 
vades  cupulas  ;  era  Alexandria.  La  detencion  del  vapor  en 
ese  punto  me  impaciento  de  tal  manera^^  que  ni  siquiera^^ 
tuve^^  la  curiosidad  de  ecsaminar  el  frente  de  la  poblacion : 
al  fin  continua7nos  nuestro  viage. 

El  sol  iba  inclindndose^^  pausadamente  hacia  el  ocaso, 
cuando  el  anciano  me  advijiio^^  que  podria  disiinguir  los 
arboles  que  cubren  al  Mount-Vernon.  Desde  este  memento 
no  separe  de  alii  mi  vista,  y  cuando  la  procsimidad  mo 
permitia  distinguir  aquel  lugar  sin  necesidad  del  anteojo, 
lo  contemple  estasiado^  sumido  en  un  estrano  estupor.  De 
pronto^®  sefijaron  mis  ojos  sobre  las  elevadas  copas  de  los 
verdes  arboles,  y  me  parecia  distinguir  entre  sus  ramas 
delineada  la  figura  de  Washington  con  los  brazos  cruzados 
y  la  cabeza  descubierta.  La  semejanza  de  esta  idea  con 
una  representacion  de  Napoleon  en  Santa  Elena,  me  causo 
algun  disgusto,  y  baje  la  vista  bacia  la  habitacion  que  se 
distinguia  al  traves  de^^  los  arboles.  Alii!  esclame.^  alii 
vivio  ese  hombre  que  did  ser^^  a  esta  nacion  :  alli  yacen^^ 
sepuliados  tambien  sus  restos  mortales ! 

Al  dia  siguiente  me  hallaba  al  lado  de  un  sepulcro  hu- 

11  See  575  and  231. — ^2  gi  tardaria  mucho  en  verse,  ^Hf  it  would  delay 
long  in  seeing  itself ^''^  that  is,  "  if  it  would  be  long  before  it  could  be  seen.' 
See  525,  327,  and  173.— 13  See'  101.— 14  See  192.— is  Debiamos  aun  tar 
dar  algunas  horas,  "  we  must  wait  yet  some  hours.'''  Deber,  before  an 
infinitive,  often  is  used  in  the  sense  of  "  to  have  to.'' — i^  De  pronto, 
^^  siuldenly." — 17  See  272. — 18  De  tal  manera,  ^^to  such  a  degree." — i^  Ni 
siquiera,  ^^  not  even." — 20  ggg  159. — 21  ]£i  sol  iba  inclindndose,  ^'the  sun 
was-going  declining  itself,"  that  is,  "  the  sun  was  declining." — 22  Advirtio, 
irreg.  from  advertir.—^^  Al  traves  de,  ^^ amidst;"  "throiigh." — 21  g^^  [^ 
here  a  noun. — 25  Sce  214. 


SPANISH    READING   LESSONS.  337 

milde,  de  ladrillos.  Una  verja  de  madera,  medio  derriba- 
da,  circundaba  aquella  tumba  sencilla.  Todo  en  derredor^^ 
respiraba  tristeza  y  desconsuelo,  pero  el  aire  me  parecia 
animado  por  un  eco  debil  que  murmuraba  en  tonos  apaga- 
dos.  "  j  Este  es  el  ultimo  recinto  del  inmortal  Washing- 
ton !"  Y  en  efecto  :  alii,  junto  a  mis  plantas,  bajo  aquel 
m  on  ton  de  ladrillos  colocados  sin  artificio  ;  destituidos  de 
lujosos  marmoles  y  doradas  inscripciones,  ....  alii  yacia 
lo  que  quedaba  en  la  tierra  del  heroe  ilustre. 

Pero  su  memoria  vive^  y  vivird  por  largos  siglos.  Alii, 
al  lado  de  su  sepulcro,  hay  mil  nombres  de  distinguidos 
viajeros  que  han  ido  a  pagar  el  ultimo  tributo — a  consagrar 
al  pie  de  su  propia  tumba,  un  pensamiento,  y  a  dedicaile 
un  recuerdo  de  admiracion. 

Por  un  instante  me  habia  olvidado^^  que  ecsistia^  y  al 
volver  en  mi^^  smti  que  la  fresca  brisa  banaba  suavemente 
mi  encendida  frente,  y  una  lagrima  de  pesar  y  de  venera^ 
ciGn  se  habia  desprendido  de  mis  ojos  cayendo  sobre  la 
liumilde  tumba  de  Jorge  Washington. — E.  J.  Gomez. 


FIFTH  SECTION. 

Remark. — In  this  Section  the  verbs  will  not  be  distinguished  from 
the  other  parts  of  speech  by  being  printed  in  italics,  as  the  learner  is 
supposed  to  be  able  to  conjugate  the  regular  and  irregular  verbs  readily. 
With  many  rules  heretofore  referred  to  in  the  notes,  the  learner  must 
now  be  somewhat  familiar,  and  there  will  be  less  need  of  referring  to 
them  hereafter. 

XLII. THE    MAIDEN    OF    NARNl. 

Viajando  de  Locasto  a  Spoleto,  en  el  aiio  de  1826,  nos  , 
detuvimos^  en  la  ciudad  de  Narni  para  mandar  cab  alios  y 

26  En  derredor,  ^^  around  i^  ^^  round  about." — 27  Me  habia  olvidado,  ''  I 
had  forgotten."  See  284,  e. — 2S  ^/  volver  en  ^t,  "  oti  returning  to  my- 
self;"   "  071  coming  to  my  senses."     See  298,  b. 

XLII. — '  DetuvimoSy  irreg.  from  ddener. 

29 


338  SPANISH   READING    LESSONS. 

tomar  algun  alimento.  Confiados  en  el  gran  influjc  que 
tenian  los  estranjeros  en  aquella  epoca  en  Italia,  creimos 
que  no  se  presentaria  dificultad  alguna^ ;  pero  esta  vez 
tuvimos  que^  esperar  algunas  horas  antes  de  que  fuesen 
satisfechos  nuestros  deseos.  Mientras  que  comiamos, 
llamo  mi  atencion  un  sacerdote  que  entro  silenciosamente 
en  la  salle  y  reconocia  cuidadosamente  la  reunion.  Difer- 
ente  a  la  generalidad  de  aquella  tribu  de  viajeros,  sus  mo- 
dales  eran  altivos  j  su  aspecto  desagradable.  Habiendo- 
nos^  observado  por  algunos  minutes,  hablo  con  el  posadero 
en  voz  baja,  y  en  seguida^  salio  prontamente  de  la  habita- 
cion.  Sentla  un  temor  secreto  por  los  muchos  robos  y 
asesinatos  que  ultimamente  habian  cometido  los  bandidos,® 
particularmente  en  aquellos  alrededores,  y  me  parecia  por 
los  modales  del  sacerdote  que  nos  amenazaba  algun  peli- 
gro.^  Comunique''  estas  sospechas  a  mis  compafieros  que 
€staban  de  acuerdo^  conmigo,  y  empezamos  a  mirar  a  nues- 
tro  posadero  con  temor  y  desconfianza.  Al  fin,  despues  de 
muchas  opiniones  sobre  el  partido  que  debiamos  adoptar, 
se  resolvio  que  le  interrogasemos,  y  si  encontrabamos 
algun  doblez  en  sus  respuestas,  no  saldriamos^  hasta  la 
maiiana  siguiente,  en  que  podiamos  contar  con^°  la  protec- 
cion  de  una  escolta  respe table  que  babiamos  dejado  en  el 
caminOj  y  que  debia^^  detenerse  en  el  mismo  punto  que 
nosotros.  Segun  los  deseos  de  la  reunion  me  eligieron 
para  taP^  comision,  ofreciendo  referirles  lo  que  indagara, 
tan  exactamente^^  como  me  lo^^  permitiera  mi  memoria.® 

— I  Puedo^^  preguntaros,  senor,  quien  es  ese  sacerdote 
con  quien  os  vi^^  conversar  durante  la  comida  ?  le  dije. 

— I  Un  sacerdote,  senor !  me  contesto  con  un  tono  que 


2  See  134,  a.— 3  See  160,  and  340.— *  See  116.— 5  En  seguida,  "qfter- 
tcard."—^  See  575.-7  See  166,  a.— 8  De  acuerdo,  "  of  one  mindJ'—^  See 
208.— 10  See  391,  e,  latter  clause.— ^^  Debia^^'was  to."—^^  Para  tal  comi- 
!fwn"for  the  said  commis&ian.^^—^^  See  32,  a.—^^  Lo  would  be  redundant 
here  in  English.— ^^^  iPucdo?  ''may  IT'    See  189.— is  See  196. 


SPANISit   READING   LESSONS.  339 

apesar  de^'^  demostrar  sorpresa,  manifestaba  sin  embargo^® 
haberle^®  confundido  mi  pregunta. 

— Si,  seiior  le  anadi  fuertemente  y  con  una  mirada  que 
le  dio  a  entender  sospechaba  de^°  el;  un  sacerdote,  jse 
acuerda^i  Y.  de^^  el? 

— Oh!  si,  ciertamente,  me  acuerdo,  el — es  un  buen 
hombre — j  amigo  mio  antiguo  y  de  gran  valor,  que  va^^  a 
Spoleto  para  hallarse  en  la  fiesta  de  San  Jeronimo,  y  que 
se  creeria  feliz^^  en  viajar  en  vuestra  compania. 

— I  Es  natural  de  esta  ciudad?  le  pregunte. 

— No ;  es  de  las  montanas,  senor ;  fue  su  respuesta 
acompanada  de  una  guinada  sardonica. 

— I Y  su  nombre  ? 

— Borasco. 

— No  me  agrada  ese  hombre,^  le  dije. 

— I  Y  porque  no  ?  pregunto  prontamente,  mirandomo 
como  si  sus  ojos  hubieran  penetrado  mi  alma. 

— Porque  los  hombres  hour  ados  jamas  hablan  asi  al 
oidp  cuando  estan  en  presencia  de  otras  personas. 

— lY  con  quien  hablaba  de  esa  manera?  dijo  el  con 
fiereza. 

— Con  vos,  senor !  le  conteste  tomandole  fuertemente 
el  brazo^^  :  lie  oido^^  hablar  de  vos  ^ntes ;  j  cuidado^^ 
como  OS  burlais^''  de  nosotros !  Sabed  que  no  saldremos^ 
esta  noche  de  Narni. 

Quedo  como  muerto  al  sentir  mi  apreton,  y  salio  de  la 
habitacion  sin  responderme.  A  poco^^  apareci6  por  una 
galeria  una  joven,^^  y  por  una  serial  que  me  hizo  me  dio  a 

17  A  pesar  de,  "in spite  of^ — ^^  gi^^i emhargo,  "  nevertheless ;"  " notwith- 
standing."— 19  This  means,  "to  have  confounded  him  my  question  "  that 
is,  "  that  my  question  had  confounded  him" — 20  g^e  330. — 21  ^  Sq  acuerdu 
V.  de  el?  "do  you  remember  him?"  Acuerda,  from  acordar. — 22  Ya^ 
from  ir.  See  204. — 23  g^  creeria  feliz,  "  would  deem  himself  happy." — 
24  See  122)  a. — 25  This  means,  "  /  have  heard  you  spoken  of  before." — 
26 The  meaning  is,  " be  cartful  hmoyoumake  sport  ofus."—^"^  See  655. — 
28  A  pocOi  "in  a  akort  time" — 29  Una  j6ven^  "  a  young  woman."  See  102. 


340  SPANISH    READING    LESSONS. 

enteuder  que  deseaba  hablar  conmigo.  Sali  del  cuarto 
con  precipitacion,  y  entrando  en  una  larga  vina.  la  vi  alii 
muy  ocupada  arrancando  racimos  de  uvas. 

— I  Que  quereis  ?  iba  yo  a  preguntarle  ;  pero  me  inter- 
rumpio  diciendome  en  voz  baja  y  continuando  su  ocupa- 
cion :  * 

— Silencio.  senor,  no  me  hableis ;  correis  peligro — se- 
guid,  y  a  la  vuelta^"  pasad  cerca  de^^  mi. 

Lo  hice  segun  ella  deseaba,  y  me  dijo  entonces  en  voz 
muy  baja : 

Armate  ;  Borasco  no  as  sacerdote,^^  es  el  afamado  Gas- 
parde.  En  aquel  momento  oi^^  cerca  de  mi^^  el  disparo 
de  una  carabina  seguido  de  un  grito  agudo  :  la  pobre  joven 
cayo  muerta  y  ensangrentada  a  mis  pies.  Diriji  mi  vista 
en  direccion  de  donde  vino^^  el  ruido,  y  entro  los  matorra- 
les  VI  la  figura  de  un  hombre  que  se  deslizaba  rapidamente 
por  el  campo  como  una  serpiente.  El  ruido  alarmo  a  los 
buespedes,  quienes  arrojandose  al  jardin,  quedaron  sor- 
prendidos  de  aquella  escena.  Entre  ellos  estaba  el  per- 
verso  posadero  que  en  lugar  de  correr  bacia  el  cuerpo  de 
su  bija,  me  senalaba  y  exclamaba :  \  Prendedle  ;  el  es  el 
asesino ! 

Por  un  momento  permaneci  inmovil  pero  recobrandome 
prontamente,  me  arroje  sobre  el  con  la  ferocidad  de  un 
tigre. 

— j  Embustero  !  exclame.  Tu  eres  complice  del  asesino 
de  tu  mism^  bija.  j  Mirad !  no  tengo  cerca  de  mi  armas 
de  fuego.  \  Fue  Gaspardo  el  bandido  !  \  Este  villano  es 
su  caraarada !  \  Prondedle  !  y  ecbandolo  a  tierra,  en  un 
momento  todos  cayeron  sobre  el. 

— ^  Donde  esta?  exclamaron  todos,   j  donde  esta  Gas 
pardo  ? 

— En  esa  espesura,  esclame ;  todos  se  borrorizaron  con 

3«  A  la  vuelta,  ^'on  your  return.^' — ^i  Cerca  de,  "  near  toJ' — 32  See  243. 
-^  Oi,  ''  Iheard."     See  206.— 34  See  211. 


SPANISH    READING    LESS(5NS.  341 

solo  el  pensamiento  de^^  que  ese  sanguinariar  bandido  estu 
viera  tan  eerca;  al  momento  resono  un  grito  agudo,  5 
i  Alii !  jalli!  exclamaron  todos. 

Mire  al  lugar  donde  senalaban  y  sobre  la  cima  de  uii 
collado  vecino,  estaba  Gaspardo,  agitando  su  sombrero,  re 
goeijandose  en  su  triunfo  y  sin  manifestar  desconfianza 
Estaba  fuera  del  alcance  de^^  las  armas  de  fuego^^  y  toda 
persecucion  hubiera  sido  inutil  y  peligrosa.  Guilletto  (que 
era  el  nombre  del  posadero)  no  demostraba  sentimiento 
por  la  perdida  de  su  hija,  al  contrario  parecia  recocijarse 
de^^  que  por  su  buena  intencion  hubiera  perdido  la  vida  y 
alegrandose  de^^  que  el  bandido  se  hubiera  escapado,  Sin 
embargo/^  Guilletto  fue  conducido  ante  el  tribunal  y 
hallandole  criminal  sufrio  la  pena  de  muerte.  En  la 
causa  se  probo  que  habia  existido  por  muchos  anos  una 
comunicacion  secreta  entre  el  y  Gaspardo,  dandole  aquel 
noticias  cuando  por  casualidad  se  detenia  en  su  posada 
algun  viajero  rico.  De  aqui  provenian  tantos  asesinatos 
que  se  cometian  en  aquellos  alrededores  y  que  por  la  tragi- 
ca  ocurrencia  que  acabamos  de  referir^^  se  consiguio  feliz- 
mente  la  estirpacion  de  Gaspardo  y  de  su  bando. 

XLIII. EXTRACTS    FROM    A    "  MANIFESTO  "    OF    GENERAL 

SANTA    ANNA. 

i  Conciudadanos !  Con  el  pesar  mas  amargo  y  prufundo 
OS  anuncio,  que  despues  de^  continues  y  estraordinarios 
esfuerzos  y  al  cabo  de  quince  horas  de  continue  combate, 
me  VI  obligado  a  abandonar  la  Capital  cuando  nuestras 
filas  se  habian  disminuido  tan  notablemente,  para  salvar 
a  ese  digno  pueblo  de  los  estragos  que  los  proyectiles  del 
enemigo  que  habia  penetrado  a  nuestros  lineas  mas  cerca- 
nas,  regando  el  paso  con  sus  cadaveres  y  con  los^  de  los 

35  See  554. — 35  Puera  del  alcance  de,  "  out  of  the  reach  of.''^ — 37  See  97, 
a.— 38  See  337. 
XLIII.— J  See  375.-2  See  616. 

29* 


342  SP<»fISH   READING  LESSONS. 

dignos  mejicanos  que  defendian  heroicamente  palmo  i. 
palmo,  el  honor  y  derechos  de  su  patria. 

Testigos  habeis  sido,  de^  que  creando  recursos  donde  no 
los  habia,  trabajando  dia  y  noche,  prepare  las  defensas  a  la 
ciudad  de  Mejico,  de  que  forme  y  reuni  un  poderoso  ejer- 
cito,  a  fin  de  arrancar  algun  favor  a*  la  fortuna,  tan  esqui- 
va  para  nosotros.  La  insubordinacion  de  un  general  tras- 
torno  todo  mi  plan  de  operaciones  como  ya  lo^  sabeis.  En 
el  convento  y  puente  de  Churubusco,  recibio  entonces  el 
enemigo  duras  lecciones,  reproducidas  dos  veces  en  el  fuerte 
de  Chapultepec,  tambien  en  las  garitas  de  Belen  y  de  San 
Cosme,  y  ultimamente,  en  la  Ciudadela.  Mas  el  valor  de 
muchos  de  nuestros  soldados  de  la  Guardia  y  del  ejercito 
no  siempre  fue  secundado  ;  y  si  bien^  a  fuego  y  sangre,  el 
enemigo  en  dia  funestisimo  para  la  nacion,  se  hizo  dueno 
de  su  capital. 

Yo  he  buscado  ansioso  la  muerte''  por  todas  partes,  por- 
que  perdida  tan  grande  escitaba  mi  mas  justo  despecho. 
En  Chapultepec  recibi  una  contusion,  en  Belen,  traspasa- 
ron  mi  vestido  las  balas  enemigas,  y  a  mi  derredor  desapa- 
recieron  los  mejores  soldados  de  la  republica.  i  Que  me 
puede  restar  en  medio  de  este  duelo  y  angustia  universal  ? 
La  esteril  satisfaccion  de  la  conciencia,  la^  de  haber  sos- 
tenido  personalmente  el  combate  hasta  el  ultimo  estremo, 
la^  de  haber  vendido  cara  al  enemigo  su  sorprendente  vic- 
toria. El  me  vio  de  frente^  en  la  Angostura,  en  Cerro 
Gordo,  en  Churubusco,  en  Chapultepec,  en  Belen,  en  San 
Cosme  y  en  la  Ciudadela :  y  me  encontrare,  yo  os  lo  juro,® 
do  quiera^"  fuese^^  util  y  glorioso  combatir 

Dije  antes  solemnemente,  y  repito  ahora,  que  no  descon- 


3  See  554.-4  See  329,  a.— 5  i^  ig  here  redundant  in  English.—^  Si 
bien,  "although.'^ — 7  See  628. — ^  De  f rente,  ^^infrojitJ'  ha  Angostura 
is  the  name  of  the  same  battle-ground  that  is  usually  in  the  United 
States  known  as  Buena-  ''sta. — ^  See  115,  a. — ^°  Doquiera^  '^wherever,'' 
-  11  Puej^e,  from  9e\ 


SPANISH   READING   LESSOlS'S.  343 

fio  jamas  de  la  suerte  de  mi  patria.  Si  callan  las  facciones 
alguna  vez  para  escuchar  su  voz  soberana,  si  reunimos 
nuestros  votos  y  nuestros  afanes,  aun  es  tiempo  de  arrojar 
al  enemigo  del  suelo  que  mancha  con  su  presencia.  Os 
consta  que  yo  resist!  una  paz  deshonrosa  que  reducia  a  la 
republica  6.  la  nulidad  mas  absurda  y  mas  completa.  La 
nacion  ha  apeteeido  y  aun  apetece  la  guerra ;  continue* 
mosla  pues,  con  gran  denuedo.  y  mi  ejemplo  sera  el  mas 
fervoroso.  Las  facciones  no  me  disputaran  ya  el  poder 
que  gustoso  abandono  ;  si  me  disputaren*  el  campo  de  ba- 
talla.  alli  me  encontraran  sereno  y  firme  consagrado  como 
siempre  a  la  mas  generosa  y  santa  de  las  causas.  i  Que 
importan  las  desgracias  V  El  infortunio  es  el  crisol  de 
las  naciones;  y  nunca  es  mas  grande  la  mejicana^^  que 
cuando  lucha  con  el  destine  para  arrancarle  la  victoria  que 
Dios  y  la  justicia  le  prometen.  \  Mejicanos !  treinta  y 
siete  anos  ha  que^^  proclamasteis  vuestra  independencia 
entre  escarmientos  y  peligros  :  sostenedla  para  siempre. 
Ciudad  de  Guadalupe  Hidalgo,  Set.  16  de  1847. 

Antonio  Lopez  de  Santa-Anna. 

XLIV. extracts    from    another    "  MANIFESTO  "    OF 

SANTA-ANNA. 

i  Mejicanos !  Desde  mi  regreso  a  la  patria,  y  en  oca- 
siones  diversas,  os  he  dirigido  la  palabra  para  daros  cuenta 
de  mis  operaciones  como  gefe  del  ejercito,  y  como  primer 
magistrado  ejerciendo  el  poder ;  mas  separado  de  aquellos 
destines,  ahora  le  hage  con  el  mas  profunde  pesar  para 
quejarme^  ante  vosetros  de  la  ingratitud  cruel  de  algunos, 
y  de  la  perfidia  de  otros,  que  no  contentes  con  la  conducta 
indiferente  y  criminal  que  ban  ebservado  en  les  dias  del 


12  Mejicana  refers  to  nacion. — ^3  Treinta  y  side  anos  ha  que,  ' 
thirty-seven  years  since."     See  304,  6,  and  304,  c, 
XLIV.— I  See  655. 


344  SPANISH    READING    LESSONS. 

gran  conflicto,  intentan  haeer  recaer  sobre  mi  solo,  la  causa 
de  los  males  ptiblicos  a  que  tanto  han  contribuido. 

Proceder  semejante'^  no  me  sorprende,  porque  un  ano 
hace^  comence  a  observar  en  la  prensa  de  la  capital,  que 
yo  era  otra  vez^  el  bianco^  de  las  facciones  que  desgraciada- 
mente  han  desgarrado  las  entrafias  de  la  patria :  llegando 
su  audacia  hasta  presentarme  con  el  caracter  de  traidor 
contra  una  sociedad.  testigo^  de  mis  repetidos  servicios  por 
su  independencia  y  libertad,  y  de  los  sacrificios  que  he 
.  impendido  para  librarla  del  yugo  que  la  amenaza 

Como  la  injuria,  que  con  fin  perverso  se  me  infiere,''  es 
tan  atroz,  yo  la  rechazo  con  toda  la  energia  de  mi  caractar, 
y  con  el  valor  de  la  inocencia  indignamente  ultrajada : 
reto  y  convoco  a  todos  mis  acusadores  a^  que  se  presenten 
con  sus  pruebas,  ahora  que  me  hallo  sin  poder  y  sin  influ- 
encia :  y  si  asi  no  lo  hicieren®  los  denuncio  como  viles 
calumniadores  y  enemigos  de  la  nacion. 

A  los  generales  Taylor  y  Scott  y  a  todos  los  individuos 
de  sus  ejercitos,  yo  los^®  conjuro  a®  que  por  su  honor  ma- 
nifiesten :  si  el  general  mejicano,  que  los  ha  combatido  en 
el  Norte  y  en  el  Oriente,  y  en  el  centre  mismo  de  la  repub- 
lica  hasta  el  dia  10  del  mes  de  la  fecha,^^  ha  llenado  todos 
sus  deberes  para  con  su  patria. 

i  Conciudadanos  !  La  desgracia  me  ha  privado  de  la 
incomparable  satisfaccion  de  presentaros  una  esplendida 
victoria  ;  pero  nunca  la  desdicha  ha  sido  traicion  :  os  in- 
sultan  los  que  tratan  de^^  persuadiros,  que  puede  caber  tal 
infamia  en  un  antiguo  veterano  de  la  independencia,  con 
honrosas   cicatrices    adquiridas    en    defensa   de    vuestros 


2  Proceder  semejante  ''  such  a  proceef^ingy — ^  Un  ano  hace,  "  a  year 
ago."  See  436. — ^  Otravez,  ^^  again." — ^  El  bianco,  ^^  the  target ;"  '^  the 
mark." — ^  See  244. — 7  Se  me  injiere,  ^^  infers  itself  to-me"  that  is,  ^'■must 
by  inference  be  charged  upon  me."  See  173.  Infere  is  from  inferir. — 
«  See  554. — 9  See  185. — ^^  Los  is  here  redundant  in  English. — ^^  F'ccha, 
^^  date;"  ^'the  present  date." — ^2  Tratar  de,  "  to  aim  to"  ''to  attempt." 


SPANISH    READING   LESSONS.  345 

derechos,  y  que  ha  encanecido  sirviendo  con  amor  y  lealtad 
a  su  patria 

Si  mi  conducta  merece  reproche  en  los  meses  citados : 
si  ella  debe  sujetarse  a  un  examen  porque  los  resultados 
no  ban  sido  felices,  yo  estoy  muy  dispuesto  a  responder  a 
cualesquiera  cargos  que  por  los  medios  legales  e  imparcial- 
mente  intenten  baeerseme^^;  pero  entre  tanto^^  creo^^ 
merecer-las  consideraciones  que  el  pacto  fundamental  me 
otorga,  mis  servicios  demandan  y  la  justicia  exige.     .     . 

Bien^®  sabeis,  que  no  soy  yo  el  unico  caudillo  a  quien  se 
ba  presentado  esquiva  la  victoria.^''  Respondan  por  mi 
Palo  Alto,  la.Resaca,  Matamoros,  Monterey,  Nuevo  Meji- 
co,  Cbibuabua,  Californias,  Yeracruz,  Tabasco  y  Padierna. 
Los  soldados  mejicanos  babremos  sido  desgraciados,  mas 
ninguno  traidor.  Habra^^  tambien  algunos  cobardes : 
pero  esto  jamas  podra  decirse^^  del  que  ba  buscado  al 
onemigo  en  todas  partes,  del  primero  en  el  peligro,  y  del 
unico  que  ba  presentado  a  la  nacion  en  esta  guerra,  tro- 
feos  arrancados  a^°  los  batallones  enemigos 

i  Mejicanos !  Soy  bombre,  y  tendre  defectos  :  pero 
nunca  be  pecado' contra  la  patria,  porque  en  mi  pecbo 
jamas  se  ban  podido  abrigar  sentimientos  anti-nacionales. 
Un  buen  nombre  para  despues  de^\mis  dias,  es  cuanto  be 
ambicionado :  be  anbelado,  pues,  todo  lo  que  es  grande  y 
glorioso  para  Mejico,  y  no  be  escusado  para  su  logro  ni  mi 
propia  sangre  :  vosotros  lo  sabeis,  y  me  bareis  justicia. 
Tebuacan,  Oetubre  22  de  1847. 
Antonio  Lopez  de  Santa-Anna. 


^^  Hacerseme,  ^^  to  make  themselves  to-me  ;^^  ^^to*be  made  against  Tne/^ 
See  173,  and  116. — ^^  Entre  fanto,  "  in  the  mean  time.'' — ^5  See  327,  c. — 
iS  Bien,  "  rery  weli:'—^i  See  575.— i^  Habrd,  "  there  ivill  6e."  See  218, 
and  218,  a. — ^^  Podrd  decirse,  "  will  be  able  to  say  itself;''  "  ca7i  be  said." 
See  173,  and  116.— 29  See  329,  a.— 21  Para  despues  de  mis  dias,  ''after 
my  days,"  that  is,  "  afer  I  am  dead  and  gtnej^ 


346  SPANISH   READING   LESSONS. 


XLV. INGRATITUDE. 


Los  mismos  que  declaman  con  mayor  horror  contra  esle 
monstruoso  vicio,  lo  adoptan  inuchas  veces  como  a^  su  hijo 
querido,  por  cuanto^  es^  solo  feo  por  el  aspecto  que  mira 
aP  bienhechor ;  asi  como^  es  agradable  por  el  que  mira  a* 
log  ingratoSj  y  la  razon  es,  por  que  dispensa  a^  los  favore- 
oidos  de^  la  obligacion  del  reconocimiento  que  les  oprime  ; 
pues,  cjjianto^  mayor  as  el  beneficio  que  se  recibe,  tanto^ 
mayor  es  la  esclavitud  en  que  el  beneficiado  queda  consti- 
tuido ;  y  como  muy  pocos  gustan  arrastrar  estas  cadenas, 
se  libran  de  su  pesadez  con  solo  un  simple  olvido.  Quien 
no  quisiere  vivir  con  ingratos,  ha  de''  tener  mucho  trabajo, 
^i  ha  de''  vivir  en  el  mundo.  Infeliz  sera  el  hombre  que 
no  esperimente  ingratitudes,  porque  habra  hecho  muy  poco 
bien  a  los  demas.  Por  el  contrario,^  cuantos^  mas  ingra- 
tos hicieremos,^  tanto^  mas  noble  es  el  fin  que  nos  mueve^° 
a  obrar  bien.  Esta  es  la  condicion  del  corazon  humano. 
El  que  hace  bien  solamente  a  los  agradecidos,  comercia ; 
mas  el  que  lo  hace  a  los  ingratos,  obra  por  pura  liberalidad. 
El  uno  siembra^^  los  beneficios,  el  otro  los  derrama ;  uno 
precede  como  hombre,  el  otro  como  Dios ;  y  este  siempre 
tiene  el  delicado  y  agradable  consuelo  de  haber  obradt) 
bien,  que  es  el  gusto  mas  deleitable  que  puede  lisongear 
cl  paladar  de  una  alma  bien  formada. 

Teodoro  de  Almeyda. 


XLV.— 1  See  670.— 2  Pcyr  cuanto,  'Hnasmuch  a^."— 3  Es,  "U  is."— 
*  Ast  como,  "just  as." — 5  De,  "from." — «  Cuanto  thus  before  the  first 
comparative  and  tanto  before  the  second,  may  be  rendered  in  EngUsh  by 
the  definite  article  with  the  comparative ;  thus,  cuanto  mas  estudia,  tanto 
mas  aprende,  "  the  more  he-studies,  the  more  he-learns  ;  cuanto  mar/or  es 
el  beneficio,  tanto  mayor  es  la  obligacion  del  reconocimiento,  "the  greater 
the  benefit  is,  the  greater  is  the  obligation  of  acknowledgment." — ^  See 
339.-8  Por  el  contrario,  "on  the  contrary."—^  See  185.— ^^  See  186.— 
"  Siembra  fi-om  semhrar.    See  181. 


SPANISH   READING    LESSONS.  347 

XL VI. THE  BEAR,  THE    MONKEY,  AND    THE   HOG. ^A  FABLE. 

I. 

Un  oso  con  que  la  vida 
Ganaba^  un  Piamontes,^ 
La^  no  muy  bien  aprendida 
Danza^  ensayaba  en  dos  pies. 

II. 
Queriendo  hacer  de*  persona, 
Dijo  a  una  mona:  i  Que  tal?^ 
Era  perita  la  mona, 

Y  respondiole :  Muy  mal. 

III. 
Yo  creo,  replico  el  oso. 
Que  me  haces  poco  favor. 
I  Pues  que  ?*  i  mi  aire  no  es  garboso  ? 
No  hayo''  el  paso  con  primor  ? 

IV. 

Estaba  el  cerdo  presente, 

Y  dijo ;  I  Bravo,  bien  va !® 
Balarin  mas  escelente 

No  se  ha  visto,*  ni  vera. 

V. 

Echo  el  oso,  al  oir  esto, 
Sus  cuentas  alia  entre  si, 

Y  con  ademan  modesto 
Hubo  de^°  esclamar  asi: 


XL  VI. — 1  Ganciha  la  vida,  "  was-gainiTig  a  livelihood." — 2  See  575. — 
3  The  not  very  weUleamt  dance." — *  See  434. — 5  ^  Q^^  ted  ?  ^^  what  sort?" 
"  how  is  it  7"  or,  "  how  do  you  like  it?"-^  i  Pues  que  ?  "  and  why  ?"— 
7  See  185.-— s  Bien  va,  "  it  goes  well ;  "  it  is  well."  Va  from  ir. — 9  No  se 
ha  vistOf  "  has  not  been  seen."    See  173.     Visto  from  rer.— 1°  See  339. 


348  SPANISH   READING   LESSONS. 


Cuando  me  desaprobaba 
La  mona,  llegue  a^^  dudar : 
Mas  ya  que^^  el  cerdo  me  alaba, 
Muy  mal  debo  de^^  bailar. 

Vll. 

Guarde  para  su  regalo 
Esta  sentencia  un  autor  :^ 
Si  el  sabio  no  aprueba/^   j  malo  ! 
Si  el  necio  aplaude,  \  peor ! 

T.  DE  Iriarte. 


11  See  341.— 12  Ya  gue,  '' seeing  that  f'  '' since:' -^^  Debo  de  bailar,  "i 
Timst  danced'  Deber  before  an  infinitive  is  often  used  in  the  sense  of 
**io liave  to"  '^tobe  to." — i*  Aprueba,  from  aprobar. 


YOCABULAEY. 


ABBREVIATIONS 


USED  IN  THE  VOCABULARY. 


def.  art.  definite  article. 

indef.  art.  indefinite  article. 

nm.  noun  masculine. 

nf.  noun  feminine. 

sing,  singular. 

'pL  plural. 

m.  masculine. 

f.  feminine. 

•prop,  proper  noun  or  name. 

aug.  augmentative. 

dim.  diminutive. 

adj.  adjective. 

-part,  participle. 

pron.  pronoun. 

pers.  pron.  personal  pronoun. 

poss.  possessive. 

rel.  relative. 

iTidef.  indefinite. 

dem.  demonstrative. 

V.  verb. 

ta.  verb  active. 

vn.  verb  neuter. 

vr.  verb  reflective. 


irr.  V.  irregular  verb. 
impers.  v.  impersonal  verb. 
aiLX.  V.  auxiliary  verb. 
inf.  infinitive  mood. 
ind.  indicative      " 
imp.  imperative    " 
subj.  subjunctive  " 
ger.  gerund. 

pres.  present  tense 

impf.  imperfect  " 

perf.  def.  perfect-definite  " 
Ifut.  first-future  " 

defec.  V.  defective  verb. 

1  s.  or  1  p.  first  person  sing.,  or  pi 

2  5.  or  2  p.  second  "  "  " 
3*.  or  3;).  third  "  "  " 
adv.  adverb. 

prep,  preposition. 
conj.  conjunction. 
inteTy.  interjection. 
interrog.  interrogative. 
num.  numeral. 
F.  from. 


•  Adjectives  have  their  feminine  termination  separated  fi-om  the 
mascuUne  by  a  hyphen ;  thus,  bueno-a;  Espanol-a, 


PART    VI. 


VOCABULARY  OF  WORDS  IN  THE  READING  LESSONS. 


ACA 

A',  prep.y  to,  at,  on,  for,  in. 

Abandonddo-a,  part,  and  adj.^  aban- 
doned, left. 

Abandon^r,  inf.  ra.,  to  abandon,  to 
leave. 

Aborrec^r,  in/I  ra.,  to  hate,  to  de- 
spise, to  abhor. 

Aborr^zcas,  F.  Aborrecer,  sub.  pres. 
2  s.,  thou  mayest  hate. 

Abrigdr,  irif.  ra.,  to  shelter,  to  har- 
bor. 

Abril,  nm.i  April. 

Abrir,  irif.  ra.,  to  open. 

Absiirdo-a,  adj.^  absurd,  contrary 
to  reason. 

Abiinda,  F.  dbundar,  ind.  pres.  3  s., 
abounds. 

Abund^ncia,  rif.,  abundance,  plenty. 

Abundante,  adj-t  abundant. 

Abund^r,  irif.  m.,  to  abound,  to 
have  plenty. 

Abusar,  irif.  ra.,  to  abuse,  to  turn 
to  a  bad  purpose. 

Abiiso,  nm.,  abuse,  ill-use. 

Ac^ba,  F.  acabarf  ind.  pres.  3  s., 
,     finishes,  terminates. 

Acabdr,  inf.  ra.  and  rn.,  to  end,  to 
finish,  to  die. 

Academia,  ti/*.,  academy,  literary 
society. 

Ac^sOj  adv.,  perhaps,  perchance. 

Acatado-a,  part.,  respected,  revered. 

Acatar,  inf.  va  ,  to  respect,  to  .re- 
vere. 


ACT 

Accion,  nfy  action,  act. 

Acerca,  F.  acercar,  ind.  pres.  3  5., 
draws  near,  approaches. 

Acerc^ba,  F.  acercar,  ind.  impf.  3  s. 
was  drawing  near,  approached. 

Acerc^r,  irf.  vn.  and  rr.,  to  ap- 
proach, to  draw  near. 

Acog^r,  inf.  ra.,  to  admit  into  the 
house,  to  receive,  to  protect. 

Acomodddo-a,  adj.,  accommodated, 
fit,  convenient. 

Acomod^r,  inf.  ra.,  to  accommo- 
date ;  rr.,  to  condescend. 

Acompaii^do-a,  part.,  accompa- 
nied. 

Acompandr,  inf.  ra.,  to  accompany, 
to  attend. 

Acompanase,  F.  acompanar,  sub. 
impf.  3  s.,  might  accompany. 

Acord^r,  inf.  vn.  and  rr.,  to  remem- 
ber, to  consider  maturely. 

Acortddo,  part.,  shortened. 

Acortar,  inf.  va.,  to  shorten. 

Acostiimbran,  F.  acostumbrar,  ind. 
pres.  3  p.,  are  accustomed. 

Acostumbr^os,  F.  acostumbrai, 
imp.  2  p.,  accustom-yourselves. 

Acostumbrar,  inf.  va.  and  vn.,  to 
accustom  ;  to  be  accustomed. 

Actlvo-a,  adj.,  active,  diligent. 

A'cto,  nm.,  act,  action. 

Actual,  adj.,  actual,  present. 

Actualid^d,  nf,  actualness;  pres- 
ent time,  present  Btate  of  things. 


352 


VOCABULARY. 


AGE 

Acu^rdate,  F.  accordary  imp.  2  s.y 
remember  thou. 

AcuerdOj  F.  accordar,  ind.  pres.  1 
s.,  I  remember. 

Acuerdo,  nm.,  consent.     De  acuer- 
do,  of  one  mind. 

Aciisa,  F.  acusar,  ind.  pres.  3  s., 
accuses,  charges. 

Acusado-a,  part.,  accused,  charged. 

Acusador,  nm.,  accuser,  impeacher. 

Acusar,  inf.  va.,  to  accuse,  to  im- 
peach, to  charge  with  crime. 

Adelantado-a,  adj.,  advanced,  for- 
ward, early. 
•  Ademdn,  wm.,  gesture,  look,  atti- 
tude. 

Admiracion,  n/*.,  admiration. 

Admirado-a,  part.,  admired. 

Admirar,  irif.  va.,  to  admire;  to 
wonder  at. 

Adopter,  inf.  va.,  to  adopt. 

Adquirido,  part.,  acquired,  gained. 

Adquirir,  inf.  va.,  to  acquire,  to 
gain. 

Adu^na,  nf.,  custom-house. 

Advertir,  i7if.  va.,  to  advise,  to  in- 
form. 

Afamado-a,  adj.,- famed,  notorious. 

Afan,  nm.,  solicitude,^labor. 

Afan^r,  inf.  va.  and  vr.,  to  toil,  to 
labor,  to  be  very  solicitous. 

A-fecto,  nm,,  affection. 

Afeit^r,  inf.  va.,  to  shave. 

Afeminacion,  nf,  effemination,  ef- 
feminateness. 

Afeminddo-a,  part,  and  adj.,  effem- 
inated, effeminate. 

Afemin^r,  inf.  va.,  to  effeminate, 
to  enervate, 

Aficiones,  F.  afcionar,  sub.  pres.  2 
s.,  thou  mayest  affect,  thou  may- 
est  fancy. 

Afortunddo-a.ac?;.5  fortunate,  lucky. 

Ag6no-a,  adj.  or  indef.  pron.,  for- 


ALE 

eign,  another's,  of  another,  of 
others. 
Agit^ndo,  ger.,  agitating,  waving, 

shaking. 
Agradable,  adj.,  agreeable,  pleasant. 
Agradar,  iif.  va.,  to  please,  to  grat- 
ify, to  render  acceptable. 
Agradecido-a,  adj.,  thankful,  grate- 
ful. 
Agradecimiento,    wm.,    gratitude, 

gratefulness. 
Agresion,  nf.,   aggression,   attack, 

assault. 
Agricultiira,  nf,  agriculture,  hus- 
bandry. 
A'gua,  nf,  water. 
Aguardar,  inf.  va.,  to  wait  for,  to 

expect,  to  grant  time. 
Aguaviva,  n.  prop.,  Aguaviva. 
Agiido-a,  adj.,  acute,  sharp. 
Ahora,  adv.^  now,  the  present. 
Aire,  nm.,  air;  grace,  manner. 
Al,  contraction  oi  a  el  or  d  el,  to 
the,  at  the,  in  the,  for  the ;  or,  to 
him,  at  him. 
Alaba,   F.  alabar,  ind.   pres.  3  s., 

praises,  commends. 
Alabddo-a,  part,  and  adj.,  praised, 

applauded. 
Alarm dr,  inf.  va.,  to  alarm. 
Alaro,  n.  prop.,  Alaro. 
A  lava,  71.  prop.,  Alava. 
Alcala,  n.  prop.,  Alcala. 
Alcance,  nm.,  arm's  length,  reach. 
Alcanzar,  17?/!  va.j  to  overtake,  to 

reach,  to  gain,  to  obtain. 
Alegr^r,  inf.  va.  and  vr.,  to  rejoice^  ' 
to  be  merry,  to  gladden,  to  be 
glad. 
Alegrla^  nf.,   mirth,   joy,   hilarity, 

gladness. 
Aleman,  n.  prop.,  a  German. 
Alemdn-a,  adj.,  German. 
Alefh^nia,  n.  prop.,  Germany. 


VOCABULARY. 


353 


AMB 

A.lgo,   indef.    pron.,    something,    a 
little,  anything,  aught. 

A1go,  adv.,  somewhat,  a  little. 

Aigun,  indef.  pron.,  some,  some 
one. 

Alguno-a,  indef.  pron.,  some,  some- 
body, any,  anybody. 

Aliado,  nm.,  ally. 

Alimento,  nm.,  nourishment,  food, 
aUment. 

Alistar,  irif.  va.,  to  enlist,  to  enrol. 

Aliviar,  inf.  va.,  to  succor,  to  alle- 
viate, to  solace. 

Aljubarrota,  n.  prop.,  Aljubarrota. 

Alia,  adv.,  there. 

Alii,  adv.,  there,  at  that  place. 

A^lma,  rf.,  soul,  courage,  spirit. 

Almacen,  nm.,  storehouse,  maga- 
zine. 

Alrededor,  nm.,  environ,  neighbor- 
hood. 

Altar,  nm.,  altar. 

Altivo-a,  adj.,  haughty,  proud,  lof- 
ty. 

A'lto-a,  adj.,  high,  tall,  lofty. 

A'ma,  F.  amar,  ind.  pres.  3  s.,  loves. 

A'ma,  P.  amar,  imp.  2  s.,  love 
thou. 

Amado-a,  part,  and  adj.,  loved ;  be- 
loved. 

Amanecer,  inf.  impers.  v.,  to  dawn, 
to  grow  light. 

Amante,  nm.,  lover,  sweetheart. 

Amante,  adj.,  loving,  fond. 

Amar,  inf.  va.,  to  love,  to  regard 
with  affection,  to  like. 

Amargo-a,  adj.,  bitter,  acrid ;  pain- 
ful. 

Amarrillean,  F.  amarrillear,  ind. 
pres.  3  p.,  to  grow  yellow. 

Ambiciun,  ??/.,  ambition. 

Ambicion^r,  inf.  va.,  to  crave,  to 
pursue  with  anxious  desire,  to 
covet.  'i 


ANT 

Ambicioso-a,  adj.,  ambitious,  aspi- 
ring. 

A'mbos-as,  indef.  pron.  pi.,  both. 

Amenaza,  F.  amenazar,  ind.  pres. 
3  s.,  threatens. 

Amenazar,  irf.  va.,  to  threaten,  to 
menace. 

Amenidad,  -nf.,  amenity,  pleasant- 
ness, agreeableness. 

America,  n.  prop.,  America. 

Americano-a,  adj.,  American. 

Amigo,  nm.,  friend. 

Amistad,  nf,  friendship,  amity. 

A''mo,  nm.,  master,  owner. 

Amor,  nm.,  love,  affection,  esteem. 

Amor6so-a,  adj.,  affectionate,  lev 
ing. 

Amparo,  nm.,  protection,  favor. 

Analisis,  ?if.,  analysis. 

A^ncho-a,' adj.,  broad,  wide. 

Anciano-a,   adj.   and    2i.,   old;  old 
man ;  old  woman. 

Anfite^tro,  nm.,  amphitheatre. 

A'ngel,  nm.,  angel. 

Angusto-a,  adj.,  narrow,  close. 

Angostura,  nf.,  narrowness ;  a  naj 
row  pass. 

Angiistia,  nf,  anguish,  affiiction. 

Anhelar,  inf.  va.,  to  desire  anxious 
ly,  to  covet,  to  wish  eagerly. 

Anima,   F.  animar,  ind.  pres.  3  «. 
animates,  revives,  revivifies. 

Animado,  part.,  animated. 

Animar,  inf.  va.,  to  animate,  to  re- 
vivify, to  revive. 

Aniverscirio,  nm.,  anniversary. 

Ansiar,  inf.  va.,  to  be  anxious  for, 
to  ^desire  anxiously,  to  long  for. 

AnsJosamente,  adv.,  anxiously,  ear- 
nestly. 

Ansioso-a,  adj.,  anxious,  eager,  un- 
easy. 

A'nte,p?'ej>.,  before  ii>  th^  presence 
of. 


30* 


354 


VOCABULARY. 


APR 

Anleojo,  nm.^  spy-glass ;  eye-glass. 
Anterior,  adj.,  anterior,  former. 
A'ntes,  prep,  and  adv.,  before. 
A'ntes  de,  and  A'ntes  que,  same  as 

dntes. 
Antiguo-a,  adj.,  ancient,  old,  anti- 
quated. 
Anti-nacion^l,  adj.,  antinational. 
Antonio,  n.  prop.,  Anthony. 
Anunciar,  inf.  va.,  to  announce. 
Aiiadio,  F.  anadir,  ind.  perf.  dtf. 

3  s.,  added. 
Aiiadir,  inf.  va.,  to  add. 
Ano,  nm.,  year. 

Apag^do-a,  part,  and  adj.,  extin- 
guished, quenched,  softened. 
Aparec^r,  irf.  va.,  to  appear,  to  come 

forth. 
Apasionado-a,  adj.,  very  fond. 
Apdtico-a,  adj.,  apathetic,  indiffer- 
ent. 
Ap6nas,  adv.,  scarcely,  as  soon  as, 

no  sooner  than. 
Apetecer,  inf.  va.,  to  long  for,  to  de- 
sire earnestly. 
Aplaudlr,  irif.  va.,  to  applaud. 
Aplauso,  nm.,  applause,  praise,  clap- 
ping. 
Aplicacion,  application,  direction. 
AplicsCr,  irif.  va.,  to  apply,  to  attri- 
bute. 
Aplicate,  P.  aplicar,  imp.  2  s.,  ap- 
ply thyself. 
Aplico,  F.  aplicar,   ind.  perf.  def. 

3  s.,  applied. 
Apologista,  nm.,  apologist,  excuser. 
Apreciable,  adj.,  appreciable,  valua- 
ble. ^ 
Apreci^r,  inf.  va.,  to  appreciate,  to 

value. 
Apr^cio,  nm.,  value,  esteem,  esti- 
mation. 
Aprend^r,  inf.  va.,  to  learn,  to  ac- 
quire knowledge. 


ARR 

Aprendldo-a,  part,  learnt,  under* 

stood. 
Apreton,   nm.,   pressure ;   earnest- 
ness, energetic  action. 
Aprobacion,  rf.,  approbation. 
Aprobar,  irf.  va.,  to  approve. 
Apru^ba,  F.  aprobar ^  ind.  pres.  3  s., 

approves. 
A'pto-a,  adj.,  apt,  fit. 
Aqu^l,  aquella,  dem.pron.,  that,  that 
one,  the  former;  he,  she;  him, 
her. 
Aquello,    pron.   dem.,     that,    that 

thing. 
Aqui,  adv.,  here,  in  this  place. 
Aragon,  n.  prop.,  Arragon. 
A'rbol,  nm.,  tree. 

Archives,    nm.  pi.,   archives,   the 
place  where  records  are  preserv- 
ed ;  records* 
Ar^na,  rf.,  sand. 
Arg^l,  n.  prop.,  Algiers. 
Argelino-a,  adj.,  Algerine. 
A'rma,  nf,  arm,  weapon. 
Armdda,  nf.,  fleet,  squadron. 
A'rmate,  F.  armar,  imp.  2  s.,  arm 

thyself. 
Arr^nca,  F.  arrancar,  ind.  pres.  3  s., 
plucks  out,  extirpates,  snatches. 
Arrancando,  ger.,  plucking. 
Arrancar,  inf.  va.,  to  pluck,  to  ex- 
tirpate, to  snatch,  to  draw  out. 
Arreglado-a,  pari,  and  adj.,  regu- 
lated ;  well  organized. 
Arreglar,  irf.  va.,  to  regulate,  to  re- 
duce to  order,  to  organize. 
Arr^glo,7im.,  regulation,  order. 
Arremet^r,  inf.va.,  to  attack,  to  as- 
sail with  fury. 
Arrepentimi^nto,  nm.,  repentance. 

penitence. 
Arrepentirse,  inf.  vr.,  to  repent,  tu 
feel  sorrow  for  something  said  o) 
done. 


VOCABULARY. 


355 


BAJ 

Arrojdndo,  ger.^  running,  darting, 
throwing. 

Arrojar,  inf.  va.,  to  throw,  to  dart, 
to  hurl. 

Arruinddc-a,  part.,  ruined. 

A'rte,  nm.  and  nf.,  art.  (It  may  be 
either  masculine  or  feminine  in 
the  singular ;  but  feminine  only 
in  the  plural.) 

Artesano,  nm.,  artisan,  mechanic. 

Artificio,  nm.,  art  or  skill  with 
which  a  thing  is  made,  work- 
manship, craft. 

Asegiira,  F.  asegurar,  ind.  pres.  3  s., 
assures. 

Asesin^r,  inf.  va.,  to  assassinate,  to 
murder. 

Asesinato,  nm.,  assassination,  mur- 
der. 

Asesino,  nm.,  assassin,  murderer. 

Asi,  adv.,  thus,  so,  in  this  manner. 

Asiento,  nm.,  seat,  chair. 

Asista,  F.  asistar,  imp.  3  s.,  let 
(him)  assist,  may  (he)  assist. 

.4sistencia,  nf,  assistance,  help,  aid. 

Aspecto,  nm.,  aspect,  look,  counte- 
nance, appearance. 

Aspir^r,  inf.  vn.,  to  aspire,  to  aim 
at,  to  desire. 

Astiirias,  n.  prop.,  AstUria,  a  pro- 
vince in  the  north  of  Spain. 

Asiinto,  nm.,  affair,  business,  sub- 
ject. 

Atenas,  n.  prop.,  Athens. 

Atencion,  nf,  attention,  civility. 

Atender,  inf.  vn.,  to  attend,  to 
await. 

Ateni^nse,  n.  prop.,  Athenian. 


BAJ 

Atent^r,  inf.  va.,  to  attempt,  to  try 
with  circumspection. 

Atractivo,  nm.,  charm,  attraction. 

Atribuir,  inf.  va.,  to  attribute,  to  as- 
cribe, to  impute. 

Atroz,  adj.,  atrocious,  heinous. 

Aturdir,  inf.  va.,  to  perturb,  to  dis- 
turb, to  confuse. 

Audacia,  nf,  audacity,  boldness, 
courage. 

Aumenta,  F.  aumentar,  ind.  pres. 
3  s.,  increases,  augments,  en- 
larges. 

.Aumentado-a,  part.,  increased. 

Aumentar,  irf.  vn.,  to  augment,  to 
increase,  to  grow  larger. 

Aumento,  nm.,  increase,  enlarge- 
ment, augmentation. 

Aun,  adv.,  yet,  still ;  conj.,  notwith- 
standing. 

Aiinque,  conj.,  though,  although, 
even  if. 

Aurora,  rf.,  the  dawn. 

Austria,  n.  prop.,  Austria. 

Autor,  nm.,  author,  inventor. 

Autoridad,  nf,  authority. 

Avanza,  F.  avanzar,  ind.  pres.  3  «., 
advances,  goes  forward. 

A've,  71  f.,  bird,  fowl. 

Aventurddo-a,  adj.,  fortunate. 

Avergonzado-a,  pai-t.  and  adj.^ 
shamed,  ashamed. 

Averiguar,  inf.  va.,  to  investigate, 
to  ascertain,  to  inquire,  to  find  out. 

Ayala,  n.  prop.,  Ayala. 

Ayud^r,  inf.  va.,  to  aid,  to  help,  to 
favor. 

Azogue,  nm.,  quicksilver. 


Bailando,  ger.,  dancing. 
Bailar,  inf.  vn.,  to  dance. 
Bailarln,  nm.,  dancer. 
Baj^r,  inf.  va.,  to  lower,  to  let  down, 
t )  bend  downwards. 


Baj^za,  nf,  low  or  mean  act,  un- 
worthy action. 

B^jo-a,  adj.,  low,  n^tcan. 

Bajo,  adv.  and  prep.,  under,  below 
beneath,  underneath. 


356 


VOCABULAKI. 


CAB 

B^la,  7?/.,  ball,  bullet,  shot. 

Balcon,  nm.,  balcony. 

Bandera,  rif.,  banner,  standard ;  in- 
fantry. 

Bandido,  nm.,  bandit,  highwayman, 
robber. 

Bdndo,  nm.,  party,  band  of  men. 

Baiiar,  inf.  va.,  to  bathe,  to  bedew. 

B^rba,  nf.,  beard,  chin. 

Barbaro-a,  adj.,  barbarous. 

Barco,  nm.,  boat.  Sarco  de  vapor, 
steamboat. 

Barril,  nm^,  barrel, 

Basta,  F.  bastar,  ind.  pres.  3  s., 
suflSces,  is  enough;  it  is  suflS.- 
cient. 

Bastante,  adv.,  enough,  sufl&ciently. 

Batalla,  nf.,  battle,  fight,  contest. 

Batallon,  nm.,  battalion. 

Belen,  n.  prop.,  Belen. 

Bello-a,  adj.,  beautiful,  fine,  hand- 
some. 

BelMza,  nf.,  beauty. 

Bendecido-a,  part.,  blessed. 

Bendeciran,  P.  bendecir,  ind.  Ifut. 
3  -p.,  they  will  l^ess. 

Bendicion,  nf.,  benediction,  bless- 
ing. 

Beneficiado-a,  jjart.,  benefitted. 

Beneficiar,  inf.  va.,  to  benefit,  to  do 
good  to. 

Beneficio,  nin.,  benefit,  favor,  bene- 
faction. 

Benefico-a,  adj.,  beneficent,  kind. 

Benevolencia,  nf.,  benevolence, 
good- will,  kindness. 

Besar,  inf.  va.,  to  kiss. 
*Bien,  nm.,  good,  blessing;  property. 
Bienes,  goods,  property,  wealth. 


CAB 

Bien,  adv.  and  adj.,  well,  good, 
very. 

Bienhechor,  nm.,  benefactor. 

Blanco,  nm.,  end,  aim,  object. 

Boca,  nf.,  mouth. 

Bondad,  nf.  goodness,  kindness. 

Borasco,  n.  prop.,  Borasco. 

Borrar,  inf.  va.,  to  efface,  to  blot 
out,  to  expunge. 

Bosque,  nm.,  wood,  forest,  grove. 

Botica,  nf,  apothecary's  shop. 

Boticario,  nm.,  apothecary. 

Bravo !  inter.,  bravo  !  bravely  done 
good ! 

Brazo,  nm.,  arm. 

Bretaiia,  n.  prop.,  Britain. 

Brillante,  adj.,  brilliant,  splendid. 

Brillo,  nm.,  splendor,  brilliancy 

Bilsa,  nf,  breeze. 

Bruto,  nm.,  brute. 

Buen,:  ac/;.,  good,  fine. 

Bueno-a,  adj.,  good.;  well. 

Biique,  nm.,  vessel,  ship. 

Biirla,  P.  burlar,  ind.  pres.  3  a. 
jests,  jokes,  laughs  at,  ridi- 
cules. 

Burlaron,  P.  burlar,  ind.  ptrf  def 
3  p.,  they  ridiculed,  they  made 
sport  of. 

Burlarse,  inf.  vr.,  to  jest,  to  make 
sport  of,  to  ridicule. 

Biisca,  nf,  search,  the  act  of  search- 
ing. 

Buscaba,  P.  buscar,  ind.  impf.  3  «., 
was  seeking. 

Busc^do,  'part.,  sought. 

Buscando,  ger.,  seeking. 

Buscar,  inf.  va.,  to  seek,  to  search 
for. 


C, 


Caball^ro,  nm.,  cavalier,  gentleman, 

knight,  sir. 
Cab^Uo,  nm.,  horse. 


Caber,  inf.  vn.,  to  contain  to  have 
room,  to  be  contained  to  find 
place. 


VOCABULARY. 


357 


CAN 

Cab^za,  ti/*.,  head. 

Cabo,  nm.,  end,  termination,  close. 

C^da,  indcf.  pron.^  each,  every. 

Cada  cual,  indef.  pron.,  each  one. 

Cada  lino,  indef.  pron.y  every  one, 
every  body. 

Cadaver,  nm.,  corpse,  dead  body. 

Cadena,  Jif.,  chain ;  series. 

Caen,  F.  caer,  ind.  pres.  3  p.,  they 
fall. 

Ca^r,  inf.  vn.,  to  fall,  to  befall,  to 
decrease. 

Caldo,  part.,  fallen  ;  decreased. 

Cajon,  nm.,  box,  chest. 

Calculo,  nm.f  calculation,  compu- 
tation. 

Calculista,  nm.,  calculist ;  calcula- 
tor. 

Calahorra,  n.  prop.,  Calahorra. 

Callar,  inf.  vn.,  to  keep  silence,  to 
conceal,  to  be  silent. 

Callasen,  F.  callar,  sub.  imp/.  3  p., 
they  should  be  silent,  should  keep 
silence. 

Calle,  n/.,  street ;  road,  way. 

Calumniadur,  nm.,  calumniator, 
slanderer. 

Calur6so-a,  adj.,  warm,  hot. 

Camarada,  nf.,  comrade,  compan- 
ion, partner. 

Camarero,  nm,.,  steward;  headman- 
servant  in  great  houses. 

Cambiado,  part.,  changed,  shifted. 

Cambicir,  inf.  va.,  to  change,  to  al- 
ter, to  shift ;  to  barter. 

Camino,  nm.,  road,  way.  Camino 
de  hierro,  rail-road. 

Oaminito,  nm.  dem.,  little  road, 
pati*. 

Cdmpo,  nm.,  country ;  field. 

Cana,  nj".,  grey  hair. 

Canalla,  nf,  rabble,  mob;  popu- 
lace. 

Canciller,  nm.,  chancellor. 


CAS 

Cans^do-a,  part,  and  adj.,  fatigued, 
wearied,  tired. 

Cantabria,  n.  prop.,  Cantabria. 

Cantidad,  nf.,  quantity,  sum. 

Capaz,  adj.,  able,  capable,  skilful. 

Capital,  nf,  metropolis,  chief  city 
of  a  country,  capital 

Capitular,  inf.  ra.,  to  capUulate. 

Cara,  see  caro. 

Carabina,  ri/!,  carbine,  a  small  rifle. 

Caracter,  nm.,  character,  disposi- 
tion. 

Cardenal,  nm..,  cardinal,  one  hold- 
ing the  ecclesiastical  office  of 
Cardinal. 

Cargado-a,  part.,  loaded,  burdened. 


Cargo,  nm.,  load  ;  charge  ;  accusa- 
tion. 

Caritativo-a,  adj.,  charitable,  kind, 
friendly,  benevolent. 

Carlos,  n.  prop.,  Charles. 

Caro-a,  adj.,  dear,  beloved,  high- 
priced;  costly. 

Carrera,  nf.,  career,  course  of  life, 
profession;  race. 

Carruage,  nm.,  carriage,  vehicle. 

Carta,  nf.,  letter,  epistle. 

Cartagines,  nm.  prop.,  Carthagin- 
ian. 

Cartagines-a,  adj.,  Carthaginian. 

Casa,  iif.,  house ;  home. 

Casar,  inf.  va.,  to  marry. 

Cascada,  nf,  cascade,  water-fall. 

Casco,  nm.,  cask. 

C^si,  adv.,  almost,  very  nearly,  just. 

Caso,  nm.,  case,  event ;  chance. 

Castig^r,  inf.  va.,  to  punish,  to 
chastise. 

Castigara,  F.  castigar,  ind.  Ifut. 
3  s.,  will  punish. 

Castigo,  nm..,  punishment,  chas- 
tisement. 

Castilla,  7u  prop.,  Castile. 


358 


VOCABULARl 


CIE 

Casualid^d,  n/!,  casualty,  chance, 
unforeseen  event. 

Casualm^nte,  adv.^  casually,  acci- 
dentally. 

Caturce,  num.  adj.,  fourteen. 

Caudal,  nm.,  treasure,  property. 

Caudillo,  nm.,  commander,  chief, 
leader. 

Causdr,  inf.  ra.,  to  cause,  to  occa- 
sion, to  produce. 

Cautivo,  nm,,  captive,  slave. 

Cayendo,  ger.,  falling,  tumbling. 

Cayo,  F.  caer,  ind.  per/,  def.  3  s.,  fell. 

Ceder,  inf.  ra.,  to  grant,  to  yield,  to 
cede. 

Cedi^ndo,  ger.,  yielding. 

Cediesen,  F.  ceder j  sub.  impf.  3.  /?., 
they  should  yield. 

Censiira,  nf.,  censure,  blame,  criti- 
cism, reproach. 

Centenar,  nm.,  hundred. 

C^ntro,  nm.,  centre. 

Cerca,  adv.,  near,  at  hand;  con- 
cerning. 

Cerca  de,  prep.,  near,  close  to. 

Cerc^no-a,  adj.,  near,  adjoining. 

C^rdo,  nm.,  hog,  pig. 

Cerrddo-a,  part.,  shut,  closed. 

Cerrdr,  inf.  va.,  to  close,  to  shut,  to 
lock. 

C^iTO  Gordo,  n.  prop.,  Cerro  Gordo. 

Ces^r,  inf.  va.,  to  cease,  to  termi- 
nate, to  close. 

Cetro,  nm.,  sceptre. 

Charlatan,  nm.,  charlatan,  quack. 

Chipre,  n.  prop.,  Cyprus  (an  island 
in  the  Mediterranean  sea). 

Choc^nte,  adj.,  glaring,  provoking, 
disgusting. 

Cicatriz,  nf.,  the  mark  remaining 
after  a  w^ound,  scar. 

Cielo,  nm.,  heaven;  sky,  air. 

Ciencia,  nf.,  science,  learning, 
knowledge. 


COM 

Ci^rtamente,  adv.,  certainly,  surely. 
Ci6rto-a,  adj.,  certain,  sure,  tru3. 
Clma,  nf.,  summit,  top. 
Cinco,  num.  adj.,  five. 
Cincuenta,  num.  adj.,  fifty. 
Circund^r,  inf.  va..  to  surround,  to 

encircle. 
Citado-a,  part.,  cited,  mentioned. 
Citar,  inf.  va.,  to  cite,  to  mention, 

to  appoint. 
Ciudad,  rif.,  city. 

Ciudadela,  nf,  citadel,  a  small  fort- 
ress situated  so  as  to  defend  a 

city. 
Claramente,  adv.,  clearly,  plainly. 
Claro-a,  adj.,  clear,  bright ;  obvious, 

manifest. 
Clase,  nf.,  class ;  rank,  order. 
Clav^r,  inf.  va.,  to  nail,  to  stick,  to 

prick,  to  pierce. 
Clima,  nm.,  climate,  clime. 
Cob^rde,  nm.   and    adj.,    coward, 

cowardly. 
Cuche,  nm.,  coach,  barouche. 
Codicia,  n/*.,  cupidity,  desire,  covet- 

ousness. 
Codici6so-a,  adj.,  greedy,  covetous. 
Cog^r,  inf.  va.,  to  catch,  to  collect, 

to  gather. 
Cogera,   F.   coger,  ind.  Ifut.  3  s., 

will  gather. 
ColMdo,  nm.,  hill,  small  eminence. 
Colocan,  F.  colocar^  ind.  pres.  3  p., 

they  place. 
Colocado-a,  part.,  placed,  arranged. 
Colocar,   inf.   va.,  to  place,  to  ar- 
range. 
Colonia,  nf,  colony. 
Comb^te,  nm.,  fight,  combat. 
Combatir,  irif.  va.,  to  fi^ht,  to  at* 

tack,  to  combat. 
Comedia,  nf,  comedy,  play. 
Comence,  F.  comenzar,  ind.  perf. 

d^.  I  $.,!  began,  I  commenced. 


VOCABUI  ARY. 


359 


COM 

Coment^rio,  nm.^  comment;  com- 
mentary. 

Comenzar,  inf.  vcu  and  vn.^  to  com- 
mence, to  begin. 

Comer,  inf.  va.,  to  eat,  to  dine. 

Comerci^nte,  nm.,  trader,  mer- 
chant. 

Comerciar,  inf.  rm.,  to  trade,  to  traf- 
fic, to  exercise  commerce. 

Cometer,  inf.  va.,  to  commit;  to 
entrust,  to  charge ;  to  attempt. 

Cometido,  pari.,  committed. 

Comida,  nf.,  meal,  dinner. 

Comisiun,  rif.,  commission ;  trust. 

Como,  adv.,  as,  like,  in  what  man- 
ner.   iComo?  how?  why? 

Compadecerse,  inf.  vr.,  to  pity,  to 
commiserate,  to  feel  for. 

Compadecera,  F.  compadecerse,  ind. 
I  fat.  3  s.,  will  pity,  will  feel  com- 
passion for. 

Compan^ro,  mn.,  companion,  asso- 
ciate. 

Compaiila,  sf,  company. 

Comparaci6n,  nf.,  comparison. 

Comparddo,  part.,  compared. 

Compasion,  nf,  compassion,  pity. 

Completamente,  adv.,  completely, 
entirely. 

Completer,  inf.  va.,  to  complete,  to 
finish,  to  consummate. 

Completo-a,  adj.,  complete,  entire, 
finished. 

Complice,  nm.,  accomplice,  asso- 
ciate. 

Componer,  inf.  va.,  to  compose ;  to 
frame. 

Comprehend^r,  see  comprender. 

Comprende,  or  comprehende,  F. 
comprender,  or  comprehende?-,  ind. 
pres.  3  s.,  comprehends,  under- 
stands. 

Comprender,  inf.  va.,  to  compre- 
hend, to  understand,  to  comprise. 


CON 

Compro,  F.  comprar,  ind.  perf.  def. 
3  s.,  bought,  purchased. 

Compuesto-a,  part.,  F.  componer, 
composed,  made  up. 

Comiin,  adj.,  common ;  vulgar. 

Comunicaciun,7j/'.,  communication, 
intercourse. 

Comunicar,  iiif.  va.,  to  commu- 
nicate, to  inform. 

Con,  prep.,  with,  by,  for.  Con  todo, 
yet,  nevertheless. 

Conceder,  inf.  va.,  to  concede,  to 
grant,  to  allow,  to  give. 

Concedido-a,  part,  conceded,  grant- 
ed, bestowed. 

Concepto,  nm.,  conception,  thought 
idea. 

Conciencia,  nf,  knowledge,  con- 
science. 

Conciudadano,  nm.,  fellow-citizen, 
fellow-countrymen. 

Concluir,  nf.  va.,  to  conclude,  to 
close. 

Conde,  rvm.,  Count  (a  title  of  rank) 

Condenar,  inf.  va.,  to  condemn,  tu 
sentence. 

Condicion,  n/!,  condition,  situation,- 
disposition. 

Conduclr,  inf.  va.,  to  conduct,  to 
convey. 

Condiicta,  nf,  conduct,  behavior, 
deportment. 

Confiar,  inf.  va.  to  confide,  to  trust 
in. 

Gonflicto,  nm.,  conflict,  struggle 
contest. 

Confundido-a,  part.,  confounded' 
confused. 

Confundlr,  inf.  va.,  to  confound,  to 
perplex,  to  throw  into  confusion. 

Confusion,  nf.,  confusion,  disorder. 

Congreso,  mn.,  congress. 

Conjurar,  inf.  va.,  to  conjure,  to  im- 
plore. 


3G0 


VOCABULARY. 


CON 

Conmigo,  prep,  and pron.,  witfrme. 

Conocen,  F.  conocer,  ind.pres.  3  p., 
they  know. 

Conocer,  inf.  va.,  to  know,  to  un- 
derstand. 

Conociendo,  ger.,  knowing,  being 
acquainted  with. 

Conocimiento,  nm.,  knowledge, 
learning,  acquaintance. 

Conquista,  rif.,  conquest ;  subjuga- 
tion. 

Conquistadur,r*m., conqueror,  victor. 

Conquistar,  vif.  va.,  to  conquer,  to 
subdue. 

Consagrado-a,  part.,  and  adj.,  con- 
secrated; sacred,  devoted. 

Consagrar,  inf.  va.,  to  consecrate,  to 
devote. 

vonseguir,  inf.  va.,  to  succeed,  to 
obtain,  to  attain. 

Oonsejo,  nm.,  advice,  counsel,  judg- 
ment. 

Oonservar,  inf.  va.,  to  preserve,  to 
guard. 

Considera,  F.  considerar,  ind.pres. 
3  s.  and  imp.  2  s.,  considers  ;  con- 
sider thou. 

Considerar,  inf.  va.,  to  consider,  to 
reflect,  to  think. 

Consignar,  inf.  va.,  to  consign. 

Oonsiguiu,  F.  conseguir,  ind.  perf. 
def.  3  s.,  succeeded,  gained. 

Consigo,prcp.  and  pron.,  with  him, 
with  you,  with  themselves. 

Consolad6r-a,  adj.,  consolatory, 
tending  to  give  comfort. 

Consolar,  inf.  va.,  to  console,  to 
comfort,  to  assuage. 

Consta,  F.  constar,  ind.  pres.  3  s.,  it 
is  evident,  it  appears. 

Constancia,  nf,  constancy,  steadi- 
ness. 

Constar,  inf.  v.  Impers.,  to  be  evi- 
dent, to  appear  from. 


CON 

Constituido-a,  part.,  constituted; 
bound. 

Construir,  inf.  va.,  to  construct,  to 
form,  to  build. 

Consuelo,  nm.,  consolation,  relief, 
comfort. 

Consuinado-a,  adj.  and /)ar/.,  con- 
summate, complete,  accompRsh- 
ed. 

Contando,  ger.,  counting,  reck- 
oning ;  relying,  relating. 

Contar,  inf.  va.,  to  count,  to  num- 
ber ;  to  relate  ;  to  rely. 

Contempla,  F.contemplar,  ind.pres. 
3  s.,  contemplates  ;  and  imp.  2  s., 
contemplate  thou. 

Contemplar,  inf.  va.,  to  contem- 
plate. 

Contentar,  inf.  va.,  to  satisfy,  to 
please,  to  gratify. 

Contento-a,  adj.,  contented,  satis- 
fied. 

Contestar,  inf.  va.,  to  reply,  to  an- 
swer, to  prove, 

Contigo,  prep,  and  pron.,  with  thee, 
with  thyself 

Contlguo-a,  adj.,  contiguous,  ad- 
joining. 

Continente,  nm.,  continent,  main- 

^  land. 

Continuamente,  adv.,  continually, 
always. 

Continuando,  ger.,  continuing,  last- 
ing. 

Continuar,  inf.  vn.,  to  continue,  to 
last. 

Continue,  F.  continuar,  ind.  perf. 
def.  3  s.,  he  continued. 

Contlnuo-a,  adj.,  continual ;  inces- 
sant. 

Contra,  prep.,  against,  contrary  to. 

Contrdrio-a,  adj.,  contrary.  A* 
contrario  or  por  d  contrario,  on 
the  contrary. 


VOCABULARY. 


861 


COS 

Jontribuido-a,  part.,  contributed. 

Coniribuir,  inf.  ra.,  to  contribute, 
to  bear  a  part. 

Contusion,  ??/*.,  contusion 

Convencldo,  part.,  convinced. 

Conv^ntOj  nm.,  convent. 

Oonversur,  inf.  vn.,  to  talk,  to  con- 
verse. 

Convertir,  inf.  va.,  to  convert,  to 
change. 

Convi^ite,  F.  convertir,  ind.  pres. 
3  s.,  converts. 

Convocar,  inf.  va.,  to  convoke,  to 
assemble,  to  call  tog?ther. 

Convulsion,  nf,  convulsion. 

Cupa,  nf.,  cup ;  meeting  of  the 
branches  of  trees,  bower. 

Corazon,7im.,  heart ;  spirit,  courage. 

Con'na,  nf,  crown. 

Coron.Ir,  inf.  va.,  to  crown,  to  or- 
nament or  decorate  the  top  of  any 
thing. 

Correo,  nm.,  mail,  post. 

Correr,  inf.  va.,  to  run.  Correrpc- 
llgro,  to  be  in  peril  or  danger. 

Corridnte,  adj.,  current,  marketable, 
merchantable. 

Corroborado-a,  part.,  confirmed, 
corroborated. 

Corrobor^r,  inf.  va.,  to  confirm,  to 
corroborate. 

Cors^rio,  nm.,  corsair,  the  com- 
mander of  a  privateer. 

Curte,  nf,  court,  capital  city,  royal 
residence. 

Cortediid,  nf,  shortness,  brevity. 

Cortes,  adj.,  courteous,  polite,  civil, 
genteel. 

CovtO'Q, adj.,  short;  small,  concise. 

Cosa,  nf,  thing.  Cusa  de,  prep., 
about,  concerning. 

Cosecha,  nf,  harvest,  crops. 

Custa,  ^f.J  cost,  expense,  charge; 
coasU 

31 


CUA 

Coster,  inf.  vn.,  to  cost,  to  be  bought 
for ;  to  suffer  loss. 

Costumbre,  nf.,  custom,  habit,  man- 
ners. 

Creando,  ger.,  creating,  making. 

Crear,  inf.  va.,  to  create,  to  make, 
to  establish. 

Crecer,  inf.  vn.,  to  grow,  to  in- 
crease, to  augment. 

Crecido-a,  part.,  grown,  increased. 

Cre^r,  inf.  va.,  to  believe,  to  think, 
to  credit. 

Creias,  F.  creer,  ind.  impf. 
2  s.,  thou  wast  believing,  thou 
thoughtest. 

Crlado,  nm.,  male-servant. 

Crimen,  nm.,  crime,  offence. 

Criminal,  adj.,  criminal 

Crisol,  nm.,  crucible. 

Critica,  nf,  criticism. 

Crltico,  nm.,  critic,  criticiser. 

Crunica,  nf,  chronicle,  register  ol 
events. 

Cruzado-a,  part.,  crossed. 

Cruzar,  inf.  va.,  to  cross  ;  to  lay 
one  thing  across  another. 

Cuadruplicar,  inf.  va.,  to  quadrupli- 
cate, to  increase  four  times. 

Cual  {el  or  la),  pron,  ret.,  which, 
who,  that. 

Cull  7  pron.  inter  rag.,  which  ?  (of 
the  two.)     Cada  cual,  each  one. 

Cual,  adv.,  as,  like. 

Cualesqui^ra,  indef.  pron.  pi.,  who- 
ever, any  body  who.  whatever. 

Cualidad,  nf,  quality,  qualifica- 
tion. 

Cualquier,  indef.  pron.,  whoever, 
whichever,  whatever,  any. 

Cualquiera,  indef.  pron.,  whoever, 
whatever,  he  who,  any  one. 

Cu^n,  adv.,  how,  how  much. 

Cudndo,  adv.i  when ;  va,  case  thati 


362 


VOCABULARY. 


DEB 

Cuiinio-a,  adj.y  as  much  as,  as  ma- 
ny aSj  whatever,  whoever,  all  that 
which,  all  those  who. 

Cuanto,  adv.t  the  more,  how  much. 

Cuar^nta,  adj.  num.,  forty. 

Cuarto,  nm.,  cuarto  (a  copper  coin 
of  which  170  make  a  dollar) ;  a 
room,  apartment. 

Cuarto-a,  adj.  num.,  fourth. 

Cuatro,  adj.  num.,  four. 

Cubierto-a,  pai-L,  covered,  over- 
spread. 

Cubrir,  inf.  ra.,  to  cover ;  to  cloak, 
to  mask. 

Cuenta,    n/I,    account,   narration; 

.  reckoning. 

Cu^rpo,  nm.,  body. 

Cuidado,  nm.,  care,  anxiety,  atten- 
tion. 


DEC 

Cuidado!  interj.,  have  i  care:  be 
careful ! 

Cuidadosam^nte,  adv  carefully, 
cautiously. 

Culpa,  n/.,  blame,  fault. 

Culpado-a,  adj.,  blameable,  guilty. 

Cultivar,  inf.  ra.,  to  cultivate. 

Cultiira,  nf.,  culture,  improvement. 

Gumplir,  inf.  va.,  to  fill,  to  fulfil,  to 
accomplish,  to  execute. 

Cilna.,  nf.,  cradle,  birth-place ;  line- 
age. 

Cupula,  nf.,  cupola,  dome. 

Curado-a,  part.,  cured,  healed. 

Curiosiddd,  nf,  curiosity,  curious- 
ness. 

Curiuso-a,  adj.,  curious,  strange. 

Ciiyo-a,  pron.  rel.^  whose,  of  whom, 
of  which. 


Dd,  F.  dar,  ind.  pres.  3  s.,  gives. 
Da,  F.  dar,  imp.  2  *.,  give  thou. 
Daban,  F.  dar,  ind.  impf  3 p.,  they 

gave,  they  were-giving. 
Dado,  part.j  given,  granted.    Dado 

que,  {conj.,)  provided  that. 
Dando,  ger.,  giving. 
Danza,  jf,  dance. 
D^no,  nm.^  damage,  mischief,  in- 
jury. 
Dar,  inf.  »a.,  to  give,  to  grant,  to 

bestow. 
Dito,  nm.,  a  fact  or  truth  granted 

and  admitted,  datum.  Ddtos  (pi.), 

data. 
De,  prep.,  of,  from,  with,  off,  at. 
D6,  F.  dar,  sub.  pres.  1  or  3  s.,  may 

give. 
Debijo,  prep.,  under,  below. 
D6be,   F.  dehcTy  ind.   pres.    3  s., 

ought,  must,  is  to,  owes. 
Debdls,  F.  deber,  ind.  pres.  2  p.,  ye 

ought,  you  must ;  you  owe: 


Deb^mos,  F.  deber,  ind.  pres.  1  p., 
we  ought ;  we  owe. 

Deben,  F.  deber,  ind.  pres.  3  p.^ 
they  ought,  must ;  owe. 

Deber,  nm.,  duty,  obligation. 

Deber,  inf.  aux.  v.,  ought,  should, 
must ;  ra.,  to  owe,  to  be  indebt- 
ed to. 

Debes,  F.  deber,  ind.  pres.  2  s., 
thou  oughtest ;  thou  owest. 

Debidamente,  adr.,  duly,  justly,  ex- 
actly. 

Debiera,  F.  deber,  sub",  impf.  3  s., 
should,  ought ;  he  should  owe. 

Debi^ran,  F.  deber,  sub.  impf  3  p., 
should,  ought ;  they  should  owe. 

Dcbil,  adj.,  weak,  feeble. 

D^bo,  F.  deber,  ind.  pres.  1  s.,  I 
must,  I  ought,  I  owe. 

Dec^ncia,  nf,  decency,  honesty 
modesty. 

Decia,  F.  decir,  ind.  impf.  1  or  3  «., 
said,  was  saying. 


VOCABULARY. 


363 


DEM 

Dectr,  inf.  ra.,  to  say,  to  tell,  to 
speak,  to  declare. 

Oeclcinian,  F.  declamar,  ind.  pres. 
3  p.,  declaim. 

Declaraclon,  nf.,  declaration. 

Dedicar,  inf.  va.,  to  dedicate,  to 
consecrate. 

Defecto,  nm.,  defect,  error,  fault, 
mistake. 

Defender,  inf.  va.,  to  defend,  to  pro- 
tect, to  resist,  to  maintain. 

Defensa,  nf,  defence,  guard,  shelter. 

Degradilr,  inf.  va.,  to  degrade. 

Dejiido,  part.,  left,  relinquished; 
permitted. 

Dejar,  inf.  va.,  to  leave,  to  relin- 
quish ;  to  permit,  to  let.  Dejar 
de,  to  fail  to. 

Dejes,  F.  d^ar,  sub.  pres.  2  s.,  thou- 
mayest  permit. 

Del,  prep,  and  art.,  of  the,  from  the, 
by  the,  in  the. 

Del,  prep,  and  pron.,  of  him,  from 
him,  by  him,  of  that,  from  tliat, 
by  it. 

Delante,  adv.  and  prep.,  before,  in 
the  presence  of.  Delante  de,  be- 
fore. 

Deleit^ble,  adj.,  delectable,  pleas- 
ing, delightful. 

Dellcad^za,  nf.,  delicacy,  tender- 
ness, refinement. 

Delicado-a,  Mij.,  delicate,  pleasing, 
nice. 

Delicia,  nf.,  delight,  comfort,  satis- 
faction. 

DeliciCso-a,  adj.,  delicious,  delight- 
ful. 

Delineado,  part.,  delineated,  de- 
scribed, sketched. 

Demandar,  inf.  va.,  to  demand,  to 
ask,  to  petition. 

L/emas,  adv.  and  adj.  (It  :s  nearly 
dl^  ays  used  With  an  article  belbrt! 


DES 

it,)  over  and  above.  Lou  dtmda. 
las  demds,  the  rest,  ihe  others. 

Demasiado-a,  adj.,  overmuch,  ex- 
cessive, too  much. 

Demasiado,  adv.,  too,  enough,  ex- 
cessively. 

Demostrar,  inf.  va.,  to  prove,  to 
show,  to  demonstrate. 

Denodado-a,  adj.,  bold,  intrepid, 
daring. 

Dentro,  or,  deritro  de,  prep.,  in, 
within. 

Denuedo,  nm.,  boldness,  intrepidi- 
ty, courage. 

Denunciar,  inf.  va.,  to  denounce. 

Derecho,  nm.,  law,  equity,  right. 

Derecho-a,  adj.,  rightful,  straight, 
just,  lawful. 

Derramado  a,  part.,  shed,  diffused. 

Derrilman,  F.  derramar,  ind.  pres 
3  p.,  shed,  diffuse ;  bestow. 

Derrum.tr,  inf.  va.,  to  shed,  to  dif- 
fuse, to  spread,  to  pour  forth,  to 
bestow  bountifully. 

DerredCr,  nm.,  circumference,  vi- 
cinity. At  derredor.  or  en  derre- 
dor,  around. 

Denibado-a,  part.,  demolished,  ru- 
ined, ovrivthrown. 

Derrlte,  F.  derretir,  ^nd.  pres.  3  s., 
melts,  thaws. 

Des:igrad;Ibie,  adj.,  disagreeable, 
unnleaSiUt. 

Di3saninu'do-a,  part.,  disheartened, 
discouraged,  dispirited. 

Desa;3arec6r,  inf.  vn.,  to  disippear. 

Des  ipas-onado-a,  adj.,  disp  issioa- 
ate,  impartial. 

Desnprobar,  inf.  va.,  to  di^ipprove, 
to  censure,  to  condemn. 

DesarregUdo-a.  part,  and  adj.,  A\s- 
o  dered,  discomposed:  immodp- 
rate,  unre?tr  lirjixl- 

Dusastroso-a,  a/Jj.^  disastrous. 


364 


VOCABULARY. 


DES 

Descttnso,  mn.,  rest,  repose,  tran- 
quillity, rei-ixation. 

Descondi^nte,  nm.,  descendant. 

Dtschvilr,  inf.  ra.,  to  unnail,  to 
draw  out  nails. 

Defconoecr,  inf.  va.,  to  disov/n,  to 
be  ignorant  of,  to  be  unacquaint- 
ed. 

Desconociendo,  ger.,  not  knowing, 
being  ignorant  of. 

Desconfianza,  nf,  distrust,  mis- 
trust, want  of  confidence,  jeal- 
ousy. 

Desconfiar,  inf.  ra.,  to  distrust,  to 
suspect,  to  have  no  confidence  in. 

Desconsuelo,  nm.,  atfliction,  want 
of  consolation,  trouble. 

Bescubi6rto-a,  part,  and  adj.^  un- 
covered, discovered,  unclosed, 
open. 

Ddsde,  prep. J  from,  since,  after. 

Desdlcha,  n/".,  misfortune,  unhappi- 
ness. 

Desduro,  nm.,  dishonor,  blemish, 
stain. 

Desetir,  inf.  ra.,  to  desire,  to  wish, 
to  demand. 

Desechdr,  inf.  ra.,  to  expel,  to  drive 
away. 

Desenfreno,  vim.,  unruliness,  rash- 
ness, licentiousness. 

Desdo,  nm.,  desire,  wish. 

D^seCso-a,  adj.^  desirous,  anxious. 

Desfichat^",  n/l,  impudence,  ef- 
frontery. 

Desgarriido,  part.,  torn,  rent. 

Desgrucia,  r?/.,  misfortune.,  adver- 
sty. 

Desgraciadem^nte,  adv.,  unfortu- 
nately, unhappily. 

Desgr.iciudo-a,    adj.,    unfortunate, 

-  unhappy,  unlucky. 

Deshonruso-a,  adj.^  dishonorable, 
disgraceful,  indecent* 


DET 

Desigudl,  adj.t  unequal ;  unjust. 

Desliziir,  t.?/.  ra.,  to  slip,  to  slide. 

Despecho,  nm..,  displeasure,  dis- 
may, despair,  indignation. 

Desp^ja,  F.despejar,  ind.pres.  3«., 
to  clear  awayj  to  clear  up. 

Despotlsmo,  nm.,  despotism,  abso- 
lute power. 

Despreciclble,  adj.,  despicable,  con- 
temptible. 

Despreciado-a,  part.,  despised, 
scorKed. 

Despreciar,  inf.  ra.,  to  despise,  to 
disdain,  to  depreciate,  to  con- 
temn. 

Desprecies,  F.  despreciar,  sub.  pres. 
2  s.,  thou  mayest  despise. 

Desprendido,  part.,  loosened,  sepa- 
rated. 

Despucs,  or,  despu^s  de,  prep.,  af- 
ter, next  to. 

Despucs  que,  adv.,  afterward,  after. 

Destino,  nm.,  destiny,  fate,  doom, 
lot. 

Destituldo-a,  part.,  deprived,  strip- 
ped, being  destitute. 

Destruir,  inf.  ra.,  to  destroy,  to 
ruin,  to  lay  waste. 

Destruyendo,  ger.,  destroying,  lay- 
ing waste. 

Desv^lo,  nm.,  wakefulness,  inabili* 
ty  to  sleep. 

DetenclCn,  nf,  detention,  delay 
stopping. 

Detencr,  inf.  ra.,  to  detain,  to  hin- 
der, to  stop,  to  keep,  to  arrest. 

Determinacion,  n/.,  determination, 
decision,  resolution. 

Determinido-a,  part,  and  adj.,  de- 
termined, resolute,  bold. 

Detrds,  prep,  and  adv.,  behind. 
Dttras  de,  behind. 

Detuvimos,  F".  detener,  Ind.  perj* 
def»  I  p.,  we  stopped. 


VOCABULARY. 


365 


DIS 

Dl,  F.  dar,  ind.  'perf.  def.  1  s,,  I 

gave. 
Di,  F.  decir^  imp,  2  5.,  say  thou,  tell 

thou. 
Dia,  nm.^  day. 
Dice,  P.  dccir^  ind.  pres.  3  5.,  says, 

he  says. 
Dlcha,  n/'.,  happiness,  fortune,  feli- 
city. 
Dicho-a,  part.,  said,  mentioned. 
Diciendo,  ger.,  saying,  telling. 
Diez,  num.  adj.,  ten. 
Diferenciar,  inf.  va.  and  rr.,  to  dif- 
fer, to  be  unlike. 
Diferente,  adj.,  different,  dissimilar, 

unlike. 
Dif  tcil,  adj.,  difficult,  arduous. 
Dificultiid,   nf.,  difficulty,  embar- 
rassment, obstacle. 
Dificultrjso-a,  adj.,  difficult,  trouble- 
some. 
Dignidad,  nm.,  dignity,  excellence, 

rank,  advancement,  preferment. 
Digno-a,  adj.,  worthy,  deserving. 
Dijo,    F.  decir,  ind.  perf.  def.  3  s., 

said,  he  or  she  said. 
Diligencia,     nf,    diligence;  stags- 
coach  or  diligence. 
Dinero,  nm.,  money,  wealth. 
Dio,    F.   dar,   ind.  perf.  def.  3  s., 

g  ive  ;  he  or  she  gave. 
Dios,  11.  prop.,  God. 
Dire,  F.  decir,  ind.  ]  fut.  1  s.,  I  shall 

say.  '^ 

Dlrigir,  or  dirijlr,  inf.  va.,  to  rule,  to 

direct,  to  guide,  to  govern. 
Discernimi^nto,  nm.,  discernment, 

judgment,  clearsightedness. 
Discordia,   nf.,    discord,    disagree- 
ment. 
Discipulo,  nm.,  disdple,  pupil,  stu- 
dent. 
Disgustado-a,  part.,  disgusted,  dis- 


31* 


DOR 

Disgiisto,  nm.,  disgust,    loathing, 

offence. 
Disminiiye,  F.  disminuir,  ind.  pres 
3  s.,  diminishes,  lessens,  impairs. 
Disminuido-a,   part.,    diminished, 

lessened. 
Dispuro,  nm.,  discharge,  explosion. 
Dispensar,  inf.  va.,  to  dispense,  to 

excuse,  to  diffuse. 
Dispuesto-a,  part,  and  adj.,    dis- 
posed :  ready. 
Disputar,  inf.  va.,   to  dispute,   to 

contend. 
Distinguir,  inf.  va.,  to  distinguish, 

to  perceive,  to  discern. 
Distinguido-a,  part.^  distinguished, 

noted. 
Distinciun,  rif,  distinction 
DIsiintamente,  adv.,  distinctly. 
Dis:lnio-a,  adj.,  distinct,  different. 
Distraer,  inf.  va.,  to  distract,  draw 

off  the  attention,  to  perplex. 
Distraido-a,  pari,  and  adj.,  distract- 
ed ;  inattentive. 
Diverso-a,  adj.,  diverse,   difJerent, 

various. 
Dividir,  inf.  va.,  to  divide,  disjoin, 

separate. 
Divisur,  iif.  va.,  to  descry,  to  per- 
ceive. 
Do,  adv.,  where.     See  Donde. 
DoUez,  nm.,  duplicity,  double-deal- 
ing.. 
Documento,*77i,, document,  writing. 
DClo,  nm.,  fraud,  wile,  deceit,  trick. 
Dominar,  inf.  va.,  to  rule,  to  master. 
Don,  nm.,  Don  (a  title  of  respect). 
Don  nm.,  gift,  a  present. 
Donde,  adv.,  where,  in  what  place. 
Dona,  nf.  Lady,  Mistress  (Mrs.), 
Madame,   (a  title  of  respect  ap- 
pled  to  ladies.) 
Dorado-a,  adj.,  gilt,  golden. 
Dormir,  infvn.,  to  sleep. 


3G6 


VOCABrLARY. 


ELE 

Dos,  num.  adj.,  two. 

Dudar,  inf.  va.,  to  doubt,  to  be  un- 
certain. 

Diidas,  F.  dudar,  sub.  pres.  2  f., 
thou  mayest  doubt. 

Duelo,  71771.,  affliction,  grief;  duel. 

Dueno,  nm.,  owner,  proprietor, 
master. 


ENO 

Diilce,  adj..  soft,  gentle,  sweet. 
Dulziira,  sf.,   sweetness,   softness^ 

gentleness,  tenderness. 
Diique,  nm.,  Duke. 
Duradero-a,  adj.,  lasting,  durable. 
Durante,  prep.,  during. 
Durar,  inf.  vn.,  to  last,  to  endure, 

to  continue. 


E. 


K  co7?J.,  and  (used  instead  of  y,  be- 
fore a  word  beginning  with  i  or 
hi). 

Echando,  ger.,  throwing,  casting. 

Echar,  inf.  va.,  to  throw,  to  cast ; 
to  apply,  to  compute. 

Echara,  P.  echar,  sub.  imp/.  3  s.,  he 
should  throw. 

E'co,  nm.,  echo. 

Ecsaminar,  see  examinar. 

Ecsistir,  see  existir. 

Edad,  nf.,  age. 

Edi(;to,  nm.,  edict,  order. 

Eiiificar,  inf.  va.,  to  build,  to  con- 
struct, to  edify,  to  instruct. 

Educaciun,  nf.,  education,  instruc- 
tion. 

Efecto,  n77i.,  effect,  purpose.  En 
efecto,  in  fact,  indeed. 

Ejempio,  71777.,  example,  precedent. 

Ejercer,  inf.  va.,  to  exercise,  to 
practice. 

Ejerciendo,  ger.,  exercising. 

Ejercito,  nm.,  army,  host. 

El,  def.  art.,  the :  el,  pers.  pron.,  he, 
it ;  dem.  pron.,  that. 

Eleato-a,  part.,  elected,  chosen. 

Electricidid,  nf,  electricity. 

Electrico-a,  adj.,  electrical. 

Ek'ggtncia,  nf.,  elegance,  graceful- 
ness. 

Elegir,  inf.  va.,  to  elect,  to  select,  to 
choose. 

IMejir,  or,  elijir,  see  elegir. 


El^na,  n.  prop.,  Ellen,  Helen.  San- 
ta Elena,  St.  Helena  (an  island 
of  that  name). 

Elijido-a,  or  elegido-a,7?a/-/.,  elect- 
ed. Selected. 

Eligleron,  F.  eligir,  ind.  perf  def 
3  p.,  they  selected. 

"E^'Wi,  pers. pron.  f,  she,  it;  her. 

E'llo,  pers.  pron.  neuter,  it. 

EmbarcaciCn,  rif.,  vessel,  boat. 

Embargo,  7i77i.,  embargo,  seques- 
tration. Sin  embargo,  notwith- 
standing. 

Embarrilar,  inf.  va.,  to  barrel,  to 
put  into  a  barrel. 

Embustero,  nm.,  liar;  hypocrite, 
impostor. 

Emperador,  nm.,  emperor,  monarch. 

Emporo,  conj.,  but,  however,  yet. 

Empezar,  inf.  va.,  to  begin,  to 
commence. 

Empieza,  F.  empezar,  ind.  pres.  3  s., 
begins,  it  begins. 

Empiezan,  F.  empezar,  ind.  pres. 
3  p.,  they  begin. 

Emplear,  inf.  va.,  to  occupy,  to  em- 
ploy. 

Empujiido-a,  part.,  pushed,  pushed 
away. 

E'mulo,  nm.,  rival,  competitor. 

En,  prep.,  in,  into,  at,  on,  upon. 

Encadenar,  inf.  va.,  to  chain,  to  en* 
thral,  to  fetter. 

Encanecldo-a,  part.,  grown  grey. 


VOCABULARY. 


367 


ENT 

Encargado-a^  part.,  charged  with, 
entrusted. 

Encontrar,  inf.  ra.,  to  meet,  to  en- 
counter, to  find,  to  light  upon. 

Encuentra,  F.  encontrar,  ind.  pres. 
3  s.,  meets,  meets  with. 

Encuentran,  F.  eni^ontrar,  ind.  pres. 
J  p.,  meet,  find,  they  find. 

Enemlgo,  nm.,  enemy,  opponent. 

Enemlgo-a,  adj.,  inimical,  of  the 
enemy. 

Energia,  nf.,  energy,  power,  force. 

ELfermedtLdjn/".,  infirmity,  sickness. 

Eiifermo-a,  adj.,  sick,  infirm. 

Enfrenase,  F.  enfrenar,  sub.  impf. 
3  s.,  would  restrain,  would  curb. 

Enganar,  inf.  va.,  to  deceive,  to 
cheat,  to  mislead,  to  hoax. 

Engrandecimiento,  7im.,  aggran- 
dizement. 

Enjambre,  nf.,  swarm-,  crowd. 

Ennoblecer,  inf.  va.,  to  ennoble. 

Enorgullecer,  inf.  vr.,  to  pride  one's 
self,  to  be  haughty. 

Enrique,  n.  prop.,  Henry. 

Enrojecer,  inf.  va.,  to  tinge,  to  red- 
den. 

Ens^lce,  F.  ensalzar,  sub.  pres.  3  s., 
may  boast,  may  extol. 

Ensalzilr,  iif.  va.,  to  extol,  to  boast. 

Ensangrentado-a,  part.,  stained 
with  blood,  covered  with  blood. 

Ensayado-a,  part.,  tried,  essayed, 
proved. 

Ensayar,  inf.  va.,  to  try,  to  make 
trial  of,  to  essay,  to  examine,  to 
prove. 

Ensayo,  mn.,  trial,  essay;  proof, 
experiment. 

E'nte,  nm.,  being,  entity. 

Entender,  inf.  va.,  to  understand,  to 
comprehend. 

Entendimi^nto,  nm.,  understand- 
ing, judgment,  mind,  knowledge. 


ESC 

Ent^ro-a,    adj.,    entire,    complete, 

whole. 
Enticnde,   F.   entender,   ind.  pres. 

3  s.,  understands,  he  understands. 
Entiendo,    F.   entender,  ind.  pres. 

1  s.,  I  understand. 
Entunces,  adv.,  then,  at  that  time. 
Entrando,  ger.,  entering. 
Entranas,  nf.  pi.,  entrails,  internal 

parts  of  any  thing. 
Entrar,  inf.  va.,  to  enter,  to  go  in. 
E'ntre,  prep.,  among,  between. 
Entremos,  F.  entrar,  imp.  1  p.,  let 

us  enter. 
Entro,    F.   entrar,   ind.  perf  def 

3  s.,  entered,  he  entered. 
Envanecer,  inf.  vn.,  to  make  vain, 

to  become  proud  or  haughty. 
Envanecimiento,  nm.,  haughtiness, 

vanity. 
Envanezcan,     F.   envanecer,  imp. 

3  p.,  let  (them)  pride  themselves. 
EnvidieiSj    F.   envidiar,  sub.  pres. 

2  p.,  ye  may  envy  ;    imp.,    envy 
ye,  do  ye  envy. 

Envidiijso-a,a</;.,  envious,  invidious. 

E'poca,  nf,  epoch,  period  of  time. 

Equivalente,  adj.,  equivalent,  equal. 

Equivoco-a,  adj.,  equivocal,  am- 
biguous. 

E'ra,  F.  scr,  ind.  impf.  3  s.,  was,  he 
or  it  was. 

E'ran,  F.  ser,  ind.  impf.  3  p.,  were, 
they  were. 

Erigldo-a,  part.,  erected,  raised. 

Erijido-a,  part.     See  erigido. 

Es,  F.  ser,  ind.  pres.  3  s.,  is,  he  is, 
it  is,  she  is. 

E'sa,  see  ese. 

Escapado,  ;?ar^.,  escaped. 

Escarmiento,  nm.,  fine,  punish- 
ment, penalty. 

Escarnecer,  inf.va.,  to  mock,  to 
ridicule,  to  make  sport  of. 


368 


VOCABULAnY. 


ESP 

Escarnecido,  part.^  mocked,  scoffed 
at. 

Escelente,  adj.,  excellent. 

Escdna,  n/.,  scene,  vicissitude; 
stage  of  a  theatre. 

Escepto,  adv.,  except,  excepting. 

Escipiein,  n.  prop.,  Scipio. 

Escitar,  inf.va.,  to  excite,  to  move, 
to  stimulate,  to  instigate. 

Esclamar,  inf.  vn.,  to  exclaim,  to 
cry  out. 

Esclavitild,  7\f.,  slavery,  servitude, 
bondage. 

Escldvo,  nm.,  slave,  captive. 

Esclusivo-a,  adj.,  exclusive. 

Escogcr,  ijif.  va.,  to  select,  to  choose. 

Escogldo-a,  part.,  selected,  chosen. 

EscClta,  77/*.,  escort,  convoy. 

Esconder,  inf.  va.,  to  hide,  to  con- 
ceal ;  to  disguise,  to  include. 

Escriba,  F.  escrlbir,  subj.pres.  1  or 
3  s.,  mny  write. 

Escriblo,  F.  escrlbir^  ind.  perf.  def. 
3  s.,  wrote. 

Escribir,  inf.  va.,  to  write,  to  com- 
pose. 

Escrlto,  nmi.,  writing,  composition. 

Escrito-a,  part.,  written,  composed. 

Escritur,  nm.,  writer,  author. 

Escuchar,  inf.  va.,  to  listen  to,  to 
heed,  to  hearken. 

Escusar,  i/?/.  va..,  to  excuse,  to 
liberate,  to  exempt. 

E'sp-a,  dem.  pron.,  that,  that  one. 

Esencial,  adj.,  essential,  important. 

Esfuerzo,  nm.,  effort,  courage,  ex- 
ertion. 

E'so,  dem.  pron.,  that  thing. 

E'sos-as,  dem.  pron.  pi.,  those, 
those  persons  or  things. 

Espacio,  nm.,  space,  period,  interval. 

Esp^da,  nf.,  sword. 

Esplaa,  n.  prop.f,  Spain. 

Espanul,    nm.y    a    Spaniard;    the 


EST 

Spanish  language  {idioma  under- 
stood). 

Espanul-a,  adj.,  Spanish. 

Esp^cie,  nf,  species,  sort,  kind, 
specimen,  subject. 

Especulaciun,  if,  speculation,  ex- 
amination. 

Espediciun,  nf,  expedition ;  ac- 
tivity. 

Esperar,  irf.  va.,  to  expect,  to  hope, 
to  await. 

Esperiencia,  nf,  experience ;  know- 
ledge. 

Esperimentar,  inf  va.,  to  experi- 
ence, to  learn  or  know  by  prac- 
tice ;  to  experiment. 

Espesura,  nf,  thicket ;  thickness. 

Espina,  nf.,  thorn,  brier. 

Espirftdo-a,  part.,  expired,  being 
finished. 

Espiriir,  inf  va.,  to  expire ;  to  come 
to  an  end. 

Esplendido-a,  adj.,  splendid,  mag- 
nificent, brilliant. 

Esplicitamente,  adv.,  explicitly, 
plainly. 

Esponer,  inf.  va.,  to  expose,  to  ex 
plain. 

Esqueleto,  nm.,  skeleton;  carcass. 

Esquivo-a,  adj.,  fastidious,  shy,  re- 
served, stubborn. 

F/sta,  dem.  pron.f,  this,  this  one, 
she. 

Esta,  F.  estar,  tnd.pres.3s.,  is,  ex- 
ists, it  is. 

Estaba,  F.  estar,  ind.  impf  3  .<?.,  was. 

Establec^r,  inf.  va.,  to  settle,  to  es- 
tablish. 

Establecldo,  part.,  established. 

Estac'on,  n/.,  season  of  the  year  i 
state. 

Estadlstica,  nf,  statistics. 

Est^do,  nm.,  state,  rank,  condition, 
Estados  Unidos,  United  States. 


VOCABULARY. 


369 


PAC 

Estido,  part.,  been,  existed. 

Estamos,  F.  estar,  ind.pres,  1  p., 
we  are. 

Estar,  inf.  vn.,  to  be,  to  exist. 

Estasiado-a,  adj.  or  part.,  full  of  en- 
thusiasm or  rapture,  carried  away 
with  overpowering  emotion. 

E'ste-a,  dem.  pron.,  this,  this  one  ; 
the  latter. 

Este,  F.  estar,  suhj.  pres.  3  s.,  may 
be,  he  may  be. 

Estendido.  part.,  extended,  en- 
larged. 

Estenso-a,  adj.,  extensive,  ample, 
large. 

Estenuado-a,  par^.,  diminished,  ex- 
tenuated, weakened. 

Est^ril,  adj.,  barren,  sterile,  un- 
fruitful. 

Esterlln,  adj.,  sterling,  lawful  Eng- 
lish money. 

Esterminar,  inf.  va.,  to  exterminate, 
to  banish,  to  root  out. 

Esterminio,  nm.,  expulsion,  exter- 
mination, banishment. 

Estimado-a,  part.,  esteemed,  re- 
spected. 

Estimar,  inf.  va.,  to  estimate,  to 
value,  to  esteem. 

Estirpacion,  rf.,  extirpation,  eradi- 
cation, rooting  out. 

E'sto,  dem.  pron.  neuter,  this,  this 
thing. 

Estoy,  F.  estar,  ind.  pres.  1  s.,  I  am. 

Estrago,  nm.,  ruin,  havoc,  ravage. 

Estrange ro,  or,  estranjero,  nm., 
stranger,  foreigner. 

Estranes,  F.  estranar,subj.pres.  2  s., 


FAC 

thou  mayest  be  astonished,  thou 

mayest  wonder. 
Estrano-a,  adj.,  strange,  foreign. 
Estraordinario-a,  adj.,  extraordina- 
ry. 
Estr^mo,  nm.,  extremity,  end,  ex- 
treme 
Estudiar,  inf.  va.,  to  study. 
Estiidio,  717/1.,  study ;  attention. 
EstupOr, 71771.,  stupor,  astonishment. 
Estuviera,  F.  estar,  subj.  impf.  3  s., 

should  be. 
Estiivo,  F.  estar,  ind.perf  def  3  *., 

was,  he,  she  or  it  was. 
Eterno-a,  adj.,  eternal,  endless. 
Eurupa,  n.  prop.f,  Europe. 
Europeo-a,  adj.,  European. 
Evitar,  irf.  va.,  to  shun,  to  avoid, 

to  prevent. 
Exactamente,    adv.t    exactly,  pre 

cisely. 
Exactitiid,  r^.,  exactness,  justness; 

assiduity. 
Examen,  nm.,  examination,  inves 

tigation,  trial. 
Examin^ba,  F.  examinar,  ind.impj 

3  s.,  was  examining,  examined. 
Examinilr,  inf.  va.,  to  examine  ;  to 

investigate. 
Exclamar,  see  esclamar 
Exige,  F.  exigir,  ind.  pres.  3  s.,  de 

mands,  exacts,  requires. 
Exigir,  infva.,  to  exact,  to  require 

to  demand. 
Existencia,  nf,  existence. 
Existido,  part.,  existed. 
Existlr,  inf.  vn.,  to  exist,  to  be. 
E'xito,  nm.,  result,  success,  end. 


F. 


Facci6n,ri/!,faction,turbulent  party. 
Facil,  adj.,  easy,  facile. 
Facilitar,  inf.  zjo,,  to  render  easy, 
to  facilitate. 


Facilmente,   ado.,   easily,   without 

difficulty. 
Facultad,  nf.,  faculty,  power,  fa- 

qility. 


370 


VOCABULARY. 


FID 

Fa^na,  n/*.,  work,  labor. 

Fiillec^r,  inf.  rji.,  to  die. 

Falsam^nte,  adv.^  falsely. 

Falso-a,  orf/.,  false,  deceitful,  coun- 
terfeited. 

Falta,  ri/:,  fault,  mistake,  defect; 
need. 

Falta,   F.  faltar^  ind.    pres.  3  s., 
wants,  needs,  fails. 

Faltaba,  F.  faltar^  ind.  imp/.  3  s., 
was  wanting. 

Faltar,   inf.  vn.y  to  be  wanting,  to 
need,  to  fail. 

Faltas,   F.  faltar,  ind.  pres.  2  s., 
thou  art  wanting,  thou  failest. 

Fama,  nf.,  fame,  renown,  report. 

P'amuso-a,    adj.,    famous,    distin- 
guished, renowned. 

Favor,  nm.,  favor,  protection,  com- 
pliment. 

Favorecer,    inf.  va.,    to    favor,  to 
abet,  to  grant  favors. 

Favorecido-a,  part.,  favored,  pro- 
tected. 

Febr^ro,  nm.,  February. 

Fdcha,  nf,  date  of  a  letter  or  other 
writing. 

Felicidad,   rf.,  happiness,  felicity, 
prosperity. 

Felipe,  n.  prop.,  Philip. 

Feliz,  adj.,  happy,  fortunate,  pros- 
perous. 

Felizm^nte,  adv.,  happily,  luckily. 

Fenicio,  n.  prop.,  Phoenician. 

F^o-a,  adj.,ug\y;  deformed,  homely. 

Fernando,  n.  prop.,  Ferdinand. 

Ferocidad,  nf,  ferocity,  cruelty. 

Feroz,  ferocious,  fierce,  cruel. 

P^rro-carril,  nm..,  rail-road. 

PervCso-a,  adj.,  fervent,  ardent. 

Pidedigno-a,     adj.,     trustworthy, 
worthy  of  credit. 

F'idelid^d,  nf.,  fidelity,  constancy, 
loyalty. 


FRE 

Fidl,  adj.,  faithful,  true,  constant. 

Fiera,  nf,  wild  beast. 

Fiereza,    rf.,    fierceness,    ferocity, 

cruelty. 
Fiesta,   nf,  feast,   festival,  enter- 
tainment. 
Fijdr,  inf.  va.,  to  fix,  to  fasten,  to 

settle. 
Fijo-a,  adj.,  fixed,  settled,  firm,  se- 
cure. 
Fila,  nf,  file  or  row  of  soldiers. 
FilCsofo,  nm.,  philosopher. 
Fin,  nm.,  end.    En  Jin,  or  porfn, 
at  last,  in  fine ;  at  Jin,  at  length, 
after  all. 
Fingir,  irif.  va.,  to  feign,  to  fancy, 

to  imagine. 
Firmar,  inf.  va.,   to  sign,  to  sub- 
scribe. 
Firmeza,  nf,  firmness,  steadiness. 
Fisica,  nf,  physics,  the  science  of 

natural  objects. 
Flaquear,  inf.  vn.,  to  flag,  to  grow 

feeble,  to  become  disheartened. 
Flaqu^za,  nf.,  weakness,  frailty. 
Flojedad,  rf.,  weakness,  feebleness, 

laxity. 
Flor,  if,  flower,  blossom,  bloom. 
FCndo,  nm.,  bottom  ;  depth. 
Formado-a,    part.,   formed ;  com* 

pleted. 
Formar,  inf.  va.,  to  form,  to  shape, 

to  make. 
Fortificilr,  irf.  va.,  to  fortify. 
Fortiina,  rf,,  fortune,  luck,    suc- 
cess. 
Forzado-a,  part.,  forced,  obliged. 
Francamente,  adv.,  frankly,  openly. 
Frances-a,   adj.   and   n.,   French; 

Frenchman,  Frenchwoman. 
Fr^ncia,  n.  prop.f,  France. 
Fr^nco-a,  adj.,  frank,  free,  open. 
Frecuentado-a,   part.,    frequen^^d, 
visited  often. 


VOCABULAUy. 


371 


GEN 

Pr^no,  nm.,  rein,  curb,  bridle. 
Frente,  «/.,  front,  forehead. 
Pies'o-a,  adj.,  fresh,  cool. 
Pfio,  nm.,  cold,  cO.dness. 
Frio-a,  adj^,  cold. 
Friito,  nm.,  fruit ;  advantage. 
Fue,  F.  ser,  ind.  perf.  def.  3  5.,  was, 

he,  she  or  it  was. 
File,  F.  ir,  ind.  perf,  def.  3  s.,  went, 

he  or  she  went. 
Fuego,  nm.,  fire. 

Fuera  de,  prep.,  out,  out  of,  except. 
Fuere,  F.  ser,  suhj.  fut.  1  or  3  s., 

should  be,  would  be. 
Fuero,  nm.,  statute-law ;  charter. 
Fueron,  F.  ser,  ind.  per/,  def,  3  p., 

were,  they  were. 
Fiierte,  wati.,  fortification,  fort. 


GRA 

Fuerte,  adj.,  strong,  firm,  vigorous. 

Fuertemente,  adv.,  strongly,  forci- 
bly. 

Fu^rza,  nf.,  force,  strength.  A' 
fatrza  de,  by  force  of,  by  dint 
of. 

Fuese,  F.  ser,  suhj.  impf.  1  or  3  s., 
should  be. 

Fuesen,  F.  ser,  suhj.  impf.  3  p., 
they  should  be. 

Fulton,  n.  prop.,  Fulton. 

Fumando,  ger.,  smoking. 

Functionario,  nm.,  functionary,  ol- 
ficer  of  trust. 

Fundamental,  adj.,  fundamental. 

Funesto-a,  adj.,  mournful,  lament- 
able, sad,  dismal. 

Putiiro,  W7W.,  future. 


Gaceta,  nf,  gazette,  newspaper. 
Galeria,  Ji/!,  gallery,  lobby. 
Ganado,  nm.,  herd,  flock ;  sheep, 

cattle. 
Ganar,  inf.  va..  to  gain,  to  win,  to 

obtain. 
Ganara,  P.  ganar,  ind.  1  fut.  3  s., 

he  will-  gain. 
Ganu,  P.  ganar,  ind.  perf  def.  3  s., 

he  gained. 
Garbuso-a,   adj.,   genteel,  graceful, 

comely. 
Gaspardo,  n.  prop.,  Gaspardo. 
Gastar,  inf.  va.,  to  spend,  to  waste. 
Gisto,  nm.,  expense. 
Gefe,  or.  j4fe,  nm.,  chief;  leader. 
Gemer,  irf  vn.,  to  groan. 
General,  or,  jener^l,  nm.,  general, 

chief,  commander. 
GenerJil,  adj.,  general,  universal. 
Gener.liddd,  nf,  generality. 
Geneioso-a,  cdj.,  generous,  liberal, 

kind. 
Genero,  nm.,  kind,  sort,  genus, race. 


Gerarqula,  nf,  hierarchy,  estab- 
lished ecclesiastical  government. 

Gigante,  nm.,  giant. 

Gloria,  nf,  glory,  praise,  fame,  re- 
nown. 

Gloriusc  %  adj.,  glorious,  worthy 
of  praise. 

Gobernador,  nm.,  governor,  ruier. 

Gobernante,  nm.,  ruler,  one  who 
assumes  the  management  of  any 
affair. 

Gobierno,  nm.,  government. 

Godo,  n.  prop.,  Goth.  G6do-Es- 
panul,  Spanish- Goth. 

Gudo-a,  adj.,  Gothic. 

Guza,  P.  gozar,  ind.  pres.  3  s.,  en- 
joys, he  or  she  enjoys. 

Gozar,  inf.  va.,  to  enjoy,  to  be  re- 
joiced at. 

Gtizo,  nm.,  enjoyment,  delight, 
pleasure. 

Gracia,  nf,  thanks,  grace,  elegance. 

Gracioso-a,  adj.,  graceful,  facetious, 
witty,  merry. 


372 


VOCABTJLARY. 


HAB 

Gr^da,  tj/!,  step ;  gradas,  seats 
which  rise  one  above  another. 

Grado,   nm.,  degree,  grade,  step. 

Gran,  adj.,  great,  large  (contracted 
from  grande).  Gran  Bretana, 
Great  Britain. 

Grande,  adj.,  great,  large,  emi- 
nent. 

Grand  eza,  nf.,  greatness,  grandeur. 

Granizando,  ger.y  hailing,  raining 
hail-stones. 

Gratitiid,  nf.,  gratitude,  thankful- 
ness. 

Gr^cia,  n.  prop.f.,  Greece. 

Grlta,  F.  gritdr,  ind.  pres,  3  «., 
shouts,  he  cries  out. 

Gritando,  ger.,  shouting,  crying 
out. 

Gritiir,  inf.  vn.,  to  cry  out,  to  shout, 
to  make  a  noise. 

Grito,  nm.,  shout,  loud  cry. 

Guardado,  part.,  kept,  guarded, 
preserved. 


HAG 

Guarddr,  iTif.  va.,  to  keep,  to  guard, 
to  preserve. 

Guardia,  ??/.,  guard,  watcli,  a  body 
of  armed  soldiers  to  watch  by 
way  of  defence.  • 

Guarismo,  nm.,  figure,  arithmetical 
number. 

Guerra,  n/".,  war. 

Guerrero,  nm.,  warrior. 

Guerrero-a,  adj.,  warlike;  mar- 
tial. 

Guilletto,  n.  prop.,  Guilletto. 

Guiiiada,  n/.,  wink  of  the  eye. 

Gusano,  nm.,  worm.  Gusano  roe- 
dor,  gnawing  worm,  remorse. 

Giista,  F.  gustar,  ind.  pres.  3  s., 
pleases;  tastes. 

Gustar,  inf.  vn.,  to  please,  to  taste, 
to  enjoy,  to  like. 

Giisto,  Tvm.,  taste ;  pleasure,  enjoy- 
ment. 

Gust6so-a,  adj.,  pleasant,  cheerful, 
contented. 


H. 


Ha,  F.  haher,  ind.  pres.  3  s.,  has,  is, 
there  is. 

Ha,  F.  haber,  ind.  pres.  3  s.,  has ; 
it  is. 

Haber,  inf.  v.  aux.,  to  have. 

Habia,  F.  haher,  ind.  invpf.  1  or  3  s., 
had ;  there  was,  there  were. 

Habian,  F.  haher,  ind.  impf.  3  p., 
they  had. 

Habido,  part.,  had. 

Habiendo,  ger.,  having. 

Habitacion,  nf,  habitation,  dwell- 
ing, abode,  mansion. 

Habitsinte,  nm.,  inhabitant,  resi- 
dent. 

Habit^r,  ir\f.  va.,  to  inhabit. 

H^bla,  F.  haJblar,  ind,  pres.  3  s., 
speaks.    . 

Habldrt  wtA  t*^,  to  speak ;  to  s^y. 


Hdble,  F.  hahlar,  imp.  3  s.,  let  him 

speak. 
Hdblo,  F.  hahlar,  ind.  pres.  1  s.,  I 


Hace,  F.  hacer,  ind.  pres.  3  s.,  does, 

makes ;  it  is,  it  makes. 
Hac^mos,  F.  hacer,  ind.  pres.  1  p., 

we  make,  we  do. 
Hacer,  inf.  va.,  to  make,  to  do ;  to 

cause,  to  order. 
Haces,    F.   hacer,   ind.  pres.  2  s., 

thou  doest,  thou  makest. 
Hacia,  F.  hacer,  ind.  impf.  1  or  3  «... 

made,  did. 
Hicia,  prep.,  towards,  to. 
Haci^ndo,  ger.,  making,  doing,  ren- 
dering. 
H^go,   F.  hajcer,  ind.  pres.  1  •.,  1 

make,  I  do. 


VOCABULARY. 


373 


.    HER 

Hallabamos,  F.  hallar,  ind.  imp/. 

]  17.,  we  found. 
Hallan,    F.  hallar,  ind.  pres.  3  p., 

they  find. 
HalliCndo,  ger.,  finding. 
Hallar,  itif.  ra.,  to  find,  to  meet,  to 

discover. 
Hallu,  F.  hallar,  ind.  per/.  def.3s., 

found,  he  found. 
Hdinbre,  n/*.,  hunger;  famine. 
Hambriento-a,  zdj.,  hungry,  starv- 
'  ed. 
Han.  F.  haber,  ind.  pres.  3  p.,  they 

have. 
Hara,  F.hacer,  ind.  Ifut.  3  s.,  shall 

or  vi^ill  make,  will  do ;  there  will  be. 
Hareis,   F.  hacer,  ind.  I  Jut.  1  p., 

ye  will  make,  ye  will  do. 
Harina,  n/!,  flour. 
Harmonia,  w/.,  harmony,  concord. 
Harto-a,  full,  satiated,  enough. 
Has,  F.  haber,  ind.pres.  2^.,  thou  hast. 
Hasta,   prep.,    to,    till,   as  far  as. 

Hasta  que,  until,  as  far  as. 
Hay,  F.  haber,  ind.  pres.  3  s.  or  p., 

there  is,  or,  there  are. 
Haya,  F.  haber,  subj.  pres.  1  or  3  s., 

may  have. 
Hayas,F.  haber,  subJ.  pres.  2  s.,  thou 

mayest  have. 
He,  F.  haber,  ind.  pres.  Is.,  I  have. 
H^cho-a,  part.,  made,  done. 
H^mos,  F.  haber,  ind.  pres.  I  p., 

Vice  have. 
Henrique,  same  as  Enrique. 
Heredaran,  F.  heredar,  ind.  1  Jut. 

3  p.,  shall  inherit. 
Hered^ro,  nm.,  heir,  inheritor. 
Herida,  nj.,  wound,  sorie. 
Herm^na,  nf.,  sister. 
Hermanito,  nm.  dim.,  little  brother. 
Hermano,  nm.,  brother. 
Hermuso-a,  a^},,  beautifuJ,  hand- 

^me,  fine. 

32 


HUM 

Heroe,  nm.,  hero. 

Heroicamente,     adv.,     heroically 

bravely. 
Heroico-a,  adj.,  heroical. 
Hici^ra,  F.  hacer,  subj.  inipj.  3  s, 

should  do,  should  make. 
Hici^ron,  F.  hacer,  ind.  perj.  d^ 

3  p.,  they  made,  they  did. 
Hierro,  nm.,  iron. 
Hija,  nf.,  daughter,  child. 
Hijo,  nm.,  son,  child. 
Hisluria,  nf.,  history,  narration. 
Historiadur,  nw,.,  historian. 
Hizo,  F.  h^er,  ind.  perf.  def.  3  *., 

made,  did. 
Hoja,  nf,  leaf. 
Holandes,  nm.,  Dutchman. 
Hombre,  nm.,  man. 
Honor,  nm.,  honor,  reputation. 
Honradez,  nf,  honesty,  honor. 
Honrado-a,  adj.,  honorable,  honest. 
Honr^r,  inf.  va.,  to  honor,  to  praise, 

to  revere. 
Honruso-a,  adj.,  honorable,  credit- 
able. 
HCra,  nf,  hour ;  time. 
Horrible,  adj.,  horrible,  dreadful. 
Horror,  nm.,  horror,    abhorrence, 

dread. 
Horroriz^r,  inf.  va.,  to  cause  hor- 
ror, to  terrify. 
Hoy,  adv.,  to-day,  this  day. 
Hubiera,  F.  haber,  subj.  impf.  1  or 

3  s.,  would  or  should  have. 
Hubieran,  F.  haber,  subj.  impf.  3  p., 

they  would  have. 
Hiibo,  F.  haber,  ind.  perf.  def  3  «., 

had  ;  there  was,  there  were 
Hu^sped,  nm.,  guest,  lodger;  host. 
Huir,  inf.  vn.,  to  fly,  to  run  away, 

to  escape,  to  shun. 
Humino-a,  adj.,  human,  rational, 

humane;  pertaining  to  philok> 

gy 


374 


VOCABULARY. 


IMP 

Humildd  J,  7?/".,  hvmility,  meekness. 
Hurnlldej  adj.^  h  mble,  submissive, 

meek. 
HmTiillaciOn,  n/,  humiliation. 
Humillar,  inf.  va.^  to  humble,  to 

lower,  to  subdue. 


IND 

Huyeron,  F.  kuir^  ind.  perf, 
def.  3  p.,  they  flew,  fled,'  escap- 
ed. 

Huyu,  F.  huir,  ind.  perf.  def.  3  s., 
fled,  flew. 


f'ba,  F.  ir,  ind.  impf  1  or  3  s.,  went, 
was  going,  was. 

Idea,  7?/.,  idea,  notion,  intention. 

Idioma,  «m.,  language,  idiom. 

rdo,  F.  i?-,  part.,  gone. 

Ignorar,  inf.  va.,  to  be  ignorant  of, 
not  to  know. 

Igual,  adj.f  equal,  similar. 

Ilimitado-a,  adj.,  unlimited,  unre- 
strained. 

Iliistre,  adj.,  illustrious,  celebrated, 
noble. 

Imitar,  inf.  va.,  to  imitate. 

Impaciencia,  nf.,  impatience. 

Impacient^r,  irif.  va.,  to  vex,  to  lose 
patience,  to  become  impatient. 

Iinpaciente,  adj.,  impatient. 

Inip.'ircialmente,  adv.,  impartially. 

Impedir,  inf.  va.,  to  hinder,  to  im- 
pede, to  prevent. 

Impeler,  ijif  va.,  to  impel,  to  excite. 

Impelldo-a,  part.,  impelled,  urged, 
propelled. 

[mpendido-a,  part.,  undergone. 

Imperfecto-a,  adj.,  imperfect. 

Imperio,  nm.,  empire,  command. 

Importancia,  nf.,  importance,  im- 
port. 

Imporldnte,  adj.,  important ;  useful. 

Importar,  inf.  va.,  to  import,  to  be 
important,  to  concern,  to  matter. 

Impracticable,  adj.,  impracticable, 
impassable. 

Impr^nta,  n/I,  printing,  printing- 
press. 

ImpresiCn,  n/*.,  impression ;  image. 


Imprupio-a,  adj.,  improper,  unbe* 
coming. 

Incendiar,  inf.  va.,  to  inflame,  to 
enkindle. 

Inclinaciun,  nf,  inclination,  ten- 
dency. 

Inclinado-a,  part.,  inclined,  dis- 
posed. 

Inclinando,  ger.,  inclining. 

Incomodid^d,  nf.,  inconvenience, 
trouble,  pains. 

Incomparable,  adj.,  incomparable, 
matchless. 

Inconcevible,  adj.,  inconceivable, 
incomprehensible. 

Incorporar,  iiif.  va.,  to  incorporate, 
to  unite. 

Increible,  adj.,  incredible. 

Indagar,  inf.  va.,  to  investigate,  to 
search  into. 

Independencia,  nf.,  independence. 

Independiente,  adj.,  independent, 
free. 

Indicar,  inf.  va.,  to  point  out,  to  in- 
dicate. 

Indiferencia,  nf.,  indifference,  un- 
concern. 

Indiferente,  adj.,  indifferent,  uncon- 
cerned. 

Indignam^nte,  adv.,  unworthily, 
unjustly. 

I'ndio,  nm.,  Indian. 

Indispensable,  adj.,  indispensable. 

Individuo,  nm.,  individual. 

Indumiio-a,  adj.,  unconquerable,  in* 
domitable. 


VOCABULARY. 


375 


INS 

Indudablemente,  adv.^  undoubtedly, 
without  doubt. 

Indulg^ncia,  7i/*.,  indulgence,  ten- 
derness. 

rnfaniia,  nf.,  infamy,  dishonor, 
meanness. 

Infeliz,  adj.i  unhappy,  unfortunate. 

[nferir,  inf.  va.y  to  infer,  to  deduce. 

Influencia,  rif.,  influence. 

Infliijo,  nm.f  influx,  a  flowing  in. 

Infortun^do-a,  arf/.,  unfortunate, 
unhappy. 

Infortunib,  nm.j  misfortune,  ill  luck. 

Ingenio,  nm.,  genius,  mental  pow- 
er, mind. 

Ingles,  n.  prop.,  Englishman,  the 
English  language. 

Ingles-a,  adj.,  English. 

Ingratitiid,  nf.,  ingratitude. 

Ingrato-a,  adj.,  ungrateful,  unkind. 

Injuria,  nf.,  injury,  affront,  wrong. 

Injiisto-a,  adj.,  unjust,  wrong, 
harmful. 

Inmediacion,  nf.,  neighborhood, 
confine. 

Inmediatamente,  adv.,  immediate- 
ly, directly. 

fnmortal,  adj.,  immortal. 

Inmortalizar,  in/',  va.,  to  immortal- 
ize. 

fnmovil,  adj.,  immovable,  motion- 
less. 

Innecesario-a,  adj.,  unnecessary. 

Innumerable,  adj.,  innumerable. 

Inocencia,  nf.,  innocence,  purity. 

Inocente^  adj.,  innocent,  pure,  mod- 
est. 

Inofensivo-a,  ac?;.,  inoffensive,  harm- 
less. 

Inquietar,  inf.  va.,  to  disquiet^  to 
harass,  to  molest,  to  vex. 

Inquietiid,  nf.,  inquietude,  anxi- 
ety. 

Iniscripcion,  ?i/.,  inscription. 


IRL 

Inslgne,  adj.,  renowned,  illustrious, 
remarkable. 

Instante,  nm„  instant,  moment. 

Instinto,  nm.,  instinct,  instigation. 

Institucion,  nf.,  institution. 

Instruccion,  nf,  instruction,  infor- 
mation. 

Instruido-a,  part,  instructed,  edu- 
cated. 

Insubordinaciun,  rif.,  insubordina- 
tion, disobedience  of  orders. 

Insufrible,  adj.,  insufl^erable,  intole- 
rable. 

Insultar,  inf.  va.,  to  insult. 

Integridad,  nf,  integrity,  purity, 
honesty. 

Inteligencia,  nf,  intelligence,  un 
derstanding,  knowledge. 

Intenciun,  nf,  intention,  purpose, 
design. 

Intent^r,  inf.  va.,  to  intend,  to  at- 
tempt, to  endeavor. 

Interes,  nm.,  interest. 

Interes^do-a,  adj.,  interested,  self- 
ish, mercenary. 

Interiorm^nte,  adv.,  internally,  in- 
wardly. 

Interrogar,  inf.  va.,  to  interrogate, 
to  question. 

Interumplr,  irf.  va.,  to  interrupt,  to 
hinder. 

Intimidad,  nf,  intimacy,  familiari- 
ty- 

Iniitil,  adj.,  useless,  unprofitable. 

Iniitilmente,  adv.,  uselessly,  in  vain. 

Invenc;un,77/!,  invention,  discovery. 

Invento,  nm.,  same  as  invencion, 

InventOr,  nm.,  inventor;  contriver. 

Invi^rno,  nm.,  winter. 

InvitaciOn,  nf,  invitation.. 

Ir,  inf.  vn.,  to  go  ;  to  be. 

I'ra,  nf,  anger,  ire. 

Irlandes,  nm.,  Irishman. 

Irland^sa,  nfy  IrishworaaiL 


376 


VOCABULARY. 


LAS 

Irreconciliible,  arf/.,  irroDoncilable 
Irritdr,  inf,  va.,  to  irritate,  to  exas- 
perate. 
Isabel,  n.prop.f.y  Isabella,  or  Eliza- 
beth. 


LEN 

Italia,  n.  prop.f.y  Italy. 
Italiano-a,  adj.,  Italian. 
Izquierdo-a,    adj.,    left;  left-hand- 
ed. 


J. 


Jabon,  nm.,  soap. 

Jamas,  adv.,  never ;  ever. 

Jardln,  nm.,  garden. 

Jeneral,  nm.,  same  as  general. 

Jeronimo,  n.  prop,  m.,  Jerome. 

Jorffe,  n.prop,  m.,  George. 

Jornalero,  nm.,  day-laborer,  jour- 
neyman. 

JCven,  nm.  or/.,  youth,  young  man 
or  young  woman. 

JCven,  adj.,  young. 

Jovenzuelo,  nm.  dim.,  youngster. 

Jiian,  n.  prop,  m.,  John. 

Juego,  Tim.,  play,  game. 

Julcio,  nm.,  judgment,  opinion. 

Jiiiio,  nm.,  July. 

Jilnio,  nm.,  June 

Juntamente,  adv.,  together,  jointly. 

Jiinto-a,  adj.,  joined,  near,  united, 
together  with. 


Jurado-a,  part.,  sworn  to. 

Jurar,  inf.  vn.,  to  swear,   to  make 

oath. 
Jurisprud^ncia,  nf.,  jurisprudence, 

the  science  of  law. 
Justamente,  adv.,  justly,  just,  fair- 

ly. 

Justicia,  rif.,  justice. 

Justiciero,  nm.,  one  who  rigorously 
observes  justice,  one  who  punish- 
es crimes  with  severe  justice. 

Justificar,  irif.  va.,  to  justify. 

Jiisto-a,  adj.,  just,  upright,  faith 
ful. 

Juventiid,  rif.,  youth,  youthfulness 

Juzg^do-a,  part.,  judged,  passed 
sentence. 

Juzgando,  ger.,  judging. 

Juzgir,  17?/.  va.,  to  judge,  to  pass 
sentence.. 


li. 


La,  def.  art./.,  the. 

La,  pron.  per.  and  dem.,  her,  it,  she, 
that. 

L^bio,  nm.,  lip. 

Labori6so-a,  adj.,  laborious,  indus- 
trious. 

Labrador,  nm.,  farmer,  laborer. 

Lado,  nm.,  side. 

Ladrillo,  nm.,  brick,  tile. 

Lago,  nm.,  lake. 

L^grima,  nf.,  tear,  tear-drop. 

Ldrgo-a,  adj.,  long,  large. 

Las,  def.  art.f  pi.,  the. 

Las,  pron.  prea,  and  dcm.,  those, 
them,  they« 


L^zo,  nm.,  snare. 

Le,  pron.  per.,  him,  it,  you ;  to  hinx 

to  her,  to  you. 
Lealt^d,  nf,  loyalty,  fidelity. 
Leccion,  nf,  lesson. 
Lectiira,  nf,  reading,   the  act  oi 

reading. 
Leer,  inf.  va.,  to  read,  to  peruse. 
Leg^l,  adj.,  legal,  according  to  law. 
Lego,  F.  legar,  ind.  perf  def  3  a.^ 

bequeathed. 
L^gua,  nf,  league. 
Leldo-a,  part.,  read. 
L6J0S,  adv.,  far,  far  off. 
L^ngua^  nf^  language ;  tongxw. 


VOCABULARY. 


377 


LLE 

Lentani^nte,  orfr.,  slowly  tardily. 
L6nto-a,  arf/.,  slow,  lingering,  tardy. 
Lepanto,  n.  prop.,  Lepanto. 
Les,  pron.  pars.  pL,  them,  those,  to 

them,  to  you. 
Letra,  ti/".,  letter. 
Levantilr,  irif.  ra.,  to  raise,  to  rise, 

to  elevate,  to  bear. 
LevantaraS,  F.  levantar,  ind.  \  fut. 

2  5.,  thou  shalt  bear. 
Levante,   F.  levantar^  subj.   pres. 

3  «.,  may  rise. 
Ley,  7?/*.,  law. 

Leyu,  F.  leer,  ind.perf.  def.  3  5.,  he 
read,  perused. 

Liberal,  adj.,  liberal,  generous. 

Liberaliddd,  nf.y  liberality,  generosi- 
ty. 

Liber  tad,  ri/!,  liberty,  freedom. 

Libertdr,  ra.,  to  free,  to  set  at  liberty. 

Libra,  n/".,  found. 

Librar,  inf.  ra.,  to  free,  to  deliver. 

Libre,  adj.,  free  ;  exempt. 

Libro,  nm.,  book. 

Ligar,  inf.  va.,  to  league,  to  ally,  to 
bind. 

Limitar,  wi/I  va.,  to  limit,  to  bound, 
to  confine. 

Linea,  nf.,  line ;  rank  or  file  of  sol- 
diers. 

Lisonge^r,  inf.  va.,  to  flatter,  to 
praise. 


LLE 

Lisongeado-a,par/.,  flattered,  friend. 

Literario-a,  adj.,  literary,  pertain- 
ing to  letters  or  literature. 

Lo,  def.  art.  neuter,  the,  that  which 
is, what  is. 

Lo,  pron.  pers.  neuter,  it,  so ;  lo  qucy 
that  which,  what. 

Locilsto,  n.  prop.,  Locasto. 

Lociira,  nf,  folly,  absurdity,  rash- 
ness. 

Logrado-a,  part.,  obtained,  enjoy- 
ed, acquired. 

Logrando,  ger.,  obtaining,  enjoy- 
ing. 

Lograr,  inf.  va.,  to  obtain,  to  en- 
joy, to  acquire,  to  succeed  in. 

Lugro,  nm.,  accomplishment,  at 
tainment. 

Londres,  n.  prop.,  London. 

Los,  art.  def  m.,  the 

Los,  pron..  pers.  and  dem.,  them, 
those,  they. 

LucUlo,  n.prop:w.,  Lucullus. 

Liicha,?!/'.,  struggle,  strife,  contest 

Luchar,  inf.  va.,  to  struggle,  tr» 
strive. 

Lugiir,  nm.,  spot,  place,  village. 
En  lugar  de,  in  place  of,  instead 
of. 

Lujr)SO-a,  adj.,  fond  of  show,  pro- 
fuse, showy,  luxurious. 

Luz.  nf,  light. 


L,T^, 


Llama,  nf,  flame. 

Llamado-a,  pari.,  called,  named. 

Llam^r,  inf.  va.,  to  call,  to  name. 

LlamOj    F.  llamar,  ind.  perf  def. 
3  s.,  he  or  she  called. 

Llegando,  ger.,  arriving,  reaching. 

Llegar,   inf.  vn.,   to  arrive,  to  ap- 
proach, to  attain. 

Llegu,  F.  llegar,  ind.  perf.  def  3  s., 
he  or  she  arrived. 

32* 


Llenar,  inf.  va.,  to  fill,  to  occupy 

to  fulfil,  to  perform. 
Llerio-a,     adj.,     full,    filled;    com 

plete. 
Lleva,    F.   Ihvar,    ind.  pres.   3  s. 

bears,  brings,  produces,  carries. 
Llevar,  inf.  va.,  to  carry,  to  bear,  tc 

produce,  to  bring,  to  wear. 
Llevare,  F.  llevar,  ind.  I  fut.  1  s.,  1 

shall  bring,  I  shall  carry. 


378 


VOCABULARY. 


MAN 

Llevu,  F.  Uevar^  ind.  per/,  def.  3  *., 

carried,  brought,  took. 
Llorar,  inf.  rn..,  to  weep,  to  mourn, 

tc  deplore. 


MER 

Llover^,  P.  Uover,  ind.  1  fut.  3  »., 

it  will  rain. 
Lluvia,  Tif.,  rain,  shower. 


M. 


Madera,  rj/.,  wood,  timber. 

Madre,  «/.,  mother. 

Madrid,  n.  prop.f.^  Madrid. 

Maestro,  nm.^  master,  teacher,  in- 
structor. 

Magistrado,  nm.,  magistrate,  ma- 
gistracy. 

Magnanimo-a,  adj.,  magnanimous, 
generous. 

Mai,  Tim.,  evil,  harm,  disease. 

Mai,  adj.,  see  Malo. 

Maleta,  nf.,  portmanteau,  valise. 

Malevo!o-a,  adj.f  malevolent,  ma- 
lignant. 

Malo-a,  adj.,  wicked,  evil,  bad ;  sick, 
sore,  diseased. 

Mamd,  nf.,  mamma,  mother. 

Manchar,  inf.  va.,  to  spot,  to  stain, 
to  pollute,  to  corrupt. 

Mandado-a,  part,  commanded,  or- 
dered, 

Mandar,  inf.  va.,  to  command,  to 
order,  to  send. 

Mandd,  F.  mandar,  ind.  perf.  def. 
1  s.,  I  gave  orders. 

Manejar,  inf.  va.,  to  manage,  to 
carry  on,  to  transact. 

Manera,  nf,  manner,  custom.  De 
manera,  in  such  a  manner. 

Manifestar,  i7if.  va,,  to  manifest,  to 
show,  to  discover. 

Manifi^stan,  P.  manifestar,  ind. 
pres.  3  p.,  they  manifest,  they 
evince. 

Mdno,  nf,  hand. 

M^nso-a,  adj.,  meek,  gentle,  tame. 

Manana,  nf,  morning,  morrow. 

Mauana,  ac?r.,  to-riorrow,  I 


Margen,  nm.,  margin,  border,  edge. 

Marmol,  nm.,  marble. 

Martillo,  nm.,  hammer. 

Mas,  adv.,  more ;  el  mas,  la  mas, 
lo  mas,  the  most;  mas  que,  or 
mas  de,  more  than. 

Mas,  conj.,  but,  except. 

Matanza,  nf,  slaughter,  butchery. 

Matematico,  nm.,  mathematician. 

Matematico-a,  adj.,  mathematical. 

Matorral,  nm.,  a  place  full  of  bush- 
es, brambles  or  briers. 

Matrimunio,  nm.,  matrimony,  mar- 
riage. 

Mayor,  adj.,  greater,  larger.  El 
mayor,  la  mayor,  the  greatest. 

Me,  pron.pers.,  me,  to  me,  for  me. 

Mediania.  nf,  mediocrity,  middle 
state. 

M^dio,  nm.,  means,  way,  midst. 

Medio-a,  adj.,  half. 

Mediodia,  nm.,  noon,  south. 

Mejicano-a,  n.  and  ad^j.,  Mexican. 

Mejico,  n.  prop.,  Mexico. 

MejCr,  adj.,  better.  Elmejor,  the 
best. 

Mejora,  nf,  improvement,  melio- 
ration. 

Melodla,  nf,  melody,  sweet  music. 

Memorable,  adj.,  memorable. 

MemCria,  nf,  memory,  rerpem- 
brance;  memorial,  memoir. 

Menos,  adv.,  less ;  except.  EL 
menos,  the  least. 

M^nte,  nf,  mind. 

Mercad^r,  nm.,  trader,  shop-keeper. 

Mer^ce,  F.  merecer,  ind.  pres.  3  «., 
merits,  deserves. 


V0CABT7LARY. 


379 


MON 

Me'eccr,  inf.  va.,  to  deserve,  to 
merit. 

Merecldo-a,  adj.y  meritorious,  mer- 
ited, deserving. 

Meiito,  n?7i.,  merit,  desert. 

Meriturio-a,  adj.^  meritorious. 

Mes,  nm.,  mouth. 

Metaf  isico,  nm.,  metaphysician. 

Ml,  pron.  pers.,  me. 

Mi,  pron.  poss.,  my. 

Mientras,  adv.,  w.'iilst,  in  the  mean 
time. 

Miguel,  n.  prop.,  Michael. 

Mil,  azlj.  num.,  a  tliousand. 

Millar,  nm.,  thousand. 

MillOn,  mn.,  n.illion. 

Minerill,  n.  and  adj.,  mineral. 

Miniito,  nm.,  minute. 

Mio-a,  pron.  pass.,  my,  mine. 

Mirada,  n/.,  glance,  look. 

Mirando,  ger.,  seeing,  looking  at, 
beholding. 

Mirar,  iiif.  va.,  to  look,  to  behold, 
to  observe,  to  admire,  to  esteem. 

Mis,  pron.  poss.  pi.,  my, 

Miseria,  nf.,  misery,  calamity,  mis- 
fortune, distress. 

Mismo-a,  adj.,  the  same,  self,  self- 
same. 

Modale*?,  nm.  pL,  manners. 

Modelo,  nm.,  model,  copy,  exam- 
ple, pattern. 

Moderacion,  nf.,  moderation,  tem- 
perance. 

Modestia,  nf,  modesty,  decency, 
decorum. 

Modesto-a,  adj.,  modest,  unassum- 
ing. 

MCdo,  nm.,  manner,  mode. 

MomentJjineo-a,  adj.,  momentary. 

Momento,  nm.,  moment ;  import- 
ance. 

Miina,  nf,  female  monkey  or  ape. 

Monar^a,  nm.y  monarch. 


Muy 

Monarquia,  n/I,  monarchy,  king- 
dom. 

Monarquico-a,  adj.,  monarchical. 

Mono,  nm.,  monkey,  ape. 

Monstruuso-a,  adj.,  monstrous, 
enormous,  shocking. 

Montana,  nf,  mountain. 

Munte,  nm.,  mount,  hill. 

Monton,  nm.,  pile,  heap. 

Moral,  nm.,  morality,  ethics 

Moral,  adj.,  moral. 

Morlr,  inf.  vn.,  to  die,  to  perish. 

M6ro-a,  n.  and  adj..  Moor,  Moorish. 

Mortal,  adj.,  mortal,  subject  to 
death. 

Mostrador,  nm.,  counter  of  a  shop 
or  store. 

Mostrtir,  inf.  va.,  to  show,  to  ex- 
plain, to  exhibit. 

Motivo,  nm.,  motive,  cause,  mov- 
ing power. 

Mover,  irf.  va.,  to  move,  to  put  in 
motion,  to  excite. 

Movimiento,  nm.,  movement,  mo- 
tion ;  revolt. 

Miicho-a,  adj.,  much;  mikhos-as^ 
many,  several. 

Miicho,  adv.,  much,  very  much. 

Miida,  F.  mudar,  ind.  pres.  3  s., 
changes. 

Mudar,  inf.  va.,  to  change,  to  alter. 

Mu^.te,  nf,  death. 

Muerto-a,  adj.  and  part.,  dead, 
died. 

Muger,  nf,  woman,  wife. 

Mujer,  same  as  muger. 

Mundo,  nm.,  world. 

Muriu,  F.  morir,  ind.  perf  def  3  «., 
died,  he  died. 

Murmurdr,  inf.  va  ,  to  murmur  j  to 
complain  of,  to  censure. 

Miiro,  nm.,  wall. 

Milsica,  nf,  music. 

Muy,  adv.,  very,  very  much. 


380 


VOCABULARY. 


N. 


NIN 


Nacer,  inf.  rn.,  to  be  bom,  to  rise, 
to  bud,  to  spring. 

Nacido-a,  part.,  born,  been  born, 
risen. 

Nacimi^nto,  nm.,  birth,  nativity, 
origin. 

Naciun,  n/*.,  nation. 

Nacionjll,  adj.,  national. 

Naclonalid^d,  n/*.,  nationality,  na- 
tional manners  and  custoi*js. 

Nada,  n/!,  nothing,  nonentity, 
naught. 

Nida,  adv.y  in  no  degree,  by  no 
means. 

Nadie,  'pron,  indef.,  nobody,  no 
one. 

Niipoles,  n.  prop.,  Naples. 

Natural,  n.  and  adj.,  native  ;  natu- 
ral. 

Naturaleza,  nf.,  nature,  disposition. 

Naturallsta,  vm.,  naturalist. 

Nav^ja,  nf.,  razor. 

Navegacion,  nf.,  navigation, voyaare. 

Neces^rio-a,  adj.,  necessary,  requi- 
site. 

Necesidad,  nf.,  necessity,  need. 

Necesitan,  F.  necesitar,  ind.  pre.". 
3  pL,  need,  require. 

Necesitar,  inf.  va.,  to  want,  to  need, 
to  require. 

Necio-a,  adj,,  foolish,  ignorant,  stu- 
pid. 

Negar,  inf.  va.,  to  deny,  to  refuse. 

Nigo^io,  nm,,  affair,  business,  mat- 
ter. 

Neutraliz^r,  inf.  va.,  to  neutralize, 
to  render  null. 

Nevir,  inf.  v.  impers.,  to  snow. 

Ni,  conj.,  neither,  nor. 

Nieto,  nm.,  grandson. 

Ni6ve,  nf.,  snow. 

Ningiin,  pron.  indef.,  no,  nobody, 
no  one. 


NUE 

Ningiino-a,  pron.  indef.,  no,  nr 
body,  not  any. 

Nina,  jif.,  female  child. 

Ninez,  nf,  childhood. 

Nino,  nm.,  cliild. 

No,  adv.,  not,  no;  nomas,  nothing 
e!se. 

Nuble,  adj.,  noble,  illustrious,  hon- 
orable. 

Noblemente,  adv.,  nobly,  generous- 
ly- 

Nobleza,  nf,  nobility. 

Noche,  nf,  night ;  darkness. 

Nombrado-a,  part.,  called,  appoint- 
ed,  nominated. 

Nombrar,  inf.  va.,  to  name,  to  ap- 
point, to  nominate. 

Numbre,  nm.,  name ;  noun. 

Non,  adv.,  not  (antiquated). 

Norte,  nm.,  north. 

NCrte- Americano,  nm.,  North  A- 
merican. 

Noruego-a,  adj.,  Norwegian. 

Nos,  pron.  ^ers,  pl.j  us,  to  us,  for 
us;  we. 

Nosotros-as,  pron.  pers.  pL,  we ;  us. 

Notable,  adj.,  notable,  remarkable. 

Notablem^.ite,  adv.,  notably,  in  a 
manner  worthy  of  note, 

Notar.  inf.  va.,  to  note,  to  remark, 
to  observe. 

Noticia,  nf,  news,  intelligence,  in- 
formation. 

Nov^'a,  nf,  novel,  fiction. 

Novi^mbre,  nm.,  November. 

Nublcldo-a,  adj.,  cloudy. 

Nuestro-a,  pron.  pass.,  our,  ours. 

Nuevamcnte,  adv.,  newly,  recent  Sy. 

Nu^va-Yurk,  n.prop..  New  Yoi;<. 

Nu6vo-a,  adj.,  new ;  de  nurro, 
anew,  again. 

Nu6vo-M4jico,  n.  prop.,  New  JNIex- 
ico. 


VOCABULARY. 


381 


ocu 

Nulidid,    71/1,     nullity,     nothing- 
ness. 
Num^ncia,  n.  prop.,  Numantia. 
Numantlno-a,  adj.^  Numcintine. 


ORD 

Niimero,  nm.,  number. 
Niinca,  adv.^  never. 
Nutrir,   Inf.  ra.,  to  nourish,  to  cul- 
tivate. 


O. 


O',  conj.^  or,  either. 

Obedec^r,  inf.  va.,  to  obey,  to  yield 
to. 

Obj^to,  nm.,  object  end,  design. 

Obligaclon,  ri/*.,  obligation,  duty, 
contract. 

Obl:gtIdo-a,  part.,  bound,  indebted. 

Obligar,  iif.  ra.,  to  oblige,  to  bind, 
to  compel. 

O'bra,  nf.j  work,  deed,  labor. 

Obrar,  i7if.  ra.,  to  work,  to  act,  to 
do. 

Obs^quio,  nm.,  complaisance,  civili- 
ty. 

Observado-a,  part.,  observed,  look- 
ed at. 

Observ^ncia,  nf.,  observance. 

Observar,  inf.  ra.,  to  observe,  to  at- 
tend to,  to  look  at,  to  main- 
tain. 

Observaredes,  F.  observar,  subj.  1 
fut.  2  p.,  ye  shall  observe.  (It  is 
an  obsolete  form  for  observaries.) 

Obstindrse,  inf.  vr.,  to  be  obstinate, 
to  persist. 

Obten^r,  inf.  va.,  to  obtain,  to  gain, 
to  preserve,  to  maintain. 

Obtenldo,  part.,  obtained. 

Ocasion,  rf,,  occasion,  opportunity, 
motive. 

Ocaso,  nm.,  the  west. 

O'cho,  adj.  num.,  eight. 

Ocultdndo,^er.,  hiding,  concealing. 

Octubre,  nm.,  October. 

Ocupacion,  nf,  occupation,  profes- 
sion, employment. 

Ocupido-a,  par/,  and  oc(;.,  occupied, 
eppioyed^  busy. 


Ocupjlr,  inf.  va.,  to  occupy,  to  em- 
ploy, to  engage. 

Ocuirencia,  jif,  occurrence,  inci- 
dent, event. 

Ocurrir,  inf.  va.,  to  occur,  to  hap- 
pen. 

Odiilr,  inf.  va.,  to  hate,  to  abhor,  to 
detest. 

Ofreciendo,  ger.,  offering,  present- 
ing. 

01,  F.  oir,  md.  perf.  def.  1  s.,  I 
heard. 

Oido,  nm.,  ear,  the  sense  of  hearing. 

Oido,  part.,  heard. 

Oir,  inf.  ra.,  to  hear;  to  listen  to, 
to  ht'td. 

O'jo,  nm.,  eye ;  s'ght. 

Oilmpico-a,  adj.,  Olympic. 

Oividiir,  ijf.  va.,  to  forget,  to  neg- 
Lct. 

Olvldo,  nm.,  oblivion,  forgetfulness. 

OperaciCn,  nf.,  operation,  process, 
agency. 

Opinion,  nf,  opinion,  judgment, 
mental  view. 

Opresiun.  nf,  oppression,  coercion, 
tyranny. 

OpresCr.  nm.,  oppressor. 

O'  res6r-a,  adj.,  oppressive,  onerous. 

Opnmldo-a,  part.,  oppressed. 

Oprimir,  inf.  va.,  to  oppress,  to 
crush,  to  bear  down  upon,  to  af- 
flct. 

Oprubio,  nm.,  opprobrium,  infamy, 
ignominy. 

Orador,  nm.,  orator;  panegyrist. 

Orden,  rj/*.,  order,  command,  pre- 
cept. 


382 


VOCABULARY. 


PAR 

Or^ja,  tt/I,  ear. 

Organo,  7im.,  organ,  a  musical  in- 
strument. 

Orgilllo,  nm.j  pride,  haughtiness, 
arrogance. 

Orgul'uso-a,  adj.,  proud,  haughty, 
arrogant. 

Orl^nte,  nm.,  east. 

Origen,  nm.,  origin,  source,  mo- 
tive. 

Orniir,  m/*.  va.,  to  adorn,  to  orna- 
ment. 

O'ro,  nm.,  gold ;  riches. 


PEC 

Os,  pron.  ptrs.,  you,  yourselves,  to 
you. 

Osadia,  nf.,  courage,  boldness,  in- 
trepidity. 

O'so,  nm.,  bear. 

Otono,  nm..  Autumn. 

Otorgar,  inf.  va.,  to  consent,  to 
agree  to. 

O'tro-a,  indef. pron.,  other,  another. 

O'ye,  F.  oir,  ind.  pres.  3  s.,  hears, 
he  or  she  hears. 

Oyo,  F.  oir,  ind.  perf.  def.  3  s., 
heard,  he,  she,  or  it  heard. 


P. 


Paciencia,  nf.,  patience. 

Picto,  nm.,  compact,  covenant. 

Padec^r,  inf.  va.,  to  suffer,  to  be  li- 
able to. 

Padre,  nm.,  father :  pMres,  parents. 

Paga,  F.  pagar,  ind.  prcs.  3  s., 
pays,  he  pays. 

Pagtir,  inf.  ta.,  to  pay,  to  reward, 
to  atone. 

Pais,  nm.,  country,  nation. 

Pal^bra,  nf,  word,  promise. 

Palad^r,  nm.,  palate,  taste. 

Palmo,  nm.,  palm,  inch;  pdlmo  a 
palmo,  inch  by  inch.     . 

Pit  o  A'lto,  n.prop.,  Palo  Alto  (high 
timber) 

Paf  A\,  adj.,  Papal,  belonging  to  the 
Pope. 

Psp^l,  nm.,  paper;  newspaper. 

PJra,  prep.,  for,  to,  towards.  Para 
con,  in  regard  to,  as  to,  concern- 
ing. 

Pardje,  nm.,  place ;  disposition. 

Par^cen,  F.  parecer,  ind.  pres.  3p  , 
they  appear,  they  resemble,  look 
alike. 

Parecer,  inf.  vn.  and  rr.,  to  appear, 
to  rescm'^  le. 

Pari^nte,  nm.,  relation,  kindred. 


Parte,  nf,  part,  share.  Parte,  adv.^ 
partly. 

Particularmente,  adv.,  particularly, 
especially. 

Partido,  nm.,  party,  part,  means, 
measure. 

Pas^do-a,  part.,  past,  passed. 

Pasando,  ger.,  passing. 

Pasar,  in/,  va.,  to  pass,  to  walk 
along,  to  cross,  to  exceed,  to  go, 
to  spend.     * 

Pas^o,  nm.,  walk,  walking-place. 

Piiso,  nm.,  step,  pass,  passage. 

Paso,  F.  pasdr,  ind.  pres.  1  $.,  I 
puss. 

Pasto,  nm.,  food,  nourishment,  pas- 
ture. 

P atria,  nf.,  native  country,  coun- 
try. 

Patriotico-a,  adj.,  patriotic. 

Paus  :dam6nte,  adv.,  slowly,  by  de- 
grees. 

Paz,  nf.,  peace. 

Pecddo,  nm.,  sin,  transgression. 

Pecildo,  part.,  sinnod,  done  injus- 
ti  e. 

Pec^r,  to  sin,  to  offend  against 
right. 

P^cho,  71711.,  breast,  bosom,  heart. 


VOCABULARY. 


383 


PER 

Pedinte,  nm.i  pedant,  a  man  vain 
of  little  knowledge. 

Pedazo,  nm.,  piece,  bit,  fragment. 

Pedir,  iTif.  va.,  to  ask,  to  petition, 
to  beg,  to  demand. 

Pedro,  n.  prop.,  Peter. 

Pelayo,  n.  prop.,  Pelayo. 

Peligro,  nm.,  danger,  risk,  hazard. 

Peligroso-a,  adj.,  dangerous,  hazard- 
ous. 

PelMjo,  nm.,  skin,  hide. 

P^na,  n/.,  punishment,  penalty, 
pain. 

Penetracion,  nf.,  penetration,  dis- 
cernment. 

Penetrar,  inf.  va.,  to  penetrate,  to 
pierce,  to  force  through. 

Peninsula,  nf.,  peninsula. 

Pensami^nto,  nm.,  thought,  idea, 
design. 

Pensdr,  inf.  va.,  to  think,  to  be- 
lieve, to  imagine,  to  intend. 

Pequeiio-a,  adj.,  small,  little,  unim- 
portant. 

Peur,  adj.  and  adv.,  worse. 

Perd^r,  inf.  va.,  to  lose,  to  miss,  to 
misspend. 

Perdida,  rif.,  loss,  damage,  detri- 
ment. 

Perdido-a,  part.,  lost,  been  deprived 
of. 

Perdiu,  F.  perder,  ind.perf.  def.  3  s., 
lost,  he  lost. 

Perdonando,  ger.,  pardoning,  ex- 
cusing. 

Perdon^r,  inf.  va.,  to  pardon,  to  for- 
give, to  excuse. 

Perez6so-a,  adj.,  lazy,  indolent, 
slothful. 

Perfeccii3n,  nf.,  perfection,  excel- 
lence. 

Perfldia,  nf,  perfidy,  treachery. 

Periodico,  nm.,  periodical,  newspa- 
per. 


PIR 

Perlto-a,  adj.,  skilful,  experienced. 

Permanec^r,   inf.  vn.,  to  persist,  to 
remain,  to  endure. 

Permiso,  nm.,  permission,  leave. 

Permitldo-a,    part.,   permitted,  al- 
lowed. 

Permitir,    inf.    va.,   to  permit,   to 
grant. 

Pero,  conj.,  but,  except,  yet. 

Perpetuo-a,  adj.,  perpetual,  continu- 
al. 

Perro,^  nm.,  dog. 

Persecucion,  nf,  pursuit,  persecu 
tion. 

Persistir,  inf.vn.,  to  persi.«*  to  per- 
severe, to  insist. 

Persona,  nf,  person,  individ'ial. 

Personalniente,  adv,^  persona'ly,  in 
person. 

Persuadir,  inf.  va.,  to  persuad*^.  to 
induce. 

Pertenece,  F.  pertenecer,  ind.  p-  s, 
3  s.,  belongs. 

Perverso-a,  adj.,  perverse,  wicked, 
stubborn. 

Pesadez,  nf,    weight,   heaviness* 
burden. 

Pesar,  nm.,  sorrow,  grief.    A^  ptata^ 
de,  in  defiance  of,  in  spite  of. 

Pesca,  nm.,  fish,  fishery. 

Pescadur,     nm.,    fisherman,    fish 
monger. 

Piamontes,    n.    prop.,    Piedmont 
ese. 

Picante,  adj.,  stinging,  cutting,  sar 
castic. 

Pidiendo,  ger.,  asking,  beggincf. 

Pie,  nm.,  foot ;  bottom. 

Piedra,  nf,  stone. 

Pierdas,   F.  perder,  subj.  pres.  2  s  . 
thou  mayest  lose. 

Pintor^sco-a,  adj.,  picturesque. 

Pio,  n.  prop..  Pins. 

Pirineos,  n.  prop.  pL,  Pyrenees. 


8S4 


VOCABULARY. 


POR 

Plsan,  F.  -pisar^  ind.  pres.  3  p/., 
tread,  trample,  step  upon. 

Pisir,  inf.  ra.,  to  tre^d,  to  step  upon. 

Plact-r,  nm.,  pleasure,  graiificationj 
enjoyment. 

Plan,  nm.,  plan,  design. 

Planta,  77/.,  sole  of  the  foot. 

PI  intear,  m/  ra.,  to  pi  m,  to  scheme. 

Plata,  7i/;,  silver ;  wealth,  money. 

Pleito,  nm.,  law-suit ;  contest. 

Pliima,  nf.,  pen,  feather,  quill. 

Poblaciun,  w/.,  population ;  town. 

Pobre,  adj.,  poor,  indigent ;  unfor- 
tunate. 

Poco,  rwi.,  little. 

P6ro-a,  adj.  and  adv.,  little.  Pocosy 
few. 

Poder,  nm.,  power,  might,  authori- 
ty. 

Poder,  inf.  vn.,  to  be  able,  to  have 
power. 

PoderCso-a,  adj.,  powerful,  mighty. 

Podido,  part,,  being  able,  been 
able. 

Podra,  ¥.  poder,  ind.  1/u/.  3  s.,  will 
be  able. 

Podrla,  F.  poder,  svbj.  impf  1  or 
3  .9.,  he  might  be  able,  he  might. 

Poesia,  fif.,  postry. 

Poeta,  nm.,  poet. 

Politico-a,  adj.,  politic,  political. 

Polvo,  nm.,  dust. 

Ponderar,  inf.  va.,  to  ponder,  to 
weigh,  to  examine. 

Pon^r,  inf.  ra,,  to  place,  to  put,  to 
impose. 

Ponzona,  nf,  poison. 

Por,  prep.,  by,  for,  through,  on  ac- 
count of,  in  behalf  of,  as. 

Pormenor,  nm.,  detail,  particular  ac- 
count. 

Porque,  conj.,  because,  for  the  rea- 
son that. 

Poiqu^,  adj.i  why,  for  what  reason. 


PRE 

Portarse,   inf.  vr.,  to  conduct,  to 

comport,  to  behave. 
Portendo,  see  poi-lento. 
Portento,  nm.,  prodigy,  wonder. 
Posada,  n/*.,  inn,  tavern,  hotel. 
Posad^ro,  nm.,  inn-keeper. 
Posdata,  nf.,  postscript. 
Posean,   F.  poseer,  subj.  pres.  3  p., 

may  possess. 
Poseer,    inf.    va.,   to    possess,    to 

have. 
Posible,  adj.,  possible. 
Posicion,  nf,  position,  situation. 
PCsta,  nf,  mail,  post-ofiice. 
Posteridad,  nf,  posterity.     • 
Potencia,    nf.,    power;    kingdom, 

state. 
Pidctica,  nf,  practice. 
Practicar,   inf.  va.,  to  practice,  ♦.o 

perform. 
Precipidamcnte,  precipitately,  has- 

t-ly. 
Precision,  ??/.,  precision,  necessity, 

obligation. 
Preferible,  adj.,  preferable. 
Prefiero,  F.  preferir,  ind.  pres.  1  *., 

I  prefer. 
Pregunta,  nf,  question,  inquiry. 
Preguntddo-a,  part.,  being  asked, 

questioned. 
Preguntar,  inf.  va.,  to  ask,  to  ques- 
tion. 
Preguntu,  F.  preguntar,  ind.peif. 

dcf  3  s.,  asked,  he  inquired. 
Prenda,  nf.,  accomplishment,   tal- 
ent, quality. 
Prend^r,  inf.  va.,  to  take,  to  seize, 

to  catch. 
Pr^nsa,  nf,  printing-press,  press. 
Preocupaciun,  nf,  prejudice. 
Prepardndo,  ger.,  preparing. 
Preparar,    inf.  va.,   to  prepare,  to 

make  ready. 
Pres^ncia,  nf^  pre  sence. 


VOCABULART. 


385 


PRO 

Presenter,  %nf.  ra.,  to  present^  to 
'loiFer,  to  make  a  donation  to. 

Presente,  adj.^  present. 

Presidente,  ?j7n.,  president. 

Presuroso-a,  adj.,  hasty,  quick. 

Pretender,   inf.  va.,  to  pretend,  to 
claim,  to  attempt. 

Primavera,  rif.,  spring 

Primer,  adj.,  first. 

Primero-a,  adj.,  first ;  chief. 

PrimCr,  nm.,  dexterity,  nicety. 

Principal,  orf/.,  principal,  noble. 

Principe,  nm.,  prince;  king. 

Principio,    n?M.,    principle,    begin- 
ning, motive. 

Prisionero,  nm.,  prisoner,  captive. 

Privado-a,  part.^  deprived. 

?rivar,   irif.  va.,  to  deprive,  to  de- 
spoil. 

Probar,  inf.  va.,  to  try,  to  prove,  to 
examine. 

Probidad,  n/!,  probity,  integrity. 

Proceder,  nm.,  proceeding,  manner 
of  proceeding,  conduct. 

Proceder,  inf.  va.,   to  proceed,  to 
act. 

Proclam^r,  inf.  va.,  to  proclaim,  to 
give  notice  publicly. 

Procsimidad,  nf.,  proximity,  conti- 
guity. 

Prociira,  F.  procurar,  imp.  2  s.,  en- 
deavor thou. 

Procurar,  inf.  va.,  to  endeavor,  to 
manage,  to  solicit. 

Prodiicen,  F.  prodttcir,  ind.  pros. 
3  p.,  they  produce. 

Producido-a,  part.,  produced. 

Produclr,  inf.  va.,  to  produce,  to 
bring  fort(j. 

Profundamente,  adv.,  profoundly. 

Profiindo-a,  adj.,  profound,  deep. 

Progreso,  nm.,  progress,  advance- 
ment. 

PrCyimo,  nm.|  neighbor.        ^ 

33 


PUB 

Proraeter,  inf.  va.,  to  promise. 
Prontamente,  adv.,  quickly,  prompt- 

ly. 

PrCnto,  adv.,  soon,  immediately. 

Pronunciar,  inf.  va.,  to  pronounce, 
to  deliver  (a  speech). 

Pronunciacion,  nf,  pronunciation. 

Propiam^nte,  ac^».,  properly,  appro- 
priately, regularly. 

PrCpio-a,  adj.,  proper,  own,  pecu- 
liar. 

Proporciun,  ?//.,  proportion;  simi- 
larity. 

Proporcionado,  part.,  proportioned, 
adapted,  procured. 

Propiiso,  F .  proponer,  ind.  perf  def. 
3  s.,  he  or  she  proposed. 

Prusa,  nf,  prose,  prose- writings. 

Prosador,  nm.,  a  prose  writer,  a 
prosy  writer  or  speaker. 

Proseguir,  inf.  va.,  to  continue,  to 
pursue,  to  follow. 

Prosperid^d,  nf,  prosperity,  suc- 
cess. 

Proteccion,  nf,  protection,  favor, 
shelter. 

Protector,  nm.,  protector,  patron, 
supporter. 

Protej^r,  inf.  va.,  to  protect,  to  fa* 
vor,  to  patronize. 

Provenir,  inf.  va.,  to  arise,  to  origi- 
nate. 

Provincia,  nf,  province,  territory. 

Proy^ctil,  nm.,  projectile. 

Proyecto,  nm.,  project,  plan, 
scheme. 

Prudam^nte,  adv.,  prudently. 

Prud^ncia,  nf,  prudence,  wisdom. 

Prueba,  nf,  proof,  evidence. 

Publicddo-a,  part.,  published. 

Publican,  P.  publicar,  ind.  pres.  o 
pi.,  they  publish. 

Publicando,  ger.j  publishing)  pro- 
claiming. 


386 


VOCABULARY. 


REA 

Publicar.  inf.  ra.,  to  publish,  to  pro- 
claim, to  manifest. 

Piiblico-a,  adj.^  public  ;  common. 

Pudieran,  F.  poder^  suhj.  imp/.  3p., 
ihey  might  be  able,  could. 

Piido,  F.  poder^  ind.  perf.  def.  3  s., 
was  able,  could. 

Pueblo,  nm.^  town,  people. 

Puede,  F.  poder,  ind.  prcs.  3  s.,  is 
able,  can,  may,  he  or  she  can. 

Pueden,  F.  poder,  ind.  pres.  3  p., 
they  are  able,  they  can,  may. 

Pu^des,  F.  poder^  ind.  pres.  2  «., 
thou  art  able,  thou  canst  or  mayest. 


REC 

Puedo,  F.  poder^  ind.  pres.  1  «.,  I 
am  able,  I  can  or  may.  ^ 

Puente,  nm.  and  n/!,  bridge. 

Pueriliddd,  nf.,  puerility,  childish- 
ness, trifle. 

Pues,  or,  pu^s  que,  conj.,  then, 
since,  because. 

Puesto,  nm.y  place,  post. 

Pucsto-a,  part.,  placed,  put. 

Pilnto,  nm.,  point,  spot. 

Pur^za,  nf.,  purity. 

Piiro-a,  adj.,  pure,  unmixed,  clear, 
genuine. 


a. 


Q,ue,  pron.  rel,  that,  which,  who, 
whom,  what. 

Que,  conj.,  than ;  as,  since,  because, 
that. 

Q,uebrant^r,  inf.  va.,  to  break,  to  vi- 
olate. 

Q.uedar,  inf.  vn.,  to  stay,  to  remain, 
to  exist. 

Q,ued6,  F.  quedar,  ind.  -perf.  def. 
3  5.,  he  remained. 

Quehac^r,  nm.,  business,  occupa- 
tion. 

Q,uej^rse,  inf.  vr.,  to  complain,  to 
lament. 

Q,uem^r,  inf.  va.,  to  bum. 

Q,uerer,  iiif.  va.,  to  wish,    to    be 


willing,    to    be     fond     of,     to 

will. 
Querido-a,  adj..^  dear,  beloved. 
Queri^ndo,  ger.,  wishing,  desiring, 

loving. 
Q,ui^n,  pron,  rel.,  who,  that,  whom, 

he  who. 
Q,ui6res,   F.  querer,  ind.  pres.  2  s., 

thou  art  willing,  thou  wishest. 
Q,uijute,  n.  prop.,  Q,uixote. 
Quimico,  nm.,  chemist. 
Q^uince,  adj.  num.,  fifteen. 
Q-uisiere,  F.  querer,  subj.  Ifut.^s.; 

shall  be  willing. 
Quita,  F.  quitarse,  imp.  2  5.,  take 

them  off 


R. 


Raclmo,  nm.,  cluster,  bunch. 
Racion^l,  adj.,  rational. 
Rdmo,  nm.,  branch,  shoot. 
RSpidamente,  adv.,  rapidly. 
Raro-a,  adj.,  rare,  uncommon. 
Rasc^ndo,  ger.,  scratching. 
Rdso-a,  adj.,  plain,  bare,  open. 
RazoD,  n/l,  reason,  right. 
Re^i  adj.^  xbyal }  real. 


Realz^r,  inf.  va.,  to  heighten,  to 

elevate. 
Reanim^r,  inf.  va.,  to  reanimate,  to 

cheer. 
Rebaj^ndo,  ger.^  lesseWng,  dimin- 

ishing- 
Reca^r,  inf.  va.,  to  fall  back. 
Rechaz^r,  ir\f»  pa.,  to  repel,  to  con- 

uadict. 


V0CABT7LART. 


387 


REG 

RecibiG,  F.  7  6cifcir,  ind.  per/,  def. 
3  s.,  received,  he  received. 

Reciblr,  inf.  va.,  to  receive,  to  ac- 
cept. 

Recientem^nte,  adv.,  recently,  late- 

ly. 

Recinto,  nm.j  precinct. 

Recliita,  nm.,  recruit. 

Recobrando,  ger.,  recovering. 

Recompensado-a,  part.,  recom- 
pensed, rewarded. 

Recompensar,  irif.  va.,  to  reward, 
to  recompense. 

Recompensara,  F.  recompensar, 
ind,  I  fat.  3  s.,  will  reward. 

Reconocido-a,  part,  and  adj.,  ac- 
knowledged; grateful. 

Reconocimlento,  nm.,  recognition, 
acknowledgment,  gratitude. 

Record ar,  inf.  va.,  to  remind,  to  re- 
call. 

R^cto-a,  adj.,  right,  just,  straight. 

Recu^rdo,  nrn.,  remembrance,  me- 
mento, recollection. 

Reciirso,  nm.,  resource,  means,  re- 
course. 

Reducido-a,  part.,  reduced. 

Reducir,  inf.  va.,  to  reduce,  to  les- 
sen. 

Referir,  inf.  va.,  to  relate,  to  re- 
port. 

Reflexion,  nf,  reflection,  consider- 
tion. 

Reforma,  nf,  reformation,  amend- 
ment. 

Regado,  part.,  watered. 

Regalo,  nm.,  convenience,  benefit, 
regalement,  pleasure. 

Regando,  ger,,  moistening,  flood- 
ing, wetting. 

Regia,  F.  regir,  ind.  impf  3  s., 
ruled,  governed. 

Ri^gla,  n/:,  rule,  regulation. 

Regocij^ndo,  ger.,  rejoicing. 


RES 

Regocijir,  inf.  va.,  to  rejoice,  to 
gladden. 

Regocljo,  nm.,  joy,  rejoicing,  de- 
light. 

Regreso,  nm.,  return. 

Regular,  adj.,  regular,  common, 
proper. 

Regularizar,  inf.  va.,  to  methodize, 
to  regulate,  to  have  or  keep  regu- 
lar. 

Reinado,  nm.,  reign. 

Reino,  nm.,  kingdom. 

Relampaguea,  F.  relampaguear, 
ind.  pres.  3  s.,  it  lightens,  ii 
flashes. 

Reliice,  F.  relucir,  ind.  pres.  3  s. 
shines,  glitters. 

Remedio,  nm.,  remedy,  resource 
reparation. 

Remu6ven,  F.  remover,  ind.  pres. 
3  p.,  remove. 

Reparar,  inf.  va.,  to  repair,  to  make 
amends  for ;  to  notice. 

Repeler,  inf.  va.,  to  repel,  to  reject. 

Replto,  F.  repeth-f  ind.  pres.  1  s.,  I 
repeat. 

Repitiendo,  ger.,  repeating. 

Repltlo,  F.  repetir,  ind.  perf  def. 
3  s.,  repeated. 

Keplicar,  ivf.  va.,  to  reply,  to  an- 
swer. 

Repllco,  F.  replicar,  ind.  perf.  def. 
3  s.,  replied. 

Reposar,  inf.  vn.,  to  repose,  to  rest. 

Representaciun,  nf,  representation, 
figure,  image. 

ReprCche,  r?w.,  reproach,  reproof. 

Reproducido-a,  part.,  reproduced 

Repiiblica,  nf,  republic. 

Reputacion,  nf,  reputation,  fame, 
credit. 

Resdca,  n.  prop.,  Resaca  (surge, 
rolhng  land). 

Rescatado-a,  part.,  ransomed. 


388 


VOCABULARY. 


SAC 

Rescat^r,  irtf.  ra.,  to  ransom. 

Resid^nte,  nm.,  resident. 

Resist^ncia,  rj/.,  resistance,  opposi- 
tion. 

Resister,  ivf.  va.,  to  resist,  to  op- 
pose. 

Resolver,  inf.  va.,  to  resolve,  to  de- 
termine. 

Resonar,  inf.  vn.,  to  resound,  to  re- 
echo. 

Respetable,  adj.,  respectable. 

Respeto,  nni.,  respect,  regard,  vene- 
ration. 

Respetuosamente,  adv.,  respectful- 

ly. 

Respirar,  inf.  vn.,  to  respire,  to 
breathe. 

Responder,  inf.  va.,  to  respond,  to 
answer. 

Respondiu,  F.  responder,  ind.  perf 
def.  3  s.,  he  responded,  repli- 
ed. 

Respu^sta,  n/*.,  reply,  answer. 

Restante,  adj.,  remaining,  rest. 

Restar,  inf.  va.,  to  remain,  to  be 
left. 

Pcesto,  ??./n.,  rest,  remaining  part. 
Resfos,  remains. 

Result^do,  nm.f  result,  issue. 


SAL 

Ret^r,  inf.  va.,  to  impeach,  to  chal* 
lenge. 

Retirar,  inf.  va.,  to  retire,  to  with- 
draw. 

Reunion,  77/.,  meeting,  congrega- 
tion, party. 

Reunir,  inf.  va.,  to  join,  to  unite,  to 
assemble. 

Reunir^n,  F.  reunir,  ind.  1  fut. 
3  p.,  will  join,  will  unite. 

Reves,  nm.,  back  part,  reverse,  ill 
success. 

Revolucion,  nf,  revolution,  change, 
sedition. 

Rey,  nm.,  king. 

Ribera,  nf,  bank,  shore. 

Rico-a,  adj.,  rich,  wealthy. 

Rigor,  nm.,  severity,  rigor. 

Rio,  nm.,  river. 

Robo,  nm.,  robbery,  theft. 

Roedor,  nm.,  gnawer ;  gusano  roe' 
dor,  gnawing  worm,  remorse. 

Romano-a,  n.  and  adj.,  Roman. 

Romper,  inf.  va.,  to  break,  to  break 
through,  to  transgress. 

Rubor,  nm.,  blush,  shame. 

Ruido,  nm.,  noise. 

Ruina,  nf,  ruin,  downfall. 

Riisia,  n.  prop.,  Russia. 


Saber,  hf.  va.,  to  know,  to  under- 
stand. 

Sabes,  F.  saber,  ind.pres.  2  s.,  thou 
knowest. 

Sabla,  F.  saber,  ind.  impf.  3  s.,  he 
knew,  was  knowing. 

Sabiduria,  nf,  wisdom,  knowledge. 

S^bio-a,  adj,,  wise,  learned. 

Sacaron,  F.  sacar,  ind.  perf.  def. 
3  p.,  they  drew  out,  took  out. 

Sacerdote,  nm.,  clergyman,  priest. 

Sacriflcio,  nm.,  sacrifice,  compli- 
ance. 


Sacudir,  inf.  va.,  to  shake,  to  shake 

off. 
Sagrado-a,  adj.,  sacred,  consecrated, 

holy. 
Sagilnto,  n.  prop.,  Saguntum  (now 

Murviedro). 
S^la,  nf,  hall. 

Saladcro,  nm.,  salting-place, 
Sdlgo,  F.  salir,  ind.  pres.  1  s.,  I  set 

out,  I  start. 
Salido-a,  part.,  gone  out,  issued. 
Salimos,   F.  salir,  ind.  perf.   def, 

1  p.,  we  went  out. 


VOCABULARY. 


389 


SEG 

Salir,  inf.  rn.,  to  set  out,  to  go  out, 
to  start,  to  depart. 

Salle,  n/.,  hull. 

Salto,  F.  saltar,  ind.  per/,  def.  3  s., 
leaped,  he  jumped. 

Salud^ble,  adj.^  healthful,  salubri- 
ous. 

Salvador,  nm.,  Saviour,  redeemer. 

Salvage,  72m.,  savage. 

Salvar,  inf.  ra.,  to  save,  to  spare. 

San,  adj.^  an  abbreviation  for 
santo. 

Sancionar,  inf.  va.,  to  sanction. 

Sangre,  nf,  blood. 

Sangriento-a,  adj.,  bloody,  sangui- 
nary. 

Sanguinario-a,  adj.,  sanguinary, 
bloody. 

Sano-a,  adj.,  sound,  wholesome, 
healthy. 

Santo-a,  adj.,  sacred,  holy. 

Sardonico-a,  adj.,  sardonic. 

Satisfaccion,  nf,  satisfaction,  re- 
compense, gratification. 

Satisfecho-a,  part.,  satisfied,  con- 
tented. 

Se,  pron.  i-eflec,  one's  self,  himself, 
herself,  itself,  themselves;  each 
other ;  to  him,  to  her,  to  you,  to 
it,  to  them. 

Se,  F.  saber,  ind.  pres.  1  s.,  I  know. 

Se,  F.  ser,  imp.  2  s.,  be  thou. 

Sea,  F.  ser,  subj.  pres.  3  s.,  may  be, 
it  may  he. 

Secretam^nte,  adv.,  secretly,  pri- 
vately. 

Secreto-a,  adj.,  secret,  hidden,  con- 
cealed. 

Secund^do-a,  part.,  seconded,  sup- 
■  ported. 

Sed,  nf,  thirst. 

Seguida,  nf.,  following,  succession. 
De  seguida,  successively,  after- 
ward. •'  • 

33* 


SER 

Seguldo-a,  part.,  followed,  continu- 
ed. 

Seguir,  inf.  va.,  to  follow,  to  pursue, 
to  prosecute. 

Segiin,  prep.,  according  to,  accord- 
ing as. 

Segiindo-a,  adj.,  second. 

Seguro-a,  adj.,  secure,  sure,   con- 
stant. 

Seis,  adj.  num.,  six. 

Sembrar,  inf.  va.,  to  sow,  to  plant. 

S emej ante,  ac?;.,  such,  similar,  like; 
equal. 

Semejanza,  nf,  similitude,  resem- 
blance. 

Sencillo-a,  adj.,  simple,  neat,  plain 

Sendero,  nm.,  path. 

Seneca,  n.  prop.,  Seneca. 

Sensato-a,  adj.,  sensible,  judicious 
prudent. 

Sentemos,  F.  sentar,  imp.  1  p.,  lei 
us  seat,  let  us  sit. 

Sentencia,  nf,  sentence,  opinion, 
judgment. 

Sentimiento,  nm.,  sentiment,  feel- 
ing. 

Sentlr,  inf.  va.,  to  feel,  to  be  sorry 
for,  to  perceive,  to  be  moved. 

Sena,  nf.,  sign,  mark. 

Seiial,  nm.,  sign,  signal,  symptom. 

Sen  alar,  inf.  va.,  to  mark,  to  indi- 
cate, to  point  out,  to  stamp. 

SefiGr,  nm.,  Lord,  gentleman,  mas- 
ter, sir,  Mr. 

Seiiura,  nf,  lady,  madam,  mistress, 
Mrs. 

Separado-a,  part.,  separated. 

Separ^r,  inf.  va.,  to  separate,  to  di- 
vide, to  part,  to  withdraw. 

Sepdlcro,    nm.,    sepulchre,    tomb 
grave. 

Sepultado-a,  part:,  buried,  interred 

Ser,  nm.,  being,  existeJnce. 
'  Ser,  inf.  vn.,  to  be,  lb  exist.  ' 


390 


VOCABULARY. 


SIN 

Sera,  F.  scr,  ind.  Ifut.  3«.,  shall  or 
will  be. 

Ser^no-a,  adj.,  serene,  quiet,  calm, 
peaceful. 

Serla,  F.  ser,  subj.  imp/.  3  s.,  would 
or  should  be. 

Serpiente,  n/".,  serpent. 

Servicio,  nw.,  service,  use,  favor, 
benefit. 

Servldo-a,  part.,  served ;  pleased. 

Servir,  inf.  va.  and  vr.,  to  serve,  to 
suit,  to  do  a  favor,  to  be  pleased, 
to  vouchsafe. 

Sesdnta,  adj.  num.,  sixty. 

Set^nta,  adj.  num.,  seventy. 

Set.,  nm.,  abbreviation  for  Seiiem- 
hre,  September. 

SI,  pron.  pers.,  himself,  herself,  it- 
self, themselves,  each  other. 

Si,  conj.,  if,  though,  whether. 

Si,  adv.,  yes,  yea,  truly. 

Sido,  part.,  been. 

Si^mbre,  F.  sembrar,  subj.pres.  3  s., 
may  sow,  may  plant. 

Siempre,  adv.,  always,  ever.  Para 
siempre,  for  ever. 

Siendo,  ger.,  being. 

Siete,  adj.  num.,  seven. 

Slglo,  nm.,  age,  century. 

Siguiendo,  ger,,  following,  prose- 
cuting. 

Siguiente,  adj.,  following,  succeed- 
ing. 

SiMncio,  nm.,  silence. 

Silenciosam^nte,  adv.,  silently. 

Simple,  adj.,  simple,  plain,  pure. 

Sin,  prep.,  without. 

Sinceramente,  adv.,  sincerely. 

Sinc^ro,  adj.,  sincere,  real,  honest. 

Singular,  adj.t  singular,  extraordi- 
nary. 

Slno,  conj.  and  prep.,  but,  only,  ex- 
cept, unless. 

SlaCCBifl)  r^,,  synthesis. 


SOS 

Slrva,  F.  servir,  subj,  pres.  3  »»t 
may  serve. 

Sirviendo,  ger.,  serving. 

Sitio,  nm.,  site,  spot,  siege,  situa- 
tion. 

Situacion,  7if.,  situation,  state. 

Soberano,  nm.,  sovereign. 

Soberbia,  rif.,  pride,  haughtiness, 
vanity. 

Soberbio-a,  adj.,  proud,  haughty, 
vain. 

Subre,  prep.,  on,  upon,  over;  be- 


Sobresalir,  inf.  va.,  to  surpass,  to 
excel. 

Sociedad,  rif.,  society;  friendship. 

Socorro,  nm.,  succor,  aid. 

Sofista,  7im.,  sophist. 

Sojuzgar,  inf.  va.,  to  subjugate,  to 
subdue,  to  conquer. 

Sol,  nm.,  sun. 

Solamente,  adv.,  only,  solely. 

Soldado,  nm.,  soldier. 

Solemnemente,  ac?i7.,  solemnly. 

S61o-a,  adj.,  only,  alone. 

Sumbra,  nf.,  shade,  shelter. 

Sombrero,  nm.,  hat. 

Somos,  F.  ser,  ind.  pres,  I  p.,  we 
are. 

Son,  F.  ser,  ind.  pres.  3  p.,  are, 
they  are. 

Sonrie,  F.  sonreir,  ind,  pres,  3  s., 
smiles. 

Sonrlsa,  nf.,  smile. 

Sorprendente,  adj.,  surprising, won- 
derful. 

Sorprender,  inf.  va,,  to  surprise,  to 
astonish. 

Sorprendido-a,  part.,  surprised. 

Sorpresa,  ti/".,  surprise,  astonish- 
ment. 

Sosp^cha,  nf.,  suspicion,  mistrust. 

^ospech^r,  inf.  uo*,  to  suspect,  fo 
mistrust. 


VOCABULARY. 


391 


TEM 

Sosten^r,  inf.  ra.,  to  sustain,  to 
support,  lo  maintain. 

Sostenido-a,  part.^  sustained,  main- 
tained. 

S6y,  F.  setf  ind.  pres.  1  5.,  I  am. 

Spartano,  n.prop.,  Spartan. 

Su,  pron,  poss.f  its,  his,  her,  their, 
your. 

S.uavemente,  adv.,  gently,  sweetly, 
softly,  mildly. 

Siibdito,  nm.,  subject. 

Sublime,  adj.,  sublime,  grand. 

Suceder,  irif.  vn.,  to  succeed,  to  hap- 
pen. 

Suceso,  nm.j  success,  event. 

SucesOr,  nm.,  successor. 

Su^lo,  Tim.,  soil,  ground,  floor. 

Sueno,  nm.,  sleep,  dream. 

Su^rte,  nf.,  lot,  fate. 


TES 

Sufici^nte,  adj.,  sufficient,  enough, 
able. 

Sufrir,  inf.  va.,  to  suffer,  to  bear. 

Sujetar,  inf.  va.,  to  subject,  to  re- 
duce. 

Sumldo-a,  par/.,  plunged,  swallow- 
ed up,  absorbed. 

Sumir,  inf.  va.,  to  be  swallowed  up. 

Superficial,  adj.,  superficial,  shal- 
low. 

Superior,  adj.,  superior,  higher. 

Suponer,  irif.  va.,  to  suppose,  to 
imagine. 

Sus,  pron.  pass.,  his,  her,  its,  their, 
your. 

Susceptible,  adj.,  susceptible. 

Siisto,  nm.,  fright,  terror. 

Siiyo-a,  pron.poss.,  his,  hers,  theirs, 
yours. 


Tal,  adj.,  such,  similar,  equal.  TaL 
i?ez,  perhaps.  ^Qwc/oZ?  howdo 
you  like  it  1  what  sort  ? 

Tal^nto,  nm.,  talents,  genius,  abili- 
ty. 

Tamaiio-a,  adj.,  sizable,  so  great, 
such  a  kind  of. 

Tambien,  adv.,  also,  likewise. 

Tan,  adv.,  as,  so,  as  much. 

Tanto-a,  adj.,  so  much,  as  much, 
so ;  tantos-as,  so  many,  as  many. 

Tapa,  nf.,  lid,  cover. 

Tardaba,  F.  tardar,  ind.  impf.  3  s., 
delayed,  was  tardy. 

Tardar,  inf.  rn.,  to  delay,  to  put  off, 
to  tarry,  to  be  long  (in  time). 

T^rde,  vf,  afternoon,  evening;  late. 

Te,  pron,  poss.,  thee,  to  .thee.    , 

Teatro,  nm.,  theatre. 

Telegr^fia,  nf,  art  of  telegraphing. 

Telegrafo,  nm.,  telegi*aph. 

Temer,  inf  va,,  to  fear,  to  dread,  to 
refverence. 


Temo,  F.  iemtr,  ind.  pres.  1  «.,  I 

fear. 
TemOr,  nm.,  fear,  terror,  reverence 
Temprano,  ac^'.,  early. 
Tendre,  F.  tener,  ind.  \fut.  1  s.,  I 

shall  have. 
Tendrian,  F.  tener,  suhj.  impf.  3  p., 

they   might   have,   they    would 

have. 
Tenemos,  F.  tener,  ind.  pres.  1  p., 

we  have. 
Tener,  inf  va.,  to  have,  to  possess, 

to  keep,  to  hold. 
Tengamos,  F.  tener,  suhj.  pres.  1  p., 

we  may  have^ 
Tenido,  part.,  had,  held. 
Tentativa,  nf,  attempt,  trial,  essay. 
Termin^do-a,     part.,    terminated, 

closed. 
T^rmino,  nrn.,  termination,  limit, 

term. 
Terreno,  nm.,  ground,  land. 
Te^it),  rcTiu,  treasure. 


392 


VOCABULARY. 


ULT 

Testam^nto,  nm.,  will,  testament. 

Tcstigo,  nm.f  witness,  evidence, 
proof. 

Testimunio,  nm.,  testimony,  wit- 
ness. 

Ti,  pron.  pers.j  thee. 

Ti^mpo,  nm.,  time,  weather. 

Tiene,  F.  tener^  iiid.pres.  3  «.,  has. 

Tidnen,  F.  tener,  ind.  pres.  3  p., 
have,  they  have. 

Tienes,  F.  teneVy  ind.  pres.  2  s., 
thou  hast. 

Ti^rra,  n/*.,  the  earth,  land,  soil, 
country. 

Tirania,  ;i/*.,  t)rranny,  despotism. 

Tirano,  nm.,  tyrant. 

Tirano-a,  adj.^  tyrannical. 

TCca,  F.  tocar,  ind.  pres.  3  s.,  touch- 
es, plays,  he  plays. 

Tocar,  inf.  ra.,  to  touch,  to  feel,  to 
belong  to,  to  play  (on  a  musical 
instrument). 

Todo-a,  pron.  indef.,  all,  every;  ev- 
ery thing. 

Tomando,  ger.^  taking,  assuming. 

To  mar,  inf.  ra.,  to  take,  to  assume, 
to  occupy. 

Tono,  nm.f  tone,  voice ;  tune. 

Toro,  nm.y  bull. 

Torre,  r?/*.,  tower,  steeple,  spire. 

Total,  adj.,  total,  universal. 

Trabajando,  ger.^  laboring,  toiling. 

Trabajo,  nm.,  work,  trouble,  toil. 

Traer,  inf.  ra.,  to  bring,  to  carry,  to 
bear ;  to  wear. 

Tr^gico-a,  adj.,  tragical. 

Traiciun,  ri/*.,  treason,  treachery. 

Traiddr,  nm.  and  adj.,  traitor;  trai- 
torous. 


ULT 

Tranquilizar,  irf.  va.y  to  calm,  to 
tranquilize. 

Tranquilo-a,  adj.j  tranquil,  calm, 
quiet. 

Transcurrldo,  part.,  passed  over. 

Traspasar,  irf.  va.,  to  pierce. 

Trastormar,  i'f.  va.,  to  overthrow, 
to  derange. 

Trata,  F.  iratar,  ind.  pres.  3  «., 
treats ;  airjs  at. 

Tratar,  inf.  va.,  to  treat,  to  intend, 
to  have  intercourse. 

Traves,  nr/i.,  bias,  traverse.  Al 
travesde,  across,  through. 

Trecientos,a£/;.nwm., three  hundred. 

Tr^inta,  adj.  num.,  thirty. 

Tres,  adj.  r,ur,u.y  three. 

Tribu,  nvi.  ui/.,  tribe,  class. 

Tribunal,  ivin.,  tribunal,  court. 

Triste,  adj.,  sad,  melancholy. 

Tristeza,  nf,  sadness,  grief,  sorrow. 

Tridnfo,  nm.,  triumph. 

TrofSo,  nm.,  trophy. 

Trono,  nm.,  throne. 

Tropa,  nf,  troop,  band. 

Truena,  F.  trondr,  ind.  pres.  3  «., 
it  thunders. 

Tru^que,  nm.,  exchange. 

Tii,  pron.  pers.,  thou  (used  by  pa- 
rents in  addressing  children; 
masters,  their  servants ;  and  inti- 
mate friends,  each  other). 

Tu,  pron.  puss.,  thy. 

Tiimba,  nf,  tomb,  sepulchre. 

Tumulo,  nm.,  tomb. 

Turb^r,  inf.  va.,  to  disturb,  to 
trouble. 

Tus,  pron.  poss.,  thy,  your. 

Tiiyo-a,  pron.  poss.,  thy,  thine. 


U. 


U',  conj.,  or,    either  (used  before 

words  beginning  with  o  or  ho). 
U'ltimamente,  adj.,  lastly,  lately. 


U'ltimo-a,  adj.,  last,  final. 
Ultrajado-a,  part.,  outraged,  abun^ 
ed,  offended. 


VOCABULARY. 


393 


VEN 

Un,  art.  or  adj.,  a,  an,  one. 

U'na,  scQ  uno. 

Unanimemente,  adv.^  unanimously. 

U'nen,  F.  unir,  ind.  pres.  3  p., 
unite,  they  join, 

U'nico-a,  adj.,  only,  alone,  sole,  sin- 
gular. 

Unido-a,  pari.,  united,  joined  to- 
gether. 

Union,  n/*.,  union. 


VES 

Unlr,  inf.  va.,  to  unite,  to  join. 
Universal,  adj.,  universal,  general. 
U'no-a,   art.,  adj.  and  pron.  indef., 

a,   an.   one,  any  one.     Uncs-as. 

some. 
Usar,  inf.  va.,  to  use,  to  employ. 
U'so,  nm.,  employment,  usage. 
Usurpar,  inf.  va.,  to  usurp. 
U'til,  adj.,  useful. 
U'va,  nf,  grape. 


V.  (contracted  for  vsted),  your  wor- 
ship,   you.     VV.  {ustedes)  your 

worships,  you. 
Va,  P.  ir,  ind.  pres.  3  s.,  goes. 
Vagar,  inf.  va.,  to  rove,  to  loiter,  to 

play,  to  linger. 
Vale,    F.   valcr,   ind.  pres.   3  s.,  is 

worth,  avails. 
Vale m OS,  F.  valer,  ind.  pres.  3  s.,  we 

have  power. 
Valer,   inf.    vn.,   to   be  worth,    to 

avail,  to  have  power. 
Valor,  nm.,  valor,  courage,  value. 
Vamos,  F.  ir,  imp,  1  p.,  let  us  go, 

come,  come  on. 
Vano-a,  adj.,  vain,  arrogant,  empty. 
Vapor,  nm.,  steam,  steamer. 
Vari^do-a,  adj.,  variegated. 
Vario-a,    adj.,     various,    several, 

changeable. 
Varon,  ?im.,  man,  male. 
Vasallo,  nm.,  vassal,  subject. 
Vayamos,  see  vamos. 
Veces.  see  vez. 

Vecino-a,  adj.,  neighboring,  near. 
Vejez,  nf,  old  age. 
Veinte,  adj.  num.,  twenty. 
V^lo,  nf,  veil,  pretence,  curtain. 
Vemos,  F.  ver,  ind.  pres.  1  p.,  we 

see. 
Ven,  F.  venir,  ind.  pres.  2  s.,  come 

thou,  come. 


V^na,  7if.,  vein,  artery. 

V^nce,   F.  veneer,  ind.  pres.  3  «., 

conquers. 
Vendando,  ger.,  bandaging,  tying  a 

bandage  around. 
Vendido,  part.,  sold. 
Veneracion,  rf.,  veneration,  respect. 
Venerar,  in/*,  va.,  to  venerate,  to  re- 
spect. 
Veng^nza,  nf,  revenge,  vengeance. 
Venidero-a,  adj.,  coming,  future. 
Venldo,  part.,  come,  arrived. 
Venir,  inf.  vn.,  to  come,  to  arrive ; 

to  happen. 
Ventiira,  rf.,  fortune,  success,  gooo 

luck. 
Ventur6so-a,  adj.,  fortunate,  happy, 

successful. 
Veo,  F,  ver,  ind.  pres.  1  s.,  I  see. 
Verano,  nm.,  summer. 
Veras,  F.  ver,  ind.  Ifut.  2  s.,  thou 

wilt  see. 
Verdaderamente,  adv.,  truly,  really. 
Verdadero-a,  adj.,  true,  real,  sincere. 
Verde,  adj.,  green. 
Veremos,  F.  r<r,  ind.  Ifut.  1  p.,  wo 

shall  see. 
Vergiienza,  iif.,  shame;  bashfulness. 
V^rja,  nf,  a  grate,  a  grated  window 
Vdrso,  nm.,  verse. 
Vertido-a,  part.,  spilled,  sn^d. 
Vestldo,  71771.,  dress,  coat  suit. 


394 


roGABULARy. 


ZAP 

Veter^nOj  rmi.j  veteran. 

Vez,  vf.,  time.     Tal  vez,  perhaps. 

Ep.  vez  de,  instead  of. 
Viage,  nm.)  journey,  voyage. 
Viajando,  ger.,  travelling. 
Viajar,  inj".  va.,  to  travel,  to  journey. 
Viaje,  see  viage. 

Viajero,  nm.,  traveller;  passenger. 
Vicio,  nm.j  vice,  wickedness. 
Vicioso-a,  adj.,  vicious. 
Vicisitiidj  nf.,  vicissitude,  change. 
Victoria,  nf.,  victory,  triumph. 
Vida,   nf.,  life,  livelihood. 
Viendo,  ger.,  seeing. 
Viento,  nm.,  wind. 
Vil,  adj.,  vile,  mean,  base. 
Villano,  nm.,  a  rustic,  villain. 
Vinculo,  nm.,  chain,  link. 
Vina,  nf.,  vineyard ;  vine. 


ZUR 

Vio,  F.  rcr,  ind.  per/,  def.  3  s.,  saw, 
he  or  she  saw. 

Virtild,  nf.,  virtue ;  rectitude. 

Virtuuso-a,  adj.,  virtuous.  ^ 

Visita,  nf,  visit. 

Vista,  nf,  sight,  appearance,  pres- 
ence. 

Visto-a,  part.,  seen. 

Viveres,  nm.  pi,  provisions,  sup- 
plies. 

Vivir,  inf.  vn.,  to  hve. 

Vivo-a,  adj.,  alive,  lively,  living. 

Volv^r,  inf.  va.,  to  return,  to  turn. 

Vos,  pron.  pers.,  ye,  you. 

Vosotros,  pron.  pers.,  ye,  you. 

Voto,  nm.,  vote,  vow. 

Voz,  nf,  voice,  word. 

Vu^lta,  nf.,  turn,  return. 

Vu6stro-a,  pron.  poss.,  your,  yours. 


Y,  conj.,  and. 

Va,  adv.,  already,  now. 

Vac^r,  inf.  vn.,  to  lie,  to  repose. 

Vanki,  nm.,  Yankee. 


y^rba,  nf,  grass,  herb. 
Yo,  pron.  pers.,  I. 
YiigOj  nm.,  yoke. 


Zapat^ro,  nm,,  shoemakei. 
Zap^to,  nm.,  shoe. 


I  Zurlta,  n.  prop.,  Zurita. 


A  FEW  MODELS  OF  ORDINARY  CORRESPONDENCE. 


Esqudas  clc  convite. 

El  senor  y  la  senora  Rayner  pre- 
sentan  sus  respetos  al  seiior  y  a  Ja 
senora  Gtuesada,  y  los  suplican  que 
les  hagan  el  honor  de  ir  d  comer  con 
ellos  el  jueves  d  las  seis. 

Martes,  Mayo  10  de  1848. 

Respuesta. 
El  seiior  y  la  senora  Q,uesada  se 
apresuraran  a  acudir  al  amable  con- 
vite del  senor  y  la  senora  Rayner  y 
les  presantan  sus  respetuosos  com- 
plidos. 

El  senor  Gomez  ruega  al  senor 
Barte  que  le  haga  el  honor  de  favor- 
ecerle  con  su  presencia,  el  liines  por 
la  noche,  25  de  enero. 

Rehusar  un  convite. 
El  seiior  Blanco  estd  comprome- 
tido  hace  muchos  dias  para  el 
miercoles,  y  suplica  al  seiior  Panza 
que  le  dispense,  y  no  dude  de  que  lo 
siente  mucho. 

Propuesta  para  una  correspon- 

dencia. 

NiTEVA-YoRK,  31  de  Mayo  de  1849. 

5EN0R  Don  Jose  Campo,  ) 

Vera-Cruz.  S 

Muy  seiior  mio ;  deseando  esta- 

olecer  en  esa  ciudad  una  corrcspon- 

dencia   segura    con    un  sujeto  de 

probidad  para  las  varias  comisiones 

y  encargos,  que  puedan  ocurrirme 

en  los  asuntos  de  mi  comercio,  c 

informado  de  las  circumstancias  y 

calidades  que  concurren  en  V.,  me 

tomo  la  libertad  de  suplicarle  se  sir- 

va  aeeptar  el  eocargo  de  correspon- 


Cards  of  invitation. 

Mr.  and  Mrs.  Rayner  present 
their  compliments  to  Mr.  and  Mrs, 
Q,uesada,  and  request  the  honor  of 
their  company  to  dinner  on  Thurs- 
day, at  six  o'clock. 

Tuesday,  May  10th,  1848. 

Reply. 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  Quesada   present 
their  respects  to  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Ray- 
ner, and  will  not  fail  to  accept  their 
kind  invitation. 


Mr.  Gomez  requests  the  favor  ol 
Mr.  Barte's  company  on  Monday 
evening,  the  25th  of  January. 

Declining  an  invitation. 
Mr.  Blanco's  compliments  to  Mr. 
Panza,  and  is  very  sorry  that  a  pre- 
vious engagement  for  Wednesday 
will  prevent  his  having  the  honoi 
of  waiting  upon  him  that  day. 

Proposal  for  a  correspondence. 
New  York,  May  31st,  1848. 
Sir: 

Being  desirous  of  establishing  in 
your  city  a  regular  correspondence 
with  a  person  of  probity,  for  the 
various  commissions  which  may 
occur  in  the  transaction  of  my 
business,  and  having  heard  of  your 
respectable  standing  and  qualifica- 
tions, I  take  the  liberty  of  request- 
ing you  to  please  accept  the  offer  of 
being  my  correspondent,  and  advise 
me  of  your  dotermin-ition,  that  1 
may  proceed  accordingly. 


/ 


RETURN     CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 

TO— ^     202  Main  Library 

LOAN  PERIOD  1 
HOME  USE 

2                      : 

3 

4 

5                               ( 

b 

AL^|S»|ftm>%!lfi^y||>„^^||  7  ?A\S                ,0„  ,0  DUE  DATE 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 

AUTO.  DISC 

» 

UUL  Zl  B9 

} 

"a^h    t     J    ^nn 

fX               "^ 

5hP  1 4  TDD 

I 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELE 
FORM  NO.  DD6,  60m,  1/83          BERKELEY,  CA  94720 

a 


m  0C990 
U.C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


CDD332SaMa 


968309 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


m 


iN^ 


^ 


:m 


•^•■Wk?*/ 


mr 


.'5i 


^^.i 


iri 


\MtM 


